Loading...
BEACH LIFEGUARD STATION REMODEL - 10-0042-PRClearwater PARKS & RECREATION DEPARTMENT CITY & ARCHITECT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR BEACH LIFEGUARD STATION REMODEL CONTRACT # 10-0042-PR 180 GULFVIEW BLVD. Clearwater, Florida 33767 JULY 30, 2010 - ADDENDUM NO. I DATED: August 23, 2010 TO THE DRAWINGS AND PROJECT MANUAL FOR: ' CITY OF CLEARWATER PROJECT: Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel PROJECT NO. 10-0042-PR DATED: July 30, 2010 PREPARED BY: PARKS AND RECREATION DEPARTMENT FOWLER ASSOCIATE ARCHITECTS, INC 100 S. MYRTLE AVE. 1421 COURT STREET 1 CLEARWATER, FLORIDA 3375 CLEARWATER, FLORIDA 33756 PHONE: 727-562-4856 PHONE: 727-449-2021 FAX: 727-5624825 FAX: 727447-5339 ' THIS ADDENDUM NO. 1 ISSUED TO CLARIFY, DRAWING SHEETS, SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND QUESTIONS FROM PROSPECTIVE BIDDERS FOR MANDALAY PARK RESTROOM REPLACEMENT- PROJECT NO. 10-0042-PR OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR THIS WORK, THIS ADDENDUM CONSTITUTES A PART OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF THIS ADDENDUM ON THE PROPOSAL FORM. ' PART 1 PROJECT MANUAL ' Item No. 1: Revised Drawings -- 5 sheets 24"x36" 1. Sheet I of 2 - Site Improvement Plan 2. SDA.1 - Site Plan 3. A-1.2 - Clg. Plans & Interior Elevations 4. A-2.1 Exterior Elevations 5. M- 1.1 - 2"d & 3rd Floor Mechanical Plan Item No. 2: Technical Specifications & Contract Documents 1. Revised scope of work dated August 23, 2010 - 6 pages 2. IRONMAN -Venue Map I page 3. Bidders proposal sheet page 14 - I page END OF ADDENDUM NO. 1 1 i 1 u 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications 1 SCOPE OF WORK 1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION ' Project Name: August 23, 2010 - ADDENDUM NO. 1 - Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel Project Number: 10-0042-PR Scope of Work: 1. Contractor shall collect Building Permit no. BCP-2010-07481, Clearing Grubbing Permit and Tree Removal Permit from the Building Dept. at the Development Services 2°d Floor of the Municipal Service Building - 100 South Myrtle Ave. after he has installed his silt fence in the contractor's lay down yard and temporary ' construction fences has been installed. There is no fee for these permits. 2. Tentative Dates for Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel - Project No. 10-0042- PR a. Monday, August 16, 2010 - Bid Package Available To Contractors b. 8:00 AM, Thursday, August 26, 2010 - Mandatory Pre-Bid Conference, Clearwater Beach Library & ' Recreation Center, 69 Bay Esplanade, Clearwater Florida c. 12:00 (Noon) Friday, September 3, 2010 - Last Day for Questions Submitted in Writing Only - Attention: Leroy Chin, e-mail: leroy.chin@myclearwater.com, Fax: 727-562-4825, U. S. Postal Service ' Parks & Recreation Dept. P. O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758-4748, No Verbal Questions Asked and no Verbal Answers Will Be Given d. Thursday, August 26, 2010 - Last Day to Submit Prequalifcation Package, Qualification Package ' included at the end of the City's Technical Specification section e. Monday, September 6, 2010 - Last Day Sale of Bid Package f. 1:30 PM, Thursday, September 9, 2010 - Bid Opening to George McKibben - Purchasing Office 3`4 ' Floor, Municipal Service Building- 100 S. Myrtle Ave., Clearwater, Florida 33756 g. Thursday, October 7, 2010 - Award Contract By City of Clearwater City Council h. Friday, October 8, 2010 -- Contractor Awarded Project to Collect Contracts for Execution collected and Returned to Engineering Dept. within 10 Days 2nd Floor, Municipal Service Building - 100 S. Myrtle ' Ave., Clearwater, Florida, 33756 i. Friday October 8, 2010 - Execution of Purchase Order - Parks & Recreation Dept. j. Wednesday, 8:00 AM, October 13, 2010 - Pre-Construction Meeting, Clearwater Beach Library & ' Recreation Center, 69 Bay Esplanade, Clearwater Florida k. Monday, October 18, 2010, Notice to Proceed to General Contractor - 120 Consecutive Calendar Day to Complete the Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel - Project No. 10-0042-PR 1. Wednesday, February 16, 2010, Completion of Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel - Project No. 10-0042- PR 3. The contactor shall secure the site at all times and provide closed sidewalk barricades and route pedestrian traffic ' from sidewalks along Gulf view Blvd. on to the Beach Walk Trail. The contractor shall maintain these sign during the duration of the contact period of the project. 4. The contractor shall provide MOT as required during the utilization of the contractors lay down yard and the work in progress at the Beach Lifeguard Station. At the preconstruction conference the contractor shall provide a ' preliminary plan as to be daily maintenance of traffic during the construction of the project. This MOT may need modifications as the project progress and shall be coordinated with the delivery of materials to the project site. 5. Daily activity of the public will be on going surrounding the Beach Lifeguard Station property and the contractor and his employees & subcontractor shall use extreme caution for the safety and welfare of the public. 6. Pier 60 Parking is public parking and the contractor is not allowed to utilize this parking lot for parking his construction vehicles, employee parking, sub-contractor's/employee parking or his construction equipment. Nor is he allowed to block access to this parking lot. The contractor or his employee parks in the parking lot without ' paying the fee for the parking ticket placed on the dash of the vehicle will be ticketed. There will be no waiver of the parking ticket by the Owner or the Parking the Division. The equipment parking and employee parking shall ' be within the contractor's designated lay down area. ' ADDENDUM 1 SCOPE SectionlV.doc Page I of 126 ADDENDUM NO. 1 - 8/20/2010 1 1 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications 7. The general contractor shall coordinate his deliveries of materials to the site before 7:00 AM - 10 AM, to minimize the disruption of the parking lot. The contractor shall not block of the drive aisles of the parking lot at anytime during the construction period of this project 8. The equipment and materials stated on the drawings are the materials and the equipment expected to be utilized on this Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel and shall take precedence over material vendor outlined in the technical specification as acceptable vendors. It is the intent of the owner the materials stated on the contract drawings are the materials to be utilized on this project unless approved directly by the owner in the submittal process. No substitutions will be allowed without owner's approval through the submittal process and shall be bought to his attention by the contractor requesting the substitution. 9. The building construction is located on the coastal zone of the Gulf of Mexico, the contractor shall make provisions in his contract to implement the works for install stainless steel hardware for all items which may be exposed to the salt air includes but not limited to truss plates, Simpson ties, nuts, bolts, washers, screws, etc...., if they are not available the shall have heavy duty galvanization. Minimum grade of stainless steel shall be 304 preferred 316 grade stainless steel. If the drawings or specification request galvanization the Owner's intent is for the General Contractor to have included in his pricing for this contract to utilized stainless steel connection components. At the pre-construction meeting the General Contractor shall provide a list of connection components which are not available in stainless steel for verification by the Architect and the Owner. 10. Any items not included in the listed in bill of quantities of the contract documents for the Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel shall have been included cost for those items not listed somewhere in the pricing of the General Contractor proposal to construct this facility. No additional funds will be provides by the Owner for missed items by the General Contractor or his sub-contractors utilized to implement this project. H. All discrepancies between the construction plans and the technical specifications shall be brought to the attention of the Architect and the Owner for clarification in writing prior to the General Contractor in submitting his bid for this project. After award of the contract discrepancies brought to the attention to the Owner or Architect the most stringent of the discrepancy shall be utilized in the implementation of the Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel and no additional compensation will be provided by the Owner. 12. Asbestos survey was conducted for the existing Beach Lifeguard Station and no asbestos was found in the building the contractor shall give ten (10) day notice to the Pinellas County Air Quality Environmental Protection Agency prior to any demolition work of the structure. Documentation to the City of Clearwater - Building Dept. the notification was sent to Pinellas County Air Quality Department by providing a copy of the invoice when collecting the building permit. 13. The contractor shall call in for location for underground utilities of the various agencies prior to any excavations of the site. The utility boxes on the east side of the building show multiple existing utilities including a fiber optic line. The contractor shall provide hand exploratory excavation identifying location of utilities prior to utilization of machinery for excavations. Fiber optic line shall be located by hand digging prior to any excavation with machinery to prevent damage to fiber optic lines during the contract period of the project. Contractor may request City of Clearwater Parking Division for assistance in locating this fiber optic line. 14. Upon removal of the concrete sidewalk and slabs around the beach lifeguard building silt fence shall be install immediately and no later than 10 hours after concrete removal to prevent silt from going down strearn during a possible storm event. All stilt fencing shall be maintained during the contract period of this project. 15. The contractor will be required to restore any disrupted areas of the within the limits of work area and any disturbed areas outside of the limits of work areas by the General Contractor of this project. 16. The contractor of this project is required to provide relocation of palms and tree on this project and shall he coordinated with the Parks & Beautification Maintenance Supervisor. The irrigation system repairs and sleeves required shall extend beneath the new constructed new concrete slabs. The contractor shall coordinate this work for inspection with the city's irrigation technician for acceptance of this work and irrigation system operates correctly prior to pouring the new concrete slabs. 17. The successful bidder shall be required to provide a detailed schedule of value for his awarded contact amount and submitted at the pre-construction meeting. This schedule of value shall be utilized as the basis of his application of payment for the project. The contractor shall utilize the standard AIA form in making his application for payment on or prior to the 25 h of every month. This application shall be submitted to the Architect for his review and approval prior to forwarding on to the owner for payment. The payment request shall be accompanied with a lean wavier with ADDENDUM 1 SCOPE SectionIV.doc Page 2 of 126 ADDENDUM NO. 1 - 8/20/2010 1 Section IV -Technical Specifications each payment. Upon final payment request the contractor shall provide with his invoice the certificate of final payment. 18. The successful bidder shall be required to provide a detailed construction schedule outlining all work and minor and major milestones for the project and shown long lead items of materials delivery. This schedule shall be updated at each progress meeting. This schedule shall also be providing at the pre-construction meeting as well as a list of sub- contractors with contact person, addresses, telephone/cell/fax numbers, and e-mail addresses. 19. The successful bidder shall be required to provide a list of shop drawings as well as list of material submittals for review by the Architect and this list shall be provided at the pre-construction meeting for approval by the Architect as the required submittal list. 20. The owner will require 3 copies of the each shop drawing and material submittal and shall be maintained by the contractor in separate file boxes by specification sections in file folders clearly marked item contained in the file folder. These documents shall be turn over to the owner at the completion of the project as part of the close out materials. Also include a list of sub-contractors, material vendors and clearly identify as to discipline with contact information such as contact person, addresses, telephone/cell/fax numbers, and a-mail addresses. 21. Submittals shall be sent directly to the Architect for his review and one copy sent to the owner project manager for review at the same time they are sent to the architect. Total number of submittals will be determined at the pre- construction meeting. 22. The contractor shall note the contract duration is 120 calendar days for construction of this project from notice to proceed. No additional days will be allowed. 23. Progress meeting will be required during the duration of the project and shall be every two weeks and dates shall be determined at the pre-construction meeting. 24. The General Contractor will be required to provide his own survey layout and as-built drawings. The General Contractor shall stake out the location of the building and provide a tie in survey to the building department prior to pouring any concrete or installation of the pilings. 25. All existing utilities on the east face of the exiting beach lifeguard building shall be relocate off the east wall and relocated elsewhere see architectural drawing for their relocations. It is the intent of the owner to have the east face view from Gulfview Blvd. free of any utilities. 26. All new concrete shall match existing in texture and color. Mock up samples 2'x2' shall be provide to the Architect and Owner for approval. 27. The Owner's vendors will perform the work for installation of the wiring and hardware for fire alarm system, security system, telephone, data, cable television, the contractor of this project shall provide all junction boxes & raceways from the junction boxes and stub raceways above the ceiling and provide penetrations through walls to locations where the fire alarm system, security system, telephone, data and cable television services are located. The wiring for the telephone, data, and cable television will be free wired and hung from `J' hooks above the ceiling by the city's vendor for this service. The contractor shall coordinate with the Owner to schedule the city vendors to install the low voltage wiring and hardware for the systems previously outlined in note number 28. 28. Security system is provided in the closet for parking & traffic equipment. Contractor to provide raceway to door and '/," conduit to the telephone room closet. Touch panel shall be located on the east wall, south of the entry door to room 18" from door jamb and mounted 60" above finish floor elevation. Security touch panel for lifeguard station shall be located in the north entry stairwell on west wall 24" from northwest corner 60" above finish floor elevation of concrete slab. Contractor shall provide conduit from this location to telephone panel board. Contractor shall provide all raceways and 'J' boxes to all doors and windows and coordinate locations of glass breaks with the owner's security vendor. Note all conduits shall within the wall construction and no exposed conduits will be allowed to be on finished wall surfaces. 29. Contractor shall provide commodes plumbing fixtures be Toto brand including flushing hardware for commode material submittal shall be sent to Building & Maintenance Division for review and approval. All faucets shall be automatic metered push button type preferred Moen brand, contractor shall submit samples for approval by Building & Maintenance Division. 30. All Steel Case metal doors shall be prefinished from the manufacture and a factory Ash laminate finish on the metal doors & door jambs to be heavy duty galvanization and primed finished from the factory ready for final ADDENDUM 1 SCOPE SectionlV.doc Page 3 of 126 ADDENDUM NO. 1 - 8/20/2010 1 ' Section IV - Technical Specifications paint applications. All metal jambs shall be filled flush with concrete at completion of installation. No voids will be allowed within the jambs. 31. All construction cores for doors provided by the contractor during the construction period. All final cores and padlocks keyed to City's BEST Lock master keying system, all cores and padlocks/cores to be provided by the ' contractor and installed by the city, contract person: Dale Fitzpatrick, General Services - Building & Maintenance Division, 100 Grand Ave., Clearwater, FL 33765, telephone no. 727-562-4710 ext. 2815, fax no. 727-562-4894 ' 32. All furnishings such as washing machine, refrigerator, microwave, flat screen televisions will be provide by the owner and installed by the contactor. 33. Contractor shall provide filter and plumbing for ice maker for the refrigerator provided by the owner and installed by the contractor. 34. 3/4" plywood backing for flat screen televisions shall be full length of wall on second floor of washer/dryer closet above shelving by 12" and 24" in height cut `J' boxes around plywood. Flat screen television mounted 72" from finish floor provide 1/4" plywood backing beginning at 60" to 84" finish floor 48" wide, cut `J' boxes centered in ' plywood. 35. Contractor shall install flush mounted Knox Box provided by the owner mounted 60-inches above the finished concrete slab grade on the north elevation, 18" east of the entry doorjamb of the stair well. ' 36. The contractor shall provide and use 5/8" cabinet grade plywood for all millwork work with plastic laminate including: shelving, drawers, doors, counter tops for this project no substitutions will be allow with press board or other similar like materials will be rejected. 37. All exterior light fixtures on outside of building on south, west and north side of the building shall be on a timer for the owner to adjust these lights to be turned off during turtle nesting season. The location of the timer shall be located in the electrical closet. Lights on the exterior of building on east side of building shall be on a photo cell. The contractor shall note the light fixtures on the exterior of the building shall be constructed of material that will not be corrosive to the salt air environment or shall be sealed to provide longevity of the coastal environment and submittal of these fixtures shall be brought directly to the owner's approval in the submittal process. These exterior fixtures shall have bug shields on the fixtures sealed where insects cannot enter the ' lighting fixtures. 38. The contractor shall provide sealed type light fixtures on the first floor since this area will be exposed to moisture. The contractor shall provide these fixtures in the submittal process and send to the attention of Building & Maintenance Division for their review and approval. 39. All raceways shall be PVC conduits and not galvanized steel on this project. 40. All exterior outlets shall be GFI and enclosure shall be aluminum type and lockable by key or small padlock, and submitted to the Owner for approval, plastic dome type will not be acceptable. 41. All hose bibs shall be vandal proof type bronze or stainless steel and keyed the same, submit to Owner for approval. 42. Contractor shall provide only Square `D' as manufacture of electrical switch gear and send material submittal to Building & Maintenance Division for review and approval. 43. All electrical duplex, light switch, blank junction boxes, television, telephone, data, covers shall be 316 stainless steel. 44. Contractor shall provide electrical heaters to be single phase unit, contractor shall provide material submittal for review and approval by the Building & Maintenance Division. 45. All return grills of the air conditioning system shall be the type which can a receive filter. Upon installation of air condition return grills contractor shall install return filters immediately to prevent dust collecting dust in the ducking system. These filters shall be changed once a month if they are operated during the construction period. Upon final walk through all filters of the air conditioning system shall be changed out, which includes all returns, and the filters of the air conditioning air handlers. Should the contractor fail to install these filters return grills the contractor will be required to clean all ducts prior to handing over the project to the Owner. No additional fund will be provided by the Owner for failure to follow these instructions. All air conditioning air intakes shall be type which can receive a filter and shall have filters installed immediately upon installation of the air intake grill. 46. Contractor shall provide all restroom and shower rooms with exhaust fans a minimum of 150 c. f. m. and material submittal to be reviewed and approval by the Building & Maintenance Division. All duct work for ' ADDENDUM 1 SCOPE SeetionlV,doc Page 4 of 126 ADDENDUM NO. 1 - 8/20/2010 t Section IV - Technical Specifications exhaust fan shall be ridged aluminum pipe if galvanized is utilized provide coating to prevent corrosion for the costal environment. These coatings galvanized pipe shall be shown to the Owner prior to installation. It shall be noted should the Owner or Building & Maintenance observe during any wall through galvanized piping utilized without coating shall removed and replaced at the contractor's expense and correct material installed. ' 47. Contractor shall provide a coating to prevent corrosion from the coastal environment for all air conditioning condenser units including covers and panels provide material submittal to be reviewed and approved by the Building & Maintenance Division. ' 48. Contractor shall provide cleanouts below all lavatories and sinks in the sanitary lines and in the 4" sanitary lines. Contractor shall confirm location of these clean outs by providing shop drawing submittal for approval. 49. Contractor shall provide a piece of fire retired 3/4" plywood panel in the closet no. 1 for data, telephone, and cable television demarks. 4-1.5-inch conduits as shall be ran to the exterior of the building on the southeast corner for ' service for Verizon, Bright House, and other vendors to the fire retired 3/4" plywood panel. A I" conduit from the parking lot equipment closet to the southeast corner of the roof eave antenna shall also be provide by the contractor. 50. Two part epoxy fade proof paint contractor to utilize is http://www.inemec.com/; Series 66 HI-BUILD EPOXOLINE (primer) Series 1070-18MT FLUORONAR (topcoat) for all exterior metal painting, contractor to provide sample to the owner for color selections and mock up sample of application to metal colors to the Owner & Architect for approval. No ' other paint manufacture substitution will be allowed. Two coat applications of primer and topcoat shall be applied to all exterior metal surfaces. 51. The ADA chair lift and all associated items to make this system operational is an alternate line item and all associated cost shall be included in the item during the biding process. The contractor shall include in his bid for ' incorporating a one year maintenance agreement on the wheelchair lift for the city. The date of the one year maintenance agreement by the contractor shall begin upon final handover of the project and shall begin upon the date of certificate of occupancy is provided to the owner- 52, Contractor will be required to coordinate with the Owner's surveyor whom will provide the Elevation Certificate for FEMA. The contractor shall coordinate two site visits by the Owner's surveyor into his construction schedule at the following times: after pouring ground floor concrete slab and substantial completion of the project. 53. The contractor shall note the parking lot attendant building has electrical, telephone, and security system from the ' beach lifeguard station. The contractor shall make provisions to maintain the all system is operational at final handover of the project to the owner of this parking lot attendant building. 54. City will make the application for the sign permit the contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the permit from the ' Building Dept. prior to installations and call in for final to close out the permit. 55. Contractor into install concrete walkway slabs no greater than 5% slope and drain towards trench drain. Adjust adjacent landscape beds as necessary to prevent abrupt grades and slope towards trench drain. Shower area shall ' slope away from building. Contractor shall note exterior portion concrete footing exterior of building is the finish grade of walkways and shall address texture and color to match existing Beach Walk paving. Trench drain shall have stainless steel grate. 56. The contractor shall note the contractor's lay down area will be utilized by the Ironman event this year, Gulfview ' Blvd. will be closed during setup and during the event. The contractor will be able to continue the construction during the setup and will not be able to work on event day. The contractor will be able to utilized the contractor's lay down area again after November 15. Listed below is Ironman Event schedule: • Monday, November 8- Begin set-up • Tuesday, November 9- S. Gulfview closes 8:00 am • Start using Pier 60 parking lot to set up transition ' • Wednesday, November 10- Friday, November 11- Increasingly more activity in area with set up and athletes arriving • Saturday, November 13- Race Day • Sunday, November 14- Teardown of equipment in Pier 60 parking lot should be complete and will be reopened midday • Monday, November 15- Suites are craned out and S. Gulfview reopens -2:00 pm The contractor shall have the lay area cleared of any construction materials equipment and other related construction items ' prior to the Ironman event and have the site cleared by Friday, November 5. A copy of the lronman Venue is attached in the contract documents for the contractor's review. 57. The owner will provide soap dispensers, multiple toilet dispensers and paper towel dispensers for the contractor to install and not as called out on drawing A-1.2. Contractor to provide and install curtain rod in shower rooms, owner to provide ADDENDUM I SCOPE SectionlV.doc Page 5 of 126 ADDENDUM NO. I - 8/20/2010 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications curtains. Contractor to provide fold down ADA seat for approval by the architect and owner. All shower room walls shall be Dur hock cement board. The contractor shall utilize existing two shower heads installed in the last six months and provide new mixing valves in the two standard shower rooms, ADA shower room provide new Moen Model: 3867BN hand held adjustable ADA shower unit including mixing valve. 58. Twe my stackable lockers will be provided by the owner for the contractor to install. CONTRACT PERIOD: 120 CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS ADDENDUM I SCOPE SectionlV.doc Page 6 of 126 ADDENDUM NO. 1 - 8/2012010 BIDDER'S PROPOSAL - ADDENDUM NO. 1 PROJECT: Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel - Project No. 10-0042-PR BID ITEMS EST UNIT TOTAL QTY UNIT PRICE Architectrual Construction of The Bea Lifeguard Station Remodel. Project No. 10-0042- PR from 2 story to 3 story building and all associated items required per drawings and technical specifications and all other items not included in bill of quantities listed below 1 LS Site Civil Saw cutting, removal of existing concrete slab & dispose off site by the contractor 1,600 S q. Ft. Install temporary construction fencing & silt fencing of the Bleach Lifeguard Station site area/contractor's staging & tem ora la down area 625 LF Removal of existing (6) trees, (5) palms, other shrubs to be determined at the pre-bid meeting, relocated per the direction of the owner in the vicinity of Beach Walk and approximately 1,500 It of existing Lifeguard Bldg. 1 LS Clearing & grubbing includes extending irrigation lines and providing necessary irrigation sleeving for a complete operational irrigation system at the end of the project. Coordinate irrigation work with the Owner's irrigation technician 1 LS Adjust and modify catch basin provide marifi geotech fabric around catch bas in rate during construction period 1 EA Install 12" cast iron storm drain pipe including fittings required 15 LF Install presloped AVO Trench Drain to catch basin include stainless steel drain covers per detail photo 50 LF Provide sidewalk road close sign & project sign (M.O.T.) for duration of project 3 EA Adjust existing valve boxes and cleanouts to proper grades prior to pour new concrete slab g EA Grade site as necessary to match existing grades of: concrete sidewalks, curbs, proposed trench drain, building slab; to install new concrete slab in match Beach Walk of color & texture; provide expansion joints, saw cut contraction joints in matching Beach Wall; install 3,000 PSI/28 days concrete with commercial fiber mesh 2,500 S q. Ft. 1" electrical conduit provide ca ends and place 2 -8 inch 'unction boxes 150 LF 1.5" electrical conduit 150 LF 2" electrical conduit 200 LF 4" electrical conduit 100 LF Restoration of all disturbed areas including contractor's staging and lay down area includes repair of exisiing irrigation system & laying bahia sod as necessary I LS Alternates Alternate 1 - installation of ADA chair lifts and all associated cost of the ADA chair lifts stems 1 LS Sub total of items 1-16 1 L5 10 % CONTINGENCY of Sub-total line 17 1 LS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 TOTAL CONSTRUCTION COSTS (ITEMS 1-16 plus 10% contingency) $ CONTRACTOR: BIDDER'S TOTAL $ (Numbers) BIDDER'S TOTAL $ (Words) THE BIDDER'S TOTAL ABOVE IS HIS TOTAL BID BASED ON HIS UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED. THIS FIGURE IS FOR THE INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF OPENING BIDS. THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TABULATIONS FROM THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE BID. IF THEREIS AN ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER IT SHALL BE CHANGES AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICES SHALL GOVERN. P6r se n y 9 R.h tl # r N ` 4-w H ? \--J mr o ?_ goo ? -MMOM-kli?1 20.60 Crabby Ma I fK ?? ? ? 1 1 ? ? A .. V g ? 1 li r ? WWI I I I,-- Trr AWm h?, _ ? - ? ? III ry ...... ... .W_ ,rl ............... A ? ? 5v°t Yf.7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 BIDDER'S PROPOSAL - ADDENDUM NO. 1 PROJECT: Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel - Project No. 10-0042-PR BID ITEMS EST UNIT TOTAL QTY UNIT PRICE Architectrual Construction o he ach eguard Station Remodel, Project No. 10 0042- PR from 2 story to 3 story building and all associated items required per drawings and technical specifications and all other items not included in bill of quantities listed below 1 LS Site Civil Saw cutting, removal of existing concrete slab & dispose off site by the contractor 1,600 S q. Ft. Install temporary construction fencing & sift fencing of the Bleach Lifeguard Station site area/contractor's staging & lem ora la down area 625 LF Removal of existing (6) trees, (5) palms, other shrubs to be determined at the pre-bid meeting, relocated per the direction of the owner in the vicinity of Beach Walk and approximately 1,500 It of existin Lifeguard Bldg. I LS Clearing & grubbing includes extending irrigation lines and providing necessary irrigation sleeving for a complete operational irrigation system at the end of the project. Coordinate irrigation work with the Owner's irrigation technician 1 LS Adjust and modify catch basin provide marifi geotech fabric around catch bas in rate during construction period 1 EA Install 12" cast iron storm drain pipe including fittings required 15 LF Install presloped AVO Trench Drain to catch basin include stainless steel . drain covers per detail photo 50 LF Provide sidewalk road close sign & project sign (M_O.T.) for duration of project 3 EA Adjust existing valve boxes and cleanouts to proper grades prior to pour new concrete slab 9 EA Grade site as necessary to match existing grades o : concrete sidewalks. curbs, proposed trench drain. building slab; to install new concrete slab in match Beach Walk of color & texture; provide expansion joints, saw cut contraction joints in matching Beach Wall; install 3,000 PSI/28 days concrete with commercial fiber mesh 2,500 . Ft. 1"electrical conduit provide ca ends and lace 2 -8 inch unction boxes 150 LF 1.5" electrical conduit 150 LF 2" electrical conduit 200 LF 4" electrical conduit 100 LF Restoration of all disturbed areas including contractor's staging and lay down area includes repair of exisitng irrigation system & laying bahia sod as ,necessary 1 LS Alternates Alternate 1 - installation of ADA chair lifts and all associated cost of the ADA chair lifts stems 1 LS Sub total of items 1-16 1 LS 10 % CONTINGENCY of Sub-total line 17 1 LS TOTAL CONSTRUCTION COSTS (ITEMS 1-16 plus 10% contingency) $ CONTRACTOR: BIDDER'S TOTAL $ Numbers BIDDER'S TOTAL $ (Words) THE BIDDER'S TOTAL ABOVE IS HIS TOTAL BID BASED ON HIS UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED. THIS FIGURE IS FOR THE INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF OPENING BIDS. THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TABULATIONS FROM THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE BID. IF THEREIS AN ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER IT SHALL BE CHANGES AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICES SHALL GOVERN. 10% contingency shall be utilzed only upon written request by the contractor for additional scope of work not included in the bill of quanitites to the Owner, written approval by the Owner for the additional scope of work in the utilization of the 10% contingency, any funds not utilzed shall be returned to the owner upon close out of the purchase order short. 14 L? [l ADDENDUM NO. 2 DATED: September 1, 2010 TO THE DRAWINGS AND PROJECT MANUAL FOR: CITY OF CLEARWATER PROJECT: Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel PROJECT NO. 10-0042-PR DATED: July 30, 2010 PREPARED BY. PARKS AND RECREATION DEPARTMENT 100 S. MYRTLE AVE. CLEARWATER, FLORIDA 3375 PHONE: 727-5624856 FAX: 727-562-4825 FOWLER ASSOCIATE ARCHITECTS, INC 1421 COURT STREET CLEARWATER, FLORIDA 33756 PHONE: 727-449-2021 FAX: 727-047-5339 THIS ADDENDUM NO.2 ISSUED TO CLARIFY, DRAWING SHEETS, SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND QUESTIONS FROM PROSPECTIVE BIDDERS FOR MANDALAY PARK RESTROOM REPLACEMENT- PROJECT NO. 10-0042-PR OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR THIS WORK, THIS ADDENDUM CONSTITUTES A PART OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF THIS ADDENDUM ON THE PROPOSAL FORM. PART I PROJECT MANUAL Item No. 1: Mandatory Pre-Bid Sign in Sheet 1. Sign in sheet - 2 pages Item No. 2: Pre-bid Conference Minutes 1. Meeting minutes --- 6 pages Item No. 3: Technical Specifications 1. Revised Scope of Work -- 6 pages 2. Section 09900 Painting - 6 Pages 3. Section 09901 - 7 pages 4. Section 14420 Inclined Wheel Chair Platform Lift - I 1 Pages 5. Garvaventa Wheelchair Lifts -- Artira Design & Planning Guide (informational purposes) - 34 Pages 6. Elevation Certificate -- The contractor shall place on his construction schedule for Deuel & Assoc. gather information after the ground floor concrete slab has been poured & at substantial completion of the project. - 4 Pages Item No. 4: Revised Drawings -15 sheets 24"06" 1. Response to Comments/Plan Amendment Application form for Bldg. Permit No. BCP2010-07481 comments have been included for contactor to from the plans examiner and the consultant's responses. This document is included for the contractor to identify the changes to the attached revised drawings requested by the Building Dept. in approval of the Building Permit BCP2010-07481- 6 Pages 2. Sheet CS-I.1 - Cover Sheet 3. Sheet I of 1 -Topographic Survey 4. Sheet I of 2 - Site Improvement Plan 5. Sheet SD-1.1 -Site Plan 6. Sheet A-1.1 Floor Plan & Schedules 7. A-] .3 - Thru Sections & Details 8. Sheet A-1.4 Stair Sections & Details 9. Sheet A-3.1 Underwriters Details 10. Sheet S -1.0 a Structural Specifications 11. Sheet S -1.0 b Structural Specifications 12. Sheet S -LI Foundations & 2ND Floor Framing Plan 13. Sheet S-1.2 3Ro Floor & Roof Framing Plan 14. Sheet M -1.12 ND & 3RD Floor Mechanical Plan 15. Sheet P -1.1 11T & 2ND Floor Plumbing Plan Item No. 5: Questions & Answers 1. No paint specifications were provided with the plan documents. Answer: the Paint specifications are included in Addendum No. 2 2. We are looking for some documentation on the helical piers, i.e., installation torque required, type of helical, angle of installation, load requirements, etc. Answer: the information of the helical piers are included in Addendum No. 2 END OF ADDENDUM NO.2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 w w a Z r d?Q U I f? 0 J ag ? Q ?S wn ? m O O U a? ? fV ?F v r O a; d >, ° o c ate. C7 .. L ?a ^N.2 ?r P ? a + w J N E ?' C . I o N ? ? ? ? a o I " L ? 4 I i J Lid to 14C kc- rA 0tn0 q N v vi M NI n i ' C ' ..zi Cp V MID r q C3 i _ 'j? ?r- Ci CS ? C5 ? •=G •CG CC R ?C. ??r cz ' b •cr. G p O yq C4 C yc '° O ? ye O ? ;? 4 ? a! O ? ? cc O ? p{ r. cc O ? ? A ? p{ O O ? ?r. '? a .?rac? ?? ?wc? a .?Far? ? E Q ? n ? ?' ? 7J ?`? c7 v cs 00 o ??V E °?? y1 d n. 41 Q m 3 N a0i -w 0 j e:4 _ 1 d v ? L Q r C l ? I? 4• G 2 Q 7_ ?` 7 V 1? r J s ' i ' d IJ . `?d a N - . f rw yI r" " f ;•? L V (? of ' Y , :( -V7 y ?D v1 ?i 17 ?'; ?~ `?'?& r ?; J up I U Ci i ? •? I 42 $ c 1 ?{1?.u'??•? a•a `tip vgO _x0 a ?VI U CA 10 1 -z; go Q 1 (? J j `Il (n ' M ? V ?1 rry 1 ?e;` 7 % d \n V? p T ?r 1 n? ?, N U zw ?•=:? ci ei = ?•'"r r. c: r a ' o x o >e o x o c ye o ie o x c :e a `? a r s cc A ca . .c o .>~ I w cc r a.a.a.WrswalW[:w^?Wf??IWc.,:-I GUIs,W?.a.Wf??-IWG,.a,r??..?fs]fxl V La N? a v ? ? ? ? •?a ? ?, aC i ? 0 L9 am 06 "^4 a 7 I r .2 0 bA 1 a M~ U = I ''? i ?? ?I 4?-£ y=ew N ,J J T V ) t`? d N ?rl ' ? ? C ? } - rid ? ? r:; i?! -_ -f. ? .r:' - .:. ?'`r? fC•.-- c ^i t5 1 ' PRE-BID CONFERENCE MINUTES CITY OF CLEARWATER BEACH LIFEGUARD STATION REMODEL, PROJECT NO. 10-0042-PR THURSDAY, AUGUST 26, 2010 -- 8:00 AM CLEARWATER REACH LIBRARY & RECREATION CENTER 69 BAY ESPLANADE, CLEARWATER FLORIDA 1. Sign in Sheet ' 2. Introduction a) Consultant- Fowler Associate Architects -Steve Fowler ' b) Owner -Parks & Recreation Department -Leroy Chin, Park. Planning & Project Manager 3. This pre-bid meeting shall be considered as part of the contract documents of the Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel- Project No. 10-0042-PR. ~ ' 4. Copies of the Contract Documents and Plans for this Project are available for inspection and/or purchase by prospective bidders at the City ofClearwater's Plan Room - website address: %vw?v.mvClearwater.corn/cityprojects or contact Jiffy ' Reprographics phone 727-422-7125 5. All Contractors bidding this project most be prequalified by the Engineering Department as a Commercial Building Contractor. Contractors shall confirm their prequalification is current. Pre-qualifications expire after 3 years since last renewal date. Contractors may contact Alice Eckman 727-562-4509 to confirm their prequalification is current and active. Contractors wanting to pre-qualify to bid this project must do so two (2) weeks/ten (10) workdays prior to the bid ' opening date. Contractors must be pre-qualified on or before August 26, 2010. Qualification Applications of Prospective Bidders were provided to bidders attending the Pre-Bid Conference. ' 6. Scope of Work: r.?. F,n... ?... ...t.. .3.... . fl F1 Project Name: ADDENDUM NO. I - Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel Project Number: 10-0042-PR Scope of Work: A. Contractor shall collect Building Permit no. BCP-2010-07481, Clearing Grubbing Pennit and Tree Removal Permit from the Building Dept. at the Development Services 2"d Floor of the Municipal Service Building - 100 South Myrtle Ave. after he has installed his silt fence in the contractor's lay down yard and temporary construction fences has been installed. There is no fee for these permits. B. Tentative Dates for Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel - Project No. 10-0042- PR a. Monday, August 16, 2010 - Bid Package Available To Contractors b. 8:00 AM, Thursday, August 26, 2010 - Mandatory Pre-Bid Conference, Clearwater Beach Library & Recreation Center, 69 Bay Esplanade, Clearwater Florida c. 12:00 (Noon) Friday, September 3, 2010 - Last Day for Questions Submitted in Writing Only - Attention: Leroy Chin, e-mail: leroy.chin garnyclearwater.com. Fax: 727-562-4825, U. S. Postal Service Parks & Recreation Dept. P. O. Box 4748. Clearwater, Florida 33758-4748, No Verbal Questions Asked and no Verbal Answers Will Be Given d. Thursday, August 26, 2010 - Last Day to Submit Prequalitication Package, Qualification Package included at the end of the City's Technical Specification section e. Monday, September 6, 2010 - Last Day Sale of Bid Package f. 1:30 PM, Thursday, September 9, 2010 Bid Opening to George McKibben -Purchasing Office 3'd Floor, Municipal Service Building - 100 S. Myrtle Ave., Clearwater, Florida 33756 g_ Thursday, October 7, 2010 -Award Contract By City of Clearwater City Council h. Friday, October 8, 2010 - Contractor Awarded Project to Collect Contracts for Execution collected and Returned to Engineering Dept. within 10 Days 2nd Floor, Municipal Service Building - 100 S. Myrtle Ave., Clearwater, Florida, 33756 i. Friday October 8, 2010 -- Execution of Purchase Order - Parks & Recreation Dept. 1 1 1 1 J. Wednesday, 8-00 AM, October 13, 2010 - Pre-Construction Meeting, Clearwater Beach Library & Recreation Center, 69 Bay Esplanade, Clearwater Florida k. Monday, October 18, 2010, Notice to Proceed to General Contractor - 120 Consecutive Calendar Day to Complete the Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel - Project No. 10-0042-PR 1. Wednesday, February 16, 2010, Completion of Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel -- Project No. 10-0042-PR C. The contactor shall secure the site at all times and provide closed sidewalk barricades and route pedestrian traffic from sidewalks along Gulf view Blvd. on to the Beach Walk Trail. The contractor shall maintain these sign during the duration of the contact period of the project. D. The contractor shall provide MOT as required during the utilization of the contractors lay down yard and the work in progress at the Beach Lifeguard Station. At the preconstruction conference the contractor shall provide a preliminary plan as to be daily maintenance of traffic during the construction of the project. This MOT may need modifications as the project progress and shall be coordinated with the delivery of materials to the project site. E. Daily activity of the public will be on going surrounding the Beach Lifeguard Station property and the contractor and his employees & subcontractor shall use extreme caution for the safety and welfare of the public. F_ Pier 60 Parking is public parking and the contractor is not allowed to utilize this parking lot for parking his construction vehicles, employee parking, sub-con tractor's/employee parking or his construction equipment. Nor is he allowed to block access to this parking lot. The contractor or his employee parks in the parking lot without paying the fee for the parking ticket placed on the dash of the vehicle will be ticketed. There will be no waiver of the parking ticket by the Owner or the Parking the Division. The equipment parking and employee parking shall be within the contractor's designated lay down area. G. The general contractor shall coordinate his deliveries of materials to the site before 7:00 AM - 10 AM, to minimize the disruption of the parking lot. The contractor shall not block of the drive aisles of the parking lot at anytime during the construction period of this project K The equipment and materials stated on the drawings are the materials and the equipment expected to be utilized on this Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel and shall take precedence over material vendor outlined in the technical specification as acceptable vendors. It is the intent of the owner the materials stated on the contract drawings are the materials to be utilized on this project unless approved directly by the owner in the submittal process. No substitutions will be allowed without owner's approval through the submittal process and shall be bought to his attention by the contractor requesting the substitution. I, The building construction is located on the coastal zone of the Gulf of Mexico, the contractor shall make provisions in his contract to implement the works for install stainless steel hardware for all items which may be exposed to the salt air includes but not limited to truss plates; Simpson ties, nuts, bolts, washers, screws, etc.--., if they are not available the shall have heavy duty galvanization. Minimum grade of stainless steel shall be 304 preferred 316 grade stainless steel. If the drawings or specification request galvanization the Owner's intent is for the General Contractor to have included in his pricing for this contract to utilized stainless steel connection components. At the pre-construction meeting the General Contractor shall provide a list of connection components which are not available in stainless steel for verification by the Architect and the Owner. 7. Any items not included in the listed in bill of quantities of the contract documents for the Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel shall have been included cost for those items not listed somewhere in the pricing of the General. Contractor proposal to construct this facility. No additional funds will be provides by the Owner for missed items by the General Contractor or his sub-contractors utilized to implement this project. K. All discrepancies between the construction plans and the technical specifications shall be brought to the attention of the Architect and the Owner for clarification in writing prior to the General Contractor in submitting his bid for this project. After award of the contract discrepancies brought to the attention to the Owner or Architect the most stringent of the discrepancy shall be utilized in the implementation of the Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel and no additional compensation will be provided by the Owner. L. Asbestos survey was conducted for the existing Beach Lifeguard Station and no asbestos was found in the building the contractor shall give ten (10) day notice to the Pinellas County Air Quality Environmental Protection Agency prior to any demolition work of the structure. Documentation to the City of Clearwater - Building Dept. the notification was sent to Pinellas County Air Quality Department by providing a copy of the invoice when collecting the building permit. M. The contractor shall call in for location for underground utilities of the various agencies prior to any excavations of the site. The utility boxes on the east side of the building show multiple existing utilities including a fiber optic line. The contractor shall provide hand exploratory excavation identifying location of utilities prior to utilization of 1 u 1 machinery for excavations- Fiber optic line shall be located by hand digging prior to any excavation with machinery to prevent damage to fiber optic lines during the contract period of the project. Contractor may request City of Clearwater Parking Division for assistance in locating this fiber optic line. N. Upon removal of the concrete sidewalk and slabs around the beach lifeguard building silt fence shall be install immediately and no later than 10 hours after concrete removal to prevent silt from going down stream during a possible storm event. All stilt fencing shall be maintained during the contract period of this project. O_ The contractor will be required to restore any disrupted areas of the within the limits of work area and any disturbed areas outside of the limits of work areas by the General Contractor of this project. P. The contractor of this project is required to provide relocation of palms and tree on this project and shall be coordinated with the Parks cl? Beautification Maintenance Supervisor. The irrigation system repairs and sleeves required shall extend beneath the new constructed new concrete slabs. The contractor shall coordinate this work for inspection with the city's irrigation technician for acceptance of this work and irrigation system operates con'ectly prior to pouring the new concrete slabs. L. The successful bidder shall be required to provide a detailed schedule of value for his awarded contact amount and submitted at the pre-construction meeting. This schedule of value :hall he utilized as the basis of his application of payment for the project. The contractor shall utilize the standard AIA form in making his application for payment on or prior to the 25"' of every month. This application shall be submitted to the Architect for his review and approval prior to forwarding on to the owner for payment. The payment request shall be accompanied with a lean wavier with each payment. Upon final payment request the contractor shall provide with his invoice the certificate of final payment. R. The successful bidder shall be required to provide a detailed construction schedule outlining all work and minor and major milestones for the project and shown long lead items of materials delivery. This schedule shall be updated at each progress meeting. This schedule shall also be providing at the pre-construction meeting as well as a list of sub-contractors with contact person, addresses, telephone/cell/fax numbers, and e-mail addresses. S. The successful bidder shall be required to provide a list of shop drawings as well as list of material submittals for review by the Architect and this list shall be provided at the pre-construction meeting for approval by the Architect as the required submittal list- T. The owner will require 3 copies of the each shop drawing and material submittal and shall be maintained by the contractor in separate file boxes by specification sections in file folders clearly marked item contained in the file folder. These documents shall be turn over to the owner at the completion of the project as part of the close out materials. Also include a list of sub-contractors, material vendors and clearly identify as to discipline with contact information such as contact person, addresses, telephone/cell/fax numbers, and a-mail addresses. U. Submittals shall be sent directly to the Architect for his review and one copy sent to the owner project manager for review at the same time they are sent to the architect. Total number of submittals will be determined at the pre-construction meeting. V. The contractor shall note the contract duration is 120 calendar days for construction of this project from notice to proceed. No additional days will be allowed. W. Progress meeting will be required during the duration of the project and shall be every two weeks and dates shall be determined at the pre-construction meeting. X. The General Contractor will be required to provide his own survey layout and as-built drawings. The General Contractor shall stake out the location of the building and provide a tie in survey to the building department prior to pouring any concrete or installation of the pilings. Y. All existing utilities on the east face of the exiting beach lifeguard building shall be relocate off the east wall and relocated elsewhere see architectural drawing for their relocations. It is the intent of the owner to have the east face view from Gulfview Blvd. free of any utilities. Z. All new concrete shall match existing in texture and color. Mock up samples 2'x2' shall be provide to the Architect and Owner for approval. AA_ The Owner's vendors will perform the work for installation of the wiring and hardware for fire alarm system, security system, telephone, data, cable television, the contractor of this project shall provide all junction boxes & raceways from the junction boxes and stub raceways above the ceiling and provide penetrations through walls to locations where the fire alarm system, security system, telephone, data and cable television services are located. The wiring for the telephone, data, and cable television will be free wired and )lung from `J' hooks above the ceiling by the city's vendor for this service. The contractor shall coordinate with the Owner to schedule the city vendors to install the low voltage wiring and hardware for the systems previously outlined in note number 23. 1 11 BB.Security system is provided in the closet for parking & traffic equipment- Contractor to provide raceway to door and '/4" conduit to the telephone room closet. Touch panel shall be located on the east wall, south of the entry door to room 18" from door jamb and mounted 60" above finish floor elevation. Security touch panel for lifeguard station shall be located in the north entry stairwell on west wall 24" fro?n northwest corner 60" above finish floor elevation of concrete slab. Contractor shall provide conduit from this location to telephone panel board. Contractor shall provide all raceways and `J' boxes to all doors and windows and coordinate locations of glass breaks with the owner's security vendor. Note all conduits shall within the wall construction and no exposed conduits will be allowed to be on finished wall surfaces. CC.Contractor shall provide commodes plumbing fixtures be Toto brand including flushing hardware for commode material submittal shall be sent to Building & Maintenance Division for review and approval. All faucets shall be automatic metered push button type preferred Moen brand, contractor shall submit samples for approval by Building & Maintenance Division. DD. All Steel Case metal doors shall be prefinished from the manufacture and a factory Ash laminate finish on the metal doors & door jambs to be heavy duty galvanization and primed finished from the factory ready for final paint applications- All metal jambs shall be filled flush with concrete at completion of installation. No voids will be allowed within the jambs. EE. All construction cores for doors provided by the contractor during the construction period. All final cores and padlocks keyed to City's BEST Lock master keying system, all cores and padlocks/cores to be provided by the contractor and installed by the city, contract person: Dale Fitzpatrick, General Services - Building & Maintenance Division, 100 Grand Ave., Clearwater, FL 33765, telephone no_ 727-562-4710 ext_ 2815, fax no. 727-562-4894 FF. All furnishings such as washing machine, refrigerator, microwave, flat screen televisions will be provide by the owner and installed by the contactor. GG. Contractor shall provide filter and plumbing for ice maker for the refrigerator provided by the owner and installed by the contractor. HH. '/4" plywood backing for flat screen televisions shall be full length of wall on second floor of washer/dryer closet above shelving by 12" and 24" in height cut `J' boxes around plywood. Flat screen television mounted 72" from finish floor provide '/4" plywood backing beginning at 60" to 84" finish floor 48" wide, cut `J' boxes centered in plywood. 11. Contractor shall install flush mounted Knox Box provided by the owner mounted 60-inches above the finished concrete slab grade on the north elevation, 18" east of the entry door jamb of the stair well. JJ. The contractor shall provide and use 5/8" cabinet grade plywood for all millwork work with plastic laminate including: shelving, drawers, doors, counter tops for this project no substitutions will be allow with press board or other similar like materials will be rejected. KK. All exterior light fixtures on outside of building on south, west and north side of the building shall be on a timer for the owner to adjust these lights to be turned off during turtle nesting season. The location of the timer shall be located in the electrical closet. Lights on the exterior of building on east side of building shall be on a photo cell. The contractor shall note the light fixtures on the exterior of the building shall be constructed of material that will not be corrosive to the salt air environment or shall be sealed to provide longevity of the coastal environment and submittal of these fixtures shall be brought directly to the owner's approval in the submittal process. These exterior fixtures shall have bug shields on the fixtures sealed where insects cannot enter the lighting fixtures. LL. The contractor shall provide sealed type light fixtures on the first floor since this area will be exposed to moisture. The contractor shall provide these fixtures in the submittal process and send to the attention of Building & Maintenance Division for their review and approval. MM. All raceways shall be PVC conduits and not galvanized steel on this project. NN. All exterior outlets shall be GFI and enclosure shall be aluminum type and lockable by key or small padlock, and submitted to the Owner for approval, plastic dome type will not be acceptable. 00. All hose bibs shall be vandal proof type bronze or stainless steel and keyed the same, submit to Owner for approval. PP. Contractor shall provide only Square `D' as manufacture of electrical switch gear and send material submittal to Building & Maintenance Division for review and approval. QQ. All electrical duplex, light switch, blank junction boxes, television, telephone, data, covers shall be 316 stainless steel. RR.Contractor shall provide electrical heaters to be single phase unit, contractor shall provide material submittal for review and approval by the Building & Maintenance Division. 1 1 1 1 SS. All return grills of the air conditioning system shall be the type which can a receive filter. Upon installation of air condition return grills contractor shall install return filters immediately to prevent dust collecting dust in the ducking system. These filters shall be changed once a month if they are operated during the construction period. Upon final walk through all filters of the air conditioning system shall be changed out, which includes all returns, and the filters of the air conditioning air handlers. Should the contractor fail to install these filters return grills the contractor will be required to clean all ducts prior to handing over the project to the Owner. No additional fund will be provided by the Owner for failure to follow these instructions- All air conditioning air intakes shall be type which can receive a filter and shall have filters installed immediately upon installation of the air intake grill. TT. Contractor shall provide all restroonl and shower rooms with exhaust fans a minimum of 150 c. f. m. and material submittal to be reviewed and approval by the Building & Maintenance Division. All duct work for exhaust fan shall be ridged aluminum pipe if galvanized is utilized provide coating to prevent corrosion for the costal environment. These coatings galvanized pipe shall be shown to the Owner prior to installation. It shall be noted should the O"vner or Building & Maintenance observe during, any wall through galvanized piping utilized without coating shall removed and replaced at the contractor's expense and correct material installed. Contractor shall provide a coating to prcvent Corrosion htom the coastal envir011,11ent for all air can fitionu condenser units including covers and panels provide material submittal to be reviewed and approved by the Building & Maintenance Division.r VV. Contractor shall provide cleanouts below all lavatories and sinks in the sanitary lines and in the 4" sanitary lines. Contractor shall confirm location of these clean outs by providing shop drawing submittal for approval. WW. Contractor shall provide a piece of fire retired'/," plywood panel in the closet no. 1 for data, telephone, and cable television dernarks. 4-1.5-inch conduits as shall be ran to the exterior of the building on the southeast corner for set-vice for Verizon, Bright House, and other vendors to the fire retired'/4" plywood panel. A 1" conduit from the parking lot equipment closet to the southeast corner of the roof eave antenna shall also be provide by the contractor. XX. Two part epoxy fade proof paint contractor to utilize is hrtR;//www.tnemec-con/ ; Series 66 HI-BUILD EPOXOLINE (primer) Series 1070-18MT FLUORONAR (topcoat) for all exterior metal painting, contractor to provide sample to the owner for color selections and mock up sample of application to metal colors to the Owner & Architect for approval. No other paint manufacture substitution will be allowed- Two coat applications of primer and topcoat shall be applied to all exterior metal surfaces. YY. The ADA chair lift and all associated items to make this system operational is an alternate line item and all associated cost shall be included in the item during the biding process. The contractor shall include in his bid for incorporating a one year maintenance agreement on the wheelchair lift for the city. The date of the one year maintenance agreement by the contractor shall begin upon final handover of the project and shall begin upon the date of certificate of occupancy is provided to the owner- ZZ. Contractor will be required to coordinate with the Owner's surveyor whom will provide the Elevation Certificate for FEMA. The contractor shall coordinate two site visits by the Owner's surveyor into his construction schedule at the following times: after pouring ground floor concrete slab and substantial completion of the project. AAA. The contractor shall note the parking lot attendant building has electrical, telephone, and security system from the beach lifeguard station. The contractor shall make provisions to maintain the all system is operational at final handover of the project to the owner of this parking lot attendant building. BBB. City will make the application for the sign permit the contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the permit from the Building Dept. prior to installations and call in for final to close out the permit. CCC. Contractor into install concrete walkway slabs no greater than 5% slope and drain towards trench drain, Adjust adjacent landscape beds as necessary to prevent abrupt grades and slope towards trench drain. Shower area shall slope away from building. Contractor shall note exterior portion concrete footing exterior of building is the finish 0 -ade of walkways and shall address texture and color to match existing Beach Walk paving. Trench drain shall have stainless steel grate. DDD. The contractor shall note the contractor's lay down area will be utilized by the Ironnlan event this year, Gultview Blvd. will be closed during setup and during the event. The contractor will be able to continue the construction during the setup and will not be able to work on event day. The contractor will be able to utilized the contractor's lay down area again after November 15. Listed below is Ironrnan Event schedule: • Monday, November 8- Begin set-up • Tuesday, November 9- S. Gulfview closes 8.00 am • Start using Pier 60 parking lot to set up transition • Wednesday, November 10- Friday, November 11- increasingly more activity in area with set up and athletes arriving • Saturday, November 13- Race Day y • Sunday, November 14- Teardown of equipment in Pier 60 parking lot should be complete and will be reopened midday 1 LJ • Monday, November 15- Suites are craned out and S. Gulfview reopens -2:00 pm The contractor shall have the lay area cleared of any construction materials equipment and other related construction items prior to the Ironman event and have the site cleared by Friday, November 5. A copy of the lronman Venue is attached in the contract documents for the contractor's review- EEE. The owner will provide soap dispensers, multiple toilet dispensers and paper towel dispensers for the contractor to install and not as called out on drawing A-1.2. Contractor to provide and install cu tain rod in shower rooms, owner to provide curtains. Contractor to provide fold down ADA seat for approval by the architect and owner. All restrooms & shower areas wallboards shall be Durarock cement board and not gypsum base product disregard notes calling out MR GYP. Wallboard. The contractor shall utilize existing two shower heads installed in the last six months and provide new mixing valves in the two standard shower rooms, ADA shower room provide new Moen Model: 3867BN hand held adjustable ADA shower unit including mixing valve. FFF. Twenty stackable lockers will be provided by the owner for the contractor to install. y CONTRACT PERIOD: 120 CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS 7. Consultant Comments: Steve Fowler Last day for submission of questions Friday, September 3. 2010 @ 12:00 (Noon) and will distribute to consultants. Questions sent in writing to: Parks & Recreation Department Leroy Chin - Park, Planning & Project Manger E-mail: lei-ov.ciiin@mvclearwater.com Fax: 727.224-7101 Mail: P. O. Box 4736 Clearwater, FL 33758-4748 No other questions submitted after 12:00 (Noon) on September 3, 2010 will be answered. 9. Sealed proposals will be received by the Purchasing Manager, at the Purchasing Office, located at the Municipal Services Building, 100 S. Myrtle Avenue, P Floor, Clearwater Florida 33756-5520, until 1:30 P.M. on Thursday, September 9, 2010, and publicly opened and read at that hoar and place for Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel Project No. 10-0042-PR. 10. Award Date: Thursday, October 7, 2010 by City of Clearwater City Council a) Contractor awarded the project shall collect contracts from Engineering Dept. on Friday October, 2010 and has ten days to return sighed contracts and performance bond for City Clerk to execute the contracts. 11. Preconstruction Meeting- tentative date Wednesday, October 13, 2010 -time: 8:00 AM, Venue: Clearwater Beach Library & Recreation Center 12. Notice to proceed: tentative date Monday, October 18, 2010 13. Contract Period 120 consecutive calendar days: tentative date Wednesday, February 16, 2010 14. Question and Answers 15. Comments a) Prospective Bidders b) Consultant --- Fowler Associate Architects, Inc. - Steve Fowler c) Owner -Parks & Recreation Department -Leroy Chin 16. Tour of construction areas - Beach Lifeguard Station, 180 Gulfview Blvd. Clearwater, Florida 17. Adjourn Meeting 6 1 1 SCOPE OF WORK Section IV - Technical Specifications 1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION Project Name: September 1, 2010 - ADDENDUM NO.2 - Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel Project Number: 10-0042-PR Scope of Work: 1. Contractor shall collect Building Permit no. BCP-2010-07481, Clearing Grubbing Permit and Tree Removal Permit from the Building Dept. at the Development Services 2"d Floor of the Municipal Service Building - 100 South Myrtle Ave. after he has installed his silt fence in the contractor's lay down yard and temporary construction fences has been installed. There is no fee for these permits. 2. Tentative Dates for Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel - Project No. 10-0042- PR a. Monday, August 16, 2010 - Bid Package Available To Contractors b. 8:00 AM, Thursday, August 26, 2010 - Mandatory Pre-Bid Conference, Clearwater Beach Library & Recreation Center, 69 Bay Esplanade, Clearwater Florida c. 12:00 (Noon) Friday, September 3, 2010 - Last Day for Questions Submitted in Writing Only - Attention: Leroy Chin, e-mail: leroy.chin(@myclearwater.com, Fax: 727-562-4825, U. S. Postal Service Parks & Recreation Dept. P. O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 337584748, No Verbal Questions Asked and no Verbal Answers Will Be Given d. Thursday, August 26, 2010 - Last Day to Submit Prequalification Package, Qualification Package included at the end of the City's Technical Specification section e. Monday, September 6, 2010 - Last Day Sale of Bid Package f. 1:30 PM, Thursday, September 9, 2010 - Bid Opening to George McKibben - Purchasing Office 3`4 Floor, Municipal Service Building - 100 S. Myrtle Ave., Clearwater, Florida 33756 g. Thursday, October 7, 2010 - Award Contract By City of Clearwater City Council h. Friday, October 8, 2010 - Contractor Awarded Project to Collect Contracts for Execution collected and Returned to Engineering Dept. within 10 Days 2"d Floor, Municipal Service Building - 100 S. Myrtle Ave., Clearwater, Florida, 33756 i. Friday October 8, 2010 - Execution of Purchase Order -- Parks & Recreation Dept. j. Wednesday, 8:00 AM, October 13, 2010 - Pre-Construction Meeting, Clearwater Beach Library & Recreation Center, 69 Bay Esplanade, Clearwater Florida k. Monday, October 18, 2010, Notice to Proceed to General Contractor - 120 Consecutive Calendar Day to Complete the Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel - Project No. 10-0042-PR 1. Wednesday, February 16, 2010, Completion of Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel - Project No. 10-0042- PR 3. The contactor shall secure the site at all times and provide closed sidewalk barricades and route pedestrian traffic from sidewalks along Gulf view Blvd. on to the Beach Walk Trail. The contractor shall maintain these sign during the duration of the contact period of the project. 4. The contractor shall provide MOT as required during the utilization of the contractors lay down yard and the work in progress at the Beach Lifeguard Station. At the preconstruction conference the contractor shall provide a preliminary plan as to be daily maintenance of traffic during the construction of the project. This MOT may need modifications as the project progress and shall be coordinated with the delivery of materials to the project site. 5. Daily activity of the public will be on going surrounding the Beach Lifeguard Station property and the contractor and his employees & subcontractor shall use extreme caution for the safety and welfare of the public. 6. Pier 60 Parking is public parking and the contractor is not allowed to utilize this parking lot for parking his construction vehicles, employee parking, sub-contractor's/employee parking or his construction equipment. Nor is he allowed to block access to this parking lot. The contractor or his employee parks in the parking lot without paying the fee for the parking ticket placed on the dash of the vehicle will be ticketed. There will be no waiver of the parking ticket by the Owner or the Parking the Division. The equipment parking and employee parking shall be within the contractor's designated lay down area. 1 ADDENDUM 1 SCOPE SectionlV.doc Page 1 of 126 ADDENDUM NO. I - 8/20/2010 1 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications 7. The general contractor shall coordinate his deliveries of materials to the site before 7:00 AM - 10 AM, to minimize the disruption of the parking lot. The contractor shall not block of the drive aisles of the parking lot at anytime during the construction period of this project 8. The equipment and materials stated on the drawings are the materials and the equipment expected to be utilized on this Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel and shall take precedence. over material vendor outlined in the technical specification as acceptable vendors. It is the intent of the owner the materials stated on the contract drawings are the materials to be utilized on this project unless approved directly by the owner in the submittal process. No substitutions will be allowed without owner's approval through the submittal process and shall be bought to his attention by the contractor requesting the substitution. 9. The building construction is located on the coastal zone of the Gulf of Mexico, the contractor shall make provisions in his contract to implement the works for install stainless steel hardware for all items which may be exposed to the salt air includes but not limited to truss plates, Simpson ties, nuts, bolts, washers, screws, etc...., if they are not available the shall have heavy duty galvanization. Minimum grade of stainless steel shall be 304 preferred 316 grade stainless steel. If the drawings or specification request galvanization the Owner's intent is for the General Contractor to have included in his pricing for this contract to utilized stainless steel connection components. At the pre-construction meeting the General Contractor shall provide a list of connection components which are not available in stainless steel for verification by the Architect and the Owner. 10. Any items not included in the listed in bill of quantities of the contract documents for the Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel shall have been included cost for those items not listed somewhere in the pricing of the General Contractor proposal to construct this facility. No additional funds will be provides by the Owner for missed items by the General Contractor or his sub-contractors utilized to implement this project. 11. All discrepancies between the construction plans and the technical specifications shall be brought to the attention of the Architect and the Owner for clarification in writing prior to the General Contractor in submitting his bid for this project. After award of the contract discrepancies brought to the attention to the Owner or Architect the most stringent of the discrepancy shall be utilized in the implementation of the Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel and no additional compensation will be provided by the Owner. 12. Asbestos survey was conducted for the existing Beach Lifeguard Station and no asbestos was found in the building the contractor shall give ten (10) day notice to the Pinellas County Air Quality Environmental Protection Agency prior to any demolition work of the structure. Documentation to the City of Clearwater - Building Dept. the notification was sent to Pinellas County Air Quality Department by providing a copy of the invoice when collecting the building permit. 13. The contractor shall call in for location for underground utilities of the various agencies prior to any excavations of the site. The utility boxes on the east side of the building show multiple existing utilities including a fiber optic line. The contractor shall provide hand exploratory excavation identifying location of utilities prior to utilization of machinery for excavations. Fiber optic line shall be located by hand digging prior to any excavation with machinery to prevent damage to fiber optic lines during the contract period of the project. Contractor may request City of Clearwater Parking Division for assistance in locating this fiber optic line. 14. Upon removal of the concrete sidewalk and slabs around the beach lifeguard building silt fence shall be install immediately and no later than 10 hours after concrete removal to prevent silt from going down stream during a possible storm event. All stilt fencing shall be maintained during the contract period of this project. 15. The contractor will be required to restore any disrupted areas of the within the limits of work area and any disturbed areas outside of the limits of work areas by the General Contractor of this project. 16. The contractor of this project is required to provide relocation of palms and tree on this project and shall be coordinated with the Parks & Beautification Maintenance Supervisor. The irrigation system repairs and sleeves required shall extend beneath the new constructed new concrete slabs. The contractor shall coordinate this work for inspection with the city's irrigation technician for acceptance of this work and irrigation system operates correctly prior to pouring the new concrete slabs. 17. The successful bidder shall be required to provide a detailed schedule of value for his awarded contact amount and submitted at the pre-construction meeting. This schedule of value shall be utilized as the basis of his application of payment for the project. The contractor shall utilize the standard AIA form in making his application for payment on or prior to the 25"' of every month. This application shall be submitted to the Architect for his review and approval prior to forwarding on to the owner for payment. The payment request shall be accompanied with a lean wavier with ADDENDUM 1 SCOPE SectionIV.doc Page 2 of 126 ADDENDUM NO. 1 - 8/20/2010 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications each payment. Upon final payment request the contractor shall provide with his invoice the certificate of final payment. 18. The successful bidder shall be required to provide a detailed construction schedule outlining all work and minor and major milestones for the project and shown long lead items of materials delivery. This schedule shall be updated at each progress meeting. This schedule shall also be providing at the pre-construction meeting as well as a list of sub- contractors with contact person, addresses, telephone/cell/fax numbers, and e-mail addresses. 19. The successful bidder shall be required to provide a list of shop drawings as well as list of material submittals for review by the Architect and this list shall be provided at the pre-construction meeting for approval by the Architect as the required submittal list. 20. The owner will require 3 copies of the each shop drawing and material submittal and shall be maintained by the contractor in separate file boxes by specification sections in file folders clearly marked item contained in the file folder. These documents shall be turn over to the owner at the completion of the project as part of the close out materials. Also include a list of sub-contractors, material vendors and clearly identify as to discipline with contact information such as contact person, addresses, telephone/cell/fax numbers, and e-mail addresses. 21. Submittals shall be sent directly to the Architect for his review and one copy sent to the owner project manager for review at the same time they are sent to the architect. Total number of submittals will be determined at the pre- construction meeting. 22. The contractor shall note the contract duration is 120 calendar days for construction of this project from notice to proceed. No additional days will be allowed. 23. Progress meeting will be required during the duration of the project and shall be every two weeks and dates shall be determined at the pre-construction meeting. 24. The General Contractor will be required to provide his own survey layout and as-built drawings. The General Contractor shall stake out the location of the building and provide a tie in survey to the building department prior to pouring any concrete or installation of the pilings. 25. All existing utilities on the east face of the exiting beach lifeguard building shall be relocate off the east wall and relocated elsewhere see architectural drawing for their relocations. It is the intent of the owner to have the east face view from Gulfview Blvd. free of any utilities. 26. All new concrete shall match existing in texture and color. Mock up samples 2'x2' shall be provide to the Architect and Owner for approval. 27. The Owner's vendors will perform the work for installation of the wiring and hardware for fire alarm system, security system, telephone, data, cable television, the contractor of this project shall provide all junction boxes & raceways from the junction boxes and stub raceways above the ceiling and provide penetrations through walls to locations where the fire alarm system, security system, telephone, data and cable television services are located. The wiring for the telephone, data, and cable television will be free wired and hung from `J' hooks above the ceiling by the city's vendor for this service. The contractor shall coordinate with the Owner to schedule the city vendors to install the low voltage wiring and hardware for the systems previously outlined in note number 28. 28. Security system is provided in the closet for parking & traffic equipment. Contractor to provide raceway to door and 1/4" conduit to the telephone room closet. Touch panel shall be located on the east wall, south of the entry door to room 18" from door jamb and mounted 60" above finish floor elevation. Security touch panel for lifeguard station shall be located in the north entry stairwell on west wall 24" from northwest corner 60" above finish floor elevation of concrete slab. Contractor shall provide conduit from this location to telephone panel board. Contractor shall provide all raceways and `J' boxes to all doors and windows and coordinate locations of glass breaks with the owner's security vendor. Note all conduits shall within the wall construction and no exposed conduits will be allowed to be on finished wall surfaces. 29. Contractor shall provide commodes plumbing fixtures be Toto brand including flushing hardware for commode material submittal shall be sent to Building & Maintenance Division for review and approval. All faucets shall be automatic metered push button type preferred Moen brand, contractor shall submit samples for approval by Building & Maintenance Division. 30. All Steel Case metal doors shall be prefinished from the manufacture and a factory Ash laminate finish on the metal doors & door jambs to be heavy duty galvanization and primed finished from the factory ready for final ADDENDUM I SCOPE SectionIV.doc Page 3 of 126 ADDENDUM NO. 1 - 8/20/2010 1 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications paint applications. All metal jambs shall be filled flush with concrete at completion of installation. No voids will be allowed within the jambs. 31. All construction cores for doors provided by the contractor during the construction period. All final cores and padlocks keyed to City's BEST Lock master keying system, all cares and padlocks/cores to be provided by the contractor and installed by the city, contract person: Dale Fitzpatrick, General Services - Building & Maintenance Division, 100 Grand Ave., Clearwater, FL 33765, telephone no. 727-562-4710 ext. 2815, fax no. 727-562-4894 32. All furnishings such as washing machine, refrigerator, microwave, flat screen televisions will be provide by the owner and installed by the contactor. 33. Contractor shall provide filter and plumbing for ice maker for the refrigerator provided by the owner and installed by the contractor. 34. 3/A" plywood backing for flat screen televisions shall be full length of wall on second floor of washer/dryer closet above shelving by 12" and 24" in height cut `J' boxes around plywood. Flat screen television mounted 72" from finish floor provide %" plywood backing beginning at 60" to 84" finish floor 48" wide, cut `J' boxes centered in plywood. 35. Contractor shall install flush mounted Knox Box provided by the owner mounted 60-inches above the finished concrete slab grade on the north elevation, 18" east of the entry doorjamb of the stair well. 36. The contractor shall provide and use 5/8" cabinet grade plywood for all millwork work with plastic laminate including: shelving, drawers, doors, counter tops for this project no substitutions will be allow with press board or other similar like materials will be rejected. 37. All exterior light fixtures on outside of building on south, west and north side of the building shall be on a timer for the owner to adjust these lights to be turned off during turtle nesting season. The location of the timer shall be located in the electrical closet. Lights on the exterior of building on east side of building shall be on a photo cell. The contractor shall note the light fixtures on the exterior of the building shall be constructed of material that will not be corrosive to the salt air environment or shall be sealed to provide longevity of the coastal environment and submittal of these fixtures shall be brought directly to the owner's approval in the submittal process. These exterior fixtures shall have bug shields on the fixtures sealed where insects cannot enter the lighting fixtures. 38. The contractor shall provide sealed type light fixtures on the first floor since this area will be exposed to moisture. The contractor shall provide these fixtures in the submittal process and send to the attention of Building & Maintenance Division for their review and approval. 39. All raceways shall be PVC conduits and not galvanized steel on this project. 40. All exterior outlets shall be GF1 and enclosure shall be aluminum type and lockable by key or small padlock, and submitted to the Owner for approval, plastic dome type will not be acceptable. 41. All hose bibs shall be vandal proof type bronze or stainless steel and keyed the same, submit to Owner for approval. 42. Contractor shall provide only Square `D' as manufacture of electrical switch gear and send material submittal to Building & Maintenance Division for review and approval. 43. All electrical duplex, light switch, blank junction boxes, television, telephone, data, covers shall be 316 stainless steel. 44. Contractor shall provide electrical heaters to be single phase unit, contractor shall provide material submittal for review and approval by the Building & Maintenance Division. 45. All return grills of the air conditioning system shall be the type which can a receive filter. Upon installation of air condition return grills contractor shall install return filters immediately to prevent dust collecting dust in the ducking system. These filters shall be changed once a month if they are operated during the construction period. Upon final walk through all filters of the air conditioning system shall be changed out, which includes all returns, and the filters of the air conditioning air handlers. Should the contractor fail to install these filters return grills the contractor will be required to clean all ducts prior to handing over the project to the Owner. No additional fund will be provided by the Owner for failure to follow these instructions. All air conditioning air intakes shall be type which can receive a filter and shall have filters installed immediately upon installation of the air intake grill. 46. Contractor shall provide all restroom and shower rooms with exhaust fans a minimum of 150 c. f. in. and material submittal to be reviewed and approval by the Building & Maintenance Division. All duct work for ADDENDUM 1 SCOPE SectionfV.doc Page 4 of 126 ADDENDUM NO. 1 - 8/20/2010 1 Section IV -Technical Specifications exhaust fan shall be ridged aluminum pipe if galvanized is utilized provide coating to prevent corrosion for the costal environment. These coatings galvanized pipe shall be shown to the Owner prior to installation. It shall be noted should the Owner or Building & Maintenance observe during any wall through galvanized piping utilized without coating shall removed and replaced at the contractor's expense and correct material installed. 47. Contractor shall provide a coating to prevent corrosion from the coastal environment for all air conditioning condenser units including covers and panels provide material submittal to be reviewed and approved by the Building & Maintenance Division. 48. Contractor shall provide cleanouts below all lavatories and sinks in the sanitary lines and in the 4" sanitary lines. Contractor shall confirm location of these clean outs by providing shop drawing submittal for approval. 49. Contractor shall provide a piece of fire retired 3/4" plywood panel in the closet no. 1 for data, telephone, and cable television demarks. 4-1.5-inch conduits as shall be ran to the exterior of the building on the southeast corner for service for Verizon, Bright House, and other vendors to the fire retired 1/4" plywood panel. A 1" conduit from the parking lot equipment closet to the southeast corner of the roof eave antenna shall also be provide by the contractor. 50. Two part epoxy fade proof paint contractor to utilize is http://www.tncmcc.com/ ; Series 66 HI-BUILD EPOXOLINE (primer) Series 1070-18MT FLUORONAR (topcoat) for all exterior metal painting, contractor to provide sample to the owner for color selections and mock up sample of application to metal colors to the Owner & Architect for approval. No other paint manufacture substitution will be allowed. Two coat applications of primer and topcoat shall be applied to all exterior metal surfaces. 51. The ADA chair lift and all associated items to make this system operational is an alternate line item and all associated cost shall be included in the item during the biding process. The contractor shall include in his bid for incorporating a one year maintenance agreement on the wheelchair lift for the city. The date of the one year maintenance agreement by the contractor shall begin upon final handover of the project and shall begin upon the date of certificate of occupancy is provided to the owner. 52. Contractor will be required to coordinate with the Owner's surveyor whom will provide the Elevation Certificate for FEMA. The contractor shall coordinate two site visits by the Owner's surveyor into his construction schedule at the following times: after pouring ground floor concrete slab and substantial completion of the project. 53. The contractor shall note the parking lot attendant building has electrical, telephone, and security system from the beach lifeguard station. The contractor shall make provisions to maintain the all system is operational at final handover of the project to the owner of this parking lot attendant building. 54. City will make the application for the sign permit the contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the permit from the Building Dept. prior to installations and call in for final to close out the permit. 55. Contractor into install concrete walkway slabs no greater than 5% slope and drain towards trench drain. Adjust adjacent landscape beds as necessary to prevent abrupt grades and slope towards trench drain. Shower area shall slope away from building. Contractor shall note exterior portion concrete footing exterior of building is the finish grade of walkways and shall address texture and color to match existing Beach Walk paving. Trench drain shall have stainless steel grate. 56. The contractor shall note the contractor's lay down area will be utilized by the Ironman event this year, Gulfview Blvd. will be closed during setup and during the event. The contractor will be able to continue the construction during the setup and will not be able to work on event day. The contractor will be able to utilized the contractor's lay down area again after November 15. Listed below is Ironman Event schedule: • Monday, November 8- Begin set-up • Tuesday, November 9- S. Gulfview closes 8:00 am • Start using Pier 60 parking lot to set up transition • Wednesday, November 10- Friday, November 11- Increasingly more activity in area with set up and athletes arriving • Saturday, November 13- Race Day • Sunday, November 14- Teardown of equipment in Pier 60 parking lot should be complete and will be reopened midday • Monday, November 15- Suites are craned out and S. Gulfview reopens -2:00 pm The contractor shall have the lay area cleared of any construction materials equipment and other related construction items prior to the lronman event and have the site cleared by Friday, November 5. A copy of the Ironman Venue is attached in the contract documents for the contractor's review. 57. The owner will provide soap dispensers, multiple toilet dispensers and paper towel dispensers for the contractor to install and not as called out on drawing A-1.2. Contractor to provide and install curtain rod in shower rooms, owner to provide ADDENDUM I SCOPE. SectionlV.doc Page 5 of 126 ADDENDUM NO. I - 8/20/2010 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications ' curtains. Contractor to provide fold down ADA seat for approval by the architect and owner. All shower room walls shall be Dur Rock cement board. The contractor shall utilize existing two shower heads installed in the last six months and provide new mixing valves in the two standard shower rooms, ADA shower room provide new Moen Model: 3867BN hand held adjustable ADA shower unit including mixing valve. ' 58. Twe my stackable lockers will be provided by the owner for the contractor to install. 59. All glazing shall be Pittsburg Plate Glass - Solarband - 60 - impact rated glazing. 60. Attached in the technical specifications is Garaventa Lift- Artira Design and Planning Guide for information purposes and the contractor shall use Section 14420 Inclined Wheelchair Platform Lift in developing their bid for the wheelchair platform ' lift. 61. The architect has attached the drawing building permit comments to guide the prospective bidder regards to change in the drawings in addendum no. 2 to assist in the biding process. ' 62. The owner has applied for the sign permit with the Building Dept. permit no. SGN2010-08006 can be collected for installation of the sign by the general contractor's sign vendor. CONTRACT PERIOD: 120 CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS ADDENDUM I SCOPE SectionlV.doc Page 6 of 126 ADDENDUM NO. 1 - 8/20/2010 1 SECTION 09900 PAINTING ' PART I - GENERAL ' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and ' Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this Section. ' 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. THE EXTENT of painting work is shown on the drawings and schedules, and as herein ' specified. B. THE WORK INCLUDES painting and finishing of interior and exterior exposed items ' and surfaces throughout the project, except as otherwise indicated. C. SURFACE PREPARATION, priming and coats of paint specified are in addition to shop-priming and surface treatment specified under other sections of the work. ' D. "PAINT" as used herein means all coating systems materials, including primers emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other appliedmaterials whether used ' as prime, intermediate or finish coats. ' E. PAINT ALL EXPOSED SURFACES unless otherwise indicated, whether or not colors are designated in "schedules", except where the natural finish of the material is specifically noted as a surface not to be painted. Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint these the same as adjacent similar materials or areas. If ' color or finish is not designated, the Architect will select these from standard colors available for the materials systems specified. 1.03 PAINTING NOT INCLUDED: A. THE FOLLOWING CATEGORIES of work are not included as part of the field- applied finish work, or are included in other sections of these specifications. 1. Shop Priming: Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of ferrous metal items is ' included under the various sections for structural steel, miscellaneous metal, hollow metal work, and similar items. 2. Pre-Finished Items: Unless otherwise indicated, do not include painting when ' factory--finishing or installer finishing is specified for such items as (but not limited to) acoustic materials, architectural woodwork and casework, finished ' ADDENUM NO 2 - PAINTING 09900-1 1 1 1 fl mechanical and electrical equipment including light fixtures, switchgear and distribution cabinets. 3. Concealed Surfaces; Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces such as walls or ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible areas and pipe spaces. 4. Operating Parts and Labels Moving parts of operating units, mechanical and electrical parts, such as valve and damper operators, linkages, sensing devices, motor and fan shafts will not require finish painting. 5. Do not paint over any code-required labels, such as Underwriters' Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification, performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. PRODUCT LIST: 1. Submit a complete list of products proposed for use at least thirty (30) days prior to commencement of painting work. 2. Indicate manufacturer, brand name, quality, and type paint for each surface to be finished. 3. Intent of Contractor to use products specified does not relieve him from responsibility of submitting product list. B. SAMPLES: Submit 12" x 12" samples of each color for Architect's review of color and texture only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: A. DELIVERALL MATERIALS to the job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label. B. PROVIDE LABELS on each container with the following information: I . Name or title of material. 2. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 3. Manufacturer's name. 4. Contents by volume for major pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. C. STORE only acceptable painting materials on project site. 1. Store in a lockable area or room, in Contractor's shed or trailer. Do not store in the building. 2. Comply with health and fire regulations. ADDENL IM NO 2 - PAINTING mm 09900-2 1 ' 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS: A. APPLY WATER-BASE PAINTS only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and the surrounding air temperatures are between 507. and 90° F. unless otherwise permitted by the paint manufacturer's printed instructions. B. APPLY SOLVENT-THINNED PAINTS only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and the surrounding air temperatures are between 45° F. and 957 unless otherwise permitted by the paint manufacturer's printed instructions. ' C. DO NOT APPLY PAINT in rain, fog or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85%, or to damp or wet surfaces: unless otherwise permitted by the paint manufacturer's printed instructions. D. PAINTING may be continued during inclement weather only if the areas and surfaces to ' be painted are enclosed and heated within the temperature limits specified by the paint manufacturer during application and drying periods. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 COLORS AND FINISHES: ' A. PAINT COLORS will be as scheduled on the Drawings and selected from the manufacturer's standard color chips. 1. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. 2.02 MATERIAL QUALITY: ' A. PROVIDE the best quality grade of the various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by acceptable paint materials manufacturers. Materials not displaying the manufacturer's identification as a standard, best-grade product, will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials are not intended to imply that products of the named manufacturers are required to the exclusion of ' equivalent products of other acceptable manufacturers. B. PROVIDE UNDERCOAT PAINT produced by the same manufacturer as the finish ' coats. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits. C. REFER TO SECTION 09901 _ PAINTING SCHEDULE, for material quality requirements. ' ADDENUM NO 2 - PAINTING _ 09900-3 1 ' PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3.01 INSPECTION: A. APPLICATOR MUST EXAMINE the areas and conditions under which painting work is to be applied and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the ' proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Applicator. 1. Starting of painting work will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of the surfaces and conditions within any particular area. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental to the formation of a durable paint film. ' 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION: ' A. GENERAL: Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in strict accordance with the paint manufacturer's instructions and as herein specified, for each particular substrate condition. ' 1. Remove all hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place and not to be finish-painted, or provide surface- applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Remove, if ' necessary. for the complete painting of the items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting of each space or area, reinstall the removed items by workmen skilled in the trades involved. 2. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning. Program the cleaning and painting so that contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall onto wet, newly-painted surfaces. B. CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS: Prepare cementitious surfaces of concrete, concrete block and cement plaster to be painted by removing all efflorescence chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and by roughening as required to remove glaze. 1. Determine the alkalinity and moisture content of the surfaces to be painted by performing appropriate tests. If the surfaces are found to be sufficiently alkaline to ' cause blistering and burning of the finish paint, correct this condition before application of paint. Do not paint over surfaces where the moisture content exceed that permitted in the manufacturer's printed directions. C. WOOD: Cleanwood surfaces to be painted of all dirt, oil or other foreign substances withscrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. ' I. Seal tops, bottoms, and cut-outs of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or equivalent sealer immediately upon delivery to job. ' D. FERROUS METALS: Clean ferrous surfaces, which arc not galvanized or shop-coated, of oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning. ' 1. Touch-up shop-applied prime coats wherever damaged or base, where required by I ADDENUM NO2 - PAINTING 09900-4 1 ' other sections of these specifications. Clean and touch-up with the same type shop primer. ' E. GALVANIZED SURFACES: Clean free of oil and surface contaminants with an acceptable non-petroleum based solvent. 3.03 MATERIALS PREPARATION: A. MIX AND PREPARE painting materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions. B. STORE MATERIALS not in actual use in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers used in storage, mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of ' foreign materials and residue. C. STIR MATERIALS before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and stir ' as required during the application of the materials. Do not stir surface film into the material. Remove the film and if necessary, strain the material before using. ' 3.04 APPLICATION: A. GENERAL: Apply paint in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. Use ' applicators and techniques best suited for the substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through the final coat of paint, until the paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Give special attention to insure that all surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 2. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grills, with a flat, non-specular black paint. ' 3. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms and side edges the same as the exterior faces, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. ' B. SCHEDULING PAINTING: Apply the first-coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after ' preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. 2. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and the application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat. ' C. MINIMUM COATING THICKNESS: Apply each material at not less than the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate, to establish a total dry film thickness as indicated or, if not indicated, of not less than 5.0 mils for the entire coating system if of ' 3 coat work or not less than 3.5 mils if of 2 coat work. ADDENUM NO 2 - PAINTING 09900-5 1 1 1 D. BRUSH APPLICATION: Brush-out and work all brush coats onto the surfaces in an even film. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. Neatly draw all glass lines. I . Brush apply all primer or first coats, unless otherwise permitted to use mechanical applicators. E. MECHANICAL APPLICATIONS: Use mechanical methods for paint application only when permitted by governing ordinances and trade union regulations. If permitted, limit to only those surfaces impracticable for brush applications. 1. Limit roller applications (generally) to interior wall and ceiling finishes for second and third coats. Apply each roller coat to provide the equivalent hiding as brush- applied. 2. Confine spray application (generally) to metal framework and similar surfaces where hand brush work would be inferior. 3. Wherever spray application is used, apply each coat to provide the equivalent hiding of brush-applied coats. 4. Do not double back with spray equipment for the purpose of building up film thickness of 2 coasts in one pass. 3.05 CLEAN UP AND PROTECTION: A. CLEAN-UP: During the progress of the work, remove from the site all discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags at the end of each work day. 1. Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces. B. PROTECTION: Protect work of other trades. whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting and finishing work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to the Architect. 1. Provide "WET PAINT" signs as required to protect newly-painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of painting operations. 2. At the completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore all damaged or defaced painted surfaces. END OF SECTION ADDENUM NO 2 - PAINTING _ 09900-6 1 SECTION 09901 PAINTING SCHEDULE A. SURFACES shall be painted with the type paints and number of coats as hereinafter scheduled. ' B. PROVIDE FIRST LINE PAINTS OF MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFIED BELOW: 1. PPG Architectural - Pittsburg & Porter Paints 2. Tnemec Industrial Coatings, Inc. ' C. PROVIDE FIRST LINE STAINS OF MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFIED BELOW: 1. PPG Architectural - Olympic, Pittsburg & Porter Paints ' EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS (EPS): CONCRETE. STUCCO, AND MASONRY: (Other than concrete masonry units). ' EPS-1: 2-COAT ACRYLIC FINISH (LUSTERLESS-FLAT) 1st Coat - Porter #335 series, "Acri-Pro 100" Acrylic Primer. ' 2nd Coat - Porter #519 series, "Acri-Shield" 100% Acrylic Flat. Not less than 2.5 mils dry film thickness. CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS: ' EPS4: 2-COAT ACRYLIC EMULSION (LUSTERLESS-FLAT) OVER FILLER COAT ' 1st Coat - Porter #896 series, "Acri-Fil" Block Filler. 2nd Coat -Porter #519 series, "Acri-Shield" 100% Acrylic Flat. 3rd Coat - Porter #519 series, "Acri-Shield" 100% Acrylic Flat. Not less than 2.5 mils dry film thickness, excluding first coat. ' CURB. & PAVEMENT PAINT: ' EPS-5: 2-COAT CHLORINATED RUBBER-ALKYD, FS TT-P-115, TYPE III. 1 st Coat- PPG #4-4210 Perma-Crete ColorSeal W/B 2nd Coat- PPG #4-4210 Perma-Crete ColorSeal W/B ' ASBESTOS CEMENT EPS-6: 2-COAT (FLAT) FINISH OVER PRIMER 1 st Coat - Porter #335 series, "Acri-Pro 100" Acrylic Primer. 2nd Coat - Porter #519 series, "Acri-Shield" 100% Acrylic Flat. 3rd Coat - Porter 4519 series, "Acri-Shield" 100% Acrylic Flat. Not less than 3.5 mils dry film thickness. GENERAL PAINTED WOOD: ' EPS-7: 2-COAT ALKYD (GLOSS) FINISH OVER PRIMER I st Coat - PPG # 17-921 series, "SealGrip" Acrylic Universal Primer. 2nd Coat - Porter#4139 series, "Glyptex" Urethane Gloss Oil. 3rd Coat - Porter#4139 series, "Glyptex" Urethane Gloss Oil. Not less than 3.5 mils dry film thickness. 1 ADDENDUM NO.2 - PAINTING SCHEDULE ' 09901-1 1 1 f] 1 st Coat - Porter #320 series,"Wood Guardian" Gloss Spar Varnish 2nd Coat - Porter #320 series,"Wood Guardian" Gloss Spar Varnish 3rd Coat - Porter #320 series,"Wood Guardian" Gloss Spar Varnish Fill open grained wood with filler and wipe before first varnish coat. FERROUS METAL: EPS-15: 2-PART EPOXY (FULL GLOSS) ENAMEL; Manufacturer: Tnemec Industrial Coatings, Inc. NO SUBSTITUTES. 4 Mil Min. Thickness per Coat ' I st Coat - Series 66 HI-BUILD EPOXOLINE (primer) 2nd Coat - Series 1070-18MT FLUORONAR (topcoat). ADDENDUM NO.2 - PAIN SCHEDULE 09901-2 EPS-8: 2-COAT (LOW LUSTER) FINISH OVER PRIMER I st Coat - PPG #17-921 series, "SealGrip" Acrylic Universal Primer. 2nd Coat - Porter #739 series, "Acri-Shield" 1001/6 Acrylic Satin. 3rd Coat - Porter #739 series, "Acri-Shield" 100% Acrylic Satin. PAINTED WOOD TRIM: EPS-9: ALKYD (FULL GLOSS) FOR DEEP COLORS 1st Coat - PPG #17-921 series, "SealGrip" Acrylic Universal Primer. 2nd Coat - Porter#4139 series, "Glyptex" Urethane Gloss Oil. 3rd Coat - Porter#4139 series, "Glyptex" Urethane Gloss Oil. PAINTED WOOD SHAKES AND ROUGH SIDING: EPS-10: 2-COAT SELF-PRIMING ALKYD-OIL (LOW LUSTER) FINISH 1 st Coat - Porter # 1819 series, Wood Guardian Alkyd Solid Color 2nd Coat - Porter #1819 series, Wood Guardian Alkyd Solid Color PAINTED PLYWOOD: EPS-11: 2-COAT (FLAT) FINISH OVER PRIMER STAINED WOOD: 1 st Coat - PPG # 17-921 series, "SealGrip" Acrylic Universal Primer. 2nd Coat - Porter #519 series, "Acri-Shield" 100% Acrylic Flat. 3rd Coat - Porter #519 series, "Acri-Shield" 100% Acrylic Flat. EPS-12: STAINED VARNISH (FULL GLOSS) FINISH 1 st Coat - Exterior oil stain. 2nd Coat - Porter #320 series,"Wood Guardian" Gloss Spar Varnish 3rd Coat - Porter #320 series,"Wood Guardian" Gloss Spar Varnish 4th Coat - Porter #320 series,"Wood Guardian" Gloss Spar Varnish Fill open grained wood with filler and wipe before first varnish coat. EPS-13: STAIN (FLAT), NO FINISH COATS 1 st Coat - Porter# 1919 series, "Wood Guardain" Acrylic Solid Stain NATURAL FINISH WOOD: EPS-14: VARNISH (FULL-GLOSS) FINISH fl 1 fl EPS-16: 2-PART EPOXY (SATIN FINISH) ENAMEL; Manufacturer: Tnemec Industrial Coatings, Inc. NO SUBSTITUTES. 4 it Min. Thickness Mr Coat 1 st Coat - Series 66 HI-BUILD EPOXOLINE (primer) 2nd Coat -Series 1070-18MT FLUORONAR (topcoat). ZINC COATED METAL: EPS-17: ALKYD ENAMEL (FULL-GLOSS) FINISH 1 st Coat - Porter #299 series, Porter Guard Primer 2nd Coat - Porter#4139 series, "Glyptex" Urethane Gloss Oil. 3rd Coat - Porter#4139 series, "Glyptex" Urethane Gloss Oil. First coat not required on items delivered shop primed. ALUMINUM: EPS-18: ALKYD ENAMEL (FULL-GLOSS) FINISH Ist Coat - PPG #97-680 series, Multi-Prime 2nd Coat - Porter#4139 series, "Glyptex" Urethane Gloss Oil. 3rd Coat - Porter#4139 series, "Glyptex" Urethane Gloss Oil. 1NTERIO PAINT SYSTEMS (IPS): CONCRETE AND MASONRY: (Other than concrete masonry units) IPS-1: 2-COAT LUSTERLESS (FLAT) FINISH 1st Coat - PPG #17-921 series, "SealGrip" Acrylic Universal Primer. 2nd Coat -- Porter #689 series, "Hi-Hide" Interior Flat IPS-2: ENAMEL (SEMI-GLOSS) FINISH 1 1 1 I st Coat - PPG # 17-921 series, "SealGrip" Acrylic Universal Primer. 2nd Coat - Porter#919 series, "Advantage 900" S/Gloss Enamel 3rd Cot - Porter#919 series, "Advantage 900" S/Gloss Enamel Not less than 3.5 mils total dry film thickness. IPS-3: 2-COAT (LUSTERLESS-FLAT) FINISH 1 st Coat - PPG #17-921 series, "SealGrip" Acrylic Universal Primer. 2nd Coat - Porter #689 series, "Hi-Hide" Interior Flat IPS-4: (SEMI-GLOSS) FINISH 1 st Coat - PPG #17-921 series, "SealGrip" Acrylic Universal Primer 2nd Coat - PPG #98-1 series, "Aquapon" Waterbased Epoxy 3rd Coat - PPG #98-1 series, "Aquapon" Waterbased Epoxy Not less than 4.0 mils dry film thickness. CONCRETE AND CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS: IPS-5: EMULSION (LUSTERLESS-FLAT) OVER FILLED CMU SURFACE 1 st Coat - Porter #896 series, "Acri-Fil" Block Filler. 2nd Coat - Porter #689 series, "Hi-Hide" Interior Flat 3rd Coat - Porter #689 series, "Hi-Hide" Interior Flat Apply filler coat at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. ADDENDUM NO.2 - PAINTINGSCHEDULE 09901-3 1 u IPS-6: ALKYD ENAMEL (SEMI-GLOSS) FINISH 1 st Coat - Porter #896 series, "Acri-Fil" Block Filler. 2nd Coat - Porter#439 series, "Glyptex" Interior Oil S/Gloss 3rd Coat - Porter#439 series, "Glyptex" Interior Oil S/Gloss Apply filler coat at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. Not less than 3.5 mils dry film thickness, excluding first coat. IPS-7: ("TILE-LIKE") FINISH 1st Coat - Porter #896 series, "Acri-FiP" Block Filler. 2nd Coat - PPG #98-1 series, "Aquapon" Waterbased Epoxy 3rd Coat - PPG #98-1 series, "Aquapon" Waterbased Epoxy Apply filler coat at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled and with a smooth monolithic finish. Not less than 4.0 miles dry film thickness, excluding first coat. MASONRY: (Other than concrete and concrete masonry units). IPS-8: ("TILE-LIKE") FINISH I st Coat - Zinsser - Pigmented Shellac 2nd Coat - PPG #98-1 series, "Aquapon" Waterbased Epoxy 3rd Coat - PPG #98-1 series, "Aquapon" Waterbased Epoxy Not less than 4.0 mils dry film thickness, excluding first coat. ASBESTOS CEMENT: r-? J IPS-9: 2-COAT (FLAT) FINISH Ist Coat - PPG #17-921 series, "SealGrip" Acrylic Universal Primer 2nd Coat - Porter #689 series, "Hi-Hide" Interior Flat GYPSUM DRYWALL SYSTEMS: IPS-10: 2-COAT (FLAT) FINISH Ist Coat - PPG #17-921 series, "SealGrip" Acrylic Universal Primer 2nd Coat - Porter #689 series, "Hi-Hide" Interior Flat IPS-11: ALKYD (SEMI-GLOSS) ODORLESS: Ist Coat - PPG #17-921 series, "SealGrip" Acrylic Universal Primer 2nd Coat - Porter#439 series, "Glyptex" Interior Oil S/Gloss 3rd Coat - Porter#439 series, "Glyptex" Interior Oil S/Gloss Not less than 2.5 mils dry film thickness. IPS-12: ("TILE-LIKE") FINISH 1st Coat - PPG # 17-921 series, "SealGrip" Acrylic Universal Primer 2nd Coat - PPG #98-1 series, "Aquapon" Waterbased Epoxy 3rd Coat - PPG #98-1 series, "Aquapon" Waterbased Epoxy Not less than 4.0 mils dry film thickness. ADDENDUM NO.2 - PAINTING SCHEDULE ' 09901-4 1 1 1 PLAS'T'ER: IPS-13: 2-COAT (FLAT) FINISH: 1 st Coat - Porter# 1129 series, "Blankit" Acrylic Primer 2nd Coat - Porter #689 series, "Hi-Hide" Interior Flat IPS-14: 2-COAT (FLAT) FINISH I st Coat - Porter# 1129 series, "Blankit" Acrylic Primer 2nd Coat - Porter #689 series, "Hi-Hide" Interior Flat IPS-15: ENAMEL (SEMI-GLOSS) I st Coat - Porter#1129 series, "Blankit" Acrylic Primer 2nd Coat - Porter#919 series, "Advantage 900" S/Gloss Enamel 3rd Coat - Porter#919 series, "Advantage 900" S/Gloss Enamel Not less than 2.5 mils dry film thickness. IPS-16: ENAMEL (FULL GLOSS) 1 st Coat - Porter# 1129 series, "Blankit" Acrylic Primer 2nd Coat - Porter#909 series, "Advantage 900" Gloss Enamel 3rd Coat - Porter#909 series, "Advantage 900" Gloss Enamel Not less than 2.5 mils dry film thickness. IPS-17: ("TILE-LIKE") FINISH 1st Coat - PPG #17-921 series, "SealGrip" Acrylic Universal Primer 2nd Coat - PPG #98-1 series, "Aquapon" Waterbased Epoxy 3rd Coat - PPG #98-1 series, "Aquapon" Waterbased Epoxy ACOUSTICAL PLASTER: IPS-18: 2-COAT (FLAT) FINISH 1 st Coat - Porter# 1129 series, "Blankit" Acrylic Primer 2nd Coat - Porter #689 series, "Hi-Hide" Interior Flat FERROUS METAL: IPS-19: (FLAT) FINISH 1st Coat- Porter#296 series, "Glyptex" Red Oxide Alkyd Primer 2nd Coat - Porter #689 series, "Hi-Hide" Interior Flat 3rd Coat - Porter #689 series, "Hi-Hide" Interior Flat Not less than 2.5 mils dry film thickness. IPS-20: (SEMI-GLOSS) FINISH 1st Coat - Porter#296 series, "Glyptex" Red Oxide Alkyd Primer 2nd Coat - Porter#919 series, "Advantage 900" S/Gloss Enamel 3rd Coat - Porter#919 series, "Advantage 900" S/Gloss Enamel First coat not required on items that are shop primed. Not less than 2.5 mils dry film thickness. APMNDUM O 2 - PAINTING SC LE 09901-5 1 IPS-21: (FULL GLOSS) FINISH ' 1 st Coat - Porter#296 series, "Glyptex" Red Oxide Alkyd Primer 2nd Coat - Porter#909 series, "Advantage 900" Gloss Enamel 3rd Coat - Porter#909 series, "Advantage 900" Gloss Enamel First coat not required on items that are shop primed. Not less than 2.5 mils dry film thickness. ZINC COATED METAL. ' IPS-22: (FLAT) FINISH 1st Coat - Porter #299 series, Porter Guard Primer ' 2nd Coat - Porter #689 series, "Hi-Hide" Interior Flat 3rd Coat - Porter #689 series, "Hi-Hide" Interior Flat Not less than 2.5 mils dry film thickness. IPS-23: (SEMI-GLOSS) FINISH 1 st Coat - Porter #299 series, Porter Guard Primer ' 2nd Coat - Porter#919 series, "Advantage 900" S/Gloss Enamel 3rd Coat - Porter#919 series, "Advantage 900" S/Gloss Enamel Not less than 2.5 mils dry film thickness. ' IPS-24: (FULL-GLOSS) FINISH 1st Coat - Porter 4299 series, Porter Guard Primer ' 2nd Coat - Porter#909 series, "Advantage 900" Gloss Enamel 3rd Coat - Porter#909 series, "Advantage 900" Gloss Enamcl Not less than 2.5 mils dry film thickness. ' PAINTED WOODWORK AND HARDBOARD: IPS-25: 3-COAT (SEMI-GLOSS) FINISH 1st Coat - PPG #17-921 series, "SealGrip" Acrylic Universal Primer 2nd Coat - Porter#919 series, "Advantage 900" S/Gloss Enamel 3rd Coat - Porter#919 series, "Advantage 900" S/Gloss Enamel ' IPS-26: 3-COAT (FULL GLOSS) FINISH ' 1st Coat - PPG #17-921 series, "SealGrip" Acrylic Universal Primer 2nd Coat - Porter#909 series, "Advantage 900" Gloss Enamel 3rd Coat - Porter#909 series, "Advantage 900" Gloss Enamel ' STAINED WOODWORK: IPS-27: STAIN - VARNISH (SATIN) FINISH ' 1 st Coat - Porter #300-305 series, "Wood Guardian" Stain 2nd Coat -- Porter#312 series, "Wood Guardian" Satin Varnish ' 3rd Coat - Porter#312 series, "Wood Guardian" Satin Varnish Fill open grained wood with filler and wipe before fast varnish coat. _ ADDENDUM N0.2 - PAINTINGSCHEDULE _ 09901-6 1 NATURAL FINISH WOODWORK: IPS-29: VARNISH (RUBBED) FINISH I st Coat - Bleached shellac. 2nd Coat - Rubbing varnish. 3rd Coat - Rubbing varnish. Fill open grained wood with filler and wipe before first varnish coat. CONCRETE FLOOR: IPS-31: J 1 PIGMENTED POLYURETHANE (FULL GLOSS) FINISH 1 st Coat - Concrete conditioner. 2nd Coat - Porter #318 series, "Wood Guardian" Gloss Polyurethane 3rd Coat - Porter #318 series, "Wood Guardian" Gloss Polyurethane WOOD FLOORS: IPS-32: CLEAR POLYURETHANE (FULL-GLOSS) FINISH. Ist Coat - Stain and Eller as indicated. 2nd Coat - Porter #318 series, "Wood Guardian" Gloss Polyurethane 3rd Coat - Porter #318 series, "Wood Guardian" Gloss Polyurethane COTTON OR CANVAS COVERING OVER INSULATION: IPS-33: LATEX EMULSION "SIZE" (FLAT) I st (Size Coat) - Interior latex emulsion. 2nd Coat - Interior latex emulsion. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew-proof. END OF SECTION ADDEIDU?vI NO.2 - PAIN_jTNG SCHEDULE _ 09901-7 ' SECTION 14420 INCLINED WHEELCHAIR PLATFORM LIFT 1 PART1 GENERAL ' 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES Indoor inclined platform wheelchair lifts. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS ' Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Anchor placement in concrete. Section 04800 - Masonry Assemblies: Anchor placement in masonry. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking in framed construction for lift attachment. ' Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Stair walls. Section 13650 - Fire Alarm System: Building Fire Alarm Integration system to ' connect the lift control system with the building fire alarm system. Division 16 - Electrical: Electrical power service and wiring connections. 1.3 REFERENCES ASME A17.5 - Elevator and Escalator Electrical Equipment. ASME A18.1 - Safety Standard for Platform Lifts and Stairway Chairlifts. CSA B44.1 - Elevator and Escalator Electrical Equipment. CSA B355 - Lifts for Persons with Physical Disabilities. ICC/ANSI Al 17.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code. CSA - National Electric Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS Submit under provisions of Section 01300. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions, including preparation, storage and handling requirements. INCLINED LIFT SPECIFICATION 1 2. Include complete description of performance and operating characteristics. 3. Show maximum and average power demands. Shop Drawings: 4. Show typical details of assembly, erection and anchorage. 5. Include wiring diagrams for power, control, and signal systems. 6. Show complete layout and location of equipment, including required clearances. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, representing actual product, color, and patterns. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' Manufacturer Qualifications: From with minimum 10 years documented experience in manufacturing of inclined wheelchair platform lifts of installations of type specified. Installer Qualifications: Firm licensed to install equipment of this scope, with evidence of experience with specified equipment. Installer shall maintain an adequate stock of replacement parts and have qualified people available to ensure timely maintenance and callback service at the project site. ' 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Provide platform lifts in compliance with: 1. ASME A18.1 - Safety Standard for Platform Lifts and Stairway ' Chairlifts_ 2. ASME A17.5 - Elevator and Escalator Electrical Equipment. 3. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code. ' 4. 5. ' Provide platform lifts in compliance with: 6. CSA B355 - Lifts for Persons with Physical Disabilities. 7. CSA B44.1/ASME A17.5 - Elevator and Escalator Electrical Equipment. 8. CSA - National Electric Code. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. INCLINED LIFT SPECIFICATION 2 1 Store components off the ground in a dry covered area, protected from adverse weather conditions. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS Do not use wheelchair lift for hoisting materials or personnel during construction period. 1.9 WARRANTY Warranty: Manufacturer shall warrant the wheelchair lift materials and workmanship for two years following completion of installation. Extended Warranty: Provide an extended manufacturer's warranty for the entire warranty period covering the wheelchair lift materials and workmanship for the following additional extended period beyond the initial warranty: Three additional years. 2.1 MANUFACTURERS PART 2 PRODUCTS Acceptable Manufacturer: Garaventa Lift; U.S. address: P.O. Box 1769, Blaine, WA 98231-1769. Canadian Address: 7505 134A St., Surrey, BC V3 W 7113 Toll-Free 1-800-663-6556 Tel: (604) 594-0422. Fax: (604) 594-9915 Email: roductinfo araventa.ca. Web: www.p-araventa.ca Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 STAIR LIFT FOR STRAIGHT OR TURNING STAIRWAYS Inclined Platform Lift: Garaventa Stair-Lift, Model GSL Artira inclined platform lift for straight and turning stairways. Lift consists of a tubular guide rail system, a folding platform that is moved along the guide rails by a rope sprocket drive system, over speed safety system and call stations at each landing. Conform to the following design requirements: 1. Application: a. Indoor. 2. Platform Load Rating: 250 kg (550 lb) with minimum safety factor of 3. Travel Speed: 101.6 mm/s (20 fpm) slowing to 50 percent of rated speed before entering and while rounding corners. 4. Platform Deck: 1.6 mm (16 gauge) sheet metal coated with electrostatically applied and baked anti-skid Sandex black paint. a. Platform Size A (ADA Compliant): 800 mm (31-1/2 in) wide by 1220mm (48 in) long. INCLINED LIFT SPECIFICATION_ 3 ' b. Platform Size B: 800mm (31-1/2 in) wide by 1050 mm (41-3/8 in) long. C. Platform Size C: 800 mm (31-1/2 in) wide by 900 mm (35-3/8 in). d. Platform Size D: 700 mm (27-1/2 in) wide by 750mm (29-1/2 ' 5. Platform Operation: a. Automatic Fold: Folded and unfolded electrically from the call b. station. Emergency Manual Fold: When unit is left in the open position, platform may be manually folded and retained in closed position. ' 6. Under Platform Obstruction Sensing: Provide an under platform sensing device to stop the platform a . from traveling in the downward direction when encountering 1.8 b. (4 lbs) of pressure. Platform is permitted to travel in the opposite direction of obstruction to allow clearing. ' 7. Passenger Restraining Arms: Platform equipped with retractable passenger restraining arms in a . compliance with ASME A18.1a - 2001 or more recent edition. b. Arms stop moving when an obstruction causing 20 N (41bf) of pressure is encountered and will immediately retract when the signal is removed. c. Provide with means to manually unlock and open the restraining ' arms for passenger emergency evacuation. d. Arms are folded and unfolded electrically from the call stations or platform controls. ' e. Top of arms mounted 948 mm (37-3/8 in.) above the platform deck. When in guarding position the arms are located above the perimeter of the platform. ' f. The gaps between ends of arms shall not exceed 100 mm (4 in.) 8. Boarding Ramps: a. Provide boarding sides of platform with retractable ramps ' positioned for travel at a height of 152mm (6 in.) measured vertically above the platform deck. b. Lock ramps in their guarding positions during travel. When the platform is at the landing, only the retractable ramp servicing the landing shall be operable. c. Ramps shall be folded and unfolded electrically. ' d. Retractable ramps, in the guarded position, shall withstand a force of 556 N (125 lbs.) applied on any 100 nun by 100 mm (4 in. by 4 in.) area. This force shall not cause the height of the ' ramp, at any point in its length, to be less than 152 mm (6 in.) measured vertically above the platform deck. e. Provide a means to manually unlock the ramps for emergency ' evacuation when platform is located at a landing. ' INCLINED LIFT SPECIFICATION 4 1 1 1 1 1 f. Provide with a bi-directional obstruction sensitive device on the travel direction side end of the platform to stop lift when 1.8 kg (4 lbs.) of pressure is encountered. Platform is permitted to travel in the opposite direction of obstruction to allow clearing. g. When platform folds, passenger restraining arms shall fold down and be covered by the folded platform. 9. Platform Side Wall: a. Provide non-boarding and non-guide-rail side of the platform with a sidewall of not less than 152 mm (6 in.) in height, measured vertically from the platform deck. b. When the platform is folded the side-wall shall cover the platform controls providing protection from vandalism. 10. Pedestrian Safety Lights: a. Equip platform with amber pedestrian safety lights located at both ends of the platform to alert pedestrian traffic that the platform is on the stairway. 11. Hand Grips: a. Equip platform with two 174mm (6 7/8 in.) long by 32 mm (1-1/4 in.) diameter aluminum hand grips or grab bars on the front face of the platform with the top being 845 mm (33-1/4 in.) above the platform deck. 12. Clearance Dimensions: a. When folded platform shall not protrude more than 321 to 346mm (12-5/8 to 13-5/8 in.) from mounting surface. b. When unfolded and in use platform shall not protrude more than 1015 to 1040 mm (40 to 41 in.) from wall. 13. Controls: a. Platform Controls: 24 V Low Voltage type. b. Platform equipped with emergency stop switch located within reach of the passenger 942 mm (37-1/8 in.) above platform deck. When activated emergency stop button shall cause electric power to be removed from the drive system stopping lift immediately. C. Operating controls shall be two separate 36mm (1-1/2 in.) round constant pressure buttons with directional arrows mounted on the front surface of the platform control panel. d. Directional buttons shall prompt the user with the available travel direction by illuminating the appropriate button. e. When platform arrives at landing and the user releases the directional button, the passenger restraining arms and boarding ramp shall unfold automatically allowing passenger to disembark. f Platform shall equipped for: 1) Keyed Operation. 2) Keyless operation. 14. Passenger Seat: Fold-down type with safety belt. INCLINED LIFT SPECIFICATION 5 1 1 15. Side Loading Platform: Provide with automatic folding ramps and kickplate at boarding sides of platform. 17. Platform Security Lock: Provide to prevent unauthorized unfolding of the platform. 18. Attendant Hand Held Pendant Control: Provide with plug-in socket on platform control panel. 19. Autofold Platform: Provide to automatically fold platform into storage position when left unused in open position at a landing for field adjustable period of 1 to 10 minutes. n ete- 21. Platform On Board Emergency Alarm: Provide platform with on board alarm that sounds when emergency stop button is pushed. Equip alarm with battery back-up. 22 - RBI) we Plafforon Boa . J: ti_ . A>"' ) -m ° heW iravE??? sFCtftdE rd bozi`r ime-poslfF emote vl"ear ?,?c'v'eatiAn ai -EFa$l ff#LiS. __ M. .. ramig extensions 76 mm (3 in.) extruded alundmuni added *^ rr , 60 ma; n„1.,t„ 23. Hwmgei- 4. v'v5s7'-crE-ftniri-iiz-r?sc-pasrr-oTC77e ;Ykcc eT777c?hcrrr.CC'i . T s'7'rs7 shall 8top Drive and Guide Rail System 25. Operation: a. Motor: 2 H.P. electric motor with an integrated brake. b. Required power: 208-240 VAC, single phase, 50/6011z. on a dedicated 20 amp circuit. Rated current shall be 7 amps for operation with rated load. Locate roped sprocket drive system consisting of a motor, gearbox and PCC controller (Programmable Configuration Controller) at the upper end of the tubes. PCC controller shall be custom programmed to soft start and stop and the slow down platform travel speed for all corners and landings of the lift. Normal operating speed shall be 6 m per minute (20 feet per minute), slowing to 50 percent of this speed before entering and while rounding corners. d. Equip drive with an emergency manual lowering system. 26. Standard Drive Cabinet: INCLINED LIFT SPECIFICATION 6 1 r a. Cabinet: 520 mm (20-1/2 in.) wide by 1053 mm (41-1/2 in.) high by 270 mm (10 5/8 in.) b. Cabinet door is key locked and monitored with an electrical cutout safety switch. C. Provide an integrated lockable main disconnect switch and breaker on the drive cabinet. 27. Compact Drive Cabinet with Separate Control Box: a. Compact drive cabinet will house all mechanical drive system components and shall be located at the end of the tube system. b. Controller box will contain all the electrical components of the drive system and be located up to 6 M (20 feet) away from the compact drive. Control box dimensions are 305 mm (12 in.) wide by 610 mm (24 in.) high by 284 mm (11-1/4 in.) C. Provide an integrated lockable mains disconnect and breaker in the compact drive control box. 28. Guide Rail: a. Construct of two 51 mm (2 in.) diameter steel tubes spaced 600 mm-(23-5/8 in.) apart vertically. Tubes will run parallel to the stairs and horizontal to landings throughout the length of travel. b. When negotiating a horizontal landing a third 51 mm (2 in.) diameter steel tube shall be added to the tube system to guide and stabilize platform. c. Tube system shall not protrude more than 125 to 150 mm (4-7/8 to 5-7/8 in.) from the wall. d. Suspension means contained in the tubes shall be a 8 mm (3/8 in.) diameter galvanized steel core wire rope with a breaking strength of 4300 kg (9460 pound). e. Locate overspeed safety at the bottom of the tube assembly and shall consist of a mechanical overspeed sensor and brake with electrical drive cut-out protection. f. Provide a final limit switch at the upper end of the tubes to stop the platform if it travels past the normal terminal stopping device. die: 3a "Lower Lon-, Mom fhe:qairs. 4siak-s and- %,94 have a final "s-er Mode switeh. DeWe. INCLINED LIFT SPECIFICATION 7 11 32. Steel Support Posts for Guide Rail System: Provide 65 by 65 mm (2- 1/2 by 2-1/2 in.) hollow structural steel tubular posts to support the guide rails. 1) mF4L-f - Panel Provided by foihef:s-m C-M &eel Atbe Armevkk additional Slowa (2 in.) diameter steel -further- safeq, bw2riei- with a maximum .152 ---- (6 imm) algenin Pedestrian Handrail Integrated with Guide Rail: 34. A third rail acting as a handrail shall be added where existing handrails are either removed or blocked by the lifting equipment. 35. The top of the handrail gripping surface shall be between 864 and 965 mm (34 and 38 inches) above the stair nosing and have a smooth gripping surface 38 mm (1-1 /2 in.) in diameter. 36. Handrail shall be in the same vertical plane as the guide rail system. 37. Handrails shall be mounted to the tube assembly and shall not be interrupted by newel posts, or other construction elements or obstructions. Call Stations: 38. Provide a keyed call station at each serviced landing that will automatically shut off if left unattended for over 2 minutes. 39. Call stations, 24 V low voltage with four illuminated 51 by 51 mm (2 by 2 in.) square membrane touch sensitive buttons: one touch platform fold, one touch platform unfold and two directional call and send buttons. 40. Provide call stations with Smart-Lite Technology to prompt the user with the next sequential step of operation. Call station buttons will emit an audible "beep" when pushed to confirm button activation to the user. 41. Provide intermediate stops between the upper and lower landings at the following locations: a. As indicated on the Drawings. b. C. 42. Call stations shall equipped for: a. Keyed Operation. b. Keyless operation. INCLINED LIFT SPECIFICATION 8 ' 43. Provide constant pressure Attendant Call buttons on each call station. 44. Call Station Mounting: ' a. Lower and Intermediate landing call station. 1) Provide surface mounted call station. 2) Provide flush mounting call station painted finish collars to ' trim all call stations that are recessed into the walls. b. Upper landing call station. 1) Provide surface mounted call station on guide rail. 2) Surface mount on wall. 3) Provide flush mounting call station painted finish collars to trim all call stations that are recessed into the walls. ' 3 i l r.,,,, " ifid"' nil Additional Safety or Code Requirements 16 „the 10 eowo-op! .. t., :r,. r 7L Finish Environment Requirements: 47. Design and fabricate lift to manufacturer's standard design for indoor location. _ G,.:.1.. , ,,rl,.. .,n 1.., ......W:...r ,, .r,,:"16,..4. b. Rwiebwih, ghqI4 be supplied in +teel- g ..r,.:,,1,...,...ree 71„l.,r., ,all metal materials shall be mild steel. 49. Design and fabricate lift to manufacturer's standard design for outdoor location. INCLINED LIFT SPECIFICATION 9 1 1 a. Lift to include all modifications recommended by manufacturer for reliable performance in outdoor climate of lift installation site. b. Provide an outdoor weatherproofing package including zinc rich primer on steel surfaces, weather-resistant sealant on the electrical components, stainless steel or plated fasteners and a weatherproofed stainless steel or zinc plated drive box. C. Platform control cover shall be fabricated of a Silver Grey injection-molded polymer. 50. Painting: After pretreating paint with electrostatically applied and baked powder coat as follows: a. Fine Textured Satin Grey (RAL 7030). b. Custom color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's RAL color chart. 2.3 EMERGENCY EVACUATION DEVICE Portable evacuation chair, Garaventa "Evacu-Trac" with steel storage enclosure: 1. Capacity: 1 person, 136 kg (300 lbs.) with minimum 1.5 times safety factor. 2. Maximum Stair Angle: 40 degrees. 3. Speed Governor: Piston brake. 4. Brake: By manual mechanical brake, attendant must release for descent. 5. Surface Mount Cabinet: a. Steel cabinet and door panel. Available only in Satin Grey, left hinged only. b. Size: Height (1151mm (45-3/8 in.), width 508 mm (20 in.), depth 279 mm (11 in.) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.l EXAMINATION Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. Verify electrical rough-in is at correct location. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. INCLINED LIFT" SPECIFICATION _ 10 3.3 INSTALLATION Install platform lifts in accordance with in compliance with regulatory requirements specified and the manufacturer's instructions. Install system components and connect to building utilities. Accommodate equipment in space indicated. Startup equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Adjust for smooth operation. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Perform tests in compliance with regulatory requirements specified and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. Schedule tests with agencies and Architect, Owner, and Contractor present. 3.5 PROTECTION Protect installed products until completion of project. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION INCLINED LIFT SPECIFICATION 11 Creating An Accessible World Garaventa Wheelchair Lifts www.garaventa.ca 15810 1 Design Hot Line: 1-800-663-6556 or +1-604-594-0422 ' Table of Contents Comaanv Introduction ............ ....................•-•-•........................................................................ Z ........... What is an Inclined Platform Lift? ............................................................................................ ' Why an Inclined Platform Lift? ................................................................................................. 3 V tili 4 ' ty ....................................•--................................................................................ ersa Design Where You'll Find Our Lifts .....................................................•-•.............................................. 5 Finishes ......................................................................................................................................6 ' How it Works ...................•-•-................-----.........................................................................•--......7 Component Identification .........................................................................................................8 Platform ......................................................................................................................................9 Standard Platform Safety Features ......................................................................................10 Optional Platform Features ..................................................................................................11 ' Call Stations .............................................................................................................................12 Lower Landing Configuration Options .................................................................................. 13 ' Required Turning Clearances ...........................................................................••--•-................ 15 Standard Upper Landing Drive Configurations .................................................................... 17 Alternate Drive Configurations .............................................................................................. 18 Drive System ............................................................................................................................ 20 ' Additional Component Options ............................................................................................. 21 Guide Tubes ............................................................................................................................. 22 ' Platform Storage at Upper Landing (Optional) .....................................................................23 Platform Running Clearances Required for Platform Folded Up .......................................24 ' Minimum Overhead Clearances to Meet Code Requirements ............................................24 Attachment Methods. .26 Wall Height Requirements for Direct Mounting ....................................................................28 ' Loading Diagram .....................................................................................................................29 Technical Reference of Standard Features ...........................................................................30 ' Typical Wiring Layout .............................................................................................................31 I GSL ARTIRA Design & Planning Guide 15810-D-DP -2- www.garaventa.ca 1 Company Introduction Design Hot Line: 1-800-663-6556 or +1-604-594-0422 Garaventa - the World's #1 choice for accessibility solutions. Garaventa has been dedicated to developing safe and reliable accessibility solutions since 1978 and is now an industry leader worldwide. Years of hard work and an uncompromising commitment to quality have enabled us to perfect the internationally renowned Garaventa Stair-Lift. This same commitment has led Garaventa to develop other accessibility products such as the Xpress If inclined platform lift and the Genesis vertical platform lift. The Genesis vertical platform lift incorporates state of the art features with elegant styling and quiet ' operation. The Genesis has a variety of models and configurations with many standard and optional features to choose from. With the development of the Genesis vertical platform lift, Garaventa has taken a significant step towards solving most accessibility challenges for building owners. f] The Xpress II is a new generation inclined platform lift for straight stairways. The sleek and attractive Xpress II can be installed indoors or outdoors and is a cost-effective access solution. The Garaventa GSL Artira described in this Design and Planning Guide is able to follow straight or curving stairways, up several flights of stairs and across horizontal landings. It is suitable for indoor and outdoor applications with many standard and optional features allowing the GSLArtira to be customized to meet the needs of the user. With endorsements from leading designers, architects and planners, custom designed Garaventa Stair- Lifts have been installed in over 25,000 sites worldwide. Garaventa Stair-Lift installations include the high profile locations of 10 Downing Street, Harvard Business School, and the National Art Gallery of Ottawa. Our expertise in providing accessibility solutions has enabled our design team to undertake the most challenging access problems or issues and develop innovative solutions for schools, places of worship, offices, hotels, airports, subways, and a wide range of public and private buildings around the world. We have built our business on service. Please contact us and let us help solve your accessibility challenges. ®2008 Garaventa. As we are continuously improving our products, specifications outlined in this guide are subject to change without notice. GSL ARTIRA Design & Planning Guide 15810-D-OP -3- www.garaventa.ca 1 [1 Product Description Design Hot Line: 1-800-663-6556 or +1-604-594-0422 What is an Inclined Platform Lift? An inclined platform lift easily transports a passenger, in a wheelchair or someone who has difficulty maneuvering stairs up and down a stairway. The lift can be operated independently or by an attendant with a attendant remote control (optional item). Compatible for indoor and outdoor applications, the Garaventa Inclined Platfonrr Lift is a versatile, attractive and cost-effective accessibility solution. Why an Inclined Platform Lift? No Building Renovations (Modifications) Inclined platform lifts fit easily into most stairways and do not require specially constructed hoistways. Preserve Heritage Buildings Flexibility in design enables Garaventa's designers to adapt an inclined platform lift to virtually any building site with very little or no structural modifications. The availability of many colors and finishes ensures the lift will blend with its environment and preserve the look of a heritage building. Save Valuable Floor Space Building floor space, whether a business or a school is valuable. Inclined platform lifts utilize very little of this expensive commodity. Meet ADA Requirements Garaventa inclined platform lifts are approved in the ADA Accessibility Guidelines as a means to provide public building access when licensed for independent operation. They may also be used as an accessible means of egress when equipped with an auxiliary standby power system. Design Assistance ' With over 25 years of experience, Garaventa is willing and able to overcome almost any design challenge you face. Please call our Design Hot Line with your accessibility challenge. 1 1-800-663-6556 or 1+604-594-0422 ' GSL ARTIRA Design & Planning Guide 15810-D-DP -4- www.garaventa.ca Product Description Design Hot Line: 1-800-663-6556 or +1-604-594-0422 Design Versatility The GSL Artira can be designed for turning, straight or radiating stairways with or without intermediate landings. It is suitable for multi-level buildings with a wide variety of design configurations. Some of the many design configurations include: Applications Include: - Schools - Churches - Courthouses - Commercial Buildings - Theaters - Historical Buildings - Restaurants - Residential - Hospitals - And Many More GSL ARTIRA Design & Planning Guide 15810-D-DP -5- www.garaventa.ca w1b945y.11L vaanWray TV11611 r-Sauv1111 %?&W1QWV Product Description Design Hot Line: 1-800-663-6556 or +1-604594-0422 Where You'll Find Our Lifts Over 25,000 installations world wide. Some of our well-known installations include: • National Art Gallery - Ottawa, ON, Canada - Presidential Palace - Seoul, Korea • City Hall, San Francisco, CA, USA • #10 Downing Street - London, England • The Peak _ Hong Kong Madison Square Garden - New York, NY, USA • Vancouver City Hall - Vancouver, BC, Canada • Harvard Business School - Cambridge, MA, USA • Metro System - Santiago, Chile & Mexico City, Mexico • BART (Bay Area Rapid Transit), San Francisco, CA, USA • Safeco Field, Seattle, Washington, USA GSLARTIRA Design & Planning Guide 15810-D-DP - 6 - For a list of installations in your area, please contact your local representative or call Garaventa. www.garaventa.ca Found in installations such as hotel lobbies or observatories. An ideal layout for stages or store entrances. unusual tsenas: For applications such as theaters, restaurants or lecture halls. SF Idl .7LO11 .?J. Grand staircases in hotels or theaters. 1 Product Description Design Hot Line- 1-800-663-6556 or +1-604-594-0422 ' Finishes The GSL Artira is finished in a durable polyester powder paint coating that is electrostatically applied and baked at 210° C (410° F). Standard Color Garaventa's standard color, Satin Grey (fine textured), complements a variety of modem and traditional decors (color samples are available upon request). Custom Colors (Optional) Garaventa also offers a choice of colors from the internationally accepted RAL color charts (color samples are available upon request). ' Stainless Steel Finish (Optional or for Outdoor Applications) For aesthetic purposes the tubes, towers, drive box, sensing plate and call stations can be ' ordered in an electro-polished stainless steel finish. Stainless steel components are also available in a painted finish. 1 I Outdoor Applications When located outdoors, the lift will be equipped with outdoor compatible components. See page 21 for more information on the outdoor weather-resistant package. For outdoor units, stainless steel components are also available in a painted finish. Note: In certain indoor applications such as near a swimming pool, an outdoor weather-resistant package may be required. I GSL ARTIRA Design & Planning Guide 15810-D-DP -7- www.garaventa.ca How it Works Design Hot Line: 1-800-663-6556 or +1-604-594-0422 How it Works Two steel guide tubes which are custom designed for each stairway support the platform. These tubes contain a continuous loop of wire haul rope that is attached to the upper carriage. This carriage is mounted to the back of the platform through a slot in the upper tube. The drive system, consisting of an electric motor and drive cog, moves the wire haul rope and the wheelchair platform up and down the stairway. Ur Oversp Section Through Tubes and Drive System Overspeed Safety The Overspeed Safety is located at the lower end of the tube system and consists of a mechanical pawl and electrical cut-out switch. In the unlikely event that the lift should descend too quickly, both the mechanical and electrical safety will activate simultaneously and stop the platform from moving. Overspeed Safety GSL ARTIRA Design & Planning Guide 15810-D-DP - $ ' www.garaventa.ca Drive System Mr.- ue.,, 0--- Steel Guide Tubes (Drive Box Shown) Drive Cog Main Components Design Hot Line. 1-800-663-6556 or +1-604-594-0422 Component Identification The main components of an inclined lift are: Platform Drive Guide Tubes Call Stations Call Station Standard ; Drive Audio Visual Alert System l ............ 1 Call Station Support Tower Guide Tubes Call Station Platform :- Overspeed Safety Optional Compact - .- ' - '. Drive System rt`Y' Lower tube arrangement with Tensioning Device for optional Compact Drive System GSLARTIRA Design & Planning Guide 15810-D-DP ' 9' www.garaventa.ca Again Components Design Not Line: 1-800-663-6556 or +1-604-594.0422 Platform Platform Sixes The platform is available in. four sia with a rated load of 250 kg. (550 lb - 800 x 1220mm (31 112" x 48") - 800 x 1050mm (31 1/2" x 41 - 800 x 900mm (31 1/2" x 35 U - 700 x 750mm (27 1/2" x 29 1 /; "ADA Compliant Platform Hanger (Under Hanger Sensing upgrade optional) Anti-Slip Dock Surface Ramps Bi-Directions Sensing Platform Components Key Switch Innflnnal) Attendant Remote Emergency Plug In (Optional) Stop Button Directional Buttons Platform Control Panel The durable and vandal resistant platform control panel is mounted to the platform hanger. The standard platform controls consist of two large illuminated Directional Buttons for independent operation and an Emergency Stop Button (with illumination optional). Safety Arms ler Platform using Plate Pedestrian Safety Lights (Pedestrian Audio Alert. upgrade opfi.onal) Attendant Remote Control Unit The platform can be equipped with an optional Attendant Remote Control that overrides the Directional Buttons during attendant operation. The remote control unit can be removed when not required, G5L ARTIRA Design & Planning Guide i 58104)-DP -10- www.galraventa.ca Platform Controls Grab Bars 1 Main Components Design Hot Line. 1-800-663-6556 or +1-604-594-0422 Standard Platform Safety Features Safety Sensing The platform is equipped with safety sensors listed below. These sensors will automatically stop the lift when activated by 1.8 kg (4 lbs.) of pressure. The platform can then be backed away from the obstruction allowing the object to be removed. Leading Ramp Sensor When the platform is called to or from the landing area in the folded up position the leading ramp is sensitive to obstructions. ' Under Platform Sensing Plate The under platform sensing plate detects obstacles underneath the platform. ' Bi-Directional Ramp Sensing The ramps are designed to be obstruction sensitive in the direction of travel on the outside of the ramps as well as from within the platform. The internal ramp sensor prevents a wheelchair from being off-center on the platform deck. Curved Safety Arms Fully automatic 32mm (1 1/4") diameter Curved Safety Arms further increase the safety of the GSL Artira. When in the guarding position the inside dimensions of the arms do not take away from the clear platform size. The top of the arm is located 948mm (37 3/8") above the platform deck. If arms should encounter an obstruction, they will automatically retract to the up position. Emergency Stop Button Located on the platform control panel, this large red button is used to stop the lift in an emergency. Smooth Start & Stop For passenger safety and comfort, the platform is programmed to slow to 50% of the normal travel speed well in advance of the corners and resumes full speed when the platform reaches the straight section of the stairs. The lift controller is also programmed to slow the platform travel speed when approaching and departing landings. Grab Bars These 25mm 0") diameter aluminum bars are located on the front face of the platform control panel to assist passengers in loading and unloading. Pedestrian Safety Lights This illuminated tube lighting located at the base of the ramps visually alerts pedestrians of the platform's location during travel, while still being discreet to the passenger- Emergency Fold In an emergency the platform is able to be manually folded and will lock in the folded position. Optional Platform Features Platform Lock This lock secures the platform in its folded position protecting the unit from vandalism. GSL ARTIRA Design & Planning Guide 15810-D-DP -11- www.garaventa.ca Ll 1 Optional Components Design Hot Line: 1-800-663-6556 or +1-604-594-0422 Under Hanger Obstruction Sensing When the platform moves to or from the landing area in the folded up position, sensors on the underside of the hanger will automatically stop the lift when activated by a minimum of 1.8 kg (4 lbs.) of pressure. Pedestrian Audio Alert When the platform is folded up and traveling between stations, an audio chime on the platform is activated indicating the lift is in motion. The chime is deactivated when a passenger is using the lift. Folding Seat Designed for use by ambulatory passengers, this folding seat is equipped with a safety belt. Dek-Lite Mounted below the folding seat, this light illuminates the platform for safe loading and unloading, ideal for areas with poor lighting (only available with the folding seat option). Side Load Designed for confined lower landing spaces, this feature opens a side ramp simultaneously with both of the end ramps. This allows the passenger to wheel onto the platform diagonally, offering easier access and reducing the required loading and unloading clearances. Auto Fold This feature will allow the lift to automatically fold if left unattended for a period of time at a landing. This ensures the stairway remains clear in the event someone forgets to fold the lift. Platform on Board Alarm If the platform Emergency Stop Button is activated it illuminates and an alarm located on board the platform will sound alerting others that the passenger on the lift requires assistance. Attendant Remote Control A hand held remote control plugs into a socket on the platform control panel and overrides the platform controls allowing an attendant to operate the lift. Key Switch To meet some local code requirements a key switch can be added to the platform control panel. Side of Hanger Optical Sensing Mounted on the back of the platform, these sensors are designed to protect pedestrian traffic. This feature detects possible obstructions in the stairway while the lift turns a corner. Note: In some areas certain optional features are either not permitted or mandatory depending on local codes. Please consult your local Garaventa representative for clarification. I GSL ARTIRA Design & Planning Guide 15810-D-DP -12- www.garaventa.ca Major Components Design Hot Line. 1-800-663-6556 or +1-604-594-0422 Call Stations Each landing is equipped with a call station. The call station enables the user to unfold the platform with a touch of a button. If the platform is not at their landing the user simply presses the illuminated directional button to bring the platform to their landing. Garaventa Smart-Lite TechnologyTM When the call station is turned on the Artira's Smart-Lite TechnologyTM illuminates the correct call station button, guiding the user through the sequenced steps to call and unfold the lift from the call station (patent pending). Call Station Options To meet customer or code requirements an optional Emergency Stop Button (with illumination optional) and an Attendant Call Switch can be added to the call station. Platform Gall Button: Platform and Ramp Fold Down Button Platform and Ramp Power Fold Up Butto Location for Optional Emergency Stop But Location for Optional Attendant Call Switch Call Station Key Switch (Keyless Optional) 4 x 4 electrical box roughed into wall " of C7 t`.; } 4 v ! f q, ' Keyless (optional) A keyless call station is available as an option. ' The keyless lift does not have a keyswitch on the call station. Remote Platform Fold/Call (optional) ' This feature allows the platform to be folded up and called from any call station should the platform be left folded down. CD i S, >/a r013 Surface Mount Call Station Flush Mount Call Station (optional) Mounting Options The call stations can be mounted on the wall (surface or flush mounted) or on a pedestal (when no suitable surface is available). The upper call station can also be mounted on the drive box or on the tube system itself (only available with Drive Box arrangement). Flush mount call stations can be pre-wired during the construction or building renovations, resulting in a cleaner appearance with no surface wiring. ' GSLARTIRA Design & Planning Guide 15810-D-DP Freestanding Call Station Pedestal (optional) -13- www.garaventa.ca Space Requirements Design Hot Line: 1-800-663-6556 or +1-604-594-0422 Lower Landing Configuration Options A variety of lower landing configurations are available to suit each stairway. If you have a unique arrangement, contact your local Garaventa representative or call the Garaventa Design Hot Line for more information. Straight Lower Landing for Drive Box This configuration is used when there is adequate space to load/unload straight onto the platform at the lower landing. Drop-Down Lower Landing (Drive Box System Shown) When lower landing space is limited, the lower landing section of the tubes are angled downward at a 45° angle to land the platform as close to the bottom step as possible. This configuration is often combined with the side load feature. Straight Lower Landing for Compact Drive The Rope Tensioning Device used with the Compact Drives requires a minimum clearance of 250mm (9 7/8") from the end of the tubes to the nearest obstruction. Straight Landing - With Side Load GSL ARTIRA Design & Planning Guide 15810-D-DP -14- www.garaventa.ca Straight Lower Landing Space Requirements Design Hot line: 1-800-663-6556 or+1-604-594-0422 90° and 180° Lower Landings These configurations place the platform away from pedestrian traffic while loading/unloading and storing the platform. Ideal for stairs with sufficient clearances such as stairways with alcoves, hallways or otherwise unused spaces under stairs. rn Cd co C °i `° CL 18 & 19 Required Lower Landing Clearances Platform Size Dim. A Dim. B Dim. C 800 x 1220 mm* 2883 1708 1540 (31 1/2" x 48")* (1131/2) (671/4) (605/8) 800 x 1050 mm 2713 1538 1370 (31 1/2" x 41 3/8") (1063/4) (60112) (537/8) 800 x 900 mm 2563 1388 1220 (31 1/2" x 35 3/8") (1007/8) (545/8) (48) 700 x 750 mm 2368 1218 1070 (27 1/2" x 29 1/2") (931/4) (48) (42 1/8) Notes: - 'ADA Compliant - Dimension A+ B has been calculated using a drop- down landing configuration and a first riser height of 178mm (7"). - Dimensions are based on standard platforms with standard ramps. Ramp extensions will increase the clearances required. - Contact your local Garaventa representative or call the Garaventa Design Hot Line for more information, Landing Over a Flight This enables the platform to be loaded/ unloaded and stored over a flight of stairs that is not being serviced by the lift. GSLARTIRADesign & Planning Guide 15810-0-DP - 15- www.garaventa.ca Space Requirements Design Hot Line: 1-800-663-6556 or +1-604-594-0422 Required Turning Clearances F • (Note: Nearest obstruction. ie, handrail or wall) v (Inside Bend) a? -o A c Wall to outsi e of tubes .s r t E • (Straight Lift Applications) No Bends m "M _ al Platform Folded Up ..Platform, Folded Down ' Side Load Ramp Loading (optional) h Stair Width Clearances and Platform Projection Dimensions GSLARTIRA Design & Planning Guide 15810-D-DP " 16 - www.garaventa.ca Space Requirements Design Hot Line: 1-800-663-6556 or +1-604-594-0422 Turning Clearance Chart The space requirements of the GSL Artira are affected by how the tube system is supported. The lift can either be mounted directly to the wall, Direct Mount, or structural support posts can be supplied Tower mount. For further information on Attachment Methods please refer to page 26 & 27. Platform Sizes Dim. Attachment 800 x 1220 mm' 800 x 1050 mm 800 x 900 mm 700 x 750 mm Method (31 1/2" x 48")" (31 1/2" x 41 3/8") (31 112 x 35 3/8") (27 1/2" x 29 1/2") mm in mm in mm in mm in Direct Mount 125 47/8 125 47/8 125 47/8 125 47/8 A Tower Mount 150 5 7/8 150 57/8 150 57/8 150 57/8 B Direct Mount 320 12 5/8 320 12 5/8 320 12 5/8 330 13 Tower Mount 345 13 5/8 345 13 5/8 345 13 5/8 355 14 D Direct Mount 1015 40 1015 40 1015 40 900 35 3/8 Tower Mount 1040 41 1040 41 1040 41 925 36 3/8 D Direct Mount 1230 48 3/8 1230 48 3/8 1230 48 3/8 1115 44 Tower Mount 1255 49 3/8 1255 49 3/8 1255 49 3/8 1140 45 Direct Mount 1035 40 3/4 1035 40 3/4 1035 40 3/4 920 36 1/4 E Tower Mount 1060 41 3/4 1060 41 3/4 1060 41 3/4 945 37 1/4 Direct Mount 1225 48 1/4 1185 46 5/8 1145 45 1/8 1025 40 3/8 F Tower Mount 1250 49 1/4 1210 47 5/8 1170 46 1/8 1050 41 3/8 Note. - "ADA Compliant - Dimensions E and F includes 20mm (3/4") running clearance and include standard ramps. Ramp extensions will increase the clearances required. Contact your local Garaventa representative or call the Garaventa Design Hot Line for more information. - For towers mounted to 2" x 6" wood boards on walls (see page 26) add 38mm (1 1/2") to the above tower mount dimensions. Consult Garaventa Consult Garaventa for Clearances of Outside Radius Bends GSL ARTIRA Design & Planning Guide 15810-D-DP -17- www.garaventa.Ca II Drive Configurations Standard Upper Landing Drive Configurations A variety of configurations are available for each drive system. If you have a unique or complex application that is not covered in this guide, contact your local Garaventa representative or call the Garaventa Design Hot Line for more information. Standard In-Line Drive The standard in-line drive configuration places the drive 1200mm (47 1/4") from the top of the stairs to allow a passenger to load and unload the platform and maneuver past the Drive Box. M 100( M 90° & 180° Drive The 90° or 180° configuration allows the drive box to be located away from the top of the stairs and pedestrian traffic. 820 (32 1/4") min, • I e 4_ 4 4 I I I 100 (3 7/8"1 300 (11 3/4") Min- 521 (201/2") men. Note: For 90" and 180° configurations, add 200mm (7 7/8") if the Call Station is mounted on the tubes. Drive Box dimensions: 1053mm (41 1/2") high x 521 mm (201/2') wide x 270mm (10 5/8") deep (refer to page 20). Design Hot Line: 1-800-663-6556 or +1-604-594-0422 Offset Drive When upper landing space is limited, the Drive Box can be positioned closer to the stairs and to the wall. i? ti M ? n ? GSLARTIRA Design & Planning Guide 15810-D-DP -18- www.garaventa.ca 1821 (71 5/6") min. 1200 (47 1/4") min_ 460 (18 1/8") min. [1 Drive Configurations Design Hot Line: 1-800-663-6556 or +1-604-594-0422 Compact Drive The Compact Drive is designed to utilize a minimum amount of space, in some conditions as little as 203mm (8"). Required clearances vary with stair angle, motor orientation, as well as ramp and platform sizes. For further details on this drive system refer to page 20, and for lower landing considerations see page 13. 152mm (6") - 406mm (16") Dimension variable with stair angle, motor orientation, ramp extensions and platform size. Reverse Drive By reversing the drive box it can be placed closer to the top stair nose, while still maintaining sufficient clearance for loading and unloading. This scenario is ideal for landings between stairs or where walls end at the top of the stairs. Alternate Drive Configurations Drive on Treads - Flight Beyond Upper Landing Designed for intermediate landings with restricted clearances due to narrow hallways, the drive box is mounted on the stair treads. This ensures maximum clearance on the landing for pedestrian traffic. ' GSLARTIRA Design & Planning Guide 15810-D-DP -19- www.garaventa.ca 1200 (47 1/4') min. Drive Configurations Design Hot Line: 1-800-663-6556 or +1-604-594-0422 Drive Through Wall at 90° or 180° The tubes go through the wall enabling the drive to be stored in a separate room instead of on the upper landing. 1C 475 Drive Under Floor The drive box can be positioned under the floor if sufficient clearances are available. It can be placed on its side or right side up. ............. V Drive on Shelf The drive box can be attached to a shelf that is fastened to a solid wall. GSL ARTIRA Design & Planning Guide 15810-D_DP -20- vwvw.garaventa.ca 1 1 1 Main Components Design Hot Line: 1-800-663-6556 or +1-604-594-0422 Drive System The drive is always located at the upper end of the guide tubes. It is available in two arrangements, the standard Drive Box and the Compact Drive. Each drive system is suited to a particular application, with a variety of design configurations to choose from (see pages 17-19 for drive configurations). Mains Power Requirements Both drive systems require 208-240 VAC single-phase 50/60 Hz. on a dedicated 20 amp. circuit. / 213 [8 318"] iv Upper Tube Centerline v cn o iz- -t Lower Tube Centerline N M . N ? m n 21 !2p 1/?7 Drive Box Drive Box The most common drive arrangement, the Drive Box, uses a 2 H.P. motor and is always attached to the upper end of the guide tubes. The drive box has a multitude of design configurations (under the floor through the wall and many more). Please see pages 17-19 for some of the many design options available. Motor Drive Support Bracket Cover (if required) Drive Cog a O b Controller Box for CO Compact Drive Compact Drive rv Compact Drive The compact drive is ideal for lifts with restricted upper landings. It utilizes the same components as the Drive Box however, they are arranged differently. The drive cog and the motor are directly attached to the upper end of the guide tube system, with the electrical components housed in a Controller Box that can be located up to 6 meters (20ft) away from the compact drive. The compact drive is not available outdoors or with stainless steel tubes. This drive arrangement utilizes a tensioning device at the lower landing (see page 13). I GSL ARTIRA Design & Planning Guide 15810-D-DP -21 - www.garaventa.ca 1 ' Additional Component Options Design Hot Line: 1-800-663-6556 or +1-604-594-0422 Additional Component Options ' The GSL Artira can be equipped with a number of additional safety features: ' Audio Visual Alert When the lift is in use, a wall mounted strobe light and audible chime cautions pedestrians in the vicinity that the lift is in operation. The volume of the audible chime can be adjusted on site. ' Fire Alarm Integration (Fire Service) The fire service feature is designed to interface with a building's fire safety system and interrupt power to the lift when the fire alarm sounds. This ensures the lift will not obstruct stairway traffic during ' evacuation. If the lift is in use when the alarm sounds, the lift will only allow the platform to travel to the designated landing with the emergency exit. The lift requires the passenger to use the constant pressure direction button. Custom versions of this feature are available. Consult Garaventa. ' Auxiliary Power System This feature ensures that the lift continues to operate during a power outage. The self contained battery unit can be located up to 4.5 meters (15') away from the drive system and will ' power the lift up to one hour at full capacity. This time may vary depending on the lift length and number of bends. Box Size: 597 mm (23 112") high x 444 mm (171/2') wide x 192 mm (7 518") deep ' Outdoor Applications When located outdoors, the lift will require stainless steel tubes, towers and audio visual alerts (if specified). An outdoor platform is zinc plated and includes a cap on the attendant remote control ' socket and weather-resistant sealant on the electrical components. The outdoor Drive Box is weather- resistant and available in a zinc-plated finish (with a painted finish) or polished stainlesss steel. 1 A vinyl platform cover is recommended. The Compact Drive System is not available for outdoor applications or with stainless steel tubes. ' Note: In certain indoor applications such as near a swimming pool, an outdoor weather- resistant package may be required. 1 G5L ARTIRA Design & Planning Guide 22- 1581O-D-DP - www.ga rave nta. ca Major Components Guide Tubes Design Hot Line: 1-800-663-6556 or +1-604-594-0422 The platform travels on two steel tubes, 51mm (2') in diameter, that are affixed 600mm (23 518") apart vertically. The location of the tubes on the stairs depends on the platform size and the angle of the stairs. Generally speaking, the lower tube is approximately 500mm (21 5/8") vertically above the stairs when a 800 x 1220 mm (31 112" x 48") platform is used. Stabilizer The stabilizer tube is placed in horizontal or shallow sections of the lift's travel. This slotted tube allows a roller, mounted to the back of the platform, to enter and travel through. This roller connection creates a triangle of support to stabilize the platform. The stabilizer is required whenever the lift travels horizontally or at an angle of less than 20°. Pedestrian Handrails (Optional) With the installation of the tube system the existing handrails are often obstructed or removed. A third tube, 38mm (1 112'9 in diameter, can be located between the main guide tubes to serve as a pedestrian handrail. In most applications this handrail can be positioned within the accepted code height range. Some restrictions apply when used in conjunction with the horizontal stabilizer (see above for further details on the stabilizer). Contact your local Garaventa representative or call the Garaventa Design Hot Line for more information. Infill Panels (Optional) These mesh screens are located between the towers of the lift to create a safety barrier. As an alternative attachment angles can be welded to the sides of the towers to allow for infill panels of other materials, such as Plexiglas or wood (infill panel material is not supplied by Garaventa). GSL ARTIRA Design & Planning Guide 15810-D-DP - 23 - Horizontal Stabilizer (back of platform shown) Upper Tube Handrail Lower Tube Pedestrian Handrail .ibe www.garaventa.ca Stabilizer Roller Stabilizer Tube Infill Panel 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 Drive Configurations Platform Storage at Upper Landing (Optional) This feature allows the platform to travel along the tubes, while folded, to a storage location off the stairs. A stabilizer tube is required for this application (see page 22 for stabilizer details). Other configurations are possible. A Platform Size Dim Drive 800 x 1220 mm 800 x 1050 mm (31 800 x 900 mm (31 700 x 750 mm Arrangement (31 112" x 48") 1/2" x 41 3/8") 1/2 x 35 3/8") (27 1/2" x 29 1/2") mm in mm in mm in mm in Drive Box 2350 92 1/2 2175 85 5/8 2020 79 1/2 1880 74 A Com act Drive 2035 80 1 /8 1865 73 3/8 1715 67 1 /2 1565 61 5/8 Drive Box 2245 88 3/8 2075 81 3/4 1925 75 3/4 1775 69 7/8 B Compact Drive 1935 76 1 /8 1765 69 1 /2 1615 63 5/8 1465 57 5/8 Notes: - Dimensions for Compact Drives are approximate only. Factors affecting the location of the Compact Drive include stair angle, motor orientation and ramp extensions. Contact your local Garaventa representative or call the Garaventa Design Hot Line for more information. - If the call station is mounted on the tubes, add 200mm (7 718") for drive box configurations. - Dimensions are based on standard platforms with standard ramps. Ramp extensions will increase the clearance dimensions required. Design Hot Line: 1-800-663-6556 or +1-604-594-0422 90° Drive with Platform Storage (Compact Drive Shown, also available with Drive Box) GSL ARTIRA Design & Planning Guide 15810-D-DP -24- www.garaventaxa In-line Drive with Platform Storage (Drive Box Shown, also available with Compact Drive) i Overhead Clearances Design Hot Line: 1-800-663-6556 or +1-604-594-0422 Platform Running Clearances Required for Platform Folded Up I or other obstruction Note: This running clearance is for the platform in the folded position only. See dimensions below for overhead requirements for passenger usage and codes. Minimum Overhead Clearances to Meet Code Requirements Minimum Code Requirements: US Code (ASME A18.1 b) 1524mm (60") overhead clearance required to any point above the r- 0 platform deck. Refer to Dimension 8 in chart on page 25. 00 U c Canadian Code (CSA B355-2000) m 1500mm (59") overhead clearance o required to the centerline of the platform. Refer to Dimension C in o chart on page 25. m a L) Note: Please consult the local Garaventa representative for local code requirements. GSLARTIRA Design & Planning Guide 15810-D-DP -25- www.garaventa.ca 1 1 Overhead Clearances Design Hot Line: 1-800663-6556 or +1-604-594-0422 Platform Running Clearances Required For Platform Folded Up 4 C 0 iA C 0 _E O Platform Size Stair Angle 800 x 1220 mm (31 1/2" x 48") 800 x 1050 mm (31 1/2" x 41 3/8") 800 x 900 mm (31 1/2 x 35 3/8") 700 x 750 mm (27 1/2" x 29 1/2") mm in mm in mm in mm in 22° 1560 61 3/8 1500 59 1445 56 7/8 1330 52 3/8 25° 1690 66112 1610 63 3/8 1540 60 5/8 1400 55 1/8 30° 1825 71 7/8 1730 68 1/8 1645 64 3/4 1475 58 1/8 35° 2000 78:314 1880 74 1775 69 7/8 1560 61 3/8 40° 2215 87 1/4 2070 81 1/2 1945 76 5/8 1685 66 3/8 45° 2460 96 7/8 2290 90 1 /8 2140 84 1 /4 1845 72 5/8 Clearances to Meet US Code Requirements (ASME A18.1 b) IM C N C d E O Platform Size Stair Angle 800 x 1220 mm (31 1/2" x 48") 800 x 1050 mm (31 1/2" x 41 3/8") 800 x 900 mm (31 1/2 x 35 3/8") 700 x 750 mm (27 1/2" x 29 1/2") mm in mm in mm in mm in 22° 2086 82 1 /8 2020 79 1 /2 1960 77 1 /8 1880 74 25° 2170 85 3/8 2090 82 1 /2 2020 79 1 /2 1930 76 30° 2320 913/8 2220 87112 2135 84 2020 791/2 35° 2480 97 5/8 2365 93 1/8 2260 89 2120 83 1/2 40° 2665 104 7/8 2525 99 3/8 2400 94 1 /2 2235 88 45° 2880 1133/8 2710 106 3/4 2560 100 3/4 2365 93 Note: Consult the local dealer representative for status of the new ASME Al & 1 b code requirements (some areas are exempt). Clearances to Meet Canadian Code Requirements (CSA B355-2000) U C 0 C d E 0 Platform Size Stair Angle 800 x 1220 mm (31 1/2" x 48") 800 x 1050 mm (31 1/2" x 41 3/8") 800 x 900 mm (31 1/2" x 35 3/8") 700 x 750 mm (27 1/2" x 29 1/2") mm in mm in mm in mm in 22° 1820 715/8 1785 701/4 1755 691/8 1705 671/8 25° 1865 73 3/8 1825 72 1790 70 1/2 1730 68 30° 1945 76 5/8 1895 74 5/8 1850 72 718 1780 70 35° 2030 79 7/8 1970 77 1/2 1920 75 5/8 1835 72 1/4 40° 2130 83 7/8 2060 81 1/8 1995 78 1/2 1895 74 5/8 45° 2245 88 3/8 2160 85 2085 82 1 /8 1965 77 3/8 GSLARTIRA Design & Planning Guide 15810-D-DP -26- www.garaventa.ca 1 Attachment Methods Design Hot Line: 1-800.663-6556 or +1-604-594-0422 1.1 1 Attachment Methods Tube Attachments To maintain the vertical separation between the tubes, distance struts and gussets are welded to the tubes. The struts are attached either directly to the wall or to square or rectangular steel support towers. Please refer to the loading diagram on page 29 for wall and floor reactions. Solid Walls - solid concrete, concrete block, wood or steel reinforcement This construction is ideal for direct mounting as the struts can be attached directly to the wall. Where extra support is necessary the upper hole in the strut can be fastened through the wall. • a q Weak Wall Structure (Requires Through Bolt) Direct Mount Upper Tube Distance Plate Gusset Upper Tube Back Plal Gusset Distance Plat Bade Plate Distance Plate Lower Tub Lower Tube I Direct Mount Strut Tower Mount Strut Wood Stud Walls These structures require support towers, along with a 2" x 6" board that is screwed to the studs in the wall, running parallel to the stair flight. The towers must be attached to the board as well as Wood Stud Wall to the floor or stair treads. Distance Plate 2" x 6" Board When using this attachment method, add the Wall Finishing board thickness of 38mm (1 1/2") to the turning clearances shown on pages 15 & 16. ' Note: This method of anchoring is not feasible for steel stud walls. Wall Finishing Tower Mount to a" x 6" Board on Wall ' GSLARTIRA Design & Planning Guide - 27 - 1581 o-D-DP www.garaventa.ca Attachment Methods Design Hot Line: 1-800.663-6556 or +1-604-594-0422 Freestanding Support Towers - solid concrete stairs, steel pan stairs filled with concrete, 76mm (Y) thick wood stairs/landings These are required when there are no existing support walls, or when the lift is required to be freestanding. For concrete-filled steel pan treads, the towers are either bolted through the treads (where access is possible) or attached to a steel stringer for additional support. Please refer to the loading diagram on page 29 for wall and floor reactions. Tower Tower Base Freestanding Tower Mount Upper Tower Bra( Tower Lower Tower Bra Existing Railing Open Balustrade - towers in the core Towers can be positioned within the open stair core when there is insufficient platform turning clearances or if the stairs are too weak for freestanding towers. The towers are fastened to the walls, stringers, or stair edge, as well as to the floors. Handrails can be removed or special brackets can be used to allow for tube attachment to the towers, without damaging the balustrade. Tower Mount in Open Balustrade )e iger GSL ARTIRA Design & Planning Guide 15810-D-DP -28- www.garaventa-ca Tower Strut Structural Reference Design Hot Line: 1-500-663-6556 or +1-604-594-0422 Wall Height Requirements for Direct Mounting For prevention of concrete breakout, these required wall heights include 100mm (3 7/8") of clearance from the top hole of the strut to the top of a concrete wall. Platform Size Stair Angle 800 x 1220 mm (31 1/2" x 48") 800 x 1050 mm (31 1/2" x 41 3/8") 800 x 900 mm (31 1/2 x 35 3/8") 700 x 750 mm (27 1/2" x 29 1/2") mm in mm in mm in mm in 20° 1155 45 1 /2 1125 44 1 /4 1095 43 1 /8 1055 41 1 /2 25° 1230 48 3/8 1190 46 7/8 1155 45 1/2 1100 43 1/4 30° 1315 513/4 1270 50 1225 481/4 1155 451/2 35° 1410 55 1/2 1355 53 3/8 1300 51 1/8 1215 47 7/8 40° 1520 59 7/8 1450 57 1/8 1385 54 1/2 1285 50 5/8 45° 1645 64 3/4 1560 61 3/8 1485 58 1/2 1365 53 3/4 Structure Minimum Support Structure Height for Direct Mounting on Concrete Wall GSL ARTIRA Design & Planning Guide 15810-D-DP -29- www.garaventa.ca Structural Reference Design Hot Line: 1-800-663-6556 or +1-604594-0422 Loading Diagram Loads are based on an 800 x 1220mm (31 1/2" x 48") platform: Straight Lifts and/or Lifts with Inside Radius Bends: F1= 1078.7 N (242.5 Ibf) ' F2= 2451.7 N (551.2 Ibf) d1= 276mm (10 7/8") d2= 488mm (19 1/4") 1 1 Moment at the center of tower or To" back of direct mount strut M= F x d (F: Force; d: distance) M= F1 x (dl + X) + F2 x (d2 + X) Tower Mount X is 92mm (3 5/8") min. to 330mm (13") max. Direct Mount X is 100mm (4.0") min. to 140mm (5 1/2") max. Maximum Moment M= 2659.2 Nm (23535.6 Ibf in) with Tower Mount M= 1988.4 Nm (17598.8 Ibf in) with Direct Mount Lifts with Outside Radius Bends: F1= 1216.0 N (273.4 Ibf) F2= 2451.7 N (551.2 Ibf) d1= 341mm (13 3/8") d2= 588mm (23 1/8") Moment at the center of tower or Rated Current: 20 A back of direct mount strut Weight of Car: 121 kg / 265 Ibs M= F x d (F: Force; d: distance) M= F1 x (d1 + X) + F2 x (d2 + X) Suspension: Rope Sprocket Date of Manufacture: Tower Mount Installed By: X is 92mm (3 5/8") min. to 330mm (13") max. Installation Date: Direct Mount ?.C? ?Sgm :-"-°y°W l X is 100mm (4.0") min. to 140mm (5 1/2") max. B "ire ?o metre C Maximum Moment M= 3066.6 Nm (27141.5 Ibf in) with Tower Mount M= 2369.7 Nm (20973.8 Ibf in) with Direct Mount GSL ARTIRA Design & Planning Guide 15810-D-DP -30- GARAVENTA STAIRUIFT GSL ARTIRA Serial Number: Rated Load: 250 kg / 550 Ibs Rated Speed: Rated Voltage: 208-240 VAC,50/60 HZ www.garaventa-ca C.G. of Rated Conveyance Load 1 Technical Reference Design Hot Line: 1-800.663-6556 or +1-604-594-0422 ' Technical Reference of Standard Features Platform Sizes: 800 x 1220mm (31 1/2" x 48") - ADA Compliant 800 x 1050mm (31 1/2" x 41 3/8") ' 800 x 900mm (31 1/2" x 35 3/8") 700 x 750mm (27 1/2" x 29 1/2") ' Curved Safety Arms: Fully automatic, 32mm (1 1/4") diameter safety arms, top of arm 948mm (37 3/8") above platform deck . Pedestrian Illuminated tube lighting, located at both ends of the platform deck. ' Safety Lights: Alerts pedestrians that the platform is in motion. Rated Load: 250 kg. (550 lbs.) ' Speed: 6 meters (20 ft) per minute, slowing to 3 meters (10 ft) through corners and when approaching or departing landings. ' Operating Controls: Call Stations (Standard): Equipped with Garaventa Smart-Lite TechnologyTm, constant ' pressure directional buttons, one touch fold & unfold buttons, 24VDC power, and keyed operation Platform (Standard): Equipped with constant pressure switches, 24VDC power, Emergency Stop Button (manual reset) and keyless operation Drive System: Motor: Single phase (supplied by inverter) 2 H.P. drive box located at the ' end of the guide tube system. The drive box can be located away from the upper landing by extending the guide tubes. ' Power Requirements: The mains power requirement for both drive systems is 208-240 VAC, 50/60 HZ single phase on a dedicated 20 amp. circuit. Power Transmission: Roped sprocket using 8mm (3/8") wire haul rope. ' Emergency Use: Ratchet wrench (or handwheel) is provided. Overspeed Safety: Located at the bottom of the tube assembly containing mechanical ' overspeed sensor and brake, with electrical drive cut-out protection. Rail System: Two 51mm (2") O.D. steel tubes spaced 600mm (23 5/8") apart vertically. ' Finishes: Durable electrostatically applied and baked fine textured Satin Grey paint. f t A variety of optional features ures and custom modifications are available. To find out about custom ea not included in the GSL Artira Design and Planning Guide and code requirements for your area consult your local representative or Garaventa. GSLARTIRA Design & Planning Guide 15810-D-DP -31- www.garaventa.ca 1 1 1 1 Electrical Wiring Schematic Design Hot Line: 1-800-663-6556 or +1-604594-0422 Typical Wiring Layout Actual wiring and number of conductors may vary depending on options, quantity of stations and lift configuration. Some of the options that will affect the wiring include: • Emergency Stop switches (requires 2 additional conductors to each call station) • Additional Audio Visual Alerts (requires 3 additional conductors to each AN) The following options require field wiring by others: • Attendant Call • Fire Service • Auxiliary Power System • and possibly others 1 Audio Visual I-; (Optional Item) Audio Visual I 3 Conductors min. 20 AWG I• r L. r Intermediate Call Station I Call Station 3 Conductors min. 20 AWG ALL CONTROL W MG 24v DC MAIL M5 MPS GSL ARTIRA Design & Planning Guide 15810-D-DP i Call Station Mains Power 3 Conductors min_ 20 AWG 2 Conductors plus ground. Wiring \ size as per local electrical code specifications, loads and distance from source. Upper Call Station (Tube Mounted Shown) I aaauT 2n er on?ERs 2013-240 VAC / I PHASE - 50 H:. Condon and deft to swl Iacai code! and ?._._ .rr_. ?._... Overspeed Safety ?I ntegrated i Disconnect Switch I I H ,:'; I ,I•, -------11 I ---•__' - Call station 3 Conductors min. Overspeed Safety . `\ 20 AWG 1 Conductor min. 20 AWG . ?` Lower Call \ Station 11 ?? ,? II 3 -32- Overspeed Safety 1 Conductor min. 20 AWG www.garaventa.ca 1 Design Hot Line: 1-800-663-6556 or +1-604-594-0422 INNOW-WWWOM Garaventa Stair-Lift AIN Inclined Platform Wheelchair Lift -GA-RAVENTA LIFT Model: GSL ARTIRA For Straight and Turning Stairways ' Need Assistance Writing the Specification? GSL Artira specifications will vary from one building site to another based on the stairway configuration, ' building materials, user requirements and local codes. Your Local Authorized Garaventa Dealer has the expertise to assist and develop an appropriate design specification for your accessibility project. 1 Authorized Garaventa Dealers can be found Worldwide, call or email Garaventa for the Dealership nearest you. In addition, professional designers at Garaventa Lift are available to answer your technical questions and to assist you with the design and specs. Garaventa Lift Phone: (604) 594-0422 Fax: (604) 594-9915 Toll Free: 1-800-663-6556 web Site: www.garaventa.ca Email: productinfoGgaraventa.ca Other Garaventa Lift products include: Xpress II - Inclined Platform Lift for straight stairways Genesis Enclosure and Shaftway - Vertical Platform Lift for lifting heights up to 4343mm (171 ") Genesis OPAL - Vertical Platform Lift for lifting heights up to 1600mm (63") GSL ARTIRA Design & Planning Guide 15810-D-DP -33- www.garaventa.ca [1 1 A Garaventa Lift Products Garaventa is dedicated to helping you find quality accessibility solutions. Our design team has worked on many different projects for schools, offices, hotels, airports, subways, places of worship and a wide range of public and private buildings around the world. Stair-Lift GSL Artira Stair-Lift Xpress II Genesis Shaftway and Genesis OPAL.Model Enclosure Models This Stair-Lift GSL Artira is a versatile access solution suitable for indoor and outdoor applications with a maximum of seven stops. This model is designed for turning or curving stairways following the inside or outside radius of the stairways, or on straight stairways with intermediate landings. The Stair-.Lift Xpress II is designed for straight stairways. When good looks and fast installation times are considerations, the Xpress II is the answer. The Xpress 11 is safe, durable, code compliant and built with the quality and reliability you expect from Garaventa. The Garaventa Genesis is a vertical platform lift designed to provide access into or within public buildings. It travels inside a complete, self-contained enclosure or can be located in a shaftway constructed by others. Our unique anodized design is strong, durable and attractive. The Genesis, OPAL is a reliable, cost effective accessibility solution for public buildings or private residences.This vertical lift is ADA compliant and suitable for indoor or outdoor applications requiring vertical transportation up to five feet. ` •,' Garaventa Lift USA: PO Box 1769, Blaine WA, USA 98231-1769 GARAVENTA LIFT Canada: 7505134A Street, Surrey; BC, Canada V3 W 7133 www.garaven[a.ca Phone: +1604 594-0422 Toll Free: 1-800-663-6556 02008 Garaventa Lift. As we are Fax: +1 604 5949915 t continuously improving our products,MW1kationsof UW*din Email: productinfo@garaventa.ca this booklet are subject to dwW without notice. Web site: www.garaventa.ca Global Portal: www.garaventalift.com ---.-• --- - - - - -- Prinrerfln Connklo Authorized Garaventa Lift Representative 1 Development & Neighborhood Services Department Clearwater 100 S. Myrtle Avenue, Suite 210 Clearwater, FL 33756 Telephone: (727) 5624567 Fax: (727) 562-4576 . www.myclearwater.com/epermits RESPONSE TO COMMENTS / PLAN AMENDMENT APPLICATION (PLEASE PRINT CLEARLY) Building Permit Number: fief ?41G?' Project Address:. J &- 6.4 l? il ), Project Name: ?P%6 OD Permit has been issued. (Plan Amendment) XPermit has not been issued. (Response to Comments) ' Detailed description of changes: -•-+ -- 1 1 1 See attached cover letter for details. Any Change in Job Valuation: $ /A-. C t t N To 9W'1DeTV9miL1b:n Date Received/Office Use only Office use only/Label Here on rac or ame. (License Holder q ' Contractor License Number: 1`? PCCLB: t1 Contact person for this project:: 4A. 5,L)VA= ' (If other than contractor) (Please Print) Contact Pho 4*402? Contact Fax: ignature ' BCP2010-07481 180 S GULFVIEW BLVD. ' Electrical Review Development Services Mond Lopez 562-4567 x2569 Engineering Review Engineering Dan Malone 5624798 Environmental Review Engineering End Chesney 562-4742 Land Resources Review Planning Rk*Abee 562-4741 ' Mechanical Review D"dopment Services Michael Lopez 562-1567 x2569 Planning Review PI?rvnirg Toning Counter 562-4567 x4604 Stormwater Review Engineering Phuong Vo 5624752 Traffic Engineering Review Engineering Bennet Elbo 5624775 ' You wig be able to view all comments for Mechanical, Plumbing, Electrical, and Building when all trades have completed review. Other trades are displayed here as they are completed. If you have any questions call 727-562-4567. ' The following c ditions must bg tisfied the rmit can Lm rocesse . Building Review JeffWak" 5624863 ' ORDER STATUS DATE CONDITIONOFAPPRC4/AL STATUS 825x2010 NOTE: Please cloud anytall changes on the plans before Not met returning them for re review. A response letter shall be submitted with all responses for clarification. All revisions are "clouded" and noted in the revision box of the title block. 8/2512010 Structural plans shall be signed and sealed by Florida licensed ' Structural engineer. The structural drawings will be signed & sealed by McCarthy & Not Me Associates, Inc. Structural Engineers. 825x2010 Confirm that a Tie-In Survey (City D&NSD Poky Memo #02.2) will be submitted prior to oommencing any further work after the foundation is complete. This survey will indicate the buildings location on the lot. In addition confirm an elevation certificate will be submitted substantiating conformance to FEMA required ' elevations (i.e. A zones: top of slab. V zones bottom of beam). If applicable, ensure that NGVD to NAVD conversions are correct (i.e. subtract 0.88 feet). This note and requirement has been added to the site plan, SD-1.1. &25/2010 This project is in flood zone, provide a completed Substantial Not Met Improvement Package showing compliance with all FEMA requirements or an Elevation Certificate substantiating lowest habitable/occupied space is above the BFE. Note this project involves both lateral and vertical additions. As per FEMA requirements the entire building must meet current NFIP .requirements concerning new construction in a VE 14 flood zone, i.e. no occupied space below the BFE, break-away walls below the OFE, lowest horizontal structual member above the SFE, flood resistant materials below the BFE, etc. Using an elevation certificate, plot the BFE on the elevation dwgs to confirm confomrance to FEMA requirements. 1 The package will be forwarded upon completion. ' The follawi conditions must be satkIled before the pwmk can be processed. Print Date: 821x12010 Pam 1 of 4 CasaConditidns 1 1 1 8126=10 How are break-away walls design such as to not damage Not Met existing/new columns? Provide details that dearly demonstrate such. Please clarify the meaning of modify in "New studs and marine plywood to be modified for installation of break-away construction", (Pg. A-1.3) with more notes/details. Pleases see sheet S-1.1, Detail la for the new detail. 8/2512010 Change occupancy classification to mixed use: Business and Not Met S2. Provide method for 2hr separation between first and second floor as per FEBC 10012, i.e. UL listed floor ceiling assembly. Provide 2hr protection for vertical members supporting the 2hr floor oeiling assembly as per FBC 711.4 The cover sheet has been revised accortlingly. Please refer to UL design #L-511, sheet S-1.3 for the 2 hr. separation and detail # 101/A-1.4 for the fire protection of the existing and new pilings. In lieu of mixed use separated, provide rational and dwg. notes for mixed use non-separated as per FBC 508.3.2. 1 believe the reference is FBC 508.2; because the existing piles are timber and are combustible, and not permitted in construction Type U. 8/25/2010 Building construction type is not IIIA, i.e. no rated assemblies, Not Met see FBC T601. Provide new construction type and revised area and height Ikk3tions. How can a third floor be added to a type VB, nonsprinklered building of B/S2 occupancy? The construction type is revised on sheet CS-1.1, along with the revised areas and heights. 8/25/2010 Add to the Code Data notes that project is a level three alteration Not Met cJw lateral and vertical additions as per FEBC Ch. 8 & 10. Done, see sheet CS-1.1. 8/2512010 Provide life safety data on dwgs, including occupant load. Not Met See Sheet A-1.1. 8125/2010 Two new exit stair towers shall be 1 hr enclosures, slab to roof, Not Met with 60 min rated interior doors. Remove HVAC penetrations from exit stairs as per FBC 1020. Window call-out B on 2nd floor balcony shall be rated 45min. This opening also has to be impact protected, see condition below regarding Florida Product Approval for building envelop components. 2 Copies are provided. 8/2512010 Add a general dwg Hobe that wood partitions/exterior walls will be Not Met fire blocked as per FBC 717. Ensure no concealed spaces exceed the limitations set in FBC 717.3. See note on A-1.3 and A-1.4 8/2512010 Provide a detail showing profile of stairs as 10.5" treads are not Not Met allowed by code. See revised stair detail on sheet A-1.4. 8/2512010 Stair landing do not meet the requirement of 1009.4, i.e. some Not Met landing are not the min. 4'-2" deep (stair width). See revised plans on sheet A-1.1_ 8/2512010 Handrails are not to code, missing FBC Ch. 10 and Ch 11 Not Met handrail exbenslons. No detail is given for the handrails/guardrails therefore it is not dear that the guards are to code. Revise dwgs to ensure hand/guard rails are to code eAv proper extensions on both sides of stair. There are no exceptions for these new stairs to meet the code requirements for harOguard rails. See revised detail on sheet A-1, 4. 1 n 1 8125@010 This renovated building is not vertically accessible and has many Not Met other ADA violations for the newly constructed bathrooms and showers. Revise dwgs to show; a wheelchair lift to each floor, all new toilet moms compliant as per Ch. 11, and at least one accessible shower as per the figures in Ch. 11, (show figure(s) on dwgs). Show dear floor space for fixtures and manuevering space for accessible doors. Is there a high/low ADA water fountain on the first and 2nd floor? The wheel chair 0 was identified at the south tower with the docking position on the third floor. The maneuvering areas have been dimensioned. There is an accessible hi4o" E. W. C. on the second floor, We are not allowed to install plumbing fixtures in the flood zone; therefore there is not an E.W.C. on the first level. Submit energy calcs for the whole building. 82512010 Energy Calculations are being prepared and will be forwarded upon Not Met receipt, 8/2512010 Please provide a product approval package (two copies) for this Not Met project complete with manufactures installation instructions. to meet the Florida Product Approval requirements. The covered products are; Windows, Skylights, Exterior doors, Shutters, louvers, Exterior Siding and Soffits, Roofing, Structural Components, New and Innovative building envelope products. (Note Go to www.boaf.net and dick on Product Approval for details) Copies of the Florida Product Approvals are provided. 8252010 Revise design wind speed to 130mph and provide new C&C Not Met pressures. Done, see sheet CS-1.1. How are the turtle lighting requirements met? Please refer to the electrical drawings to see that the extent 8/25/2010 lighting on the north, west, and south elevations are controlled by allot Met photo cell, while the east lights are controlled by a time clock. 8252010 Why does the site plan not show the existing roof cover over the Not Met parking entrance as shown on the City's GIS system and why is the Costal Construction line not in the correct position? The canopy for the parking lot facility was removed by the City during the construction of Beach Walk The folkwAn conditions must be smbsW before the it can be ignmmuwad. 825/2010 Storage under stairs will require 1 hr separation. Provide method Not Met of fire separation. Environmental Review Sarah Josuns 562-4897 ORDER STATUS DATE CONDITION OF APPROVAL STATUS 8132010 An Asbestos Survey may be required. Provide evidence that an Not Met Asbestos Survey has been received by Pinellas County Air Quality Department. Please contact Pinellas County Air Quality Departrnent at (4644422) for firther information Contractor will contact PCAQD Fire Review Ed Schultz 562-4327 x3062 ORDER STATUS DATE CONDITION OF APPROVAL STATUS 81172010 Fire Review Provide cut sheets for Hadicap lift to determine if Met this will interfere with required egress width 81172010 Fire Review Florida Statute, Section 633.027 Requires the Met owner of any cartrnercial, industrial or multiunit residential structure of there units or more constructed of Ng 4rarne trusses, to instal a syrnbd adopted by rule of the State Fire 11 1 CONDITION OF APPROVAL Mechanical R®view Ralph Rowe ORDER STATUS DATE 1 562-4594 8192010 Mechanical Review Please provide outdoor air ventilation calculations per chap. 4 table 403.3 FL mech. code 2007. Please refer to Sheet M-1.1 for this information. STATUS 8192010 Mechanical Review Please provide detail on mechanical pages showing the installation of the outdoor air duds and where they will terminate on the building exterior. Please refer to sheet A-2.1. 8192010 Mechanical Review Page M-1 .1 has a note on the dryer vent termination cap that states it will have an insect sc reen,this is not permitted per the FL. mech. code 2007 sec. 504.4. This has been corrected on sheet M-1.1. 8192010 Mechanical Review The plans show the dryer in a dedicated closet. This installation will need to comply with sec.504.5 FL. mech. code 2007. Please refer to the calculations on Sheet M-1.1 for the amount of make-up air available. 8192010 Mechanical Review The plans show an a/c register in the traffic Not Met equipment storage mom.ls the ceding a rated ceiling floor Not Met assembly and if so we will need a radiation damper for that a/c register. Marshals Office. This rule establishes the dimensions, color, and location of the symbol to be applied to every commercial, industrial and multiunit residential stricture of three units or more constructed of light-frame masses- Acknowledge on plan. Not Met Ellen Crandall 727-562-2504 Not Met CONDRION OF APPROVAL STATUS Not Met Planning Review ORDER STATUS DATE u J J 8/10!2010 Provide a survey. Clearly show the area of work in relation to the property line. We have had our survey team survey the surrounding areas and the existing Beach Lifeguard building is within the GulMew Blvd. right-of-way when the Beach by Design was built and new right-of-way lines were re-drawn. 8113/2010 Survey needs to show the Coastal Construction Control Line (CCCL). Property is zoned Open Spaos/Recreation (OSR) District. Required rear setback for new construction is 25 feet. All Not Met required setbacks are measured from the CCCL. Please Refer to the revised topographic survey and is located on NAft this drawing as well as the revised sheet 1 of 2 Site Improvement Plans the location existing building on the west side of the building has not changed nor are we encroaching the CCCL and as existing building location 8/1312010 Sheet A-2.1 - Need to indicate the proposed exterior colors for all elements of the building exterior though a legend system. Also, all exterior electrical boxes and meters to be painted the sarne as the exterW wall as mourded to (provide a note on theNot Met plans (Sheets A-2.1 andbr E-1 -1)- Revised drawing-2.1 show the colors of the fagade as requested. 8/138010 Sheet A-2.1 - Sou ge requires a separate permit (not included in this permit). A separate applicadon for sign permit has been applied for the signage on the east face abrrg Gul/view Bird. Permit no. SGN2010-08006 Attached Sign -- Beach Lifeguard Station is ready for the contractor for collection to install the sign 1 ' per the drawing. Plund tg Review Jeff Walker 562-4863 ORDER STATUS DATE CONDn1ON OF APPROVAL STATUS 82512010 Is the EWH new or existing? If new, provide an EWH detat on Not Met the plumbing plans. The water heater detail is shown on sheet P-1.1. The followin conditions must be satisfied before the unit can be nwAssed. ' 82512010 Remove al plumbing lines from within the 1 hr fire rated walls Not Met making up the exit stair enclosure. Done, see sheet P-1.1. 8/25/2010 ISO is missing a WC? Done, See sheet P-1.1. Not Met ' 8/2512010 Circuit venting of 3 showers, EWC, and wash box requires a Not Met VTR between two most upstream fixture drains, see FPC 911.2. Corrected, See sheet P-1.1_ 1 9torrrtwater Review Phuong Vo 562-4752 ORDER STATUS DATE CONDITIONOFAPPRONAL STATUS 8/12/2010 1. Please provide a cross section with designed elevations of the Met ' proposed bench drain and areas adjacent to it to demonstrate that it is designed to drain runoff effectively. See drawing sheet 1 of 2 Site Improvement Plan shows Cross Section depicts the channel drain and the areas surrounding the it drain directly to the channel drain. 2. It appears that the proposed 8" pipe is too small to convey RrOfffwntie 17xt2't gXhdran. Pte Mi0?eftSiZeb 12" ' The drawing sheet 1 of 2 Site Improvement Plan shows the drainage pipe is a 12" ductile iron pipe including fittings. ' 3. If pipe cover is an issue, ductile iron pipe should be used or trench drain slope should be revised to be less steep. The 8" CONTECH 2000 pipe has been changed to 12" ductile ' iron pipe. 4. Please revise plan to show stainless steel grate, not fiberglass (per product specification) The plan has been revises the drain grate is stainless ' steel as requested. 1 U.S. DEPARTMENT OF HOMELAND SECURITY Federal Emergency Management Agency National Flood Insurance Program 11 1 1 ELEVATION CERTIFICATE Important: Read the instructions on pages 1-9. SECTION A - PROPERTY INFORMATION OMB No. 1660-0008 Expires March 31, 2012 Al. Building Owner's Name CITY OF CLEARWATER (2010-89-2) F+oltNt?mTaer " i A2. Building Street Address (including Apt., Unit, Suite, and/or Bldg. No.) or P.O. Route and Box No. t?Orripan)+!N?IC_fiurttb?r<> 160 S. GULFVIEW BLVD. City CLEARWATER State FL ZIP Code 33767 A3. Property Description (Lot and Block Numbers, Tax Parcel Number, Legal Description, etc,) BEACH LIFEGUARD STATION BUILDING A4_ Building Use (e.g., Residential. Non-Residential, Addition, Accessory, etc.) NON- RESIDENTIAL A5. Latitude/Longitude: Lat. 27058,55'N Long. 82049.75 W Horizontal Datum: ? NAD 1927 ® NAD 1983 A6. Attach at least 2 photographs of the building if the Certificate is being used to obtain flood insurance. AT Building Diagram Number 6 A8. For a building with a crawlspace or enclosure(s): A9. For a building with an attached garage: a) Square footage of crawlspace or enclosure(s) N/A sq ft a) Square footage of attached garage 260 sq ft b) No, of permanent flood openings in the crawlspace or b) No. of permanent flood openings in the attached garage enclosure(s) within 1.0 fool above adjacent grade within 1.0 foot above adjacent grade 0 C) Total net area of flood openings in A8.b _ sq in c) Total net area of flood openings in A9.b 0 sq in d) Engineered flood openings? ? Yes ? No d) Engineered flood openings? ? Yes ® No SECTION B - FLOOD INSURANCE RATE MAP (FIRM) INFORMATION Community femme & Community Number ` Bl. I I . Name A 83. State CLEAR WATER , 5 N P S E L FIL 84. Map/Panel Number B5. Suffix B6. FIRM Index 67. FIRM Panel B8 Flood B9. Base Flood Elevation(s) (Zone 12103CO102 G Date Effective/Revised Date Zone(s) AO, use base flood depth) 1 8/18/09 9/03/03 VE 14' B10. Indicate the source of the Base Flood Elevation (BFE) data or base flood depth entered in Item B9. ? FIS Profile ® FIRM ? Community Determined ? Other (Describe) B11. Indicate elevation datum used for BFE in Item 139: ? NGVD 1929 ® NAVD 1988 ? Other (Describe) B12. Is the building located in a Coastal Barrier Resources System (CBRS) area or Otherwise Protected Area (OPA)? ? Yes ® No Designation Date ? CBRS ? OPA SECTION C - BUILDING ELEVATION INFORMATION (SURVEY REQUIRED) C1. Building elevations are based on: ? Construction Drawings' ? Building Under Construction' ® Finished Construction `A new Elevation Certificate will be required when construction of the building is complete. C2. Elevations - Zones Al-A30, AE, AH, A (with BFE), VE, V1430, V (with BFE), AR, AR/A, AR/AE, AR/At-A30, AR/AH, AR/AO_ Complete Items C2.a-h below according to the building diagram specified in Item AT Use the same datum as the BFE. Benchmark Utilized CITY BM#G-03vertical Datum 4Z49'(NAVQ 1988 DATUMI Conversion/Comments Check the measurement used. a) Top of bottom floor (including basement, crawlspace, or enclosure floor) _.4 ® feet ? meters (Puerto Rico only) b) Top of the next higher floor 15.4 ® feet ? meters (Puerto Rico only) C) Bottom of the lowest horizontal structural member (V Zones only) i3_1 ® feet ? meters (Puerto Rico only) d) Attached garage (top of slab) N/A _ ? feet ? meters (Puerto Rico only) e) Lowest elevation of machinery or equipment servicing the building 9.8 N feet ? meters (Puerto Rico only) (Describe type of equipment and location in Comments) f) Lowest adjacent (finished) grade next to building (LAG) 5.5 ® feet ? meters (Puerto Rico only) g) Highest adjacent (finished) grade next to budding (HAG) 6.3 (@ feet ? meters (Puerto Rico only) h) Lowest adjacent grade at lowest elevation of deck or stairs, including N/A._ ? feet ? meters (Puerto Rico only) structural support SECTION D - SURVEYOR, ENGINEER, OR ARCHITECT CERTIFICATION This certification is to be signed and sealed by a land surveyor, engineer, or architect authorized by law to certify elevation information. l certify that the information on this Certificate represents my best efforts to interpret the data available. I understand that any false statement may be punishable by fine or imprisonment under 18 U.S. Code, Section 1001. J , ® Check here if comments are provided on back of form. Were latitude and longitude in Section A provided by a licensed land surveyor? ® Yes ? No Certifier's Name Albert P. Cartier License Number 6488 Title Prinicpal Company Name Deuel &Assaciates LS#107 Address 4625 a t Bay D ' e, s5vita? 211 City Clearwater State FL ZIP Code 33764 Signaturoex/ ,,, A. - ? Date 8127/10 81-31, Mar 09 See reverse side for continuation. Replaces all previous editions IMPORTANT: In these spaces, copy the corresponding information from Section A, ?1 ra1Y; ,.rie,Companse _ ` - ' Building Street Address (including Apt., Unit, Suite, and/or Bldg. No.) or P.O. Route and Box No_ (?o' ?r,I?1t7r?r r „ BEACH LIFEGUARD STATION BUILDING xub ?4 ?•,t;a , , City CLEARWATERState F4 ZIP Code 33767 nor ¢11C,Nurtr' M .! ' SECTION D - SURVEYOR, ENGINEER, OR ARCHITECT CERTIFICATION (CONTINUED) Copy both sides of this Elevation Certificate for (1) community official, (2) insurance agent/company, and (3) building owner. Comments C2. (e) LOWEST ELECTRIC - OUTLET = 9.8' l ? V Xig'm a re Da ? Check here if attachments SECTION E - BUILDING ELEVATION INFORMATION (SURVEY NOT REQUIRED) FOR ZONE AO AND ZONE A (WITHOUT BFE) ' For Zones AO and A (without BFE), complete items E1-E5. If the Certificate is intended to support a LOMA or LOMR-F request, complete Sections A, B. and C. For Items E1-E4, use natural grade, if available. Check the measurement used, In Puerto Rico only, enter meters. E1. Provide elevation information for the following and check the appropriate boxes to show whether the elevation is above or below the highest adjacent grade (HAG) and the lowest adjacent grade (LAG). ' a) Top of bottom floor (including basement, crawlspace, or enclosure) is ? feet ? meters ? above or ? below the HAG. b) Top of bottom floor (including basement, crawlspace, or enclosure) is ? feet ? meters ? above or ? below the LAG. E2. For Building Diagrams 6-9 with permanent flood openings provided in Section A Items 8 and/or 9 (see pages 8-9 of Instructions), the next higher floor (elevation C2.b in the diagrams) of the building is ? feet ? meters ? above or ? below the HAG. E3. Attached garage (top of slab) is ? feet ? meters ? above or ? below the HAG- E4. Top of platform of machinery and/or equipment servicing the building is ? feet ? meters ? above or ? below the HAG. E5. Zone AO only: If no flood depth number is available, is the top of the bottom floor elevated in acoordance with the community's floodplain management ordinance? ? Yes ? No ? Unknown. The local official must certify this information in Section G. ' SECTION F - PROPERTY OWNER (OR OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE) CERTIFICATION The property owner or owner's authorized representative who completes Sections A, B, and E for Zone A (without a FEMA-issued or community-issued BFE) or Zone AO must sign here. The statements in Sections A, B, and E are correct to the best of my knowledge Property Owner's or Owner's Authorized Representative's Name ' Address City State ZIP Code Signature Date Telephone ' Comments ? Check hem if attachments SECTION G - COMMUNITY INFORMATION (OPTIONAL) The local official who is authorized by law or ordinance to administer the community's floodplain management ordinance can complete Sections A, B, C (or E), and G of this Elevation Certificate. Complete the applicable item(s) and sign below. Check the measurement used in Items G8 and 09. G1. ? The information in Section C was taken from ofher documentation that has been signed and sealed by a licensed surveyor, engineer, or architect who ' is authorized by law to certify elevation information. (Indicate the source and date of the elevation data In the Comments area below.) G2. ? A community official completed Section E for a building located in Zone A (without a FEMA-issued or oommunity4ssued BFE) or Zone AO. G3. ? The following information (Items G4-G9) is provided for community floodplain management purposes. ' G4, Permit Number G5. Date Permit Issued G6. Date Certificate Of Compliance/Occupancy Issued i G7. This permit has been issued for ? New Construction ? Substantial Improvement G8. Elevation of as-built lowest floor (including basement) of the building: ? feet ? meters (PR) Datum ' G9. BFE or (in Zone AO) depth of flooding at the building site: ? feet ? meters (PR) Datum G10. Community's design flood elevation ? feet ? meters (PR) Datum ' Local Official's Name Title Community Name Telephone Signature Date ' Comments ' ? Check here jf attachments FEMA Form 81-31, Mar 09 Replaces all previous editions 1 Building Photographs See 'T- SCr,;c; ,:cjcsS. fcr A6, . T07 L3uildinc? ? Street Address {inclurirg .4pt.. trn?t. -Suite, and/or >u!cg. No,) or P.O. ic;ute arc Box hoc. F r __ ca„ n;narc n City cLEARR ATER State F-1- ZIP rode 3.2-767 1 If using the Elevation Certificate to obtain NFIP flood insurance, affix at iecsi lv.,c, building phc'agrann, belo-. according to ! he instructions fur t Item Nn. Identify all photccraphs wit is date taken; ,F-cr,t and "Rear Vies'; and, f requirer_ "Right Side View` and "Left Side View" If subm tong more photographs than fill fit on this page, use the Continuatior Angry on tree reverse, 1 t w Building Photographs i,crr?tir?ua*;or r?r_,e --- C)U C?i_Flr ter, t, SLitc, and! r Bul Nb.) or P.v. F, 'Le and Box No, W"G .y rFr.. 1 BEACH UPEGU. R'U, s . a "'r" , lli-? ?l !t'v' GL r.. :'; ER 2:E =L de 33-6- L11. i - If supm ttirg rnore pi7ctcJ raons than vvH, fit on tote z)recej n:a page- a`r: ( ti-e addi ional shot,)graPhs beimv, Identify y all ., photographs wthe date taken'-, '`F crc'Jie.%, and "R.e,.xr t,'ev/ , ar re Sid n : rt d. . _., ':,Rich t e and 'Le. S e V1 d e,.• 1 ADDEN- JM NO.3 - Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel - Project No. 10-0042-PR e 1 1 DATED: September 3, 2010 TO THE DRAWINGS AND PROJECT MANUAL FOR: CITY OF CLEARWATER PROJECT: Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel PROJECT NO. 10-0042-PR DATED: July 30, 2010 PREPARED BY: PARKS AND RECREATION DEPARTMENT 100 S. MYRTLE AVE. CLEARWATER, FLORIDA 3375 PHONE: 727-5624856 FAX: 727-5624825 FOWLER ASSOCIATE ARCHITECTS, INC 1421 COURT STREET CLEARWATER, FLORIDA 33756 PHONE: 727-449-2021 FAX: 727-447-5339 THIS ADDENDUM NO.3 ISSUED TO CLARIFY, DRAWING SHEETS, SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND QUESTIONS FROM PROSPECTIVE BIDDERS FOR MANDALAY PARK RESTROOM REPLACEMENT- PROJECT NO. 10-0042-PR OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR THIS WORK, THIS ADDENDUM CONSTITUTES A PART OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF THIS ADDENDUM ON THE PROPOSAL FORM. PART I PROJECT MANUAL Item No. 1: Revision to Bid Opening Date 1. Bid Opening Date Has Been Moved to 1:30 PM, Thursday, September 16, 2010 Bid Opening to George McKibben - Purchasing Office 3'd Floor, Municipal Service Building -100 S. Myrtle Ave., Clearwater, Florida 33756 and will be opened and read aloud at that time and place. Item No. 3: Technical Specifications 1. Revised Scope of Work - 1 Page 2. Section 09301 Tile - 5 Pages 3. Section 09650 Resilient Flooring - 4 pages 4. Section 15400 Plumbing - 6 Pages Item No. 5: Questions & Answers 1. No Ceramic Tile, Resilient Flooring or Plumbing Specifications were provided with the plan documents. Answer: The Ceramic Tile, Resilient Flooring or Plumbing Specifications are included in Addendum No. 3 2. It was brought to our attention from one of our foundation specialists that there doesn't appear to be a design load specified for the helical piles. The geotechnical report notes that the piles should be in the order of 15 tons or higher but refers to the structural engineer for the final analysis. Could you please clarify this? Answer: The information of the helical piers is included in Addendum No. 2 Please identify how many [BE ] fixtures they want only show [B] Plan only has [A] fixtures but fixture sec. has line I [AE] and line 2 also has [AE] fixtures please find out what they want for emergency, Please find out how many emergency ballast for [B] fixtures as well as [A] fixtures? Answer: There will be (BE OR AE) NO LAY IN or SURFACE MOUNTED FIXTURES WITH EMERGENCY BALLAST the Owner has requested to provide emergency battery pack units mounted in the exit fixture or mounted on the wall as shown on the drawing. Please see sheet E-1.1 Electrical Legend for symbols of Emergency Exit Light w/Battery Pack & Emergency Light w/Battery Pack, the contractor shall provide the quantity as shown on the drawing and provide material submittals of these fixtures to the Architect & Owner for approval. All Lay In Fixtures are Type 'A' and all Surface Mount Fixtures are Type `B'. The quantity will be based on how many units you will count on the drawing. • ADDENUM NO.3 - Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel - Project No. 10-0042-PR ' 4. The plans call for reusing the existing 3/4" water service. According to Section 603.2.1 of the plumbing code, this building will require a 1 1/4" water service and a 1" meter. Please advise on how we should proceed in bidding this project. Answer: The Owner will provide a 1" meter if the existing is not a one inch meter. The contractor shall provide the 1.25" diameter water line or the size necessary to operate all the flush valve required for the commodes. It is to our understanding from the City of Clearwater Public Utilities the water meter is located on the west side of the sea wall and the contractor will be required to bring the water service from that location. Public Utilities indicate there is a conduit which the 1.25" water line can be installed in that conduit. ' 5. Revised price line quantities on items 12 thru 14 do not reflect actual drawn quantities on revised site improvements drawing. Which quantities should be used in our bid proposal? Answer: You are to use the quantities shown on be bill of quantities, we will measure the actual quantities installed and ' your pay request will reflect that amount. 6. Site drawings indicate that existing electrical meters are to be existing on one drawing, relocated on another drawing. Which is correct ? If existing meters ( There are 2) remain are they large enough to handle the proposed 400amp service? Answer: All electrical service panels and meters on the east wall are to be relocated to the south wall and if the contractor cannot reuse the existing equipment he shall price with new electrical equipment to make a complete operable system. The contractor is to identify what each meter and electrical panel board is supplying and to provide the same service as currently existing in providing a complete operable system to those end use areas. 7. Please find attached the specs for Model 288 Helical Pile System from Foundation Support Works. This is a certified and engineered system that we would like to submit as an equal or better alternate to the A.B. Chance System specified. Answer: At this time we are not entertaining any request for alternate helical piling systems, the contractor shall bid the helical piles as shown in the contract documents provided for this project. END OF ADDENDUM NO, 3 Section IV - Technical Specifications ' 1 SCOPE OF WORK 1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION Project Name: September 3, 2010 - ADDENDUM NO.3 - Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel Project Number: 10-0042-PR ' Scope of Work: 1. Contractor shall collect Building Permit no. BCP-2010-07481, Clearing Grubbing Permit and Tree Removal Permit from the Building Dept. at the Development Services 2°a Floor of the Municipal Service Building -- 100 South Myrtle Ave. after he has installed his silt fence in the contractor's lay down yard and temporary construction fences has been installed. There is no fee for these permits. 2. Tentative Dates for Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel - Project No. 10-0042- PR a. Monday, August 16, 2010 - Bid Package Available To Contractors ' b. 8:00 AM, Thursday, August 26, 2010 - Mandatory Pre-Bid Conference, Clearwater Beach Library & Recreation Center, 69 Bay Esplanade, Clearwater Florida c. 12:00 (Noon) Friday, September 3, 2010 - Last Day for Questions Submitted in Writing Only - ' Attention: Leroy Chin, e-mail: leroy.chin f yglearwater.com, Fax: 727-562-4825, U. S. Postal Service Parks & Recreation Dept. P. O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758-4748, No Verbal Questions Asked and no Verbal Answers Will Be Given d. Thursday, August 26, 2010 - Last Day to Submit Prequalification Package, Qualification Package included at the end of the City's Technical Specification section e. Monday, September 6, 2010 - Last Day Sale of Bid Package f. 1:30 PM, Thursday, September 16, 2010 -- Bid Opening to George McKibben - Purchasing Office 3d ' Floor, Municipal Service Building -100 S. Myrtle Ave., Clearwater, Florida 33756 g. Thursday, October 07, 2010 -- Award Contract By City of Clearwater City Council h. Friday, October 08, 2010 - Contractor Awarded Project to Collect Contracts for Execution collected and Returned to Engineering Dept. within 10 Days 2°d Floor, Municipal Service Building - 100 S. Myrtle Ave., Clearwater, Florida, 33756 i. Friday October 8, 2010 - Execution of Purchase Order - Parks & Recreation Dept. 1 j. Wednesday, 8:00 AM, October 13, 2010 - Pre-Construction Meeting, Clearwater Beach Library & Recreation Center, 69 Bay Esplanade, Clearwater Florida k. Monday, October 18, 2010, Notice to Proceed to General Contractor -- 120 Consecutive Calendar Days to Complete the Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel - Project No. 10-0042-PR 1. Wednesday, February 16, 2010, Completion of Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel - Project No. 10-0042- PR 3. The contactor shall secure the site at all times and provide closed sidewalk barricades and route pedestrian traffic from sidewalks along Gulf view Blvd. on to the Beach Walk Trail. The contractor shall maintain these sign during the duration of the contact period of the project. 4. The contractor shall provide MOT as required during the utilization of the contractors lay down yard and the work in progress at the Beach Lifeguard Station. At the preconstruction conference the contractor shall provide a preliminary plan as to be daily maintenance of traffic during the construction of the project. This MOT may need modifications as the project progress and shall be coordinated with the delivery of materials to the project site. 5. Daily activity of the public will be on going surrounding the Beach Lifeguard Station property and the contractor and his employees & subcontractor shall use extreme caution for the safety and welfare of the public. 6. Pier 60 Parking is public parking and the contractor is not allowed to utilize this parking lot for parking his ' construction vehicles, employee parking, sub-contractor'stemployee parking or his construction equipment. Nor is he allowed to block access to this parking lot. The contractor or his employee parks in the parking lot without paying the fee for the parking ticket placed on the dash of the vehicle will be ticketed. There will be no waiver of the parking ticket by the Owner or the Parking the Division. The equipment parking and employee parking shall ' be within the contractor's designated lay down area.. I ADDENDUM 3 SCOPE SectionIV.doc Page 1 of 126 ADDENDUM NO. 1 - 8/20/2010 1 1 ?J 1 SECTION 09301 TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. DEFINITION OF WORK: Tile includes ceramic surfacing units made from clay or other ceramic materials. The types of work of this section include: 1. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Floor Tile. 2. Glazed Wall Tile. 3. Marble. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. TILE MANUFACTURING STANDARD: TCA 137.1. Furnish tile complying with Standard Grade requirements unless indicated otherwise. B. PROPRIETARY MATERIALS: Handle, store, mix and apply proprietary setting and grouting materials in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. C. PROVIDE MATERIALS obtained from one source for each type and color of tile, grout, and setting materials. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. PRODUCT DATA: Submit manufacturer's technical information and installation instructions for materials required, except bulk materials. Include certifications and other data to show compliance with these specifications. B. SAMPLES: For verification purposes, submit the following: 1. Samples for each type of file and color required, not less than 12" square, on ' plywood or hardboard backing and grouted. ' ADDENDUM NO.3 TILE 09301-1 1 1 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING: A. DELIVER packaged materials and store in original containers with seals unbroken and ' labels intact until time of use, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS: A. MAINTAIN environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation in accordance with referenced standards and manufacturer's printed recommendations. ' 2.01 TILE PRODUCTS: ' A. GLAZED WALL TILE (GlzT): American Olean or equal as approved. 5/16" x 4-1/4" x 4-1/4", cushion edge. Color and pattern as selected from manufacturer's standards. 1. Provide pregouted sheets of ceramic tiles factory assembled and grouted with ' ' s option. s standard elastomeric material, at Installer manufacturer B. UNGLAZED CERAMIC MOSAIC TILE (CMoT): American Olean or equal as approved. 1/4" x 2 x 2, cushion edge. Color and pattern as selected from manufacturer's standards. Factory mount tile into units or sheets to facilitate handling and installation. C. TRIM AND SPECIAL SHAPES: Rounded external corners, and trim shapes at head, jamb and sills of openings. Match characteristics of adjoining field tile unless otherwise indicated. 1. Base: Sanitary cove units. 2. Wainscot Cap: Surfaced-bullnose or bullnose cap, except provide regular flat tile where tile surface is flush with plaster wall above. i 3. External Comers: Bullnose shapes. 4. Internal Corners: Field-butted square, except use square corner, combination angle ' and stretcher type cap. " " D. A marble threshold of profile MARBLE THRESHOLDS: Provide sound Group indicated with an abrasive hardness of not less than 10.0, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 241. 1. Furnish white honed marble for thresholds, unless otherwise indicated. i 2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT: A. PORTLAND CEMENT MORTAR AND GROUT: ANSI A 108.1. B. DRY-SET MORTAR: Factory-sanded rtland cement and additives; ANSI A 118.1. l? Use only the type of dry-set mortar to set types of tile for which they are labeled. C. ORGANIC ADHESIVE: ANSI A 136.1; of proper type for intended use with respect to moisture resistance, tile material and backing as certified by adhesive manufacturer. ADDENDUM NO.3 TILE 09301-2 I * ' 1. Provide primer-sealer where recommended by manufacturer. D. COMMERCIAL CEMENT GROUT: Proprietary compound of portland cement and additives, factory-blended to decrease shrinkage and increase moisture resistance. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard. Comply with ANSI-A 118.6. 1. Products offered by manufacturers to comply with requirements include the following: a. Upco Co: Hydroment Ceramic Tile Grout Joint Filler. b. L&M-Surco: Avid-R Floor Grout. C. Laticrete: Laticrete Floor Grout & Joint Filler_ ' E. DRY-SET GROUT: Proprietary compound composed of portland and additives formulated for the type of tile installed. as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard with ANSI A 118.6. 1. Products offered by manufacturers to comply with requirements include the following: a. Upco Co: Hydroment Dry Tile Grout. b. L&M-Surco: Dry Cure Wall Grout (Unsanded). C. Laticrete: Laticrete Dry Set Wall Grout. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 TILE INSTALLATION STANDARDS: A. ANSI STANDARDS: Comply with applicable requirements of the following, except as otherwise indicated. 1. ANSI A108.1: Tile installed with portland cement mortar. ' 2. ANSI A108.4: Tile installed with organic adhesive. ortland cement mortar 5: Tile installed with dry-set 3 ANSI A108 p . . . B TCA INSTALLATION GUIDELINES: TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation"; comply with TCA installation methods indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as applicable to installation conditions shown. C. COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER'S instructions for mixing and installation of proprietary materials. ' 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. EXTEND tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures, to form a complete covering without interruptions, except as otherwise shown. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges and comers without disrupting pattern orjoint alignments. 1 ' ADDENDUM NO.3 'T'ILE 09301-3 B. ACCURATELY form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures and other penetrations so that plates, collars. or covers overlap tile. C. PLACEMENT METHODS: Install tile using the following setting beds as shown or scheduled. If not otherwise indicated, use portland cement mortar where thickness and substrate permits. 1. Portland Cement Mortar Bed Installations. a. Dry-set mortar over cured mortar bed. 2. Thin-set Installations: a. Dry-set portland cement mortar. ' b. Organic adhesive. D. SET MARBLE THRESHOLDS in same type setting bed as field tile unless otherwise indicated. E. JOINTING PATTERN: Unless otherwise shown, lay file in grid pattern. Align joints r when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls and trim are same size. Layout tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise shown. F. EXPANSION AND CONTROL JOINTS Provide openings for joints where shown and to comply with details, or, if not shown and detailed, to comply with recommendations in TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation". Sealant work is specified in Division 7. G. GROUT: 1. Use commercial cement grout for grouting tile wall joints, unless otherwise ' indicated. 2. Use dry-set grout (Contractor's Option). 3.43 CLEANING AND PROTECTION: A. CLEANING: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout manufacturer's printed instructions, but not sooner than 14 days after installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron and vitreous plumbing fixtures from ' effect of acid cleaning. Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning. B. FINISHED TILE WORK: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, or otherwise defective tile work. C. PROTECTION: When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work ' ADDENDUM NO.3 TILE 09301-1 ? I ' with Kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent damage and wear. 1. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from using tiled floors for at least 3 days after grouting is completed. 2. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces. 1 END OF SECTION 1 1 t ' ADDENDUM NO.3 L 09301-5 SECTION 09650 I RESILIENT FLOORING ' PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 1 A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. EXTENT of resilient flooring and accessories is shown on drawings, in schedules and as specified. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: ' A. MANUFACTURER: Provide eachtype ofresilient flooring and accessories as produced by a single manufacturer, including recommended primers, adhesives, and sealants. 1. Wherever possible, provide required resilient flooring and accessories produced by a single manufacturer. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. SAMPLES: Submit 3 samples of each type, color, and finish of resilient flooring required, indicating full range of color and pattern variation. Provide full-size tile units. 1 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS: A. MAINTAIN MINIMUM TEMPERATURE of 65°F in spaces to receive resilient flooring for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. Subsequently, maintain minimum temperature of 55°F in areas where work is completed. B. INSTALL RESILIENT FLOORING AND ACCESSORIES after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. Moisture content of concrete slabs and environmental conditions must be within limits recommended by manufacturer of products being installed. ' ADDENDUM NO.3 RESILIENT FLOORING _ 09650-1 t PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. MANUFACTURER, COLORS AND PATTERNS: Armstrong "Excelon" or equal products as approved and in colors and patterns as selected from manufacturer's standards. B. RESILIENT FLOORING: 1. Vinyl Composition Tile. (VCT) ES SS-T-312, Type IV. ' a. Size: 12" x 12" x 1/8". C. ACCESSORIES: ' 1. Resilient Base: Provide base complying with ES SS-W-40, Type II vinyl, with matching end stops and preformed or molded corner units, and as follows: a. Height: 4" unless otherwise indicated. b. Thickness: 1/8" gage. c. Style: Standard top-set cove, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Resilient Edge Strips: 1/8" thick, homogeneous vinyl or rubber composition, tapered or bullnose edge, color to match flooring, or as selected from standard ' colors available; not less than 1" wide. .3. Adhesives (Cements): Waterproof, stabilized type as r eommended by flooring ' manufacturer to suit material and substrate conditions. 4'. Concrete Slab-Primer: Non-staining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. 5. Leveling Compound: Latex type as recommended by flooring manufacture. 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. INSTALLER MUST EXAMINE areas and conditions under which resilient flooring and accessories are to be installed and must notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. ' 3.02 PREPARATION: ' A. BROOM CLEAN OR VACUUM surfaces to be covered, and inspect subfloor. Start of flooring installation indicates acceptance of subfloor conditions and full responsibility for completed work. 1. Use leveling compound as recommended by floor manufacturer for filling small cracks and depressions in subfloors . ' ADDENDUM NO.3 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650-2 2. Perform moisture tests on concrete slabs to determine that concrete surfaces are sufficiently cured and ready to receive flooring. 3. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to ' application of adhesive. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's directions. 3.03 INSTALLATION: ' A. GE NERAL: 1. Place flooring with adhesive cement in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. Butt tightly to vertical surfaces, thresholds, and edgings. Scribe around obstructions to produce neat joints, laid tight, even, and straight. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, and similar openings, and under furnishing ' and equipment. 2. Install flooring on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, and similar items occurring within finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and ' pattern with pieces of flooring installed on these covers. Tightly cement edges to perimeter of floor around covers and to covers. 3. Tightly cement flooring to subbase without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections. Hand roll flooring at perimeter of each covered area to assure adhesion. ' 4. Tile in each room shall be laid so that grain in tile is laid in alternate directions, unless otherwise indicated on drawings. B. TILE FLOORS: 1. Lay tile from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so that file at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of cut widths less than 1/2 tile at room perimeters. Lay tile square to room axis, unless otherwise shown. 2. Match tiles for color and pattern by using tile from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged. Cut tile neatly around all fixtures. Broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles are not acceptable. ' C. ACCESSORIES: 1. Apply resilient base to walls, and other permanent fixtures in rooms or areas where base is required. Install base in lengths as long as practicable, with preformed corner units, or fabricated from base materials with mitered or coped inside corners. Tightly bond base to backing throughout length of each piece, with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces. ' 2. Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring and secure with adhesive. Install edging strips at edges of flooring which would otherwise be exposed. d 1] ADDENDUM N0.3_RESILIENT FLOORING_ 09650-3 t 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION: A. REMOVE ANY EXCESS ADHESIVE or other surface blemishes, using neutral type cleaners as recommended by flooring manufacturer. Protect installed flooring with heavy Kraft paper or other covering. ' S. FINISHING: After completion of project and just prior to final inspection of work, thoroughly clean floors and accessories. 1 END OF SECTION ADDENDUM NO.3 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650-4 I SECTION 15400 PLUMBING PART I - GENERAL ' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS; A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. THE EXTENT of plumbing work is indicated on the Drawings. B. IN GENERAL, the work consists of, but is not limited to, the following: I . Hot and cold water supply piping, and all necessary valves, fittings, etc. 2. A system of soil, waste and vent piping. 3. Plumbing fixtures and trim. 4. Furnishing lead flashings for penetrations through the roof. 5. Connections of equipment furnished by others. 1.03 SUBMITTAL DATA: A. SUBMIT to the Architect for approval, in accordance with Section 01340, copies of brochures, technical data and/or shop drawings of the following: 1. Plumbing fixtures with trim. 2. Floor drains. 3. Hose bibbs with vacuum breaker. 1.04 CHANGES: A. THE DRAWINGS indicate generally the locations of plumbing fixtures, apparatus, piping, etc., and while these are to be followed as closely as possible, if before installation it is found necessary to change the location of same to accommodate the conditions at the building, such changes shall be made without additional cost to the Owner and as directed by the Architect. 1.05 PRODUCTS & INSTALLATION: A. THE PLUMBING MATERIALS, FIXTURES AND INSTALLATION shall comply with all requirements of Florida State Board of Health's Sanitary Code, Chapter 17C entitled "Plumbing", the Local Plumbing Code and State and County Energy Efficiency Code. ADDENDUM NO.3 PLUMBING 15400-1 1 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING: ' A. ALL MATERIALS shall comply with latest ASTM specifications in each instance that ASTM has specifications and standards relating to such material. B. DRAINAGL WASTE AND VENT PIPING: One of the following: 1. ABS-DWV Pipe and Fittings ASTM D 2661. ' 2. PVC-DWV Pipe and Fittings ASTM D 2665. C. SEWER PIPE AND FITTINGS (outside buildings): One of the following: r 1. ABS, ASTM D 2751. 2. PVC, ASTM D 3033 or D 3034. ' D. SOLVENT CEMENT for Plastic Pipe): 1. ABS-DWV Solvent Cement ASTM C 2235. 2. PVC-DWV Solvent Cement ASTM D 2564. ' ` " E. (ASTM B 88) with Bronze or IL DOMESTIC WATER PIPE: Copper Tubing Type Wrought Copper solder joint fittings. r F. FURNISH AND INSTALL dielectric or isolation fittings at all points where copper pipe connects to wrought iron or steel pipe. ' G. EXPOSED PIPE IN TOILET ROOMS: Chrome plated brass, American Brass Co., or equivalent. Furnish and install chrome plated wall plates. ' H. LAVATORY AND SIMILAR WASTE ARMS: Type M or L copper water tube, Mueller, or equivalent. 2.02 PIPE HANGERS: ' A. ADJUSTABLE wrought clevis type hanger and rods: Grinnell Company, or equivalent. ' 2.03 CLEANOUTS: A. FLOOR CLEANOUTS for soil and waste lines shall have bodies of standard pipe sizes. I. Exterior: Josam Y-300-F. 2. Interior: Josam Y-100-B with nickel bronze top, or equivalent Wade or Zurn, unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. ' B. WALL CLEANOUTS for soil and waste lines shall have bodies of standard pipe sizes. 1. Ferrule: Cast iron with a brass plug. 2. Plug: Drilled and tapped to receive cleanout screw. Access Cover: Round polished cast brass with countersunk brass screw. Josam Y- 3 . ' ADDENDUM NO.3 PLUMBING 15400-2 1 120-B, or equivalent Wade or Zurn. 2.04 VALVES: A. GATE VALES: 150 pound, screwed, all brass. Crane Co. No. 431, or equivalent. B. UNIONS shall have brass to metal ground joint seat. 2.05 TRAPS: A. FOR LAVATORIES AND SINKS: Brass, chrome plated. B. FOR SERVICE SINKS: Cast iron, enameled inside. C. FOR FLOOR DRAINS: Cast iron traps not integral with the floor drain. 2.06 PIPE SLEEVES: A. GALVANIZED STEEL Size to allow minimum clearance between pipe and sleeves or insulation and sleeves. 2.07 ESCUTCHEON PLATES; ..A. PROVIDE chrome plated escutcheon plates where exposed pipe passes through walls,. floors, or ceiling in finished area. 2.08 FLOOR DRAINS: A. JOSAM AS SPECIFIED ON THE DRAWINGS: Wade or Zurn equivalent approved. 2.09 FIXTURE TRIM AND FITTINGS: A. PROVIDE all items of brass and chrome plated finish except where otherwise noted. B. FOR FASTENING on masonry, use expansion bolts or screws. C. ALL PIPING that serves fixtures and is exposed beyond the face of the finished wall: Brass and chrome plated. D. BRACKETS, ANCHORS AND CLEATS: Furnish and install where required for support; conceal behind finished wall. 2.10 PLUMBING FIXTURES: A. FURNISH AND INSTALL all plumbing fixtures as shown on the Drawings. Fixtures shall be as specified, or equivalent quality fixtures by American Standard, Kohler, ADD D NO.3 PLU ING 15400-3 1 1 1 1 1.1 1 1 Crane or Eljer. B. HOSE BIBBS: As indicated on the Drawings. 2.11 PLUMBING STOPS: A. CHROME PLATED BRASS with renewable valves, seats and stem seals. 2.12 PROTECTIVE COATING: A. COAL-TAR ENAMEL, AWWA-C-203. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PIPING: A. ON VERTICAL sanitary drain lines, connect all soil and waste inlets through sanitary tees, wyes, or wyes and eighth bends. Short radius fittings may be used for vent piping. On horizontal lines, connect all waste and soil connections through wyes, or wyes and eighth bends. Double branch fittings may be used on vertical lines and horizontal runs providing proper grades can be maintained. B. LAY HORIZONTAL DRAIN PIPES to. uniform grade; riser pipes, vertical. Make changes in directions of drain pipes with long bends. C. LAY ALL SEWERS and branches, where practicable, on undisturbed earth cut at oroper grade. Where laid on fill, provide adequate supports to maintain pitch of the line. D. PITCH all horizontal drains 1/8" per foot minimum. E. MAKE JOINTS IN PLASTIC PIPE using the specified solvent cement. Install according to manufacturer's recommendations. F. SIZES ORRISERS and mains of water system piping shall be as designated on the Drawings. Verify any omitted sizes before installation. In general, pipe shall be sized to insure adequate flow in the branches, especially in regard to flush valves. Pitch hot water lines to facilitate drainage at fixtures. G. COVER PIPE openings at all times that the work is not in progress at that point. H. CUTBRASS AND COPPER pipe by means of hacksaw. Remove all burrs and metal chips, dirt. etc., before joining pipe. Chrome plated pipe shall show no wrench marks after installation; no threads shall show. ' I. SOLDER COPPER WATER PIPING JOINTS witha 95-5 tin-antimony solder. Provide ' ADDENDUM NO.3 PLUMBING 15400-4 sweat solder joints made so that the solder ring is visible completely around the joint. Do not use acid core flux. J. ADEQUATELY SUPPORT all piping above floors inside the building from or on the building structure. Support piping suspended from the building structure by means of the specified pipe hangers and rods. Make maximum spacing between pipe supports as follows: Nominal Pipe Size Maximum Span 3/4"and under 5' 7, 7' 9, 2" 10' 2-1/2" 11' 3" 12' 4" 14' 3.02 INSTALLATION OF VALVES: A. ISOLATE ALL MAJOR PIPING assemblies as shown on the Drawings and as required for proper operation and maintenance. All valves shall be accessible. Provide valve boxes and access panels where required for accessibility. B. PLACE SHUT-OFF VALVE on each water-main service: Place valve near the building ' where indicated on the Drawings, in concrete or cast iron box with a removable cast iron plate cover. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF TRAPS: A. TRAP EACH FIXTURE by water sealing trap placed as near the fixture as possible. B. VENT ALL TRAPS and place within 5 feet of the fixture which it serves, unless ' otherwise noted. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF PIPE SLEEVES: ' A. INSTALL PIPE SLEEVES at all locations where pipe passes through walls, floors, or ceiling above or below grade. ' B. WHERE SUBJECT to moisture or weather, seal sleeves with watertight sealant. ' 3.05 INSTALLATION OF AIR CHAMBERS: A. INSTALL an air chamber at each fixture or group of fixtures. Make air chambers 20 pipe diameters long and of the same diameter as the pipe to which it is connected. In no ' case shall an air chamber be less than 18" long. Air chamber must be installed ADDENDUM NO.3 PLUMBING 15400-5 1 1-1 vertically above the horizontal pipe to which it is connected. ' 3.06 INSTALLATION OF FIXTURE TRIM AND FITTINGS; A. INSTALL THE FIXTURE trim and fittings specified, taking care to properly anchor each fixture. B. WHEN THE USE of a wrench is necessary on chromium plated piping, protect the pipe ' from marring by use of felt or cloth wrapping beneath wrench jaws. 3.07 APPLICATION OF PROTECTIVE COATING: A. COAT METAL PIPE buried in the earth or concealed with heavy coat of coal tar enamel. ' 3.08 INSTALLATION OF PIPE INSULATION: A. INSULATE ALL HOT WATER piping above and below grade in accordance with Use 1/2" Armaflex or equal manufacturer's printed instructions . . ' 3.09 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS: A. MAKE ALL WATER and air tests of the piping systems in the presence of and to the satisfaction of the Architect or his-ndesigned representative. Conduct these tests at such places and with timing to permit work to proceed with as little interruption as possible. Make tests before work is concealed. B. TEST WATER piping to hydrostatic pressure of 150 psi and hold for 24 hours. C. AFTER THE INSTALLATION of sanitary piping and before the pipe is concealed or the fixtures are installed, cap or plug the ends of the system and fill all lines with water to top of vents above roof and allow to stand until a thorough inspection has been made. Should leaks appear, repair and repeat the tests until the system is tight. 3.10 STERILIZATION: ' THE STERILIZATION PROCESS shall comply with all governing regulations and with the sterilization procedures recommended by the American Water Works ' Association. The chlorination process may be simplified by first flushing the system thoroughly clean, then charging with water containing a minimum of 50 parts per million of chlorine, allowing this to stand for 24 hours, then thoroughly flushing. After sterilization and final flushing, the local health authority is to be notified, and their approval obtained in writing. ' END OF SECTION ' ADDENDUM NO.3 PLU O 15400-6 F ADDENUM NO.4 - Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel - Project No. 10 -0042-PR DATED: September 7, 2010 TO THE DRAWINGS AND PROJECT MANUAL FOR: ' CITY OF CLEARWATER PROJECT: Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel PROJECT NO. 10-0042-PR DATED: July 30, 2010 PREPARED BY: PARKS AND RECREATION DEPARTMENT FOWLER ASSOCIATE ARCHITECTS, INC 100 S. MYRTLE AVE. 1421 COURT STREET CLEARWATER, FLORIDA 3375 CLEARWATER, FLORIDA 33756 PHONE: 727-562-4856 PHONE: 727-449-2021 FAX: 727-562-4825 FAX: 727-447-5339 J: ' THIS ADDENDUM NO.4 ISSUED TO CLARIFY, DRAWING SHEETS, SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND QUESTIONS FROM PROSPECTIVE BIDDERS FOR MANDALAY PARK RESTROOM REPLACEMENT- PROJECT NO. ' 10-0042-PR OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR THIS WORK, THIS ADDENDUM CONSTITUTES A PART OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF THIS ADDENDUM ON THE PROPOSAL FORM. PART I PROJECT MANUAL Item No. 1: Revision to Bid Opening Date ' 1. Questions regards to Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel has been extended to 10:00 AM, Friday, September 10, 2010 all question must be in writing. No questions after this extended time of 10:00 AM will be answered. Item No. 2: Questions & Answers ' 1. Please identify how many [BE ] fixtures they want only show [B] Plan only has [A] fixtures but fixture sec. has line 1 [AE] and line 2 also has [AE] fixtures please find out what they want for emergency, Please find out how many emergency ballast for ' [B] fixtures as well as [A] fixtures? Answer: There will be (BE OR AE) NO LAY P? er- SURFACE MOUNTED FIXTURES WITH ENWRGENGY BALLAST drawing. Please see sheet E 1.1 Electrieal Legend fer- symbels ef Emer-geney E*it biot *43attefy Paek & Rmefgeaey bight fi*4voes te the Ar-ehifeet & Owner- fer- appr-elval. All bay In Fbail-weess wiwe T-)Te 'A' and ;-;I]- Smr-farg Mount Wwtmr-A,; ;we Type . 1 The be bwsed- on how many units you will eeum on the dr-awing 1 Answer: The above answer is being retracted and an alternate helical pile is acceptable. The following comments were ' provided by the project structural engineer based on the alternate piling foundation submitted (see attached) and the engineers comments are as follows: "Whatever specific piling system is used needs to be engineered to meet the load criteria on the drawings. Related to this ' the structural engineer is clarifying the drawings indicates that the pile layout shown is intended as a pictorial reference and may require more piles than indicated to achieve the required loads. Specifically related to the helical information submitted... it references its loads based on an "N" value of 4 or greater. It looks like we would have reduced loads at this project site based on the soils report. This as well as the lateral loads and battered piles are some items that would need to be addressed by the pile engineer." The general contractor shall work with their piling installer to submit shop drawings during the material submittal ' package for the structural engineer for acceptance and approval of the pilings prior to any site work being performed on site of piling installation. 1 END OF ADDENDUM NO.4 n 1 1 1-800-281-8545 • www.foundationsupportworks.com Corporate Headquarters: 12330 Cary Circle • Omaha, NE 68128 ?•:'se:?'? ?? ,1,1 ?,'?'yx. „??,??ig{'????'°; ? ;,?;r :4 ,;? t.9 .y Eck' u 1. ` Model ZSS Helical Pile System Technical Specifications Shaft Material: 2.875" OD x 0.276" Wall ASTM A500 Grade B or C, Yield Strength = 60 ksi (min.) Helix Blades: ASTM A572 Grade 50 x 3/8" Thick Helix blade geometry in accordance with ICC-ES AC358 Coupler Material: 3.50" OD x 0.281" Wall ASTM AS00 B or C, or ASTM A513 Type 5, Yield Strength = 60 ksi (min.) Coupling Hardware: Two (2) 3/4" Grade 8 Bolts with Nuts Finish: Available plain or with hot-dipped galvanized coating in accordance with ASTM A123 New Construction Helical Pile Capacities Page 1 of 2 NEW CONSTRUCTION-BRACKET FOOTING SIZE. REINFORCING oETAI1_S, a EMBEDMENT DEPTHS 8Y PROJECT ENGMIEER 5' SOUARF.. .: A3S PATE -s, 2 - b?: GRADE 8 O 80LTs r • • • Mechanical Axial Shaft Capacities: Torque Limited Axial Design Capacities based on Allowable Compression = 70.5 kips* Ultimate Torsional Resistance of Pile Shaft = 9,180 ft-Ibs: Allowable Tension = 39.8 kips* Ultimate Soil Capacity = 82.6 kips (with K=9 ft-') Allowable Soil Capacity = 41.3 kips (FOS=2.0) *Capacity based on black, uncoated steel with a loss in steel thickness due to corrosion over a period of 50 years. The design period and corrosion loss rates are in accordance with ICC-ES AC358. Mechanical compression limits are based on continuous lateral soil confinement. Piles with exposed unbraced lengths should be evaluated on a case by case basis by the project engineer. Standard Bracket (FS288B) Low Profile Bracket (FS288BL) 32,000 Ibs 26,000 Ibs Allowable Mechanical Retrofit System Capacities Notes: 1. System capacities are based upon medium stiff clay, loose sand, or stronger soils (Standard Penetration Test (SPIT) "N" value ? 4 blows/ft.) at the bracket elevation and surrounding the external sleeve. System capacities for weaker soil conditions can be provided. 2. System capacities utilize a 30" external sleeve. A 48" sleeve provides little additional benefit when the bracket and sleeve are surrounded by soils with N z 4 blows/ft. The 48" sleeve could be considered to increase system capacities in weaker soils. 3. This table lists mechanical capacities only. Torque-correlated soil capacities may govern the actual installed system capacities. ©2010 Foundation Supportworks, Inc. Doc. 1OFS1-003-Rev-1 F 1 1-1 1 PIER ` -' j SHAFT Page 2 of 2 Helical Pier System General Arrangement EXISTING STRUCTURE EXCAVATION RETROFIT BRACKET AND CAP COUPLING FSI EXTERNAL SLEEVE PIER SHAFT ' FS28$B Bracket Specifications Bracket: Weldment manufactured from 0.25", Z ' 0.375", and 0.50" plate. Yield strength = 36 ksi LEAD SECTION (min.), tensile strength = 58ksi (min.). WITH HELIX BLADES External Sleeve: 3.50" OD x 0.216 wall x 30" or ' 48" long sleeve with sleeve collar welded to one end. Yield Strength = 50 ksi (min.), tensile strength 62 ksi (min.). Bracket Cap: 5.0" wide x 9.0" long x 1" thick ' plate with confining ring welded to one side. Yield strength = 50 ksi (min.), tensile strength = 65 ksi (min.). ' All-Thread Rod: 0.7S" diameter x 16" long, zinc plated. Grade B7, tensile strength = 125 ksi (min.). ti )Rr7,` _}?i? Retrofit piles use side-load brackets, introducing eccentricity into the system. The Model 288 Helical Pile System incorporates an external sleeve at the top of the pile to aid in resisting the bending forces generated by this loading condition. This helps preserve the axial compressive capacity of the pile shaft. -?{ 6.75 ^ 03,4" THREADED ROD I -5.00x9.00 ` i CAP PLATE N M E -8.00- I .. i ' 10.00 i - - i=FSI EXTERNAL SLEEVE 1-800-281-8545 • www.foundationsupportworks.com Corporate Headquarters: 12330 Cary Circle - Omaha, NE 68128 ©2010 Foundation Supportworks, Inc. Doc. 10FS1-003-Rev.1 1 ADDENUM NO. 5 - Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel - Project No. I 0-0042-PR DATED: September 7, 2010 TO THE DRAWINGS AND PROJECT MANUAL FOR: CITY OF CLEARWATER PROJECT: Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel PROJECT NO. 10-0042-PR DATED: July 30, 2010 PREPARED BY: PARKS AND RECREATION DEPARTMENT FOWLER ASSOCIATE ARCHITECTS, INC 100 S. MYRTLE AVE. 1421 COURT STREET CLEARWATER, FLORIDA 3375 CLEARWATER, FLORIDA 33756 PHONE: 727-5624856 PHONE: 727449-2021 FAX: 727-5624925 FAX: 727-447-5339 THIS ADDENDUM NO.5 ISSUED TO CLARIFY, DRAWING SHEETS, SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND QUESTIONS FROM PROSPECTIVE BIDDERS FOR MANDALAY PARK RESTROOM REPLACEMENT- PROJECT NO. 10-0042-PR OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR THIS WORK, THIS ADDENDUM CONSTITUTES A PART OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF THIS ADDENDUM ON THE PROPOSAL FORM. PART I PROJECT MANUAL Item No. 1: Questions & Answers Please identify how many [BE ] fixtures they want only show [B] Plan only has [A] fixtures but fixture sec. has line I [AE] and line 2 also has [AE] fixtures please find out what they want for emergency, Please find out how many emergency ballast for [B] fixtures as well as [A] fixtures? Error in this item and answer to remain as shown in Addendum no. 3 : There will be (BE OR AE) NO LAY IN or SURFACE MOUNTED FIXTURES WITH EMERGENCY BALLAST the Owner has requested to provide emergency battery pack units mounted in the exit fixture or mounted on the wall as shown on the drawing. Please see sheet E-1.1 Electrical Legend for symbols of Emergency Exit Light w/Battery Pack & Emergency Light wBattery Pack, the contractor shall provide the quantity as shown on the drawing and provide material submittals of these fixtures to the Architect & Owner for approval. All Lay In Fixtures are Type `A' and all Surface Mount Fixtures are Type `B'. The quantity will be based on how many units you will count on the drawing. 2. (Question 7 of f addendum no. 3) Please find attached the specs for Model 288 Helical Pile System from Foundation Support Works. This is a certified and engineered system that we would like to submit as an equal or better alternate to the A.B. Chance System specified. systems, Answer: At this time we are not enierWining any request for aW-fe-ste helie-al piling the eaRtMetOF Shfill hid the heheal piles w shown ia the eentrae# doeuments provided for this PF@jeet. Answer: The above answer is being retracted and an alternate helical pile is acceptable. The following comments were provided by the project structural engineer based on the alternate piling foundation submitted (see attached) and the engineers comments are as follows: "Whatever specific piling system is used needs to be engineered to meet the load criteria on the drawings. Related to this the structural engineer is clarifying the drawings indicates that the pile layout shown is intended as a pictorial reference and may require more piles than indicated to achieve the required loads. Specifically related to the helical information submitted... it references its loads based on an "N" value of 4 or greater. It looks like we would have reduced loads at this project site based on the soils report. This as well as the lateral loads and battered piles are some items that would need to be addressed by the pile engineer." The general contractor shall work with their piling installer to submit shop drawings during the material submittal package for the structural engineer for acceptance and approval of the pilings prior to any site work being performed on site of piling installation. END OF ADDENDUM NO.5 1 ADDENUM NO.6 - Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel - Project No.10-0042-PR DATED: September 9, 2010 TO THE DRAWINGS AND PROJECT MANUAL FOR: ' CITY OF CLEARWATER PROJECT: Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel PROJECT NO. 10-0042-PR DATED: July 30, 2010 ' PREPARED BY: PARKS AND RECREATION DEPARTMENT 100 S. MYRTLE AVE. ' CLEARWATER, FLORIDA 3375 PHONE: 727-5624856 FAX: 727-562-4825 FOWLER ASSOCIATE ARCHITECTS, INC 1421 COURT STREET CLEARWATER, FLORIDA 33756 PHONE: 727-449-2021 FAX: 727-047-5339 ' THIS ADDENDUM NO.6 ISSUED TO CLARIFY, DRAWING SHEETS, SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND QUESTIONS FROM PROSPECTIVE, BIDDERS FOR MANDALAY PARK RESTROOM REPLACEMENT- PROJECT NO. 10-0042-PR OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR THIS WORK, THIS ADDENDUM CONSTITUTES A PART OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF THIS ADDENDUM ON THE PROPOSAL FORM. PART I PROJECT MANUAL ' Item No. 1: Contract Revised Drawings 1. Sheet S-1.Oa Structural Specifications - Change wind speed from 128 MPH to 130 MPH (3 Second Wind Gust) 2. Sheet S-1.Ob Structural Specifications- Change Added Wind Load Charts 3. Sheet S-1.1 Foundation & 2"4 Floor Framing Plan - Change Revised X-Brace Frame @ Grid - 6 ' 4. Sheet S-1.3 Underwriters Details - Change Revised X-Brace Frame @ Grid -6 5. Sheet 8.5" xI l" show location of 5/8" water meter which services the lifeguard building. The Owner will replace meter with 1" ' water meter. Item No. 2: Questions and Answers: ' 1. In the specs under Section 09623 it calls for applying a water repellant and graffiti resistant coating to the entire structure. It also states in 3.04 Item E of that section "Do not apply to painted surfaces". I call the manufacturer and they verified that this material cannot be applied over or under paint. It is generally used for non-painted masonry or concrete surfaces. Answer: Graffiti resistant coating will not be required on any painted surfaces. END OF ADDENDUM NO.6 1 1 r ADDENDUM NO. I - BEACH LIFEGUARD STATION REMODEL PROJECT NO. 10-0042-PR ' THE WATER METER LOCATION FOR LIFEGUARD BLDG. IS LOCATED WEST OF SEA WALL THE OWNER WILL CHANGE OUT METER TO 1" WATER METER FROM EXISTING 5/8" METER. THE FEED LINE FROM WATER METER IS A 2" POLY LINE AND COVERTS ' TO A 1" POLY LINE WITH A CURB STOP IN A VALVE BOX AT THE NORTHEAST CORNER OF BLDG. ARCHITECT INDICATES THE SIZE 1" DIAMETER PIPE IS WMLLURE ABLE TO SERVICE THE PLUMBING OF THE BUILDING. 1 r Exist n water meter v owner r ce to me er V J 2' pdy Ilirr w e to lireyord V ' bldg. converts to 1" curb f • `/. _ .. ' stop Into bldg- '/??\ ./; L - •. - .'?Air INi_ MPORARY CONSTRUCTION MON AND LIMITS OF WORK& PROPOSED 14" BUILDING RENOVATION FOOTPRINT (- ?k ?.'?"'? 1 4'• • "'a fl) r/ ' ?.. 7/ f:/.... ?.... ?.? do AD.IU TRIM do GRATE AS NECESSARY TO NEW •? 1 ....Y // ... /?"??''= I +_F //../ CONCRETE SLAB GRADES EXIST. GRATE INLET n= ( ,' RIM ELEV. = 5.42' NE INV. ELEV. 3.87 NEW SW INV. ELEV. 3.87 / /J?' / ST 15 FITTINGS AS NECESSARY 1?J j///Y! I??L zlr`' ; 11, 0, 3 TIRE 11 M © 1 10 14 '' .. / ' EELEV. 6.00 INV. ELEV = 4.OD I j W y SAW CUT EXISTING CO k R MOVE TING EXISCONCRETE SLOPE NO GREATER THAN 5% SLOPE NEW CONCRETE. 2.500 + t p EXI$11NG CONC?ETE SLAB ' S0. FT. OF e' THICK CONCRETE SLAB 70 MATCH EXISTING I REMOVED dt REPLACED CONCRETE FINISH TEXTURE. COLOR. SCORE PATTERN & EXPANSION AaPE FLOOR Jr/ JOINTS, 3 000 PSI/28 DAYS W/COMMERGIAL FIBER MESH, SLOPE NODGREAN ?MTHAN FORMA710N % T DRAIN(SEE ARCHITECTURAL PLANS FOR 1 - -------- - -- 1 Ira 0 1 ' M.-?:??q ¦ ?-9 'rMM iw,mkr?6. L?ZIH?2I? ¦¦ ?r TT 'S 10, ?? p? l 1 L ? PpIJO??'L{OP a?emJP2'? O? e © p?Pna!nog malnJl?J 081 ?-+ C_ N n D N0I 17 ?? "`1 , , SaLVIDOSS'd 2ia'IM03 ¦¦¦ ?o I ?> ? ? ??S © cn ???iaa 5 ?pan u 7 ?? L ro J c ' ..or,r. rlourwmu ... a.?r?rwonar r¢ra wm?+'n® Mr yd9 -A ?? ? " ? :? £ ??? ? °? ? E g 5 c?a1;•R, ????"??-c ? ?? ?? ??? •rea 5 ?$. n$A -§ ? s , ?„ ? =?°P= '°V?y C ? ? ?? - ?u?; ? ? - ? ?. ? ?;? ?s'??;a??5 ;ti ? ?c i ??% W aW???w a F.:, -•.'? PAOF,',''? - der , W,,a $? ^ ?k- .r f.- ' 8 p a ?jY ;TMa 3 Sp`???2FeW W: - ?'?,. '`{? - ? .•? a s?- .?` G?T.,:?:;:w?:::i .§ ?'..' ,,9 .y„? .,??. - ;' t; !t tl° ?.,? tJ ryj".. [• - - - ri,_"v" - - `y>;s ? 5 ?:2; 'r.' ''- ? ec h= b:?,? _.??., w ?.,'s. ?y ?o.. ? ei,. r'',s'r???.?•.:r_'1".:"?^ 5 " ?a©=t F zz€z` 55Y x RL '? fi' •M1t?$ ?t;;"? 3 1 - ° v°..z ^? I, wd F 6 ?? Y Y. ??`c aF x "e o . , „ ?_?c T u = W a ?? °L a x $?? k r? 'ii lfl''1 ?q y mJx5g5? 3? 3vg# 'q dyay Sn ?p oG° ;a?a = Y x ?^£ yr g${i?? ? Y g?¢ ? ? ^?'}W?? ?j ? Nn! gan 7; j h"" y t 3? r qq 1? 8?9 ;Y i Y "S " 5= i %i 4l ?C •33 p 65? q9 YC ? ? ??'. ?u p .mz m 2 022 1 - Si ?a ?? ?i {:;.- '.?y`?,{C3: 'd^ r2?- ¦ n!°Y - tF: t ?? a?' 4? y +°' %5?;-._?? ? ar ?i' ?? `nr - ?r ?.?^,""+? ?.^.:? _? :cR_ 'i:'; ? PI ? ?" 55 nr: ..7 ° 6??? - rE.:•. ? e.P nd Y. :.y, % !.-,, M 'Vz yy - - 1? gg 2 _r p?. k g, a `1s Y` xt" r. is ^_ R xr? "; F 3 P, 51N a 7e"C, ? ;s: ?:x ? _I• `_ d$ „?F $xx -.::3 ;i ; ?is - $5 =5 '? ??' „3 - "x • "Ya 5?•'=%'iv %fi c .fir= :5 "'tk k :tt - He° 'J a5 .._? -f g n ya. d'r".5 "ems L'? R `?? .. y.. a?' ..3'? ?? %? ?W a !$ ...i - n?^ Vie' 6+..?.' ?•'g s? - ? t?.,Y? .? y E:? ?ti:° ?e ? ?..?[.. ?.? ?? W1? ? E ? •4L•.?. - - 7?i dig ?STff° 3?q tl'?Y ? ??- _ m i, r...` 1 p C ,? li 3 K °QS"i' r ';Jn '?tii•.., p z? Y w a$r y $- r.dd" ayF ce a .r.? a j } ;." a r k "? "p ?ix%?sR' W E. ?'Lr+ ?? '?5'• °A• E": tl _' - - Y•S;lyFt C.C.n ?'R r n r§ ° _? a., e a•z? - r. _ ? x;ni s,-,.. qW sc >?, „arJ r? ". ?`LIY,F• r R., 1 ri - ?a .?li?..????;; ? 1??1t$. cs5rr. ??° .?k"Ecn;. _$ ? '?"` p.?Ar .?: - r.• - ac ??rsr`',€? ,.> WS w?"? a - _ .,? .#.' ?3•? - ?,?? ...i. - f:?°"rte }.? r r - ^pj _ ?F ??5 c _ $ga??? i ?:ss '- ,' ?•?s F3 x?.Gg 8p ?Y??N Ae. ... _ N r, "??` :"f,i.,?,•".: xn- •'•$3 $ " ':S:rSc :8?;: } e?#gsgzc, y°y a 3 $ : w " sa W ar ? $ " Pis' cnn ??$k$r :.$ges.,_a y???$S?€ d Fs'?•? ? ?.r: ? ° #?.?zE a?2...!S: ' A Ife! N ;Ts .. .a ............... " ., .?„ =s. „ yam s., < WC n.e 3['3.,.... 3 k m W s a, a a6' 3 u axe n ` ? n? s? ? =$P, $ °pap? 'cyE?gp?g ??er a?c. a 3 `P_' '` y ,g ??$? 75 `? nA y$e $? ?Ry4 R y$ y?€?3a Y$!§g rs C .8° ?'?.? u}? w.° 3 {: ?er:ldY' y 'M e 2; 1511102 k-$ 1c $d?$,°i Yz*i=F ®r" 4 F £ ?'n?'z. 'V 4Y 'S?cx $]? k = in ? ?.R s'7$c gc y _€ r5 t¢ u icYyw xg°ge r?RF s,. R c =S ': ;' Hvi Px_ Rtnyy - - _ .. 32 ao gp ....,;,. r?e:?? ?`?.:?Y.• r;.°9? '?u?-r;eY:"- ? n ,. $. ?a 9 ? ' p k a W" -ri P c p; NB?. e??9?=d .3" x..,. ?="••?`' 8..-., ?? ? ?x-? `? ,: ?,. -' s,?'??-'pa? a. ;pfd'-' ?y9npq^7?} CSY$Y 1n y Ilk 4a a, $ 15 ?'YE my ?. D E5 51 ? gaae ? a 14 $ ypq ":v g ' $81 e_ $ I = r 2 F P RP la DO- s •'R ®® .. - FME - L Sip i a n i -rd W3 Y."Y ?g 2, t8 pp 5 rn a n_ 4,5 R v r e m MV Eli, e k"e ?? ? em 00, iad 3?a ??????? Asa c r ? ? Q "Y 6 I8 c'u ?;H N§ae d FEE Qg8 i.H R aa$??3 §? 2x Ta .?aYt ? f Et, ?el ka? ^ 1 Iepl?old'y?eag a1emjeap ?L c ??, `ar°wa ¦ 1 71 ® ? p?ena?nog !N nsJ 031 ?? 'DNI `S,LOa,LIHOHV ¦¦ SU VIOOSSV aagAod ¦¦¦ ® 12 tk 3 © IMOO NN011719 W "99 n D ?E cr7 I w ?o,QO, ate, 3<? ® YoKq ure LEI: a}5 91,101 l?l?a 5 hem}? .1p ?0 w .? Lax V14FIII Ydlw Y IQ?Ii n1[al 0 o s 7 w ?? -? C] d U Ko Lv - S _ oG - _ V - r I I n y ? cti/ t/ ? T \n\ ai w% f ' L r o LL W - _ _ _ w - G wlw 4i QQu m m G G G 7 G F ? 2 K ap9?2 a i;r. ? ? m4# G c ? @ s ?x n sees P'? "•????' ^? .. ?2 ioFI6 j q Tee v! tp ale ti ? ?o?,l •r.?c ?? ??, . ? ? ° ?? ? 'N ?t? pp e ' ?? ° a g e ?' ....s¢x ?•.'r s - e @? @ " ? = :.. S a ? ??L•r ??_ ?_'fAa ? c 7 ?!f ??a g •5€ -3:°. Y?'r r. 5 ? .. „ r .?"e? ° ° fi ..? @y° N ?- F n? ?• E e ` €, ? F r. a ?;. :..?W ? y! 99 L=? ,zy -t A" ? y? ?€ ? ? gg " ? y ? ?• ? . ? xe? ?...?::? @? x.43 ? 8 ? ? gpp? A? `gyp G 'e"? S E EE ?P?? C i;' CB .Is 3;?? ?c µy CQ PSSS? 9 x Y : ? : fi ?`eAs r A 3s ° ? a k3 8 ?' Y ' s @ a ?§ ??? 5:1: 3 @? € usea - g 3 a E 6 r 63ecw c :: a 3 As?g A ?rsHx x ,. ? :?@ ?°??? = F"a oe•Al ? ?a? .? ? ? = "? i ? film x ??3 @? xA?"f`'-? 4"a" Y' ? e@ ???st?A ? ? ? x 3a??5E"Icc - ??_ e@3: S s°?c3sF s g ?c s h?s kN? s c?G? a n" ?? 3y3 3M1e ?g@g 3@ ?3v i . 3 'vgg _@@gr - a ?_ n°y 6 6 3 R: ?L 3., S"?. Cp Y 66 y__ ?a..?@A9A??C "Y ?_ AS ????°A@3 @ r ?? d" e p @~ a a Cd r'y? ? R9a9?e k? w°-w c?.?m ssarz Y ?3r r't c 5 = 6 g `:etd" a@ t fit@ @x g i i 7 u B U IF e6 e 1 0 D 0 epl?o??'yopag ,rdapmiealO . ,??. .?.. ? arl-Mrn RITMey SIMI. 0 ¦ ED pipnalnog m AjIng Hinoc 081 'ONI 'S,LON,LIHDHV No ELI ,.?. ,. .?: a C Il 1 daff 021 NH)-V;g El o? cr] S5[,LVIDOSSV Marko, ¦EN ?? ?? M ; a ? nx urc ?¦ ? u Wl7 9NIW aHN001d aNd t NOI1pWO ?? © ro„ ,? s w ° - op ? 34 . o- ra._ t? $ J 4 $ I o 1 $ I .. 4 r pie X¦ i %i ef4? shill, I: J $n 1 LE d-2FK! w? n Q W I Q ?. R d==am' a - n se. upw Aw-ML-er'.oo ¦ ' CJ ? ? D [?] e _ 0 ? f epi4d'4-,nag?alemaeap PJenalnOG ma]Ajln9 41noS m81 ?? `9 c" m - SIDHLIHDHV an 'ONI ED 0 a' A ?? NOIldlS W M p5 ® - 0 SWIVIOOSSV ?iaahod Elmo © ?. a 0 n U C? C1 CS3 1 U W. [] . 0 sl!eiaQ a ?a?l?m?apu? aa?, m 45 s w m X 3, ME ' i9 Y5FA gll+ a u'NY3C'C u Y 14 EJ ti u ffl ll ppat`1t?Ny 3Ant-![- 96 490 ? -I ??? C 8 ax ?`-FI•-4 at?x n•= i mCrr r ':,? h ? ? _ _ _L ms`s m r ?/ Yes"-' ??5. :< '?_x.==sfa Ali e???A: ????? A ? fl-.''.?sNAMI?yE O - =kit-? ? z , • ?9?_?'2??=' N v ? ?y F?pJy$? ? 5 E?! ac ??4:€4u=? L??a' '{0 ?.?? -IL !1-uf3@:?i€° -fl$ o''sSgFyQi' R.eS 111 E ppt b?c =d ??F? a q i F ?" sgok ? ? sg ? p a Y71 I: 1AN '11p 7 ?? ?? ??e!,?9e9n???? e? n? s• ?' o roe x ill 1 s tia15? ;_ 't Alf, 2VT l' 4 All d?9es ail &a a a A, p ? l 3 l 'D 2 a LIEN O Z C 93 7 ?`= fi ygg Y` it 8 ? ? j ?e y?.3uE py ?P° ?m `3 4 fgEty $=£ e p 41 3! aly] VD5 1:11,111 al, A ------------------- F Rig a.y?- .•a°'d r { I a IX? ? R,ri Ui?SN`^ 9 LID 0 d 4 S a a 111 U m X ADDENUM NO.7 - Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel - Project No.10-0042-PR DATED: September 14, 2010 TO THE DRAWINGS AND PROJECT MANUAL FOR: ' CITY OF CLEARWATER PROJECT: Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel PROJECT NO. 10-0042-PR DATED: July 30, 2010 ' PREPARED BY: PARKS AND RECREATION DEPARTMENT 100 S. MYRTLE AVE. CLEARWATER, FLORIDA 3375 ' PHONE: 727-562-4856 FAX: 727-562-4825 FOWLER ASSOCIATE ARCHITECTS, INC 1421 COURT STREET CLEARWATER, FLORIDA 33756 PHONE: 727-449-2021 FAX: 727-447-5339 THIS ADDENDUM NO.7 ISSUED TO CLARIFY, DRAWING SHEETS, SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND QUESTIONS FROM PROSPECTIVE BIDDERS FOR MANDALAY PARK RESTROOM REPLACEMENT- PROJECT NO. 10-0042-PR OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR THIS WORK, THIS ADDENDUM CONSTITUTES A PART OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF THIS ADDENDUM ON THE PROPOSAL FORM. 1 PART I PROJECT MANUAL ' Item No. 1: Revised Bidder's Proposal Addendum No. 7 1. The contractors shall utilized the attached revised bidder's proposal sheet when submitting their proposal for Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel PROJECT NO. 10-0042-PR. The owner has requested and submitted an application for relief of 0.30 of a foot ' from the Building/Flood Board of Adjustment & Appeals. The owner has provide an allowance of $25,000.00 per recommendations of the architect and structural engineering consultants ' should the owner is not successful in obtaining the relief of 0.30 of a foot from the Building/ Flood Board of Adjustment & Appeals. Per the directions of the architect & structural consultants the general contractor will be requested to raise the existing structure approximately 7-inches per the information and instruction provided to the successful bidder in the implementation of this project. ' END OF ADDENDUM NO.7 1 11 BIDDER'S PROPOSAL - ADDENDUM NO.7 PROJECT: Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel - Project No. 10.0042-PR BID ITEMS EST UNIT TOTAL - QTY UNIT PRICE Architectrual Construction o The ac guard Station Remodel, Project No. 10-0042- PR from 2 story to 3 story building and all associated items required per drawings and technical specifications and all other items not included in bill of quantifies listed below 1 LS Site Civil Saw cutting, removal of existing concrete slab & dispose off site by the contractor 1.600 . Ft. Install temporary construction fencing & sift fencing of the Bleach Lifeguard Station site arealcontractoes stRging & temporary la down area 625 LF Removal of existing (6) trees, (5) palms, other shrubs to be detemwred at the pre-bid meeting, relocated per the direction of the owner in the vicinity of Beach Walk and apBELxffmtely 1,500 It of existing Liu uard Bldg- 1 LS Clearing & grubbing includes extending irrigation fines and providing necessary irrigation sleeving for a complete operational irrigation system at the end of the project. Coordinate irrigation work with the Owners irrigation technician 1 LS Adjust and modify catch basin provide marifi geatech fabric around catch bas in rate during construction period 1 , EA Install 12" cast iron storm drain i including fittings r wired 15 LF Install presloped AVO Trench Drain to catch basin include stainless steel drain covers per detail photo 50 LF Provide sidewalk road close sign & project sign (M.O.T.) for duration of project 3 EA Adjust existing valve boxes and cleanouts to proper grades prior to pour new concrete slab 9 EA Grade site as necessary to match existing grades of: concrete sidewalks, curbs, proposed trench drain, building slab; to install new concrete slab in match Beach Walk of color & texture; provide expansion joints, saw cut contraction joints in matching Beach Wall; install 3,000 PS1128 days concrete with commercial fiber mesh 2,500 . Ft. 1" electrical conduit provide ca ends and lace 2 -8 inch 'unction boxes 150 LF 1.5" electrical conduit 150 LF 2" electrical conduit 200 LF 4" electrical conduit 100 LF Restoration of all disturbed areas including contractor's staging and lay down area includes repair of existng irrigation system & laying bahia sod as necessa 1 LS Alternates Aftemate 1 - installation of ADA chair lifts and all associated cost of the ADA chair lifts stems 1 LS Structural Modifications as directed b the structural engineer allowance S $25,00 0.00 $25,000.00 Sub total of items 1-17 I S 10 % CONTINGENCY of Sub-total line 18 S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 TOTAL CONSTRUCTION COSTS (ITEMS 1-17 plus 10% contingency) $ CONTRACTOR; BIDDER'S TOTAL $ _ (Numbers) BIDDER'S TOTAL $ (Words) THE BIDDER'S TOTAL ABOVE IS HIS TOTAL BID BASED ON HIS UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED. THIS FIGURE IS FOR THE INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF OPENING BIDS. THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TABULATIONS FROM THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE BID. IF THEREIS AN ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER IT SHALL BE CHANGES AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICES SHALL GOVERN. 10% contingency shall be ulilzed only upon written request by the contractor for additional scope of work not included in the bill of quanitites to the Owner, written approval by the Owner for the additional scope of work in the utilization of the 10% contingency, any funds not utitzed shall be returned to the owner upon close out of the purchase order short. 1 BEACH LIFEGUARD STATION REMODEL PROJECT NO.: 10-0042-PR A TABLE OF CONTENTS: I SECTION 1: ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS SECTION II: INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS: SECTION III: GENERAL CONDITIONS: SECTION IV: THE SPECIFICATIONS: City of Clearwater Technical Specifications Greenfield Environmental - Asbestos Survey - Pier 60 - Life Guard Station Driggers Engineering Services, Inc. Geotechnical Investigation Report Qualification Application of Prospective Bidders City of Clearwater Construction Projects Response Letter to Building Dept. Regards to FEMA Elevation Certificate, Building Colors & Gerald Barrel Vault Metal Roofing Tile Colors Fowler Associate Architect Inc. - Architectural Technical Specifications SECTION V: CONTRACT, BOND, & BID FORMS 11 1 1 Table of Contents SECTION I ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS r? 11 1 BEACH LIFEGUARD STATION REMODEL CONTRACT # 10-0042-PR CLEARWATER, FLORIDA Copies of the Contract Documents and Plans for this Project are available for inspection and/or purchase by prospective bidders at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room - website address: www.myClearwater.com/cityprgjects, ON MONDAY, AUGUST, 16, 2010, until no later than close of business three (3) days preceding the bid opening. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as indicated on the website, reflects reproduction cost only. The work for which proposals are invited consists of REMODEL BEACH LIFEGUARD STATION _CONVERTING 2 STORY BUILDING TO 3 STORY, INCLUDES CONCRETE SLAB REOMOVAL NEW PILINGS BUILDING CONSTRUCTION METAL BARREL TILE ROOFING SYSTEM, HVAC SYSTEM. PLUMBING, ELECTRICAL, STORM SEWER SYSTEM CARPENTRY, ADA CHAIR LIFT SYSTEM, MH.LWORK AND OTHER NECESSARY APPURTENANCES ASSOCIATED WITH BUILDING CONSTRUCTION. MANDATORY Pre-Bid Conference for all prospective bidders will be held on AUGUST 26, 2010 AT 8:00 AM AT TIDE CLEARWATER BEACH LIBRARY & RECREATION CENTER, 69 BAY ESPLANADE, CLEARWATER, FLORIDA 33767 . Representatives of the Owner and Consulting Architect will be present to discuss this Project. Sealed proposals will he received by the Purchasinh Manager, at the Purchasing Office, located at the Municipal Services Bldg., 100 So. Myrtle Ave., 3 Floor, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520, until 1:30 P.M. on THURSDAY, SEPTEMBER, 09, 2010, and publicly opened and read at that hour and place for BEACH LIFEGUARD STATION REMODEL - PROJECT NO 10-0042-PP- A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and proposal form is available to the general public (Contractors, Sub-contractors, suppliers, vendors, etc.) for review and purchase. However, sealed proposals will only be accepted from those Contractors that are currently City pre-qualified Contractors in the construction category of COMMERICAL BUILDING with a minimum pre-qualification amount of $400,000.00. Contractors wanting to pre-qualify to bid this project must do so two (2) weeks/ten (10) workdays prior to the bid opening date. Qualification package is included in the technical specifications. A 10% bid bond is required for all City of Clearwater projects. The right is reserved by the City Manager of the City of Clearwater, Florida to reject any or all bids. The City of Clearwater, Florida George McKibben, Purchasing Manager (727) 562-4634 Sectionl.doc Page 1 of 1 8/27/2008 SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Table of Contents. SECTION II ................................................................................................................................... i 1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS .......................................................................... 1 2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS .................................................................................. 1 3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE ................................. 1 4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA ....................................................................... 2 5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND .................................................................................... 3 6 CONTRACT TIME .......................................................................................................... 3 7 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES ............................................................................................. 3 8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT ......................................................... 3 9 SUBCONTRACTORS ...................................................................................................... 3 10 BID/PROPOSAL FORM ................................................................................................. 4 11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS .................................................................................................. 4 12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS .................................................... 5 13 REJECTION OF BIDS .................................................................................................... 5 14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER .............................................................................. 5 15 OPENING OF BIDS ......................................................................................................... 5 16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES ........................................... 5 17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE ............................. 6 18 AWARD OF CONTRACT ............................................................................................... 7 19 BID PROTEST .................................................................................................................. 7 20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT ................................................................................................. 8 21 CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENT MEASURES ....................................................................................... 8 Sectionll.doc i Revised: 7/1712008 Section II - Instructions to Bidders 1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS r 1.1 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents are available at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room - website address: www.myclearwater.com/cigprojects. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as indicated on the City's Website, reflects reproduction costs only, which is non-refundable. A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and bid/proposal form is available only to pre-qualified bidders. Contractors, suppliers, or others who are not pre-qualified but who may be a possible subcontractor, supplier, or other interested person may purchase a "Subcontractor" package consisting of plans, specifications, and list of pay items. 1.2 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids. Neither the City nor the Engineer shall be liable for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents, by Bidders, sub-bidders or others. 1 1.3 The City, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, does so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and does not confer a license or grant any other permission to use the documents for any other purpose. F BID 2 QUALIFICATION O DERS 2.1 Each prospective Bidder must pre-qualify to demonstrate, to the complete satisfaction of the City of Clearwater, that the Bidder has the necessary facilities, equipment, ability, financial resources and experience to perform the work in a satisfactory manner before obtaining drawings, specifications and contract documents. An application package for pre- qualification may be obtained by contacting the City of Clearwater, Engineering Department, Engineering Services Division at P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758- 4748 (mailing address); 100 South Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520 (street address only) or by phone at (727) 562-4750. All qualification data must be completed and delivered to the Director of Engineering at the above address not later than fourteen (14) days prior to the time set for the receipt of bids. Bidders currently pre-qualified by the City do not have to make reapplication. 3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 3.1 It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work; (c) consider and abide by all applicable federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations; and (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents. r 3.2 In reference to the Technical Specifications and/or the Scope of the Work for identification of those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site which have been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such reports but not upon non-technical data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or for the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. In reference to those drawings relating to physical conditions of existing surface and subsurface conditions (except Underground Facilities) which are at or contiguous to the site and which have been utilized by the Engineer in Sectionll.doc Page 1 of 9 Revised; 7/17/2008 Section 11- Instructions to Bidders preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such drawings but not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. 3.3 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished to the City and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and the City does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided in the Contract Documents. 3.4 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities, other physical conditions, possible conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing conditions appear in the General Conditions. 3.5 Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 3.6 On request in advance, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such explorations and tests at Bidder's own expense as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations and tests. 3.7 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by the Contractor in performing the Work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures are to be obtained and paid for by the City unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 3.8 The submission of a Bid will constitute an unequivocal representation by the Bidder that the Bidder has complied with every requirement of these Instructions to Bidders and that, without exception, the Bid is premised upon performing and famishing the Work required by the Contract Documents by such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions of performance and furnishing of the work. 4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 4.1 All questions as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to the Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda, either by mail or facsimile transmission, to all parties recorded by the Purchasing Manager as having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received less than ten (10) days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be answered. Only information provided by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations of clarifications will be without legal effect. Sectionll.doc Page 2 of 9 Revised: 7/17/2008 1 1 u 1-1 a 1 1 11 Section II - Instructions to Bidders 4.2 Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the City or Engineer. 5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND 5.1 Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to the City of Clearwater in an amount equal to ten percent (10%) of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of a certified or cashiers check or a Bid Bond (on form attached) issued by a surety meeting the requirements of the General Conditions. A cash bid bond will not be accepted. 5.2 The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the Agreement and furnished the required Payment and Performance bonds, whereupon the Bid Security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute, deliver the Agreement and furnish the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the award of contract by the City Council, the City may annul the bid and the Bid Security of the Bidder will be forfeited. The Bid Security of any Bidder whom the City believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by the City until the successful execution of the agreement with the successful Bidder or for a period up to ninety (90) days following bid opening. Security of other Bidders will be returned approximately fourteen (14) days after the Bid opening. 5.3 The Bid Bond shall be issued in the favor of the City of Clearwater by a surety company qualified to do business in, and having a registered agent in the State of Florida. 6 CONTRACT TIME 6.1 The number of consecutive calendar days within which the work is to be completed is set forth in the Technical Specifications. 7 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 7.1 Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Contract Agreement. S SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 8.1 The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or "or equal" item may be furnished or used, application for its acceptance will not be considered by the Engineer until after the effective date of the Contract Agreement. The procedure for submittal of any such application is described in the General Conditions and as supplemented in the Technical Specifications. ' 9 SUBCONTRACTORS 1 9.1 If requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall, within seven (7) days after the date of the request, submit to the Engineer an experience statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the Contractor in the completion of the Work. The amount of subcontract work shall not exceed fifty percent (50%) of the Work except as may be specifically approved by the Engineer. If the Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Sectionll_doc Page 3 of 9 Revised: 7/17/2008 11 Section II - Instructions to Bidders Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization, he may, before recommending award of the Contract to the City Council, request the Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. If the Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, the City may award the contract to the next lowest and most responsive Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid security to the City of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization listed by the Contractor and to whom the Engineer does not make written objection prior to the recommendation of award to the City Council will be deemed acceptable to the City subject to revocation of such acceptance after the Effective Date of the Contract Agreement as provided in the General Conditions. 9.2 No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier, person or organization against whom he has reasonable objection. 10 BID/PROPOSAL FORM 10.1 The Bid/Proposal Form is included with the Contract Documents and shall be completed in ink or by typewriter. All blanks on the Bid/Proposal Forms must be completed. The Bidder must state in the Bid/Proposal Form in words and numerals without delineation's, alterations or erasures, the price for which he will perform the work as required by the Contract Documents. Bidders are required to bid on all items in the Bid/Proposal form. The lump sum for each section or item shall be for famishing all equipment, materials, and labor for completing the section or item as per the plans and contract specifications. Should it be found that quantities or amounts shown on the plans or in the proposal, for any part of the work, are exceeded or should they be found to be less after the actual construction of the work, the amount bid for each section or item will be increased or decreased in direct proportion to the unit prices bid for the listed individual items. 10.2 Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice- president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal shall be affixed. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the Signature. If requested, the person signing a Bid for a corporation or partnership shall produce evidence satisfactory to the City of the person's authority to bind the corporation or partnership. 10.3 Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general partner, whose title shall appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership shall be shown below the signature. 10.4 All names shall be typed or printed below the signature. 11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS 11.1 Sealed Bids shall be submitted at or before the time and at the place indicated in the Advertisement for Bids and shall be submitted in a 8.5"x11" manila envelope with the project name and number on the bottom left hand corner. If forwarded by mail, the Bid shall be enclosed in another envelope with the notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof and addressed to the City of Clearwater, attention Purchasing Manager. Bids will be received at the office indicated in the Advertisement until the time and date specified. Telegraphic or facsimile bids received by the Purchasing Manager will not be accepted. SectionlI.doc Page 4 of 9 Revised: 7/17/2008 1 1 Section 11- Instructions to Bidders 12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 12.1 Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered as described in the Advertisement of Bids. A request for withdrawal or a modification shall be in writing and signed by a person duly authorized to do so. Withdrawal of a Bid will not prejudice the rights of a Bidder to submit a new Bid prior to the Bid Date and Time. After expiration of the period for receiving Bids, no Bid may be withdrawn or modified. 12.2 After a bid is received by the City, the bidder may request to modify the bid for typographical or scrivener's errors only. The bidder must state in writing to the City that a typographical or scrivener's error has been made by the bidder, the nature of the error, the requested correction of the error, and what the adjusted bid amount will be if the correction is accepted by the City. The City reserves the right at its sole discretion to accept, reject, or modify any bid. 13 REJECTION OF BIDS 13.1 To the extent permitted by applicable State and Federal laws and regulations, the City reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any and all informalities. Grounds for the rejection of a bid include but are not limited to a material omission, unauthorized alteration of form, unauthorized alternate bids, incomplete or unbalanced unit prices, or irregularities of any kind. Also, the City reserves the right to reject any Bid if the City believes that it would not be in the best interest of the public to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by the City. The City reserves the right to decide which bid is deemed to be the lowest and best in the interest of the public. 14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 14.1 Any or all bids will be rejected if there is any reason for believing that collusion exists among the bidders, the participants in such collusion will not be considered in future proposals for the same work. Each bidder shall execute the Non-Collusion Affidavit contained in the Contract Documents. 15 OPENING OF BIDS 15.1 Bids will be opened and read publicly at the location and time stated in the Advertisement Bidders are invited to be present at the o ening of bids for Bids p . . 16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES 16.1 The Contractor shall secure all licenses and permits (and shall pay all permit fees) except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall comply with all Federal and State Laws, County and Municipal Ordinances and regulations, which in any manner effect the prosecution of the work. City of Clearwater building permit fees and impact fees will be waived except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. 16.2 The Contractor shall assume all liability for the payment of royalty fees due to the use of any construction or operation process, which is protected by patent rights except as specifically Section]I.doc Page 5 of 9 Revised: 7/17/2008 Section II - Instructions to Bidders stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The amount of royalty fee, if any, shall be stated by the Contractor. 16.3 The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use and other taxes required by law. The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the pertinent State Statutes involving the sales tax and sales tax exemptions and complying with all requirements. 16.4 The City of Clearwater is exempt from state sales tax on materials incorporated into the WORK. The City of Clearwater reserves the right to implement the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, if indicated in the Scope of Work Description in Section IV -- Technical Specifications and as defined in Section III - General Conditions. 17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE 17.1 In accordance with the requirements of Section 287.087 Florida Statutes regarding a Vendor Drug Free Workplace, in the event of identical tie bids, preference shall be given to bidders with drug-free workplace programs. Whenever two or more bids which are equal with respect to price, quality, and service are received by the City for the procurement of commodities or contractual services, a bid received from a business that certifies that it has implemented a drug-free workplace program shall be given preference in the award process. Established procedures for processing tie bids will be followed if none or all of the tied bidders have a drug-free workplace program. In order to have a drug-free workplace program, a contractor shall supply the City with a certificate containing the following six statements and the accompanying certification statement: (1) Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition. (2) Inform employees as to the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy of maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations. (3) Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1). (4) In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of chapter 893, or of any controlled substance law, of the United States, or of any state, for a violation occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction. (5) Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee who is so convicted. (6) Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through implementation of this section. I certify that this firm does/does not (select only one) fully comply with the above , requirements. SectionIl.doc Page 6 of 9 Revised: 7/17/2008 ' fl 1 1 1 1 fl Section 11- Instructions to Bidders 18 AWARD OF CONTRACT 18.1 Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words. Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. 18.2 In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, unit prices, and other data as may be requested in the Bid/Proposal form. The City may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor for the Work. The City may conduct such investigations as the City deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons, and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to the City's satisfaction within the prescribed time. 18.3 If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible, responsive Bidder whose evaluation by the City indicates to the City that the award will be in the best interest of the City. 18.4 Award of contract will be made for that combination of base bid and alternate bid items in the best interest of the City, however, unless otherwise specified all work awarded will be awarded to only one Contractor. 19 BID PROTEST 19.1 RIGHT TO PROTEST: Any actual bidder who is aggrieved in connection with the solicitation or award of a contract may seek resolution of his/her complaints initially with the Purchasing Manager, and if not satisfied, with the City Manager, in accordance with protest procedures set forth in this section. 19.2 PROTEST PROCEDURE: A. A protest with respect to the specifications Zan invitation for bid or request for proposal shall be submitted in writing a minimum of five (5) work days prior to the opening of the bid or due date of the request for proposals, unless the aggrieved person could not have been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening or the closing date for proposals. Opening dates for bids or due dates for requests for proposal will be printed on the bid/request document itself. B. Protests in respect to award of contract shall be submitted in writing a maximum of five (5) work days after notice of intent to award is posted, or is mailed to each bidder, which ever is earlier. Notice of intent to award will be forwarded to bidders upon telephonic or written request. Protests of recommended award should cite specific portions of the City of Clearwater Code of Ordinances that have allegedly been violated. C. Exceptions to the five (5) day requirements noted in both A and B above may be granted if the aggrieved person could have not been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening, posting of I Sectionll.doc Page 7 of 9 Revised: 7/17/2008 Section 11- Instructions to Bidders intent to award, or due date for requests for proposals. Request for exceptions should be made in writing, stating reasons for the exception. D. The Purchasing Manager shall respond to the formal written protest within five (5) work days of receipt. The Purchasing Manager's response will be fully coordinated with the appropriate Department Director and the Assistant City Manager. E. If the protestor is not satisfied with the response from the Purchasing Manager, he/she may then submit in writing within five (5) work days of receipt of that response his/her reason for dissatisfaction, along with copies of his/her original formal protest letter and the response from the Purchasing Manager, to the City Manager. F. The City Manager as Purchasing Agent for the City has the final authority in the matter of protests. The City Manager will respond to the protestor within ten (10) work days of receipt of the appeal. 19.3 PROTEST FEE: When filing a formal protest, the protesting vendor must include a fee in the amount of 5% of the selected vendor's total bid to offset the City's additional expenses related to the protest. This fee shall not exceed $2,500 nor be less than $50. If either the Purchasing Manager or the City Manager upholds the protest, the City will refund 100% of the fee paid. 19.4 STAY OF PROCUREMENT DURING PROTEST: In the event of a timely protest, the Purchasing Manager shall not proceed with the solicitation or award of contract until all administrative remedies have been exhausted or until the City Manager makes written determination that the award of contract without delay is necessary to protect the best interest of the City. 20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT 20.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the City of Clearwater's Ordinance related to trench digging (Ordinance No. 7918-08) along with the Florida Trench Safety Act (Sections 553.60-55364, Florida Statutes) and the provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration's (OSHA) excavation safety standards, 29 C.F.R.s 1926.650 Subparagraph P, or current revisions of these laws. 21 CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENT MEASURES 21.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) stormwater permit and implement stormwater pollution prevention plans (SWPPP's) or stormwater management programs (both using best management practices (BMPs) that effectively reduce or prevent the discharge of pollutants into receiving waters. A. The control of construction-related sediment loadings is critical to maintaining water quality. The implementation of proper erosion and sediment control practices during the construction stage can significantly reduce sediment loadings to surface waters. Sectionfl.doc Page 8 of 9 Revised: 7/17/2008 1 Section 11- Instructions to Bidders B. Prior to land disturbance, prepare and implement an approved erosion and sediment control plan or similar administrative document that contains erosion and sediment control provisions. NPDES Management Measures available at City of Clearwater Engineering Environmental Division and EPA websites to help address construction-related Best ' Management Practices. References EPA website 1 1 11 I Sectionll.doc Page 9 of 9 Revised; 7/17/2008 SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents: 1 DEFINITIONS ..................................................................................................................1 2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS ........................................................................................... 5 2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE ........................... . 5 2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS ........................................................................................... . 5 2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT ...................... .................. •.................................. ............................... . 5 2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION .................................................................... . 5 2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE ....................................................................... . 5 2.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS ............................................................................................... . 6 3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT ......................................................................... 6 3.1 INTENT ........................................................................................................................... 6 3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES .................................................. 7 4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS .......................................•............................................................ 7 4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS ......................................................................................... 7 4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS .................................................... ................... . 7 4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES .................................... . 8 4.4 REFERENCE POINTS .............................................................:............ ........................ . 8 5 BONDS AND INSURANCE ............................................................................................ 8 5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND ............................... 8 5.2 INSURANCE ................................................................................................................... 9 5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE....... ..................................... ...... ....... 10 5.2.2 PUBLIC LL4BILITYAND PROPERTYDAMAGE COVERAGE ............................ 10 5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY .................................................... 11 5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS ................................................................................... ... 11 6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES ..................................................................... 12 6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE ............................................................. 12 6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................... 13 6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS ............................ 6.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS........ 14 6.5 USE OF PREMISES ...................................................................................................... 14 65.1 STAGINGAREAS .................................................................................................... 15 65.2 RESTORATION TIME LIMITS.. ....... ............ ......................................................... 15 6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES ................................... 15 6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS ...................................................................................... 16 6.8 PERMITS ....................................................................................................................... 16 6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION ........................................................... ... 16 6.10 EMERGENCIES ............................................................................................................ 17 6.11 DRAWINGS .................................................................................................................. 17 SectionII Ldoc i 9/9/2008 6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, and SUBMITTAL REVIEW ........................ 17 6.11.2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS ................................................................................ ----- 18 6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS ....................................................................................... ••.---..... 20 6.11.4 DELIVERABLES :.................................................................................................... 22 6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE ........................... 22 6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK ........................................................................................ 23 6.14 INDEMNIFICATION .................................................................................................... 23 7 OTHER WORK .............................................................................................................. 23 7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE ........................................................................................ 23 7.2 COORDINATION .............................................•--..................---------.....................---...... 24 8 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY ...................................................................................... 24 9 ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION .............................................. 24 9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE ........................ .......................................................... 24 9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS ........................................................ 25 9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK ........................................................................ 25 9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS .................................. 25 9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES ........................................................................................ 25 9.6 LIMITATIONS ON ENGINEER'S RESPONSIBILITIES ........................................... 26 10 CHANGES IN THE WORK .......................................................................................... 26 11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE ................................................................... 27 11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE .................................................................... 27 11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT ....................... 29 11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK .................................................................................................... 29 12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME .................................................................... 29 13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK ............................................................................................... 30 13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION .......................................................................................... 30 13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK ....................................................................................... 31 13.3 ENGINEER MAY STOP THE WORK ....................................................... ..... 31 13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK ........................................ 31 13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD .................................................... .......... 32 13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK .................................................... ......... 32 13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK ....................................................... 32 14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION ......................................... 33 14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT ........................................................... 33 14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE ............................................................... 34 14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS ................................ 34 14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION ............................................................................................ 35 14.5 FINAL INSPECTION ................................................................................................... 35 14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT ................................................... ... 35 14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE ................................................................... 36 14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS ....................................................................•--.------.....---------.---- 36 SectionIII.doc ii 9/92008 15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION .................................................... 37 15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK ...................................................................... 37 15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE .................................................................... .............. ... 37 15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE ......................... .................. 38 16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION ............................................................................ .................. 38 17 MISCELLANEOUS ..................................•.................•................................ .................. 39 17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS ............................................... .................. 39 17.2 GIVING NOTICE ........................................................................................ .................. 39 17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM ......................................................................•---......... .....----------... 39 17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED ................... .................. 39 17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT ............................................................... .................. 39 17.6 RENEWAL OPTION .................................................................................. .................. 39 18 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS .......................................................... .................. 40 18.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE ............................................................................. .................. 40 18.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE ............................... .................. 40 18.3 FIXED SIGN ............................................................................................... .................. 40 18.4 PORTABLE SIGNS .................................................................................... .................. 40 18.5 SIGN COLORING ....................................................................................... .................. 40 18.6 SIGN PLACEMENT ................................................................................... .... ............... 40 18.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE .............................................................................. .................. 41 18.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN ............................................................... ........ .................. 41 19 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) OPTION ..................................... .................. 41 19.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................... .................. 41 19.2 PROCEDURE .............................................................................................. ..................41 19.3 RESPONSIBILITIES .................................................................................. .................. 42 20 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK ............................................ .................. 44 21 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE .................. 44 22 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION ........ .................. 44 23 MATERIAL USED ....................................................................................... .................. 45 24 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ................... .................. 46 Sectionlll.doc iii 9/9/2008 1 1 1 DEFINITIONS Section III - General Conditions Addenda Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct or change the Bidding Requirements or the contract documents. Agreement The written contract between Owner and Contractor covering the Work to be performed; other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as provided therein. Application for Payment The form accepted by Engineer which is to be used by Contractor in requesting progress ' or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. ' Approve The word approve is defined to mean satisfactory review of the material, equipment or methods for general compliance with the design concepts and with the information given in the Contract Documents. It does not imply a responsibility on the part of the Engineer to verify in every detail conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Bid The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the work to be performed. Bidding Documents ' The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the proposed Contact Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). Bonds t of se rit P f d t b d d th i t y. er on s an o er ns rumen s cu ormanc a an paymen Change Order A written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor authorizing an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time issued on or after the effective date of the Agreement. 1 City The City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida. Construction Inspector A person who is the authorized representative of the Engineer and inspects City construction projects in order to insure the Contractor's work complies with the intent of the contract documents. Contract Documents The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), Contractor's Bid (including documentation accompanying the bid and any post-Bid documentation submitted prior to the execution of the Agreement) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the Bonds, Instructions to Bidders, these General Conditions, any ' Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings, any other exhibits identified in the Agreement, together with all Modifications issued after the execution of the Agreement. Sectionlll.doc Page I of 46 9/9/2008 Section III - General Conditions Contract Price The Contract price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable by Owner to Contractor for performing the Work. Contract Time The number of days or the date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the Work. Contractor The Person with whom the Owner has entered into the Agreement. For the purposes of this contract, the person, firm or corporation with whom this contract or agreement has been made by the City of Clearwater or its duly authorized representative. Critical Path Method Construction Schedule-CPM A graphic format construction schedule that displays construction activities as they relate to one another for the purpose of identifying the most efficient way to perform the work in a timely manner. The critical path identifies which activity is critical to the execution of the schedule. Day A calendar day of twenty-four (24) hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. Defective An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of final payment. Drawings The drawings, which will be identified in Technical Specifications or the Agreement, which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been prepared or approved by Engineer and are referred to in the contract documents. Shop drawings are not Drawings as so defined. Engineer The duly appointed representative of the City Manager of the City of Clearwater. For the purposes of this contract, the City Engineer of the City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida, or his authorized representative. Engineer's Consultant A Person having a contract with Engineer to furnish services as Engineer's independent professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as such in the Supplementary Conditions. F.D. O. T Specifications The Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction as issued by the Florida Department of Transportation (latest English edition). Furnish The words "furnish", "furnish and install", "install", and "provide" or words of similar meaning shall be interpreted, unless otherwise specifically stated, to mean "furnish and install complete in place and ready for service". Inspection The term "inspection" and the act of inspecting means examination of construction to SectionIll.doc Page 2 of 46 9/9/2008 ' Section 111- General Conditions ensure that it conforms to the design concept expressed in the Drawings and Specifications. These terms shall not be construed to mean supervision, superintending or overseeing. Laws and Regulations ' Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and orders of any kind of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction. Liens Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal property. Milestone ' A principal event specified in the contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion date or time prior to the final completion date. ' Notice to Proceed (NTP) A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform his obligations under the Contract Documents. Owner The City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida. For the purposes of this contract, the person who is the City's authorized representative from the City's Department with whom will be responsible for the maintenance and operation of the Work once the Work is completed. Person ifi i i i f l on, partnersh p, irm, organization, or other art c a A natural person or a corporat entity. Project The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. ' Partial Utilization Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which is ' intended (or a related purpose) prior to Final Completion of all the Work. Representative of Contractor The Contractor shall assign a responsible person or persons, one of whom shall be at the construction site at all times that work is progressing. The names and positions of these ' persons shall be submitted to the City Engineer at the time of the pre-construction conference. This person or persons shall not be changed without written approval of City Engineer. Request for Information (RFI) An official written request for clarification of the intent of the contract documents from the contractor to the Engineer. Shop Drawing All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically ' prepared by or for Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations, brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other I Sectionffl.doc Page 3 of 46 919/2008 Section III - General Conditions information prepared by a supplier and submitted by Contractor to illustrate material or equipment for some portion of the Work. Specifications Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto. Subcontractor A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the site. Substantial Completion The Work (or a specified part thereof) which has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, as evidenced by Engineer's definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract documents, so that the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended; or if no such certificate is issued, when the Work is complete and ready for final payment as evidenced by the Engineer's recommendation of final payment. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. Supplementary Conditions The part of the Contract which amends or supplements these General Conditions. Supplier A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, material man or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by the Contractor. Surety Any person, firm or corporation which is bound with Contractor and which engages to be responsible for Contractor and his acceptable performance of the Work by a Bid, Performance or Payment Bond. Underground Facilities All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage removal or treatment, traffic or other control systems or water. Unit Price Work Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. Work The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or furnishing labor and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as required by the Contract Documents. Sectionlll.doc Page 4 of 46 9/9/2008 1 1 Ll 1 1 Section III - General Conditions Work Change Directive A written directive to Contractor, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by the Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or emergencies. Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or Contract Time, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times. 2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE When Contractor delivers the executed Agreements to the Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to the Owner such Bonds and Certificates of Insurance as Contractor may be required to furnish by this contract. 2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS Engineer shall furnish to Contractor two (2) copies of Contract Documents for execution. Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction. 2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT The Contract Time will commence on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor shall start to perform the work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No work shall be done at the site prior to the date that the Contract Time commences to run. 2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error or discrepancy which Contractor may discover; and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any work effected thereby; however, Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy in the Drawings or Specifications, unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should reasonably have known thereof. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent or employee of the Owner or Engineer's Consultant, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Contractor shall not commence any work at any time without approved insurance required by these General Conditions. Failure to obtain this insurance will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE Within twenty (20) days of Award of Contract and before the start of the Work, the Engineer shall schedule a preconstruction conference to be attended by Contractor, Engineer, Owner and SectionllI_doc Page 5 of 46 9/912009 11 Section III - General Conditions others as appropriate to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedule of the Work and general Contract procedures. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner at the Preconstruction Conference a color Critical Path Method (CPM) Construction Schedule. This is to be a sequence of events including submittal review and procurement. Notice to Proceed is usually established at this conference and such date can be inserted into the schedule at that time. The Contractor shall also bring a Submittal Schedule for review by the Engineer. This is to make sure that the list is complete and this schedule shall be the basis of a Submittal Log. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner at the preconstruction conference a completed Emergency Call List and a completed Authorized Signature List. The Owner or the Engineer's Consultant shall deliver to the Contractor at the preconstruction conference a project disk that has all of the necessary data and survey control points for the purpose of construction stakeout and as-built survey. The Owner or the Engineer's Consultant shall deliver to the Contractor at the preconstruction conference a Contractor evaluation package. This is for the purpose of rating the Contractor's performance for reference when considering future contracts and bid prequalification. 2.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS The Contractor is required to attend Progress Meetings. These meetings will be schedule on a weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly basis depending on the needs of the project. The Contractor shall bring to each meeting an updated submittal log, an updated request for information (RFI) log, a look-ahead schedule to cover the project activity from the current meeting to the next meeting, and all material test reports generated in the same time period. 3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT 3.1 INTENT The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and the Contractor concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written agreement. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment which may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or from trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be furnished and performed whether or not specifically called for. When words or phrases, which have a well- known technical or construction industry or trade meaning, are used to describe Work, materials or equipment, such words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the Engineer. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the code, Laws or Regulation of any governmental authority, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual or code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. However, no provision of any referenced standard specification, manual or code (whether or not specially incorporated by reference in the responsibilities of Owner or Contractor as set forth in the Contract Documents) shall change the duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor or Engineer, or any of their agents or employees SectionIJI-doc Page 6 of 46 . 9/9/2005 11 ' Section 111- General Conditions from those set forth in the Contract Documents. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract shall be issued by the Engineer. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in these Contract documents shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be read and enforced as through it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not inserted, or if not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either ' party, the Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion- The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of conflict, error or ' discrepancy, as follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary Conditions, General Conditions, Drawings, Technical Specifications. In a series of Modifications or Addenda the latest will govern. ' 3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or ' discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any provision of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any such standard, specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor shall report it to the Engineer in writing at once, and Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency) until an amendment or supplement to Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods provided in these General Specifications, provided however, that Contractor shall not be liable to Owner, or Engineer for failure to report ' any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless Contractor knew or reasonably should have known thereof. 4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS ' 4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS The Owner shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the Work is to be Performed, rights-of-way, easements for access thereto, and such other lands which are designated for the use of contractor. The Owner shall identify any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of lands so furnished with which contractor will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by the Owner, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions and Technical Specifications for ' identification of those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical conditions at the site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which have been relied upon by Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such ' reports are not guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness and are not part of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall promptly notify the Engineer in writing of any subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site, or in an existing structure, differing materially from those ' indicated or referred to in the Contract Documents. Engineer will promptly review those conditions and advise if further investigation or tests are necessary. Owner or Engineer shall obtain the necessary additional investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Engineer and ' Sectionlll.doc Page 7 of 46 9/9/2008 Section III - General Conditions Contractor. If Engineer finds that the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there are subsurface or latent physical conditions, which differ materially from those, indicated in the contract Documents, and which could not reasonably have been anticipated by Contractor, a work change or Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions. 4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and the cost of all the following will be included in the Contract Price and contractor shall have full responsibility for: (i) reviewing and checking all such information and data, (ii) locating all Underground Facilities shown, or indicated in the Contract Documents, (iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. The Contractor is required to call the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any excavation per State regulations and to notify any utility owners who are not a member of the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any excavation. The LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER is an agency for the protection and location of utilities prior to any excavation and contact number is available in local telephone directory. 4.4 REFERENCE POINTS Engineer shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction, which in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of the Owner or Engineer. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points by a surveyor licensed in the State of Florida. The Contractor is referred to the Technical Specifications for more specific information regarding the provision of construction surveys. If a Owner survey crew is assigned to the project and there is excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and grade have been set, the Contractor will be charged at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments with a minimum charge of one hour. 5 BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND Contractor shall famish a Performance and Payment Bond in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. This bond shall remain in effect at least one year after the date when final payment becomes due, unless a longer period of time is prescribed by laws and regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the SectionIII.doc Page 8 of 46 919/2008 1 1 1 Section III - General Conditions Contract Documents and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff, Bureau of Government Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury Department- All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agents' authority to act. All bonds shall be deemed to contain all of the Conditions of Section 255.05, Florida Statutes, even if such language is not directly contained within the bond and the Surety shall be licensed and qualified to do business in the State of Florida. Owner reserves the right to reject any surety. If the Surety on any Bond furnished by the Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of these Contract Documents, the Contractor shall within five days after notice thereof substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable to Owner. 5.2 INSURANCE Contractor shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the Work being performed and furnished and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from Contractor's performance and furnishing of the Work and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed or furnished by Contractor, and Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable for the following: (i) Claims under worker's compensation, disability benefits and other similar employee benefit acts; (ii) Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees; (iii) Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor's employees; (iv) Claims for damages insured by customary personal injury liability coverage which are sustained by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor, or by any other person for any other reason; (v) Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and (vi) Claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by the Owner or any other additional insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with this paragraph. The policies of insurance so required by this paragraph to be purchased and maintained shall: (i) include as additional insured (subject to any customary exclusion in respect of professional liability) Owner of Clearwater and any other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insured, and include coverage for the respective officers and employees of all such additional insures; (ii) include completed operations insurance; (iii) include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor's indemnity obligations in Article for Contractor's Responsibilities; (iv) contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal refused until at least thirty days prior written notice has been given to the Owner, and Contractor and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplemental Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the Contractor as described in this paragraph); (v) remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing or replacing defective Work in accordance with Article for Correction of Defective Work; (vi) with respect to completed Sectionlll.doc Page 9 of 46 9/9/2008 1 Section III - Genera] Conditions operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims-made basis, shall remain in effect for at least two years after final payment. Contractor shall furnish the Owner and each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued evidence satisfactory to the Owner and any such additional insured, of continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter and (vii) Name and telephone number of the authorized insurance agent for the Insurer. The limits of liability for the insurance required shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by laws and regulations: 5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. Contract Award Amount $1,000,000. and Over (1) Workers' Compensation Statutory Statutory (2) Employer's Liability $500,000. $1,000,000. 5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE Comprehensive General Liability including Premise/Operations; Explosion, Collapse and Underground Property Damage; Products/Completed Operations, Broad Form Contractual, Independent Contractors; Broad Form Property Damage; and Personal Injury liabilities: Contract Award Amount Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over (1) Bodily Injury: $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate Aggregate (2) Property Damage: $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate Aggregate (3) Personal Injury, with $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual employment exclusion deleted Aggregate Aggregate SectionIIl.doc Page 10 of 46 9/9/2008 Section III - General Conditions 1 5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY L11 1 including all owned (private and others), hired and non-owned vehicles: Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. Contract Award Amount $1,000,000. and Over (1) Bodily Injury $500,000. Each Person $1,000,000. Each Person $500,000. Each Accident $1,000,000. Each Accident (2) Property Damage $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Occurrence Receipt and acceptance by Owner of the Contractor's Certificate of Insurance, or other similar document does not constitute acceptance or approval of amounts or types of coverages, which may be less than required by these Contract Documents. The Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors or others in the Work. Owner may at its option require a copy of the Contractor's Insurance Policy(s). All insurance policies required within this Contract Document shall provide full coverage from the first dollar of exposure unless otherwise stipulated. No deductibles will be accepted without prior approval from Owner. LonFshore and Harbor Worker's Compensation Act: Section 32 of the Act, 33 U.S.C. 932, requires an employer, with employees in maritime employment, to secure the payment of benefits under the Act either by insuring with an insurance carrier authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor, or to be authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor as a self-insurer. For General Contractors: Section 4(a) of the Act provides that every employer shall be liable for and shall secure the payment to his employees of the compensation payable under Sections 7, 8, and 9 of the Act. In the case of an employer who is a subcontractor, only if such subcontractor fails to secure the payment of compensation shall the contractor be liable for and be required to secure the payment of compensation. ' 5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS The Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Article on Insurance will protect the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and ' damages caused by the perils covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the insured or additional insured thereunder, the Owner and Contractor ' waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, employees and agents for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the work; and, in addition, waive all ' such rights against Sub-contractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to ' SectionlIl.doc Page I I of 46 9/9/2008 Section Ill - General Conditions the rights that any party ;making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance otherwise payable under any policy so issued. In addition, the Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and the officers, directors, employees and agents of any of them for: (i) loss due to business interruption, loss of use or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to the Owner property or the Work caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other peril, whether or not insured by the Owner and; (ii) loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other insured peril covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by the Owner during partial utilization, after substantial completion or after final payment. 6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES 6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE Contractor shall supervise, inspect and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction, except that Contractor shall keep on the work at all times during its progress a competent resident superintendent. Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be responsible to see that the completed work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall keep on the work at all times during its progress a competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without notice to the Owner and Engineer, except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor's representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All communications to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. The Contractor's superintendent shall keep a mobile cell phone on his person so he can be contacted whenever necessary. Contractor shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever the Owner's Engineer shall notify Contractor, in writing, that any person on the work appears to be incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be removed from the project and shall not again be employed on it except with the written consent of the Owner's Engineer. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for additional engineering and inspection costs incurred as a result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours or on the Owner normally approved holidays. At such times when Inspector overtime is required, the Contractor shall sign an overtime slip documenting such hours and the Contractor shall be provided a copy for his records. At the end of the project and prior to payment of withheld retainage funds, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner a check made out to the Owner of Clearwater for full reimbursement of all Inspector overtime hours. Withheld retainage shall not be released until the Owner has received this check. Minimum number of chargeable hours for inspection costs on weekends or holidays shall be four hours. The cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be $60.00 per hour. SectionflHoc Page 12 of 46 9/9/2008 Cl Section III -- General Conditions Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition, such sanitary accommodations for the use of Contractor's employees as may be necessary to comply with the requirements of Laws and Regulations and the Engineer. 6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out and construct the work as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, all work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours and Contractor will not permit overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without the Owner consent given after prior notice to Engineer. Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing, performance, testing, start-up and completion of the Work. All materials and equipment installed in the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractors shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the quality of materials and equipment. The Contractor shall provide suitable and secure storage for all materials to be used in the Work so that their quality shall not be impaired or injured. Materials that are improperly stored, may be rejected by the Engineer without testing. All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The Owner of Clearwater, at its sole discretion, reserves the night to purchase major equipment to be incorporated into the WORK under the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, if indicated in the Contract Documents. In such event, the Contractor shall cooperate and assist the Owner of Clearwater, at no additional cost, to implement the ODP documents and procedures. 6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name. of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or "or equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by Engineer. If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer for approval. If in the Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an "or equal" item, it may be considered as a proposed substitute item. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as required by the Engineer to allow the Engineer to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and is an acceptable substitute therefore. Request for review Sectionlll.doc Page 13 of 46 9/9/2008 Section III - General Conditions of proposed substitute and "or equal" will be not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than Contractor. Request for substitute and "or equal" items by Contractor must be submitted in writing to Engineer and will contain all information as Engineer deems necessary to make a determination. All data provided by Contractor in support of any proposed substitute or "or equal" item will be at Contractor's expense. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each proposal or submittal made per this paragraph. Engineer will be sole judge of acceptability. 6.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons performing or furnishing any of the work to communicate with the Engineer through Contractor. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the work to be performed by any specific trade. All work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall not pay or employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization whether initially or as a substitute, against whom Owner or Engineer may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization to furnish or perform any of the work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection. Owner or Engineer will not undertake to settle any differences between Contractor and his Subcontractors or between Subcontractors. 6.6 USE OF PREMISES Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the operations of works to the site and land areas identified in and permitted by the Contract Documents on other land areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, right-of-way, permits and easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant SectionIII.doc Page 14 of 46 9/9/2008 Section III - General Conditions because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceed in or at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and their officials, directors, employees and agents from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon Contractor's performance of the Work. During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the Work or at intervals established by the Engineer, Contractor shall remove all waste materials, rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery and surplus materials. Contractor shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. 6.5.1 STAGING AREAS ' The Contactor shall obtain. and deliver to the Owner written permission for the use of all staging and storage areas outside of the Limits of Construction. 6.5.2 RESTORATION TIME LIMITS ' The timely restoration of all impacted areas, especially right-of-ways, is very important to the Citizens of Clearwater; therefore these time limits are imposed: ' • Debris piles shall be removed within five (5) consecutive calendar days. • Concrete driveways and sidewalks shall be replaced within ten (10) consecutive calendar days of removal. Resident access shall be maintained at all times. • All arterial and collector roadways shall be restored ASAP. + Local streets and asphalt driveways shall be restored as soon as a sufficient quantity is generated, however, this is never to exceed fifteen (15) consecutive calendar days. Local and resident access shall be maintained at all times. • Sod must be restored with ten (10) consecutive calendar days of a successful pipe pressure test. It must be watered for a period of thirty (30) days after it is placed. Erosion control and dust control of denuded areas must be maintained at all times. If the project or a portion of it does not involve right-of ways, then a different schedule of sod restoration may be considered. 6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner or Engineer in the Contract Documents. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents SectionIIl.doc Page 15 of 46 9/9/2008 Section Ill - General Conditions and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of Florida and other governmental agencies, which are applicable during the performance of the work. 6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to furnishing and performance of the Work_ Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. If Contractor performs any work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or arising out of such work: however, it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligations to the Owner to report and resolve discrepancies as described above. 6.8 PERMITS Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. The Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids. Contractor shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the work, and the Owner shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as plant investment fees. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner of Clearwater Building Permit Fees will be waived. 6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (i) all persons on the work site or who may be affected by the work, (ii) all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site;, and (iii) other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. In the event of temporary suspension of the work, or during inclement weather, or whenever Engineer may direct; Contractor shall, and shall cause Subcontractors, to protect carefully the Work and materials against damage or injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of Engineer, any portion of Work or materials shall have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or any Subcontractors to so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and replaced at the expense of Contractor. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain an accident prevention program which Sectionlll.doc Page 16 of 46 9/9/2008 1 1 Section III - General Conditions shall include, but shall not be limited to the establishment and supervision of programs for the education and training of employees in the recognition, avoidance and prevention of unsafe conditions and acts. Contractor shall provide first aid services and medical care to his employees. The Contractor shall develop and maintain an effective fire protection and prevention program and good housekeeping practices at the site of contract performance throughout all phases of construction, repair, alteration or demolition. Contractor shall require appropriate personal protective equipment in all operations where there is exposure to hazardous conditions. The Engineer may order that the work stop if a condition of immediate danger to the Owner's employees, equipment or if property damage exists. This provision shall not shift responsibility or risk of loss for injuries of damage sustained from the Contractor to Owner, and the Contractor shall remain solely responsible for compliance with all safety requirements and for the safety of all persons and property at the site of Contract performance. The Contractor shall instruct his employees required to handle or use toxic materials or other harmful substances regarding their safe handling and use. The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to protect pedestrians and motorists from harm, and to prevent disruptions of such traffic due to construction activity. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction for safety of persons or property and to protect then] from damage, injury or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when prosecution of the work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable. 6.10 EMERGENCIES In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, Contractor, with or without special instruction or authorization from Owner or Engineer, is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If Engineer determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued to document the consequences of such action. ' 6.11 DRAWINGS 6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, and SUBMITTAL REVIEW ' Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to Engineer for review and approval as called for in the Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, ' materials and similar data to show Engineer the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to review the information. Contractor shall also submit Samples to Engineer for review and approval. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, SectionIII.doc Page 17 of 46 9/92008 Section III - General Conditions Contractor shall have determined and verified: (i) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar information with respect thereto, (ii) all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work, and (iii) all information relative to Contractor's sole responsibilities in respect to means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. Each submittal will bear a stamp or specific written indication that Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. At the time of submission, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a written communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation. The Contractor shall maintain a submittal log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each submittal within twenty-one (21) consecutive calendar days. The Contractor shall maintain a request for information (RFI) log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each RFI within twenty-one (21) consecutive calendar days. The untimely submission of Submittal or RFIs shall not be grounds for a delay claim from the Contractor. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated the Contract Documents. Engineer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction (except where a particular means method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer, and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has in writing called Engineer's attention to each such variation at the time of submission and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor will any approval by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of paragraph above discussing field measurements by the Contractor. 6.11.2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS The Contractor shall keep and maintain one set of blueprints, As-Built Drawings, in good order and legible condition to be continuously marked-up at the job site. The Contractor shall mark and SectionIll.doe Page 18 of 46 9/9/2008 f] ' Section III -- General Conditions annotate neatly and clearly all project conditions, locations, configurations and any other changes or deviations which may vary from the details represented on the original Contract Plans, ' including revisions made necessary by Addenda, Shop Drawings, and Change Orders during the construction process. The Contractor shall record the horizontal and vertical locations, in the plan and profile, of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated or which were not indicated on the Contract Plans and buried (or concealed), construction and utility features which are revealed during the construction period. ' The As-Built Drawings shall be available for inspection by the Engineer and the Engineer's Consultant at all times during the progress of the Project. The As-Built Drawings shall be reviewed by the Owner Inspector for accuracy and compliance with the requirements of "As-Built Drawings" prior to submittal of the monthly pay requests. ' The pay requests shall be rejected if the marked-up blueline prints do not conform to the "As- Built Drawings" requirements. As-Built Drawings shall be submitted to the Owner Inspector for approval upon completion of the project and prior to acceptance of final pay request. Final pay ' request shall not be processed until As-Built Drawings have been reviewed by the Engineer or the Engineer's Consultant for accuracy and completeness. Prior to placing new potable water mains in service, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer intersection drawings, as specified for the water mains. The Owner's acceptance of the "As-Built Drawings" does not relieve the Contractor of the sole ' responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the As-Built Drawings. 6.11.2.1 General ' The Contractor shall prepare an "AS-BUILT SURVEY" per chapter 61G17-6, Florida Administrative Code (see definition below), signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The contractor will deliver to the Owner two hard copies of signed and sealed As-Built Drawings and an AutoCAD file. 61G17 6.002 Definition: (10)(a) As-Built Survey: a survey performed to obtain horizontal and/or vertical dimensional data so that constructed improvements may be located and delineated: also know as Record Survey. This survey shall be clearly titled "As-Built Survey" and shall be signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The survey must be delivered to the Owner of Clearwater Construction Division upon substantial completion of the project. If this condition is not met, the Owner will procure the services of a Professional Surveyor and Mapper registered in the State of Florida and ' will back charge the contractor a fee of $1,800 per day or any portion thereof to provide the Owner with the required As-Built Survey. 1 6.11.2.2 Sanitary and Storm Sewer Piping Systems Manholes and inlets shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. New sanitary service connections and replaced sanitary service connections shall be dimensioned to the nearest downstream manhole. All manholes, cleanouts and catch basin invert and rim elevations, manhole and catch basin dimensions, pipe sizes, and pipe material shall also be noted on the plan view and also on the profile if one exists. 2. Pipe materials and areas of special construction shall be noted. SectionllI.doc Page 19 of 46 9/9/2008 Section III - General Conditions 6.11.2.3 Pressure Pipe construction (Water, Reclaimed Water, Forcemain) All pipes shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. Coordinates shall be at all pipe bends, tees, valves, reducers, and deflections. Also all new and replaced service connections for potable and reclaimed water will be located as described above. Additionally there must be survey coordinates no further than 100 feet apart on linear type construction and shall denote top of pipe elevation at those points. 6.11.2.4 Electrical and Control Wiring The as-built drawings shall include all changes to the original Contract Plans. The as-built drawings shall also include the size, color, and number of wires and conduit. For projects where this information is too voluminous to be contained on the blueline prints, the Contractor shall prepare supplemental drawings, on same size sheets as the blueline prints, showing the additional conduit runs, 1-line diagrams, ladder diagrams, and other information. The wiring schematic diagrams shall show termination location and wiring identification at each point on the ladder diagram. 6.11.2.5 Horizontal and Vertical Control The As-Built survey shall be based on the original datum used for the construction design plans or if required by the Owner the datum shall be referenced to the North American Datum of 1983/90 (horizontal) and the North American Vertical Datum of 1988. The unit of measurement shall be the United States Foot. Any deviation or use of any other datum, (horizontal and or vertical), must be approved by the Owner of Clearwater Engineering Department. 6.11.2.6 Standards The As-Built survey shall meet the Minimum Technical Standards per Chapter 61G17 and the Clearwater CAD STANDARDS set forth below. In addition to locating all improvements that pertain to the as-built survey it is the requirement of the Owner to have minimum location points at every change in direction and no more than 100 feet apart on all pressure pipes. 6.11.2.7 Other The As-Built drawings shall reflect any differences from the original Contract Plans, in the saute level of detail and units of dimensions as the Plans. 6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS 6.11.3.1 Layer Naming 6.11.3.1.1 Prefixes and Suffixes DI prefix denotes digitized or scanned entities EP prefix denotes existing points - field collected EX prefix denotes existing entities - line work and symbols PR prefix denotes proposed entities - line work and symbols FU prefix denotes future entities (proposed but not part of this contract) - line work and symbols SectionllI.doc Page 20 of 46 9/9/2008 1 Section Ill - General Conditions TX suffix denotes text -- use for all text, no matter the prefix 6.11.3.1.2 Laver Namina Definitions: GAS gas lines and appurtenances ELEC power lines and appurtenances PHONE telephone lines and appurtenances CABLE cable TV lines and appurtenances BOC curbs WALK sidewalk WATER water lines and appurtenances, sprinklers STORM storm lines and appurtenances TREES trees, bushes, planters SANITARY sanitary lines and appurtenances FENCE all fences BLDG buildings, sheds, finished floor elevation DRIVE driveways FOP edge of pavement without curbs TRAFFIC signal poles, control boxes TOPBANK top of bank TOESLOPE toe of slope TOPBERM top of berm TOEBERM toe of berm SEAWALL seawall CONCSLAB concrete slabs WALL walls, except seawall SHORE shoreline, water elevation CL centerline of road CLD centerline of ditch CLS centerline of swale CORNER property corners, monumentation BENCH benchmark, temporary benchmarks 1 Other layers may he created as required, using above format. Sectionlll.doc Page 21 of 46 9/9/2008 Section III - General Conditions 6.11.3.2 Layer Properties All layers will use standard AutoCAD linetypes, bylayer. All layers will use standard AutoCAD colors, bylayer_ All text will use standard AutoCAD fonts. 6.11.3.3 Text Styles Text style for EX layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 0°, and a text height of .008 times the plot scale. Text style for PR and FU layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 22.5°, and a text height of .010 times the plot scale. 6.11.4 DELIVERABLES: The as-built survey shall be produced on vellum or bond material, 24" x 36" at a scale of l "=20' unless approved otherwise. The consultant shall deliver all drawing files in digital format. Acceptable file formats include: DWG, DXF of a shape file. Please address any questions regarding format to Mr. Tom Mahony, at (727) 562-4762 or e-mail address Thomas.Mahony@myclearwater.com . 6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner, Engineer and Engineer's Consultants that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder includes defects or damage caused by abuse, vandalism, modification or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers. Until the acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Work shall be under the charge and care of the Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution against injury or damage to any part thereof by action of the elements, or from any other cause whatsoever, arising from the execution or non-execution of the Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair and make good, at his own expense, all injuries or damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause before its completion and final acceptance by the Owner. In addition, "the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptance". Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes improper maintenance and operation by Owner's employees and normal wear and tear under normal usage for any portion of the Work, which has been partially accepted by the Owner for operation prior to final acceptance by the Owner. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (i) observations by Engineer, (ii) recommendation of any progress or final payment by Engineer, (iii) the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by the Owner to contractor under the Contract Documents, (iv) use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner, (v) any acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so, (vi) any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of Acceptance by the Engineer. Sectionlll.doc Page 22 of 46 9/9/2008 1 1 1 Section III - General Conditions 6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK Contractor shall carry on the work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with the Owner. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as the Owner or Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. 6.14 INDEMNIFICATION Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the ' officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other ' dispute resolution costs) caused by, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss or damage: (i) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (ii) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or anyone for whose ' acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not caused in part by any negligence or omission of a person or entity indemnified hereunder or whether liability is imposed upon such indemnified party by Laws and Regulations regardless of the negligence of any such person. If, through acts of neglect on the part of Contractor, any other Contractor or any Subcontractor shall suffer loss or damage on the work, Contractor shall settle with such other Contractor or Subcontractor by agreement or arbitration if such other Contractor or Subcontractor will so ' settle. If such other Contractor or Subcontractor shall assert any claim against the Owner on such account of any damage alleged to have been sustained, the Owner shall notify Contractor, who shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against any such claim. In any and all claims ' against Owner or Engineer or any of their respective consultants, agents, officers, directors, or employees by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any ' Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under this paragraph shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of ' damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Sub-contractor, Supplier or other person or organization under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under this ' paragraph shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer's Consultants, officers, directors, employees, or agents caused by the professional negligence, errors or omissions of any of them. ' 7 OTHER WORK ' 7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE The Owner reserves the right to have its own forces enter the construction site at any time and perform work as necessary in order to perform infrastructure repair or maintenance, whether ' related to the project or not. The Contractor will allow complete access to all utility owners for these purposes. 1 SectionIll.doc Page 23 of 46 9/92008 Section III - General Conditions The Owner may have its own forces perform new work related to the project, however, this work will be identified in the Contract Scope of Work and coordination will be such that this activity is denoted in the Contractor's CPM Schedule so as not to cause any delays or interference with the Contractor's work or schedule. At no time will the Owner let another contract to a different Contractor to perform work at the same site during the duration of the original contract. 7.2 COORDINATION If the Owner contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site, the following will be set forth in the Scope of Work: (i) the person who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various prime contractors will be identified; (ii) the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and (iii) the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, the Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility in respect of such coordination. 8 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, the Owner shall issue all communications from the Owner to the Contractor through Engineer. The Owner shall furnish the data required of the Owner under the Contract Documents promptly and shall make payments to Contractor promptly when they are due as provided in these General Conditions. The Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in the Article on Changes In The Work. The Owner's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in the Article on Tests and Inspections. In connection with the Owner's right to stop work or suspend work, see the Article on Engineer may Stop the Work. The Article on Suspension of Work and Termination deals with the Owner's right to terminate services of Contractor under certain circumstances. Owner shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. The Owner will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9 ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE Engineer will be Owner's representative during the construction period. The duties and the responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner's representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written consent of Owner and Engineer. SectionIILdoc Page 24 of 46 9/9/2008 1 ' Section III - General Conditions 9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS ' Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of the requirements of the Contract Documents (in the form of Submittal responses, RFI responses, Drawings or otherwise) as Engineer may determine necessary, which shall be consistent with the ' intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract Documents. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding on the Owner and Contractor. If Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time ' and the parties are unable to agree to the amount or extent thereof, if any, Contractor may make a written claim therefore as provided in the Articles for Change of Work and Change of Contract Time. ' 9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which Engineer believes to be ' defective, or that Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. Engineer will also have ' authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. ' 9,4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS In connection with Engineer's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see articles on Shop Drawings and Samples. In connection with Engineer's authority as to Change Orders, see the ' articles on Changes of Work, Contract Price and Contract Time. In connection with Engineer's authority as to Applications for Payment, see the articles on Payments to Contractor and Completion. ' 9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to the acceptability of the work or the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the work and Claims under the Articles for Changes of Work, Changes of Contract Time and Changes of Contract Price will be referred initially to Engineer in writing with a request for a formal decision in accordance with this paragraph. Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter will be delivered by the ' claimant to Engineer and the other party to the Agreement promptly (but in no event later than thirty (30) days) after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise thereto, and written supporting data will be submitted to Engineer and the other party within sixty (60) days after the ' start of such occurrence or event unless Engineer allows an additional period of time for the submission of additional or more accurate data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing party shall submit any response to Engineer and the claimant within thirty (30) ' days after receipt of the claimant's last submittal (unless Engineer allows additional time). Engineer will render a formal decision in writing within thirty (30) days after receipt of the opposing party's submittal, if any, in accordance with this paragraph. Engineer's written decision ' on such claim, dispute or other matter will be final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor unless (i) an appeal from Engineer's decision is taken within thirty (30) days of the Engineer's decision, or the appeal time which may be stated in a Dispute Resolution Agreement between ' SectionIIl.doc Page 25 of 46 9/92008 1 Section III - General Conditions Owner and Contractor for the settlement of disputes or (ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into, a written notice of intention to appeal from Engineer's written decision is delivered by the Owner or Contractor to the other and to Engineer within thirty (30) days after the date of such decision and a formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim, dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within sixty (60) days of the date of such decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Owner and Contractor. When functioning as interpreter and judge, Engineer will not show partiality to the Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capaOwner. The rendering of a decision by Engineer with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter will be a condition precedent to any exercise by the Owner or Contractor of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute or other matter pursuant the Article on Dispute Resolution. 9.6 LIMITATIONS ON ENGINEER'S RESPONSIBILITIES Neither Engineer's authority or responsibility under this paragraph or under any other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise or performance of any authority or responsibility by Engineer shall create, impose or give rise to any duty owed by Engineer to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the famishing or performance of the work. Engineer will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the work. Engineer's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and certificates of inspection, tests and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered by the Contractor will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents and, in the case of certificates of inspections, tests and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph shall also apply to Engineer's Consultants, and assistants. 10 CHANGES IN THE WORK Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, the Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions, deletions or revisions will be authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with SectionlII.doc Page 26 of 46 9/9/2008 1 t Section III - General Conditions the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as may otherwise be specifically provided). If the Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a claim may be made therefore as provided in these General Conditions. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified and supplemented as provided in these General Conditions except in the case of an emergency as provided or in the case of uncovering work as provided in article for Uncovering Work. The Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders or Written Amendments recommended by Engineer covering: changes in the work which are (i) ordered by the Owner (ii) required because of acceptance of defective work under the article for Acceptance of Defective Work or correcting defective Work under the article for Owner May Correct Defective Work or (iii) agreed to by the parties; changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by Engineer pursuant to the article for Decisions on Disputes; provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule as provided in the article for Continuing the Work. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly. 11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable to Contractor for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations assigned to or undertaken by Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Price. The Contract Price may only be adjusted by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on a written notice of claim stating the general nature of the claim, to be delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Engineer or promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event (unless Engineer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of the claim) and shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the claimed adjustment covers all known amounts to which the claimant is entitled as a result of said occurrence or event. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not SectlonlII-doc Page 27 of 46 9/9/2008 Section III - General Conditions submitted in accordance with this paragraph. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: (i) where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (ii) where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit), (iii) where the Work is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement is reached to establish unit prices for the Work. Where the work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and where the Owner of Clearwater, the Engineer's Consultant, and Contractor cannot mutually agree on a lump sum price, the Owner of Clearwater shall pay for directed changes in the WORK, on "COST REIMBURSEMENT" basis. The Contractor shall apply for compensation, detailing Contractors forces, materials, equipment, subcontractors, and other items of direct costs required for the directed work. The application for Cost Reimbursement shall be limited to the following items: Labor, including foremen, for those hours associated with the direct work (actual payroll cost, including wages, fringe benefits, labor insurance and labor taxes established by law). Expressly excluded from this item are all costs associated with negotiating the subject change. 1 r 2. Materials associated with the change, including sales tax. The costs of materials shall be substantiated through vendors' invoices. 3. Rental or equivalent rental costs of equipment, including necessary transportation costs if specifically used for the WORK. The rental rates shall not exceed the current rental rates.prevailing in the locality or as defined in the rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment (a.k.a. DataQuest Blue Book). The rental rate is defined as the full-unadjusted base rental rate for the appropriate item of construction equipment and shall cover the costs of all fuel, supplies, repairs, insurance, and other costs associated with supplying the equipment for work ordered. Contractor-owned equipment will be paid for the duration of time required to complete the work. Utilize lowest cost combination of hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly rates. Do not exceed estimated operating costs given in Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed for equipment on stand-by. 4. Additional costs for Bonds, Insurance if required by the Owner of Clearwater. The following fixed fees shall be added to the costs of the directed work performed by the Contractor or Subcontractor. A. A fixed fee of fifteen percent (15%) shall be added to the costs of Item 1 above. If work is performed by a subcontractor, the Contractor's fee shall not exceed five percent (5%), and the subcontractor's fee shall not exceed ten percent (10%). B. A fixed fee of ten percent (10%) shall be added to the costs of Item 2 above. C. No markup shall be added to the costs of Items 3 and 4. The fixed fees shall be considered the full compensation for all cost of general supervision, overhead, profit, and other general expense. Sectionlll.doc Page 28 of 46 9/9/2008 1 FJ Section 111- General Conditions 11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be fumished and performed for such sums as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Contractor agrees that: (i) the allowances ' include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and (ii) Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. ' Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Engineer to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances and all the Work actually performed by the Contractor, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly ' adjusted. 11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK 1 Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times 1 the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Engineer. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. The Owner or Contractor may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price if. (i) the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Contract Documents; and (ii) there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and (iii) if Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or the Owner believes that the Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. On unit price contracts, Owner endeavors to provide adequate unit quantities to satisfactorily complete the construction of the project. It is expected that in the normal course of project construction and completion that not all unit quantities will be used in their entirety and that a finalizing change ' order which adjusts contract unit quantities to those unit quantities actually used in the construction of the project will result in a net decrease from the original Contract Price. Such reasonable deduction of final Contract Price should be anticipated by the Contractor in his ' original bid. 12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME 1 The Contract Time (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Engineer promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim with ' Sectionlll.doc Page 29 of 46 9/9/2008 Section 111- General Conditions ' supporting data shall be delivered within sixty days after such occurrence (unless Engineer allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim) and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be determined by Engineer. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) will be valid if not , submitted in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the work within the Contract Time (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time (or Milestones) may be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a claim is made ' therefore as provided in the article for Changes in the Work. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts by the Owner, acts of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by the ' article for Other Work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor. ' Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both the Owner and Contractor, an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall the Owner be liable to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (i) delays caused by or within the control of Contractor, or (ii) delays beyond the control of both parties including but not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or acts by utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by paragraph for Other Work. 13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION ' Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. ' Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents. The costs for these ' inspections, tests or approvals shall be borne by the Contractor except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) ' specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body including all Owner Building Departments and Owner Utility Departments, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Engineer or Engineer's Consultants the required certificates of inspection or approval. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Section111_doe Page 30 of 46 9/9/2008 ' Section III - General Conditions Documents, Owner permit and impact fees will be waived. Contractor shall also be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required for Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work, or of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation of the Work. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected tested or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Engineer, it must, if requested by Engineer, be uncovered for observation. Uncovering Work as provided in this paragraph shall be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Engineer has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. 13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, it must, if requested by Engineer, be uncovered for Engineer's observation and replaced at Contractor's expense. If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Engineer's request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing as Engineer may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price for the costs of the investigation, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change in Contract Price. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and reconstruction; and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a claim therefore as provided the article for Change in Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 13.3 ENGINEER MAY STOP THE WORK If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Engineer may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Engineer to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Engineer or Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any surety or other party. If the Engineer stops Work under this paragraph, Contractor shall be entitled to no extension of Contract Time or increase in Contract Price. 13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK If required by Engineer, Contractor shall promptly, as directed, either correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all SectionIll.doc Page 31 of 46 9/9/2008 Section 111- General Conditions claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). 13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to the Owner and in accordance with the Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by the Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective and (ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of others resulting therefrom. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, the Owner may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected. Work removed and replaced, and all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Final Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if specifically and expressly so provided in the Specifications or by Written Amendment. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected, removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. 13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, the Owner prefers to accept it, the Owner may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages attributable to the Oweer's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by Engineer as to reasonableness). If any such acceptance occurs prior to Engineer's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in article for Change of Contract Price. If the acceptance occurs after the Engineer's recommendation for final payment an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to the Owner. 13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Engineer in accordance with the article for Correction and Removal of Defective Work or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, the Owner may, after seven days' written notice to Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies under Sectionlll.doe Page 32 of 46 9/9/2008 1 Section III -- General Conditions this paragraph the Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective and remedial action, the Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, take possession of Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner's representatives, agents and employees, the Owner's other contractors, and Engineer and Engineer's Consultants access to the site to enable the Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and damages incurred or sustained by the Owner in exercising such rights and remedies will be charged against Contractor and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change of Contract Price. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of Contractor's defective Work. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by the Owner of the Owner's rights and remedies hereunder. 14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION h b f i er o un ts e num Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on t completed. 14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT Contractor shall submit (not more often than once a month) to Engineer for review an ' Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the 25th of each month and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Engineer and the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, payment will not be made for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work. Payment will only be made for that portion of the Work, which is fully installed including all materials, labor and equipment. A retainage of not less than five (5%) of the amount of each Application for Payment for the total of all Work (including as-built survey and Inspector overtime reimbursement) completed to date will be held until final completion and acceptance of the Work covered in the Contract Documents. No progress payment shall be construed to be acceptance of ' any portion of the Work under contract. The Contractor shall review with the Engineer or the Construction Inspector all quantities and work for which payment is being applied for and reach agreement prior to submittal of an ' Official Pay Request. The Engineer or the Construction Inspector will verify that the on-site marked up as-built drawings are up to date with the work and are in compliance with Section III, Article 6.11.2 of these Specifications. r In addition to all other payment provisions set out in this contract, the Engineer may require the Contractor to produce for Owner, within fifteen (15) days of the approval of any progress payment, evidence and/or payment affidavit that all subcontractors and suppliers have been paid any sum or sums then due. A failure on the part of the contractor to provide the report as required herein shall result in further progress or partial payments being withheld until the report is provided. SectionIII.doc Page 33 of 46 9/9/2008 Section III - General Conditions 14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment, free and clear of liens. No materials or supplies for the Work shall be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contact or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller. Contractor warrants that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the Work, free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. Contractor shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims growing out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen, and furnisher's of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and all supplies incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this Contract. Contractor shall at the Owenr's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If Contractor fails to do so, then the Owner may, after having served written notice on said Contractor either pay unpaid bills, of which the Owner has written notice, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payment to Contractor shall be resumed in accordance with the terms of this Contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any obligations upon the Owner to the Contractor or the Surety. In paying any unpaid bills of the Contractor, the Owner shall be deemed the agent of Contractor and any payment so made by the Owner shall be considered as payment made under the Contract by the Owner to Contractor, and the Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for any such payment made in good faith. 14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS Engineer will within twenty (20) days after receipt of each Application for payment, either indicate a recommendation of payment and present Application to the Owner, or return the Application to Contractor indicating Engineer's reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment to Owner. Engineer may also refuse to recommend any such payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or test, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to such extent as may be necessary in Engineer's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because: (i) the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or replacement, (ii) the Contract Price has been reduced by amendment or Change Order, (iii) the Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work, or (iv) Engineer has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in the article on Suspension of Work and Termination. The Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by the Engineer because: (i) claims have been made against the Owner on account of Contractor's performance or furnishing of the Work, (ii) Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to the Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens, (iii) there are other items entitling the Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended, or (iv) the Owner has actual knowledge of any of the events described in this paragraph. Owner shall give Contractor immediate notice of refusal to pay with a copy to the Engineer, stating the reasons for such actions, and Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the SectionIlI.doc Page 34 of 46 9/9/2008 F1 Section III - General Conditions amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, when Contractor corrects to the Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action. 14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION Use by the Owner at the Owner's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which (i) has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) Owner, Engineer, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by the Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Final Completion of all the Work subject to the following: The Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit the Owner to use any such part of the Work which the Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor will certify to Owner and Engineer that such part of the Work is substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Contractor at any time may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefore. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of the articles for Substantial Completion and Partial Utilization will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 14.5 FINAL INSPECTION Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Engineer will make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. The Engineer will produce a final punch list and assign a date for this work to be completed. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT r After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Engineer and has delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating instructions, As-built/Record Drawings, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance required by the paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, certificates of inspection, Inspector overtime reimbursement as required in the Contract Documents and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: (1) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, (ii) consent of the surety, if any or if necessary, to final payment, and (iii) complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to the Owner) of all Liens arising out of or filed in connection with the Work. In lieu of such releases or waivers of Liens and as approved by the Owner, Contractor may furnish ' SectionUdoc Page 35 of 46 9/9/2008 1 Section III - General Conditions receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material and equipment for which a Lien could be filed, and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might in any way be responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a Bond or other collateral satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against any Lien. Prior to application for final payment, Contractor shall clean and remove from the premises all surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures, and shall restore in an acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the prosecution of the Work, and shall leave the Work in a neat and presentable condition. 14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE If through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if Engineer so confirms, the Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final Application for payment and recommendation of Engineer, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the retraining balance to be held by the Owner for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished as required in paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Engineer with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that such payment shall not constitute a waiver of claims. If on the basis of Engineer's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Engineer's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, all as required by the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Engineer will indicate in writing his recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner for payment. Thereupon, Engineer will give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of this article. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as to form and substance, the Owner shall, within twenty (20) days after receipt thereof pay contractor the amount recommended by Engineer. 14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: a waiver of all claims by the Owner against Contractor, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and a waiver of all claims by Contractor against the Owner other than those previously made in writing and still unsettled. SectionIII.doc Page 36 of 46 9/912008 1 ' Section III - General Conditions 15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK At any time and without cause, Engineer may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than ninety (90) days by notice in writing to Contractor, which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes an approved claim therefore as provided in the articles for Change of Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events; if Contractor persistently fails to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule as adjusted from time to time); if Contractor disregards Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; if Contractor disregards the authority of Engineer; if Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract Documents; or if the Work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, or if this Contract or any part thereof is sublet, without the previous written consent of the Owner, or if the Contract or any claim thereunder is assigned by Contractor otherwise than as herein specified, or at any time Engineer certifies in writing to the Owner that the rate of progress of the Work or any part thereof is unsatisfactory or that the work or ' any part thereof is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed. The Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if any), seven days' written notice and, to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude Contractor from the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as the Owner may deem expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and damages sustained by the Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by the Owner will be reviewed by Engineer as to their reasonableness and when so approved by Engineer incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by the Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of the Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by the Owner will not release Contractor from liability. SectionIII.doc Page 37 of 46 9/9/2008 Section III - General Conditions Upon seven (7) days' written notice to Contractor, Engineer and Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of the Owner, elect to terminate the Agreement. In such case, Contractor shall be paid (without duplication of any items): for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and for reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. 15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE If, through, no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety (90) days by the Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or the Engineer fails to act on any Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted or the Owner fails for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and Engineer, and provided the Owner or Engineer does not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from the Owner payment on the same terms as provided in the article for the Owner May Terminate. However, if the Work is suspended under an order of court through no fault of Owner, the Contractor shall not be entitled to payment except as the Court may direct. In lieu of terminating the Agreement and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Engineer has failed to act on an Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted, or the Owner has failed for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may upon seven (7) day's written notice to the Owner and Engineer stop the Work until payment of all such amounts due Contractor. The provisions of this article are not intended to preclude Contractor from making claim under paragraphs for Change of Contract Price or Change of Contract Time or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor's stopping Work as permitted by this article. 16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION If and to the extent that the Owner and Contractor have agreed on the method and procedure for resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution method and procedure will proceed. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for resolving such disputes has been reached, subject to the provisions of the article for Decisions on Disputes, the Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute provided, however, that nothing herein shall require a dispute to be submitted to binding arbitration. SectionIll.doc Page 38 of 46 9/9/2008 1 Section III -General Conditions 17 MISCELLANEOUS 17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS The form of all submittals, notices, change orders, pay applications, logs, schedules and other documents permitted or required to be used or transmitted under the Contract Documents shall be determined by the Engineer subject to the approval of Owner. 17.2 GIVING NOTICE Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, notice will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. 17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM Should the Owner or Contractor suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any 1 error, omission or any act of the other party or of any of the other party's officers, employees or agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to the other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose. 17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages," the phrase shall include in each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs. 17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT The Contractor shall not assign this contract or any part thereof or any rights thereunder without the approval of Owner, nor without the consent of surety unless the surety has waived its rights to notice of assignment. 17.6 RENEWAL OPTION I Annual Contracts issued through the Engineering Department may be renewed for up to two (2) years, upon mutual consent of both the Owner and the ContractorNendor. All terms, conditions and unit prices shall remain constant unless otherwise specified in the contract specifications or in the Invitation to bid. Renewals shall be made at the sole discretion of the Owner, and must be agreed to in writing by both parties. All renewals are contingent upon the availability of funds, and the satisfactory performance of the Contractor as determined by the Engineering Department. I SectionllI.doc Page 39 of 46 9/9/2008 Section Ill - General Conditions 18 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 18.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE The Owner desires to inform the general public on the Owner's use and expenditure of public funding for general capital improvement and maintenance projects. To help accomplish this purpose, the Contractor is required to prepare and display public project information signs during the full course of the contract period. These signs will be displayed at all location(s) of active work. 18.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE Sign type shall be "fixed" on stationary projects and "portable" on projects which have extended locations or various locations. Payment to Contractor for the preparation, installation and management of project sign(s) shall be lump sum for the entire project. The number of and type of signs will be stated in the Scope of the Work section of the contract documents. Lump sum item will be included in the bid proposal for signs. The particular wording to be used on the signs will be determined after contract award has been approved. Contractor will be provided the wording to be used on sign at the preconstruction conference. 18.3 FIXED SIGN Fixed sign shall be 4-foot by 6-foot (4'x6') in size and painted on a sheet of exterior grade plywood of the same size and a minimum thickness of 1/2-inches. Sign shall be attached to a minimum of three pressure treated 4-inch by 4-inch (4"x4") below grade pressure treated wooden posts and braced as necessary for high winds. Posts shall be long enough to provide secure anchoring in the ground. Bottom of sign must be a minimum of 24-inches above the ground. Alternate mounting system or attachment to fencing or other fixed structure can be considered for approval. Sign shall be painted white on both sides with exterior rated paint. 18.4 PORTABLE SIGNS Portable sign shall be a minimum of 24-inches by 30-inches (24"00") in size and will be attached to a standard sized portable traffic barricade. Sign material shall be aluminum, 0.080- inches or thicker, background of white reflective sheeting, and shall be silkscreen or vinyl lettering. Portable sign shall be two signs located and attached to each side of the traffic barricade. 18.5 SIGN COLORING Background shall be white. Project Descriptive Name shall be in blue lettering. All other lettering shall be black. Basic lettering on sign shall be in all capital letters, of size proportional to the sign itself. 18.6 SIGN PLACEMENT Signs shall be placed where they are readily visible by the general public which pass by the project site. Signs are not to be placed where they may become a hazard or impediment to either pedestrian or vehicular traffic. For construction projects outside of the Owner's right-of-way, the signs will be placed on the project site. For projects constructed inside of the Owner's right-of- way, the signs will be placed in the right-of-way. Portable signs are to be moved to the locations Sectionlll.doc Page 40 of 46 9/9/2008 Section III - General Conditions of active work on the project. Multiple portable signs will be necessary where work is ongoing in several locations at the same time. Fixed signs are to be placed at the start of construction and will remain in place until the request for final payment. 18.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE The Contractor is responsible for preparation, installation, movement, maintenance, replacement, removal and disposal of all project signs during the full course of the contract period. The Contractor will place and secure portable signs from dislocation by wind or other actions. Signs are to be cleaned as necessary to maintain legibility and immediately replaced if defaced. 18.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN r TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN: 1 PROJECT NAME (CONTRACT NUMBER) A OWNER OF CLEARWATER (DEPARTMENT'S NAME) PROJECT CONTRACTOR: OWNER : COMPLETION SCHEDULE: FUNDING PROVIDED BY: 19 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) OPTION 19.1 GENERAL The Owner reserves the right, when identified during the bidding process as part of the project's documents, to contract with the Contractor to purchase certain portions of materials identified in the project as a sales tax savings option in compliance with Florida Law since the Owner is exempt from payment of sales tax. The Contract price includes Florida sales and other applicable taxes for materials, supplies, and equipment, which will be a part of the Contractor's work. The Owner, being exempt from sales tax, reserves the right to make direct purchases of various construction materials included in the Contractor's contract. The Owner purchasing of construction materials, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis. Additionally, Purchase Orders will include Owner's Certificate of Exemption number. r 19.2 PROCEDURE The Contractor and the Owner, prior to the ordering of any materials, must complete the "Addendum to Agreement for Construction" form for this project. Other documents to be included in this procedure are Attachment "A" (Owner/Contractor document for Owner- Furnished Materials); Attachment "B" (Contractor/Sub-Contractor document for Owner- s SectionlII.doc Page 41 of 46 9/9/2008 Section 111-- General Conditions Furnished Materials); Attachment "C" (Contractor/Sub-Contractor document for Owner- Furnished Materials); Attachment "D" (Procedure for Generating Sub-Contractor Direct Purchase Orders for Sales Tax Credits); Procedures for Sales Tax Savings, Requests to Requisition and Receiving/Invoice document; and Request to Requisition Standard Purchase Order form. Attachment "A" is to be completed by the Contractor and submitted with the "Addendum to Agreement for Construction", and the Contractor shall submit two (2) original copies of the Addendum to the Owner. Attachment "B", "C", and "D" relate to Owner- Furnished Materials that are part of the Subcontractor's work. Attachments "B" and "C" would be completed for each Subcontractor responsible for materials as part of the Subcontractor's work. Attachments lettered "A", "B", and "C", included (as amended by notations thereon) and incorporated within the contract documents shall be executed by the Contractor and applicable Sub-Contractors and the terms thereof shall govern the purchase of materials for the Project as determined by the Owner. The contract price shall be reduced by the cost of the materials purchased by Owner plus the normally applicable sales tax as bid by the Contractor even if the cost is in excess of the cost for the materials as bid by the Contractor. However, for purposes of calculating engineering fees, contractor fees, architects fees, and any other amounts that are based on the contract amount, the original contract amount shall be used. The Contractor reserves the right to authorize payments for invoiced materials, prior to Owner's authorization process, as outlined in attachment "D". The Contractor will assist Owner in owner's direct purchase of materials for the project. However, the Owner acknowledges that the Contractor's Sub-Contractors nonetheless each reserves the right to purchase project materials directly, without the Owner's prior approval and consequent power to eliminate reimbursement of sales tax. 19.3 RESPONSIBILITIES The Contractor shall provide the Owner a list of all intended suppliers, vendors, and materials for consideration as Owner-Furnished materials and shall submit price quotes from the vendors, as well as a description of the materials to be supplied, estimated quantities, and prices. The Contractor shall submit price quotes from the vendors, as well as a description of the materials to be supplied, estimated quantities, and prices. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all matters relating to the receipt of materials furnished by the Owner in accordance with these Special Provisions including, but not limited to, verifying correct quantities, verifying documents of orders in a timely manner, coordinating purchases, providing and obtaining all warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents, inspection and acceptance of the goods at the time of delivery due to the negligence of the Contractor. However, the Owner assumes the risk of damage or loss during the time that the building materials are physically stored at the job site prior to their installation or incorporation into the project. The Contractor shall coordinate delivery schedules, sequence of delivery, loading orientation, and other arrangements normally required by the Contractor for the particular material furnished. The Contractor shall provide all services required for the unloading and handling of materials. The Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from any and all claims of whatever nature resulting from non-payment of goods to suppliers arising from the action of the Contractor. As Owner-Furnished Materials are delivered to the job site, the Contractor shall visually inspect all shipments from the suppliers, and approve the vendor's invoice for material delivered. The Contractor shall assure that each delivery of Owner-Furnished Materials is accompanied by Sectionlll.doe Page 42 of 46 9/9/2008 t 1 1 1 1 1 Section III - General Conditions documentation adequate to identify the Purchase Order against which the purchase is made. This documentation may consist of a delivery ticket and an invoice from the supplier conforming to the Purchase Order together with such additional information as the Owner may require. The Contractor will then forward the invoice to the Owner for payment, pursuant to Attachment A of this Contract. The Contractor shall insure that Owner-Furnished Materials conform to the Specifications and determine prior to acceptance of goods at time of delivery if such materials are patently defective, and whether such materials are identical to the materials ordered and match the description on the bill of lading. If the Contractor discovers defective or non-conformities in Owner-Furnished Materials upon such visual inspection, the Contractor shall not utilize such nonconforming or defective materials in the Contractor's Work and instead shall properly notify the Owner of the defective or nonconforming condition so that repair or replacement of those materials can occur without undue delay or interruption to the Project. If the Contractor fails to perform such inspection and otherwise incorporates into the Contractor's Work such defective or nonconforming Owner-Furnished Materials, the condition of which it either knew or should have known by performance of an inspection, the Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to the Owner, resulting from Contractor's incorporation of such materials into the Project, including liquidating or delay damages. The Contractor shall maintain records of all Owner-Furnished Materials it incorporates into Contractor's Work from the stock of Owner-Fumished Materials in its possession. The Contractor shall account monthly to the Owner for any Owner-Furnished Materials delivered into the Contractor's possession, indicating portions of all such materials, which have been incorporated in the Contractor's Work. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and managing all warranties and guarantees for all materials and products as required by the Contract Documents. All repair, maintenance, or damage-repair calls shall be forwarded to the Contractor for resolution with the appropriate supplier, vendor, or subcontractor. Notwithstanding the transfer of Owner-Furnished Materials by the Owner to the Contractor's ' possession, the Owner shall retain legal and equitable title to any and all Owner-Furnished Materials. The Owner shall indemnify and hold Contractor harmless from any sales tax (and interest and penalties incurred in connection therewith) in the event there is a final determination that sales made by Owner, which Owner treats as being exempt from sales tax, are subject to sales tax. "Final determination" shall mean an assessment by the Department of Revenue that is no longer subject to protest, or a determination of a court having jurisdiction over such matters that is final and not subject to appeal. Contractor agrees to promptly notify Owner of any audit, assessment, proposed assessment or notice of deficiency issued with regard to the Project and relating to Owner-Furnished Materials. ' On a monthly basis, Contractor shall be required to review invoices submitted by all suppliers of Owner-Furnished Materials delivered to the Project during the month for use by the Contractor and either concur or object to the Owner's issuance of payment to the suppliers, based upon Contractor's records of materials delivered to the site and. any defects in such materials. In order to arrange for the prompt payment to the supplier, the Contractor shall provide to the Owner a listing indicating the acceptance of the goods or materials within thirty (30) days of receipt of said goods or materials. The list shall include a copy of all applicable Purchase Orders, which will include Owner's Certificate of Exemption number, invoices, delivery tickets, written acceptance of the delivered item, and such other documentation as may be reasonably required 5ectionlll.doc Page 43 of 46 9/9x1008 1 Section III - General Conditions by the Owner. The check will be released, delivered and remitted directly to the supplier. The Contractor agrees to assist the Owner to immediately obtain partial or final release or waivers as appropriate. At the end of the Project, Contractor will be provided with a deductive Change Order for the cost incurred by the Owner to provide all Owner-Furnished Materials. Salvage materials shall be stored or removed from the site by the Contractor at the Owner's direction, or may be turned over to the Contractor for salvage or disposal at the Contractor's option. The Contractor shall be entitled to the benefits of any discounts attributable to the early payment of vendor invoices for materials furnished by the Owner pursuant to the Specifications. 20 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK The City reserves the right to accept and use any portion of the work whenever it is considered to the public interest to do so. The Engineer shall have the power to direct on what line or street the Contractor shall work and order thereof. 21 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE It will be required that the work will commence not later than five (5) calendar days after the Engineer gives written notice to proceed (NTP), which notice shall be given as outlined in Article 2 of these General Conditions. It is further required that all work within this contract be completed within the indicated number of conseeutive_ calendar days as determined in SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 - SCOPE DESCRIPTION. Contract date to commence at issuance of notice to proceed. If the Contractor fails to complete the work within the stipulated time, the City will retain the amount stated in the Contract, per calendar day, for each day that the contract remains incomplete. The work shall be discontinued on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved Holidays. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to perform work on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved City of Clearwater Employee Holidays, that in the opinion of the Engineer, will require the presence of Inspectors, the Contractor shall pay the City of Clearwater, Florida, the amount of Four Hundred Eighty Dollars ($480.00) per each eight-hour (8) day for each Inspector given such assignment. The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptance. 22 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION The Contractor shall notify all residents along the construction route with a printed door hanger notice indicating the following information about the proposed construction work and the Contractor performing the work. City seal or logo; the scheduled date for the start of construction; the type of construction; general sequence and scheduling of construction events; possibility of water service disruption and/or colored water due to construction efforts; Contractor's name, the Superintendent's name, Contractor address and telephone number; Contractor's company logo (optional); requirement for residents to remove landscaping and/or other private appurtenances which are in conflict with the proposed construction; and other language as appropriate to the scope of Contract work. Sample door hanger including proposed language shall be approved by the City prior to the start of construction. Notification shall be printed on brightly colored and durable card stock and shall be a minimum of 4-z/4 by 11 inches in size. Notification (door hanger) shall be posted to residences and businesses directly affected SectionI]I.doc Page 44 of 46 9/9/2008 11 C I 1 Section III - General Conditions by the Contractor's activities no later than seven (7) days prior to the start of construction activity. Directly affected by the Contractor's activities shall mean all Contractor operations including staging areas, equipment and material storage, principal access routes across private property, etc. Contractor cannot start without proper seven (7) day notice period to residents. Contractor is required to maintain sufficient staff to answer citizen inquiries during normal business hours and to maintain appropriate message recording equipment to receive citizen inquires after business hours. Resident notification by the Contractor is a non-specific pay item to be included in the bid items provided in the contract proposal. EXAMPLE 1 CITY SEAL Of CITY OF CLEARWATER NOTICE OF CONSTRUCTION TODAY'S DATE: PLEASE EXCUSE US FOR ANY INCONVENIENCE We are the construction contractor performing (state type of contract) for the City of Clearwater in your area. The work will be performed in the public right-of-way adjacent to your property. This notice is placed a minimum of seven (7) days in advance of construction to notify property owners of the pending start of construction. (Brief description of the construction process to be expected by the property owners) The construction process may necessitate the removal of certain items from the right-of-way. Typical items such as sprinklers, grass, and postal approved mailboxes will be replaced by the contractor within a reasonably short period of time. The replacement of driveways and sidewalks will be made using standard asphalt or concrete materials. The property owner is responsible for the expense and coordination to replace driveways and sidewalks which have customized colors, textures and/or materials. Small trees, shrubs, landscaping materials, unauthorized mailboxes or structures within the right-of-way which must be removed due to the construction process will not be replaced. The property owner is responsible to relocate any such items which the property owner wishes to save prior to the start of construction. Vehicles parked on the streets or within the right-of-way may be required to be placed elsewhere. We are available to answer any questions you may have regarding the construction process or any particular item that must be relocated. Please contact our Construction Superintendent at (727) We will be more than happy to assist you. ion is anticipated to begin on: Company Name Company Address Contractor Phone Number 23 MATERIAL USED All material incorporated into the final work shall be new material unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish purchase receipts of all materials. Sectionlll.doc Page 45 of 46 9/9/2008 Section III -- General Conditions 24 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of conflict, error or discrepancy, as follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary General Conditions, General Conditions, Supplementary Technical Specifications, Technical Specifications, Drawings. In a series of Modifications or Addenda the latest will govern. 1 1 SectionIII.doc Page 46 of 46 9/9/2008 1 SECTION IV CITY OF CLEARWATER -TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Table of Contents: 1 SCOPE OF WORK ...........................................................................................................1 1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................ . 1 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST ................................................................................. . 4 2 FIELD ENGINEERING ................................................................................................. . 6 2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR .............. 2.1.1 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS ...................................... ..................................... . 6 . 6 2.1.2 LAYOUT DATA ............................................................ 2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY ................................. 6 3 DEFINITION OF TERMS ..........................................................................................•.... 6 3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS ......................................................................................... 7 3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS ........................................................................... 7 4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK ................................................................ 8 5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK .......................................................... 8 6 CONCRETE ..................................................................................................................... .9 7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK :::...::::::::::::..:::................... 9 7.1 EXCAVATION. 9 7.2 FORMS ......................................................................................................................... 10 8 REINFORCEMENT ....................................................................................................... 10 8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 10 9 OBSTRUCTIONS .........................................................................................•-----............ 10 10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT .......................................................................................... 10 r 11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS .................................................................11 12 DEWATERING ................................................................................................................11 12.1 GENERAL .... ............................................................................................................. .11 12.2 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 12 1 DEWATERING CONTROL ................................................................................... 12 2 12 ' . . 12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FR OM A NY NON- CONTA MINA TED SITE A C TIVITY ........................... 12 ....::..................... 13 SANITARY MANHOLES ...........................•.............::..... 14 ... 13.1 BUILT UP TYPE .... ....................................................... 14 13.2 PRECAST TYPE .......................................................................................................... 15 13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) ........................................ 15 13.3 DROP MANHOLES ..................................................................................................... 15 13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS ----------------------------------••----.................................. I SectionIV.doc i 9/9/1008 13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS .............................................................................................. 15 13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES -----•----•..................................................•---•........... 14 BACKFILL ...................................................................................................................... 16 16 15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC ........................................................................................ 16 ' 16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES ................................................................................................................ 16 16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16 17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL ..................................................................... 16 17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 17 17 18 UNDERDRAINS ...................................................................................•-•----------............. 17 18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................•---.............--.•-----...........--.•---....................... 17 18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ......................•-•--------•-----•-----•.....-----.--............ ....--•-- 17 19 STORM SEWERS ..............................................................................................•---........ 19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION ......................................................................................... 18 18 19.2 TESTING ...................................................................................................................... 18 19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT ...............................•-----------------... ..........---... ..---.. 18 20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS .............................................................. 19 20.1 MATERIALS .--••---•--•-• ....................•---.............--••--••----....-------•....----.....--.---.---.....----.--.. 20.1.1 GRAVITYSEWER PIPE ....................................................................................... 19 19 20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE ............................................................................................. 19 20.2 INSTALLATION .................................••--------............................................................... 20.2.1 GRAVITYSEWER PIPE ...................... ........................................ 19 19 20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE ............................................................................................. 20 20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS ................................................................. 20.4 TESTING ...................................................................................................................... 20 20 20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITYSEWERS ........................................................................ 20 20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS .............................................................................. 20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT . 20 20 20.5.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE ..........................................• ........................................... 20 20.5.2 FORCE MAINPIPE......... ---•. ................................................... 21 21 DRAINAGE ..................................................................................................................... 21 22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE .......................................................................... 21 1 22.1 BASE ..........--•---------•....----•-•-•.........-•--------------------------•----......................--••-•---••----......... 21 22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE .... .......... 22 I 22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE .....................::..-- 22.2 SUBGRADE... 22 23 22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ............................................. .................................. 23 22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................ 23 23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS ...............................•................................... 23 23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE ........................................................................................... 23 I SectionlV.doc ii 9/9/2008 23.1.1 AGGREGATE ...................................................................................................... .. 23 ' 23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS ................................................................................. 23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES -- PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & 23 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................................................................ 24 ' 23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES .................................................................... 23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS ............................... 24 24 23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS .................................................... 25 23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION .............................................................. 25 23.6.1 CRACKS ................................................................................................................ 25 23.6.2 POTHOLES ........................................................................................................... 26 23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES ...................... .................................................. .. 26 23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS ............................................................ 26 23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE .................................................................... 27 23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .......................•----•-••---................................................... 27 23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................. ............................................................... 28 24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT .................................. 28 25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS .....: ........................................................ 25.1 IRRIGATION- . 28 28 25.13 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 28 25.1.2 PRODUCTS .......................................................................................................... 30 1 25.13 EXECUTION ......................................................................................................... 34 25.2 LANDSCAPE ...........................•--------------------------------------------------- ----------- ................... 37 25.2.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 25.2.2 PRODUCTS .......................................................................................................... 37 41 25.23 EXECUTION ......................................................................................................... 44 26 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING ................................................... 51 26.1 INTENT -• ..........................•...........................-•-•-•------ 26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY ........................ 26.3 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 51 51 26.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION ............................................................. .. 52 26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION ....................................................................................... 26.6 LINER INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 52 52 26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION ..................................................................................... 52 26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION ........................................................................•---•--........ 53 26.9 PAYMENT .....................................................•--•----....---••---------.---.... ........ ...... 53 27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS ........................................................................................... 53 ..-...... 53 27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ............................................................................. 27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 53 28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS ................................ 53 29 CONCRETE CURBS ..................................................................................................... 54 29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 54 29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT .....................................................................................•---........ 54 30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS ......................................................... 54 I SectionIV.doc iii 9/9/2008 1 30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS ................... ....................................................................... 54 ' 30.2 30.3 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS ......................•--------•---...................................................... BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ............................................................................. ........ 54 54 30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 55 ' 31 32 SODDING ........................................................................................................................ SEEDING ......................................................................................................................... 55 55 33 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES ................................................................................................................ 55 33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES ................................................................................ 56 33.2 33.3 PRECAST TYPE .......................................................................................................... BASIS OF PAYMENT ...........-•----• ............................................................................... 56 56 34 MATERIAL USED ......................................................................................................... 56 i 35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ...................................... 56 36 STREET SIGNS ..........................................................•................................................... 56 37 AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS .................................................. 57 37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIONIDEO RECORDING ................................ 57 37.2 37.3 SCHEDULING OF AUDIONIDEO RECORDING ................................................... PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS ....................................................................... 57 57 37.4 EQUIPMENT -----------••--•-• ............................................................................................. 57 37.5 37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO ...................................................................... RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO ....................................................................... 57 57 37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION ............................................................................................ 58 37.8 37.9 LIGHTING .............................................................................•.--•--.....---- SPEED OF TRAVEL .....................................•--------...----•---..............---••----------------------.. 58 58 37.1 0 VIDEO LOG/INDEX ..........................................•--..............---•.........................-•-•-.----• 58 37.1 1 AREA OF COVERAGE ...........................................................................................•-.. 58 ' 37.1 2 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES .........................••--•---------------------........----..------------..---- 58 38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL ................................................................... 59 38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS ................................................................. 59 38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES ............................. 59 38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS .................................... 59 38.4 38.5 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES ........................................................................ SEDIMENTATION BASINS ..............................•---•------------------•--------.-----------------.--.--- 59 59 38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES ...................... 60 38.7 38.8 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS .................................................................... UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION ....................................................... 60 60 38.9 MAINTENANCE ................................................•--.....................................-•---............ 60 38.1 39 0 COMPLIANCE .....................................•-•---'•................................................................ UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING. . 60 63 ' 40 41 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE .................... POTABLE WATERMAINS, RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND 63 APPURTENANCES ....................................................................................................... 63 1 SectionIV.doc iv 9/9/2008 41.1 SCOPE ...... 63 ' 41.2 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 41.2.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 64 64 41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS ..................................................................... 64 41.2.3 GATE VALVES ...................................................................................................... 66 41.2.4 VALVE BOXES •--•-------• .............................................. 41.2.5 HYDRANTS ........................................................................................................... 66 41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES ............................................................................................. 68 ' 41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTIONAND REPAIRS .................................................................. 68 41.2.8 BACKFLOWPREVENTERS ................................................................................ 68 41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES ............................................................................................. 69 41.2.10 BLOW OFFHYDRANTS ...................................................................................... 69 41.3 CONSTRUCTION., ...................................................................................................... 69 41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING ....................................................................................... 69 ' 41.3.2 PIPE LAYING ...................... ................................................. ................................ 41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND F17TINGS ......................................... 69 71 413.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES ............................................................... 71 1 41.4 TESTS ............................................................•--•-------------------- ...................................... 41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS ......................................................................................... 72 72 41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST ................................................................................................ 72 41.5 STERILIZATION ...-•-•-----•• ........................................................................................... 41.5.1 STERILIZINGAGENT .......................................................................................... 72 72 41.5.2 FLUSHINGSYSTEM ............................................................................................ 72 41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE .......................................................................... 41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS ............................................................................ 72 73 41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS .............................................................................................. 73 41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ..................................•---..................................... 73 41.61 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 73 41.62 FURNISHAND INSTALL WATER MAINS ........................................................... 74 41.63 FURNISHAND INSTALL FITTINGS ................................................................... 74 41.64 FURNISHAND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS ................................................................................................................ 74 41.65 FURNISHAND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS ....................................................... 74 i 42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................. 75 43 TENNIS COURTS .......................................................................................................... 75 43-1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS .......................................................................................... 75 43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS ............................................................................................. 75 43.1.2 BASE COURSE ..................................................................................................... 75 43.1.3 PRIME COAT ..........................•............................................................................ 75 43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE ........................................................................................... 75 43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE ............................................................................................. 75 43.1.6 COLOR COAT ...................................................................................................... 76 ' ........................................................................................... 43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS . 77 43.23 GENERAL ...... ...................... ....... .......................................................................... 77 43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION ....................... .............................................. 43.2.3 SLOPE.. ........................................................ - ............ ......... ........ .................. 78 78 43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION ....................................................................................... 79 I SectionlV.doc v 9/92008 it 1 1 1 43.2 PERIMETER CURBING ....................................................................................... 79 43.16 SURFACE COURSE ......................................................................................... ....79 43.2.7 ROOTBARRIER.........................................................---...-............................. ....79 43.2.8 FENCING ................................................. ..................................................... .... 80 43.2.9 WINDSCREENS ............................................................................................... .....80 43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT ...................................................................................... .... 80 43.2. 11 SHADE STRUCTURE ......................... ...---- .............................. ............... ..... 82 43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable)........ -- ..................................... ........................... ..... 82 43.2.13 CONCRETE ..................................................................................................... .....82 43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING ............................................ ..... 82 43.2.15 WATER COOLER........... ................................................................ ..... 83 43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION.. ...... ............................... .... .............................. -.. ..... 83 43.2.17 WARRANTY ..........................................•---.................................--...--................ .....83 44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL .................................................................... ..... 84 44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL .... ..... 84 44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN ......................................................... ..... 84 44.2.1 WORKZONESAFETY...................... .............................................................. ..... 84 44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES .. . 44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS... ........................................................... .. .......... .................. 85 ... .. 44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS ............ ..... 85 44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS .................................................... ..... 85 44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS ........................................................................................ ..... 85 44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN .............................. ..... 85 44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION ............... ..... 86 44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ........................................ ..... 86 44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR....... ..... 86 45 CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE LINING ......................................................................... ..... 86 45.1 INTENT ................................................................................................................... ..... 86 45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY ........................ 87 45.3 MATERIALS .............................................................................................•--........... ..... 87 45.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION ................................................................... 87 45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION .................................................................................. ..... 88 45.6 LINER INSTALLATION ..............................•-------....................................................... 88 45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION ..................................................................................... 88 45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION ....................................................................................... 88 45.9 PAYMENT ............................................................................................................... ..... 88 46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING ..................................... 89 46.1 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 89 461.1 PIPEAND F17TINGS ...................................................................................... ..... 89 46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL-.. ---• ................................................................ 89 461.3 SAMPLES ................................................................................ ................... 89 461.4 REJECTION ................................ .......... ...- ......................... ..... ---..................... ..... 89 46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS ..............................................................•----............................ ...... 89 46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES ..-----•• .................................................................. ...... 90 46 3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE ...................................................................................... ..... 90 463.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS ......................... .......... ............................ ..... 90 1 Section]V.doc v) 9/9/2008 46.3.3 PIPEJOINING .................................................................................... .................90 463.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE.. ... ................................................. 46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE ................................................................•-.-.-- ................. 90 ................. 90 464.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS ..................................... ................. 90 464.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION .......................................................... ................. 90 464.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS ......................................... ................. 91 464.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER ............................................................... ....• ..... 91 46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES ..................................................... ................. 91 ' 46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED ................................ ................ 91 464.7 BACKFILLING .................................................................................... .................92 464.8 POINTREPAIR .................................................................................... .................92 464.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS ..................................... ...... ................. 92 47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE ..... ................. 92 ' 47.1 SCOPE ..................... .................................................................................... 47.2 MATERIALS .................•------.-----.---.-----..............................-- ................. 92 .---...----.--...92 47.3 PIPE --• .......................................................................................................... ................. 92 ' 47.4 JOINING SYSTEM .................................................................•--........---.----- 47.5 FITTINGS ......................................................................... .......................... -................ 93 ................. 93 48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................... ................. 93 ' 48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT ....................................•---....................... ................. 93 48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE ................. 93 48.3 COMPOSITION .......................................................................................... 48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS ................................................................. ................. 93 ................. 94 48.5 MATERIALS .................................•-.---••--••-................................................. .................94 48.6 WATER ........................................................................................................ ................. 94 48.7 REINFORCEMENT .................................................................................... ................. 94 48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS.--• ................................................................•• --•--•.---....... 94 48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION ----•------------------------------•--.................................. ...........------ 95 ' 48.10 PROPORTIONING ....................................................•................................- .--.------•--.--- 95 48.11 MIXING ....................................................................................................... ................. 95 48.12 APPLICATION ............................................................................................ .................95 48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS ........................................................................ ................. 96 48.14 SURFACE FINISH ...................................................................................... ................. 96 48.15 CURING ...................................................................................................... ................. 96 ' 48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION .................................................... 48.17 INSPECTION .............................................................................................. ................. 96 ................. 97 48.18 EQUIPMENT .............................................................................................. ................. 97 49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION .......... ................. 98 49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT ................................................................................ ................. 98 49.2 PAYMENT ...........................•-------.----.-----...--.----.---.---•--................................ 49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS ........................................................... .................98 ................. 98 49.3.1 MATERIALS ......................................................................................... .................98 ' 49.3.2 INSTALLATIONAND EXECUTION ................................................... 49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM ............................... ................. 99 ................. 99 49.4.1 MATERIALS ......................................................................................... ...............100 49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL ....................................................................... ............... 100 SectionlV.doc vii 9/9/2008 1 1 1 49.6 GROUTING MIX .............•-------..----------------•-------•---..........-----------.......................-------- 100 49.7 LINER MIX ...................•-----•---------------------------------------...... 100 49.8 WATER--• ............................................•---•------•.....................---.................................... 101 49.9 OTHER MATERIALS---............................................................................................. 101 49.10 EQUIPMENT ....................................................................................•----.................... 101 49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION ....................................................................... 101 49.11.1 PREPARATION ................................................................. .............................. 101 49.11.2 MIXING ............................................................................................................... 102 49.11.3 SPRAYING ..................... ....... ........ ____ ................................. 102 49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING ......................................................................................... 102 49.11.5 CURING ..................................... ........................................................................ 102 49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE ...................................................... 103 49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM ....... 103 49.12.1 SCOPE ................................................................................................................ 103 49.12.2 MATERIALS ............................................................... .................................... --.-. 103 49.123 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION.... ..................... __ ... _ ... ............................ 105 50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS .......................................................................... 107 51 IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM ............................................................ 107 51.1 SCOPE ........................................................................................................................ 107 51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS ......................................... ........................................... 108 51.2.1 ASPHALT......... ........ ................................................ ...................................... 108 51.2.2 CONCRETE .................................................................................................... ... 108 51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX ........................................................................... 108 51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT ......................................................... 108 51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE .......................................................... 109 51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION -----------------------------------------------------------------------•............ 109 51.6 PLAYING LINES ....................................................•---•----.......................................... 109 51.7 GENERAL .................................................................................................................. 109 51.8 LIMITATIONS ..............................................................................................•---.......... 109 52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION ..........................110 53 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES ..................................................................................110 53.1 MATERIAL ---• ............................•-•------•-......----------............---------------.......................... .110 53.1.1 GABIONAND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL ................................................... 110 53.1.2 GABIONAND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL: ............................................... 112 53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE ................................................................................................ 113 53.1.4 GEOTEXTILEFABRIC ................•..----•.........................--•---................................. 113 53.2 PERFORMANCE......--• .............................................................................................. .113 54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS ...........................................................114 54.1 SCOPE ........................................................................................................................ .114 54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK ........................... ............................................................ . 114 54.3 WORK METHODS .................................................................................................... . 115 54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING ........................................................................ 115 54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT ............................................................................ 115 54.4 LITTER ....................................................................................................................... .115 54.5 VISUAL CHECK ..................................•--•-----.....................---.................................... .115 1 Section]V.doc viii 9/9/2008 t ' 54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING ........................................................ 115 54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE ETC.)...... 115 ' 54.8 , , DEBRIS REMOVAL .........................................••--••---..................------.---.-----.----.......--- 115 54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL ................................................................................................. 116 54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY ............................................................................................. 116 54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION ........................................................................................... 116 54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA .......................................................... 116 54.13 MULCH CONDITION ...................................................... ......................................... 116 ' 54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR ..................................................................... 116 54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL ...................................................... 116 54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION .......................... .........................................•---..................... 116 54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION ............................................................................................. 117 ' 54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE .................................................................................................. 117 54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK ----------------------•-•-.----...........•--•--------------......--.................... 117 54.20 54.21 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- SPECIAL CONDITIONS ........................................................ ------... 117 117 55 MILLING OPERATIONS ............................................................................................ 118 ' 55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE ....................................... 118 55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS ........................................................... 118 ' 55.3 55.4 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS .................................................................................. DISPOSABLE MATERIALS ............................•-.------................................................. 119 119 55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES ................... 119 55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES ............................................................. 119 ' 55.7 TYPES OF MILLING ................................................................................................. 119 55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS .............................................................................. 120 55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .................................................................................... 120 ' 55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT ....................................•---------......................---•-.---.-•.--•--......... 120 56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING ................................................................................... 120 56.1 56.2 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT BASIS OF PAYMENT . . ......................•-----------............................------------......... 120 120 57 RIPRAP ......................................................................................................................... 120 ' 57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ..........................................................................•-........ 120 57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT .............................................................................. ............ 121 58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY ..................................................................•............. 121 58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL .............................................. .............................................. 121 58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING ................................................................ 121 59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS ........................................... 121 59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ....................................................... 122 60 SIGNING AND MARKING ......................................................................................... 122 60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ....................................................... 122 61 ROADWAY LIGHTING .............................................................................................. 122 61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENTAND PAYMENT ....................................................... 122 SectionIV.doc ix 9/9/2008 62 TREE PROTECTION ..................................................................................................123 62.1 TREE BARRICADES ................................................................................................ 123 62.2 ROOT PRUNING ....................................................................................................... 123 62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING ................................................................... .................... 124 63 PROJECT WEB PAGES .............................................................................................. 125 63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN ............................................................................................... 125 63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES ..................................................................... 125 63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE ....................................................... 125 63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS ........................................................................................... 126 63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS ........................................................................................... 126 63.6 POSTING .................................................................................................................... 126 63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES ............................................................................................ 126 1 SectionlV.doc x 9/9/2008 1 L F 1 I 1 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications 1 SCOPE OF WORK 1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION Project Name: Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel Project Number: 10-0042-PR Scope of Work: 1. Contractor shall collect Building Permit no. BCP-2010-07481, Clearing Grubbing Permit and Tree Removal Permit from the Building Dept. at the Development Services 2nd Floor of the Municipal Service Building -- 100 South Myrtle Ave. after he has installed his silt fence in the contractor's lay down yard and temporary construction fences has been installed. There is no fee for these permits. 2. Tentative Dates for Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel - Project No. 10-0042- PR a. Monday, August 16, 2010 - Bid Package Available To Contractors b. 8:00 AM, Thursday, August 26, 2010 - Mandatory Pre-Bid Conference, Clearwater Beach Library & Recreation Center, 69 Bay Esplanade, Clearwater Florida c. 12:00 (Noon) Friday, September 3, 2010 - Last Day for Questions Submitted in Writing Only - Attention: Leroy Chin, e-mail: leroy_.chin@myclearwater.com, Fax: 727-562-4825, U. S. Postal Service Parks & Recreation Dept. P. O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758-4748, No Verbal Questions Asked and no Verbal Answers Will Be Given d. Thursday, August 26, 2010 - Last Day to Submit Prequalification Package, Qualification Package included at the end of the City's Technical Specification section e. Monday, September 6, 2010 - Last Day Sale of Bid Package f. 1:30 PM, Thursday, September 9, 2010 -- Bid Opening to George McKibben - Purchasing Office 3`d Floor, Municipal Service Building -- 100 S. Myrtle Ave., Clearwater, Florida 33756 g. Thursday, October 7, 2010 - Award Contract By City of Clearwater City Council h. Friday, October 8, 2010 - Contractor Awarded Project to Collect Contracts for Execution collected and Returned to Engineering Dept. within 10 Days 2°d Floor, Municipal Service Building - 100 S. Myrtle Ave., Clearwater, Florida, 33756 i. Friday October 8, 2010 - Execution of Purchase Order -- Parks & Recreation Dept. j. Wednesday, 8:00 AM, October 13, 2010 - Pre-Construction Meeting, Clearwater Beach Library & Recreation Center, 69 Bay Esplanade, Clearwater Florida k. Monday, October 18, 2010, Notice to Proceed to General Contractor -- 120 Consecutive Calendar Day to Complete the Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel - Project No. 10-0042-PR 1. Wednesday, February 16, 2010, Completion of Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel - Project No. 10-0042- PR 3. The contactor shall secure the site at all times and provide closed sidewalk barricades and route pedestrian traffic from sidewalks along Gulf view Blvd. on to the Beach Walk Trail. The contractor shall maintain these sign during the duration of the contact period of the project. 4. The contractor shall provide MOT as required during the utilization of the contractors lay down yard and the work in progress at the Beach Lifeguard Station. At the preconstruction conference the contractor shall provide a preliminary plan as to be daily maintenance of traffic during the construction of the project. This MOT may need modifications as the project progress and shall be coordinated with the delivery of materials to the project site. 5. Daily activity of the public will he on going surrounding the Beach Lifeguard Station property and the contractor and his employees & subcontractor shall use extreme caution for the safety and welfare of the public. 6. Pier 60 Parking is public parking and the contractor is not allowed to utilize this parking lot for parking his construction vehicles, employee parking, sub-contractor's/employee parking or his construction equipment. Nor is he allowed to block access to this parking lot. The contractor or his employee parks in the parking lot without paying the fee for the parking ticket placed on the dash of the vehicle will be ticketed. There will be no waiver of the parking ticket by the Owner or the Parking the Division. The equipment parking and employee parking shall be within the contractor's designated lay down area. SectionlV.doc Page 1 of 126 9/912008 t 1 Section IV -Technical Specifications 7. The general contractor shall coordinate his deliveries of materials to the site before 7:00 AM - 10 AM, to minimize the disruption of the parking lot. The contractor shall not block of the drive aisles of the parking lot at anytime during the construction period of this project 8. The equipment and materials stated on the drawings are the materials and the equipment expected to be utilized on this Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel and shall take precedence over material vendor outlined in the technical specification as acceptable vendors. It is the intent of the owner the materials stated on the contract drawings are the materials to be utilized on this project unless approved directly by the owner in the submittal process. No substitutions will be allowed without owner's approval through the submittal process and shall be bought to his attention by the contractor requesting the substitution. 9. The building construction is located on the coastal zone of the Gulf of Mexico, the contractor shall make provisions in his contract to implement the works for install stainless steel hardware for all items which may be exposed to the salt air includes but not limited to truss plates, Simpson ties, nuts, bolts, washers, screws, etc...., if they are not available the shall have heavy duty galvanization. Minimum grade of stainless steel shall be 304 preferred 316 grade stainless steel. If the drawings or specification request galvanization the Owner's intent is for the General Contractor to have included in his pricing for this contract to utilized stainless steel connection components. At the pre-construction meeting the General Contractor shall provide a list of connection components which are not available in stainless steel for verification by the Architect and the Owner. 10. Any items not included in the listed in bill of quantities of the contract documents for the Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel shall have been included cost for those items not listed somewhere in the pricing of the General Contractor proposal to construct this facility. No additional funds will be provides by the Owner for missed items by the General Contractor or his sub-contractors utilized to implement this project. 11. All discrepancies between the construction plans and the technical specifications shall be brought to the attention of the Architect and the Owner for clarification in writing prior to the General Contractor in submitting his bid for this project. After award of the contract discrepancies brought to the attention to the Owner or Architect the most stringent of the discrepancy shall be utilized in the implementation of the Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel and no additional compensation will be provided by the Owner. 12. Asbestos survey was conducted for the existing Beach Lifeguard Station and no asbestos was found in the building the contractor shall give ten (10) day notice to the Pinellas County Air Quality Environmental Protection Agency prior to any demolition work of the structure. Documentation to the City of Clearwater - Building Dept. the notification was sent to Pinellas County Air Quality Department by providing a copy of the invoice when collecting the building permit. 13. The contractor shall call in for location for underground utilities of the various agencies prior to any excavations of the site. The utility boxes on the east side of the building show multiple existing utilities including a fiber optic line. The contractor shall provide hand exploratory excavation identifying location of utilities prior to utilization of machinery for excavations. Fiber optic line shall be located by hand digging prior to any excavation with machinery to prevent damage to fiber optic lines during the contract period of the project. Contractor may request City of Clearwater Parking Division for assistance in locating this fiber optic line. 14. Upon removal of the concrete sidewalk and slabs around the beach lifeguard building silt fence shall be install immediately and no later than 10 hours after concrete removal to prevent silt from going down stream during a possible storm event. All stilt fencing shall be maintained during the contract period of this project. 15. The contractor will be required to restore any disrupted areas of the within the limits of work area and any disturbed areas outside of the limits of work areas by the General Contractor of this project. 16. The contractor of this project is required to provide relocation of palms and tree on this project and shall be coordinated with the Parks & Beautification Maintenance Supervisor. The irrigation system repairs and sleeves required shall extend beneath the new constructed new concrete slabs. The contractor shall coordinate this work for inspection with the city's irrigation technician for acceptance of this work and irrigation system operates correctly prior to pouring the new concrete slabs. 17. The successful bidder shall be required to provide a detailed schedule of value for his awarded contact amount and submitted at the pre-construction meeting. This schedule of value shall be utilized as the basis of his application of payment for the project. The contractor shall utilize the standard AIA form in making his application for payment on or prior to the 250' of every month. This application shall be submitted to the Architect for his review and approval prior to forwarding on to the owner for payment. The payment request shall be accompanied with a lean wavier with SectionIV.doc Page 2 of 126 9/9/2008 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV -Technical Specifications each payment. Upon final payment request the contractor shall provide with his invoice the certificate of final payment. 18. The successful bidder shall be required to provide a detailed construction schedule outlining all work and minor and major milestones for the project and shown long lead items of materials delivery. This schedule shall be updated at each progress meeting. This schedule shall also be providing at the pre-construction meeting as well as a list of sub- contractors with contact person, addresses, telephone/cell/fax numbers, and e-mail addresses. 19. The successful bidder shall be required to provide a list of shop drawings as well as list of material submittals for review by the Architect and this list shall be provided at the pre-construction meeting for approval by the Architect as the required submittal list. 20. The owner will require 3 copies of the each shop drawing and material submittal and shall be maintained by the contractor in separate file boxes by specification sections in file folders clearly marked item contained in the file folder. These documents shall be turn over to the owner at the completion of the project as part of the close out materials. Also include a list of sub-contractors, material vendors and clearly identify as to discipline with contact information such as contact person, addresses, telephone/cell/fax numbers, and e-mail addresses. 21. Submittals shall be sent directly to the Architect for his review and one copy sent to the owner project manager for review at the same time they are sent to the architect. Total number of submittals will be determined at the pre- construction meeting. 22. The contractor shall note the contract duration is 120 calendar days for construction of this project from notice to proceed. No additional days will be allowed. 23. Progress meeting will be required during the duration of the project and shall be every two weeks and dates shall be determined at the pre-construction meeting. 24. The General Contractor will be required to provide his own survey layout and as-built drawings. The General Contractor shall stake out the location of the building and provide a tie in survey to the building department prior to pouring any concrete or installation of the pilings. 25. All existing utilities on the east face of the exiting beach lifeguard building shall be relocate off the east wall and relocated elsewhere see architectural drawing for their relocations. It is the intent of the owner to have the east face view from Gulfview Blvd. free of any utilities. 26. All new concrete shall match existing in texture and color. Mock up samples 2'x2' shall be provide to the Architect and Owner for approval. 27. The Owner's vendors will perform the work for installation of the wiring and hardware for fire alarm system, security system, telephone, data, cable television, the contractor of this project shall provide all junction boxes & raceways from the junction boxes and stub raceways above the ceiling and provide penetrations through walls to locations where the fire alarm system, security system, telephone, data and cable television services are located. The wiring for the telephone, data, and cable television will be free wired and hung from `J' hooks above the ceiling by the city's vendor for this service. The contractor shall coordinate with the Owner to schedule the city vendors to install the low voltage wiring and hardware for the systems previously outlined in note number 28. 28. Security system is provided in the closet for parking & traffic equipment. Contractor to provide raceway to door and 3/a" conduit to the telephone room closet. Touch panel shall be located on the east wall, south of the entry door to room 18" from door jamb and mounted 60" above finish floor elevation. Security touch panel for lifeguard station shall be located in the north entry stairwell on west wall 24" from northwest comer 60" above finish floor elevation of concrete slab. Contractor shall provide conduit from this location to telephone panel board. Contractor shall provide all raceways and `J' boxes to all doors and windows and coordinate locations of glass breaks with the owner's security vendor. Note all conduits shall within the wall construction and no exposed conduits will be allowed to be on finished wall surfaces. 29. Contractor shall provide commodes plumbing fixtures be Toto brand including flushing hardware for commode material submittal shall be sent to Building & Maintenance Division for review and approval. All faucets shall be automatic metered push button type preferred Moen brand, contractor shall submit samples for approval by Building & Maintenance Division. 30. All Steel Case metal doors shall be prefinished from the manufacture and a factory Ash laminate finish on the metal doors & door jambs to be heavy duty galvanization and primed finished from the factory ready for final SectionlV.doc Page 3 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications paint applications. All metal jambs shall be filled flush with concrete at completion of installation. No voids will be allowed within the jambs. 31. All construction cores for doors provided by the contractor during the construction period. All final cores and padlocks keyed to City's BEST Lock master keying system, all cores and padlocks/cores to be provided by the contractor and installed by the city, contract person: Dale Fitzpatrick, General Services - Building & Maintenance Division, 100 Grand Ave., Clearwater, FL 33765, telephone no. 727-562-4710 ext. 2815, fax no- 727-562-4894 32. All furnishings such as washing machine, refrigerator, microwave, flat screen televisions will be provide by the owner and installed by the contactor. 33. Contractor shall provide filter and plumbing for ice maker for the refrigerator provided by the owner and installed by the contractor. 34. 3/4" plywood backing for flat screen televisions shall be full length of wall on second floor of washer/dryer closet above shelving by 12" and 24" in height cut `J' boxes around plywood. Flat screen television mounted 72" from finish floor provide 3/4" plywood backing beginning at 60" to 84" finish floor 48" wide, cut `J' boxes centered in plywood. 35. Contractor shall install flush mounted Knox Box provided by the owner mounted 60-inches above the finished concrete slab grade on the north elevation, 18" east of the entry doorjamb of the stair well. 36. The contractor shall provide and use 5/8" cabinet grade plywood for all millwork work with plastic laminate including: shelving, drawers, doors, counter tops for this project no substitutions will be allow with press board or other similar like materials will be rejected. 37. All exterior light fixtures on outside of building on south, west and north side of the building shall be on a timer for the owner to adjust these lights to be turned off during turtle nesting season. The location of the timer shall be located in the electrical closet. Lights on the exterior of building on east side of building shall be on a photo cell. The contractor shall note the light fixtures on the exterior of the building shall be constructed of material that will not be corrosive to the salt air environment or shall be sealed to provide longevity of the coastal environment and submittal of these fixtures shall be brought directly to the owner's approval in the submittal process. These exterior fixtures shall have bug shields on the fixtures sealed where insects cannot enter the lighting fixtures. 38. The contractor shall provide sealed type light fixtures on the first floor since this area will be exposed to moisture. The contractor shall provide these fixtures in the submittal process and send to the attention of Building & Maintenance Division for their review and approval. 39. All raceways shall be PVC conduits and not galvanized steel on this project. 40. All exterior outlets shall be GFI and enclosure shall be aluminum type and lockable by key or small padlock, and submitted to the Owner for approval, plastic dome type will not be acceptable. 41. All hose bibs shall be vandal proof type bronze or stainless steel and keyed the same, submit to Owner for approval. 42. Contractor shall provide only Square `D' as manufacture of electrical switch gear and send material submittal to Building & Maintenance Division for review and approval. 43. All electrical duplex, light switch, blank junction boxes, television, telephone, data, covers shall be 316 stainless steel. 44. Contractor shall provide electrical heaters to be single phase unit, contractor shall provide material submittal for review and approval by the Building & Maintenance Division. 45. All return grills of the air conditioning system shall be the type which can a receive filter. Upon installation of air condition return grills contractor shall install return filters immediately to prevent dust collecting dust in the ducking system. These filters shall be changed once a month if they are operated during the construction period. Upon final walk through all filters of the air conditioning system shall be changed out, which includes all returns, and the filters of the air conditioning air handlers. Should the contractor fail to install these filters return grills the contractor will be required to clean all ducts prior to handing over the project to the Owner. No additional fund will be provided by the Owner for failure to follow these instructions. All air conditioning air intakes shall be type which can receive a filter and shall have filters installed immediately upon installation of the air intake grill. 46. Contractor shall provide all restroom and shower rooms with exhaust fans a minimum of 150 c. f in. and material submittal to be reviewed and approval by the Building & Maintenance Division. All duct work for SectionIV.doc Page 4 of 126 9/9/2008 u e s 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications exhaust fan shall be ridged aluminum pipe if galvanized is utilized provide coating to prevent corrosion for the costal environment. These coatings galvanized pipe shall be shown to the Owner prior to installation. It shall be noted should the Owner or Building & Maintenance observe during any wall through galvanized piping utilized without coating shall removed and replaced at the contractor's expense and correct material installed. 47. Contractor shall provide a coating to prevent corrosion from the coastal environment for all air conditioning condenser units including covers and panels provide material submittal to be reviewed and approved by the Building & Maintenance Division. 48. Contractor shall provide cleanouts below all lavatories and sinks in the sanitary lines and in the 4" sanitary lines. Contractor shall confirm location of these clean outs by providing shop drawing submittal for approval. 49. Contractor shall provide a piece of fire retired 3/4" plywood panel in the closet no. 1 for data, telephone, and cable television demarks. 4-1.5-inch conduits as shall be ran to the exterior of the building on the southeast corner for service for Verizon, Bright House, and other vendors to the fire retired 3/4" plywood panel. A 1" conduit from the parking lot equipment closet to the southeast corner of the roof eave antenna shall also be provide by the contractor. 50. Two part epoxy fade proof paint contractor to utilize is http://www.tnemec.com/ ; Series 66 HI-BUILD EPOXOLINE (primer) Series 1070-18MT FLUORONAR (topcoat) for all exterior metal painting, contractor to provide sample to the owner for color selections and mock up sample of application to metal colors to the Owner & Architect for approval. No other paint manufacture substitution will be allowed. Two coat applications of primer and topcoat shall be applied to all exterior metal surfaces. 51. The ADA chair lift and all associated items to make this system operational is an alternate line item and all associated cost shall be included in the item during the biding process. 52. Contractor will be required to coordinate with the Owner's surveyor whom will provide the Elevation Certificate for FEMA. The contractor shall coordinate two site visits by the Owner's surveyor into his construction schedule at the following times: after pouring ground floor concrete slab and substantial completion of the project. 53. The contractor shall note the parking lot attendant building has electrical, telephone, and security system from the beach lifeguard station. The contractor shall make provisions to maintain the all system is operational at final handover of the project to the owner of this parking lot attendant building. CONTRACT PERIOD: 120 CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS I SectionlV.doc Page 5 of 126 9/9/2008 11 Section IV -Technical Specifications 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST Project Name: Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel Project Number: 10-0042-PR The following Articles of the Technical Specifications will apply to this contract if marked "X" as shown below: 1 EI Scope Of Work 2.1 0 Line and Grade Shall Be Performed By The Contractor 2.2 ? Line and Grade Shall Be Performed By The City 3 0 Definition Of Terms 4 J Order And Location Of The Work 5 0 Excavation For Underground Work 6 0 Concrete 7 El Excavation And Forms For Concrete Work 8 0 Reinforcement 9 0 Obstructions f0_ U Restoration Or Replacement Of Driveways, Curbs, Sidewalks And Street Pavement 11 ? Work In Easements Or Parkways 12 0 Dewaterin 13 Sanitary Manholes 14 0 Backfill 15 ? Street Crossings, Etc. 16 0 Raisin Or Lowering Of Sanitary Sewer, Storm Drainage Structures 17 0 Unsuitable Material Removal 18 ? Underdrains 19 EI Storm Sewers 20 Sanit Sewers And Force Mains 21 0 Drainage 22 Roadway Base And Sub grade 23 ? Asphaltic Concrete Materials 24 ? Adustment To The Unit Bid Price For Asphalt 25 EI General Planting Specifications 26 ? Hope Deformed - Reformed Pipe Lining 27 ? Plant Mix Driveways 28 Reporting Of Tonnage Of Recycled Materials 29 0 Concrete Curbs 30 0 Concrete Sidewalks And Driveways 31 ? Sodding 32 ? Seeding 33 0 Storm Manholes, Inlets, Catch Basins Or Other Storm Structures 34 0 Material Used 35 0 Conflict Between Plans And Specifications 36 ? Street Signs 37 0 Audio/Video Recording Of Work Areas 38 0 Erosion And Siltation Control 39 1 E] Utility Tie In Location Marking SectionlV.doc Page 4 of 126 9/912008 1 J fJ r Section IV - Technical Specifications 40 Award Of Contract, Work Schedule And Guarantee 41 ? Potable Watermains, Reclaimed Watermains and A urtenances 42 ? Gas System Specifications 43 ? Tennis Courts 44 Q Work Zone Traffic Control 45 ? Cured-In-Place Pipe Linn 46 1 El Specifications for Polyethylene Sli limn 47 ? Specifications for Polyvinyl Chloride Ribbed Pipe 48 Gunite Specifications 49 Sanitary and Storm Manhole Liner Restoration 50 Q Project Information Signs 51 ? In-Line Skating Surfacin S stem 52 ? Resident Notification of Start of Construction 53 ? Gabions and Mattresses 54 ? Lawn Maintenance Specifications 55 ? Milling Operations 56 D Clearin and Grubbing 57 Ri ra 58 Treatment Plant Safe 59 Traffic Signal Equipment and Materials 60 ? Signing And Markin 61 Roadway Lighting 62 Tree Protection 63 Project Web Pa es t Section]V.doc Page 5 of 126 9/9/2008 1 Section IV --Technical Specifications 2 FIELD ENGINEERING 2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR The Contractor shall provide and pay for field engineering service required for the project. Such work shall include survey work to establish lines and levels and to locate and lay out site improvements, structures, and controlling lines and levels required for the construction of the work. Also included are such Engineering services as are specified or required to execute the Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and Surveyors shall be licensed professionals under the laws of the state of Florida. The Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of As-built Survey to the Engineer prior to final payment being made as outlined in Section III (General Conditions), Article 6.11.2 of these Contract Documents. 2.1.1 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those designated on the Drawings or provided by the City. Control points (for alignment only) shall be established by the Engineer. The Contractor shall locate and protect control points prior to starting site work and shall preserve all permanent reference points during construction. In working near any permanent property corners or reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or disturb any such markets. In the event that markers must be removed or are disturbed due to the proximity of construction work, the Contractor shall have them referenced and reset by a Land Surveyor qualified under the laws of the state of Florida. 2.1.2 LAYOUT DATA The Contractor shall layout the work at the location and to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings. Survey notes indicating the information and measurements used in establishing locations and grades shall be kept in notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the record drawings for the project. 2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY At the completion of all work the contractor shall be responsible to have furnished to the project inspector a replacement of the wooden lath and stakes used in the construction of this project. Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the City Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments. Minimum charge is $100.00. The City will generate the project Record construction drawings. 3 DEFINITION OF TERMS For the purpose of these Technical Specifications, the definition of terms from SECTION 111, ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS of these Contract Documents shall apply. For the purpose of the Estimated Quantities, the Contractor's attention is called to the fact that the estimate of quantities as shown on the Proposal Sheet is approximate and is given only as a basis of calculation upon which the award of the contract is to be made. The City does not assume any responsibility that the final quantities will remain in strict accordance with estimated quantities nor shall the contractor plead misunderstandings or deception because of such estimate of quantities or of the character or location of the work or of other conditions or situations pertaining thereto. SectionlV.doc Page 6 of 126 9/9/200$ 11 Section IV - Technical Specifications 3.1 REFERENCE S TANDARDS Reference to the standards of any technical society, organization, or associate, or to codes of local or state authorities, shall mean the latest standard, code, specification, or tentative standard adopted and published at the date of receipt of bids, unless specifically stated otherwise. 3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS Abbreviations used in the Contract Documents are defined as follows: AA Aluminum Association, Inc. AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers' Association AASHTO ACI American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials American Concrete Institute AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AMA Acoustical Materials Association AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc. ANSI American National Standards Institute APA American Plywood Association ASAE American Society of Agricultural Engineers ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASHRAE American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air ' Conditioning ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWG American Wire Gauge AWMA Aluminum Window Manufacturer's Association AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association CFR Code of Federal Regulations CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute ' CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CS Commercial Standards and National Bureau of Standards ' DEP DOT Department of Environmental Protection (Florida) Department of Transportation (Florida) EPA Environmental Protection Agency FAC FBC Florida Administrative Code Florida Building Code FFPC Florida Fire Prevention Code FGC Florida Gas Code FMC Florida Mechanical Code FPC Florida Plumbing Code FedSpec Federal Specifications HI Standards of Hydraulic Institute IBBM Iron Body, Bronzed Mounted IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IPS Iron Pipe Size MIL Military Specification NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers f 126 9/9/2008 P 7 SectionIV.doc age o Section rV -Technical Specifications NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters NEC National Electrical Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NPT National Pipe Thread NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers' Association PCA Portland Cement Association PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute SBC Standard Building Code (SBCCI) SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. SDI Steel Door Institute SFPC Standard Fire Prevention Code (SBCCI) SGC Standard Gas Code (SBCCI) SH Steel Joist Institute SMACCNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association SMC Standard Mechanical Code (SBCCI) SPC Standard Plumbing Code (SBCCI) SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council TCA Title Council of America UL Underwriters' Laboratories 4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK This article not used. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 20 - ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK. 5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK The contractor is responsible to take all necessary steps to conduct all excavation in a manner which , provides for the successful completion of the proposed work while at all times maintaining the safety of the workmen, the general public and both public and private property. The contractor's methods of work will be , consistent with the standard practices and requirements of all appropriate Safety Regulatory Agencies, particularly the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) requirements for excavation. Unless otherwise specifically stated in these plans and specifications, the methods of safety control and compliance with regulatory agency safety requirements are the full and complete responsibility of the contractor. For the purposes of the Contractor's safety planning in the bidding process, the contractor is to consider all ' excavation to be done in the performance of this contract to be in soil classified as OSHA "Type C". The Contractor's attention is called to specific requirements of OSHA for excavation shoring, employee entry, location of excavated material adjacent to excavation, the removal of water from the excavation, surface encumbrances and in particular the requirement of a "Competent Person" to control safety operations. The Contractor will identify his Competent Person to City staff at the start of construction. City staff are required from time to time to perform inspections, tests, survey location work, or other similar activity in an excavation prepared by the contractor. City staff in conformance with the OSHA Excavation Safety Requirements are to only enter an excavation in compliance with these OSHA standards. The City's staff reserve the option to refuse entry into the Contractor's excavation if, in the opinion of the City's staff, the entry into the Contractor's excavation is unsafe or does not conform OSHA requirements. If this SectionIV.doc Page 8 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV -'T'echnical Specifications circumstance occurs, the contractor must either provide the necessary safety requirements or provide alternate means for the accomplishment of the City's work at the Contractor's expense. The restoration quantities, if any, contained in the bid proposal for this contract to not contain sufficient quantities to allow the contractor to perform excavation work using strictly the "open cut" method whereby no shoring systems are used and trench side slopes are cut to conform to OSHA safety requirements without a shoring system. In addition to safety reasons, the Contractor is required to use excavation and trench-shoring methods in compliance with all safety requirements which allow the Contractor to control the amount of restoration work necessary to complete the project. Not more than one hundred (100) feet of trench shall be opened at one time in advance of the completed work unless written permission is received from the Engineer for the distance specified. For pipe installation projects, the trench shall be six (6) inches wider on each side than the greatest external horizontal width of the pipe or conduit, including hubs, intended to be laid in them. The bottom of the trench under each pipe joint shall be slightly hollowed, to allow the body of the pipe to rest throughout its length. In case a trench is excavated at any place, excepting at joints, below the grade of its bottom as given, or directed by the Engineer, the filling and compaction to grade shall be done in such manner as the Engineer shall direct, without compensation. 6 CONCRETE Unless otherwise directed, all concrete work shall he performed in accordance with the latest editions of the Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures by the Portland Cement Association, the American Concrete Institute, and FDOT's Standard Specifications. All appropriate testing shall be performed according to the American. Society of Testing Materials. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall have fiber mesh reinforcing and have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. The cement type shall be Type I and shall conform to AASHTO M-85. The aggregate shall conform to ASTM C-33. All ready mix concrete shall conform to ASTM C-94. The slump for all concrete shall be in the range of 3" to 5", except when admixtures or special placement considerations are required. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all concrete placement. All concrete shall be tested in the following manner: Placement of less than 5 cubic yards (cy) shall be tested at the Engineer's discretion. Otherwise, for each class, for each day, for every 50 cy or part thereof exceeding 5 cy, one set of 3 compressive strength cylinders will be required (1 at 7 days and 2 at 28 days). At the discretion of the Engineer, unacceptable test results may require the Contractor to provide further tests, as determined by the Engineer, to determine product acceptability, or need for removal, and compensation or denial thereof. 7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK 7.1 EXCAVATION r Excavating for concrete work shall be made to the required depth of the subgrade or base upon which the concrete is to be placed. The base or subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted to a point 6" outside said concrete work before the forms are placed. Concrete shall be poured "in the dry". SectionIV.doc Page 9 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 7.2 FORMS Forms for concrete work shall be either wood or metal (except curbs, metal only, unless by written permission from Engineer). They shall be free from warps or bends, shall have a depth equal to the dimensions required for the depth of the concrete deposited against them and shall be of sufficient strength when staked to resist the pressure of concrete without moving or springing. 8 REINFORCEMENT When required, reinforcement shall be placed in the concrete work. Bar reinforcement shall be deformed: ASTMA-A 615, steel shall be billet Intermediate or Hard Grade: Rail Steel A.A.S.H.T.O. M42_ Twisted Bars shall not be used, Fabric Reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M55 (ASTM A185). Welded deformed steel wire fabric for Concrete reinforcement shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 221 (ASTM A497). Epoxy coated reinforcing Steel Bars shall meet ASTM 775/A77 M-86 requirements. 8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT Reinforcement shall not be paid for separately. The cost of such work shall be included in the contract unit price for the item of work specified. 9 OBSTRUCTIONS Any pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings, driveways, or other structures encountered shall be carefully protected from injury or displacement. Any damage thereto shall be fully, promptly, and properly repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner thereof. Should it become necessary to change the position of water or gas or other pipes, sewer drains, or poles, the Engineer shall be at once notified of the locality and circumstances, and no claims for damages arising from the delay in adjusting the pipe, sewer drains or poles shall be made. Failure of the plans to show the location, nature or extent of any existing structures or obstructions shall not be the basis of a claim for extra work. Any survey monument or benchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before removal, and unless otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a registered land surveyor. Any concrete removed due to construction requirements shall be removed to the nearest expansion joint or by saw cut. Contractor shall consult Inspector for the approved means. 10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT Driveways, sidewalks, and curbs destroyed or damaged during construction shall be replaced and shall be the same type of material as destroyed or damaged, or to existing City Standards, whichever provides the stronger repair. All street pavement destroyed or damaged shall be replaced with the same type of material, to existing City Standards, unless the existing base is unsuitable as determined by the Engineer, then the base shall be replaced with City approved material. All replaced base shall be a minimum 8" compacted thickness, or same thickness as base destroyed plus 2", if over 6", and compacted to 98% of maximum density per AASHTO T-180. Unless called for in the proposal as separate bid items, cost of the above work including labor, materials and equipment required shall be included in the bid price per lineal foot of main or square yard of base. The bid price for street pavement, restoration or replacement when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work, and shall be paid for on a square yard SectionIV.doc Page 10 of 126 9/9/2008 11 1 Section IV -Technical Specifications basis. When replacement is over a trench for utilities, the area of replacement shall be limited to twice the depth of the cut plus twice the inside diameter of the pipe. All over this will be at the Contractor's expense. The bid price for restoration or placement of driveways, curbs and sidewalks, when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work and shall be paid for on the basis of the following units: Driveways, plant mix - per square yard: concrete - per square foot; curbs - per lineal foot; sidewalk 4" or 6" thick - per square foot. Concrete walks at drives shall be a minimum of 6" thick and be reinforced with 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh (also see Articles 8 and 30). The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all driveway, curb, sidewalk and street restoration and replacement work. 11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS Restoration is an important phase of construction, particularly to residents affected by the construction progress. The Contractor will be expected to complete restoration Activities within a reasonable time following primary construction activity. Failure by the Contractor to accomplish restoration within a reasonable time shall be justification for a temporary stop on primary construction activity or a delay in approval of partial payment requests. Reasonable care shall be taken for existing shrubbery. Contractor shall replace all shrubbery removed or disturbed during construction. No separate payment shall be made for this work. The contractor shall make provision and be responsible for the supply of all water, if needed, on any and all phases of the contract work. The contractor shall not obtain water from local residents or businesses except as the contractor shall obtain written permission. Reuse water is available for the Contractor's use without charge from the City's wastewater treatment plants, provided the water is used on City of Clearwater contractual work. Details for Contractor to obtain and reuse water from the treatment plants will be coordinated at the pre-construction conference. The Contractor's use of reuse water must conform to all regulatory requirements. 12 DEWATERING 12.1 GENERAL Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, all pipe, except subdrains, shall be laid "in the dry". The contractor shall dewater trench excavation as required for the proper execution of the work, using one or more of the following approved methods: well point system, trenched gravity underdrain system, or sumps with pumps. Well point systems must be efficient enough to lower the water level in advance of the excavation and maintain it continuously in order that the trench bottom and sides shall remain firm and reasonably dry. The well points shall be designed especially for this type of service, and the pumping unit used shall be capable of maintaining a high vacuum, and at the same time, of handling large volumes of air as well as of water. The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all water resulting from trench dewatering operations, and shall dispose of the water without damage or undue inconvenience to the work, the surrounding area, or the general public. He shall not dam, divert, or cause water to flow in excess in existing gutters, pavements or other structures: and to do this he may be required to conduct the water to a suitable place of discharge may be determined by the Engineer. 1 SectionIV.doc Page 11 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications The cost of dewatering shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structures. 12.2 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL The City of Clearwater will hold the Contractor responsible for obtaining a Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Groundwater from Any Non-Contaminated Site Activity prior to dewatering or discharging into the City's streets, storm sewers or waterways. Prior to discharging produced groundwater from any construction site, the contractor must collect samples and analyze the groundwater, which must meet acceptable discharge limits. The following document has been incorporated into this section for reference... 12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON-CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY City Notification Procedure - Contractor must provide the City of Clearwater Environmental Department with the following information prior to beginning dewatering activities: 1) A copy of all groundwater laboratory results 2) A copy of the FDEP Notification Failure to follow the above procedure will result in a Violation and a Stop Work Order will be placed on the project. Depending on the severity of the Violation, the City's Engineering Department may be required to notify the Department of Environmental Protection for enforcement action. The following procedure will be followed: 1 st occurrence - Stop Work Order 2nd occurrence - Notification to FDEP It is recommended that the Contractor call or meet with the City Environmental staff if you have any questions. You may contact the City at 562-4750 for direction or further assistance. STATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION GENERIC PERMITOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON-CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY The facility is authorized to discharge produced ground water from any non-contaminated site activity which discharges by a point source to surface waters of the State, as defined in Chapter 62-620, F.A.C., only if the reported values for the parameters listed in Table 1 do not exceed any of the listed screening values. Before discharge of produced ground water can occur from such sites, analytical tests on samples of the proposed untreated discharge water shall be performed to determine if contamination exists. Minimum reporting requirements for all produced ground water dischargers. The effluent shall be sampled before the commencement of discharge, again within thirty (30) days after commencement of discharge, and then once every six (6) months for the life of the project to maintain continued coverage under this generic SectionIV.doc Page 12 of 126 9/9/2008 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications permit. Samples taken in compliance with the provisions of this permit shall be taken prior to actual discharge or mixing with the receiving waters. The effluent shall be sampled for the parameters listed in Table 1. TABLE 1 1 Screening Values for Discharges into: Parameter Fresh Waters Coastal Waters Total Organic Carbon (TOC) 10.0 mg/l 10.0 mg/l PH, standard units 6.0-8.5 6.5-8.5 Total Recoverable Mercury - by Method 1631 E 0.012 µg/1 0.025 µg/1 Total Recoverable Cadmium 9.3 µg/1 9.3 µg/l Total Recoverable Copper 2.9 µg/1 2.9 µg/1 Total Recoverable Lead 0.03 mg/l 5.6 µg/1 Total Recoverable Zinc 86.0 µg/1 86.0 µg/1 Total Recoverable Chromium (Hex.) 11.0 µg/l 50.0 µg/l Benzene 1.0 µg/1 1.0 µg/1 Naphthalene 100.0 µg/1 100.0 µg/1 If any of the analytical test results exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, except TOC, the discharge is not authorized by this permit or by the City of Clearwater. (a) For initial TOC values that exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, which may be caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic compounds, the permittee may request to be exempted from the TOC requirement. To request this exemption, the permittee shall submit additional information with a Notice of Intent (NOI), described below, which describes the method used to determine that these compounds are naturally occurring. The Department shall grant the exemption if the permittee affirmatively demonstrates that the TOC values are caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic compounds. (b) The NOI shall be submitted to the appropriate Department district office thirty (30) days prior to discharge, and contain the following information: ' SectionIV.doc 1. the name and address of the person that the permit coverage will be issued to; 2. the name and address of the facility, including county location; 3. any applicable individual wastewater permit number(s); 4. a map showing the facility and discharge location (including latitude and longitude); 5. the name of the receiving water; and 6, the additional information required by paragraph (3)(a) of this permit. Page 13 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications (c) Discharge shall not commence until notification of coverage is received from the Department. For fresh waters and coastal waters, the pH of the effluent shall not be lowered to less than 6.0 units for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units for coastal waters, or raised above 8.5 units, unless the permittee submits natural background data confirming a natural background pH outside of this range. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be less than 6.0 units for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units in coastal waters, the pH shall not vary below natural background or vary more than one (1) unit above natural background for fresh and coastal waters. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be higher than 8.5 units, the pH shall not vary above natural background or vary more than one (1) unit below natural background of fresh and coastal waters. The permittee shall include the natural background pH of the receiving waters with the results of the analyses required under paragraph (2) of this permit. For purposes of this section only, fresh waters are those having a chloride concentration of less than 1500 mg/l, and coastal waters are those having a chloride concentration equal to or greater than 1500 mg/l. In accordance with Rule 62-302.500(1)(a-c), F.A.C., the discharge shall at all times be free from floating solids, visible foam, turbidity, or visible oil in such amounts as to form nuisances on surface waters. If contamination exists, as indicated by the results of the analytical tests required by paragraph (2), the discharge cannot be covered by this Generic Permit. The facility shall apply for an individual wastewater permit at least ninety (90) days prior to the date discharge to surface waters of the State is expected, or, if applicable, the facility may seek coverage under any other applicable Department generic permit. No discharge is permissible without an effective permit. If the analytical tests required by paragraph (2) reveal that no contamination exists from any source, the facility can begin discharge immediately and is covered by this permit without having to submit an NOI request for coverage to the Department. A short summary of the proposed activity and copy of the analytical tests shall be sent to the applicable Department district office within one (1) week after discharge begins. These analytical tests shall be kept on site during discharge and made available to the Department if requested. Additionally, no Discharge Monitoring Report forms are required to be submitted to the Department. All of the general conditions listed in Rule 62-621.250, F.A.C., are applicable to this Generic Permit. There are no annual fees associated with the use of this Generic Permit. 13 SANITARY MANHOLES 13.1 BUILT UP TYPE Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the drawings. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be formed by one of the following methods: form directly into concrete manhole base, build up with brick and mortar, lay half tile in concrete, or lay full section of sewer pipe through manhole and break out top half of pipe. The manhole floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Free drop in manholes from inlet pipe invert to top of floor outside the channels shall not exceed twenty fourinches. Standard Drop Manholes shall be constructed wherever free drop exceeds twenty four inches. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of manholes. SectionIV.doc Page 14 of 126 9/9/2008 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar. Brick used may be solid only. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. 13.2 PRECAST TYPE Precast Sanitary Manholes shall conform to this specification unless otherwise approved by the City Engineer. AASHTO M 85 Type Il cement shall be used throughout with a minimum wall thickness of 5 inches. The precast sections shall conform to ASTM C 478 latest revision. Section joints shall be a tongue and groove with "ram neck" gasket or "O" ring to provide a watertight joint. Minimum concrete strength shall be 4000 psi at 28 days. Three sets of shop drawings and location inventory shall be submitted to the City Engineer for approval. Approval of shop drawings does not relieve contractor of responsibility for compliance to these specifications unless letter from contractor requesting specific variance is approved by the City Engineer. Location inventory submitted with shop drawing shall detail parts of manhole per manhole as numbered on the construction plans. All manhole parts shall be numbered or lettered before being sent to the job site to permit proper construction placement. A plan or list of the numbering system shall be present on the job site when manhole components are delivered. Precast manhole dimensions, drop entry, grout flow of channel, etc., shall be as shown on City of Clearwater Engineering Detail #302 Sheet 2 of 3. Manhole sections shall be rejected if abused during shipping or placement and if pipe openings are not properly aligned. The "break in" to precast manholes for pipe entry will not be allowed. The manhole base shall be set on a pad of A 1 or A 2 Classification soil approximately five (5) inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing. 13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) Between the top of the manhole cone and the manhole cover frame, a manhole adjustment ring shall be ' installed. The intent of the manhole adjustment ring is to accommodate future grade changes without disturbing the manhole. See Section IV, Article 23.7 -Asphaltic Concrete -Adjustment of Manholes. 13.3 DROP MANHOLES Standard drop inlets to manholes shall be constructed of commercial pipe, fittings and specials as detailed on the drawings. 13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS Manhole frames and covers shall be set in a full bed of mortar with the top of the cover flush with or higher than finished grade as directed. Refer to Detail 301. 13,5 MANHOLE COATINGS The exterior and interior of all built up manholes shall be coated with two (2) coats of Type lI Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227 Type 11 Class 1) as manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite or approved equal. Interior of built up manholes which have sewers entering with a free drop or which receive discharge from a force main shall have the inside plastered with 1/2-inch of grout and coated as precast manholes below. SectionIV.doc Page 15 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications The exterior and interior of all precast manholes shall be coated with at least 15 mils dry thickness of Type 11 Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227 Type II Class 1) as manufactured by W .R. Meadows Sealtite. 13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES Connections to existing sanitary manholes using approved PVC sewer main shall be made with a manhole adapter coupling by Flo Control, Inc., or approved water stop coupling. 14 BACKFILL Material for backfill shall be carefully selected from the excavated material or from other sources as may be required by the Engineer. Such material shall be granular, free from, organic matter or debris, contain no rocks or other hard fragments greater than 3" in the largest dimension and all fill shall be similar material. Backfill placed around pipes shall be carefully placed around the sides and top of pipe by hand shovels and thoroughly compacted to 12" above the pipe by tamping or other suitable means. Backfill under all types of paving shall be compacted in layers not to exceed 12" in thickness unless alternate method is approved by the Engineer. Backfill shall be a minimum of 98% compaction as determined by the modified Proctor Density Test to the bottom of pavement. Backfill outside of pavement areas shall be compacted the full depth to the ground surface to a minimum of 95% compaction of AASHTO T 180 Standard Density Test. The cost of backfill shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of the pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structure. 15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC. At such crossings, and other points as may be directed by the Engineer, the trenches shall be bridged in an open and secure manner, so as to prevent any serious interruption of travel upon the roadway or sidewalk, and also to afford necessary access to public or private premises. The material used, and the mode of constructing said bridges, and the approaches, thereto, must be satisfactory to the Engineer. The cost of all such work must be included in the cost of the trench excavation. 16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES Sanitary Sewer or Storm Drainage Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans or as indicated by the Engineer. 16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work. 17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL All unsuitable material, such as muck, clay, rock, etc., shall be excavated and removed from the site. All material removed is property of the Contractor, who shall dispose of said material off -site at his expense. The limits of the excavation shall either be shown on the plans, or determined in the field by the Engineer in conjunction with the City's Materials Tester. SectionlV.doc Page 16 of 126 9/9/2008 L ' Section IV - Technical Specifications 17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the amount of cubic yards of unsuitable material excavated and replaced with suitable material as determined by either cross sections of the excavation, truck measure, or lump sum as specified in the Scope of Work and Contract Proposal. 17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for the removal of unsuitable material shall include: all materials, equipment, tools, labor, ' disposal, hauling, excavating, dredging, placing, compaction, dressing surface and incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, the removal of unsuitable material shall be included in the most appropriate bid item. 18 UNDERDRAINS The Contractor shall construct sub-surface drainage pipe as directed in the Contract Scope of Work and detail drawings contained in the Project construction plans. In general, underdrain pipe shall be embedded in a bed of #6 FDOT crushed aggregate, located behind the back of curb and aggregate surface covered ' with a non-degradable fibrous type filter material. A #57 aggregate may be used in lieu of #6 if it is washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be stone, slag or crushed gravel. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, underdrain pipe shall be 8" diameter, polyvinyl chloride pipe, in conformance with ASTM F- 758 "Standard Specification For Smooth Wall PVC Underdrain Systems for Highways" latest revision, ' minimum stiffness of 46 in conformance with ASTM D2412, perforations in conformance with AASHTO M-189 described in FDOT Section 948-4.5 or latest revision and in conformance with ASTM D3034 - SDR 35. ' Alternate acceptable underdrain pipe material is Contech A-2000 which is a rigid PVC pipe exceeds ASTM Specifications D1784, minimum cell classification of 12454B or 12454C, manufactured per ASTM F949- 93a, minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi, with no evidence of splitting, cracking or breaking when pipe is tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 at 60% flatting and with a double gasket joint. Underdrain pipe placed beneath existing driveways and roadways shall be non-perforated pipe with ' compacted backfill. All poly-chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. Where ductile iron pipe is specified, pipe material shall be the same as specified for potable water pipe in these technical specifications. All underdrain aggregate shall be fully encased in a polyester filter fabric "sock" (Mirafi 140-N or approved equal) per the construction detail drawings. 18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ' Measurement shall be the number of lineal feet of 8" Sub-drain in place and accepted. 18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be based upon the unit price per lineal foot for underdrain as measured above, which shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to construct the underdrain (specifically underdrain pipe, aggregate and filter fabric). Underdrain clean-outs, sod, driveway, road and sidewalk restoration shall be paid by a separate bid item. 1 SectionIV.doc Page 17 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 19 STORM SEWERS All storm drain pipe installed within the City of Clearwater shall be reinforced concrete unless otherwise specified or approved by the City Engineer. Said pipe shall comply with Section 941 of the current FDOT Specifications. All reinforced concrete pipe joints shall be wrapped with Miraf. 140N filter fabric or equivalent (as approved by the City Engineer). The cost for all pipe joint wraps shall be included in the unit price for the pipe. All pipe, just before being lowered into a trench, is to be inspected and cleaned. If any difficulty is found in the fitting the pieces together, this fitting is to be done on the surface of the street before laying the pipe, and the tops plainly marked in the order in which they are to be laid. No pipe is to be trimmed or chipped to fit. Each piece of pipe is to be solidly and evenly bedded, and not simply wedged up. Before finishing each joint, some suitable device is to be used to find that the inverts coincide and pipe is clear throughout. 19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the stations and left or right offsets of all manholes, inlet structures and terminals ends of subdrains, as measured from the nearest downstream manhole along the centerline of the sewer along with the elevations of the north edge of manhole cover, inverts of all pipe in structures, and the flow line of inlets. (Gutter) 19.2 TESTING The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly watertight sewer under all conditions. At the discretion of the City Engineer or his designee, the watertightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring the infiltration. The watertightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section of the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed 150 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No trench made joints may be backfilled until after they have been, tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken, to avoid flotation.. The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the line. 19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot for storm sewer pipe in place and accepted, measured along the centerline of the storm sewer pipe to the inside face of exterior walls of storm manholes or drainage , structures and to the outside face of endwalls. Said unit price includes all work required to install the pipe (i.e. all materials, equipment, filter fabric wrap, labor and incidentals, etc.). 5ectionlV.doc Page 18 of 126 9/9/2008 1 ' Section IV-Technical Specifications 20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS ' 20.1 MATERIALS 20.1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE i GRAVITY SEWER PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings shall conform with ASTM specification D 3034 for S.D.R. 35. Sewer pipe with more than 10 feet of cover shall be SDR 26. The pipe shall be plainly marked with the above ASTM designation. The bell end of joints and fittings shall have a rubber sealing ring to provide a tight flexible seal in conformance with ASTM D 3212 76. The laying length of pipe joints shall be a maximum of 20- feet- Unless otherwise noted in these specifications or construction plans, Ductile Iron pipe and fittings for gravity sewer shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for DIP water main except pipe shall be interior "polylined" in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where sanitary sewer main is to be placed between building lots in a sideline easement, the sewer main shall, insofar as possible, be constructed without manholes or lateral connections within the side easement. The pipe material in the side easement between streets shall be C 900, SDR 18 polyvinyl chloride water main pipe as described in Technical Section 41. A two-way cleanout shall be installed on each lateral at the property line. 20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE FORCE MAIN PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Unless otherwise noted in the specifications or construction plans, both polyvinyl chloride and ductile iron force main pipe and fittings shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe except that DIP shall be "polylined" in accordance with manufactures recommendations. All polyvinyl chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. 20.2 INSTALLATION ' 20.2.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE ' Installation of gravity sewer pipe shall be in conformance with recommended practices contained in ASTM D 2321 and Unibell UNI B 5. The bottom trench width in an unsupported trench shall be limited to the minimum practicable width (typically pipe OD plus 8 to 12-inch on each side) allowing working space to place and compact the haunching material. The use of trench boxes and movable sheeting shall be performed in such a manner that removal, backfill and compaction will not disturb compacted haunching material or pipe alignment. ' Dewatering of the trench bottom shall be accomplished using adequate means to allow preparation of bedding, placement of the haunching material and pipe in the trench without standing water. Dewatering shall continue until sufficient backfill is placed above the pipe to prevent flotation or misalignment. i Where pipe bedding is insufficient to adequately support pipe, the contractor will be required to remove unsuitable material and bed pipe in Class I material (1/2" Dia_ aggregate) to provide firm support of pipe. Connections to manholes with sanitary pipe shall use a joint 2 feet in length and shall use an approved water stop around pipe joint entry. r SectionJV.doc Page 19 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications The laterals shown on the plans do not necessarily reflect exact locations. The contractor is required to locate all existing laterals for reconnection and to coordinate with the construction inspector the location of all new laterals. 20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE Installation of force main pipe shall be in conformance with Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. 20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS The contractor shall submit to the Engineer a marked set of "As Built" construction drawings describing both the stations and left or right offset of all lateral terminal ends as measured from' the nearest downstream manhole along the center line of the sewer main. The as built drawings will also describe elevations of the north edge of the manhole cover rings and inverts of all main pipes in manholes. 20.4 TESTING 20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly water tight sewer under all conditions. The water tightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring infiltration. The water tightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section or the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltra- tion. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed 50 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive, the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No such repaired joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The Contractor shall TV inspect all mains to verify the true and uniform grade and the absence of bellies or dropped joints prior to acceptance. Any infiltration, dips or sags of more than 1/4-inches shall be cause for rejection. The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the line. 20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS Force mains shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of 150 P.S.I. for two (2) hours, as described in Section 41.04 of these Technical Specifications for the testing of water mains. 20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT 20.5.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Payment for in place sanitary sewer gravity main pipe shall be the unit price per lineal foot per appropriate range of depth of cut as contained in the contract proposal. Measurement for payment shall be along the centerline of the sewer main from center to center of manholes. Payment for laterals shall be the unit price per lineal foot of pipe as measured from the centerline of the sewer main pipe to the terminal end of the lateral pipe including a two-way cleanout at the property line. SectionIV.doc Page 20 of 126 9/9/2008 ' Section IV - Technical Specifications Payment for sewer pipe shall include all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete the ' installation. This shall include clearing and grubbing, excavation, shoring and dewatering, backfill and grading. 20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE ' Payment and measurement of force main pipe shall be the same as described in Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. 21 DRAINAGE The Contractor shall provide proper outlet for all water courses and drains interrupted during the progress ' of the work and replace them in as good condition as he found them. 22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE 22.1 BASE This specification describes the construction of roadway base and subgrade. The Contractor shall refer to ' Section IV, Article 1 "Scope of Work" of the city's Contract Specifications for additional roadway base and subgrade items. Roadway base shall be 8" compacted minimum thickness unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The subgrade shall be 12" compacted minimum thickness with a minimum Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) of 40 unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The Contractor ' shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory a Proctor and an LBR for each type material. The Contractor shall also have an independent testing laboratory perform all required density testing. Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the base, Section N, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material ' Removal) of the city's Contract Specifications will apply. Once the roadway base is completed, it shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to the base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost for placement of prime material shall be included in the bid item for base. ' The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all base and subgrade placement or reworking. The following base materials are acceptable: 1. SHELL BASE: Shell base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 913 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as ' shown on the plans. The shell shall be FDOT approved. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 2. LIMEROCK BASE: Limerock base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The limerock shall be from a FDOT approved certified pit. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. ' 3. CRUSHED CONCRETE BASE: Crushed concrete base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 204 and 901 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The crushed concrete material shall be FDOT ' SectionIV.doc Page 21 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications approved. The Contractor shall provide certified laboratory tests on gradation to confirm that the crushed concrete base material conforms to the above specifications. The LBR shall be a minimum of 185. LBR and gradation tests shall be provided to the city by the Contractor once a week for continuous operations, or every 1000 tons of material, unless requested more frequently by the City Engineer or designee. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 4. SOIL CEMENT BASE: Unless otherwise noted, soil cement base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 270 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. An Asphalt Rubber Membrane Interlayer (ARMI) shall be included in the pavement design per Section 341 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) to minimize reflective cracking unless otherwise noted in the project plans and specifications. The ARMI layer shall be overlaid with asphalt on the same day it is placed for the Contractor to receive full compensation for the work. The soil cement base design shall be by a certified lot under the direction of a Registered Florida Professional Engineer, and must be approved by the City Engineer. Said design shall provide for a minimum of 300 P.S.I. in seven days. All plant mixed soil cement shall be certified by a registered laboratory that has been approved by the Engineer. The only approved method for spreading the cement is the use of a spreader box. The use of a spreader bar for spreading cement will not be allowed. The applying of the cement shall not be allowed when the wind velocity is sufficient to jeopardize material interests (i.e. vehicles, etc.) from airborne cement particles. The density testing frequency shall be at the discretion of the registered Florida Professional Engineer responsible for the soil cement design. 5. ASPHALT BASE: Full depth asphalt base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 280 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The cost for preparation, placement and compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item price for asphalt or base. 6. REWORKED BASE: When the plans call for the working of the existing base, the finished reworked base shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 8" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, and be constructed in accordance with the applicable FDOT requirements for the type of material used. The density requirements (except for asphalt and soil cement base) shall be per Section 200 6 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). For asphalt, the density requirements are per Section 330-11, and for soil cement per Section 270-5 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of base in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency shall be a half-inch (1/2"). Areas deficient in thickness shall either be fixed by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place. 22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The unit price for base shall include: all materials, roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, prime, base, subgrade (unless the plans specify a separate pay item), stabilization, mixing, testing, equipment, tools, hauling, labor, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. Payment for Section]V.doc Page 22 of 126 9/9/200& 1 1 ' Section 1V - Technical Specifications asphalt base shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 22.2 SUBGRADE ' All subgrade shall be stabilized and constructed in accordance with Sections 160 and 914 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) unless otherwise noted herein. All subgrade shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 12" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer. If limerock is ' used, it shall also meet the requirements of Section 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the subgrade, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract Specifications will apply. The extent of said removal shall be determined by the Engineer in accordance with accepted construction practices. The Contractor is responsible for clearing, grading, filling, and removing any trees or vegetation in the roadbed below the subgrade to prepare it per the plans. The cost of this work shall be included in the unit price for base or subgrade. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory the bearing value after the mixing of materials for the stabilized subgrade. 22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ' The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of stabilized subgrade in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency for mixing depth shall be per Section 161- 6.4 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. Acceptable bearing values shall be per FDOT Section 160- 7.2. Areas deficient in thickness or bearing values shall either be corrected by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, ' however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place (latest edition). 22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for subgrade shall include: roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, testing, stabilizing, mixing, materials, hauling, labor, equipment and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, subgrade shall be included in the bid item for base. ' 23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS This specification is for the preparation and application of all S-Type Marshall Mix Design asphaltic ' concrete materials on roadway surfaces unless otherwise noted. 23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 23.1.1 AGGREGATE All aggregates shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections 901 through ' 919 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 1 SectionlV.doc Page 23 of 126 9/92008 Section 1V-Technical Specifications 23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE The plant and methods of operation used to prepare all asphaltic concrete and bituminous materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 320 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise noted, all acceptance procedures and quality control/assurance procedures shall conform to the requirements of Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall note that the City shall have the right to have an independent testing laboratory select, test, and analyze, at the expense of the City, test specimens of any or all materials to be used. Tests to be performed by the independent testing laboratory every 1000 tons include, but are not limited to, Marshall stability and flow, extraction/gradation and cores to determine density and thickness. The results of such tests and analyses shall be considered, along with the tests or analyses made by the Contractor, to determine compliance with the applicable specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed. The Contractor hereby understands and accepts that wherever any portion of the work is discovered, as a result of such independent testing or investigation by the City, which fails to meet the requirements of the Contract documents, all costs of such independent inspection and investigation as well as all costs of removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair of any such work shall be borne solely by the Contractor. Payment reductions for asphalt related items shall be determined by the following-: 1. Density per Section 330-11 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 2. Final surface or friction course tolerances per Section 330-13 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 3. Thickness will be determined from core borings.. Deficiencies of 1/4" or greater shall be corrected by the Contractor, without compensation, by either replacing the full thickness for a length extending at least 25' from each end of the deficient area, or when the Engineer allows for an overlay per Section 330-15.2.3 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (2000 edition). In addition, for excesses of t/4" or greater, the Engineer will determine if the excess area shall be removed and replaced at no compensation, or if the pavement in question can remain with payment to be made based on the thickness specified in the contract. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all asphalt. 23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES All asphalt mix designs shall conform to the requirements of Sections 331 and 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. All asphalt mix designs shall be approved by the Engineer PRIOR to the commencement of the paving operation. NO RECLAIMED ASPHALT PAVEMENT (RAP) MATERIAL SHALL BE ALLOWED IN THE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MIXES. 23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the following requirements: Table 1: Layer Thickness for Asphalt (Layers Are Listed in Sequence of Construction) COURSE LAYER THICKNESS (Inches) 5ectionIV.doc Page 24 of 126 9/9/2008 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications THICKNESS (Inches) Type S-l Type S--I with Type S-III Top Layer Type S-III FC-3 Type S-III with FC-3 Top Layer Type S-I with FC-3 Top Layer 1st 2nd 1st 2"d 1st 2nd I st 2"d I st 2nd 1st 2nd 1 1 1 1'/z 1'/2 2 1'4 % * 1 1 2'/z 1'/ 1'/4 1 %z 1 1'!z 1 3 1 %2 1'/2 2 1 2 1 * At the Engineer's discretion, 2" of S-Ill is acceptable for use on residential streets ' Additional Notes: I . Type S-III shall be limited to the final (top) structural layer (one layer only). ' 2. All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the requirements of sections 331 and 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 3. All pavement designs shall include a minimum of two inches of asphalt. ' 4. The Contractor shall be responsible to review the project plans for complete pavement design detail. 5. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, Type S-III per Section 331 of FDOT's 2000 Standard ' Specifications shall be used as final riding surface on streets with the speed limit of less than 35 mph, streets with an average daily traffic (ADT) of less than 3000, and all residential streets. 6. An FC-3 friction course per section 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall be used on ' streets with a speed limit of 35 mph or greater, and streets with an ADT of 3000 or greater. 23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS ' The general construction requirements for all hot bituminous pavements (including limitations of operations, preparation of mixture, preparation of surface, placement and compaction of mixture, surface requirements, correction of unacceptable pavement, etc.) shall be in accordance with Section 330 of ' FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION ' 23.6.1 CRACKS ' Cracks in roadway pavement shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris to be removed from cracks by compressed air or other suitable method. ' 2. Apply a multiple layered application of bituminous binder and fine aggregate, as appropriate to the depth of the crack until the void of the crack is completely filled to the level of the surrounding roadway surface. ' SectionlV.doc Page 25 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 3. If application of asphaltic concrete is not to begin immediately after crack repair, cracks are to be sanded to prevent vehicular tracking. 4. Payment for crack filling shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. 23.6.2 POTHOLES Potholes shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris is to be removed from potholes by hand, sweeping, or other suitable method. 2. A tack coat is to be applied to the interior surface of the pothole. 3. The pothole is to be completely filled with asphaltic concrete, and thoroughly compacted. 4. Payment for pothole preparation shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. 23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and storm drain manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be paid on a per unit basis for each item. The use of manhole adjustment risers is acceptable under the following conditions: The riser shall meet or exceed all FDOT material, weld, and construction requirements. The riser shall consist of an A-36 hot rolled steel meeting or exceeding the minimum requirements of A.S.T.M. A-36. The riser shall he a single piece with a stainless steel adjustment stud and shall have a rust resistant finish. The use of cast iron, plastic, or fiberglass risers is not permitted. In addition, the installation, of each riser shall be per manufacturers specifications. Each manhole shall be individually measured, and each riser shall be physically marked to ensure that the proper riser is used. Also, the ring section shall be cleaned, and a bead of chemically resistant epoxy applied to the original casting, prior to installation of the riser. It is the Contractors responsibility to ensure that the manholes are measured, the risers are physically marked, the ring sections are thoroughly cleaned, and that the epoxy is properly applied prior to installation of each riser. If risers are not used, the adjustment of manholes shall be accomplished by the removal of pavement around manhole, grade adjustment of ring and cover, and acceptable replacement and compaction of roadway materials prior to paving. A full depth backfill using asphalt is acceptable. The use of Portland cement for backfill is not acceptable. All manhole and valve adjustments shall be accomplished prior to the application of final asphaltic concrete surface. Unless otherwise noted in the specs or on the plans, the paving operation shall occur within seven (7) calendar days from the completion of the adjustment. On arterial roadways, the rims manholes are to be ramped with asphalt during the time period between initial adjustment and final resurfacing. Water and gas valves, sewer cleanouts, valve boxes, tree aeration vents, etc. will be adjusted by the Contractor with the cost for this work to be included in the unit cost of the asphalt. Care must be taken around said appurtenances to ensure that they are not paved over, It is the Contractor's responsibility to inform the owners of all utilities of impending work and coordinate their adjustments so they are completed prior to the scheduled paving. 23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS 1. All impacted radius returns within project limits shall be paved unless otherwise directed by the Engineer or Project Inspector, with payment to be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt. SectionIV.doc Page 26 of 126 9/9/2008 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications 2. All pavement markings impacted by placement of asphalt shall be replaced prior to the road being open to traffic unless otherwise noted in the contract scope and plans. ' 3. All project related debris shall be hauled off the job site by the Contractor in a timely manner and at their own expense in conformance with all regulatory requirements. ' 4. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to sweeping when paving. The Broom Tractor way of sweeping will not be permitted. Prior to paving, all construction areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper (either vacuum or mechanical type) that picks up and hauls off, dust and ' dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways, curbs and roadways each day before leaving the job site. ' 5. The application of tack and prime coats (either required or placed at the Engineer's discretion) shall be placed per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Tack shall also be applied to the face of all curbs and driveways. The cost (including heating, hauling and applying) ' shall be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 6. Leveling course and spot patching shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or as directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and ' plans. 7. If an asphalt rubber binder is required, it shall conform to the requirements of Section 336 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. ' 8. On all streets with curb and gutter, the final compacted asphalt shall be ''/," above the lip or face of said curb per City Index 101. 23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 1. Unless otherwise noted in this section, all of the asphaltic concrete specifications in Sections A through H above shall apply to superpave asphaltic concrete. All asphaltic concrete pavement shall ' be designed and placed in accordance with the FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (latest edition). 2. All aggregate shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections 901 and 902 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 3. All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Asphaltic binder shall be Grade PG 67-22 unless otherwise specified in the Scope of Work. 4. All superpave mix designs shall conform to Sections 320 and 334 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 5. All general construction requirements shall conform to Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). ' 23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Basis of measurement will be the number of tons of asphaltic concrete completed, in place and accepted. ' Truck scale weights will be required for all asphaltic concrete used. 1 Section]V.doc Page 27 of 126 9/92008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be made at the contract unit price for asphaltic concrete surface as specified and measured above. This price shall include all materials, preparation, hauling, placement, tack and/or prime coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, leveling, spot patching, filling of cracks, pothole repair, sweeping, debris removal, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the asphalt work in accordance with the plans and specifications. 24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT When this Article applies to the contract, the unit bid price for asphalt will be adjusted in accordance with the following provisions: 1. Price adjustment for asphalt shall only be made when the current FDOT Asphalt Price Index varies more than 10% from the bid price at the time of the bid opening. 2. The Bituminous Material Payment Adjustment Index published monthly by the FDOT shall be used for the adjustment of unit prices. This report is available on FDOT's internet site. The address is. http://wwwl 1.myflorida.com. It is under the section "Doing Business with FDOT" in the "Contracts Administration" section under "Asphalt Index". For additional information, call FDOT @ 850-414- 4000. 3. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of the bid opening will be used for the initial determination of the asphalt price. 4. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of placement of the asphalt will be used for payment calculation. 5. The monthly billing period for contract payment will be the same as the monthly period for the FDOT Payment Adjustment Index. 6. No adjustment in bid prices will be made for either tack coat or prime coat. 7. No price adjustment reflecting any further increases in the cost of asphalt will be made for any month after the expiration of the allowable contract time. 8. The City reserves the right to make adjustments for decreases in the cost of asphalt. 25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS 25.1 IRRIGATION 25.1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The work specified in this Section consists of the installation of an automatic underground irrigation system as shown or noted in the plans. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services and facilities required to perform all work, in connection with the underground sprinkler irrigation system, complete, as indicated on the drawings and/or specified. Work noted as "NIC", "existing", or "by others" is not included in this pay item. B. The irrigation plans are schematic in nature. Valves and pipes shall be located in the turf/landscape areas except at road/paving crossings. All piping under paving shall be sleeved. Changes in the irrigation system layout shall be modified with the approval of the Engineer. SectionIV.doc Page 28 of 126 919/2008 1 ' Section IV - Technical Specifications 25.1.1 .1 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. The irrigation work shall be installed by qualified personnel or a qualified irrigation subcontracting company that has experience in irrigation systems of similar size, scope, mainline, system pressure, controls, etc. B. All applicable ANSI, ASTM, FED.SPEC. Standards and Specifications, and all applicable building codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the work shall apply. C. Workmanship: All work shall be installed in a neat, orderly and responsible manner with the recognized standards of workmanship. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material or work which does not conform to the contract documents. Rejected work shall be removed or corrected at D. the earliest possible time at the contractor's expense. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The contractor shall prepare and deliver to the Engineer within ten (10) calendar days prior to completion of construction a minimum of three (3) hard cover ' binders with three rings containing the following information: 1. Index sheet stating the contractor's address and business telephone number, 24 hour emergency phone number, person to contact, list of equipment with name(s) and address(es) of local ' manufacturer's representative(s) and local supplier where replacement equipment can be purchased. 2. Catalog and part sheet on every material and equipment installed under this contract. ' 3. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment. 4. Provide the Engineer and the City of Clearwater maintenance staff with written and "hands on" ' instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the Engineer at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered. ' a. Four-hour instruction (minimum) for the Drip Emitter equipment operation and maintenance. b. Two-hour instruction (minimum) for automatic control valve operation and maintenance. ' 25.1.1 .2 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The Irrigation Contractor shall coordinate the work with all other trades, all underground improvements, the location and planting of trees and all other planting. Verify planting requiring excavation 24 in. diameter and larger with the Engineer prior to installation of main lines. B. Provide temporary irrigation at all times to maintain plant materials. C. The Irrigation Contractor is responsible to maintain the work area and equipment until final acceptance by the Engineer. Repairs and replacement of equipment broken, stolen, or missing as D. well as regular maintenance operations shall be the obligation of the contractor. The Irrigation Contractor shall submit a traffic control plan (per FDOT specifications) to the Engineer prior to initiating construction on the site. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of traffic signs, barriers, and any additional equipment to comply with the FDOT ' standards and to ensure the safety of its employees and the public. ' 25.1.1.3 WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer(s) shall warrant the irrigation system components to give satisfactory service for one (1) year period from the date of acceptance by the Engineer and the City of Clearwater. Should ' SectionlV,doc Page 29 of 126 . 9/9/2008 Section IV --- Technical Specifications any problems develop within the warranty period due to inferior or faulty materials, they shall be corrected at no expense to the City of Clearwater or FDQT. 25.1.2 PRODUCTS 25.1.2.1 GENERAL A. All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect condition. No deviations from the specifications shall be allowed except as noted. 25.1.2.2 PIPING A. The irrigation system pipe shall be as stated herein and shall be furnished, installed and tested in accordance with these specifications. B. All pipe is herein specified to be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, 1120, Schedule 40, conforming to ASTM D2665 and D1785. C. All nipples, pipe connections, bushings, swing joints, connecting equipment to the mainline is required to be threaded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Schedule 80. 25.1.2.3 PIPE FITTINGS A. All pipe fittings for Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall be as follows: Fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D2466, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, material designation, size, applicable 1PS schedule and NSF seal of approval. The connection of mainline pipe to the automatic control valve shall be assembled with threaded Schedule 80 fittings and threaded Schedule 80 nipples. 25.1.2.4 PVC PIPE CEMENT AND PRIMER A. Provide solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent weld pipe and fittings as recommended by the manufacturer. Pipe joints for solvent weld pipe to be belled end. B. Purple primer shall be applied after the pipe and fittings has been cut and cleaned. The Primer shall be of contrasting color and be easily recognizable against PVC pipe. 25.1.2.5 THREADED CONNECTIONS A. Threaded PVC connections shall be made using Teflon tape or Teflon pipe sealant. 25.1.2.6 GATE VALVES 25.1.2.6.1 MANUAL GATE VALVES 2 IN. AND SMALLER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. 200-250 psi Ball Valve 2. PVC body - with Teflon Ball Seals 3. Threaded-Dual end Union Connectors 4. Non-Shock Safe-T-Shear Stem SectionIV,doc Page 30 of 126 9/9/2008 1 1 1 1 Section 1V --Technical Specifications 5. Safe-T Shear True Union Ball Valve as manufactured by Spears Manufacturing Company , Sylmer, California, or approved equal. 25.1.2.6.2 GATE VALVES 2%" IN. AND LARGER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. AWWA-C-509 2. 200 lb. O.W.G. 3. Cast Iron body - ASTM A 126 Class B 4. Deep socket joints 5. Rising stern 6. Bolted bonnet 7. Double disc 8. Equipped with 2" square operating key with tee handle B. Provide two (2) operating keys for gate valve 3" and larger. The "street key" shall be 5' long with a 2" square operating nut. 25.1.2.7 SLEEVES A. Sleeves: (Existing by City of Clearwater) 25.1.2.8 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. The remote control valve shall be a solenoid actuated, balance-pressure across-the diaphragm type capable of having a flow rate of 25-30 gallons per minute (GPM) with a pressure loss not to exceed 6.1 pounds per square inch (PSI). The valve pressure rating shall not be less than 150 psi. B. The valve body and bonnent shall be constructed of high impact weather resistant plastic, stainless steel and other chemical/UV resistant :materials. The valve's one-piece diaphragm shall be of durable santoprene material with a clog resistant metering orifice. C. The valve body shall have a 1 " inch (FNPT) inlet and outlet or a one inch slip by slip inlet and outlet for solvent weld pipe connections. D. The valve construction shall be as such to provide for all internal parts to be removable from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation. E. The valve shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California, or approved equal. F. Identify all control valves using metal I.D. tags numbered to match drawings. 25.1.2.9 VALVE BOXES A. For remote control drip valve assembly and UNIK control timer use a Brooks #36 concrete value box with #36-T cast iron traffic bearing cover, or approved equal. B. For flush valve assembly use an Ametek #181014 (10") circular valve box with #181015 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. SectionlV.doc Page 31 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV -- Technical Specifications C. For air relief assembly use anArnetek #182001 (6") economy turf box comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. 25.1.2.10 DRIP IRRIGATION 25.1.2.10.1 CONSTRUCTION A. Techline shall consist of nominal sized one-half inch (1/2") low-density linear polyethylene tubing with internal pressure compensating, continuously self-cleaning, integral drippers at a specified spacing, (12", 18", or 24" centers). The tubing shall be brown in color and confform to an outside diameter (O.D.) of 0.67 inches and an inside diameter (I.D.) of 0.57 inches. Individual pressure compensating drippers shall be welded to the inside wall of the tubing as an integral part of the tubing assembly. These drippers shall be constructed of plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm retainer and a self-flushing/cleaning elastomer diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper. 25.1.2.10.2 OPERATION A. The drippers shall have the ability to independently regulate discharge rates, with an inlet pressure of seven to seventy (7-70) pounds per square inch (PSI), at a constant flow and with a manufacturer's coefficient of variability (Cv) of 0.03. Recommended operating pressure shall be between 15-45 PSI. The dripper discharge rate shall be 0.4, 0.6, or 0.9 gallons per hour (GPH) utilizing a combination turbulent flow/reduced pressure compensation cell mechanism and a diaphragm to maintain uniform discharge rates. The drippers shall continuously clean themselves while in operation. The dripperline shall be available in 12", 18" and 24" spacing between drippers unless otherwise specified. Techline pipe depth shall be under mulch unless otherwise specified on Plans. Maximum system pressure shall be 45 PSC. Filtration shall be 120 mesh or finer. Bending radius shall be 7". B. For on-surface or under mulch installations, 6" metal wire staples (TLS6) shall be installed 3'-5' on center, and two staples installed at every change of direction. 25.1.2.10.3 LINE FLUSHING VALVES A. The sub-surface system shall utilize Automatic Line Flush Valves at the end of each independent zone area. This valve shall be capable of flushing one gallon at the beginning of each irrigation cycle. The valves shall match the dripline manufacturer and connect directly to the dripline. 25.1.2.10.4 AIRIVACUUM RELIEF VALVE A. Each independent irrigation zone shall utilize an AirNacuum Relief Valve at its high point(s). The air and vacuum relief valve shall seal effectively from 2 to 110 psi. 25.1.2.10.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS A. The pressure regulator shall be designed to handle steady inlet pressures over 150 pounds per square inch (psi) and maintain a constant outlet pressures of 25 psi. Regulating accuracy shall be within =/- 6%. The pressure regulator shall. be manufactured from high-impact engineering grade thermoplastics. Regulation shall be accomplished by a fixed stainless steel compression spring which shall be enclosed in a chamber separate from the water passage. with #182002 cover I SectionIV.doc Page 32 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications 25.1.2.10.fi FILTERS ' A. The filter shall be a multiple disc type filter with notation indicating the minimum partial size to travel through or the mesh size of the element being used. The discs shall be constructed of chemical resistant thermoplastic for corrosion resistance. 25.1.2.10.7 FITTINGS A. All connections shall be made with barb or compression type fitting connections. Fittings and dripline shall be as manufactured by the manufacturer of the dripline to ensure the integrity of the subsurface irrigation system. ' 25.1.2.11 AUTOMATIC CONTROL TIMER A. The irrigation controller (control module) shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device only. The program shall be communicated to the Control Module from the Field Transmitter via an infrared connection. The controller shall be of a module type which may be installed in a valve box underground. The controller shall function normally if submerged in water and the communication from the transmitter shall function if submerged in water. B. The control module shall be housed in an ABS plastic cabinet and shall be potted to insur e waterproof operation. The control module shall have two mounting slots for screws allowing the module to be securely mounted inside a valve box. C. The controller shall operate on one nine volt alkaline battery for one full year regardless of the number of stations utilized. The controller shall operate 1, 2, or 4 stations either sequentially or independently. D. The controller shall have three independent programs with eight start times each, station run time capability from one minute to twelve hours in one minute increments, and a seven day calendar. The ' controller shall turn on stations via latching solenoids installed on the valves. Manual operations shall be initiated by attaching the Field Transmitter to the Control Module and programming a manual start. The controller shall be capable of manual single station or manual program operation. E. The controller shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.2.12 FIELD TRANSMITTER A. The irrigation controller shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device (Field Transmitter) only. The Field Transmitter shall communicate to the Control Module via an infrared connection. ' The Field Transmitter shall be water resistant and housed in ABS plastic and have a removable, reversible protective sheath. The Field Transmitter shall operate on one 9V alkaline battery. B. The Field Transmitter shall have a large LCD screen and a seven-key programming pad. A beep ' sound shall confirm every key stroke. The screen shall automatically turn off after one minute when not in use. C. The Field Transmitter shall be capable of programming an unlimited number of UNIK Control Modules. D. The Field Transmitter shall be as manufactured by Rain Byrd Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 1 SectionlV.doc Page 33 of 126 9/9/2008 Section 1V -Technical Specifications 25.1.2.13 LATCHING SOLENOID A. The Latching Solenoid shall be supplied with an installed, filtered adapter allowing installation of the solenoid onto any Rain Bird DV, PGA, PEB, PES-B, GB, of EFB series valve. B. The Latching Solenoid shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.3 EXECUTION 25.1.3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Before work is commenced, hold a conference with the Engineer to discuss general details of the work. B. Verify dimensions and grades at job site before work is commenced. C. During the progress of the work, a competent superintendent and any assistants necessary shall be on site, all satisfactory to the Engineer. This superintendent shall not be changed, except with the consent of the Engineer. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. D. Obtain and pay for all irrigation and plumbing permits and all inspections required by outside authorities. E. All work indicated or notes on the Drawings shall be provided whether or not specifically mentioned in these Technical Special Provisions. F. If there are ambiguities between the Drawings and Specifications, and specific interpretation or clarification is not issued prior to bidding, the interpretation or clarification will be made only by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall comply with the decisions. In event the installation contradicts the directions given, the installation shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost. G. Layout of sprinkler lines shown on the Drawing is diagrammatic only. Location of sprinkler equipment is contingent upon and subject to integration with all other underground utilities. Contractor shall employ all data contained in the contract Documents and shall verify this information at the construction site to confirm the manner by which it relates to the installation. H. Do not proceed with the installation of the sprinkler system when it is apparent that obstructions or grade differences exist or if conflicts in construction details, legend, or specific notes are discovered. All such obstructions, conflicts, or discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer. 1. The disturbance of existing paving will not be permitted. Install all required sleeving prior to roadway base. 25.1.3.2 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING 25.1.3.2.1 TRENCHING -GENERAL A. Dig sides of trenches straight. Provide continuous support for pipe on bottom of trenches. Lay pipe to uniform grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on Drawings. B. Maintain 6 in. horizontal and minimum clearance between sprinkler lines and between all lines of other trades. SectionlV,doc Page 34 of 126 9/9/2oos ' Section IV - Technical Specifications C. Do not install sprinkler lines directly above another line of any kind. D. Maintain 6 in. vertical minimum between sprinkler lines which cross at angles of 45 degrees to 90 degrees. E. Exercise care when excavating, trenching and working near existing utilities. BACKFILLING 25.1.3 .2.2 A. All pressure supply lines (mainline) shall have 18" of fill placed over the pipe. B. Initial backrill on all lines shall be of a fine granular material with no foreign matter larger than %2 in. C. Compact backfill according to Section 125 of FDOT Specification Book, 1996 Edition. D. Do not, under any circumstances, use equipment or vehicle wheels for compacting soil. 1 E. Restore grades and repair damages where settling occurs. F. Compact each layer of fill with approved equipment to achieve a maximum density per AASHTO T 180 - latest edition. Under landscaped area, compaction shall not exceed 95% of maximum density. j G. Compaction shall be obtained by the use of mechanical tampers or approved hand tampers. When hand tampers are used, the materials shall be deposited in layers not more than six (6") inches thick. The hand tampers shall be suitable for this purpose and shall have a face area of not more than 100 square inches. Special precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to the irrigation system piping and adjacent utilities. 25.1.3.2.3 ROUTING OF PIPING: A. Routing of pressure and non-pressure piping lines are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. B. Coordinate specimen trees and shrubs with routing of lines. 1. Planting locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and piping locations. 2. Report to Owner any major deviation from routing indicated. C. Conform to Drawings layout without offsetting the various assemblies from the pressure supply line. ' D. Layout drip tube and make any minor adjustments required due to differences between site and Drawings. Any such deviations in layout shall be within the intent of the original Drawings, and without additional cost. ' E. Layout all systems using an approved staking method, and maintain the staking of approved layout. 25.1.3.3 INSTALLATION ' 25.1.3.3.1 WATER SUPPLY A. Connections to the water sources shall be at the approximate locations indicated on the Drawings. i Make minor changes caused by actual site conditions without additional cost to the Owner. 25.1.3.3.2 ASSEMBLIES A. Routing or pressure supply lines as indicated on Drawings is diagrammatic only. Install lines and required assemblies in accordance with details on Drawings. ' SectionIV.doc Page 35 of 126 9/912008 Section IV - Technical Specifications B. Do not install multiple assemblies on plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own outlet. When used, the pressure relief valve shall be the last assembly. C. Install all assemblies in accord with the respective detail Drawings and these Technical Special Provisions. D. Plastic pipe and threaded fittings shall be assembled using Teflon tape, applied to the male threads only. 25.1.3.3.3 SLEEVES: (EXISTING BY CITY OF CLEARWATER) A. The contractor shall verify the location of all existing sleeves as shown on the roadway, utility and/or irrigation plans and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies. 25.1.3.3.4 PLASTIC PIPE A. Install plastic pipe in accord with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Prepare all welded joints with manufacturer's cleaner prior to applying solvent. I . Allow welded joints as least 15 minutes setup/curing time before moving or handling. 2. Partially center load pipe in trenches to prevent arching and shifting when water pressure is on. 3. Do not permit water in pipe until a period of at least four hours has elapsed for solvent weld setting and curing, unless recommended otherwise by solvent manufacturer. C. Curing 1. When the temperature is above 80 degrees F., allow soluble weld joints at least 24 hours curing time before water is introduced under pressure. D. Flushing the system: 1. After all sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, open the control valves and flush out the system with a full head of water. E. Installing piping under existing pavement: 1. Piping under existing pavement maybe installed by jacking & boring. 2. Secure permission from the Engineer before cutting or breaking any existing pavement. All repairs and replacements shall be approved by Engineer and shall be accomplished at no additional cost. 25.1.33.5 CONTROLLERS A. Install all automatic controllers as shown in the plans. 1. The location of all controllers shall be approved by the Engineers representative prior to installation. 25.1.3.3.6 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. Install at sufficient depth to provide not more than 6 in., nor less than 4 in. cover from the top of the valve to finish grade. B. Install valves in a plumb position with 24 in. minimum maintenance clearance from other equipment, 3 feet minimum from edges of sidewalks, buildings, and walls, and no closer than 7 feet from the back of curb or edge of pavement along roadways. SectionIV.doc Page 36 of 126 919/2008 1 Section IV -- Technical Specifications C. Contractor shall adjust the valve to provide the proper flow rate or operating pressure for each ' sprinkler zone. 25.1.3.3.7 GATE VALVES A. Install where indicated and with sufficient clearance from other materials for proper maintenance. B. Check and tighten valve bonnet packing before backfill. 25.2 LANDSCAPE 25.2.1 GENERAL i 25.2.1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Contract Documents shall include the Plans, Details, Specifications, Bid Proposal, Contract Agreement, including Installation Schedule, all Addenda, and Contractual and Special Conditions when required. 25.2.1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with Federal, State, Local, and other duly constituted authorities and regulatory agencies, without additional cost to the Owner in matters pertaining to codes, safety, and environmental I matters. B. Any permits for the installation or construction of any of the work included under the contract, which are required by any of the legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction, shall be arranged for by the Contractor and paid for directly by the Contractor, unless otherwise agreed upon in writing. 25.2.1.3 SCOPE OF WORK A. All provisions of Contract, including General and Special Provisions and Plans, apply to the work specified in this Section. The Scope of Work includes everything for and incidental to executing and completing all landscape work shown on the Plans, Schedules, Notes and as specified herein. B. Furnish and provide all labor, plants and materials tools and equipment necessary to prepare the soil for plantings, to install and care for all plant materials (including finish grading if necessary); to remove and/or transplant existing plants if indicated; to furnish, plant, fertilize, guy and brace, water, mulch and prune all new plant materials; and to execute all other Work as described herein or indicated on the Plans. C. Work under this Section shall include labor and materials for final grading and raking to prepare the site for sodding, sprigging, or seeding, so finished lawn or playing field will appear even and uniform, will drain adequately, and will comply with the intent of the landscape drawings. D. Initial maintenance of landscape materials as specified in this document. 25.2.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Landscape work shall be contracted to a single firm specializing in landscape work, who shall in turn subcontract no more than 40% of the work specified. All subcontractors under the control of the Contractor involved in the completion of the landscape work, shall be made known to the Owner and the Landscape Architect prior to their commencement of work on the project. ' SectionIV.doc Page 37 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications B. All work of this Section shall conform to the highest standard of landscape practices. C. The Plant Material Schedule included with these Plans is provided only for the Contractor's convenience; it shall not be construed as to conflict or predominate over the Plans. If conflict between the Plans and Specifications exists, the Plan shall predominate and be considered the controlling document. D. During this work, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining safety among persons in his employ in accordance with the standards set by The Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (and all subsequent amendments). Owner and Landscape Architect shall be held harmless from any accident, injury or any other incident resulting from compliance or non-compliance with these standards. E. The Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate with all other trades whose work is built into or affects the work in this Section. F. All appropriate utility companies and agencies shall be contacted 72 hours prior to excavation. Call "One Call" at 1-800-432-4770. G. The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and all existing conditions affecting the work, such as_ soil, obstructions, existing trees, utilities, etc. Report any conditions in conflict with the work to the Landscape Architect. 25.2.1.5 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor is required to submit prior to the expiration, of the required maintenance period, two copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by the Owner for maintenance of landscape work for a period of one year. B. Furnish unit prices for all plant materials and inert materials, including labor for all specified work. 25.2.1.6 ALTERNATES, ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, SUBSTITUTIONS A. If there are additions/alternates included in these Plans and Specifications, the Contractor must propose prices to accomplish the work stated as additions/alternates at the time of bidding. B. The Owner, through his Project Representative, reserves the right to add or deduct any of the work stated herein without rendering the Contract void. C. The Contractor must have written approval by the Project Representative for any substitutions not previously agreed to in the purchase agreement: installation without approval is entirely at the Contractor's risk. D. All material acquired through additions or substitutions shall be subject to all conditions and warranties stated herein. 25.2.1.7 ABBREVIATIONS/DEFINITIONS O.A. or HT.: The over-all height of the plant measured from the ground to the natural, untied state of the majority of the foliage, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. CT: Clear trunk is measured from the ground to the bottom of the first leaf or frond stem with no foliage from ground to specified height. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear trunk measurement includes the "nut" at the base of the fronds. SectionIV.doc Page 38 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications C. W.: Clear wood is measured from the ground to the bottom of the base of the lowest leaf sheath or boot, trimmed in a natural manner. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear woad measurement does not include the "nut" at the base of the fronds. SPR.: Spread, branches measured in natural untied position to the average crown diameter, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. ST. TR.: Straight trunk. MIN.: Minimum. GAL.: Gallon container size, i.e., 1 gallon, 3 gallon, 7 gallon, etc. O. C.: On center, distance between plant centers. DIA.: Diamete r. LVS : Leaves. D.B.H.: Diameter or caliper of main trunk of tree as measured at breast height at 4-1/2 feet above grade. CAL.: Caliper, the outside diameter of up to a four inch tree is measured six inches above grade, larger trees are measured at 12 inches above grade. B&B: Balled and burlapped in accordance with horticultural standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. PPP: Plants per pot. FG: Field grown. STD.: Standard, single, straight trunk. Owner: To be known as that entity which holds title or control to the premises on which the work is performed. Owner's Representative: Owner's on-site representative shall be responsible for approval of quantity and quality of materials specified and execution of installation. Contractor: Shall refer to that person or enterprise commonly known as the Landscape Contractor. Sectioniv.doc Page 39 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications Landscape Architect: This person or firm is the responsible representative of the Owner who produces the landscape Plans and Specifications. 25.2.1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 25.2.1.8.1 PLANT MATERIALS A. Provide container grown or, if appropriate, freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior to delivery. Do not bend or bind trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark, break branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. If plant delivery is made in open vehicles, the entire load shall be suitably covered. B. All plants are to be handled at all times so that roots or root balls are adequately protected from sun, , cold, or drying winds. No root balls for trees and container plants that have been cracked or broken shall be planted except upon special approval. Plants shall not be pulled by the tops or stems, nor handled in a rough or careless manner at any time. C. Balled and burlapped plants shall be moved with firm, natural, balls of soil, not less than 1 foot diameter of ball to every 1 inch caliper of trunk; root ball depth shall not be less than 2/3 of root ball diameter. B & B plants which cannot be planted upon delivery shall have their root balls covered with moist soil or mulch. D. Trees shall be dug with adequate balls, burlapped, and wire bound if needed. Root pruning to be done a minimum of 4 weeks before removal from the field and planting at the site. Root balls may not be encased in "grow bags" or other synthetic material, except plastic shrink wrap for transport only. E. Remove all fronds form sabal palms prior to planting, but leave a minimum of 12 inches of new frond growth above the bud. Do not damage bud. On all other palms, only a minimum of palm fronds shall be removed from crown to facilitate moving and handling. Clear trunk shall be determined after minimum.fronds have been removed. Boots shall be removed from trunk unless otherwise specified. Palms shall be planted within 24 hours of delivery. F. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and cover to keep the roots moist. G. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof tag bearing , legible designation of botanical and common name. H. Sod: Time delivery so that sod will be placed within twenty-four (24) hours after stripping. Protect sod against drying and breaking by covering palettes of sod or placing in a shaded area. 25.2.1.9 JOB CONDITIONS 1 25.2.1.9.1 ACCEPTANCE OF JOB CONDITIONS. A. The Contractor shall examine the sub-grade, verify elevations, observe the conditions under which work is to be performed and notify the Landscape Architect or Project Representative in writing of unsatisfactory conditions prior to beginning work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Landscape Architect. Start of work shall indicate acceptance of conditions and full responsibility for the completed work. Sectioniv.doc Page 40 of 126 9/9/2008 1 Section 1V - Technical Specifications B. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become available, working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work and following the approved schedule. If seasonal limitations apply, notify the Landscape Architect for adjustments to the Schedule. C. Determine locations of all underground utilities and review for conflicts with planting procedures. D. When adverse conditions to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, drainage conditions or obstruction, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect in writing prior to planting. E. Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to the planting of lawns, protecting lawn trees and promptly repairing damages from planting operations. 25.2.1.9.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK A. The work shall be carried out to completion with the utmost speed. Immediately upon award of contract, the Contractor shall prepare a construction schedule and furnish a copy to the Owner's Representative and/or the Landscape Architect for approval. The Contractor shall carry out the work in accordance with the approved schedule. B. If the Contractor incurs unforeseen costs, such as overtime hours, holidays, etc. in order to complete the work within the time stated in the Contract, and/or to maintain the progress schedule, all said costs shall be home by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. I C. The Owner's Representative's may request in writing work stoppage. Upon written request from the Owner's Representative, the Landscape Contractor shall suspend delivery of material and stop all work for such a period as deemed necessary by the Owner, the Owner's Representative, or the General Contractor with respect to any additional costs which may result from work stoppage. 25.2.1-9.3 UTILITIES A. The Contractor shall perform work in a manner which will avoid conflicts with utilities. Hand excavate, as required, to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities. Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties concerned. 25.2.2 PRODUCTS 25.2.2.1 MATERIALS 25.2.2.1.1 PLANT MATERIALS: NOMENCLATURE ' A. Plant species, sizes, etc. shall be per Plans and Specifications on Plant Material Scheduled. Nomenclature is per Manual of Cultivated Plant, Standard Encyclopedia of Horticulture, L.H. Bailey, or Standardized Plant Names Dictionary, American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature (latest editions), or conforms with names accepted in the nursery trade. 25.2.2.1.2 PLANT MATERIALS: QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide healthy, vigorous stock grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in the locality of the project. Plants shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the species and be sound, healthy, vigorous and free from insect pests or their eggs, plant diseases, defects and injuries. Plants shall be well branched and densely foliated when in leaf and shall have healthy, well-developed root systems. I SectionlV.doc Page 41 of 126 9/92008 Section IV -Technical Specifications B. Trees shall be heavily branched or, in the case of palms, be heavily leafed. Some plant materials may be collected stock with the approval of the Landscape Architect. Provided tree species that have a single main trunk (central leader), unless otherwise stated. Trees that have the main trunk forming a "Y" shape or parallel branching are not acceptable. C. Plant materials shall be specified and shall be Florida 41 or better as to shape and quality for the species as outlined in Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants Part I and 11, Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services (latest edition). D. The Owner or Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect plant materials either at the place of growth or at the project site prior to planting for compliance with requirements for name variety, size quality, or designated area. E. Landscape materials shall be shipped with certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities. The Contractor shall comply with all governing regulations that are applicable to landscape materials. F. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not available, submit Landscape Architect proof of it being non-available. In such event, if the Landscape Architect designates an available source, such shall be acquired from designated source. When authorized, a written change order for substitute material will be made by adjustment to Contract amount. G. Height and/or width of trees shall be measured from ground up; width measurement shall be normal crown spread of branches with plants in the normal position. This measurement shall not include immediate terminal growth. All measurements shall be taken after pruning for specified sizes. All trees and shrubs shall conform to measurements specified in the plant material schedule, except that plant material larger than specified may be used with the approval of the Owner or Landscape Architect; with no increase to the Contract price. Plant materials shall not be pruned prior to delivery. H. Plant Material shall be symmetrical, typical for variety and species. Plants used where symmetry is required shall be matched as nearly as possible. 1. Balled and burlapped plants shall have firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the feeding root system necessary for full development of the plant and to conform with the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. Root balls and tree trunks shall not be damaged by improper binding and B & B procedures. J. Container-grown plants may be substituted for balled and burlapped plants or vice-versa provided the quality is equal or better than specified and the Landscape Architect approves the substitution. K. Container grown stock shall have been grown in containers for at least four months, but not over two years. If requested, samples must be shown to prove no root bound condition exists. 25.2.2.1.3 GRASSES: SOD OR SEED A. Sod or seed (as/if specified) shall be a species as stated on the Plan. Solid sod shall be of even thickness and with a good root structure, 95% free of noxious week, freshly mowed before cutting, and in healthy condition when laid. It must not be stacked more than 24 hours before laying and it must be grown in soil compatible to that in which it will be installed. Sod must be kept moist prior to and after installation. B. Seed shall be delivered to the site in unopened bags with certification tags in place. Purity, germination and weed content shall be as certification requirements. SectionIV.doc Page 42 of 126 9/9/2008 Ll 25.2.2.1.4 MULCH A. Mulch shall be 100% Grade "B" shredded cypress bark mulch, thoroughly mixed with a pre- emergence weed killer according to the label directions as specified on the plan. B. Install mulch to an even depth of 3" before compaction. 25.2.2.1.5 FERTILIZER Section IV - Technical Specifications A. Granular fertilizer shall be uniform in composition; free flowing and suitable for application with approved equipment; received at the site in full, labeled, unopened bags bearing the name, trade name or trademark and warranty of the producer; fully conforming to State of Florida fertilizer laws. B. All fertilizer shall bear the manufacturer's statement of analysis and shall contain the appropriate minimum amounts of elements for the type of use specified herein. C. Agriform 20-10-5 fertilizer tablets or approved equal, shall be placed in planting pit for all plant materials at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. D. Ground cover and annual areas shall receive fertilization with Osmocote Time Release Fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. E. For sod and seeded areas, fertilize with a complete granular fertilizer on Bahia and St. Augustine grass at the rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per one thousand (1,000) square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 50% of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release forth. The ratio of nitrogen to potash will be 1:1 or 2:1 for complete fertilizer formulations. Phosphorus shall be no more than t/4 the nitrogen level. They shall also contain magnesium and micronutrients (i e manganese iron zinc er etc co ) . . , , , pp , . . 25.2.2 .1.6 STAKES AND GUYS I A. For trees, approved plastic or rubber guys shall be used between the stakes and the tree trunk. Galvanized steel guy wire shall not be used. B. Stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees over 2" caliper. Stakes shall be 2" x 2" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees 2" caliper and under. A minimum of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree shall be used. C. For single trunk palms, stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock, with a minimum of 3 stakes per palm. Batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5 - 2" x 4" by 16" wood connected with two - 3/4" steel bands shall be used around the palm trunk. D. Other tree staking systems may be acceptable if approved. 25.2.2 .1.7 PLANTING SOIL 1 11 A. Unless stated on the plans or in the specifications, install plant material in tilled and loosened native soil backfill. It is the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to test, prior to planting and at no additional cost to the Contract, any soils which may be unsuitable for the vigorous growth of plants. Unsuitable conditions shall be reported to the Landscape Architect immediately in writing. B. When required, planting soil media shall be provided by the Contractor and shall consist of 1/3 peat and 2/3 sandy loam, with no lumps over I". C. Backfill and clean fill dirt provided by the Contractor shall be in a loose, friable soil. There must be slight acid reaction to the soil (about 6.0 -- 6.5 pH) with no excess of calcium or carbonate, and it Section[V.doc Page 43 of 126 9/9/2008 11 Section IV -Technical Specifications shall be free from excess weeds, clay lumps, stones, stumps, roots and toxic substances or any other materials that might be harmful to plant growth or a hindrance to grading, planting, and maintenance procedures and operations. No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used as fill dirt. D. Bed preparation for annual beds under 1 gallon container size shall consist of 3" of Florida peat or other approved organic soil amendment spread over full length and width of planting area. Rototil organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into native soil. 25.2.2.1.8 SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Terra-Sorb AG or approved equal, soil amendment shall be mixed with native or planting soil for all trees, shrubs, ground cover, and annuals according to manufacturer's recommended application rates and methods, if specified on the Plans. 25.2.2.1.9 TREE PROTECTION A. Wood fencing shall be 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock with flagging on horizontal members. Space vertical members 6 feet to 8 feet on center. The barricade shall be placed so as to protect the critical protection zone area, which is the area surrounding a tree within a circle described by a radius of one foot for each inch of the tree's diameter at breast height DBH at 4 - '/Z feet above grade. 25.2.2.1.10 ROOT BARRIER SYSTEM A. Root barrier fabric shall be installed when specified in the plans and/or specifications for protection of adjacent paved surfaces according to specific product name or equal. Install as directed by the manufacturer. 25.2.2.1.11 PACKAGED MATERIALS A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer, Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the site. 25.2.2.1.12 PESTICIDES A. Pesticides shall be only approved, safe brands applied according to manufacturer's directions. 25.2.3 EXECUTION 25.2.3.1 PREPARATION 25.2.3.1.1 OBSTRUCTIONS BELOW GROUND A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate and mark all underground utilities, irrigation lines and wiring prior to commencement of the work. B. If underground construction, utilities or other obstructions are encountered in excavation of planting areas or pits, the Landscape Architect shall be immediately notified to select a relocated position for any materials necessary. SectionIV.doc Page 44 of 126 9/9/2008 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications 25.2.3.1.2 GRADING AND PREPARATION FOR PLANT MATERIALS A. All proposed landscape areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round-Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed landscape areas adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the manufacturer's specifications. B. New plant materials will not be installed until a 98% weed/turf eradication has been achieved. More than one application may be required to produce an acceptable planting bed. C. Pre-emergent herbicides are not a substitute for spray treatment of "Round-Up" or "Rodeo", and may be used only with the written approval of the Landscape Architect. D. Should any plant material in the same, or adjacent beds be damaged by these chemicals, the same size, quantity and quality of plants shall be immediately replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. E. Any necessary corrections or repairs to the finish grades shall be accomplished by the Contractor. All planting areas shall be carefully graded and raked to smooth, even finish grade, free from depressions, lumps, stones, sticks or other debris and such that they will conform to the required finish grades and provide uniform and satisfactory surface drainage without puddling. F. The Contractor shall remove debris (sticks, stones, rubbish) over 1 - '/2 inches in any dimension form individual tree, shrub and hedge pits and dispose of the excavated material off the site. 25.2.3.1.3 PREPARATION FOR ANNUAL BED PLANTING A. Prepare native subgrade by rototilling or loosening by hand methods. Spread 3 inches of Florida peat (1/3), sandy loam (1/3), or other approved organic soil amendment over the full length and width of planting area for annuals. Rototill organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into the native soil. Grade the planting bed by "crowning' to insure that surface drainage, percolation, and aeration occur at rapid rates. Add Osmocote time release fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. 25.2.3.1.4 PREPARATION FOR SEEDING AND SOD AREAS A. All proposed sod areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round-Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed sod areas adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the Manufacturer's Specifications. B. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. Loosen sub-grade of seed and sod areas to a minimum depth of 4 inches. C. Immediately prior to any turf work, the Contractor shall finish grade the soil to a smooth, even surface assuring positive drainage away from buildings and the subsequent turf flush to the tops of adjacent curbs and sidewalks. The surface shall be sloped to existing yard drains. D. A complete fertilizer shall be applied to St. Augustine or Bahia grass at a rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per 1000 square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 505 of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. Thoroughly work fertilizer into the top 4 inches of soil. E. Moisten prepared seed and sod areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil condition. r Section]V.doc Page 45 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications 25.2.3.2 INSTALLATION 25.2.3.2.1 BERM CONSTRUCTION (IF SPECIFIED) A. Install berms at location and design shown on Plans and at the height and slope indicated. Height stated is for finished berm with soil at natural compaction. B. Exact location and configuration of berms may require modification to allow proper drainage; such changes will be coordinated with the Landscape Architect. C. If shown on the Plan, construct berms using clean sandy loam fill dirt which is well-drained, free of rocks, roots, or other debris, with a soil pH of an acid Nature (about 6.0 - 6.5). No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used in berm construction. 25.2.3.2.2 LAYOUT OF PLANT MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise stipulated, plant materials shall be approximately located per the plans by scale measurements using established building, columns, curbs, screen walls, etc. as the measuring reference point. Slight shifting may be required to clear wires, prevent blockage of signage, etc. B. Shrubs and ground covers shall be located and spaced as noted on the plant material schedule (if provided), otherwise plants will be placed in the planting beds at the normally accepted spacing for each species. C. Leave an 18 inch (450 millimeters) border of mulched space between outer leaves of installed plant material and the bed line, curb, or building foundation wall for all plant sizes. D. Any necessary "minor" adjustments in the layout of planting shall be made by the Contractor with the approval of the Landscape Architect in order to conform as nearly as possible to the intent of the plans. 25.2.3.2.3 PLANTING PROCEDURES A. All shrubs, trees and ground covers or vines shall be planted in pits having vertical sides and being circular in outline. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball. B. Plants shall be set straight or plumb, in the locations shown, at such level that after settlement normal or natural relationship of the top of the root ball with the ground surface will be established. With regards to proper nursery practices, plants under certain conditions (i.e. low and wet areas) will benefit from being planted "high" with the root ball about 1 inch higher than the surrounding grade. C. All plant materials shall be fertilized with Agriform 20-10-5 planting tablets, or approved equal, at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. Agriform planting tablets shall be placed uniformly around the root mass at a depth that is between the middle and the bottom of the root mass. Application rate- I gallon 1 - 21 gram tablet 3 gallon 2 - 21 grams tablet 5 gallon 3 - 21 gram tablet 7 gallon 4 - 21 gram tablet Trees 3 tablets each %" (12 millimeters) caliper Palms 7- 21 gram tablets SectionlV.doc Page 46 of 126 9/9/2008 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications D. Native soil shall be used in back-filling plant pits or as specified. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing additional soil for building tree saucers. E. When balled and burlapped plants are set, undisturbed native soil shall be left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Remove the top 4 inches (100 millimeters) of burlap wire, and all tie-down material from the root ball. Do not remove these materials from the bottom of the root ball. Thoroughly water-in before bringing the back-fill up to the proper grade Roots of bare plants shall be properly spread out, and planting soil carefully worked in among them. Failure to comply is cause for rejection. F. Containerized plants shall be installed with undisturbed native soil left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Thoroughly water-in before bringing the backflll up to the proper grade. G. Plant spacing shall be "on center" and varies with the different plant species. Space each variety of plant equally in the planting areas. Shrubs and ground covers adjacent to straight or curved edges shall be triangular - spaced in rows parallel to those edges. Plant a minimum of 18 inches from the back of the curb to the outside edge of the plant. H. All azaleas shall be placed into a prepared bed of amended soil containing 50% weed-free Florida peat or approved equivalent. Root balls shall be scarified vertically at 120 degree angles in a triangular pattern. 1. Sabal palms may be planted deeper than normal if conditions warrant and if approved. 26.2.3.2.4 SODDING A. During periods of drought, sod shall be watered sufficiently at its origin to moisten the soil adequately to the depth to which it is to be cut. B. An application of 6-6-6, 40% organic, slow or controlled release fertilizer shall be made to all lawn areas just prior to the laying of the sod at a rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per 1,000 square feet. The ground shall be wet down before the sod is laid in place. C. Solid sod shall be laid tightly with closely abutting staggered joints with an even surface edge and sod edge, in a neat and clean manner to the edge of all the paving and shrub areas. Cut down soil level to 1 inch to 1-1/2 inches below top of walks prior to laying sod. D. Within 2 hours after installing sod and prior to rolling, irrigate the sod. Sufficient water shall be applied to wet the sod thoroughly and to wet the sod to a depth of 2 inches (50 millimeters). Watering shall be done in a manner that will avoid erosion due to the application of excessive quantities, and the watering equipment shall be a type that will prevent damage to the finished sod surface. Watering shall be repeated as necessary to keep sod moist until rooted to subgrade. E. The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed using a turf roller or other approved equipment so as to eliminate air pockets, provide a true and even surface and insure knitting without any displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of sodded areas. After the sodding operation has been completed, the edges of the area shall be smooth and shall conform to the grades indicated. F. If, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, top dressing is necessary after rolling, clean silica sand shall be used to fill voids. Evenly apply sand over the entire surface to be leveled, filling-in dips and voids and thoroughly washing into the sod areas. SectionIV.doc Page 47 of 126 9/9/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications G. On slopes steeper than 2:1 and as required, the sod shall be fastened in place with suitable wooden pins or by other approved method. 25.2.3.2.5 SEEDING A. Seed shall be installed per the specifications of the State of Florida Department of Transportation. See plan for type of seed. 25.2.3.2.6 TREE GUYING, BRACING AND STAKING A. Tree guying, staking and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor per sound nursery practices, and shall be done per details shown on the Plans. For trees, a minimum of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree at 120 degree spacing shall be used. Stakes shall be driven in at an angle, then tightened to vertical supported by approved plastic or rubber guys. Trees shall be staked with a minimum of 4 feet height of stake above grade and a minimum of 30 inches of stake below grade. B. For single trunk palms, a minimum of 3 stakes per palm at 120 degree spacing shall be used. Toenail the stakes to batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5- 2 inch x 4 inch x 16 inch wood connected with two 3/4 inch steel bands. Palms shall be staked with a minimum of 5 feet of stake above grade. C. Contractor shall remove all tree guying, staking, and bracing from trees six (6) months after the date of final acceptance of the landscape work. D. Stake only trees that require support to maintain a plumb position or are in potentially hazardous areas. 25.2.3.2.7 MULCHING A. All planting beds shall be weed-free prior to mulching. B. All curb, roadway, and bed line edges will be "trenched" to help contain the applied mulch. C. All plant beds and tree rings shall be mulched evenly with a 3 inch layer (before compaction) of 100% Grade B recycled cypress bark mulch, or other mulch as specified on the Plans or General Notes. D. Mulch shall not be placed against the trunks of plant materials or foundations of buildings. Maintain a minimum 3 inch clearance for trees and shrub trunks and a minimum 6 inch clearance for the walls of buildings. E. For beds of annual flowers, a 12 inch wide x 3 inch deep band of mulch shall be installed in front of the first row of annuals. Maintain a minimum 6 inches of non-mulched clearance from the outside edge of annuals. 25.2.3.2.8 PRUNING A. Pruning shall be done by an experienced certified Arborist to maintain the natural shape and form of the plant. B. Upon acceptance by the Owner, prune any broken branches, remove crossed branches, and branches hanging below the clear trunk of the tree. SectionIV.doc Page 48 of 126 9/9/2008 25.2.3.2.9 CLEAN-UP Section IV - Technical Specifications 1 1 A. During landscape work, store materials and equipment where directed by the Owner. B. The Contractor shall promptly remove any materials and equipment used on the job, keeping the area neat at all times. Upon completion of all planting, dispose of all excess soil and debris leaving pavements and work areas in safe and orderly condition. C. The clean-up of the site shall include the removal and proper disposal of the tree guying, staking, and bracing materials as described in specifications. 25.2.3.2.10 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall provide safeguards for the protection of workmen and others on, about, or adjacent to the work, as required under the parameters of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (O.S.H.A.) standards. B. The Contractor shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from damage. C. the Contractor shall protect the landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. D. The Contractor shall provide protection (tree barricades) for all existing trees and palms as specified. 25.2.3.2.11 REPAIR OF DAMAGES E. The Contractor shall repair all damage caused by his operations to other materials, property, or trades to a level equal in quality to the existing condition prior to damage. F. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage done by his work or employees to other materials or trades' work. Patching and replacement of damaged work may be done by others, at the Owner's direction, but the cost of sauce shall be paid by the Contractor who is responsible for the damage. 25.2.3.3 MAINTENANCE A. The Contractor shall maintain all plant materials in a first class condition from the beginning of landscape construction until Final Acceptance. B. Operations: 1. Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, watering of turf and planting beds, mowing, fertilizing, cultivation, weeding, pruning, disease and pest control, replacement of dead materials, straightening, turf or planter settlement corrections, replacement of rejected materials, staking and guying repair and tightening, wash-out repairs and regrading, and any other procedures consistent with the good horticultural practice necessary to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of all work under the Contract. Mowing shall be consistent with the recommended height per the University of Florida Cooperative Extension Service. 2. Within the warranty period, the Contractor shall notify the Owner of any maintenance practices being followed or omitted which would be detrimental to the healthy, vigorous growth of the landscape. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final watering of not less than one inch of water for all planted materials before leaving the site. SectionlV,doc Page 49 of 126 9/9/2008 11 Section 1V -Technical Specifications 25.2.3.4 INSPECTION, REJECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE 25.2.3.4.1 INSPECTION A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor will notify the Owner or the Owner's Representative that the job is ready for inspection. Within 15 days of notifications, the installation will be inspected by the Landscape Architect. A written and/or graphic inspection report will be sent to the Owner and/or Landscape Contractor. 25.2.3.4.2 REJECTION AND REPLACEMENT A. The Landscape Architect shall be final judge as to the suitability and acceptability of any part of the work. Plant material will be rejected if it does not meet the requirements set forth in Plans and Specifications. B. Replace any rejected materials immediately or within 15 days and notify the Landscape Architect that the correction has been made. 25.2.3.4.3 ACCEPTANCE A. After replacement of rejected plant material (if any) have been made, and completion of all other correction items, the Owner or Project Representative will accept the project in writing. B. Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner assumes responsibility for maintenance within the terms of the Contract. Acceptance will in no way invalidate the Contractor's warranty period. C. The Contractor's warranty period will begin after final acceptance of the project by the Owner. 1. If evidence exists of any lien or claim arising out of or in connection with default in performance of this Contract, the Owner shall have the right to retain any payment sufficient to discharge such claim and all costs in connection with discharging such claim. 2. Where the Specifications call for any stipulated item or an "approved equivalent", or in words to that effect, the Contractor shall indicate the price of the type and species specified in the proposal, giving the price to be added or deducted from his Contract price. The final selection rests with the Owner or his representative. 3. Where plants installed do not meet specifications, the Owner reserves the right to request plant replacement or an appropriate deduction from the Contract amount to compensate for the value not received from the under-specified plant materials. No additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for plants installed that exceed specifications. 25.2.3.5 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warranty all palms and trees furnished under this contract for a period of one (1) year and all shrubs for a period of six (6) months. Material which is either dead or in poor health during this period or at completion will be replaced at no charge to the Owner. Should any of the plant materials show 50% or more defoliation during the warranty period, due to the Contractor's use of poor quality or improper materials. or workmanship, the Contractor upon notice, shall replace without delay same with no additional cost to the Owner. Should any plant require replacing, the new plant shall be given the equal amount of warranty. SectionIV.doc Page 50 of 126 9/9/2008 Section 1V -Technical Specifications 26 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING ' 26.1 INTENT It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of 8" to 12" sanitary sewers by the installation of a high density polyethylene, jointless, continuous, fold and form pipe liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. 26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY fl 1 The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the fold and form liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer. 26.3 MATERIALS Pipe shall be made from P. E. 3408 polyethylene resins complying with ASTM D 3350, cell classification: P.E. 345434 D for High Density. It shall be Type 3, Grade 4, Class D, according to ASTM D 1248. The Contractor shall provide certified test results for review by the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. Material shall have a minimum thickness of SDR 32.5. Pipe specimens shall comply with the minimum property values shown below with the applicable ASTM requirements: Material Pro e ASTM Method Value HDPE Tensile Strength D 638 3,300 psi Elasticity Modulus E=113,000 psi Impact Strength D 256A 3.0 ft-lb/in Flexure Modulus E=136,000 psi Expansion Coeff. c=0.009 in/in/deg F At the time of manufacture, each lot of liner shall be reviewed for defects and tested in accordance with ASTM D 2837 and D 1693. At the time of delivery, the liner shall be homogeneous throughout, uniform in color, free of cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, or deleterious faults. The Contractor shall provide, as requested, certified test results for review by the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. The Engineer may at any time request the Contractor provide test results from field samples to the above requirements. Liner shall be marked at 5-foot intervals or less with a coded number, which identifies the manufacturer, SDR, size, material, date, and shift on which the liner was extruded. SectionlV.doc Page 51 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20 traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications of Pipe Liners, Inc. 3421 N. Causeway, Suite 321, New Orleans, LA 70002, 1-800-344-3744 or approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and/or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids. 26.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION It shall he the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean, interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants. 26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit color television, and recorded on VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of the entire periphery of the pipe. 26.6 LINER INSTALLATION Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide a tight fit to the full interior circumference of the existing sanitary sewer and shall be a continuous, jointless liner product from inside of manhole to inside of manhole. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufacturer including liner placement, reforming to fit existing pipe, pressure and heat requirements and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. OSHA requirements for installation procedures, in particular, confined spaces are to be met. 26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 100% of the area of the original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically SectionIV.doc Page 52 of 126 9/9/2008 1 ' Section IV - Technical Specifications directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will ' not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project. 26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will ' any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than a eight hour period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims. 26.9 PAYMENT Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation, bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, etc, to provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems. 27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS New driveways or existing black top driveways that must be broken back in widening the pavement (remove only enough to allow adequate grade for access to the street) shall be constructed or replaced in accordance with the specifications for paving the street with the exception that the base shall be six (6) inches. Use Section 23 G Asphaltic Concrete as specified for the street paving. When finished surface of existing drive is gravel, replace ment shall be of like material. Payment shall be the same as Plant Mix Driveways. 27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be the number of square yard of Plant Mix Driveways in place and accepted. 27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square yard for Plant Mix Driveways as measured above, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. ' 28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS The State of Florida has imposed strict requirements on Solid Wastes Handlers to decrease the generation of solid waste products and in particular to increase the amount of recycle products. In this regard, the City is required to determine the monthly total tonnage of all construction debris which is recycled in this contract. A recycled material is any material reused in any manner which diverts its alternative disposal to a publicly assessable landfill or by incineration. If a material, such as clean earth, is not normally disposed to a landfill or incineration, then it is not to be considered a recyclable material. The Contractor is required to include in each request for payment the total tonnage of materials which were recycled by the contractor during the contract period for which the payment request is made. Any cost to the contractor for the development and submittal of this information is to be included in the contract items provided in the original contract proposal. I SectionIV.doc Page 53 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 29 CONCRETE CURBS Concrete Curbs shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete curbs shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 100 feet, and scored joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 10 feet. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete curbs. 29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be lineal feet of curb in place and accepted. 29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot of curb, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS Concrete sidewalks shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans or herein specified. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete sidewalks shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum width of four feet (4'). Concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum thickness of four inches (4"), except at driveway crossings where a minimum thickness of six inches (6") is required. Also, 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement is required for all sidewalk that crosses driveways. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals of not more than 100 hundred feet, and scoring marks shall be made every 5 feet. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. 30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS Concrete driveways, whether new construction or replacement, shall be a minimum of six (6) inches in thickness with 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement and a minimum horizontal distance between expansion joints of no less than four (4) feet measured in any direction. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete sidewalks and driveways. 30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square feet of 4" concrete sidewalk, 6" concrete sidewalk, and 6" concrete driveways in place and accepted. Section]V.doc Page 54 of 126 9/9/2008 1 I Section IV - Technical Specifications 30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square foot for each item as measured above, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, welded wire mesh where required, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 31 SODDING Unless otherwise noted herein, the contractor shall place all sod, either shown on the plans or at the direction of the Engineer, in conformance with Sections 575, 981, 982 and 983 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The area for sod application shall be loosened and excavated to a suitable depth and finished to a grade compatible with existing grass and structures. Sod shall be placed with edges in close contact and shall be compacted to uniform finished grade with a sod roller immediately after placement. In sloped areas, the sod shall be graded and placed so as to prohibit erosion and undermining of the adjacent sidewalk. No sod that has been cut for more than 72 hours can be used unless authorized by the Engineer in advance. The sod shall be thoroughly watered immediately after placement. The Contractor shall continue to water sod as needed and/or directed by the Engineer as indicated by sun exposure, soil, heat and rain conditions, to establish and assure growth, until termination of the contract. Dead sod, or sod not acceptable to the Engineer, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional compensation. Any questions concerning the type of existing sod shall be determined by the Engineer. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, payment for sod (including labor, equipment, materials, placement, rolling, watering, etc.) shall be included in other bid items. Payment for these associated bid items may be withheld until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. When this work is given as a separate bid item, it shall cover all labor, equipment and materials, (including water) required for this work and shall be paid for on the basis of each square foot in place and accepted. No payment for sod shall be made until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. 32 SEEDING t 1 Seed, or seed and mulch, shall only be used when specified for certain demolition projects. The seed and/or mulch shall be placed as called for on the plans in the following manner. The area to be seeded shall be brought to the required line and grade, fertilized and seeded in basic conformance with the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications Sections 570, 981, 982 and 983. However, no wildflower seed shall be used, and Argentine Bahia Seed shall be used instead of Pensacola Bahia. No sprigging will be required. Also, the addition of 20 lb. of Rye Seed (to total 60 lb. of seed per acre) will be required during the stated periods. It is also required that the Contractor maintain said seed until growth is assured. When this work is given as a bid item, the item shall cover all labor, material, equipment (including water), required for this work, and shall be paid for on the basis of each square yard in place and accepted. If called for on the plans, but not shown as a bid item, then the cost of such work as stated above shall be included in the cost of other work. 33 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS. CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES For details on specific design of a type of storm structure refer to Part B Index Numbers 200 to 235. When required, inlets, catch basins or other structures shall be constructed according to the plans and applicable parts of the specifications, Section Numbers 7, 8, & 9, and as approved by the Engineer. Said 5ectionIV.doc Page 55 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications structures shall be protected and saved from damage by the elements or other causes until acceptance of the work. 33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the Index Numbers 201 and 202. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semi circular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be built up with brick and mortar on top of concrete base. The storm structure floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of the manholes. The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. In cases where a storm pipe extends inside a structure, the excess pipe will be cut off with a concrete saw and shall not be removed with a sledge hammer. 33.2 PRECAST TYPE The manhole base shall be set on a pad of dry native sand approximately five inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing. Precast Manholes and Junction Boxes: The Contractor may substitute precast manholes and junction boxes in lieu of cast in place units unless otherwise shown on the plans. Precast Inlets will not be acceptable. When precast units are substituted, the construction of such units must be in accordance with ASTM C 478, or the standard specifications at the manufacturers option. Precast structures must also meet the requirement that on the lateral faces, either inside or outside, the distance between precast openings for pipe or precast opening and top edge of precast structure be no less than wall thickness. A minimum of four courses of brick will be provided under manhole ring so that future adjustment of manhole lid can be accommodated. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Manhole using O ring between precast sections will not be acceptable for storm structures. 33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for Junction Boxes, Manholes or other structures shall be on a unit basis. 34 MATERIAL USED This article not used. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 23 - MATERIAL USED. 35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS This article not used. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 24 - CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. 36 STREET SIGNS The removal, covering or relocation of street signs by the Contractor is PROHIBITED. SectionIV.doc . Page 56 of 126 9/9/2008 1 ' Section IV - Technical Specifications All street signs shall be removed, covered or relocated by the City's Traffic Engineering Division in accordance with Sections 700, 994, 995, and 996 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). ' The Contractor shall notify the City's Traffic Engineering Division a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the proposed sign relocation, covering or removal. 37 AUDIOIVIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS 37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIONIDEO RECORDING Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio/video recording taken along the entire length of the Project including all affected project areas. Streets, easements, rights-of-way, lots or construction sites within the Project must be recorded to serve as a record of a pre-construction conditions. 37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING The video recordings shall not be made more than twenty-one (21) days prior to construction in any area. 37.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS i The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer. The color audio videotapes shall be prepared by a responsible commercial firm known to be skilled and regularly engaged in the business of ' pre-construction color audio-video recording documentation. 37.4 EQUIPMENT All equipment, accessories, materials and labor to perform this service shall be furnished by the Contractor. The total audio video system shall reproduce bright; sharp, clear pictures with accurate colors and shall be free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection. The audio portion of the recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with proper volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances, audio video coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional wheeled vehicles. Such coverage shall be obtained by walking. ' 37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO Each recording shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by the general location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording of each video shall be a corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio recording, exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in viewer orientation and in any needed 1 identification, differentiation, clarification, or objective description of the features being shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio recording shall also be free from any conversations. 37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the date and time of recording. The date information shall contain the month, day and year. The time information shall contain the hour, minutes and seconds. Additional information shall be displayed periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name, contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent information shall appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen. ' Camera pan, tilt, zoom-in and zoom out rates shall be sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects will be clearly viewed during videotape playback. In addition, all other camera and recording systenn controls, such as lens focus and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be ' SectionIV.doc Page 57 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications properly controlled or adjusted to maximize picture quality. The construction documentation shall be recorded in SP mode. 37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer orientation. To this end, overall establishing views of all visible house and business addresses shall be utilized. In areas where the proposed construction location will not be readily apparent to the videotape viewer, highly visible yellow flags shall be placed, by the Contractor, in such a fashion as to clearly indicate the proposed centerline of construction. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used as conveyances for the recording system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the ground shall not exceed 10 feet. The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport of the camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture. 37.8 LIGHTING All recording shall be done during time of good visibility. No taping shall be done during precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when sufficient sunlight is present to properly illuminate the subjects of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of those subjects. 37.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be directly proportional to the number, size and value of the surface features within that construction areas zone of influence. The rate of speed in the general direction of travel of the vehicle used during taping shall not exceed forty-four (44) feet per minute. 37.10 VIDEO LOGIINDEX All videotapes shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified by videotape number and project title. Each videotape shall have a log of that videotape's contents. The log shall describe the various segments of coverage contained on the video tape in terms of the names of the streets or location of easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, video unit counter numbers, engineering survey or coordinate values (if reasonably available) and the date. 37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE Tape coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of influence of construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, drainage system features, mailboxes, landscaping, culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc. within the area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the existence of any faults, fractures, or defects. Taped coverage shall be limited to one side of the Site, street, easement or right of way at any one time. 37.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES The cost to complete the requirements under this section shall be included in the contract items provided in the proposal sheet. There is no separate pay item for this work. SectionIV.doc Page 58 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL 38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty (30) calendar days unless otherwise authorized by the City Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by mulches such as straw, hay, filter fabric, seed and mulch, sod, or some other permanent vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any portion of a project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with ' established permanent soil stabilization measures per the original site plan, whether by impervious surface or landscaping. 38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all times by on-site drainage controls which prevent erosion of the stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required, depending upon their location and the expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In no case shall an unstabilized stockpile remain after thirty (30) calendar days. 38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS During construction, all storm sewer inlets in the vicinity of the project shall be protected by sediment traps such as secured hay bales, sod, stone, etc., which shall be maintained and modified as required by ' construction progress, and which must be approved by the City Engineer before installation. 38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES Sediment basins and traps, perimeter berms, filter fences, berms, sediment barriers, vegetative buffers and other measures intended to trap sediment and/or prevent the transport of sediment onto adjacent properties, or into existing water bodies; must be installed, constructed, or, in the case of vegetative buffers, protected from disturbance, as a first step in the land alteration process. Such systems shall be fully operative and inspected by the City before any other disturbance of the site begins. Earthen structures including but not limited to berms, earth filters, dams or dikes shall be stabilized and protected from drainage damage or erosion within one week of installation. 38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS ' Areas of 3 acres or more shall be required to have temporary sedimentation basins as a positive remedy against downstream siltation and will be shown and detailed on construction plans. During development, permanent detention areas may be used in place of silt basins, p rovided they are maintained to the satisfaction of the City. The Contractor will be required to prohibit discharge of silt through the outfall structure during ' construction of any detention area and will be required to clean out the detention area before installing any permanent subdrain pipe. In addition, permanent detention areas must be totally cleaned out and operating properly at final inspection and at the end of the one year warranty period. When temporary sedimentation basins are used, they shall be capable at all times of contain-ing at least one (1) cubic foot of sediment for each one hundred (100) square feet of area tributary to the basin. Such capacity shall be maintained throughout the project by regular removal of sediment from the basin. I r SectionIV.doc Page 59 of 126 9/9/2008 Section IV -'T'echnical Specifications 38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES Land alteration and construction shall be minimized in both permanent and intermittent waterways and the immediately adjacent buffer of 25 feet from top of bank of the waterways and the buffer area whenever possible, and barriers shall be used to prevent access. Where in channel work cannot be avoided, precautions must be taken to stabilize the work area during land alteration, development and/or construction to minimize erosion. If the channel and buffer area are disturbed during land alteration, they must be stabilized within three (3) calendar days after the in channel work is completed. Silt curtains or other filter/siltation reduction devices must be installed on the downstream side of the in channel alteration activity to eliminate impacts due to increased turbidity. Wherever stream crossings are required, properly sized temporary culverts shall be provided by the contractor and removed when construction is completed. The area of the crossing shall be restored to a condition as nearly as possible equal to that which existed prior to any construction activity. 38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS All swales, ditches and channels leading from the site shall be sodded within three (3) days of excavation. All other interior swales, etc., including detention areas will be sodded prior to issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy. 38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION The construction of underground utility lines and other structures shall be done in accordance with the following standards: a. No more than 400 lineal feet of trench shall be open at any one time; b. Wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be cast to the uphill side of trenches. Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the slope of any stream, channel, road ditch or waterway. 38.9 MAINTENANCE All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially after each rainfall and will be cleaned out and/or repaired as required. 38.10 COMPLIANCE Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fine and/or more stringent enforcement procedures such as (but not limited to) issuance of a "Stop Work Order". City of Clearwater Standard Detail Drawings No. 601 and 607 are examples of accepted methods that may be used or required to control erosion and siltation. SectionlV.doc Page 60 of 126 9/9/2008 1 ' Section IV - Technical Specifications City of Clearwater - Erosion Control This notice is to inform the prime contractor that the City of Clearwater holds them responsible for soil erosion control on their site. ' The City of Clearwater Engineering Department has the responsibility to minimize the amount of soil erosion into the City's streets, storm sewers and waterways. The construction of a new residence or commercial site and major remodeling of an existing site creates a potential for soil erosion. These instances are usually the result of contractors and subcontractors accessing the property with equipment or construction materials. Then rain storms redistribute the eroded soil into the adjacent streets, storm systems and waterways. When erosion takes place, a City Inspector will place a correction notice at the site. The procedure will be as follows: 1 st occurrence = Warning 2nd occurrence $32 reinspection fee 3rd occurrence - $80 reinspecion fee 4th occurrence - Stop work order Dependent on the severity of the erosion, the City's Engineering Department may elect to rectify the erosion problem and charge the contractor accordingly. The attached drawings and details are recommendations for the contractor to use as means to support the site from eroding. The contractor may elect to shovel and sweep the street daily or on an as needed basis. However, erosion must be held in check. If the contractor would like to meet with a City inspector on any particular site, please contact Construction Services at 462-6126 or Planning & Development Services at 562-4741. Erosion Control Required - City of Clearwater's Code of Ordinances requires erosion control on all land development projects. Erosion control must be in place and maintained throughout the job. Failure to do so may result in additional costs and time delays to the permit holder. ' Contact Engineering Department with specific questions at 562-4750. 1 1 SectionrV.doc Page 61 of 126 9/9x1008 1 U O n rr U L H C 0 wZ po w O? W Z O w r? U p w? H? U w H H ? o o?? -let ? ZOO o ?? W U W ??x r! w w Z Z pvn w w c p o a r, C a cn ° o a o?A ? Cno UUa .? w?H OU rl 'Ct' ? n b N N W ? U N O a w z H O U ? A U ? U z a W W 4. O L CO O G U W ? C O ? 3 cd T p`"p O 'G F N C U C •a N G U Q H z nn p.., o a w Q a`?i a. aUi ¢' w u V H w O O z 0 F1 Q a 0 5 00 C) w O N a U 0 7 1 11 1 1 Section IV -- Technical Specifications 39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING The tie in locations for utility laterals of water, sanitary sewer, and gas shall be plainly marked on the back of the curb. Marking placed on the curb shall be perpendicular with respect to the curb of the tie in location on the utility lateral. Marks shall not be placed on the curb where laterals cross diagonally under the curb. The tie in location shall be the end of the utility lateral prior to service connection. Markings shall be uniform in size and shape and colors in conformance with the code adopted by the American Public Works Association as follows= SAFETY RED Electric power, distribution & transmission Municipal Electric Systems HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY YELLOW Gas Distribution and Transmission Oil Distribution and Transmission Dangerous Materials, Produce Lines, Steam Lines SAFETY ALERT ORANGE Telephone and Telegraph Systems Police and Fire Communications Cable Television SAFETY PRECAUTION BLUE Water Systems Slurry Pipe Lines SAFETY GREEN Sewer Systems LAVENDER RECLAIMED WATER WHITE PROPOSED EXCAVATION Marks placed on curbs shall be rectangular in shape and placed with the long dimension perpendicular to the flow line of the curb. Marks placed on valley gutter and modified curb shall be 6-inch x 3-inch and placed at the back of the curb. Marks placed on State Road and vertical curb shall be 4-inch X 2-inch and be placed on the curb face. 40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE This article not used. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 21 --- AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE. ' 41 POTABLE WATERMAINS. RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND APPURTENANCES 41.1 SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, materials and equipment to perform all operations in connection with the construction of water mains and appurtenances including clearing, excavation, trenching, backfilling and clean up. ' SectionIV.doc Page 63 of 128 9192008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 41.2 MATERIALS 41.2.1 GENERAL Materials, equipment and supplies furnished and permanently incorporated into the project shall be of first quality in every respect and shall be constructed and finished to high standards of workmanship. Materials shall be suitable for service intended, shall reflect modern design and engineering and shall be fabricated in a first class workmanlike manner. All materials, equipment and supplies shall be new and shall have not been in service at any time previous to installation, except as required in tests or incident to installation. Machined metal surfaces, exposed bearings and glands shall be protected against grit, dirt, chemical corrosion and other damaging effects during shipment and construction. 41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS 41.2.2.1 DUCTILE IRON PIPE Ductile Iron Pipe shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision. Pipe thickness class, wall thickness and working pressure shall conform to the following table: Size Class Thickness (In.) Rated Water Working Pressure (PSI) 4" 51 0.26 350 6" 50 0.25 350 8" 50 0.27 350 12" 50 0.31 350 The trench laying condition shall be Type 2, Flat bottom trench backfill lightly consolidated to centerline of pipe. Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision. Pipe shall be asphalt coated on the outside and standard cement lined and sealed coated with approved bituminous seal coat in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4 80 or latest revision. 41.2.2.2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe 4-inch through 8-inch shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C900 or latest revision and the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Standard D 2241 and PVC Resin Compound conforming to ASTM Specification D 1784. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe shall have the same O.D. as Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe and be compatible for use without special adapters with Cast Iron Fittings. Pipe dimension ratio, working pressure and laying length shall conform to the following table: Section]V.doc Page 64 of 128 9/92008 1 Section 1V - Technical Specifications Size Dimension Ratio (OD/Thick.) Rated Water Working Pressure (PSI) Laying Length (Ft) 4 18 150 20 6 18 150 20 8 18 150 20 Pipe larger than 8-inch shall be ductile iron. The City Engineer reserves the right to require the use of ductile iron in sizes 4-inch through 8-inch when needed due to laying conditions or usage. The bell of 4-inch and larger PVC pipe shall consist of an integral wall section with a solid cross section elastomeric ring which meets the requirements of ASTM D 1869. ' Each length of pipe shall bear identification that will remain legible during normal handling, storage and installation and so designate the testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe material for potable water service. ' All polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be laid with two (2) strands of insulated 12 gauge A.W.G. solid strand copper wire taped to the top of each joint of pipe with about 18 inches between each piece of tape. It is to be installed at every valve box through a 2-inch PVC pipe to 12-inches minimum above the top of the concrete slab. The 2-inch PVC pipe shall be the same length as the adjustable valve box, and the 2-inch PVC pipe shall be plugged with a 2-inch removable brass plug with recessed nut. This wire is to be continuous with splices made only by direct bury splice kit (3M or equal) approved by the Engineer. This wire is to be secured to all valves, tees and elbows. 41.2.2.3 FITTINGS AND JOINTS Fitting from 4-inch through 16-inch in size will be compact ductile iron cast in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C153/A 21.53 with mechanical joint bells. Bolts, nuts and gaskets shall be in ' accordance with requirements of ANSI/AWWA C153/A 21.53. The working pressure rating shall be 350 P.S.I. Ductile iron fittings shall be coated and lined in accordance with require requirements of ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4. Mechanical joint glands shall be ductile iron in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C111/A 21.11. When reference is made to ANSI/AWWA Standards, the latest revisions apply. Only those fittings and accessories that are of domestic (USA) manufacture will be acceptable. ' 41.2.2.4 RESTRAINT Restraint of plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., shall be accomplished by the use of approved mechanical restraining rings or glands installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants shall be restrained by the use of swivel connecting joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants shall be used only where hydrant runout length precludes the use of swivel joint ' connectors. 41.2.2.5 PIPE WITHIN CASING ' All pipe placed within casings shall be slip joint ductile iron restrained by the use of restraining gaskets designed for use with the particular joint being installed and have properly sized casing spacers installed on the pipe so that the pipe will be centered within the casing. Each end of the ' SectionlV.doc Page 65 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications casing shall be properly sealed to prevent the intrusion of soil, water, or debris within the casing itself. It shall be sealed by brick and mortar, cement or any approved method by the Engineer. 41.2.3 GATE VALVES Discs of valves shall be operated by methods which will allow operation in any position with respect to the vertical. Valves for interior piping or exposed above grade outside structures, shall be handwheel operated. Valves 4-inches and larger, buried in earth shall be equipped with 2-inch square operating nuts, valve boxes and covers. Valves shall be fitted with joints suitable for the pipe with which they are to be used. The direction of opening for all valves shall be to the left (counter clockwise). Pressure Rating: Unless otherwise shown or specified, valves for high pressure service shall be rated at not less than 150 psi cold water, nonshock. The manufacturer's name and pressure rating shall be cast in raised letters on the valve body. Installation: Installation shall be in accordance with good standard practice. Exposed pipelines shall be so supported that their weight is not carried through valves. Two Inch and smaller Diameter: Not allowed. These should be approved ball valves. Three Inch Diameter: Not allowed. Four Inch to Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate Valves, 4 to 16-inch diameter, inclusive, shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM Rubber in conformance with ANSI/A.W.W.A. Standard Specification C509 latest revision. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 p.s.i. differential pressure, all internal parts removable from bonnet without removing body from pressure main, corrosion resistent bronze nonrising stem with O ring bonnet seal and internal cast iron parts coated with corrosion resistent coating. Larger than Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate valves larger than 16-inch shall be suitable for the service intended and shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM rubber in conformance with ANSI/A.W.W_A. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509-80, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 psi differential pressure. All valves shall be equipped with steel cut bevel gears, extended type gear case and rollers, and valved by-pass. 41.2.4 VALVE BOXES Valve boxes shall be of standard extension design and manufacture and shall be made of cast iron. No PVC Risers or Derisers are allowed as part of a valve box assembly. They are to be 3 piece valve box assemble. The lower part of the assembly can be ordered in various heights to accommodate different depths. Suitable sizes of valve boxes and extension pieces shall be provided where shown. The valve box cover shall be of cast iron. Valve boxes and their installation shall be included in the bid price for valves. 41.2.5 HYDRANTS No other hydrants, other than those listed below, may be used in extension to or replacement of the City of Clearwater water system: • Kennedy Guardian #K 81D Fire Hydrant, • Mueller Super Centurion 25 Fire Hydrant SectionIV.doc Page 66 of 128 9/9/2008 1 ' Section N -- Technical Specifications • AVK Nostalgic 2780. • American Darling B-84-B. No substitutions shall be allowed without the approval of the City of Clearwater. Above hydrants shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the AWWA Specification C 502 ' and include the following modifications: 1. All shipments to be palletized and tailgate delivery. ' 2. Hydrants shall conform to A.W.W.A. Standard C-502 latest revision and include the following modifications. Must be UL / FM listed. 3. Hydrants shall be of the compression type, closing with line pressure. ' 4. The operating threads will be contained in an operating chamber sealed at the top and bottom with an O-ring seal. The chamber will contain a lubricating grease or oil. ' 5. Hydrants shall be of the traffic model breakaway type, with the barrel made in two sections with the break flange located approximately 2-inch above the ground line. Breakaway bolts not allowed. ' 6. Operating nut shall be of one piece bronze or ductile iron construction. 7. A dirt shield shall be provided to protect the operating mechanism from grit buildup and ' corrosion due to moisture. 8. A thrust washer shall be supplied between the operating nut and stem lock nut to facilitate operation. ' 9. Operating nut shall be a #7 (1-1/2-inch) pentagon nut. 10. Nozzles shall be of the tamper resistant, 1/4 turn type with O-ring seals or threaded into upper barrel. Nozzles shall be retained with a stainless steel locking device. 11. The main valve shall be of EPDM solid rubber. 12. The seat shall be of a bronze ring threaded to a bronze insert in the hydrant shoe, with 0- rings to seal the barrel from leakage of water in the shoe. 13. The main valve stem will be 304 or higher grade stainless steel and made in two sections ' with a breakable coupling. 14. Hydrant shall have a 6-inch Mechanical Joint epoxy lined elbow, less accessories. ' 15. Hydrant shall have a 5-1/4-inch valve opening, and shall be a left hand operation to open. i t d t h ll b ith 16 H d e w ra ns. a ou . y ran s 17. Hydrant shall have two (2) 2-1/2-inch hose nozzles and one (1) 4-1/2-inch pumper nozzle. Threads shall be in accordance with the National Standard Hose Coupling Thread Specifications. ' 18. Hydrant body shall have a factory finish of yellow paint. All paints shall comply with AWWA standard C-502-85 or latest revision. All hydrants will be shop tested in accordance with the latest AWWA Specification C 502. Constrained joint assemblies shall be used which have bolted mechanical and swivel joints from the hydrant tee through to the hydrant. Constrained joints shall absorb all thrust and prevent movement of the hydrant. ' SectionlV.doc Page 67 of 128 9/92008 Section TV -Technical Specifications All fire hydrants shall be provided with an auxiliary gate valve so that the water to the hydrant may be shut off without the necessity of closing any other valve in the distribution system. 41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES Service saddles shall be used on all service taps to 4-inch P.V.C. water main. The largest service connection allowable on 4-inch main shall be 1-1/2-inch. Service saddles shall be used on all 2- inch service connections to 6-inch and larger mains. Service saddles shall be wide bodied ductile iron with epoxy or nylon coating and shall have stainless steel straps. 41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS 1. All materials shall be tested in accordance with the applicable Federal, ASTM or AWWA Specification and basis of rejection shall be as specified therein. Certified copies of the tests shall be submitted with each shipment of materials. 2. All materials will be subject to inspection and approved by the Engineer after delivery; and no broken, cracked, misshapen, imperfectly coated or otherwise damaged or unsatisfactory material shall be used. 3. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws, or other defects shall be rejected and promptly removed from the site. 4. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or water main accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. 41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS The City of Clearwater owns and maintains all backflow prevention devices that are installed within their system. Therefore, any and all devices must be purchased from the City and installed by City work forces. Backflow prevention devices installed on customer's service lines at the point of delivery (service connection) shall be of a type in accordance with AWWA specification C506 or latest revision. Two (2) different types of backflow prevention devices are allowed. Type of device, when required, is determined by the degree of hazard presented to the municipal water system from possible backflow of water within the customers private system. The types of devices allowed are: 1. Double Check Valve Assembly a device composed of two single, independently acting, approved check valves, including tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the assembly and suitable connections for testing the watertightness of each check valve. 2. Reduced pressure principle backflow prevention device a device containing a minimum of two independently acting, approved check valves, together with an automatically operated pressure differential relief valve located between the two check valves. The unit must include tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the device, and each device shall be fitted with properly located test cocks. Since installed devices must be tested annually and may be maintained by the City of Clearwater, following are the approved models of devices allowed for installation by customers of the City of Clearwater Water Distribution system: SectionIV.doc Page 69 of 128 9/9/2008 I I 1 Section IV -- Technical Specifications DOUBLE CHECK VALVE 2" and Smaller Larger than 2" Conbraco 40100 Conbraco 40100 Herse Beeco Model FDC Hersey Beeco No. 2 Watts Model 709 or 007 Watts Model 709 or 007 FEBCO Model 805Y Ames 2000 SS REDUCED PRESSURE TYPE 2" and Smaller Lar er than 2" Ames 4000 SS Conbraco 40200 Conbraco 40200 Hersey Beeco Model FRP II Herse Beeco Model 6CM FEBCO Model 825Y Watts Model 909 or 009 Watts Model 909 or 009 41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES Steel body tapping sleeves shall be JCM Industries Inc., JCM 412; Clow Corporation 3460; or equal. All steel body tapping sleeves shall have heavy welded ASTM A 285, Grade C steel body, stainless steel bolts, manufacturer's epoxy coated body, and 3/4-inch bronze test plug. 41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS Blow offs are not allowed. 41.3 CONSTRUCTION 41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING 1. Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded rolled against pipe already on the ground. 2. Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at his expense in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. 3. In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be laid in the trench. 41.3.2 PIPE LAYING 41.3.2.1 ALIGNMENT AND GRADE The pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves and hydrants at the required locations, spigots centered in bells; and all valves and hydrant stems plumb. All pipe installed shall be pigged and properly flushed before any pressure testing and sterilization of the pipe can be completed. 1 SectionIV.doc Page 69 of 128 9/9/2008 1 Section 1V -Technical Specifications The depth of cover over the water main shall be a minimum of 30-inches and a maximum of 42- inches below finished grade, except where approved by the Engineer to avoid conflicts and obstructions. Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work and interfere to such an extent that an alteration of the plans is required, the Engineer shall have the authority to change the plans and order a deviation from the line and grade or arrange with the Owners of the structures for the removal, relocation, or reconstruction of the obstructions. 41.3.2.2 INSTALLATION Proper implements, tools, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves and hydrants shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of a derrick, ropes, or other suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials and protective coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall materials be dropped or dumped in the trench. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for cracks and other defects while suspended above the trench immediately before installation in final position. Spigot ends shall be examined with particular care as this area is the most vulnerable to damage from handling. Defective pipe or fittings shall be laid aside for inspection by the Engineer who will prescribe corrective repairs or rejection. All lumps, blisters, and excess coating shall be removed from the bell and spigot end of each pipe, and the outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be wire brushed and wiped clean and dry and free from oil and grease before the pipe is laid. Pipe joints shall be made up in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is being placed in the line. If the pipe laying crew cannot put the pipe into the trench and in place without getting earth into it, the Engineer may require that, before lowering the pipe into the trench, a heavy, woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end and left there until the connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe. During laying operation, no debris, tools, clothing or other materials shall be placed in the pipe. As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the pipe forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with approved backfill material tamped under it except at the bells. Precautions shall be taken to prevent dirt from entering the joint space. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug or other means approved by the Engineer. The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe or cement lining and so as to leave a smooth end at right angles to the axis of the pipe. Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. Where pipe is laid on the grade of 10 per cent or greater, the laying shall start at bottom and shall proceed upward with the bell ends of the pipe upgrade. SectionlV.doc Page 70 of 128 9/9/2008 1 Section IV -Technical Specifications Wherever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line, either in the vertical or horizontal plane to avoid obstructions or to plumb stems; or where long radius curves are permitted, the amount of deflection allowed shall not exceed that allowed under the latest edition of ANSI/AWWA C600-82 and C900 81 or latest revisions. ' No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Engineer, trench conditions are unsuitable. 41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS 41.3.3.1 GENERAL Valves, hydrants, fittings, plugs and caps shall be set and joined to pipe in the manner specified ' above for installation of pipe. 41.3.3.2 VALVES Valves in water mains shall, where possible, be located on the street property lines extended ' unless shown otherwise on the plans. All valves shall be installed at the tee in all cases, not to exceed 18-inches from the main line. ' The valve box shall not transmit shock or stress to the valve and shall be centered and plumb over the wrench nut of the valve, with the box cover flush with the surface of the finished pavement or such other level as may be directed. ' 41.3.3.3 HYDRANTS Hydrants shall be located as shown or as directed so as to provide complete accessibility and ' minimize the possibility of damage from vehicles or injury to pedestrians. All hydrants located 10-feet of more from the main shall have a gate valve at the main and another gate valve at the hydrant location. No valve can be located anywhere in the hydrant run to circumvent the use of ' two valves. All hydrants shall stand plumb and shall have their nozzles parallel with, or at right angles to, the curb, with the pumper nozzle facing the curb. Hydrants shall be set to the established grade, with ' nozzles as shown or as directed by the Engineer. Each hydrant shall be connected to the main with a 6 inch ductile iron branch controlled by an ' independent 6 inch gate valve. 41.3.3.4 ANCHORAGE Movement of all plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., unless otherwise specified shall be prevented by attaching approved mechanical restraining rings or glands and installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants shall be held in place with restrained swivel joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants may be used where hydrant runout length precludes the use of hydrant connecting swivel joints. Where special anchorage is required, such anchorage shall be in accordance with details shown on the plans or specified in the field by the Engineer. 41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES Where shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the water lines constructed under this contract shall be connected to the existing lines now in place. No such connection shall be made I SectionlV.doc Page 71 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications ¦ until all requirements of the specifications as to tests, flushing, and sterilization have been met and the plan of the cut in to the existing line has been approved by the Engineer. Where connections are made between new work and existing work, the connections shall be ¦ made in a thorough and workmanlike manner using proper materials and fittings to suit the actual conditions. All connections to existing facilities will be completed under the supervision of the City of Clearwater Water Division. 41.4 TESTS 41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS ¦ After installation of water mains, complete with all associated appurtenances including service taps, all sections of newly laid main shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure test of 150 pounds , per square inch for a period of two (2) hours and shall conform to AWWA C600 latest revision. All mains shall be pigged and flushed to remove all sand and other foreign matter before any hydrostatic test can or will be performed. The pressure test shall be applied by means of a pump , connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The pump, pipe connection and all necessary apparatus, together with operating personnel, shall be furnished by the Contractor at his expense. ¦ The Contractor shall make all necessary taps into the pipe line. The Owner will furnish the water for the test. Before applying the test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe line. 41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST The Contractor shall give the City of Clearwater Water Division 48 hours advance notice of the time when the installation is ready for hydrostatic testing. 41.5 STERILIZATION Before the system is put into operation, all water mains and appurtenances and any item of new construction with which the water comes in contact, shall be thoroughly sterilized in accordance with AW WA C651. ¦ 41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT The sterilizing agent shall be liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution conforming to ¦ Federal Specification 0 S 602B, Grade D, or dry hypochlorite, commonly known as "HTH" or "Perchloron". 41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM ' Prior to the application of the sterilization agent, all mains shall be thoroughly flushed. Flushing shall continue until a clean, clear water flows from the hydrants. Where hydrants are not ¦ available for flushing, such flushing shall be accomplished at the ends of the lines. 41 5 ILI ATION ¦ . Z .3 STER PROCEDURE ¦ All piping, valves, fittings and all other appurtenances shall be sterilized with water containing a minimum chlorine concentration of 75 ppm at any point in the system. This solution shall then remain in the distribution system for a minimum contact period of eight hours before it is flushed SectionlV.doc Page 72 of 128 9/9/2008 ' Section IV - Technical Specifications out. All valves in the lines being sterilized shall be opened and closed several times during the ' contact period. 41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS After the sterilization outlined above has been accomplished, flushing shall continue until free ' residual chlorine tests not less than 0.2 ppm nor more than 3.0 ppm. Residual chlorine test shall be in accordance with standard methods using a standard DPD test set. 41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS After the water system has been sterilized and thoroughly flushed as specified herein, City of Clearwater Water Division or City of Clearwater Construction Inspection personnel shall take samples of water from remote points of the distribution system in suitable sterilized containers. The City shall forward the samples to a laboratory certified by the Florida State Board of Health for bacterial examination in accordance with AWWA C65 1. If tests of such samples indicate the presence of coliform organisms, the sterilization as outlined above shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of such pollution. The bacterial tests shall be satisfactorily completed before the system is placed in operation and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to perform the ' sterilization as outlined above. If methods of sterilization differ materially from those outlined above, such methods shall be in accordance with directives of the Florida State Board of Health and all methods employed shall ' have the approval of that agency. Definite instructions as to the collection and shipment of samples shall be secured from the laboratory prior to sterilization and shall be followed in all respects. The City of Clearwater shall secure clearance of the water main from the Florida Department of Environmental Protection before the water distribution system is put into operation. 41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 41.6.1 GENERAL ' Bids must include all sections and items as specified herein and as listed on the Bid Form. Payment for the work of constructing the project will be made at the unit price or lump sum payment for the items of work as set forth in the Bid, which payment will constitute full compensation for all labor, equipment, and materials required to complete the work. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the applicable pay items of work: • Clearing and grubbing • Excavation, including necessary pavement removal • Shoring and/or dewatering • Structural fill • Backfill • Grading • Tracer wire • Refill materials • Joints materials • Tests and sterilization • Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. f 128 9/912008 P 73 SectionIV.doc age o Section IV - Technical Specifications 41.6.2 FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS 41.6.2.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the actual number of feet of pipe of each size and type satisfactorily furnished and laid, as measured along the centerline of the completed pipe line, including the length of valves and fittings. 41.6.2.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials and equipment, and constructing the water mains complete and ready for operation. 41.6.3 FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS 41.6.3.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment will be the number of toms, or decimal part thereof, of ductile iron fittings satisfactorily furnished and installed. Fitting weights shall be based on weights stamped on the body of the fitting, provided such weights do not exceed the theoretical weights by more than the tolerances permitted in ANSI/AWWA C110/A 21.10 82, latest revision, in which case, the weight will be based upon the theoretical weight plus the maximum tolerance. Didn't the method of payment change to per piece instead of per tonnage? 41.6.3.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials, and equipment required to furnish and install ductile iron fittings. 41.6.4 FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS I 41.6.4.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of gate valves of each size satisfactorily furnished and installed. 41.6.4.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price for each size shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the valve complete with box and cover. 41.6.5 FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS 41.6.5.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of fire hydrants satisfactorily furnished and installed. The only hydrants allowed to be installed in the City of Clearwater utilities system are listed in Section. 41.2.5. No exceptions. 41.6.5.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the fire hydrant complete including necessary thrust SectionlV.doc Page 74 of 128 9/92008 11 ' Section IV - Technical Specifications anchorage, 6-inch pipe between the main and the hydrant and gate valve and valve box on the hydrant lead. 42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS This article not applicable. 43 TENNIS COURTS 43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS ' 43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS All soil under courts shall be treated with DSMA 184 at the rate of 2 pounds active ingredient per 1,000 square foot. Materials shall be brought to the job site in tagged containers. Tags shall be retained and turned into the Engineer's Office. 43.1.2 BASE COURSE Base Course shall be Limerock 6" thick after compaction. Specifications for the base shall be the same as those for Limerock in Section IV - Article 22 of the City of Clearwater Technical Specifications. Subgrade stabilizing will not be required. Surface shall be cut to within 1/2" of true grade in preparation of 1" leveling course. Prior to applying prime coat, surface shall be approved by the Engineer. 43.1.3 PRIME COAT ' The material used for prime coat shall be cut-back Asphalt Grade RC-70 or RC-250 and shall conform to Section 300 of the Florida State Department of Transportation's "Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction". ' 43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE A.Leveling Course shall be a minimum of V of Type S-III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section 331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Leveling Course shall be constructed running East and West. Finish surface of leveling course shall not vary more than 1/4" when checked with a 10 foot straight edge. If a deficiency of more than ''/a" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. ' 43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE Surface course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S-I11 Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section 331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Surface Course shall be constructed running North and South. Finish surfaces shall not vary more than 1/4" in 10 feet. Prior to application of color coat, surface shall be checked for low areas by flooding the surface with water. Low areas shall be patched as approved by the Engineer prior to application of the color coat. No areas which retain water will SectionlV.doc Page 75 of 128 9/9/2008 Section ]V -Technical Specifications be approved. If a deficiency of more than '/4" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. 43.1.6 COLOR COAT 43.1.6.1 MATERIALS Materials used in the patching and color coating of Tennis Courts shall be manufactured specifically for Tennis Court Application. All materials must be approved by the Engineer prior to the start of construction. Request for approval of coating materials may be submitted prior to the opening of bids. In requests for approval, the Contractor shall present manufacturer's literature along with the name, address, and date of three previous Tennis Court applications of the proposed material. 43.1.6.2 CONSTRUCTION 43.1.6.2.1 SURFACE PREPARATION The surface to be coated must be sound, smooth, and free from loose dirt or oily materials Prior to the application of surfacing materials, the entire surface should be checked for minor depressions or irregularities. If it is determined that minor corrections are necessary, the Contractor shall make repairs using approved tack coat and/or patching mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use. After patching the surface shall not vary more than 1/8" in ten feet in any direction. If a deficiency of more than 1/8" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. In order to provide a smooth, dense underlayment of the finish course, one or more applications of resurfacer or patch mix shall be applied to the underlaying surface as deemed necessary by the Engineer. Asphaltic concrete Surface Course with a smooth tight mix and no ponding, will not require the resurfacing or patching mix. Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course which is course and rough or is ponding water will require the use of the resurfacer or patch mix. No applications shall be covered by a succeeding application until thoroughly cured. 43.1.6.2.2 FINISH COLOR COURSE The finish course shall be applied to a clean, dry surface in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. A minimum of two applications of color coat will be required. Texture of cured color coat is to be regulated in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to provide a medium speed surface for tennis play. The color of application shall be dark green for the regulation double's playing area and red for all other others. The finished surface shall have a uniform appearance and be free from ridges and tool marks. 43.1.6.3 PLAYING LINES Forty-eight (48) hours minimum after completion of the resurfacing, 2 inch wide playing lines shall be accurately located, marked and painted with approved marking paint. Section]V.doc Page 76 of 128 919/2008 ' Section IV - Technical Specifications 43.1.6.4 WEATHER LIMITATIONS ' No parts of the construction involving Tennis Court surfacing or patching products shall be conducted during rainfall, or when rainfall is imminent or unless the air temperature is at least 50 Degree's F and rising. NOTE: The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum or 24 hours in advance of all base and asphalt related work. 43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS 43.2.1 GENERAL ' 43.2.1.1 SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the installation of clay tennis court(s) as set forth in these specifications and /or the construction drawings. The scope of work is indicated on drawings and specified herein. Basis of design for clay courts with sub-surface irrigation system is Hydrogrid Tennis, Inc. or prior approved equal. ' 43.2.1.2 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS 1 I 1-1 The Owner may make such investigation as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the Bidder to perform the work and the Bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any Bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigations of such Bidders fail to satisfy the owner that such Bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract and to complete the work contemplated herein within the time limit agreed upon. Factors to be considered in awarding the Bid shall include the successful completion of similar sub-surface irrigation clay tennis court installations of like value, scope, size and quality as this project, with in the last five (5) years. The Owner desires to award this contract to firms that have been in business for a minimum of five (5) years. The qualifications and experience of the personnel assigned to the project will be a determining factor in the award of the Bid. 43.2.1.3 STANDARDS The Contractor shall perform all work in a thorough, workmanlike manner and conform to standards for tennis court construction as prescribed or approved by the United States (Lawn) Tennis Association and the United States Tennis Court and Tract Builders Association. The Contractor shall construct the tennis courts with laser guided equipment. 43.2.1.4 BUILDING PERMITS AND TAXES The Contractor shall secure all construction permits required by law, the City of Clearwater will waive all permit fees. 43.2.1.5 COURT LAYOUT The Owner shall establish two horizontal control points and a construction bench mark. The Contractor shall locate the four corners of each battery and shall layout the courts in conformance with the specifications and drawings. SectionIV.doc Page 77 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 43.2.1.6 BUILDING REQUIREMENTS The Owner shall provide and maintain reasonable access to the construction site, as well as an area adjacent to the site for storage and preparation of materials. Adequate water outlets within fifty (50) feet of the site shall be provided. 43.2.1.7 SCHEDULE The Owner desires to award the contract to firms who will complete this project in a reasonable time schedule. Consideration in awarding this bid will be given to firms who may commence and complete the project within a reasonable period of time after award of the bid. The Owner, in its sole discretion, will determine the reasonable schedule standard as it relates to the "Notice to Proceed." 43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION 43.2.2.1 SUITABILITY The Contractor shall examine the site to determine its suitability for installation of the courts. 43.2.2.2 DEMOLITION The contractor shall demo the existing tennis courts, remove the existing ten (10) foot high fence surrounding the tennis courts and all underground utilities within the limits of the construction area. Utilities extending outside the construction limits shall be capped and terminated. The existing tennis courts shall be ground into millings suitable to be mixed into the sub-grade at the proposed location of the new clay tennis courts. Any sub-grade material beneath the existing tennis courts not suitable for planting beds shall be removed and also utilized as sub-grade material beneath the new courts. All demolition materials not utilized in construction of the new courts shall be removed and disposed from the project site. The Contractor shall provide documentation of any recycled materials. 43.2.2.3 SUB-GRADE The sub-grade shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final sub-grade elevation. The sub-grade shall be graded level. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T-180 is required. The Contractor shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner. 43.2.2.4 FINAL GRADE The final grades outside the tennis court areas and within the construction limits shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final grade elevations with positive drainage away from tennis courts and towards drainage swales or outfall structures. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T 180 is required. The contractor shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner. 43.2.3 SLOPE 43.2.3.1 SLOPE REQUIREMENTS Rate and direction of slope of the finished surfaces shall be one (1) inch in forty (40) feet, all in one plane, as indicated on the drawings. SectionlV.doc Page 79 of 128 9/9/2008 1 ' Section 1V - Technical Specifications 43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION 43.2.4.1 LINER Two layers of 6 mil construction plastic shall be installed over the sub-grade surface with a minimum overlap of five (5) feet where pieces are joined. Use only materials that are resistant to deterioration when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154, as follows: a. Polyethylene sheet, Construction Grade. 43.2.4.2 BASE COURSE The base course shall consist of six (6) inches of porous base material as supplied by Quality Aggregate of Sarasota Florida. The surface of the base course shall be smooth and even, and it shall be within one-quarter (1/4) inch of the established grade. 1 s 11 43.2.4.3 IRRIGATION SYSTEM Perforated pipe shall be installed in trenches in the base course. These trenches shall be in on four (4) foot centers and shall be run perpendicular to the slope of the court. The pipe shall be two and one-quarter (2-1/4) inch diameter with a nylon needle punched sock surrounding the pipe. Six (6) water control canisters shall be installed per court with each canister controlling five (5) grid pipe trenches. Provide all required controls systems time clocks; float switches, control wiring and solenoids, etc. for a complete sub-surface irrigation system. 43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING 43.2.5.1 CURB Brick curb shall be installed around the entire perimeter of the court area with an elevation of one-quarter (1/4) to one-half (1/2) inch above the finished screening course elevation. 43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE 43.2.6.1 COURT SURFACE A surface course of ISP Type R Aquablend or Lee Hyroblend tennis court material shall be installed over the screening course to a compacted depth of one (1) inch. The Aqua/Hydroblend material shall be watered to its full depth immediately after leveling and then compacted by rolling with a tandem roller weighing 600 to 1000 pounds. The finished surface shall not vary from specified grade by more than one-eighth (1/8) inch. 43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER Root barrier (geo-tech fabric) eighteen (18) inches height shall be placed in a trench on the outside edge of the perimeter curbing eighteen (18) inches in depth with herbicide coating buttons to prevent plant root systems in entering the sub-surface base course of the clay tennis courts. SectionlV.doc Page 79 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications 43.2.8 FENCING 43.2.8.1 DESIGN The contractor shall provide a total color coated fencing system as indicated on drawings and described herein. All components: frames, fabric and fittings shall be black. Basis of Design Ameristar HT 25 or prior approved equal subject to strict compliance with Ameristar published specification. 43.2.8.2 POSTS All posts shall be a minimum 2-1/2" Ameristar HT-25 pipe; top rails 1-5/8" Ameristar HT 25 pipe with manufacturers standard "Permacoat" color system. 43.2.8.3 FENCE FABRIC Fence Fabric shall be 1-3/4" #6 gauge mesh throughout, manufactures standard galvanized wire with PVC coating. All fabric to be knuckled on both selvages. 43.2.8.4 GATES Provide gates at locations indicated. At service gates, provide a keeper that automatically engages gate life and holds it in the open position until manually released. Provide gate stops for double gates consisting of a mushroom-type flush plate with anchors, set in concrete, and designed to engage a center drop rod or plunger-bar. Include a locking device and padlock eyes as an integral part of the latch, permitting both gate leaves to be locked with a single padlock. Provide latch, fork type or plunger-bar type to permit operation from either side of gate, with padlock eye as an integral part of the latch. Gate Hinges - Size and material to suit gate size, non-lift-off type, and offset to permit 180-degree gate opening. Provide one and one-half (1-1/2) pair of hinges for each leaf over six (6) foot nominal height. 43.2.9 WINDSCREENS The contractor shall provide nine (9) foot high windscreens at all ten (10) foot high fencing. Basis of design is Durashade plus by Ball Products, Inc. or equal by Putterman. Black high- density polyethylene, eight (8) oz. per square yard edges hemmed with grommets at twelve (12) inch on center. Attach to chain link fencing at the top and bottom with 50 LBS plastic ties. 43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT 43.2.10.1 POST FOUNDATIONS Post foundations shall be not less than thirty-six (36) inches in length, eighteen (18) inches in width and thirty (30) inches in depth. Foundations shall be placed to provide an exact distance between posts of forty-two (42) feet on a doubles court and thirty-three (33) feet on a singles court. 43.2.10.2 NET POSTS & SLEEVES Net posts shall be galvanized steel having an outside diameter of not less than two and seven- eighths (2 7/8) inches with electrostatically applied enamel finish and shall be equipped with a reel type net tightening device. Post sleeves and posts shall be set plumb and true so as to support SectionIV.doc Page 80 of 128 9/9/2008 Section 1V - Technical Specifications the net a height of forty-two (42) inches above the court surface at the posts. Post sleeves shall be Schedule 40 PVC to be set in concrete per net post manufactures recommendation. 43.2.10.3 CENTER STRAP ANCHOR A center strap anchor shall be firmly set in accordance with the rules of the USTA. 43.2.10.4 NET A tennis net conforming to the USTA regulations shall be installed on each court. The net shall have black synthetic netting, a headband of white synthetic material in double thickness with the exterior treated for resistance to mildew and sunlight, and bottom and end tapes of back synthetic material treated to prevent deterioration from the sunlight. A vinyl coated, impregnated steel cable, having a diameter of one quarter (1/4) inch and a length five (S) feet greater than length between the net post shall hold the net in suspension. The net shall have tie strings of a synthetic material at each corner. Basis of Design - Duranet DTS by Ball Products, Inc. 43.2.10.5 CENTER STRAP Provide a center strap of white heavy duty polyester webbing with black oxide coated brass slide buckles and nickel plated double end snap. Center strap shall be placed on the net and attached to the center strap anchor. I 43.2.10.6 LINE TAPES Line tapes shall be 100% nylon and shall be two (2) inches in width. The tapes shall be firmly secured by aluminum nails with aluminum length of two and one-half (2 - 1/2) inches. - Positioning shall be in accordance with regulations of the USTA. 43.2.10.7 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT Deliver the following equipment to the owner: 1. Ride-on Tandem Roller - Brutus AR-I Roller, automatic forward-neutral-reverse transmission; 24 inch wide drum; 3-horse power Briggs and Stratton engine. 2. Hand drag brooms (4 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame with 4-1/2" synthetic bristles; Proline. 3. Tow drag brooms (1 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame 4-1/2" synthetic bristles; Proline. 4. Deluxe Proline Line Sweeper (4 each) - friction-driven rubber sleeves; synthetic bristle brush; with fence hook cast aluminum. 5. Scarifier/Lutes (2 each) - 30" wide all aluminum; Proline. 6. Tennis Shoe Cleaners (2 each) - steel frame construction " Scrusher" exact installation location by Owner. 7. Tennis Two Step (2 each) - polyethylene construction with two rubber panels. 8. Court Rake (1 each) - six-foot length aluminum. 1 SectionIV.doc Page 81 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE Provide shade structures as indicted on drawings. Basis of design: Suntrends, Inc. "Cabana Bench 8" - 8'long x 6' wide gable design with standard canvas canopy, direct burial installation. Provide concrete footing, size and reinforcement as required by shade structure manufacture. 43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable) The owner shall supply water line to within fifty (50) feet of the courts with 50 pounds per square inch running pressure at its terminus. This line shall have the capacity to supply 30 gallons of water per minute for each court. 43.2.13 CONCRETE Provide concrete consisting of portland cement per ASTM C 150, aggregates per ASTM C 33, and potable water. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3,500 psi. Use at least four sacks of cement per cu. yd., 1-inch maximum size aggregate, 3-inch maximum slump. 43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING 43.2.14.1 SHOP DRAWINGS The Contractor shall provide signed and sealed electrical shop drawings by a professional electrical engineer for approval of the relocation and re-aiming of the existing tennis court sport lighting fixtures and electrical service to water coolers. The shop drawings shall include all necessary information according to local electrical codes in providing a complete operating system from the existing electrical panel. The shop drawings shall provide data showing the maximum foot candles the existing fixtures will provide at its new locations for tournament play. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval. 43.2.14.2 RE-LAMP The Contractor shall re-lamp and clean lens of all existing lighting fixtures after relocating the light pole and fixtures to its new location. The City will provide the new lamps. 43.2.14.3 ELECTRICAL PERMIT The Contractor shall submit electrical drawings to City of Clearwater Planning and Development Services to obtain permits for installation of the electrical works. 43.2.14.4 POLES & FIXTURES The Contractor shall install three (3) new sixty foot (60') poles and fourteen (14) new fixtures. The City will purchase and provide the new poles and fixtures for the Contractor to install, any other miscellaneous items required to provide a complete operable system shall be provided by the Contractor. Attached with this specification are the photometric lumination charts for the eight-(8) tennis courts. This information is provided by Musco Sport Lighting, 1838 East Chester Drive, Suite #104, High Point, NC 27265, phone (336) 887-0770 fax (336) 887-0771. Contact Douglas A. Stewart. Contractor shall install the poles and fixtures based on the following information: SectionIV.doc Page 82. of 128 9/9/2008 F-1 P ' Section IV - Technical Specifications Pole TI existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5 Pole T2 existing 12 fixture pole, remove six fixtures and place on pole T5 ' Pole T3 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5 Pole T4 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits Pole T5 new pole w/existing sixteen fixtures (8 on one side and 8 on the other) and 2 ' circuits Pole T6 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits Pole T7 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5 Pole T8 existing 12 fixture pole, remove four fixtures and place on pole T5 Pole T9 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5 Light levels ended up at 58+ footcandles. Existing poles have concrete footing approximately one foot wide on all sides Contractor shall plan relocation light poles accordingly. 43.2.14.5 ELECTRICAL CONDUITS Existing electrical conduits are installed individually to the existing light pole, it is suggested the ' Contractor place electrical junction boxes at existing pole locations and utilize existing conduits. New conduits will be required for the three (3) new light poles and the Contractor shall include the cost for these electrical conduits in the relocating of the new light poles. ' 43.2.15 WATER COOLER fl t 43.2.15.1 SHOP DRAWINGS The Contractor shall provide shop drawings for the installation of water cooler in the cabana area of the tennis courts, electrical, water and drainage submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval. 43.2.15.2 WATER FOUNTAIN Basis for design: Halsey Taylor HOF Series - water cooler with sealed back panels, or equal. 43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION Instruct the Owner's personnel on proper operation and maintenance of court and equipment. 43.2.17 WARRANTY 43.2.17.1 EQUIPMENT The Contractor shall supply warranty cards and operation and maintenance manuals for all equipment to the Owner upon completion of construction of the project. 43.2.17.2 WARRANTY The Contractor shall warranty the courts, fencing, sidewalks and court accessories against defective materials and /or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of completion. SectionIV.doc Page 83 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 43.2.17.3 WARRANTY SUB-SURFACE IRRIGATION SYSTEM The Contractor shall warranty the sub-surface irrigation of the clay tennis courts for a period of two years from the day of completion. 44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish, operate, maintain and remove all work zone traffic control associated with the Project, including detours, advance warnings, channelization, hazard warnings and any other necessary features, both at the immediate work site and as may be necessary at outlying points. 44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor shall prepare a detailed traffic control plan designed to accomplish the level of performance outlined in the Scope of the Work and/or as may be required by construction permits issued by Pinellas County and/or the Florida Department of Transportation for the Project, incorporating the methods and criteria contained in Part VI, Standards and Guides for Traffic Controls for Street and Highway Construction, Maintenance, Utility and Incident Management Operations in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices published by the U.S. Department of Transportation and adopted as amended by the Florida Department of Transportation, or most recent addition. 44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY The general objectives of a program of work zone safety is to protect workers, pedestrians, bicyclists and motorists during construction and maintenance operations. This general objective may be achieved by meeting the following specific objectives: • Provide adequate advance warning and information regarding upcoming work zones. • Provide the driver clear directions to understanding the situation he will be facing as he proceeds through or around the work zone. • Reduce the consequences of an out of control vehicle. • Provide safe access and storage for equipment and material. • Promote speedy completion of projects (including thorough cleanup of the site). • Promote use of the appropriate traffic control and protection devices. • Provide safe passageways for pedestrians through, in, and/or around construction or maintenance work zones. The 2004 Design Standards (DS), Index 600 "When an existing pedestrian way or bicycle way is located within a traffic control work zone, accommodation must be maintained and provision for the disabled must be provided. Only approved temporary traffic control devices may be used to delineate a temporary traffic control zone pedestrian walkway. Advanced notification of sidewalk closures and detours marked shall be provided by appropriate signs". 2004 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction SectionIV.doc Page 84 of 128 L. 1 9/9/2008 1 11 1 I Section 1V - Technical Specifications 102-5 Traffic Control: 102-5.1 Standards: FDOT Design Standards (DS) are the minimum standards for the use in the development of all traffic control plans 44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES Roadway types: Major Arterials, Minor Arterials, Local Collectors, and Local Following are typical requirements to be accomplished prior to closure. The number of requirements increase with traffic volume and the importance of access. Road closures affecting business or sole access routes will increase in process requirements as appropriate. For all but local streets, no road or lane closures are allowed during the Christmas holiday season and the designated "Spring Break" season with prior approval by the City Engineer. 44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS Obtain permits for Pinellas County and Florida Department of Transportation roadways. Traffic control devises conform to national and state standards. 44.3.1.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Standard property owner notification prior to start of construction for properties directly affected by the construction process. 44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS Consult with City Traffic staff for preliminary traffic control options. Develop Formal Traffic Control Plan for Permit Submittal to Regulatory Agency as necessary. 44.3.2.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Message Board Display, Minimum of 7-day notice period prior to road closure and maybe longer for larger highway. The message board is to be provided by the Contractor. 44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS 1 44.3.3.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION C-View Release 44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS 44.3.4.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION News Release The Message Board may need to be displayed for a period longer than 7 days. 44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor is invited and encouraged to confer in advance of bidding, and is required, as a specification of the work, to confer in advance of beginning any work on the Project, with the Traffic Operations Division, Municipal Services Building, 100 South Myrtle Avenue, telephone 562-4750, for the purpose of approval of the Contractor's proposed detailed traffic control plan. SectionlV.doc Page 85 of 128 9/9/2008 I"_1 Section IV - Technical Specifications All maintenance of traffic (MOT) plans shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer or an individual who is certified in the preparation of MOT plans in the State of Florida. 44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION The Traffic Operations Division may inspect and monitor the traffic control plan and traffic control devices of the Contractor. The City's Construction Inspector assigned to the project, may make known requirements for any alterations or adjustments to the traffic control devices. The Contractor shall take direction from the Project Engineer or Project Inspector. 44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL Payment for work zone traffic control is a non-specific pay item to be included in the construction costs associated with other specific pay items unless specifically stated otherwise in the Scope of Work in these Technical Specifications and a bid item(s) is included for Work Zone Traffic Control in the proposal form. 44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on the Project have a current International Municipal Signal Association, Work Zone Traffic Control Safety Certification or Worksite Traffic Supervisor Certification from the American Traffic Safety Association with additional current Certification from the Florida Department of Transportation. This requirement for Certification will be noted in the Scope of Work and/or sections of these Technical Specifications. When the certified supervisor is required for the Project, the supervisor will be on the Project site at all times while work is being conducted. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on a 24-hour per day basis and shall review the project on a day-to-day basis as well as being involved in all changes to traffic control. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall have access to all equipment and materials needed to maintain traffic control and handle traffic related situations. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall ensure that routine deficiencies are corrected within a 24-hour period. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on the site within 45 minutes after notification of an emergency situation, prepared to positively respond to repair the work zone traffic control or to provide alternate traffic arrangements. Failure of the Worksite Traffic Supervisor to comply with the provisions of this Subarticle may be grounds for decertification or removal from the project or both. Failure to maintain a designated Worksite Traffic Supervisor or failure to comply with these provisions will result in temporary suspension of all activities except traffic and erosion control and such other activities deemed to be necessary for project maintenance and safety. 45 CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE LINING 45.1 INTENT It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of sanitary sewer and storm pipes by the installation if a cured in place jointless, continuous, thermosetting resin impregnated polyester flexible felt liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand 5ectionIV.doc Page 86 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technicai Specifications exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. 45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system(s) and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer. ' 45.3 MATERIALS The liner shall be polyester fiber felt tubing saturated with a resin prior to insertion. Resin type and qualities shall be as specified by the manufacturer to obtain a cured liner with the following ' properties: Tensile Strength ASTM D638 3,000 psi Flexural Strength ASTM D790 4,500 psi ' Flexural Modulus of Elasticity ASTM D790 300,000 psi Long Term Modulus of Elasticity (50 Years) ASTM D2290 150,000 psi ' Liner shall meet strengths as shown in ASTM F1216 unless otherwise submitted and approved by the Engineer. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20 ' traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications of Insituform of North America, Inc., 3315 Democrat Road, Post Office Box ' 181071, Memphis, Tennessee 38118; or InLiner USA 1900 N.W. 44th St., Pompano Beach Florida 33064, 305-979-0802, or an approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and/or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids. 45.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants. ' SectionIV.doc Page 87 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit color television, and recorded on DVD, CD VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of the entire periphery of the pipe. 45.6 LINER INSTALLATION Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide for a tight fit on the interior of the existing pipe to be lined. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufacturer including operations for inversion, heat curing and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, excessive wrinkling or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. 45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 95% of the area of the original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project. 45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than an eight-hour period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims. 45.9 PAYMENT Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation, bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, lateral reconnection, etc, to provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems. SectionIV.doc Page 88 of 128 9/9/2008 ' Section IV - Technical Specifications 46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING ' 46.1 MATERIALS t 46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS The pipe supplied under this specification shall be high performance, high molecular weight, high density polyethylene pipe (Driscopipe 1000) as manufactured by Phillips Driscopipe, Inc., Dallas, Texas and shall conform to ASTM D 1248 (Type III, Class C, Category 5, Grade P34) or approved equal. Minimum cell classification values shall be 345434C as referenced in ASTM D 3350 latest edition. If fittings are required, they will be supplied under this specification and shall be molded or manufactured from a polyethylene compound having a cell classification equal to or exceeding the compound used in the pipe. To insure compatibility of polyethylene resins, all fittings supplied under this specification shall be of the same manufacture as the pipe being supplied. 46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL The resin used for manufacturer of the pipe shall be manufactured by the pipe manufacturer, thus maintaining complete control of the pipe quality. The pipe shall contain no recycled compound except that generated in the manufacturer's own plant from resin of the same specification from the same raw material. The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free of visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, or other deleterious defects, and shall be identical in color, density, melt index, and other physical properties. The polyethylene resin used shall have all ingredients pre compound prior to extrusion of pipe, in plant blending is not acceptable. The Engineer may request, as part of the quality control records submittal, certification that the pipe produced is represented by the quality assurance testing. Additionally, test results from manufacturer's testing or random sampling by the Engineer that do not meet appropriate ASTM standards or manufacturer's representation, may be cause for rejection of pipe represented by the testing. These tests may include density and flow rate measurements from samples taken at selected locations within the pipe wall and thermal stability determinations according to ASTM D 3350, 10.1.9. 46.1.3 SAMPLES The owner or the specifying engineer may request certified lab data to verify the physical properties of the materials supplied under this specification or may take random samples and have them tested by an independent laboratory. ' 46.1.4 REJECTION Polyethylene pipe and fittings may be rejected for failure to meet any of the requirements of this ' specification. 46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS Pipe supplied under this specification shall have a nominal IPS (Iron Pipe Size) O.D. unless otherwise specified. The SDR (Standard Dimension Ratio) of the pipe supplied shall be as specified by the Engineer, on the construction plans and/or the scope of work. ' SectionlV.doc Page 89 of 128 9/9/2008 Section TV - Technical Specifications 46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES 46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE Pipe shall be stored on clean, level ground to prevent undue scratching or gouging of the pipe. If the pipe must be stacked for storage, such stacking should be done in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The handling of the pipe should be done in such a manner that it is not damaged by dragging over sharp objects or cut by chokers or lifting equipment. 46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS Segments of pipe having cuts or gouges in excess of 10% of the wall thickness of the pipe should be cut out and removed. The undamaged portions of the pipe shall be rejoined using the butt fusion joining method. 46.3.3 PIPE JOINING Sections of polyethylene pipe should be joined into continuous lengths on the job site above ground. The joining method shall be the butt fusion method and shall be performed by the manufacturer's representative and in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The butt fusion equipment used in the joining procedures should be capable of meeting all conditions recommended by the pipe manufacturer, including, but not limited to, temperature requirements, alignment, and fusion pressures. 46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE Fused segments of pipe shall be handled so to avoid damage to the pipe. When lifting fused sections of pipe, chains or cable type chokers should be avoided. Nylon slings are preferred. Spreader bars should be used when lifting long fused sections. Care should be exercised to avoid cutting or gouging the pipe. 46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE 46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS The liner(s) to be slip lined into the existing storm sewer shall have the following sizes: 12-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 15-inch existing sewer. 16-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 18-inch existing sewer. 18-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 21-inch existing sewer. 21 Y2-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 24-inch existing sewer. 28-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 30-inch existing sewer. 34-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 36-inch existing sewer. 42-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 48-inch existing sewer. 46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION The existing line shall be cleaned of debris and other obstructions prior to TV inspections or insertion of the polyethylene liner. Cleaning can be accomplished with a high velocity cleaner, a bucket and scrapper, root saws, corkscrews, and rodding or balling units. The method used will be determined by the condition of the existing line. Final cleaning may be required prior to inserting the liner. Seetion]V.doc Page 90 of 128 9/9/2008 L 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications 46.4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS All excavations shall conform to OSHA requirements and any additional requirements as set by the specifying engineer or his representative. Insertion shaft excavations shall coincide with points requiring removal of obstructions or shall be determined by the engineer. An entry slope grade of 2 1/2:1 maximum shall be used to provide a safe bending radius for the polyethylene. The bottom of the entry pit should provide a straight section for ease of entry of the liner into the existing pipe. The length of the level excavation should be at least twelve times the diameter of the liner being inserted. The width of the shaft should be as narrow as possible. The required width will depend on the location, type of soil, depth of the existing sewer line and the water table. 46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER After completion of the access shaft, the top half of the existing sewer shall be broken or cut and removed for the full length of the access shaft. A fabricated pulling head shall be connected to the leading end of the liner pipe. A cable shall be connected to-the pulling head so that the liner pipe can be pulled into the existing sewer. Power winches used for pulling in long lengths of polyethylene liner pipe shall be rated equal to the project requirements. Once started, the pulling operation should continue to completion. ' Insertion is normally done at about a slow walking speed. After insertion, a minimum of 12 hours shall be allowed for the liner pipe to reach equilibrium with the sewer temperature and to allow the liner pipe to stress relieve itself. The polyethylene liner pipe should protrude at least 6 inches into the manhole where it terminates. 1 1 After the 12-hour equilibrium period, the annular space between the original pipe and the liner shall be pressure grouted. Said grouting must be from the bottom up to prevent air pockets from forming. Also the grout must be recommended for underwater application and have elastomeric properties. Products used shall be approved by the engineer. The liner shall not be displaced when the annular space is being filled. Spacers, inflatable plugs or other methods approved by the Engineer must be used to prevent displacement. The length of fused pipe that can be pulled will vary depending on field conditions, the ease of access to the area, and the working space available. 46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES The Contractor shall be solely responsible to confirm all pipe sizes prior to ordering, fusing and installation of the liner. 46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED After the liner has been pulled into place, allowed to recover and sealed at the manholes, pipe connections okayed by the engineer shall be reconnected to the liner pipe. SectionIV.doc Page 91 of 128 9/9/2008 11 Section IV - Technical Specifications Pipe connections shall be connected by the use of a pre-fabricated polyethylene saddle. A neoprene gasket shall be installed between the saddle and the liner pipe so that a complete water seal is accomplished when the saddle is placed on the liner pipe and secured with stainless steel bands. 46.4.7 BACKFILLING All excavations shall be backfiilled using on site materials or as specified by the engineer. Cost for backfilling of access shafts and underdrain connections shall be including in the unit price bid for sliplining and reconnection of service laterals. Before any excavation is done for any purpose, it will be the responsibility of the contractor to contact the various utility companies and to determine the locations of their facilities. It will be the responsibility of the contractor to provide adequate protection for utility facilities. Any temporary construction right of way and/or storage areas will be arranged for by the contractor. 46.4.8 POINT REPAIR The engineer or his representative will determine if a point repair is necessary only after it has been demonstrated that a liner pipe cannot be pulled through the existing pipe. Payment will be made for each repair. The contractor will be expected to remove the obstruction and clear the pipe. If removing the top of the existing pipe will accomplish the removal of the obstruction, the bottom of the existing pipe should remain in place to form a cradle for the liner. 46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS All materials not used in the backfilling operation shall be disposed of off site by the contractor. Finish grading shall be required. In locations other than street right-of-ways, the surface shall be graded smooth and sodded with the same kind of grass as the existing lawn. Excavation points in street right-of-ways shall be repaired as specified by the engineer. 47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE 47.1 SCOPE This specification designates general requirements for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic (spiral wound) pipe with integral wall bell and spigot joints for the conveyance of storm water. 47.2 MATERIALS All pipe and fittings shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with specification for "Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large Diameter Ribbed Gravity Storm Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter". The pipe and fittings shall be made of PVC plastic. 47.3 PIPE The bell shall consist of an integral wall section. The solid cross section fiber ring shall be factory assembled on the spigot. Sizes and dimensions shall be as shown in this specification. SectionIV.doc Page 92 of 128 9/9/2008 [J ' Section 1V -Technical Specifications Standard laying lengths shall be 13 ft. + 1 inch. At manufacturer's option, random lengths of not ' more than 15% of total footage may be shipped in lieu of standard lengths. 47.4 JOINING SYSTEM Joints shall be either an integral bell gasketed joint. When the joint is assembled according to manufactures recommendation it will prevent misalignment of adjacent pipes and form a silt tight joint. ' 47.5 FITTINGS All fittings and accessories shall be as manufactured and furnished by the pipe supplier or ' approved equal and have bell and/or spigot configurations compatible with that of the pipe. 48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS ' 48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT Pressure injected grout shall be of cement and water and shall be proportioned generally in the ' ratio of 1.5 (one and one half) cubic foot (one and one half bags) of cement to 1 (one) cubic foot (7.50 gal.) of water. This mix shall be varied as the grouting proceeds as is necessary to provide penetration in the operator's judgment. ' Cement shall be Portland Cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, latest edition serial designation C 150 for Portland ' Cement, Type I. Portland Cement shall weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot. Water used in the grout shall be fresh, clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, vegetable, sewage and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per ' gallon. Grout pump shall be of the positive displacement type and shall be capable of producing adequate pressure to penetrate the area. ' All pressure grouting will be at the direction of the Engineer. 48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE Guniting shall conform to all requirements of "Specifications for Materials, Proportioning, and Application of Shotcrete (ACT 506.2 77)" published by the American Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan, except as modified by those specifications. Steel reinforcement shall be incorporated in the Gunite as required and shall be furnished, bent, ' set and placed in accordance with the provisions of these specifications. The purpose of this specification is to obtain a dense and durable concrete having the specified ' strength. 48.3 COMPOSITION Gunite shall be composed of Portland Cement, aggregate and water so proportioned as to ' produce a concrete suitable for pneumatic application. 1 SectionlV.doc Page 93 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV -- Technical Specifications 48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS Concrete ingredients shall be selected, proportioned in such a manner as will produce concrete which will be extremely strong, dense and resistant to weathering, and abrasion. Concrete shall have a minimum 28-day strength of 4,000 psi. 48.5 MATERIALS Portland Cement: Cement shall be Portland cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C150 for Portland Cement, Type I. A bag of cement shall be deemed to weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot. Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate shall be natural siliceous sand consisting of hard, clean, strong, durable and uncoated particles, conforming to the requirements of American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C33 for Concrete Aggregates. Fine aggregate shall not contain less than 3% nor more than 6% of moisture. Fine aggregate shall be evenly graded from fine to coarse and shall be within the following limits: Passing No. 3/8 Sieve Passing No. 4 Sieve Passing No. 8 Sieve Passing No. 16 Sieve Passing No. 30 Sieve Passing No. 50 Sieve Passing No. 100 Sieve 100% 95 % to 100% 80% to 100% 50% to 85% 25% to 60% 10% to 30% 2% to 10% 48.6 WATER Water used in mixing, at the nozzle shall be fresh, clean, and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, vegetable, sewage, and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per gallon. 48.7 REINFORCEMENT Steel mesh reinforcement shall be electrically welded, cold drawn, mild steel fabric conforming to the latest requirements of ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 185 for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. Mesh can be fabricated from cold drawn steel wire conforming to the requirements of the latest ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 82 and sized as shown on Plans Page 7 of 7. 48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS Cement shall be stored with adequate provisions for the prevention of absorption of moisture. It shall be stored in a manner that will permit easy access for inspection and identification of each shipment. Aggregate shall be stockpiled at points selected to provide maximum drainage and to prevent the inclusion of any foreign material during rehandling. SectionIV.doc Page 94 of 128 9/9/2008 1 Section IV -Technical Specifications 48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION ' Unsound materials of construction and all coated, scaly, or unsound concrete in manholes and inlets, shall be removed by chipping with pneumatic hammers and chisels to sound surface, all cracks and cavities shall be chipped to such formation that their sides form approximately a 45 degree angle to the exposed surface for at least one (1) inch in depth. All areas to receive pneumatic concrete shall be cleaned by flushing or scouring with water and compressed air jets to assure removal of all loose particles. All areas of existing surfaces that do not require chipping ' shall be given a wet sandblasting with the gunite equipment and the air pressure at the cement gun shall not be less than 50 psi. Surface preparation of existing metal surface of a corrugated pipe shall be lightly sandblasted to remove loose material. All sandblasted areas shall then be cleaned by a air/water blast to remove all particles from the cleaning operation. To insure perfect bond, the newly sandblasted surface shall be thoroughly moistened with water ' prior to application of gunite. In no instance shall gunite be applied in an area where free running water exists. ' 48.10 PROPORTIONING Prior to start of guniting the Contractor shall submit to the Owner the recommended mix as a ' ratio of cement to aggregate. Recommended mix shall be on the basis of test data from prior Provided data submitted is adequate no further testing of recommended mix will be experience . required. If required, the Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary to control the actual amounts of ' all materials entering into the concrete. The types of equipment and methods used for measuring materials shall be subject to approval. ' 48.11 MIXING Gunite shall be thoroughly mixed by machine and then passed through a sieve to remove all large particles before placing in hopper of the cement gun. The mixture shall not be permitted to become damp. Each batch should be entirely discharged before recharging is begun. The mixer should be cleaned thoroughly enough to remove all adherent materials from the mixing vanes ' and from the drum at regular intervals. Water in any amount shall not be added to the mix before it enters the cement gun. Quantities of water shall be controlled by a valve at the nozzle of the gun. Water content shall be adjusted as required for proper placement, but shall in no case exceed four gallons of water per sack of cement, including the water contained in the aggregate. ' Remixing or tempering shall not be permitted. Mixed material that has stood 45 minutes without being used shall be discarded. Rebound materials shall not be reused. 48.12 APPLICATION ' Gunite shall not be placed on a frozen surface nor during freezing weather. Gunite shall not be placed when it is anticipated that the temperature during the following 24 hours will drop below ' 32 degrees, Fahrenheit. Sequence of application may be from bottom to top or vice versa if rebound is properly removed. Corners shall be filled first. "Shooting" shall be from an angle as near perpendicular to the ' Sectionlv,doc Page 95 of 128 9/9/2008 Section 1V - Technical Specifications surface as practicable, with the nozzle held approximately 3 feet from the work (except in confined control). If the flow of material at the nozzle is not uniform and slugs, sand spots, or wet sloughs result, the nozzleman shall direct the nozzle away from the work until the faulty conditions are corrected. Such defects shall be replaced as the work progresses. Guniting shall be suspended if: 1. Air velocity separates the cement from the sand at the nozzle. 2. Temperature approaches freezing and the newly placed gunite cannot be protected. Gunite shall be applied in one or more layers to such total thickness as required to restore the area as detailed over the original lines of the adjoining surface, unless other wise specified. All cavities, depressions, washouts and similar failures shall be rebuilt to original lines by use of gunite reinforced with wire mesh. Where the cavity exceeds 4 inches in depth a layer of mesh shall be used for each 3 inches of depth of gunite. In no case shall wire mesh be placed behind existing reinforcement. The time interval between successive layers in sloping vertical or overhanging work must be sufficient to allow initial but not final set to develop. At the time the initial set is developing, the surface shall be cleaned to remove the thin film of laitance in order to provide a perfect bond with succeeding applications. 48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS Construction joints or day's work joints shall be sloped off to a thin, clean, regular edge, preferably at a 45-degree slope. Before placing the adjoining work, the slope portion and adjacent gunite shall be thoroughly cleaned as necessary, then moistened and scoured with an air j et. 48.14 SURFACE FINISH Nozzleman shall bring the gunite to an even plane and to well formed corners by working up to ground wires or other guides, using lower placing velocity than normal. After the body coat has been placed, the surface shall be trued with a thin edge screed to remove high areas and expose low areas. Low areas shall be properly filled with concrete to insure a true, flat surface. After the concrete surface has been trued, the entire surface shall be given a flashcoat finish except where a special type finish is specified on the drawings. 48.15 CURING Curing shall be in accordance with either paragraph 3.7.1(d) or paragraph 3.7.5. of ACI 506.2 77 depending upon atmospheric condition. 48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION During progress of the work, where appearance is important, adjacent areas or grounds which may be permanently discolored, stained, or otherwise damaged by dust and rebound, shall be adequately protected sensitive areas, when contacted, shall be cleaned by early scraping, brushing or washing, as the surroundings permit, SectionlV.doc Page 96 of 128 9/9/2008 ' Section IV -Technical Specifications 48.17 INSPECTION Because of the importance of workmanship affecting the quality of the gunite, continual inspection during placing shall be maintained. Any imperfections discovered shall be cut out and replaced with sound material. 48.18 EQUIPMENT 11 1 1 Cement Gun: The mixing and delivering equipment shall be either the vertical double chamber type or rotary type. The upper chamber of the double chamber type shall receive and pressurize the dry mix and deliver it to the lower chamber. The lower chamber shall force the pressurized mix into the delivery hose by means of a feed wheel. The type of feeder utilized should be of sufficient capacity that the lower chamber may continuously furnish all required material to the delivery hose while the upper chamber receives the recharge. The rotary type cement gun shall have an enlarged hopper to feed material into a rotating multiported cylinder. Material shall fall by gravity into a port which shall then be rotated to a position in which the material is expelled by air into a moving stream of air. All equipment must be kept in good repair. The interior of drums, feed gearing and valves shall be cleaned as often as necessary. (at least once every 8 hour shift) to prevent material from caking on critical parts. Nozzle: Nozzle shall be the premixing type with perforated water feed ring inside the nozzle. The maximum length of material hose for the application of gunite shall be approximately 150 feet although it shall be permissible to use as much as 800 feet of material hose if the supply air pressure measured at the cement gun is increased to maintain proper velocity. The following table gives requirements for compressor size, hose size and air pressure using 150 feet of material hose: Comp. Cap (cfm) Max. Hose Dia. (In.) Max. Size Nozzle (In.) Min. Air Press. (psi) 365 15/8 15/8 60 600 2 2 80 750 21/2 21/2 90 For each 25 feet of material hose used in excess of 150 feet, the required air pressure shall be increased by 5 psi. Air Compressor: Any standard type of compressor shall be satisfactory if it is of sufficient capacity to provide, without interruption, the pressures and volume of air necessary for the longest hose delivery. The air compressor capacity determinations shall include allowances made for the air consumed in blowing rebound, cleaning, reinforcing and for incidental uses. Compressor equipment shall be of such capacity so as to insure air pressures at the special mixer capable of producing the required material velocities. ' Water Supply: The water pressure at the discharge nozzle should be sufficiently greater than the operating air pressure to assure the water is intimately mixed with the other materials. If the line water pressure is inadequate, a water pump or pressurized tank shall be introduced into the line. ' The water pressure shall be uniformly steady (nonpulsating). 1 SectionIV.doc Page 97 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications 49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION 49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT It is the intent of this portion of the specification to provide for the structural rehabilitation of manhole walls and bases with solid preformed liners and made-in-place liner systems used in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. In addition to these specifications, the Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work. Purpose of work is to eliminate infiltration, provide corrosion protection, repair voids and to restore the structural integrity of the manhole. For any particular system the Contractor will submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. All OSHA regulations shall be met. 49.2 PAYMENT Payment for liners shall be per vertical foot of liner installed from the base to the top of the installed liner. Liners will generally be installed to the top of existing or new corbels. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the pay item per linear foot of liner: Bypass pumping; Traffic Control; Debris Disposal; Excavation, including necessary pavement removal; Shoring and/or dewatering; Structural fill; Backfill and compaction; Grout and mortar; Brick; Resetting of the manhole ring and cover; Pipe extensions and connectors necessary to the installation; Replacement of unpaved roadway and grass or shrubbery plot; Replacement of roadway base and asphalt surface; and Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. 49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS 49.3.1 MATERIALS 49.3.1.1 LINERS Liners shall be fiberglass engineered to meet or exceed AASHTO H 20 loading of 16,000 pound vertical wheel load. Manhole liners are to be of the integral corbel design unless otherwise stipulated. Manhole liners are to be as large in diameter as will fit into the existing manhole. The contractor shall measure the existing manhole immediately prior to ordering materials and is solely responsible for the fitting of the liner. Contractor will be required to submit factory certification for fiberglass liners. The manhole liner shall meet all requirements of ASTM D 3753. 49.3.1.2 MORTAR Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement Type I and between two and three parts clean, well graded sand, 100% of which shall pass a No. 8 sieve. 49.3.1.3 GROUTING Grouting shall be a concrete slurry of four bags of Portland Cement Type 11 per cubic yard of clean, well graded sand. SectionIV.doc Page 98 of 128 9/9/2008 1 1 Section 1V - Technical Specifications 49.3.2 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION Excavate an area around the top of the existing manhole sufficiently wide and deep for the removal of the manhole ring and corbel section. Remove the frame and cover and corbel section without damaging the existing manhole walls. Care is to be taken not to allow brick or soil to fall into the existing manhole. Remove or reinsert loose brick which protrude more than one inch from the interior wall of the manhole and which could interfere with the insertion of the fiberglass liner. If the shelf of the manhole invert is not level around the perimeter, form a flat shelf with mortar. Cut the liner to the proper length. Cutouts in the manhole shall be made to accommodate existing inlet and outlet pipes, drops and cleanouts. Lower the liner into the existing manhole and set the bottom of the liner into quick setting grout. Obtain a good bottom seal to prevent the loss of grout from the annular space between the outside of the liner and the inside wall of the existing manhole. Set the liner as nearly vertically as possible. Pour six inches of quick setting grout above the initial bottom seal in the annular void to insure an adequate bottom seal. Bridge the gap from drops, laterals, force mains, cleanouts and all existing piping between the existing manhole wall and the new manhole liner with P.V.C. pipe. Use quick setting mortar to seal the area around the manhole liner and piping. Fill the annular space between the manhole liner and the existing manhole interior walls with grout. Care must be taken not to deflect the manhole liner due to head pressure. Set the existing manhole ring and cover using brick to make elevation adjustments as needed. Observe watertightness and repair any visible leakage. Backflll around the new liner and compact the backfill. Sod the disturbed area. Match existing sod. Where manholes fall in paved areas, disturbed base shall be replaced twice the original thickness and compacted in 8" layers. Asphalt shall be replaced with 1 1/2" of Pinellas County Type II surface. 49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM This specification shall govern all work to spray apply a monolithic fiber reinforced cementitious liner to the wall and bench surfaces of brick, concrete or any other construction material; Strong Seal MS 2 product. Described are procedures for manhole preparation, cleaning, application and testing. The ' applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory training. The applicator/contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials for applying the Strong Seal MS 2 product directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural cementitious liner of a minimum 1/2" thickness using a machine specially designed for the application. All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and with the following specifications which includes: 1. The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application. 2. The removal of any loose and unsound material. ' SectionIV.doc Page 99 of 128 9/9/2008 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications 3. The spray application of a pre blended cementitious mix to form a monolithic liner in a 2 coat application. 49.4.1 MATERIALS 49.4.1.1 PATCHING MIX Strong Seal shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive Strength (ASTM C-109) 15 min., 200 psi 6 hrs., 1,400 psi 2. Shrinkage (ASTM C-596) 28 days, 150 psi 3. Bond (ASTM C-952) 28 days, 150 psi 4. Cement Sulfate resistant 5. Density, when applied 105 +/- 5 pcf 49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL Strong Plug shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the manufacture's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C-109) - 600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs. 2. Bond (ASTM C-952) - 30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs. 49.6 GROUTING MIX Strong-Seal Grout shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids according to the manufacture's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable, and have a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 250 psi and a 1 day strength of 50 psi. 49.7 LINER MIX Strong Seal MS 2 shall be used to form the monolithic liner covering all interior manhole surfaces and shall have the following minimum requirements at 28 days: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C 109) 3,000 psi 2. Tensile strength (ASTM C 496) 300 psi 3. Flexural strength (ASTM C 78) 600 psi 4. Shrinkage (ASTM C 596) 0% at 90% R.H. 5. Bond (ASTM C 952) 130 psi 6. Density, when applied 105 + pcf Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at the Job site. Sag weight shall be 50 51 pounds and contents shall have dry bulk density of 54 to 56 pounds per cubic foot. Fiberglass rods which are contained in the product shall be alkaline resistant and shall be 1/2" to 5/8" long with a diameter of 635 to 640 microns. Products shall, in the un mixed state, have a lead content not greater than two percent (2%) by weight. SectionlV.doc Page 100 of 128 9/9/2008 ' Section IV - Technical Specifications Strong Seal MS 2C shall be made with Calcium Aluminate Cement and shall be used according to the manufacturer's recommendations in applications where there is evidence of severe sulfide conditions. Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at job site. Bag weight shall be 50-51 pounds and contents must have a dry bulk density of 50 56 pounds per cubic foot. Cement content must be 65%-75% of total weight of bag. One bag of product when mixed with correct amount of water must have a wet density of 95 108 pounds per cubic foot and must yield a minimum of .67 cubic foot of volume. Fiberglass rods must be alkaline resistant with rod lengths not less than 1/2" in length nor greater than 5/8" in height. Product shall not include any basic ingredient that exceeds maximum allowable EPA limit for any heavy metal. Manufacturer must provide MSDS sheets for product(s) to be used in reconstruction process. A two coat application of liner material will be required (no exceptions) with the first coat rough troweled to force materials into cracks and crevices to set the bond. The second coat to be spray applied to assure minimum 1/2" thickness after troweling or brush finishing to a relatively smooth finish. 49.8 WATER Shall be clean and potable. 49.9 OTHER MATERIALS No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior approval or recommendation from the manufacturer. 49.10 EQUIPMENT A specially designed machine consisting of an optimized progressive cavity pump capable of producing a minimum of 250 psi pumping pressure, contra blend mixer with twin ribbon paddles with discharge, and an air system for spray application of product. Equipment must be complete with water storage and metering system. Mixer and pump is to be hydraulically powered. Equipment is to be mounted to heavy duty construction tandem axle road worthy trailer complete with electric brakes and running lights. Internal combustion engine must be included to power the hydraulic system and air compressor. I 49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 49.11.1 PREPARATION 1. Place boards over inverts to prevent extraneous material from entering the sewer lines and to prevent up stream line from flooding the manhole. 2. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high pressure water spray (minimum 1,200 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and ' SectionlV.doc Page 101 of 128 9/9/2008 Section 1V -Technical Specifications concrete shall be removed using a mason's hammer and chisel and/or scraper. Fill any large voids with quick setting patching mix. 3. Active leaks shall be stopped using quick setting specially formulated mixes according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Some leaks may require weep holes to localize the infiltration during the application after which the weep holes shall be plugged with the quick setting mix prior to the final liner application. When severe infiltration is present, drilling may be required in order to pressure grout using a cementitious grout. Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed when pressure grouting is required. 4. Any bench, invert or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick setting mix and following the manufacturer's recommendations. 5. After all preparation has been completed, remove all loose material. 49.11.2 MIXING For each bag of product, use the amount of water specified by the manufacturer and mix using the Spray Mate Model 35C or 35D equipment for 30 seconds to a minute after all materials have been placed in the mixing hopper. Place the mix into the holding hopper and prepare another batch with timing such that the nozzleman can spray in a continuous manner without interruption until each application is complete. 49.11.3 SPRAYING The surface, prior to spraying, shall be damp without noticeable free water droplets or running water. Materials shall be sprayed, applied to a minimum uniform thickness to insure that all cracks, crevices and voids are filled and a somewhat smooth surface remains after light troweling. The light troweling is performed to compact the material into voids and to set the bond. Not before the first application has begun to take an initial set (disappearance of surface sheen which could be 15 minutes to I hour depending upon ambient conditions) is the second application made to assure a minimum total finished thickness of 1/2 inch. The surface is then troweled to a smooth finish being careful not to over trowel so as to bring additional water to the surface and weaken it. A brush finish may be applied to the finished coat to remove trowel marks. Manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed whenever more than 24 hours have elapsed between applications. The wooden bench covers shall be removed and the bench is sprayed such that a gradual slope is produces from the walls to the invert with the thickness at the edge of the invert being no less than 1/2 inch. The wall bench intersection shall be rounded to a uniform radius, the full circumference of the intersection. The final application shall have a minimum of four (4) hours cure time before being subjected to active flow. 49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING At some point during the application, at least four (4) 2 inch cubes may be prepared each day or from every 50 bags of product used, identified and sent, in accordance with the Owner's or Manufacturer's directions, for compression strength testing as described in ASTM C 109. 49.11.5 CURING Ambient manhole conditions are adequate for curing so long as the manhole is covered. It is imperative that the manhole be covered as soon as possible after the application has been completed. Sectionlv.doc Page 102 of 128 9/9/2008 1 i i i i i 1 t Section IV - Technical Specifications 49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 49.12.1 SCOPE Materials and application procedures for manhole rehabilitation for the purpose of restoring structural integrity, providing corrosion resistance, and stopping infiltration by means of: 1. Hydraulic grouting, where required, as a preliminary measure to stop high volume infiltration 2. Hydrophilic grouting (positive side waterproofing), where required, as follows: a. Hydrophilic foam-injected through wall of manhole to fill voids and/or b. Hydrophilic gel-injected through wall of manhole to stop active leaks 3. Cementitious waterproofing with crystallization (negative side waterproofing) 4. Calcium aluminate cement lining, minimum of 1/2 inch 5. Epoxy coating, minimum of 30 dry mils 49.12.2 MATERIALS 49.12.2.1 REPAIRING CEMENT A quick setting hydraulic cement compound shall be used to plug all visible minor leaks and to instantly stop major leaks, so that further waterproofing processes may proceed unhindered. The repairing cement shall be nonshrinking, nonmetallic, and noncorrosive. The compound shall have the following properties: Set Time Tensile Strength ASTM C 307 Compressive Strength ASTM -C 109 SectionIV.doc 1-3 minutes 1 day 510 psi 3 days 745 psi 28 days 855 psi 1 day 3,125 psi 7 days 7,808 psi 28 days 9,543 psi Page 103 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications Flexural Strength ASTM C 78 1 day 410 psi 3 days 855 psi 28 days 1,245 psi 49.12.2.2 HYDROPHILIC GROUTING Based on conditions found in and around the manhole, the applicator shall pressure inject either one or both of the following materials: 1. An expansive foam grout shall be used to stop major intrusion of water and fill cracks in and voids behind the structure's surface. Physical properties are as follows: Tensile Strength 380 psi ASTM D 3574-86 Elongation 400% ASTM D 3574-86 Bonding Strength 250-300 psi 2. A hydrophilic gel grout shall be used for soil stabilization behind the manhole-to prevent seepage, to provide a damming effect, and to place a hydrostatic barrier around exterior of manhole. Physical properties are as follows: Density Tensile Strength Elongation Shrinkage Toxicity 49.12.2.3 WATERPROOFING 8.75-9.17 lbs/gal ASTM D-3574 150 psi ASTM D- 412 250% ASTM D-3574 Less than 4% ASTM D-1042 Non Toxic A waterproofing component based on the crystallization process shall be applied. The system combines cementitious and silicate based materials that are applied to negative side surfaces to seal and stop leakage caused by hydrostatic pressure. A combination of five coats (using three components-two powders and a special liquid) react with moisture and the constituents of the substrate to form the crystalline structure. It becomes an integral part of the structure and blocks the passage of water. With moisture present, the crystallization process will continue for approximately six months. Upon completion the color will be light grey. Physical properties are as follows: Slant/Shear bond Strength to Calcium Aluminate Cement ASTM (to be given) 1,200 1,800 psi Tensile Strength (7 day cure) ASTM C 190 Permeability (3 day cure) CRD 48 55 49.12.2.4 CEMENT LINING 380 psi (2.62 MPa) at 100% RH 325 psi (2.24 MPa) at 50% RH 8.1 x10 llcm/sec to 7.6x10 cm/sec A self bonding calcium aluminate cement shall be applied to restore structural integrity and provide corrosion resistance qualities. The cement (before adding fibers) shall have the following properties: Calcium Aluminate Cement 12 Hrs 24 Hrs 7 Days 28 Days SectionlV.doc Page 104 of 128 9/9/2008 F 11 Section IV - Technical Specifications Aam C 495 Compressive Strength, Psi 7000 11000 12000 13000 Astm C 293 Flexural Strength, Psi 1000 1500 1800 2000 Astm C 596 Shrinkage At 90% Humidity - X0.04 X0.06 X0.08 Astm C 666 Freeze-Thaw Aft 300 Cycle No Damage Astor C 990 Pull - Out Strength 200 - 230 Psi Tensile Astm C 457 Air Void Content (7 Days) 3% Astm C 497 Porosity/Adsorption Test 4-5% Modules of Elasticity: 7.10 X 10 PSI after 24 Hrs moist curing at 68 F. The calcium aluminate cement shall be reinforced with inert fibers which comply with ASTM C 1116 and ASTM C 1018, added at the rate of one pound per cubic yard of concrete. The mixture shall be applied to a thickness of at least one half inch, but no greater than two inches. It will have a dark grey color. 49.12.2.5 EPOXY COATING A high build, flexible waterproofing epoxy shall be applied to a minimum of 30 dry mils. This epoxy will seal structure from moisture and provide protective qualities to the surface, including excellent resistance to chemical attack and abrasion. The epoxy shall be 100% solids, can be ' applied to damp surfaces, cures to a tile like finish, is easy to clean, and has no toxic fwnes. Its uses include sewage treatment plants and other sewer structures. The epoxy shall have the following properties at 75 degrees F: Mixing Ratio (Parts A:B), by volume 1:1 Color (other colors available on request) Light Gray Pot Life, his 1 Tensile Strength, psi, min 2,000 Tensile Elongation, % 10-20 Water Extractable Substances, mg./sq. in., max S ?. Bond Strength to Cement (ASTM 882) psi 1,800 49.12.2.6 CHEMICAL RESISTANCE Alcohols, Trichloroethylene, Nitric Acid (3%), Jet Fuels, Water, Sulfuric Acid (3% 10%), MEK, Wine, Butyl Acetate, Beer, Lactic Acid (3%), Gasoline, Corn Oil, Aluminum Sulfate, Paraffin Oil, Vegetable Juice, Sodium Chloride, Motor Oil, Hydrochloric Acid (3%), and many others. 49.12.3 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 49.12.3.1 PROCEDURAL OVERVIEW Work shall proceed as follows: 1. Remove rungs (steps), if desired by client. 2. Clean manhole and remove debris. a. Plug lines and/or screen out displaced debris. b. Apply acid wash, if necessary, to clean and degrease. c. Hydroblast and/or sand blast structure. ' SectionIV.doc Page 105 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications d. Remove debris from work area. 3. Repair minor defects in walls, benches, and inverts, as required, with repairing cement. (Note: Major structural repairs, such as rebuilding of benches, will also be made as required by client. 4. Inject hydrophilic grout through all surfaces, as needed, to eliminate infiltration. 5. Apply cementitious/crystallization waterproofing agents to all surfaces, repeating steps as needed. 6. Spray and/or hand apply calcium aluminate cement lining to all surfaces. 7. Spray apply epoxy coating to all surfaces. NOTE: Steps 1-5 shall be executed consecutively with minimal delays; calcium aluminate (Step 6) shall require a cure time of at least twenty-four hours for needed adhesion of epoxy (Step 7) to cement lining. 49.12.3.2 PREPARATION An acid wash shall be used (if needed) to clean and degrease. Then, if the client desires, the rungs shall be removed. Next, the entire structure is thoroughly water and/or sand blasted to remove any loose or deteriorated material. Care shall be taken to prevent any loose material from entering lines and other areas by either plugging the lines ( where feasible) or inserting protective screens. 49.12.3.3 STRUCTURAL REPAIR Hand place or spray apply hydraulic cement material as necessary to prepared surface to fill cracks and voids in structure. Allow twenty (20) minutes before applying waterproofing/crystallization. 49.12.3.4 INFILTRATION CONTROL Pressure injection of hydrophilic gel and hydrophilic foam. 1. Drill 5/8" holes through active leaking surface. 2. Install all zert fittings, as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Inject material until water flow stops. 4. Remove fittings (if necessary). 49.12.3.5 WATERPROOFING/CRYSTALLIZATION PROCESS 1. Apply a slurry coat of powder #1 to moist wall using a stiftbrush, forming an undercoat. 2. Apply dry powder #2 to slurry coat by hand. 3. Brush or spray on sealing liquid during the application to penetrate and initiate the crystal forming process. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, until there are no visible leaks. 5. Apply powder #1 as an overcoat. 6. Allow one (1) hour to cure before applying cement lining. SectionIV.doc Page 106 of 128 9/9/2008 1 49.12.3.6 CEMENT LINING Section IV -Technical Specifications 1 1 1. Dampen surface. 2. Mix material in mixer as recommended for spray or hand trowel application. 3. Apply cement until required build up of at least one half inch (and no more than 2 inches) has been achieved. 4. Trowel to smooth finish, restoring contours of manhole. 5. Texture brush surface to prepare for epoxy finish. 6. Allow for a 24-hour cure time prior to epoxy coating. NOTE: If conditions of heavy humidity prevail, a dry air blower shall be used to facilitate curing times. 49.12.3.7 EPOXY COATING Spray apply epoxy coating using airless spraying equipment until surface is visibly covered and a thickness of at least 30 mils has been achieved. Manhole may be safely entered after six (6) hours, as epoxy will be hardened. Full cure strength will be achieved at forty eight (48) hours. 49.12.3.8 CLEAN UP The work crew shall remove all debris and clean work area. 49.12.3.9 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 49.12.3.10 WARRANTY All materials and workmanship shall be warranted to the Owner for a period of five (5) years, provided that all the above mentioned repair steps are used. 50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS This article not used. See Section III ARTICLE 18 - PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS. 51 IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM 51.1 SCOPE 1. These specifications pertain to the application of the Plexiflor Color Finnish System over recreational areas intended for In-Line Skating activities. The materials specified in the SectionIV.doc Page 107 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications site plans shall be of colors indicated and for application over the Plexipave Acrylic Latex System. 2. The work shall consist of suitable cleaning and preparation of the surface to assure a satisfactory bond of the system to the existing surface. 3. All coverage rates are calculated prior to dilution. 4. Plexiflor In-line Skating Surfacing System • 1 Coat of Acrylic Resurfacer • 2 Coats of Fortified Plexipave 0 2 Coats of Plexiflor • Plexicolor Line Paint 51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS 51.2.1 ASPHALT Allow new asphalt to cure a minimum of 6 months. The surface must be checked for birdbaths, cracks and other irregularities and repaired with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification Section 10.14. (Surfacing prior to six months may make the asphalt subject to indentation). 51.2.2 CONCRETE Concrete shall have a wood float or broom finish. DO NOT PROVIDE STEEL TROWEL FINISH. DO NOT USE CURING AGENTS OR CONCRETE HARDENERS. Allow the concrete to cure a minimum of 30 days. Acid Etch the entire surface with Concrete Preparer according to California Specification Section 10.13. Check surface for birdbaths, cracks and other irregularities and repair with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification Section 10.14. 51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX Court Patch Binder Mix: 100 Lbs. #80-100 Mesh Silica Sand (dry) 3 gallons Couth Patch Binder 1 to 2 gallons Portland Cement. 51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT I. Application of the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix shall be applied to the clean, dry, level surfaces to receive the Plexiflor Surfacing System. The mix shall be applied according to California Specification Section 10.8 using the following mix: Acrylic Resurfacer SS gallons Water (Clean and Potable) 20-40 gallons Sand (60-80 mesh) 600-900 pounds Liquid Yield 112-138 gallons 2. Over asphalt surfaces, apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two coats (depending on surface porosity) at a rate of .05 -.07 gallons per square yard per coat. 3. Non-coated concrete surfaces must be neutralized with concrete preparer and primed with California Ti-Coat according to Specification Section 10.17. The Acrylic Resurfacer Mix SectionlV.doc Page 108 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications must be applied within 3 hours of the TiCoat application while the primer is dry but still tacky to the touch. Apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two applications at a rate of .05-.07 gallons per square yard per coat. 51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE After the filler coat application has dried, apply two coats of Fortified Plexipave at an undiluted rate of .05-.07 gallons per square yard per coat using the following mix: Plexipave Color Base 30 gallons Plexichrome 20 gallons Water 20 gallons 51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION 1. Plexiflor is factory premixed and ready to use from the container. The material may be diluted with one (1 ) part water to six (6) parts Plexiflor to improve flowability and provide uniform application. r 2. Apply two coats of Plexiflor at a rate of .04-.05 gallons per square yard per coat. 3. Plexiflor is applied (in a similar manner to Plexipave) in windrows on the surface with sufficient quantity to cover as the squeegee is pulled over the surface. Apply only light pressure to the squeegee. Do not allow ridges to form between passes of the squeegee. Ridges existing after material dries should require corrective action. 4. Plexiflor and its preliminary coatings should be allowed to thoroughly dry prior to application of subsequent coats. 51.6 PLAYING LINES Four hours minimum after completion of the color resurfacing, playing lines shall be accurately located, marked and painted with Plexicolor Line Paint as specified by The National In-Line Hockey Association. 51.7 GENERAL 1. The contractor shall remove all containers, surplus materials and debris upon completion of work leaving the site in a clean, orderly condition that is acceptable to the owner. Gates shall be secured and all containers shall be disposed of in accordance with Local, 2. State and Federal regulations. Materials specified for the Plexiflor System shall tee delivered to the site in sealed, property labeled arums with California Products Corporation labels that are stenciled with the proper batch code numbers. Products packaged or labeled in any other manner will not be accepted. Mixing with clear, fresh water shall only be done at the job site. Coverage rates are based upon material prior to mixing with water as specified. ' 51.8 LIMITATIONS 1. Do not apply if surface temperature is less than 50°F or more than 1407. 2. Do not apply when rain or high humidity is imminent. 3. Do not apply when surface is damp or has standing water. sectionl vAoc Page 109 of 129 919/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 4. Plexiflor will not hide surface imperfections of previous coatings. 5. Keep from freezing. Do not store in the hot sun. 6. Keep containers tightly closed when not in use. 7. Plexiflor will not prevent substrate cracks from occurring. 8. Plexiflor will mark slightly from normal use of some In-line Skates. 9. Coefficient of friction = 0.78 10. Coating Application Drying Time: 30 minutes to I hour at 707 with 60% relative humidity. 11. Keep court clean. Excess dirt or foreign material can cause the surface to be slippery. In-Line hockey is a physical sport. Always wear NIHA recommended protective gear. 52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION This article not applicable. See Section III (General Conditions), Article 22. 53 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES 53.1 MATERIAL 53.1.1 GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL 53.1.1.1 PVC COATED WIRE MESH GABIONS & MATTRESSES Gabion & mattress basket units shall be of non-raveling construction and fabricated from a double twist by twisting each pair of wires through three half turns developing the appearance of a triple twist. The galvanized wire core shall have a diameter of 0.1063 inches (approx. US gauge 12). All wire used in the fabrication of the gabion shall comply with or exceed Federal Specifications QQ-W-461H, possess a maximum tensile strength of 70,000 p.s_i_ with a Finish 5, Class 3 zinc coating in accordance with the current ASTM A-641. The weight of zinc coating shall be determined by ASTM A-90. The grade of zinc used for coating shall be High Grade or Special High Grade, as prescribed in ASTM B-6, Table 1 _ Uniformity of coating shall equal or exceed four I-minute dips by the Preece test, as determined by ASTM A-239. The PVC coating shall be extruded and adhere to the wire core prior to weaving. The PVC coated wire shall be woven into a double twisted hexagonal mesh having uniform openings of 3 1/4 inches by 4 %2 inches. The overall diameter of the mesh wire (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) shall be 0.146 inches. Selvedge and reinforcing wire shall be of heavily galvanized wire core, 0.1338 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 10), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.173 inches. Lacing and connecting wire shall be of soft tensile strength (75,000 PSI max), heavily galvanized wire core, 0.087 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 13 %), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.127 inches- The use of altemate wire fasteners shall be permitted in lieu of tie wire providing the alternate fastener produces a four (4) wire selvedge joint with a strength of 1200 lbs. per linear foot while remaining in a locked and closed condition. Properly formed interlocking fasteners shall be spaced from 4 to 6 inches and have a minimum 3/4 square inch inside area to properly confine the required selvedge wires. Tiger-Tite SectionIV.doc Page 110 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications Interlocking Fasteners are an approved alternate joint material. The Interlocking Wire Fastener shall meet stainless steel material specification ASTM A-313, Type 302, Class 1, or equal. All of the above wire diameters are subject to tolerance limit of 0.004 inches in accordance with ASTM A-641. 53.1.1.2 PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) COATING The coating shall be gray in color and shall have a nominal thickness of 0.0216 inches but not less than 0.015 inches in thickness- The protective PVC plastic shall be suitable to resist deleterious effects from exposure to light, immersion in salt or polluted water and shall not show any material difference in its initial compound properties. The PVC compound is also resistant to ' attack from acids and resistant to abrasion. i G i i c rav ty: 1. Spec f a. According to ASTM D-2287 and ASTM D- 792; in the range of 1.30 to 1.34. 2. Tensile Strength: a. According to ASTM D-142; not less than 2980 psi. 3. Modulus of Elasticity: a. According to ASTM D-412; not less than 2700 psi at 100% strain. 4. Resistance to Abrasion: a. According to ASTM 1242; weight loss <12% (Method B). 5. Brittleness Temperature: a. According to ASTM D-746, Procedure A; shall be at least 8.3 degrees centigrade below the minimum temperature at which the gabions will be handled or placed but not lower than -9.4 degrees centigrade. 6. Hardness: a. According to ASTM D-2240; shall be between 50 and 60 Shore D when tested. 7. Creeping Corrosion: a. Maximum corrosion penetration to the wire core from a square cut end section shall not be more than 25mm when the specimen has been immersed for 2000 hours in a 50% SOLUTION HC1 (hydrochloric acid 12 Be). 53.1.1.3 ACCELERATED AGING TESTS Variation of the initial properties will be allowed, as specified below, when the specimen is ' submitted to the following Accelerated Aging Tests: 1. Salt Spray Test: a. According to ASTM B-117 b. Period of test = 3000 hours. 2. Exposure to ultraviolet rays: a. According to ASTM D-1499 and ASTM G-23 (Apparatus Type E). Period of test = 3000 hours at 63 degrees centigrade. SectionIV.doc Page I I I of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 3. Exposure to high temperature: a. Testing period: 240 hours at 105 degrees centigrade, when tested in accordance with ASTM D- 1203 and ASTM D-2287. 53.1.1.4 PROPERTIES AFTER AGING TESTS After the above Accelerated Aging Tests have been performed, the PVC compound shall exhibit the following properties: 1. Appearance: a. The vinyl coating shall not crack, blister or split and shall not show any remarkable change in color. 2. Specific Gravity: a. Shall not show change higher than 6% of its initial value. 3. Durometer Hardness: a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value. 4. Tensile Strength: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 5. Elongation: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 6. Modulus of Elasticity: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 7. Resistance to Abrasion: a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value. 8. Brittleness Temperature: a. Cold Bend Temperature - Shall not be lower than -20 degrees centigrade. b. Cold Flex Temperature -Shall not be higher than +18 degrees centigrade. 53.1.2 GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL: The filler stone shall be limestone from a source approved by the Engineer before delivery is started. Representative preliminary samples of the stone shall be submitted by the contractor or supplier for examination and testing by the Engineer. The stone shall have a minimum specific gravity of 2.3 and be of a quality and durability sufficient to insure permanency in the structure. The individual stones shall be free of cracks, searns, and other defects that would tend to promote deterioration from natural causes, or which might reduce the stones to sizes that could not be retained in the gabion or mattress baskets. The stone shall meet the following physical requirements: • Absorption, maximum 5% • Los Angeles Abrasion (FM 10T096), maximum loss 45% • Soundness (Sodium Sulphate), (FM 1-T104), maximum loss 12% SectionIV.doc Page 112 of 128 9/9/2008 1 s Ll 1 1 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications a Flat and elongated pieces, materials with least dimension less than one third of greatest dimension shall not exceed 5% by weight. All filler material shall be uniformly graded between 4 inch and 8 inch (equivalent spherical diameter) and shall be angular in form. Rounded stones shall not exceed 10% of the stone, by weight and 70% of the stone, by weight, shall exceed the largest dimension of the mesh opening. 53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE Mattress wire shall conform to the same specifications as gabions except as follows: 1. The nominal diameter of the wire used in the fabrication of the netting shall be 0.0866 inches minimum, subject to diameter tolerance in accordance with the current ASTM A 641, Table 3. 2. All wire shall be galvanized according to ASTM A 641, Table 1. The minimum weight of the zinc coating shall be 0.70 ozs./sq. ft. for the 0.0866 inch wire used for mesh and lacing and 0.80 ozs./sq. ft. for the 0.106 wire used for selvedge. 3. Adhesion of the zinc coating to the wire shall be capable of being wrapped in a close helix at a rate not exceeding 15 turns per minute around a cylindrical steel mandrel having a diameter 3 times the nominal wire diameter being tested. After the wrap test is completed, the were shall not exhibit any cracking or flaking of the zinc coating to such an extent that any zinc can be removed by rubbing with bare fingers. 53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC Fabric shall conform to FDOT Standard Index 199, Type D-2, and FDOT Standard Specifications, 1996 edition, Section 985. 53.2 PERFORMANCE Gabions and Reno Mattresses shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. Fabrication of gabion baskets shall be in such a manner that the sides, ends, lid and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into rectangular baskets of the sizes specified and shown on the Drawings. Gabions and mattresses shall be of single unit construction; the base, lid ends and sides shall be either woven into a single unit or one edge of these members connected to the base section of the gabion in such a manner that the strength and flexibility at the connecting point is at least equal to that of the mesh. Where the length of the gabion and mattress exceeds one and one-half its horizontal width, they shall be equally divided by diaphragms of the same mesh and gauge as the mattresses shall be furnished with the necessary diaphragms secured in proper position on the base so that no additional tying is required at this juncture. The wire mesh is to be fabricated so that it will not ravel. This is defined as the ability to resist pulling apart at any of the twists or connections forming the mesh when a single wire strand in a section of mesh is cut. Each gabion or mattress shall be assembled by tying all untied edges with binding wire. The ' binding wire shall be tightly looped around every other mesh opening along seams so that single and double loops are alternated. A line of empty gabions shall be placed into position according to the contract drawings and binding wire shall be used to securely tie each unit to the adjoining one along the vertical reinforced edges and the top selvedges. The base of the empty gabions placed on top of a filled line of gabions shall be tightly wire to the latter at front and back. SectionIV.doc Page 113 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications To achieve better alignment and finish in retaining walls, gabion stretching is recommended. Connecting wires shall be inserted during the filling operation in the following manner: Gabions shall be filled to one third full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite faces of each cell at one third height. The gabion shall then be filled to two thirds full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite face of each cell at one two third height. The cell shall then be filled to the top. Filler stone shall not be dropped more than 12" into the gabions and mattresses. Geotextile fabric shall be installed at locations shown in the Drawings. The surface to receive the cloth shall be prepared to a relatively smooth condition free of obstructions which may tear or cut the cloth. The panel shall be overlapped a minimum of 30 inches and secured against movement. Cloth damaged or displaced during installation, gabion work, or backfill shall be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the contractor's expense. The work shall be scheduled so that the fabric is not exposed to ultraviolet light more than the manufacturer's recommendations or five days, whichever is less. 54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS 54.1 SCOPE To remove trash and debris from landscape and paved area; maintenance and fertilization of plant beds and landscape materials; maintenance, repair, and operation of irrigation systems; ornamental pest control; palm pruning; maintenance of traffic; and the cleaning of hard surfaces at designated areas. The Contractor is to work with the City in coordinating maintenance activities and reporting irregularities in the work zone. The Contractor(s) will provide the labor and materials required to maintain the landscaped street medians including: • Traffic safety and Maintenance of Traffic; • Trash and debris removal from the job site; • Removal of weeds in landscaped areas and hard surfaces; • Proper trimming and pruning of landscape plants and palms; • Proper fertilization and pest control of landscape and palms (may be subcontracted); • Irrigation service and repair; • Mulch replacement; • Cleaning of hard surfaces; and the • Reporting of irregularities at the job site. 54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK The Contractor(s) shall accomplish all landscape maintenance required under the contract between the hours of 6:30 a.m. and 7:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday, excluding observed holidays. The City may grant, on an individual basis, permission to perform contract maintenance at other hours. All work shall be completed in a continuous manner, that is the cleanup, weeding, trimming, etc., be completed before leaving the job site. SectionlV.doc Page 114 of 128 9/9/2008 1 1 I' 1 1 1 1 1 1 54.3 WORK METHODS Section 1V - Technical Specifications 54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING The Contractor(s) will adhere to a work schedule provided by the City (see Level of Service). Any variations to that schedule, requested by either party, must be approved, either verbally or in writing by an authorized representative of the other party. 54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT The contractor(s) shall provide the following service at each scheduled visit to the designated location: 54.4 LITTER Remove trash and debris from the area to be maintained. Proper disposal of collected trash and debris is a requirement of the contractor. Extraordinary amounts of debris caused by hurricanes, tornadoes, vandalism, etc., would be the responsibility of the City to clean up. The contractor should report such accumulations of debris when they are encountered. Bids for the extraordinary cleanup from the contractor would be considered. 54.5 VISUAL CHECK The site should be checked for irregularities, such as irrigation leaks, vehicle damage, dead or damaged plant material, vandalism, etc., which should be reported to the City within 24 hours after providing the service. 54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING All plant material should be trimmed in a manner that promotes the natural shape and mature size of the particular specie. Trimming should be performed at intervals that will maintain plants in a neat appearance. Trimming should be performed to promote fullness of the plants, while maintaining height restrictions in Clear Sight Zones as established on the landscape plans. Plants shall be kept trimmed to the back of curb. Brown foliage shall be removed from Liriope. Palm pruning to be performed at least once per year, preferably in late June or July following flower formation, according to the following specifications: 54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.) Remove all descending fronds, to the base of the frond; all parallel and ascending fronds are to remain in order to leave a full, rounded head; seed heads may remain, but remove old faded heads that are encountered in the pruning process; remove loose frond boots; remove vegetation; such as strangler figs, Brazilian Pepper, Asparagus fern, etc., growing in the frond boots or on the trunk. Provide the rounded, classic cut on all Medjool palm boots. No climbing spikes allowed on palms. 54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL All debris from pruning process is to be removed from the job site and disposed of by the contractor. Work sites should be left in a clean and neat appearance upon completion. SectionlV.doc Page 115 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV -Technical Specifications 54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL Proper and safe work zones in vehicular traffic areas are to be set up and maintained by the contractor, according to the attached Maintenance of Traffic specifications. 54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY Contractor is responsible for maintaining safe work zones in areas where pedestrian and park users are present. The City reserves the right to limit the hours of operation in certain high pedestrian use areas. 54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION All tree and plant material should be fertilized with the appropriate amount of 20-6-12 sulfur coated, slow release, ornamental fertilizer, three times per year. Applications should be made in mid-February, early June, and mid-September, for the first two years. Fertilizer types and amounts will change with requirements of maturing landscape materials. 54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA Weeds should be removed on a regular basis in order to keep them from being visibly noticeable. Weed control with the use of appropriate herbicides is allowable, given they are properly applied by a certified applicator. Herbicide damage to landscape material will be remedied by contractor at his/her expense. 54.13 MULCH CONDITION Should be maintained at a thickness that will discourage weed growth as well as help retain soil moisture, usually 3 inches. 54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR Should be performed at each visit to assure the systems proper operation and timing. Drip tubing should be kept covered with mulch. Timer should be checked for proper time of day and operating schedule. Leaks or breaks in the system should be repaired before the next scheduled system running time. All repairs which will be charged at $20.00 or more must be approved in advance by the city. Minor repairs, less than $20.00, should be billed to the City in addition to the monthly maintenance fee. 54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL Should be performed by a properly licensed and certified applicator to keep pest populations at a less than damaging level. Landscape materials lost to or extensively damaged by pests will be replaced by the contractor at the contractor's expense. Diazinon products are not to be used on City properties. 54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION Apply three pounds of Magnesium sulfate and one pound of Potassium evenly, per tree, across the root zone (typically within the dripline), annually in early February. SectionIV.doc Page 116 of 128 9/9/2008 1 1 1 t 1 Section IV -- Technical Specifications 54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION The City will provide a freeze/frost protection fabric for the Contractor to install over freeze/frost sensitive plants (Lantana and Pentas). The covering material will be stored at a City facility (yet to be determined). Contractor will remove the covering material from storage and install over the sensitive plants, securely fastening edges of the material to the ground per manufacturer's directions. The City will furnish metal pins needed for securing fabric to the ground. The City will notify the Contractor one (1) day or twenty-four (24) hours minimum prior to the need to protect plant material. After uses, the Contractor will prepare the fabric for storage and return it to the designated City facility. Protective covering shall be removed the following afternoon or remain in placed as directed by the City. The City shall notify the Contractor by 11:00 a.m. about removing the cover or keeping it in place due to continued freezing temperatures. The City may cancel the freeze protection event at any time prior to the end of the scheduled installation day (5:00 p.m.) The Contractor will be compensated for the number of hours mobilization or on-site work at the contracted rate per man-hour unit price. The Contractor shall provide a unit price for the installation and removal of the covering fabric on a per event basis, as well as an hourly rate per employee required. The City and contractor will coordinate appropriate irrigation operations with weather conditions. Should freeze/frost damage occur, the Contractor shall perform remedial work as per unit basis, as directed by the City. 54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE This location is to be serviced weekly. Repairs to damage or vandalism to be made within 7 working days of reported irregularity. Weekly visits should occur no closer than six and no further than ten calendar days apart. 54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK Within 24 hours of completing work the contractor shall notify the supervisor assigned to monitor the contract either in person or by phone of said completion. It is acceptable to leave a phone message. However, to make certain the message is received, it is advisable to call between 6:30 a.m. - 7:30 a.m. or 2:30 p.m. - 3:00 p.m. 54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL Upon receiving notification from the Contractor, the City shall inspect the serviced location the following business day. If, upon inspection, the work specified has not been completed, the City shall contact the Contractor to indicate the necessary corrective measures- The Contractor will be given 48 hours from this notification to make appropriate corrections. If the work has been completed successfully then the City will pay for services billed. 54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1. This location will be newly installed and under warranty by the installer for a six month period on plants and 12 month warranty on palms. Landscape installer will coordinate irrigation operation with the Maintenance contractor to assure adequate irrigation to the landscape materials. Installer will also be responsible for the untying of palm heads/fronds as he feels appropriate. 2. All listed acreage or square footage figures are estimates. 1 SectionlV.doc Page 117 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 3. All maintenance shall be performed in a good and workmanlike manner, consistent with trade practices and standards which prevail in the industry. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any plant material or site feature caused by the Contractor or his/her employees. The Contractor shall be notified in writing of the specific nature of the damage and cost of repair. The City shall, at its option, invoice the Contractor for the payment, or reduce by the amount of the repairs the next regular payment to the Contractor. Occasionally circumstances (standing water, prolonged inclement weather, parked vehicles, etc.) may make all or portions of a location unserviceable during the regular schedule. The Contractor shall notify the City Supervisor of such occurrences, and shall schedule to perform the required maintenance to the location as soon as the pertaining circumstances are relieved. 55 MILLING OPERATIONS 55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE Unless otherwise noted in the specs, plans or this Article, the milling operation shall be performed in accordance with Section 327 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all milling. 55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS If the milling machine is equipped with preheating devices, the contractor is responsible to secure any necessary permits, and for complying with all local, state and federal environmental regulations governing operation of this type of equipment. 2. All milled surfaces must be repaved within seven days from the time it was milled, unless otherwise noted in the contract documents. Prior to paving, all milled areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper either of the vacuum or the mechanical type, that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt (the Broom Tractor way of sweeping is not be permitted). The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways and curbs in addition to the roadways before leaving the job site. 4. In cases where concrete valley swales are present, the adjoining pavement shall be milled to allow for the new asphalt grade to be flush with the contract surface. 5. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing any asphalt that retrains in the curb line and/or median curbs after the milling operation of a street is complete. The cost of this removal shall be included in the bid item for milling. b. All radius returns on streets to be milled shall also be milled unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, with payment to be included in the bid item for milling. 7. Any leveling or base replacement required after milling shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications for S-Type resurfacing projects or Section 330 (latest edition) for SectionIV.doc Page I18 of 128 9/9/2008 f 1 1 Section ]V - Technical Specifications Superpave resurfacing projects. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 8. Any roadway base material exposed as a result of the milling operation shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to said base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost of said prime shall be included in the bid item for milling. 9. Prior to the placement of asphalt, the face of all curbs and driveways shall be tacked after the milling operation is complete. 55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS All surplus existing materials resulting from milling operations shall remain the property of the City. The transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials shall be performed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall contact the Public Services Division at (727) 562-4950 to schedule delivery of material. 55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS All surplus materials not claimed by the City shall become the property of the Contractor. The Contractor shall dispose of the material in a timely manner and in accordance with all regulatory requirements in areas provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the City. 55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES All utilities and related structures requiring adjustment shall be located and adjusted by their owners at the owner's expense. The Contractor shall arrange his schedule to allow utility owners the time required for such adjustments (minimum 48 hours notice per State Statute). All utility adjustments shall be completed prior to the commencement of milling and resurfacing operations. 55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and stormwater utility manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor in accordance with Section IV, Article 23.7 of the City's Technical Specifications. 55.7 TYPES OF MILLING There are two types of milling used by the City: A. Wedge - This will consist of milling a six foot wide strip along the curb line of the pavement adjacent to the curb so the new asphalt will align with the original curb height and pavement cross section. B. Full Width - This will consist of milling the entire roadway (i.e. curb line/edge of pavement to curb line/edge of pavement). All existing horizontal and vertical geometry shall remain unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer. Section]V.doc Page 1] 9 of 128 9/9/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications 55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS Intersections, as well as other areas (including radius returns) are to be milled and repaved to restore and/or improve the original drainage characteristics. Said work should extend approximately 50 to 100 feet in both directions from the low point of the existing swale. 55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The quantity to be paid for will be the area milled, in square yards, completed and accepted. 55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for milling shall include: all materials, preparation, hauling, transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials, disposal of all surplus material, any required milling of radius returns and intersections, prime and/or tack coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, removal of asphalt from curbs, sweeping, labor, equipment, and all incidentals necessary to complete the milling in accordance with the plans and specifications. 56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING The work included in this specification includes the removal and disposal of all structures, appurtenances, asphalt, concrete, curbs, walls, trees, roots, vegetation, boulders, conduits, poles, posts, pipes, inlets, brush, stumps, debris and other obstructions resting on or protruding through the ground surface necessary to prepare the area for construction. Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 110 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the Contractor shall take ownership of all removed material and dispose of them off-site in accordance with all Local, State and Federal Requirements. 56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be either a lump sum quantity or the number of acres cleared and grubbed as specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer. 56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The pay item for clearing and grubbing shall include: all removal and disposal of materials and structures as well as all materials, hauling, equipment, tools, labor, leveling of terrain, landscape trimming and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. 57 RIPRAP The work included in this specification includes the construction of either sand-cement or rubble riprap as shown on the plans. The riprap shall be constructed per Section 530 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (lastest edition). 57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement for riprap shall be the volume of sand used in cubic yards for sand- cement, or the dry weight in tons for rubble. SectionIV.doc Page 120 of 128 9/9/2008 Section 1V - Technical Specifications 57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The pay item for sand-cement riprap shall include: all materials, testing, labor, grout, hauling, equipment, excavation, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of sand-cement and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. The pay item for rubble riprap shall include: all materials, required bedding stone, dressing and shaping for placement of bedding stone, filter fabric, testing, hauling, excavating, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of rubble, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. 1 No payment will be granted if concrete or stone that exists on-site is used as rubble riprap. 58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY This article applies to all City projects located at one of the City's Wastewater Treatment Plants (WWTP) or Potable Water Reservoirs. 58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL The Contractor shall be aware that hazardous materials are used at the WWTP's and the water reservoirs. These may include sodium hypochlorite, gaseous chlorine, sulfur dioxide and ammonia. Potential safety hazards associated with these substances include: • An accidental spill or release can impair respiratory functions and result in severe burns to the skin and eyes. At the pre-construction conference, the contractor will be provided with a copy of the City of Clearwater Public Utilities Department Emergency Response Plan, and a copy of the applicable Material Safety Data Sheets. All employees of the contractor and sub-contractor assigned to this job shall be familiar with the content of these documents. 58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING Prior to issuance of a notice to proceed, the contractor must submit documentation regarding employee safety training relating to the items in Section A above. The documentation must include: • Verification that all employees assigned to this job have received and understood training in the proper work practices necessary to safely perform the job while working around gaseous chlorine and sulfur dioxide gas. • The date of the training, and • The means used to verify that the employee understood the training. 59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS ' All traffic signal work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDDT's Standard Specifications (Sections 603 through 699), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes, but is not limited to, the following items: all necessary equipment, materials, guaranties, acceptance procedures, signal timings, field tests, grounding, conduit, signal and interconnect cable, span wire assemblies, pull and junction boxes, electrical power 5ectionlV.doc Page 121 of 128 9/9/2008 service assemblies, poles, signal assemblies, pedestrian assemblies, inductive loop detectors, Section IV -Technical Specifications pedestrian detectors, traffic controller assemblies, controller cabinets and accessories, removal of existing traffic signal equipment, and internally illuminated signs. All traffic signal installations shall be mast arms and conform to the requirements of FDOT's Mast Arm Assembly standard, and shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm calculations, as well as the geotechnical report, shall also be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm colors shall be determined and approved by the City prior to ordering from the manufacturer. All traffic signal indicators for vehicles and pedestrians shall be LED's and, approved by both the City and FDOT. In addition to this, all pedestrian signal indicators shall utilize countdown features. Contractor changes to the operation of an existing signal is PROHIBITED unless directed by the City's Traffic Engineering Division. 59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 60 SIGNING AND MARKING All signing and marking work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes the following work: RPM's (Section 706), painted traffic stripes and markings (Section 710), thermoplastic stripes and markings (Section 711) and tubular delineators/flex posts (Sections 705 and 972). The Contractor is responsible to ensure that striping is correctly placed. Errors in striping or markings shall be "blacked-out" with paint, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. No payment will be made for these incorrect or "blacked-out" areas. Omissions in striping or markings shall be corrected to the City's satisfaction prior to any payment being made. 60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 61 ROADWAY LIGHTING All roadway lighting shall be constructed per Sections 715 and 992 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. 61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. Section]V.doc Page 122 of 128 9/9/2008 1 ;l 1 _l Section IV - Technical Specifications 62 TREE PROTECTION 62.1 TREE BARRICADES A. A protective barrier shall be placed around all protected trees and palms prior to land preparation or construction activities within or adjacent to the work zone, including all staging and/or lay down areas. Protective barriers shall be installed as follows: 1. At or greater than the full dripline of all species of Mangroves and Cabbage Palms. 2. At or greater than the full dripline or all protected native pine trees and other conifer species. 3. At or greater than two-thirds of the dripline of all other protected species 4. At or greater than the full dripline of trees within a specimen tree stand. & Protective barriers are to be constructed using no less than two-inch lumber for upright posts. Upright posts are to be at least four feet in length with a minimum of one foot anchored in the ground. Upright posts are to be placed at a maximum distance of eight feet apart. Horizontal rails are to be constructed using no less than one inch by four-inch lumber and shall be securely attached to the top of the upright post. The project City's representative must approve any variation from the above requirements. C. Whenever a protective barrier is required, it shall be in place until all construction activity is terminated. The area within the barrier limits shall remain undisturbed by any activity during construction. Native ground cover and understory vegetation existing within the barriers shall remain throughout construction. Exotic plant species may only be removed by manual labor utilizing hand tools or by other means if authorized in writing by the City's representative. D. Prior to the erection of any required protective barrier, all surface foreign material, trash or debris shall be removed from the area enclosed by the barrier, and after erection of the barrier no such material or litter shall be permitted to remain within the protected area. No equipment, chemicals, soil deposits or construction materials shall be placed within such protective barriers. E. No signs, building permits, wires, or other attachments of any kind shall be attached to any protected tree or palm. F. At all times, due care shall be taken to protect the critical root zone of trees protected by this section, and root pruning requirements shall apply to such trees. 62.2 ROOT PRUNING A. Where proposed construction improvements involve excavation and/or impacts to the critical root zone of protected trees, the Contractor shall be required to have an International Society of Arboriculture QSA) certified arborist perform, or directly supervise root pruning to reduce the impacts of construction. The critical root zone is equivalent to the tree's dripline. Prior to any clearing, grubbing or excavation activities, the affected roots must be severed by clean pruning cuts at the point where grubbing or excavation impacts the root system. Roots can be pruned utilizing specified root pruning equipment designed for that purpose or by hand digging a trench and pruning roots with a pruning saw, chain saw or other equipment designed for tree pruning. Root pruning by trenching equipment or excavation equipment is strictly prohibited. Roots located in the critical root zone that will be impacted by I SectionIV.doc Page 123 of 128 9/9!2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications construction activities shall be pruned to a minimum depth of 18 inches below existing grade or to the depth of the proposed impact if less than 18 inches from existing grade. Tim Kurtz, Senior Landscape Architect is the City's Representative on Public Works projects for root Pruning issues and can be reached at (727) 562-4737, or through the construction inspector assigned to the project. B. Root pruning shall only be preformed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. C. Any proposed root pruning trenches shall be identified on site (i.e. staked or painted) inspected and approved by the City's representative prior to actual root pruning. D. Root pruning shall be preformed as far in advance of other construction activities as is feasible, but at a minimum shall be performed prior to ANY impacts to the soil. Associated tree protection measures should be implemented upon completion of said root pruning. E. If there is a likelihood of excessive wind and/or rain exceptional care shall be taken on any root pruning activities. F. Root pruning shall be limited to a minimum of ten inches per one inch of the trunk diameter from the tree base. Any exception, must be approved by the City's representative prior to said root pruning. G. Roots shall be cut cleanly, as far from the trunk of the tree as possible. Root pruning shall be done to a minimum depth of 18" from existing grade, or to the depth of the disturbance if less than 18". H. Root pruning shall be performed using a Doscocil Root Cutting Machine or equivalent. Alternate equipment or techniques must be approved by the City's representative, prior to any work adjacent to trees to be preserved. I. Root pruning shall be completed, inspected and accepted prior to the commencement of any excavation or other impacts to the critical root zones of trees to be protected. J. Excavations in an area where root are present shall not cause the tearing or ripping of tree roots. Roots must first be cleanly severed prior to continuing with the excavation, or tunneled around to prevent damage to the root. K. Tree roots shall not be exposed to drying out. Root ends shall be covered with native soil or burlap and kept moist until final backfill or final grades has been established. L. When deemed appropriate (e.g., during periods of drought) the City representative may require a temporary irrigation system be utilized in the remaining critical root zones of root pruned trees. M. When underground utility lines are to be installed within the critical root zone, the root pruning requirement may be waived if the lines are installed via tunneling or directional boring as opposed to open trenching. 62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING A. All tree pruning and/or root pruning on existing trees to remain shall only be preformed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. Furthermore, all tree work shall conform to the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2001, American National Standard for tree care operations - Tree, Shrub and other Woody Plant Maintenance - Standard practices (pruning) ANSI A-300. SectionIV.doc Page 124 of 128 9/9/2008 1 Section 1V - Technical Specifications B. Proper pruning techniques for all lateral branches of protected trees are required. Flush cuts (pruning cuts that remove the branch collar) and stub cuts (cuts that leave a stub on the tree) are improper techniques. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. ' C. No protected tree shall have more than 30 percent of its foliage removed. D. No protected tree shall be topped, hat racked or lion-tailed. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. E. Tree Trunks and limbs shall be protected. The use of tree spikes or other devices that damage trunk and bark tissue on protected trees shall be prohibited. Any protected tree that has been damaged in such a manner will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy ' growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. 63 PROJECT WEB PAGES 63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN If requested by the City, Engineer shall design the Project Web Site in accordance with the current City Web Site standards and styles. Project Web Site should include general project information as: Project Name & Number, Scope description, Location, Schedule, and Project Contacts. Note: Occasionally City modifies the general design of the City's Web Site, and the Engineer ' shall consult the City Webmaster for the current requirements, before designing or updating the Project Web Pages. 63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES Project Web Pages should conform to the W3C Web Accessibility Guidelines and US Section 508 guidelines whenever possible: http://www.w3.orggR/1999/WAI-WEBCONTENT-19990505/ / bttR://www.sectionS08.p,ov In particular, use of variable-width tables, user-adjustable/relative font sizes, ALT text for images, CSS whenever possible, etc. Accessibility should be a priority over design/aesthetics. ' 63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE The City's Sun and Waves logo should be used for everyday business, on all print and electronic material. It should be used on all internal correspondence, brochures, advertising, vehicles, apparel- and signage. It should be used only in the manner presented here, in the proportion shown here, with no alterations. It should not be condensed, lengthened, or otherwise distorted to fit a space. The logo is approved for use by city departments, and is not to be used by outside vendors without the permission of the City Manager, Assistant City Manager or Public Communications office. Electronic versions of the logo should be obtained from the Public Communications. This is for internal use only. SectionlV.doc Page 125 of 128 9192008 Section IV -'T'echnical Specifications 63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS Use of maps and graphics is recommended to illustrate the project; only approved graphics should be posted to the Project Web Pages. 63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS The site should also include an interactive form or other options to allow Public's input sent back to the City regarding the Project. 63.6 POSTING The site should be presented to the City's Webmaster for review and posting to the City's Web Server. Posting of the Project Web Pages to a different than City's Web server, if approved, should be coordinated with the City's Webmaster for resolving all accessibility and conformity issues. 63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES Unless otherwise specified and agreed Engineer is responsible for keeping the posted Web Pages up-to-date, by sending revisions and updates through the City Project Manager to the City's Webmaster for posting. SectionIV.doc Page 126 of 128 9/9/2008 Greenfield Environmental REPORT OF THE NESHAP INTERIOR RENOVATION SURVEY, SAMPLING AND EVALUATION OF ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS at the PIER 60 LIFE GUARD STATION 10 PIER 60 DRIVE CLEARWATER, FLORIDA June 2, 2010 GE Project Number 1051-1037 1 Submitted to: City of Clearwater ' Mr. Leroy Chin Parks and Recreation Department P.O. Box 4748 Clearwater, Florida 33758.4748 Prepared by: Greenfield Environmental, Inc. 432 3'd Street North St. Petersburg, Florida 33701 432 3111 Street North, St. Petersburg. FL 33701 • Phone: 727.896.1266 Fax: 727.896.1566 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY 1 The survey and laboratory analysis conducted at the Pier 60 life guard station in Clearwater, Florida indicated that none of the materials sampled were found to contain asbestos in amounts greater than one (1) percent. As such, no specialized asbestos handling or disposal techniques are required prior to or during renovation activities. 1 t TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Page 1.0 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1 2.0 FACILITY DESCRIPTION .......................................................................... ..............2 3.0 SURVEY METHODS AND LABORATORY ANALYSIS ............................................3 4.0 SUSPECTED ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS ...........................................4 5.0 DESCRIPTION OF MATERIALS .............................................................................5 6.0 CONCLUSIONS .......................................................................................................6 LIST OF APPENDICES APPENDIX A- LABORATORY ANALYTICAL RESULTS APPENDIX B- CERTIFICATIONS GE Project No. 1051-1037 1.0 INTRODUCTION A survey for asbestos-containing materials (ACMs) was conducted by Greenfield Environmental, Inc. (GE) at the interior of the Pier 60 lifeguard station in Clearwater. The survey was performed on May 18, 2010 by Jeff Summers, Accredited EPA Asbestos Inspector. Greenfield Environmental, Inc. is a Florida Licensed Asbestos Consulting Firm with a corresponding license number of ZA-0000268. The survey was conducted in order to identify any asbestos-containing materials which mayexist priorto renovation activities in accordance with the National Emissions Standard for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP) Regulation. More specifically, our scope of services for this project consisted of the five following steps: - Site Walk-Through and Observations, - Bulk Sampling of Suspect ACMs, - Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) Analysis of Bulk Samples, Hazard Assessment and Evaluation, and - Final Report Development. The findings of this report represent Greenfield Environmental, Inc.'s (GE) best professional judgement and no other warranty is expressed or implied. This report is intended only for the use of the CITY OF CLEARWATER and its agents. The contents should not be relied upon by any other parties without the expressed written consent of GE. 1 I GE Project No_ 1051-1037 2.0 FACILITY DESCRIPTION The life guard station was observed to be a wood structure elevated on pylons with a metal ' roof. Interior finishes consist of drywall, carpet, knockdown texture, ceramic tiles and wood ' floors. The doors were metal and hollow wood. 2 GE Project No. 1051-1037 3.0 SURVEY METHODS AND LABORATORY ANALYSIS The sampling conducted in this asbestos survey was performed in accordance with Title 40, Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Part 763 for suspect AGMs. The EPA regulations require that sample locations be randomly selected. All suspect asbestos-containing materials and PACM (materials presumed to contain asbestos under the OSHA Asbestos Rule, 29 CFR 1910) were identified and samples of each different material were obtained. The bulk sampling procedure utilized for collection of suspect samples required the establishmentof homogeneous sampling areas. A homogeneous sampling area is defined as an area of friable or non-friable material of similar type that appeared to be applied or installed during the same general period of time. All sample locations were identified with numbers corresponding to those listed in Section 5.0 " Description of Materials" of this report. Samples which were collected from these pre-determined homogeneous sampling areas were labeled and transported to Air Quality Environmental, Inc. (NVLAP No. 200957-0) for analysis. All samples were analyzed using EPA approved Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) coupled with dispersion staining. Properties such as refractive indices, birefringence, sign of elongation and extinction angle are unique to crystalline asbestos forms and are used to identify the type of asbestos mineral as chrysotile, amosite, crocidolite, anthophyllite, tremolite or actinolite. Percentages of the identified types of asbestos are determined by visual estimation. Attempts are made to mix the sample thoroughly to provide a more accurate percentage. Any material containing greater than one percent (1 %) by weight of any type of asbestos is considered by the EPA to be an ACM and if disturbed must be handled according to specific regulations. 3 1 GE Project No_ 1051-1037 4.0 SUSPECTED ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS The following is a summary of the materials sampled and tested during the survey and evaluation of the life guard station: • Drywall, Tape And Compound • Knockdown Texture 4 GE Project No. 1061-1037 5.0 DESCRIPTION OF MATERIALS The following is a description of the materials sampled at the life guard station: ' Homo. Area Sample Number Description/ Location Asbestos Content Friability Condition Approx. Quantity 01 Drywall, Tape and 1 02 Compound Located On No Asbestos Friable Good ------ 03 The Wall And Ceiling Detected Areas 2 04 05 06 Knockdown Texture Located On The Ceiling Areas No Asbestos Detected Friable Good ------ 5 GE Project No. 1051-1037 6.0 CONCLUSIONS The results of our observations and laboratory testing at the Pier 60 lifeguard station in Clearwater, Florida indicated that of the six (6) samples collected, none of the materials sampled were found to contain asbestos in amounts greater than one (1) percent. As such, no specialized asbestos handling or disposal techniques are required prior to or during renovation activities. 6 PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATIONS The discussions and conclusions contained in this asbestos survey have been-prepared and reviewed by the following environmental professionals. k ff Summers oject Manager AHERA Inspector #7ME09147701 IR012 Michael W. Rothenburg, PE Florida Licensed Asbestos Consultant #EA0000041 1 fl 1 APPENDIX A LABORATORY ANALYTICAL RESULTS \kAurc )rural ll it y ]EinivrLirio)jntinnteinitaill, 1[ inrlcd _'.. ?1.:: ? I_?rbnrrrrr.»-r .S<•,-? irrrt? ' 93'4; Srlt,In01C 13au1C1urd- Su»int,lc- flnrida 31?72 I?") .9S-(19(111 !':> 17_'7139 -(ri)or, Client Name: Greenfield Environmental Project Name: 1051-1037 City of Clearwater 432 3rd Street North Pier 60 Lifeguard Station St Petersburg, Florida 33701 Date Analyzed: May 24, 2010 Asbestos, Bulk Sample Analysis Test Method: PLM / DS - EPA Method 600/R-931116 Lab # Client # Sample Type Description % Asbestos % Other Fibers % Binders 109968 1 Drywall System texture layer NAD 100% Carbonates and Binders mat layer NAD 100% Cellulose powder layer NAD 10% Cellulose 90%, Gypsum and Binders 109969 2 Drywall System texture layer NAD 10(rCarbonates and Binders mat layer NAD 100% Cellulose powder layer NAD 10% Cellulose 90% Gypsum and Binders 109970 3 Drywall System texture layer NAD 100% Carbonates and Binders mat layer NAD 100% Cellulose powder layer NAD 10% Cellulose 90% Gypsum and Binders 109971 4 Surfacing Material white NAD 100% Carbonates and Binders 109972 5 Surfacing Material white NAD 100% Carbonates and Binders 109973 6 Surfacing Material white NAD 100% Carbonates and Binders }These samples were analyzed by layers Specific layer or romponentasttestos content is indicated when relevant. The EPA considers a material to be asbestos containing only if it contains more than 1 % asbestos by calibrated Visual Area Estimation (CA/AE). EPA regulations also indicate that Regulated Asbestos Containing Materials which are friable or may become friable. be further analyzed by point counting when the results indicate less than 10"K. asbestos by CVAE. Air Quality Environmental utilizes CVAE on a routine basis and does not include point counting unless specifically requested. Additionally. these results Analy/ed by, may not be reproduced except in full. This report data is to be interpreted only by the person (s) whom have collected the ^? samples. Furthermore. this report may nol be used as a claim to prodUrt certification- approval or endorsement by NVLAP.. (? NISI or any other agency of the Federal Government. tFloor Tile and other resinausly bound materials, when analyzed by EPA method, may yield false negative results because of \> nllgah?e 1'altinn limitations in separating closely bound fibers and in detecting fibers of small length and diameter. When a definitive result is Microscnhisi required. AQE recommends utilizing alternative methods of identification, including Transmission Electron Microscopy. Lab File Number: 16909 NVLAP Lab No. 200789-0 Analysis Pages 1 of 1 1 s. r n APPENDIX B CERTIFICATIONS tw, 35. r 1 I'le yY3Y,i ??_. r ? , I j ? 5 + F - 1? { y 11 F}:_ t lh;r f??7,'[F,?.>rF; lY"x:nFyi • °° .? d ? --• I ? rr11 - ti:.??`rr'?`wmrr?.'.'. + ; . ? ., :ai,f.; _ {Ia!efa ' ?i?:r'xF. _') ,?;e` ISMf?'{_... P^ ?: r>y t I' ; ' . cl, - .ajy ?a,y-. ?.? . '_ - ?1'c?°.`• ,s. y'. ti gy p ! 14, ' .,'..'"::'::•: _ 14+'::J,•, . ., .,. . ? .:. ,, -•-: _ o i nl K;F Vin Q , " , .. ,?: LL n y ,ma o a!t Q F .. •^? .?^•` y?'-r` t ' ' trr t i s ` - ° ? , t, . _ i ^ri - d1, IY '? . t s t 1 1 s --,; ?Lrh?.r.c.a?? ?r nuu?.rvr,55 htvu k'itUr'r:S?lUiVHL t(1~;IiULH'1lUiV { of ASBESTOS LICENSING UNIT (850) 487-1395 1940 NORTH MONROE STREET ~q0 ,.•r Y• TALLAHASSEE FL 32399-0783 GREENFIELD ENVIRONMENTAL INC MICHAEL ROTHENBURG 432 3RD STREET NORTH ST. PETERSBURG FL 33701 Congratulations! With this license you become one of the nearly one million Floridians licensed by the Department of Business and Professional Regulation Our professionals and businesses range from architects to yacht brokers, from boxers to barbeque restaurants, and they keep Florida's economy strong. Every day we work to improve the way we do business in order to serve you better. For information about our services, please log onto www.myfloridalicense.corn- There you can find more information about our divisions and the regulations that impact you, subscribe to department newsletters and learn more about the Department's initiatives. Our mission at the Department is: License Efficiently, Regulate Fairly. We constantly strive to serve you better so that you can serve your customers. Thank you for doing business in Florida, and congratulations on your new license! STATE OF FLORIDA AC# 4 6.861, D-FMP:RTME0 0F;': BU S IRE S:- AND P'FtOk SZONAL. R Gi7T;AT-,, ON Z 00.0'02216=.8 1,0/23/09 0902003. ASBESTOS' BUSTNE;SS 0•99,ANIZATZON G EENF;T ;ENU:I?tONMENTAL INC I$ ;LTQEIIS; P upde;' tl o provisions of ChA69 lift91021,0' 30 oyr. DETACH HERE 11 AC# !D f` 6 O £ STATE OF FLORIDA G 'kJ .r DEPARTMENT OF BUS N.ES;S .ANI].. k! 4ROSS-1ONPt RFGU, ATTION .. A'BEBO:.CEN;%tTG iiNTT SF.Q#L 0910 2302: .10./23/2.0:09 IQ.90-200343 IZA00002:68 The ASBESTOS BUSINESS ORGANIZATION Named below IS LICENSED Under the provisions of Chapter 469 FS. Expiration date: NOV 30, 2011 GREENFIELD ENVIRONMENTAL INC MICHAEL ROTHENBURG 432 3RD STREET NORTH ST. PETERSBURG FL 33701 CHARLIE CRIST CHARLES W. DRAGO GOVERNOR SECRETARY DISPLAY AS REQUIRED BY LAW REPORT OF THE GEOTECHNI CAI. INVESTIGATION CLEARWATER BEACH LIFE GUARD STATION CLEARWATER BEACH, FLORIDA Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated 0 R I G G E R S E N G I N E E R I N G S E R V I C E S IN C D R P D R A T E D Geotechnical Engineering 6 Construction Materials Testing City of Clearwater Parks and Recreation Department 100 S. Myrtle Avenue Clearwater, Florida 33756 Attention: Mr. Leroy Chin, Project Manager RE: Report of the Geotechnical Investigation Clearwater Beach Life Guard Station Clearwater Beach, Florida Our File: DES 106560 Dear Leroy: In accordance with your authorization, DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES, INC., investigated foundation conditions at the subject project in order to provide some input relative to potential existing pile capacities for consideration with the planned remodeling. Included herein is brief discussion of the results of our investigation and analyses. FIELD INVESTIGATION PROGRAM Our investigation was initiated with the performance of low strain integrity testing in an effort to obtain information as to potential pile lengths below existing grade. We retained the I h h l ti i f A d d d i d id i i e t e r eva on nc, to con uct t prov ua serv ces o pplie Foun ations Test ng, e test ng an ofpotential pile lengths. The results of their investigation are included in the attachments and reflect estimated pile penetrations varying from as little as 22.5 to 26.5 feet below existing grade. As noted in their report, it appears that the timber piles have a nominal 10-inch butt diameter which, for the length of pile indicated, would probably equate to a tip diameter of about 8 inches. Sarasota Clearwater Tampa Phone: 941.371.3949 12220 49th Street North • Clearwater, Florida 33762 Phone: 813.948.6027 Fax: 941.371.8962 Phone: 727.571.1313 • Fax: 727.572,4090 Fax: 813.948.7645 sarcffice@driggerseng.com clwoffice@driggerseng.com tpaoffice@driggerseng.com July 9, 2010 1 i 2 i i i i i i i i STANDARD PENETRATION TEST BORINGS To provide information on subsurface conditions, two (2) Standard Penetration Test (SPT) borings were performed at the locations identified on the attached Plate I. Standard Penetration Test borings were performed in accordance with ASTM D-1586. Logs of the test borings are included in the report attachments reflecting visual together with estimated Unified Soil Classification. The test borings also indicate Standard Penetration resistance values in tabular and graphical form for ease of interpretation. GENERALIZED SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS The results of our test borings indicate that the site of the life guard station is underlain by an upper unit of predominantly fine sands with variable shell content locally containing silt seams within the upper 10 to 12 feet below existing grade. The upper sands typically vary from loose to medium dense in consistency. Below depths of 12 feet, penetration resistance values generally diminished reflecting loose to very loose fine sands with variable silt and shell content. Boring B-2 encountered a unit of relatively soft silt in the 23 to 28 foot depth interval followed by very loose silty sands to the surface of the underlying limestone formation. The limestone formation was encountered as shallow as 29 feet and as deep as 33 feet below present grade. Each of the test borings was terminated within the limestone formation exhibiting consistencies varying from relatively soft to comparatively hard. Groundwater was recorded in the depth range of 4.2 to 4.8 feet below existing grade at the time of our investigation. Considering that existing grades average about EL 6.0 ft. (NAVD), this would place the average groundwater table at the time of our investigation at about EL +1.5 ft. (NAVD). EVALUATION Based on the results ofthe low strain integrity testing, it appears that the piles were generally terminated within relatively loose sand.at an average depth ofnear 25 feet. Of significance is the fact that the limestone formation is appreciably deeper and, therefore, it seems evident that the piles were not driven into the underlying limestone formation. ?riggers Engineering Services Incorporated 3 The writer conducted analyses in order to estimate the capacity of the piles based upon our geotechnical data. Based upon the results of our analyses, we would estimate that the piles should have an allowable compression capacity on the order of 10 tons and an allowable tension capacity of up to 5 tons. Based upon the writer's discussion with Mr. Chris Lee with McCarthy & Associates, Inc., we understand that structural analyses are currently in progress. Nevertheless, Mr. Lee indicated that required compression pile capacities may be on the order of 15 tons or higher depending upon final framing details and the results of wind load analyses. Accordingly, it would appear that the existing pile foundations would not have adequate capacity to sustain the additional loads associated with a vertical expansion of an additional floor to the life guard facility. Considering special limitations, additional pile support will need to be developed by utilizing micro-piles, or perhaps helical anchors. There are multiple types of micro-piles that could be considered that are offered by various specialty local contractors. At such time when additional load capacities are identified, we would recommend contacting these local firms who can provide design construct services with respect to their specialty foundation concepts. Specifically, I have worked with the following firms extensively over the years: Hayward Baker, Inc. (Contact: Jim Hussin, P.E.) 813-884-3441 (Tampa) Earth Tech, Inc. (Contact: Ron Broadrick) 813-909-8000 (Tampa) R.W. Harris, Inc. (Contact: Ron Harris, P.E.) 727-572-9200 (Clearwater) Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated 4 DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES, INC. appreciates the opportunity to assist you on this project. As structural analyses are advanced, we would be happy to assist in anyway that the structural engineer as may be needed to finalize foundation requirements. In the meantime, if you have any questions, please do not hesitate to contact the undersigned at your convenience. Respectfully submitted, DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES, INC. ?D s!c0??'p ?c•.• '6 r No. 16989 •• N I,?; FL Registration No. 16989 : *? * STATE OF FJD/cmc FJD-REP\106560 0'°'<OR1DP rc= tr ti Copies submitted: (2) City of Clearwater; Attn: Mr. Leroy Chin 1 `t YO' . NA• NG4 _ (1) McCarthy & Associates, Inc.; Mr. Chris Lee, F.E. (1) Fowler Associates Architects, Inc.; Attn: Mr. Stephen R. Fowler, AIA Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated a riggers, P.E. nt APPENDIX PLATE I - BORING LOCATION PLAN STANDARD PENETRATION TEST BORING LOGS APPLIED FOUNDATION TESTING METHOD OF TESTING Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated PLATE I - BORING LOCATION PLAN Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated 4 ri SCALE: 1" = 30' EXISTING PARKING LOT f0 REMAIN f - 5T F?? > ?sLITY 0 FREftAN EME OF NEW 51pEW4L.K£ o SST N_ T ?. T 777-7. B-1 TD f COL11'1? 71 IL v ? G FYIEW BLVD. LEGEND: STANDARD PENETRATION TEST BORING LOCATION DATE: 7/9/10 SHEET TITLE PREPARED BY I* I BORING LOCATION PLAN 6RIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES. INCORPORATED PROJECT NAME SHEET NO. CLEARWATER BEACH LIFEGUARD STATION REMODELING PLATE CLEARWATER BEACH FLORIDA STANDARD PENETRATION TEST BORING LOGS Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED Project No. DES 106560 BORING NO. B-1 Project Clearwater Beach Lifeguard Station Remodeling, Clearwater Beach, FL Location See Plate I Foreman M. B. Completion Depth To Depth 31-5' Date 6125110 Water 4.8' Time Date 6/25/10 w H STANDARD , J d 0- U! _ O m _J SOIL DESCRIPTION 0: z PENETRATION TEST " a w uJ BLOWS/FT. ON 2 O.D. W q o 2 a SAMPLER-140 LB. " ( M Q O HAMMER, 30 DROP SURF. EL: 10 20 40 60 80 0 7" Concrete Slab Dark grayish-brown Fine SAND with shell, rock and cemented sand fragments SP Li ht brown Fine SAND with shell fra ments SP =Q g Light brownish-gray Fine SAND SP . Light grayish-brown Fine SAND with shell 5 fragments SP m Brownish-gray Fine SAND with seams of gray 416/11 a: sand SILT SP/RAH Gra Fine SAND with shell fragments SP .v :•" Medium dense light brownish-gray Fine SAND 6/6/4 with shell SP 10 b :? Loose brownish-gray Fine SAND 3/2/5 v: with shell fragments SP L Fi SAND i ll f h h M m :' oose gray w some s ne ragments t e SP 1!1!1 I Very loose gray silty Fine SAND with some shell fr aments SM 15 Very loose gray to brownish-gray silty Fine SAND 1/1/1 with trace of shell fragments (SM) 20 1/0/2 Loose light brownish-gray slightly silty 25 Cti:?;i• rcaa Fine SAND with trace of shell fragments (SP-SM ) 3/3/2 t F1?1?1? Cream colored LIMESTONE 30 7/10/7 Remarks Casing Length DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED Project No. DES 106560 Project Clearwater Beach Life Location See Plate I Completion Depth 35.2' Date U_ N h" w 3 m CL w W in I I 1 SURF. EL: Depth To 6/25/10 Water 4.2' Time SOIL DESCRIPTION o a ri 2 -1w a. a a~ ma0 (nW M.B. Date 6/25/10 STANDARD PENETRATION TEST BLOWS/FT. ON 2" O.D. SAMPLER-140 LB. HAMMER, 30" DROP 10 20 40 60 80 0 ?; v Grayish-brown Fine SAND with trace of shell fragments SP Grayish-brown Fine SAND with shell fragments SP -v;v- Li ht ra ish-brown Fine SAND SP Light brownish-gray Fine SAND with shell fragments (SP) Loose gray and dark grayish-brown Fine SAND 4/4/6 with shell fragments (SP) Medium dense light brownish-gray to gray 5/10!12 Fine SAND with some shell fragments (SP) 10 b: U ' 6/10/8 v: Very loose brownish-gray Fine SAND 2/1/2 b ?. with some shell fragments (SP) Very soft gray sandy SILT 15 with some fine shell fragments (MH) 1 /1 /1 Very loose gray silty Fine SAND with some fine shell fragments (SM) 20 WH/WH/1 Soft gray sandy SILT with thin seams of Fine SAND (MH/SP) 25 1/1/2 V l il F SAND ery oose gray s ty ine with shell and limestone fragments (SM) 30 3/1/0 Cream colored LIMESTONE Remarks WH = Weight of Hammer Casing Length BORING NO. B-2 Station Remodeling, Clearwater Beach, FL ?? Foreman DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED Project No. DES 106560 BORING NO. 13-2 Project Clearwater Beach Lifeguard Station Remodeling, Clearwater Beach, FL Location See Plate I Foreman M.B. Completion Depth To Depth 35.2' Date 6125/10 Water 4.2' Time Date 6/25/10 F- H W o J ) L u SOIL DESCRIPTION URF. EL: w ° r z w O (L m a p STANDARD PENETRATION TEST BLOWSlF7.ON 2" O.D. SAMPLER-140 LB. HAMMER, 30" DROP 10 20 40 60 80 Cream colored LIMESTONE 35 50' 0.2 P enetrati on 40 4 5 0 5 55 60 65 Remarks WH = Weight of Hammer _ T Casing Length [l f] n n 1 APPLIED FOUNDATION TESTING triggers Engineering Services Incorporated Applied Foundation Testing AFT Board of Professional Engineers Certificate of Authorization No.: 7668 July 9, 2010 Report of Low Strain Integrity Testing ASTM D5882 Clearwater Beach Lifeguard Station Clearwater Beach, Florida AFT Project No.: 210062 Authored By: For: Mr. Jeffry A. Driggers, PE Driggers Engineering Services, Inc. 12220 49th Street North Clearwater, FL 33762-4306 c John E. Greis, P.E. Geotechnical Engineer FL Registration No.: 71592 Date: Michael K. Muchard, P.E. Principal Geotechnical Engineer FL Registration No.: 49290 2345 Success Drive 0 Odessa, Florida 33556 0 Ph (727) 376-5040 F ,'Fax (727) 376-5018 Applied Foundation Testing Page 2 Report of Low Strain Integrity Testing Report of Low Strain Integrity Testing (SIT) In General Accordance to ASTM D 5882 General Information Date: Jul 9, 2010 AFT Project No.. 210062 Project Description: Clearwater Beach Lifeguard Station 0- -T Client Name: Dri ers Engineering Services, Inc. Client Address: 12220 49th Street North, Clearwater, FL 33762-4306 Client Contact: Mr. Jeff A. Dri ers, P.E. Test Date: June 18, 2010 and retested on Jul 8, 2010 Test Equipment Manufacturer: FPDS-5 Sonic Integrity Test (SIT) System Manufactured by: The Netherlands Organization for Building Construction and Research NO AFT Field Personnel: John E. Greis, P. E. AFT Responsible Engineer: Michael K. Muchard P.E. Provided Dee Foundation Information Foundation Type Pile Number* Measured Pile Butt Diameter inches Measured Pile Diameter at Ground Surface (inches)** Timber Pile 1 9.8 9.3 Timber Pile 3 9.6 9.1 Timber Pile 5 9.6 9.1 Timber Pile 7 10.8 10.3 Timber Pile 8 10 9.5 Timber Pile 9 10.3 9.8 'Piles numbered in the field. See the attached field sketch of foundation layout for details. Pile butt is approximately 8 feet above round surface. Installation Records provided to AFT Soil Boring provided to AFT Yes ? Attached ? No El Yes Attached No ? Result s Summa Pile Impact Diagram Fi ure No. Estimated Wave Speed (fps) Pile Toe Reflection Depth Below Ground Level (ft) 1 1 12,400 23.5 3 2 12,400 26.0 2345 Success Drive r, Odessa, Florida 33556 r' ph (727) 376-5040 U Fax (727) 376-5018 Applied Foundation Testing Page 3 Report of Low Strain Integrity Testing 5 3 12,400 26.5 7 4 12,400 23.0 8 5 12,400 22.5 9 6 12,400 24.0 SIT Interpretation The testing sequence included accelerometer placement at several locations on the pile (please refer to ASTM D5882 for a detailed discussion of the test method). An aluminum block was attached to the side of the piles to provide a striking surface for hammer blows. Impacts were generated near the accelerometer location with a hand-held hammer and the wave characteristics evaluated. Many impact signals were obtained until only the most reproducible signals were collected on the field computer. Post processing consisted of exponentially amplifying the signals to overcome damping from skin friction and emphasize the toe reflection. Filtering was also performed on the signals to eliminate high frequencies or random noise. Since a data set obtained from each foundation is unique, there is not a standard method for interpretation. Therefore, these evaluations are largely based on industry recognized interpretation techniques, our experience, and engineering judgment. We have performed an interpretation of the velocity reflections for each pile and have presented our recommendations below. Please note sign convention for the figures (velocity responses) is positive downward. Depending on the boundary condition, the toe response could be represented as an increase of impedance (large end bearing with restrained toe). Conversely, a decrease in impedance (signified by a downward trend in the velocity trace) is associated with a toe, a discontinuity, or a soil stiffness decrease (decrease in shaft friction). A well defined toe reflection was evident in all of the piles tested which suggests good reliabily of the data. The depth to pile toe reported herein is based on a stress wave speed of 12,400 feet per second. This is a published wave speed value for timber piles and the recommended value by dynamic testing equipment manufacturers. However, the wave speed for timber is more inconsistent than other pile materials such as concrete or steel and is subject to variability. The estimated pile length is directly proportional to the wave speed. Varying the wave speed by 500 ft/s one way or the other would result in a change in estimated pile length by a couple feet + or -. Based on our review of the borings, the pile lengths determined from these SIT tests appear reasonable. The SIT data suggests none of the pile tips are in the limestone. In boring B-1 (North boring), limestone was encountered at 29 feet. Comparing to this boring, all pile tips would be in the loose sands just above the limestone formation. Comparing to B-2 (South boring), where the limestone was encountered at 33 feet, the pile tips would be in a very loose sand or soft silt several feet above the Limestone. 2345 Success Drive ? Odessa, Florida 33556 F? Ph (727) 376-5040 F Fax (727) 376-5018 n 11 Applied Foundation Testing Report of Low Strain Integrity Testing Page 4 It is more than likely these piles were installed with a basic gravity drop weight using a friction crane with free fall (common pile installation practice for small beach structures in the area). It would be quite possible that the piles would have been stopped before getting really seated into the competent limestone due to low driving system energy. We also inquired with some of the local pile drivers and were not able to find out which company drove the piles for this project. However we were told these lengths are similar to other nearby structures constructed by the contractors we contacted. Figure 1 - Pile 1 shows toe reflection 23.5 feet below ground level. 2345 Success Drive F Odessa, Florida 33556 r? Ph (727) 376.5040 ? Fax (727) 376-5018 i/? Applied Foundation Testing Page 5 Report of Low Strain Integrity Testing 0.5 I I 73.0 [iN [ ft 0.7 3)- I I i 0.5 )?.8 If 0 4 8 1 t 2 2 2 3 3 (a I Ground Surface Toe Reflection SITE Clcamvalcr Life Guard 12400(fVs] f:3 exn:5 re PILE TP3b Thu Jul 08, V7, Figure 2 - Pile 3 shows toe reflection 23.5 feet below ground level. 2345 Success Drive 11 Odessa, Florida 33556 ? Ph (727) 376-5040 (? Fax (727) 376-5018 Figure 3 - Pile 5 shows toe reflection 26.5 feet below ground level. )i?l Applied Foundation Testing Page 6 Report of Low Strain Integrity Testing 2345 Success Drive F, Odessa, Florida 33556 P. Ph (727) 376-5040 1-1 Fax (727) 376-5018 Figure 4 - Pile 7 shows toe reflection 23.0 feet below ground level. Figure 5 - Pile 8 shows toe reflection 22.5 feet below ground level. Applied Foundation Testing Report of Low Strain Integrity Testing Page 7 0-6 31.3 i f fin's (i Ground Surface I I 03 31.3 i NV 0.5 30.7 Toe Reflection 1/ 0 4 8 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 [ft SITE Cleanvaler Life Guard 12400(R/s] E7 exP:5 Ic PILE TP9b Thu lul 08, V7. Figure 6 - Pile 9 shows toe reflection 24.0 feet below ground level. 2345 Success Drive n Odessa, Florida 33556 F1 Ph (727) 376-5040 C"l Fax (727) 376-5013 4 View of Structure supported on timber piles rt •? 1?X3n ?Yt 4 View of piles. t 1 1 1 View of piles. 1 1 I"M1:'':.Y' •F•FF r ' -•? .., s ..ms s, h, 1 k i 5 ? d_I i fM rj R S E N G I N E E R I N G S E R V I C E S I N G 0 Geotechnicel Er.ginecring & Construction Materials Testing FAX TRANSMISSION COVER S14EET DATE: /.p /to -- - FAX: _ 7.'?7 - 371a - 5-2 WO S - - Y RE: ? f M z mc, ?? - SI-r,. OUR FILE: SENDER= Jeff Driggers -Project Engineer YOU SHOULD RECEIVE [ Lf J PAGE(S) INCLUDING TI-ITS COVER SmErT. IF NOT RECEIVED, PLEASE CALL: 727-571-1313 J vCr? n) &°, .. _ Gly_ (,u- t7 ?o s tin r G rr?? T? r ]` B1 u s t fv rnea rvv/tt- Ov" , MAIL COPY TO FOLLOW: [ ] YES I ] NO Sarasota Phoho: 941.371-3949 Fax: 941.371-8962 ar0ffkakbdA99a1s-e1)9..c0m clearwator 12220 49th Strect North - Clearwater, Florida 33762 Phone: 727.571.1313 • Fax: 727.572-4090 clWO(iKOCadrlggc rseng.com rampa ' Phone: 813,949,6027 Fax: 813.948.7645 t p a of i.c e? d ri ??. r $. e n g, t o m JUN-30-2010 09:47 DRIGGERS CLEARWATER P.001 JUN-30-2010 09:47 DRIGGERS CLEARWATER P.002 DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED Project No. DES 106560 BORING NO. B-1 Project Clearwater Beach Lifeguard Station Remodeling , Clearwater Beach, FL Location See Plate 1 Forema n M.B. Completion Depth To Depth 31.5' Date 6/25110 Water 4.$' Time Date 625110 R ? STANDARD U_ -+ °m w a SOIL DESCRIPTION o ?' w ir:i W PENETRATION TEST BLOWS/FT. ON 2° O.D. W r Q a SAMPLER-140 L$. c p W HAMMER, 30" DROP CIIRF FI eo in hA do an Ro 7" Concrete Slab Dark grayish-brown Fine SAND with shell, t= : rock and cemented sand fr2gments SP i ht brown Fine SAND with shell fro menu SP ht browns ra Fine SAND SP Li g Light grayish-brown Fine $AND with shell 5 f ments SP Brownish-gray Fine SAND with seams of gray 416/11 sand SILT SP/MH a:w SP f 1 raq n7ents OTy Fine SAND with shell ht brownish-gray Fine SAND Medium dense ti 61614 7 - g ith shell SP 10 Loose brownish ray Fine SAND 3/215 with shell fro menu SP 47 ' Loose gray Fine SAND with some shell fragments Sp 1/1/1 Very loose gray silty Fine SAND i i with some shell f aments SM 1s Very loose gray to brownish-gray silty Fine SAND 1{1f 1 i i with trace of shell fragments (S1W) Mi ll : ? 20 i ` `•. i 1/0/2 Xii?:• Loose light brownish-gray slightly silty y RI7gJ: Fine SAND with trace of shell fragments (SP-SM) L•1,?.. r E?ay: 3/3/2 p,L?tip= taiYf Cream oolored LIMESTONE 30 7/10/7 Remarks Casing Length JUN-30-2010 09:47 DRIGGERS CLEARWATER P.003 DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED , Project No. DES 106560 BORING NO. B-2 Project Clearwater Beach Lifeguard Station Remodeling, Clearwater Beach. FL Location See Plate 1 Foreman M. B. Completion Depth To Depth 35.2' Date 6/25/10 Water 4.2' Time Date 6125110 F. z L STANDARD L.' ° J SOIL DESCRIPTION 5 re x PENETRATION TEST a- J a BLOWS/FT. ON 2" O-D. W >- ¢ O C. It SAMPLER-140 LB. n to m < HAMMER, 30" DROP SURF. EL: 10 20 40 60 80 :.v Grayish-brown Fine SAND with trace of shell fra ments SP G i h b i ray s - rown F ne SAND with shell fragments SP ra ish-brown Fine SAND 3P 5 Light brownish-gray Fine SAND v:v with shell fragments (SP) ' Loose gray and dark grayish-brown Fine SAND 414/6 v: with shell fragments (SP) Medium dense light brownish gray to gray 5110/12 Fine SAND with some shell fragments (SP) 10 va .d 6/10/8 s' `?:Q Very loose brownish-gray Fine SAND i h 2/1/2 some shell fragments (SP) w t T Very soft gray sandy SILT 15 with some fine shell fragments (MH) 1/111 Very loose gray silty Fine SAND with some fine shell fragments (SM) 20 WH/WH/1 P, Soft gray sandy SILT i with thin seams of Fine SAND (MH/SP) 25r 1/1/2 Very loose gray silty Fine SAND with shell and limestone fragments (SM) 30 311/0 !:: # I Ll I I Cream colored LIMESTONE LI U Remarks WH = Weight of Hammer Casing Length 1 J 1 1 JUN-10-2010 09:47 BRIGGERS CLOhnWATER P.004 DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED 1 1 1 Project No. DES 106560 BORING NO. B-2 Project Clearwater Beach Lifeguard Station Remodeling, Clearwater Beach, FL Location See Plate I Foreman M.B. Completion DT h To Depth 35.2' Date 6/25/10 Water 4.2' Time Date 5125/10 i o } H uJ a y OIL DESCRIPTION URF. EL_ z uuJ O n y w W;i w O a m o Q to ? STANDARD PENETRATION TEST BLOWS/FT. ON 2" O.D. SAMPLER-140 LB. HAMMER, 30- DROP 10 20 40 608 0 Cream colored LIMESTONE 35 50' 0.2' P enetrat ion 40 45 50 55 60 6.5 Remarks WH = Weight of Hammer T - Casing Length -?? TOTAL P.004 ?l -IL-il ??AAO?) I L-] (?) ?, I I FO-1 J01 - ON 133rOUJ 'ON J I 1 0 z ? U N O II 1 v? v? O O e`s7 a. Q o!, u? of O z , w 4 , U J 17 PZ3 ir= ? O J Lmu ED M Q - I R ?? z w-Ar U.1 O ?Q Q ?r z 0 OL ?W ICI liii T *n V VI? ED C-D x EX15TING R5T ROa FACILITY TO REMAIN I-oil 1 M 1-i) 1 ,e e 291- QII I --'----I I ?- -- ---T I ? 1 I? f 1 I I ? ;/1 ' I 11 I I L _ J 1 / 1 I - I I EXF 1 ST. CTUf I I J 1 -T T1 1 G EX15TING PAVE TO REMAIN , it .<.: Il? METHOD OF TESTING Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated STANDARD PENETRATION TEST AND SOIL CLASSIFICATION .. STANDARD PENETRATION TEST (ASTM D-1586) WATER TABLe FINE SAND MUCK ,AYEY FINE SAND In the Standard Penetration Test borings, a rotary drilling rig is used to advance the borehole to the desired test depth. A viscous drilling fluid is circulated through the drill rods and bit to stabilize the borehole and to assist in removal of soil and rock cuttings up and out of the borehole. Upon reaching the desired test depth, the 2 inch O.D. split barrel sampler or "split-spoon", as it is sometimes called, is attached to an N- size drill rod and lowered to the bottom of the borehole. A 140 pound hammer, attached to the drill string at the ground surface, is then used to drive the sampler into the formation. The hammer is successively raised and dropped for a distance of 30 inches using a rope and "cathead" assembly. The number of blows is recorded for each 6 inch interval of penetration or until virtual refusal is achieved. In the above manner, the samples are ideally advanced a total of 18 inches. The sum of the blows required to effect the final 12 inches of penetration is called the blowcount, penetration resistance of "N" value of the particular material at the sample depth. After penetration, the rods and sampler arc retracted to the ground surface. where the core sample is removed, sealed in a glass jar and transported to the laboratory for verification of field classification and storage. 4 ---'N" VALUE OR 6 BLOW COUNT 7 21 SOIL SYMBOLS AND CLASSIFICATION Soil and rock samples secured in the field sampling operation were visually classified as to texture, color and consistency. Soil classifications are presented descriptively and symbolically for ease of interpretation. The stratum identification lines represent the approximate boundary between soil types. In many cases, this transition may be gradual. I L TY FINE SAND Consistency of the soil as to relative density or undrained shear SHELBY TUBE STRATUM strength, unless otherwise noted, is based upon Standard Penetration SANDY CLAY CHANGE resistance values of "N" values and industry-accepted standards. "N" values, or blowcounts, are presented in both tabular and graphical form °. r on each respective boring log at each sample interval. The graphical CLAY plot of blowcount versus depth is for illustration purposes only and does not warrant continuity in soil consistency or linear variation between sample intervals. 4YEY LIMESTONE The borings represent subsurface conditions at respective boring Z 1 N DY LIMESTONE locations and sample intervals only. Variations in subsurface conditions 50/0.3 may occur between boring locations. Groundwater depths shown CORE RUN represent water depths at the dates and time shown only. The absence LIMESTONE Z_DENOTES of water table information does not necessarily imply that groundwater 50 BLOWS -FOR : was not encountered. 0.3' PENETRAT I ON QUALIFICA'T'ION APPLICATION OF PROSPECTIVE BIDDER CITY OF CLEARWATER CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS TO: City of Clearwater Engineering Dept./Construction Division Attn: Alice Eckman, Construction Specialist 100 So. Myrtle Ave., Ste #220 Clearwater, Florida 33756 or (PO Box 4748, Clearwater, FL. 33758--4748) DATE: PURPOSE: To provide the City with reasonable assurance that the prospective bidder on City of Clearwater formal construction contracts has the financial assets, resources, work force, and work experience to successfully complete contemplated construction contract agreements with the City. CONTRACTOR FIRM NAME: BUSINESS ADDRESS: CITY - STATE - ZIP CODE: PHONE NUMBER: FAX NUMBER- E-MAIL ADDRESS: TYPE OF ORGANIZATION: (Individual, Corporation, Partnership, etc.) LIST ALL PRINCIPALS OF ORGANIZATION: (President, Vice-President, Secretary-Treasurer, Partner, etc.) DATE ORGANIZATION BEGAN UNDER PRESENT NAME: OTHER NAMES AND DATES UNDER WHICH ORGANIZATION EXISTED: REFERENCES: 1 CONTRACTOR'S LICENSE NUMBER: INDIVIDUAL HOLDING LICENSE: ISSUING AUTHORITY: CLASSIFICATION OF LICENSE: HAS YOUR FIRM EVER FAILED TO COMPLETE WORK AWARDED TO YOU? IF SO, WHERE AND WHY? NUMBER OF FULL TIME EMPLOYEE'S DIRECTLY ON APPLICANTS PAYROLL: PRESENT VALUE OF AND GENERAL TYPE OF ALL CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATIONAL EQUIPMENT DIRECTLY OWNED BY THE APPLICANT (INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MOST RECENT FINANCIAL STATEMENT & INCLUDE LONG TERM LEASE/PURCHASE EQUIPMENT): The pre-qualification to bid limitation is an amount of dollars equal , to the amount of the largest single construction project which has been successfully completed by the Contractor. The pre-qualification amount is limited to the particular construction categories in which ' the Contractor is approved to perform work. This pre-qualification amount may be adjusted as the Contractor may successfully complete larger construction projects. The Contractor may exhibit where two or more similar projects were substantially accomplished by the ' Contractor at the same time where the aggregate amount of these projects in excess of the largest single project accomplished. This aggregate amount will be considered as the pre-qualification amount , up to an amount equal to 1500 of the largest single project amount. Pre--qualification amounts and categories may be limited as warranted by the City's experience with the Contractor's construction projects. LARGEST SINGLE PROJECT COMPLETED BY THE CONTRACTOR: ' 1. AMOUNT: $ ' 2. DATE OF COMPLETION: 3. TYPE OF WORK: 4. OWNER/REREPRESENTATIVE: Address: Phone Number Email Address Fax Number 1 1 1 11 1 1 ALTERNATE PRE-QUALIFICATION AMOUNT IS BASED ON THE AGGREGATE TOTAL AMOUNT OF CONCURRENT PROJECTS COMPLETED BY CONTRACTOR WITH A MAXIMUM AMOUNT OF 150% OF LARGEST SINGLE PROJECT LISTED ABOVE. LARGEST AGGREGATE AMOUNT COMPLETED BY CONTRACTOR WHERE WORK WAS PERFORMED AT THE SAME TIME: Total aggregate amount determined from project list below) PROJECT 1 PROJECT 2 PROJECT 3 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1 2 3 4 5 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. AMOUNT: $ DATE OF START OF WORK: DATE OF COMPLETION: TYPE OF WORK: OWNER/REPRESENTATIVE:_ Telephone Number: Address: Email: AMOUNT: $ DATE OF START OF WORK: DATE OF COMPLETION: TYPE OF WORK: OWNER/REPRESENTATIVE:_ Telephone Number: Address: Email AMOUNT: $ DATE OF START OF WORK: DATE OF COMPLETION: TYPE OF WORK: OWNER/REPRESENTATIVE:_ Telephone Number: Address: Email Fax Fax THE FOLLOWING THREE ADDITIONAL ITEMS ARE TO ACCOMPANY THIS APPLICATION: 1. A current Financial Statement for your company which will be returned uncopied upon completion of review. 2. A list of major projects completed (each project is to include type of work, dollar volume, name and phone/fax ' number of project representative or owner w/email address). 3. Three letters of reference are requested from owners your company has performed work for. The reference letters shall be on the owner's letterhead and contain the following information: A.) Location and type of work. ' B.) Dollar volume with your company. C.) Project owner's name, address & phone number. D.) E.) Surety Company involved, if any. Consulting Engineer or Architect, address and phone/fax number. F.) Start and completion dates. Pre-qualification is limited to particular construction categories ' or construction activities in which the Contractor has successfully 3 1 Fax completed construction projects or extensive work in the category in conjunction with larger project work- Following are the general categories of construction work which are available for contractor pre-qualification approval by the City of Clearwater. Check those categories for which your firm is seeking pre-qualification approval. To receive approval in a particular construction category, your application must contain documentation of successfully completed work experience in that category. This documentation is to be included in your firm's completed project list as described above. In addition, your application must exhibit that your firm has sufficient equipment, resources, and employees on your firm's direct payroll to complete work as a prime contractor in each approved construction work category. Contractors with an insufficient work force or insufficient resources will not be approved for pre-qualification or will not receive pre-qualification in particular work categories. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE RESURFACING ..................... BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION AND MODIFICATION ............... COMMERCIAL BUILDINGS .............................. COMMERCIAL SWIMMING POOLS .......................... CONCRETE FLAT WORK (CURBS, WALKS, COURTS, ETC.).... CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT SERVICES. . . . . . . DEMOLITION ...................... _ _. ..........._ DESIGN BUILD . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . EXCAVATION/SITE WORK. . . _ . . . . . . .. . . . GUNITE RESTORATION ................................ HORIZONTAL DIRECTIONAL DRILLING. . . . . _ . . . . INDUSTRIAL PAINTING ................................ LANDSCAPE & IRRIGATION ........................... MARINE CONSTRUCTION. MARINE DREDGING .................................... ROADWAY AND PARKING LOT CONSTRUCTION... ............ SANITARY PUMP STATIONS ............................. SANITARY AND STORM SEWERS .......................... STORMWATER MANAGEMENT CONSTRUCTION ................. TENNIS COURTS ................................... - 4 URBAN STREETSCAPE ................................ ' WASTEWATER & WATER TREATMENT FACILITIES............ WATER AND FORCE MAINS .............................. WELL CONSTRUCTION .................................. 1 1 1 1 5 THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION IS TRUE AND CORRECT TO THE BEST OF MY KNOWLEDGE. FIRM: BY: (Please Type) SIGNATURE: TITLE: Owner, President, etc.) DATE: 6 RS.?.Qbsrr? q OF 1 ib0??? ? r,r yFf/ - 1 11 1 PARKS AND RECREATION DEPARTMENT July 28, 2010 CITY OF CLEARWATER POST OFFICE BOX 4748, CLEARWAIER, FLORIDA 3 3 7 5 8-4748 MUNICIPAL SERVICES BUILDING, 100 Sourn MYRTLE AvENuE, CLEARWATER, FLORIDA 33756 TELEPHONE (727) 562-4800 FAx (727) 562-4825 Zoning Dept- & Building Dept. D Planning & Development Services 100 S. Myrtle Ave. 2nd Floor Clearwater, FL 33637 JUL Z 8 +? '010 Subject: BCP2010-07481 DEVELOPMENT SERVICES DEPT Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel CITY OF CLEARWATER FEMA Elevation Certificate, Building Colors Roof Tile Colors To Whom It May Concern: This letter is to inform you our Land Surveyor - Deuel & Associates will be assisting in providing the information for the FEMA Elevation Certificate. The land surveyor will be coming out to the site and take elevations shots of the fiTST floor slab elevation once the new pilings and the concrete slab is poured. He will also take elevation shots of the existing second floor elevation. At this site visit he will take progress photos to be included with the report. Upon completion of the project he will come to the site and provide additional elevation shots and photographs of the completed building. This Elevation Certificate will be submitted to the City of Clearwater Building Department and to FEMA- Attached are color chips Pantone 4685 U will be the field color of the building and Pantone 4665 is the accent color. Barrel Vault Metal Roofing tiles will be manufactured by Gerald Roofing Technologies and we have provide a color chart of the standard barrel vault four stock colors we will be selecting from. Please see attached color chart. Should you have any questions please call our office. Q ? r J ? N Sincerely, > p *t -J 0 Ler:o Chin O 0 Park, Planning & Protect Manager W E Q > co CC: A, Kader, Parks & Rec. Dept. PANTONEO PAN ED z a S. Fowler, Fowler Assoc. Architects 4685 U 4665 U J a B. Barker, Deuel & Assoc. Oz0 V- O W ?N¢J a> a: - p O U oDVz¢ W II I c ?.. co r "EQUAL EMPLOYMENT AND AFFIRMATIVE ACTION EMPLOYER" I Gerard Roofing Teehnologies - Stone Coated Steel Roofs Page 1 of I ' Gerard Roofing Technologies is a Metals USA company=111 n LS U S R Metals USA is one of the top 10 metal service center companies in North America, with approximately $1.8 billion in sales per year. BUILDING PRODUCTS PHOTO BUY OUR PRODUCTS Gerard Rooting Technologies Comparison Chart Real I.ife_Stories 19 Testimonials Rebates K I)iscounts Metals t!SA Wind_ Fire Ilail _ Safet)/V Veight ( Aor Chan Canyon Shake Tile_Barrel Vault Shingle 0 Granite Ridge Guardian Download Color Chart PDF File http://www.gerardusa.com/colors.shtmi 7/28/2010 To 5e?s.?y?yrn??. FOWLER ASSOCIATE ARCHITECT, INC. ARCHITECUTRAL TECHINCIAL SPECIFICATIONS Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel Project No. 10-0042-PR DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01010 - Summary of the Work .................................................................................3 Section 01042 - Coordination Reference Schedule ...............................................................3 Section 01205 - Procedures ..................................... .............................................................. 1 Section 01340 - Shop Drawings, Product Data & Samples . ..................................................1 Section 01370 - Schedule of Values ......................................................................................1 Section 01405 - Quality Control ............................................................................................7 Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities ................................. ...................................................2 ' Section 01631 - Products & Substitutions .............................................................................2 Section 01700 - Project Closeout ...........................................................................................1 Section 01720 - Project Record Documents ....................... ...................................................1 DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK Section 02110 - Site Clearing ............................................. ...................................................3 Section 02200 -- Earthwork ................................................. Section 02280 - Termite Control ........................................ ...................................................8 ...................................................2 Section 02660 - Exterior Water Systems ............................ ...................................................4 Section 02720 - Storm Sewage Systems ............................. ...................................................3 Section 02730 - Sanitary Sewage Systems ......................... ...................................................3 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE Section 03310 - Concrete Work .............................................................................................4 Section 03410 - Structural Pre-cast Concrete ........................................................................7 DIVISION 4- MASONRY Not Used DIVISION 5 - METALS Section 05700 - Ornamental Metal Work ..............................................................................3 DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS Section 06101 - Rough Carpentry ..........................................................................................5 Section 06113 - Gypsum Sheathing .......................................................................................2 Section 06192 - Prefabricated Wood Trusses ........................................................................4 Section 06201 - Finish Carpentry & Millwork ......................................................................4 DIVISON 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07100 - Waterproofing ..............................................................................................2 Section 07175 - Water Repellents ........................................................................... ......3 Section 07193 - Elastic Sheet Vapor Barriers .......................................................................2 1 Table of Contents Section 07200 - Insulation .................................... .............. ................................................... 4 Section 07316 - Metal Roofing Tiles ...................................... .................................•----•--..3 Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal ............................................................................3 Section 07700 - Roof Specialties and Accessories ................................................................2 Section 07715 - Gutters and Downspouts ..............................................................................3 Section 07900 - Joint Sealers ............................................................•---..--.---...................-•---.6 DIVISION 8 - DOORS, WINDOWS AND GLASS Section 08110 - Steel Doors & Frames ................................................... ...............................4 Section 08702 - Special Security Door Hardware .................................................................2 Section 08711 -Hardware Schedule: ..................................................................................... 6 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES Section 09200 - Lath and Plaster ................................................. Section 09250 - Gypsum Drywall------------------------------------------------ Section 09623 - Anti-Graffiti Coatings ........................................ Section 09650 - Resilient Flooring ............... ....... Section 09900 - Painting .............................................................. Section 09963 - Water Repellent & Anti-graffiti Coating........... Section 09901 - Painting Schedule .............................................. DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES Section 10155 - Toilet Compartments ......................................... Section 10800 - Toilet Accessories .............................................. DIVISION 11- EQUIPMENT Not Used DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS Not Used DIVISION 13 -- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Not Used .........................................5 .........................................5 ......................................... 7 ....................................... _4 .................................. ......6 .........................................7 .........................................10 ................................... • --...6 .........................................2 DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS Section 14420 --- Wheelchair Stair Lifts: .......................................................... DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL Section 15400 - Plumbing: ........... ................................................................... Section 15500 - Air Conditioning, Heating & Ventilating: ............................. DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL Section 16000 - Electrical: .............................................................................. ...............11 --------------6 ..............7 ............ 9 Table of Contents I SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF THE WORK 1 u 1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. THE WORK INCLUDES: Remodeling and addition to the existing Life Guard Station to include: ground floor concrete slabs, upper floor kitchen, showers, toilets, locker, HVAC, Electrical and Plumbing, and related site work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING: A. The Contractor, upon receiving notice that he has been awarded the Contract for the construction of the project, shall make an appointment with the Architect's Representative to establish a time and place for this meeting. The Contractor shall also instruct his plumbing, Mechanical and Electrical Subcontractors (or their representatives) and any other subcontractors he may wish to attend this meeting. The Contractor shall bring to this meeting the following information: 1. Required Documents not yet submitted. 2. Project Construction Schedule. 11 3. Complete List of Subcontractors (for all phases of the work), including those not previously submitted with the Bid Form. 3. BUILDING LAYOUT: A. The Contractor shall immediately, upon entering project site for purpose of beginning work, locate alt general reference points and take necessary action to prevent their destruction; lay out his own work and be responsible for all lines, elevations and building measurements, grading, utilities and other work executed by him under the Contract. B. The Contractor must exercise proper precaution to verify figures shown on the Drawings before layout work and will be held responsible for any error resulting from his failure to exercise such precautions. 4. LOCATION SURVEY: A. Not required. SUMMARY OF THE WORK. oioia1 5. INFORMATION NEEDED FOR COLOR SCHEDULES: A. Not later than 30 calendar days after authorization to proceed with contract work, submit to Architect names of all manufacturers and trade names for all materials involving selection based upon color or texture which are proposed for actual use in building and which are not already specified or shown on the Drawings. B. Where samples are necessary to such selection, furnish same. This applies to all such items as paint, plastic, composition flooring, hard tile and any other items involving color. Color items even in the same range vary among different manufacturers' actually intended for use in work. C. Color harmony demands that schedules not be prepared on piecemeal basis. Architect will require, therefore, that information on all items be submitted before selections and/or schedules are furnished on any items. If such information is not furnished by Contractor within 30 day period, Architect will select colors and textures from products named in Specifications, and Contractor shall furnish and install selected products. 6. SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS REGARDING MECHANICAL, PLUMBING AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. A. Mechanical, Plumbing and Electrical Drawings are generally diagrammatic and do not show in detail all offsets in fittings, ductwork, piping, raceways, etc. to properly and completely install the work, nor do they show all dimensions. Furnish and install all items required for a complete first-class installation or that essential for proper operation of work indicated. Verify all measurements at the job site. Where space is critical, install work so as to take up a minimum of space; material required to properly accomplish this shall be furnished and installed without additional cost to Owner. B. Before starting work, examine the Architectural, Structural, Electrical, Mechanical and Plumbing Drawings and coordinate the work of each section with the work of others. Where interferences appear and departures from indicated arrangements are required, consult with trades involved and come to an agreement as to necessary changes in location of any items and obtain approval from the Architect for the proposed changes. C. Should interference develop involving work already installed, the Architect shall decide which equipment, piping, ductwork, etc. must be relocated regardless of which was installed first. SUMMARY OF THE WORK 01010-2 D. Provide trenching and backfilling required for the installation of the work. 7. SAFETY AND HEALTH STANDARDS: A. The performance of all construction under this Contract shall conform to the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Standard. 8. NEGLIGENCE AND ERRORS: A. Any cost due to additional work or expense incurred through negligence or errors on the part of the Contractor or his Subcontractors requiring additional expense on the part of the Architect shall be paid for by the Contractor. The Architect shall be reimbursed for his services at the rate of $75.00 per hour. 9. MAINTENANCE MANUAL: A. Prior to final payment, submit brochure, in duplicate, presenting full details of care and maintenance for equipment furnished and installed under this Contract. END OF SECTION SUMMARY OF THE WORK 01010-3 1 1 SECTION 01042 COORDINATION REFERENCE SCHEDULE 11 l 7 I 1.01 Reference schedule below is intended as an aid to the user in coordinating the requirements of each section of the specifications. Reference schedule may not necessarily list all of the requirements. It is the Contractor's responsibility to verify the schedule with each individual specification section. Specification requirements numbered in the Reference Schedule are referenced by that number directly to the List of Project Requirements. 1.02 LIST OF PROJECT REQUIREMENTS: 1. Schedules 2. Shop Drawings 3. Product Data 4. Samples 5. Manufacturer's Instructions 6. Certificates 7. Mockups 8. Inspection and Testing 9. Record Documents 10. Operating and Maintenance Data 11. Guaranty 12. Spare Parts & Material 13. Allowances Section Title Requirements 1.03 REFERENCE SCHEDULE: DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK 02110 02200 Site Clearing ................••--•--........--•--..........-•---.................. Earthwork .8, 02280 Termite Control .---•-••-• .................................................... 11, ' 02444 02513 Chain Link Fencing and Gates ........................................ Asphalt Concrete Paving .................................................. .3, ..8, 02514 Portland Cement Concrete Paving ................................... ..8, 02528 02660 Extruded Concrete Curbs ................................................ Exterior Water System ..---•-•--...----••--• .............................. ..3, ..8, 02730 Sanitary Sewage System ................................................. ..8, 02810 Underground Irrigation System ........................................3, 8, 02900 Landscape Work ...............................................................11, COORDINATION REFERENCE SCHEDULE 01042-I Section... , _ Title _ Requirements DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03310 Concrete Work ..................................................................2, 3, 8, 03410 Structural Precast Concrete ......................................2, 3, DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04200 Unit Masonry ....................................................................4, 7, DIVISION 5 - METALS 05120 Structural Steel .................................... 2 6 8 05210 Steel Joists and Joist Girders ....................................2, 6, 8, 05300 Metal Decking ..................................................................2, 3, 6, 8, 05500 DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 Rough Carpentry .............................................................None 06113 Gypsum Sheathing ..........................................................3 06192 Prefabricated Wood Trusses ...........................................2, 3, 06200 Finish Carpentry .............................................................None DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07100 Waterproofing .............................................................. 3, 07115 Sheet Waterproofing .................................................... 3, 07120 Fluid-Applied Waterproofing ...................................... 3, 07140 Metal Oxide Waterproofing .................................. 3, 07160 Bituminous Dampproofing ......................................... 3, 07175 Water Repellant ........................................................... 3, 07193 Elastic Sheet Vapor Barriers ................................. 07200 Insulation ..................................................................... 3, 07241 Exterior Insulation and Finish System ................... 3, 07410 Preformed Roofing and Siding ............................. 2, 3, 4, 6, 11, 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal ............................................ 2, 3, 5 07700 Roof Specialties and Accessories .......................... 3, 07900 Joint Sealers ................................................................. 3, 11, DIVISION 8 - DOORS, WINDOWS AND GLASS 08110 08305 08710 Steel Doors and Frames. Access Doors............... Finish Hardware ............ 2, ............................... 2, 3, 4, ............................... 1, COO A ON REFERENCE SCHEDULE 01042-2 Section Title Reguirements 08711 Hardware Schedule ...................................................... 1, DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09200 Lath and Plaster ........................................................... 3, 09250 Gypsum Drywall ......................................................... 6, 09800 Special Coating ........................................................... 3, 4, 09801 Textured Coating ........................................................ 4, 11, 09900 Painting .............................................. 09901 Paint Schedule ............................................................ 1, 3, 4, DIVISION 10 -- SPECIALTIES 10160 Toilet Partitions .......................................................... 2, 3, 4, 10905 Miscellaneous Specialties .......................................... 2, 3, 4, DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS None DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14300 Wheelchair Lift ...................................................... 2, 3, 5,6,8,9,11 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15400 Plumbing ..................................................................... 2, 3, 10, 11, 15500 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC) ................................................. 2, 3, 10, 11, DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16000 Electric ................................................................... 2, 3,10,11, END OF SECTION _ COORDINATION REFERENCE SCHEDULE _ 01042-3 SECTION 01205 PROCEDURES 1. PAYMENT REQUESTS, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, SAMPLES, AND OTHER SUBMITTALS DELIVERED DIRECTLY TO ARCHITECT'S OFFICE: A. When payment requests and other items specified above are delivered to the Architect's office in lieu of mailing, they shall be delivered directly to (and handed to) the Receptionist at the Architect's office. B. All items delivered directly shall be labeled and identified for project (Project name and location. Contractor's name, Action to be taken by Architect, Performance and location of materials in project) in same manner as items mailed to Architect. C. When requests and other items are delivered directly in any other manner, the Architect will not be responsible for their receipt of processing such items. END OF SECTION PROCEDURES 01205-1 1 SECTION 01340 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 1 u The Contractor is responsible for obtaining and distributing Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples as necessary after as well as before approval. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, the number of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples which the Contractor need submit and, if necessary, re-submit, is as follows: In the Case of Shop Drawings, such as for structural steel and steel joints, millwork, hollow metal doors and frames, window walls, storefronts, etc., submit ONE REPRODUCIBLE SEPIA TRANSPARENCY and TWO PRINTS of each drawing. The Architect will retain the print for his file and will return the sepia to the Contractor. Contractor shall be responsible for making and distributing his required prints of the approved drawings from the sepia transparencies. In the case of Product Data, such as illustrations, manufacturer's catalog sheets, schedules, etc., submit the number that the Contractor requires to be returned plus THREE which will be retained by the Architect. In the case of Samples, unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, the number which the Contractor need submit and, if necessary, re-submit, is ONE which the Architect will retain, ONE which the Architect will return to the Contractor for him to maintain at the job site, PLUS the number that the Contractor requires to be returned for his use and distribution. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples that are not stamped or otherwise clearly identified as having been reviewed and approved by the Contractor shall be immediately returned to the Contractor prior to Architect's review. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples shall indicate the name of the Project; description or names of equipment, materials and items; and complete identification of locations at which materials or equipment are to be installed. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples shall be accompanied with transmittal letter containing Project name, Contractor's name, number of drawings, titles, and other pertinent data. The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of all dimensions and quantities shown unless verification of questionable dimensions or quantities are requested from the Architect due to conflict or inconsistency of the Contract Documents. Verification of field measurements or conditions shall remain the responsibility of the Contractor. END OF SECTION SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 01340-1 11 1 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: SECTION 02110 SITE CLEARING A DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this Section. ' 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: ' A. EXTENT of site clearing is shown on Drawings. B. SITE CLEARING INCLUDES, but is not limited to: 1. Protection of existing trees. ' 2. Removal of trees and other vegetation. 3. Topsoil stripping. 4. 5. Clearing and grubbing. Removing above-grade improvements. 6. Removing below-grade improvements. C. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: 1. Earthwork: Section 02200. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS: A. PROTECTION OF EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS: 1. Provide protections necessary to prevent damage to existing improvements indicated to remain in place. 2. Protect improvements on adjoining properties and on Owner's property. 3. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to parties having jurisdiction. ' B. PROTECTION OF EXISTING TREES AND VEGETATION: 1. Protect existing trees and other vegetation indicated to remain in place, against unnecessary cutting, breaking or skinning of roots, skinning and bruising of bark, smothering of trees by stockpiling construction materials or excavated materials within drip line, excess foot or vehicular traffic, or parking of vehicles within drip line. Provide temporary guards to protect trees and vegetation to be left standing. SITE LEAKING 02110-1 2. Water trees and other vegetation to remain within limits of contract work as required to maintain their health during course of construction operations. 3. Provide protection for roots over 1-1/2" diameter cut during construction operations. Coat cut faces with an emulsified asphalt, or other acceptable coating, formulated for use on damaged plant tissues. Temporarily cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying out; cover with earth as soon as possible. 4. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain which are damaged by construction operations, in a manner acceptable to Architect. Employ qualified tree surgeon to repair damages to trees and shrubs. 5. Replace trees which cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by tree surgeon. 6. Where it is apparent, due to proximity of building or other improvements, that a tree marked "to remain" will sustain considerable root damage, consult Architect for instructions before proceeding. C. SALVABLE IMPROVEMENTS: 1. Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises where directed. PART 2-PRODUCTS Not applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SITE CLEARING: A. GENERAL: 1. Remove vegetation, improvements, or obstructions interfering with installation of new construction. Remove such items elsewhere on site or premises as specifically indicated. Removal includes digging out stumps and roots. 2. Carefully and cleanly cut roots and branches of trees indicated to be left standing, where such roots and branches obstruct new construction. B. TOPSOIL REMOVAL: 1. Strip topsoil to whatever depths encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with the underlying subsoil or other objectionable material. 2. Remove heavy growths of grass from areas before stripping. 3. Where trees are indicated to be left standing, stop topsoil stripping a sufficient distance to prevent damage to main root system. 4. Stockpile topsoil in storage piles in areas shown or where directed. Construct storage piles to freely drain surface water. Cover storage piles if require to prevent wind-blown dust. SITE CLEARING 02110-2 1 5. Dispose of topsoil off-site which cannot be reused as top soil. C. CLEARING AND GRUBBING: 1. Clean site of trees, shrubs and other vegetation, except for those indicated to be left standing. Completely remove stumps, roots, and other debris protruding through ground surface. 2. Use only hand methods for grubbing inside drip line of trees indicated to be left standing. 3. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. 4. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 6" loose depth, and thoroughly compact to a density equal to adjacent original ground. D. REMOVAL OF IMPROVEMENTS: 1. Remove above-grade and below-grade improvements necessary to permit construction, and other work as indicated and as required. 2. Abandonment or removal of certain underground pipe or conduits may be shown on mechanical or electrical drawings, and is included under work of those sections. Removal of abandoned underground piping or conduit interfering with construction is included under this section. 3.02 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS: A. REMOVAL FROM OWNER'S PROPERTY: 1. Remove waste materials and unsuitable and excess topsoil from Owner's property and dispose of off site. END OF SECTION SITE CLEARING 02110-3 1 PART 1 - GENERAL SECTION 02200 EARTHWORK 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. ' 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. THE EXTENT of earthwork is shown on the drawings. 1. Preparation of subgrade for building slabs, walks, and pavements is included as part of this work. 2. Excavating and backfilling of utility trenches in building and within 5' outside ' building lines is included as part of this work. B. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: 1. Site Clearing: Section 02110. 2. Utility Trenching (Outside 5' from the building lines): Mech/Elec Divisions or other sections requiring such work. 3. Concrete Paving: Section 02514. 4. Asphalt Concrete Paving: Section 02513. 5. Concrete Work: Section 03310. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. CODES AND STANDARDS: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction. B. TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICE: Employ, at Contractor's expense, a testing ' laboratory acceptable to Architect to perform soil testing and inspection service for quality control testing during earthwork operations. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. TEST REPORTS: Submit 1 copy of following test reports directly to Architect from the testing and inspection service, with copy to Contractor. 1 _ Test reports on borrow material. 2. Field density test reports. 3. One optimum moisture-maximum density curve for each type of soil encountered. ' 4. Verification of suitability of footing subgrades. ' EARTHWORK 02200-1 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS: A. SITE INFORMATION: Data on indicated subsurface conditions are available for review at office of Architect, but are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity between soil borings. It is expressly understood that Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom by Contractor. Data are made available for convenience of Contractor. 1. Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be made by Contractor at no cost to Owner. B. EXISTING UTILITIES: Locate existing underground utilities in the areas of work. If utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate means of protection during earthwork operations. 1. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult utility owner immediately for directions. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner. 2. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by Owner or others, except when permitted in writing by Architect and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided. 3. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies for shut-off of services if lines are active. C. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards created by earthwork operations. 2. Protect trees, shrubs and other planting to remain after project is complete. Do not stock pile soil or cause unnecessary compaction or removal of soil within the root area of trees to remain on the site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL MATERIALS: BACKFILL AND FILL MATERIALS: Provide acceptable soil materials for backfill and fill. Provide relatively clean sand free of clay, rock or gravel larger than 2" in any dimension, debris, waste, vegetable and other deleterious matter, and with no more than 5% of total material passing the #200 sieve. Soil materials must be approved by testing and inspection service. EARTHWORK 02200-2 1 1 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. DO NOT START WORK UNTIL SOIL TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICE has been established, notified, and an inspector present at site. 3.02 EXCAVATION: A. EXCAVATION consists of removal and disposal of material encountered when establishing required grade elevations. B. STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS: 1. Slope the sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible either because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated. 2. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling. C. SHORING AND BRACING: 1. Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling, uprights, stringers and cross-braces, in good serviceable condition. 2. Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with local codes and authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open. Carry down shoring and bracing as excavation progresses. D. DEWATERING: 1. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into the excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area. 2. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey the water away from excavations. 3. Convey water removed from excavations and rain water to collecting or run-off areas. Provide and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits. Do not use trench exactions as temporary drainage ditches. E. MATERIAL STORAGE: 1. Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed, until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. EARTHWORK 02200-3 2. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. 3. Dispose of excess soil material and waste materials as herein specified. F. EXCAVATION FOR FOUNDATIONS: 1. Conform to the elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10'. 2. In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb the bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to the required lines and grades to leave a solid base to receive concrete. G. EXCAVATION FOR PAVEMENTS: 1. Cut surface under pavements to comply with cross-sections, elevations and grades as shown. H. EXCAVATION FOR TRENCHES: 1. Dig trenches to uniform width required for the particular item to be installed, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room. 2. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required. Carry depth of trenches for piping to establish indicated flow lines and invert elevations. 3. Grade bottoms of trenches as required, notching under pipe bells to provide solid bearing for entire body of pipe. 4. Back ill trenches with concrete where trench excavations pass within 18" of column or wall footings and which are carried below bottom of such footings, or which pass under wall footings. Place concrete to level of bottom of adjacent footing. 5. Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage or displacement of pipe system. 3.03 COMPACTION: A. GENERAL: Control soil compaction during fill and backfill for compliance with percentage of density specified for each area classification. Recommendations for subgrade preparations contained in the Soils Investigation Reports, if any, shall be complied with. Compaction shall be carefully observed and tested by testing and inspection service. B. PERCENTAGE OF MAXIMUM DENSITY REQUIREMENTS: Compact soil to not less than following percentages of maximum density for soils which exhibit a well- defined moisture density relationship determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557 (Modified Proctor Density). EARTHWORK 02200-4 1 1 L 1 1 1. Structures: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer ofbackfill or fill material at 95% maximum density. 2. Building Slabs: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95% maximum density. 3. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each 4. Walkways: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95% maximum density. 5. Pavements: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95% maximum density. C. MOISTURE CONTROL: I. Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade, or layer of soil material, to prevent free water appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compaction to specified density. a. Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying by discing, harrowing or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value. 3.04 BACKFILL AND FILL: A. GENERAL: 1. In all excavations and under building slabs, and under walks and pavements use satisfactory excavated or borrow material that has been sampled, tested and approved by soil testing agency. 2. Under grassed areas, use excavated or borrow material. 3. Spread 12 inches of topsoil material (stockpiled under Section 02110) over top of landscaped areas. 4. Fill landscaped planter islands with 12 inches of topsoil. B. PRIOR TO BACKFILL PLACEMENT: Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following. 1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade. 2. Inspection, testing, approval, and recording locations of underground utilities. 3. Removal of concrete formwork. 4. Removal of trash and debris. C. GROUND SURFACE PREPARATION: 1. Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills. Plow, strip, or break-up sloped surfaces steeper than I vertical to 4 horizontal so that fill material will bond with existing surface. EARTHWORK 02200-5 2. When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified under "Compaction" for particular area classification, break up the ground surface, pulverize, moisture-condition to the percentage of maximum dry density. D. PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION: 1. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than l2" in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4" in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. 2. Before compaction, moisten each layer as necessary to provide the optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to the required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area classification. 3. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, to required elevations. Take care to prevent wedging action of backfill against structures by carrying material uniformly around structure to approximately same elevation in each lift. 4. Take care to insure that backfill around foundation excavations and in trenches beneath slabs-on-grade or pavements is properly placed and compacted. 3.05 GRADING: A. GENERAL: Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this Section, including adjacent transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are shown, or between such points and existing grades. Bring grades to finish elevations given minus clearance for construction which is to be placed on the grade at the various locations. B. GRADING OUTSIDE BUILDING .LINES: Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away from structures and to prevent ponding of water. Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes, and as follows: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within elevations. 2. Walks: Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade and cross-section, with finish surface not more than 0.10" above or below the required subgrade elevations. 3. Pavements: Shape surface of areas under pavement to line, grade and cross-section, with finish surface not more than 1/2" above or below the required subgrade elevation. C. GRADING SURFACE OF FILL UNDER BUILDING SLABS: Grade smooth and even, free of voids, compacted as specified, and to required elevation. Provide final grades within a tolerance of 1/2" when tested with a 10' straightedge. D. COMPACTION: After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to depth and percentage of maximum density for each area classification. EARTHWORK 02200-6 t 3.06 PAVEMENT SUBBASE COURSE: A. GENERAL: 1. Subbase course consists of placing subbase material, in layers of specified thickness, over subgrade to support a pavement base course. a. See other Division 2 sections for paving specifications. B. GRADE CONTROL: 1. During construction, maintain lines and grades including crown and cross-slope of subbase course. C. SHOULDERS: 1. Place shoulders along edges of subbase course to prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders of acceptable soil materials, placed in such quantity to compact to thickness of each subbase course layer. Compact and roll at least a 12" width of shoulder simultaneously with compacting and rolling of each layer of subbase course. D. PLACING: 1. Place subbase course material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform thickness, conforming to indicated cross-section and thickness. Maintain optimum moisture content for compacting subbase material during placement operations. 1 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: 7 L A. QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION: Testing service must inspect, take field density tests and approve subgrades and fill layers before further construction work is performed thereon. B. MINIMUM NUMBER OF DENSITY TESTS: 1. Building area: 1 for every 3000 to 5000 square feet of subgrade and compacted fill layer. 2. Pavement areas: 1 for every 10,000 square feet of subgrade and compacted fill layer. 3. Backfilling of trenches: 1 for every 50 lineal feet. C. IF, based on testing service reports and inspections, subgrade or fills which have been placed are below specified density, provide additional compaction and testing at Contractor's expense. 3.08 MAINTENANCE: A. PROTECTION OF GRADED AREAS: 1. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. 2. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas. 02200-7 B. RECONDITIONING COMPACTED AREAS: Where completed areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify the surface, re-shape, and compact to the required density prior to further construction. 3.09 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS: A. REMOVE EXCESS excavated material, trash, debris and waste materials and dispose of it off Owner's property. I END OF SECTION E"THWORK ' 02200-8 1 SECTION 02280 TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL t 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: ' A. PROVIDE SOIL TREATMENT for termite control as herein specified. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. IN ADDITION TO THE REQUIREMENTS of these Specifications, comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work, including preparation of substrate and application. B. ENGAGE APROFESSIONAL PESTCONTROL OPERATOR, licensed in accordance with regulations of governing authorities for application of soil treatment solution. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS: ' A. RESTRICTIONS: 1. Do not apply soil treatment solution until excavating, filling and grading operations are completed. ' 2. To insure penetration, do not apply soil treatment to excessively wet soils or during inclement weather. Comply with handling and application instructions of soil ' toxicant manufacturer. 1.05 GUARANTEE: ' SUBMIT 2 COPIES of written guarantee certifying that chemicals having the required concentration and rate of application as hereinafter specified have been applied and that soil poisoning treatment will prevent attack by subterranean termites for a period of not ' less than 5 years, and, that if subterranean termite activity is discovered during guarantee period, Contractor will retreat soil and also repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. This guarantee shall be secured by a Repair Bond in the amount ' of $50,000 minimum for each occurrence and shall include provisions for Owner to renew Bond for an additional 10 years on a yearly basis. _ TERMITE CONTROL _ 02280-1 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL TREATMENT SOLUTION: A. USE AN EMULSIBLE CONCENTRATE INSECTICIDE for dilution with water, specially formulated to prevent infestation by termites. Fuel oil will not be permitted as a diluent. Provide a working solution of one of the following chemical elements and concentrations: 1. Chioropyrifos ("Dursban-TC"); 1.0% in water emulsion. 2. Permathrin ("Dragnet", Torpeo"); 0.5% in water emulsion. B. OTHER SOLUTIONS may be used as recommended by Applicator and if acceptable to local governing authorities. Use only soil treatment solutions which are not injurious to planting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION: A. REMOVE FOREIGN MATTER which could decrease effectiveness of treatment on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and foundations. B. APPLY SOIL TREATMENT SOLUTION at following minimum rate: 1. Within building area, with or without slabs-on grade, at rate of one gallon per 10 square feet. 2. Outside building perimeter, under aprons, pads, or paved extensions, at rate of one gallon per 5 square feet. 3. At hollow masonry foundations treat voids at rate of one gallon per 5 lineal feet, poured directly into hollow spaces. 4. At control joints, along both sides of foundation walls and areas where slab will be penetrated, at rate of 2 gallons per 5 lineal feet of penetration. C. ALLOW DRYING TIMEafter application of not less than 12 hours before beginning concrete placement or other construction activities. D. POST SIGNS in areas of application warning workers that soil poisoning has been applied. Remove signs when areas are covered by other construction. E. REAPPLY SOIL TREATMENT SOLUTION to areas disturbed by subsequent Excavation or other construction activities following application. END OF SECTION TERMITE CONTROL 02280-2 1 SECTION 02660 EXTERIOR WATER SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this Section. B. RELATED WORK specified elsewhere: 1. SANITARY SEWAGE SYSTEMS: Section 02730. 2. STORM SEWAGE SYSTEMS: Section 02720. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK. A. THE EXTENT of exterior water piping includes water piping shown on the Drawings, and includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following: I . Domestic water supply system. 2. Fire hydrant system. 3. Fire lines (automatic fire sprinkler system supply lines). 4. Lawn watering (irrigation) system. 5. Connections to existing municipal water supply including water meters and 1 detector meters (if required). 6. Excavation and backfilling. B. EXISTING STREETS & SIDEWALKS damaged during the work shall be patched and/or reconstructed to the satisfaction of the city. C. ANY PIPES, conduits, wires, mains, footings, or other underground structures encountered in trenching shall be carefully protected from injury or displacement. ' D. ANY SURVEY MONUMENT or bench mark which will be disturbed by this work shall be carefully witnessed before removal and replaced upon completion of the work by a registered land surveyor. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. INSTALLER: A firm specializing and experienced in water main system work for not less than 2 years. ' EXTERIOR WATER SYSTEMS 02660-1 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES: A. MATERIALS AND SUPPLIES shall be new and shall not have been in service at any time previous to installation, except as required in tests incidental to installer. B. REFERENCES toFederal,ASTM, ANSI, AWWA, or other standard specifications mean the latest revisions of such referenced specifications. 2.02 DUCTILE IRON PIPE (D.I.P.): Shall have minimum thickness of class 2, as defined by ANSI A 21.50, be in accordance with ANSI A21.51 and be coated outside with coal tar and inside shall be double cement lined and bituminous coated. 2.03 GALVANIZED STEEL PIPE (G.S.P.): SCHEDULE 40, ASA 836.10. Malleable iron fittings. Federal Specification WW-P- 521e. 2.04 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE: A. 4" DIA. AND LARGER: Shall be in accordance with AWWA C-900 for PVC pressure pipe for water and shall be AAWA DR 18. B. LESS THAN 4" DIA.: Shall be in accordance with ASTM D 1754 and ASTM D 2241. If pipe (less than 4" dia.) is for domestic water service use it shall have a standard dimension rate (SDR) of 21 or lower. 2.05 WATER METERS: As required by the governing authority. 2.06 VACUUM BREAKER: WATTS Cat. No. SA. 2.07 GATE VALVES: AWWA C500-61 and rated at 150 psi. Provide each buried valve with a suitable box to grade. 2.08 EXTERIOR LAWN FAUCETS: As shown on the Drawings. 2.09 FIRE HYDRANTS: As required by the governing authority. 2.10 FIRE LINE: Cast Iron Pipe, Ductile Iron Pipe or PVC Pipe which is approved for this purpose. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. INSTALLER MUST EXAMINE the areas and conditions under which exterior water piping is to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to ,EXTERIOR WATER SYSTEMS 02660-2 the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. 3.02 EXCAVATION: A. MAKE ALL EXCAVATIONS by open cut with banks of trenches kept as nearly vertical as possible. Trenches wide enough to allow approximately 8" clearance on each side of the utility; bottom uniform to provide accurate grade and uniform bearing for as nearly the full length of pipe section as practicable. Perform all excavations of whatever substance encountered to the depths required. In the event unsuitable or unstable soil is encountered, remove it and replace with gravel, crushed stone or crushed slag; thoroughly tamp. 03 BACKFILLING 3. : A. BACKFILLING: Shall follow guidelines recommended in UNI-BELL publication UNI-B-3 section 5.5.2 and as shown on the drawings. After pipes have been tested and have been approved, backfill the trenches with fine, loose earth, free from large clods or stones, carefully deposited on both sides of the utility and thoroughly compacted to the ' density of the adjacent undistributed soil until enough fill has been placed to provide a cover of at least V above the pipe. Place the remainder of the backfill in layers and compact to 95% of modified Proctor, ASTM D 1557. After backfilling, dress off trenches to conform to adjacent contours. If trenches are improperly filled or if settlement occurs, they shall be refilled and redressed. 3.04 WATER SYSTEM: A. GENERAL: 1. Installation of water lines shall be in accordance with the Drawings and in conformance with good current practice, and governing authorities having jurisdiction. ' 2. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign materials from entering the pipe while it is being installed. 3. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of the pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug. B. INSTALLATION OF DUCTILE IRON WATER LINES: Install in accordance with ANSI A21.50 and AAWA C-150 and applicable local regulations. C. INSTALLATION OF PVC WATER LINES: I. Pipe 4" dia. and larger shall be installed in accordance with UNI-BELL ' PLASTIC PIPE ASSOC. UNIT-B-3 STANDARD FOR THE INSTALLATION OF POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PRESSURE PIPE. 2. Pipe less than 4" dia. shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. EXTERIOR WATER SYSTEMS 02660-3 D. DISINFECTIONOFWATER LINES shall be in accordance with AAWA C601, State of Florida Health Standards, and applicable local regulations. Submit Laboratory reports of bacterial analysis on two acceptable consecutive samples. E. EXTERIOR LAWN FAUCETS: 1. All exterior lawn faucets shall be equipped with vacuum breaker as required by the governing authority. 2. Piping for the lawn faucet system shall be PVC except that risers from below grade to the faucet shall be galvanized steel pipe and installed as indicated on the Drawings. F. BUILDING SPRINKLER SUPPLY: 1. Shall be installed under DIVISION 15 .automatic fire sprinkler system. G. FIRE HYDRANTS: 1. Install in accordance with requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction. This includes the supply lines for the hydrants. 3.05 TESTING: A. PERFORM TESTING of completed conduit lines in accordance with local authorities having jurisdiction. END OF SECTION EXTERIOR WATER SYSTEMS 02660-4 SECTION 02660 EXTERIOR WATER SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification sections, apply to work of this Section. B. . RELATED WORK specified elsewhere: 1. SANITARY SEWAGE SYSTEMS: Section 02730. 2. STORM SEWAGE SYSTEMS: Section 02720. ' 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: ' A. THE EXTENT of exterior water piping includes water piping shown on the Drawings, and includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Domestic water supply system. 2. Fire hydrant system. 3. Fire lines (automatic fire sprinkler system supply lines). 4. Lawn watering (irrigation) system. 5. Connections to existing municipal water supply including water meters and detector meters (if required). 6. Excavation and backfilling. B. EXISTING STREETS & SIDEWALKS damaged during the work shall be patched and/or reconstructed to the satisfaction of the city. C. ANY PIPES, conduits, wires, mains, footings, or other underground structures encountered in trenching shall be carefully protected from injury or displacement. D. ANY SURVEY MONUMENT or bench mark which will be disturbed by this work shall be carefully witnessed before removal and replaced upon completion of the work by a registered land surveyor. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. INSTALLER: A firm specializing and experienced in water main system work for not less than 2 years. EXTERIOR WATER SYSTEMS 02660-1 s B. REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE(RCP): ASTM C 76, Class III with modified tongue- and-groove compressiongasket joints complying with ASTM C 443. C. POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE: ASTM D 3034. D. DUCTILE IRON PIPE: As per City Specifications. 2.02 CONCRETE STRUCTURES: A. CATCH BASINS: As detailed on the Drawings. B. USE 3000# CONCRETE, and steel reinforcing as specified in SECTION 03310. 2.03 METAL ACCESSORIES: A. CATCH BASIN FRAMES AND GRATINGS: Grey cast iron, ASTM A 48, Class 30 B, H-20 loading in traffic areas. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. INSTALLER MUST EXAMINE the areas and conditions under which storm sewer system work is to installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT: A. GENERAL: 1. Install conduit in accordance with DOT specification Section 430, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, or are required by local authority. 2.. Inspect conduit before installation to detect any apparent defects. Mark defective materials with white paint and promptly remove from the site. 3. Lay conduit beginning at the low point of a system, true to the grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. 4. Install gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. CONCRETE PIPE: Install in accordance with the following Florida DOT Specifications Sections: 1. For excavation: Section 125-4.4. 2. For backfill: Section 125-8.3. STORM SEWAGE SYSTEMS 02720-2 3.03 UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES: A. CONSTRUCT CONCRETE JUNCTION BOXES in locations shown on Drawings. 1. Set cast iron frames and covers to the elevations indicated on the Drawings. B. CONSTRUCT CONCRETE CATCH BASINS of the sizes and shapes and locations as shown on the Drawings. 1. Set cast iron frames and gratings to the elevations indicated on the Drawings. 3.04 BACKFILLING: A. GENERAL: 1. Conduct backfill operations of open-cut trenches closely following laying, jointing and bedding of pipe, and after initial inspection iscompleted. Refer to DOT Section 125-8.3. END OF SECTION STORM SEWAGE SYSTEMS _ 02720-3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. INSTALLER MUST EXAMINE the areas and conditions under which sanitary sewer system work is to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT: A. GENERAL: 1. Install conduit in accordance with governing authorities having jurisdiction, except where more stringent requirements are indicated. 2. Inspect conduit before installation to detect any apparent defects. Mark defective materials with white paint and promptly remove from the site. 3. Lay conduit beginning at the low point of a system, true to the grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. 4. Place bell ends of conduit facing upstream. 5. Install gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for the use of lubricants, cements, and other special installation requirements. 6. Install ductile iron pipe under building areas and minimum of 5 feet outside of building line. Beyond 5 feet outside of building line, PVC is optional. B. PVC GRAVITY SEWER PIPE: Install in accordance with applicable provisions of UNI-BELL PLASTIC PIPE ASSOCIATION UNI-B-5 Recommended Practice for the Installation of POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) SEWER PIPE and applicable local regulations. C. INSTALLATION OF DUCTILE IRON SEWER LINES: 1. Shall be in accordance with ANSI A21.50 and applicable local regulations. D. CLEANING CONDUIT: 1. Clean the interior of conduit of dirt and other superfluous material as the work progresses. Maintain a swab or drag in the line and pull past each joint as it is completed. 2. Place plugs in the ends of uncompleted conduit at the end of the day of whenever work stops. 3.03 BACKFILLING: A. GENERAL: 1. Conduct backfill operations of open-cut trenches closely following laying, jointing and bedding of pipe, and after initial inspection and testing are completed. SANITARY SEWAGE SYSTEMS 02730-2 2. Place backfill in thin layers as required to achieve compaction specified. B. COMPACTION OF BACKFILL for lines which will be covered with paving shall be such as to produce 95% of modified Proctor, ASTM D 1557. C. COMPACTION OF BACKFILL neither to be paved over nor subjected to vehicular traffic shall be such as to produce a density approximately equal to that of the soil adjacent to the trench. D. COMPACTION OF BACKFILL within Department of Transportation or other governmental rights-of-way shall be in accordance with the requirements of the affected area. 3.04 TESTING: A. PERFORM TESTING of completed Gravity Sewer lines in accordance with local authorities having jurisdiction. END OF SECTION SANITARY SEWAGE SYSTEMS 02730-3 SECTION 03310 CONCRETE WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK: A. PROVIDE ALL LABOR, materials and equipment necessary to complete all concrete poured-in-place (including all related work and/or services) as indicated on Drawings and as specified herein. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. CODES AND STANDARDS: Unless otherwise noted on Drawings or specified herein, all concrete work shall be performed in accordance with all applicable requirements of the "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Building" (ACI 301).ACI 301 shall be supplemented by the following section numbers of ACI 301: 1. 3.2 - Strength: As indicated on the Drawings. 2. 5.2 - Reinforcing steel as herein specified. 3. ACI-318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete". B. TESTING: The Contractor shall not make tests with his own forces. All testing shall be by a Testing Laboratory approved by the Architect before any concrete is poured for the project. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. SHOP DRAWINGS; REINFORCEMENT: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required and openings through concrete structures. Submitted shop drawings shall be checked and signed by the General Contractor. B. Proposed mix designs; submit proposed mix designs for each class of concrete according to ACI 301 Chapter 3, Method 1 or 2. CONCRETE, WORK 03310-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. REINFORCING STEEL shall be domestic steel conforming to ASTM A615, Grade 60. Welded steel wire fabric (WWF): ASTM A185. B. READY-MIXED CONCRETE: ready-mixed concrete small miscellaneous approved by Architect. All concrete for this project shall be in accordance with ASIM C 94 except for amounts mixed in procedure and proportions C. CONCRETE MATERIALS: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. Use one brand of cement throughout project, unless otherwise specified. Provide aggregate from a single source for exposed concrete. 2. Non-Shrink Grout: CRD-C 621, factory pre-mixed grout, Type D,non-metallic. 3. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Federal Spec TT-C-800, Type I. Do not use on slabs or other horizontal surfaces. D. PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES: 1. Slump Limits: Proportion and design concrete slump at point of placement of 4 inches (Plus or minus 1 inch) except provide not more than 3 inch slump for ramps and sloping surfaces. 2. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. If trial batch method used, use an independent testing facility acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The test facility shall not be the same as used for field quality control testing unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. 3. Submit written reports to Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by Architect. 4. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the properties as indicated on drawings and schedules. 5. Admixtures: None without prior approval of the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION: A. COOPERATE WITH OTHER TRADES to coordinate all openings and placement of embedded items which are required to be furnished and/or placed under those sections of the Project Manual pertaining to those applicable trades. CON -CRETE WORK 03310-2 1 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION. 1. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. 2. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days. 3. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried. Continue final curing for at least 7 days in accordance with ACT 301 procedures. Avoid rapid drying at end of final curing period. B. REMOVAL OF FORMS: 1. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, wall, columns, and similar parts of the work may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 Deg. F (10 deg. C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. 2. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, joists, slabs and other structural elements, may not be removed in less than 14 days and until concrete has attained design minimum compressive strength at 28-days. Determine potential compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing field-cured specimens representative of concrete location or members. 3. Form facing material may be removed 4 days after placement, only if shores and other vertical supports have been, arranged to permit removal of form facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports. 3.03 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION: A. A SEPARATE TESTING LABORATORY shall be employed by the Contractor, acceptable to Architect, to perform all concrete field tests and to submit test reports directly to Architect. Concrete shall be sampled as follows: 1. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test for each set of compressive strength test specimens. 2. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; one set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. 3. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each 50 cu. yds. or fraction thereof, of each concrete class placed in any one day or for each 2,500 sq ft. of surface area placed; 1 specimen tested at 7 days, 2 specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. 4. Air Content: ASTM C 173; volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight concrete; ASTM C 231 pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each set of compressive strength test specimens. 5. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg. F (4 deg. C) and below, and when 80 deg. F (27 deg. C) and above; and each time a set of compression test specimens made; record air temperature. CONCRETE WORK 03310-3 1 B. TEST RESULTS SHALL BE REPORTED IN WRITING to Architect, Structural Engineer, and Contractor on same day that tests are made. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of contractor, name of concrete supplier and truck number, name of concrete testing service, location of concrete batch in the structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests. C. ADDITIONAL TESTS: The testing service shall make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by Architect. The testing service shall conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests conducted, and any other additional testing as may be required, when unacceptable concrete is verified. D. WATER IS NOT AUTHORIZED to be added to ready-mixed concrete at the project site. If unauthorized water is added, the testing laboratory shall make a set of compressive test specimens and slump test after the addition of water and report the fact to the Architect immediately. 3.04 FINISHING: A. SLABS INTERIOR: Steel trowel to a hard, dense finish. B. SLABS EXTERIOR: Light broom finish. END OF SECTION CONCRETE WORK 03310-4 I SECTION 05700 PART I - GENERAL ORNAMENTAL METALWORK r 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. DEFINITIONS: Ornamental metalwork includes metal products which are used in building construction for functional, architectural and decorative effects and which are not a part of other metal systems specified in other sections. B. EXTENT of these items is indicated on the Drawings and as specified. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. SHOP ASSEMBLY: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: ' ' ' A. s, fabricator s and finisher s specifications PRODUCT DATA. Submit manufacturer and installation instructions for products used in ornamental metalwork, including finishing materials and methods. B. SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and installation of ornamental metalwork. Include plans, elevations and detail sections. Indicate materials, methods, finishes and types of joiner, fasteners, anchorages and accessory items; specify finishes. Provide setting diagrams and templates for anchorages, sleeves, and bolts installed by others. C. SAMPLES: Submit samples of each type of metal and finish required. Prepare samples on metal of same alloy and thickness to be used for the work. Where normal color and texture variations are to be expected, include 2 or more units in each set of samples showing the limits of such variations. I _ Include 6" long samples of linear shapes. ORNAMENTAL METALWORK 05700-1 t PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. ACID ETCHED COPPER: Provide Copper to match Architect's sample in color and thickness for copper cap and fascia band and continuous finneal band. B. STANDARDS: Comply with standards of the Copper Development Association. I C. TEMPER: Provide materials in standard commercial tempers and hardness, as required for fabrication, strength and durability. D. FASTENERS: Furnish of basic metal and alloy, matching finished color and texture as metal being fastened, unless otherwise indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, provide Phillips flathead screw for exposed fasteners. E. BITUMINOUS PAINT: SSPC-Paint 12 (cold-applied asphalt mastic). 2.02 FABRICATION: A. GENERAL: Design components to allow for expansion and contraction for a minimum ambient temperature of 100 degrees F. without causing buckling, excessive opening of joints or overstressing of fastenings. B. FORM METALWORK to required shapes and sizes, with true curves, lines and angles. Provide necessary rebates, lugs and brackets for assembly of units. Use concealed fasteners wherever possible. C. MILL JOINTS to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water penetration. D. CORROSION PROTECTION: Coat concealed surfaces which will be in contact with concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, in exterior work and work to be built into exterior walls and decks, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. Do not extend coating onto exposed surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION: A. FIELD MEASUREMENTS: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible, to ensure proper fitting of work. Do not delay job progress; allow for adjustments and fitting where taking of field measurements before fabrication might delay work. ORNAMENTAL METALWORK 05700-2 I I 3.02 B. COORDINATE and furnish anchorages and delivery of such items to the project site. INSTALLATION, GENERAL: A. PROVIDE ANCHORAGE DEVICES and fasteners where necessary for securing ornamental metal items to in-place construction. B. PERFORM all cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation or ornamental metal items. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level and true, measured from established lines and levels. C. FORM TIGHT JOINTS with exposed connections accurately fitted with uniform reveals and spaces for sealants and joint fillers. Where cutting and grinding are required for proper shop fitting and jointing of work, restore finishes to eliminate any evidence of such corrective work. D. DO NOT CUT OR ABRADE FINISHES which cannot be completely restored in the field. Return items with such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by complete refinishing or provide new units at Contractor's option. END OF SECTION ORNAMENTAL METALWORK 05700-3 I , SECTION 06101 PART I - GENERAL ROUGH CARPENTRY 1 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. DEFINITION: Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other sections and which is generally not exposed, except as otherwise indicated. Types of work in this section include, but are not necessary limited to, rough carpentry for: ' 1. Wood grounds, nailers, framing and blocking. 2. Wood furring. 3. Sheathing. 4. Wood roof trusses. 5. Exposed rafters. B. FINISH CARPENTRY is specified in another section within Division 6. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit shop drawings of wood trusses signed and sealed by registered structural engineer. Indicate species and stress grades of lumber to be used and details of metal connectors to be used at joints. Show pitch, span and location of trusses. Provide large scale details of typical connections and anchorages. 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING: A. DELIVERY AND STORAGE: Keep materials dry at all times. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber and plywood, and provide air circulation within stacks. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS: A. COORDINATION: Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking grounds and similar supports to allow proper attachment of other work. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06101-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WOOD PRODUCT QUALITY STANDARDS: A. LUMBER STANDARDS: Comply with PS 20. B. PLYWOOD STANDARD: Comply with PS 1/ANSI-A199.1 and APA. C. FACTORY-MARK each piece of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill and grading agency. 2.02 MATERIALS: A. LUMBER, GENERAL: 1. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as required by PS 20. 2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide seasoned lumber with 19% maximum moisture content at time of dressing. B. WOOD ROOF TRUSSES: 1. Provide wood roof trusses designed and fabricated in accordance with AITC and TPI specifications. 2. Design Loads: Total load, 45 p.s.f. which includes 10 p.s.f. ceiling load. 3. Submit shop drawings for wood roof trusses which have been designed, signed and sealed by structural engineer registered to practice in the state where project is located. A minimum of one (1) complete set of shop drawings shall bear engineer's original signature and raised seal. C. EXPOSED RAFTERS: Provide framing lumber complying with the following: 1. Provide preservative treated lumberas specified herein under title of Wood Treatment". 2. Provide Select Structural Grade lumber of either Hem-Fir per WWPA rules or Southern. Pine per SPIB rules. 3. Provide rough sawn finish on all exposed surfaces. D. MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER: 1. Provide wood for support or attachment of other work including cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking furring, grounds, stripping and similar members. Provide lumber of sizes shown or specified, worked into shapes shown, and as follows: 2. Grade: No. 2 pine (SPIB). E. PLYWOOD: 1. Concealed Plywood: Where plywood will be concealed by other work, provide the following: a. Provide Exterior Type plywood for exterior use and Interior Type with ROUGH CARPENTRY 06101-2 1 1 l'i exterior glue for interior use. b. Provide C-D/Ext-APA plywood for exterior use; provide C-D/Int-APA plywood for interior use, unless otherwise shown. C. For backing panels for electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire- retardant treated plywood with exterior glue. 2. Exposed Plywood: Where plywood will be exposed, provide "A" type surface on exposed surfaces. Provide exterior glue. F. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: I. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide size, type, material and finish as indicated and as recommended by applicable standards, complying with applicable Federal Specifications for nails, staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring devices. Provide metal hangers and framing anchors of size and type recommended by manufacturer for each use including recommended nails. 2. Building Paper: Asphalt saturated felt, non-perforated, ASTM D 226. 3. Hurricane Clips: Provide appropriate hurricane clips as recommended for installation condition by Heckman or equal products as approved. Provide 18 gage galvanized clips except as otherwise recommended by manufacturer for each different condition. 1 3.03 WOOD TREATMENT: A. PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT: Where lumber of plywood is indicated as "PT", "Trt-Wd", or "Treated", or is specified to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood) and of AWPB Standards listed below. Mark each treated item to comply with the AWPB Quality Mark requirements. 1. Pressure-treat above-ground items with water-borne preservatives complying with AWPB LP-2. After treatment, kiln-dry to a maximum moisture content of 15% for plywood and 19% for lumber. Treat indicated items and the following: a. Wood cants, nailers, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers and waterproofing. b. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. B. FIRE-RETARDANT TREATMENT: Where fire-retardant treated wood is indicated, pressure impregnate lumber and plywood with fire-retardant chemicals to comply with AWPA C20 and C27, as applicable for interior and exterior applications. Identify lumber with appropriate classification marking of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. CUTS AFTER TREATMENT: Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces with heavy brush coat of same chemical used for treatment and to comply with AWPA-M4. ROUGH CARPENTR 06101-3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL: A. DISCARD UNITS OF MATERIAL with defects which might impair quality of work, and units which are too small to fabricate work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. SET CARPENTRY WORK accurately to required levels and limes, with members of plumb and true and accurately cut and fitted. C. SECURELY ATTACH CARPENTRY WORK to substrates by anchoring and fastening as shown and as required by recognized standards. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; pre-drill as required. 3.02 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS AND BLOCKING: A. PROVIDE WHEREVER SHOWN and where required for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved. B. ATTACH TO SUBSTRATES as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise shown. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement. C. PROVIDE PERMANENT GROUNDS of dressed, preservative treated, key-bevelled lumber not less than 1-1/2" wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material involved. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. D. PROVIDE MINIMUM 2" X S" WOOD BLOCKING extending between metal and wood studs and securely fastened at each end for the mounting of all toilet room accessories, sinks, toilet partitions and other wall -mounted items. 3.03 WOOD FURRING (Wd-Fur): A. INSTALL PLUMB AND LEVEL with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finished work. B. FURRING TO RECEIVE GYPSUM DRYWALL: Unless otherwise shown, provide I x 2" furring at 16" o.c. vertically. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF PLYWOOD (Pwd): , ROUGH CARPENTRY 06101-4 A. COMPLY with recommendations of American Plywood Association (APA), for installation of plywood. B_ SHEATHING: Install as recommended by APA for spacing of supports or types of substrates involved in the work. Provide thickness shown, or if not shown, provide thickness recommended by APA. END OF SECTION ROUGH CARPENTRY 061015 SECTION 06113 GYPSUM SHEATHING PART I - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. THE EXTENT of gypsum sheathing is shown on the Drawings. B. COORDINATE this work with Sections of the Work providing framing and other substrates for sheathing. 1.03 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE: A. PROTECT sheathing from exposure to weather. Deliver in manufacturer's unopened bundles, identified with name, brand, type and grade. Store inside in a dry, ventilated space. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GYPSUM SHEATHING: A. COMPLY WITH ASTM C79. B. GYPSUM SHEATHING: 1/2" thick, unless otherwise indicated, 2" x 8" V tongue and grooved on long edges, asphalt treated water resistant and repellant board as manufactured by U.S.Gypsu n, National Gypsum or an approved equal. 2.02 ACCESSORIES: A. PROVIDE FASTENERS or other accessories as required for complete installation and fastening to framing. Provide building felt barrier over sheathing installation. _GYPSUM SHEATHING 06113-1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. INSTALLER of gypsum sheathing must examine substrate and conditions under which work is to be performed and must notify Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 APPLICATION: A. COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS and recommendations where other more stringent requirements are not indicated below. B. APPLY GYPSUM SHEATHING horizontally with long dimension across studs and groove edge down, with vertical joints staggered and centered over studs. Fit panels tightly against adjacent panels and snugly at terminations to building components. C. SECURE SHEATHING to steel studs with U.S. Gypsum 1" Type 5-12 screws or equal spaced approximately 8 inches on centers (4 per 2 ft. sheathing width per support) and not less than 3/8" in from edges and ends of sheathing panels. END OF SECTION GYPSUM SHEATHING 06113-2 SECTION 06192 PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. DEFINITION: Prefabricated wood trusses include planar structural units consisting of metal plate connected members which are fabricated from dimension lumber and which have been cut and assembled prior to delivery to the job site. ' B. EXTENT of wood trusses is indicated on drawings and specified herein. C. RELATED WORK: 1. Roof Sheathing: Section 06100. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. TPI STANDARDS: Comply with application requirements and recommendations of the following Truss Plate Institute (TPI) publications. 1. "Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses". ' 2. "Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Parallel Chord Wood Trusses". 3. "Commentary and Recommendations for Handling and Erecting Wood Trusses". ' 4. "Commentary and Recommendations for Bracing Wood Trusses". Control Manual" 5 "Qualit . . y ' B. WOOD STRUCTURAL DESIGN STANDARD: Comply with applicable requirements A ecification for Wood Construction" ublished b N F P of "National Desi n S . g p y . . . p C. LUMBER STANDARD: Comply with PS 20 and with applicable rules of the ' respective grading inspecting agencies for species and grade of lumber indicated. D. CONNECTOR PLATE MANUFACTURER'S QUALIFICATIONS: Provide truss Connector plates manufactured by a farm which is a . member of TPI and which complies with TPI quality control procedures for manufacture of connector plates published in TPI "Quality Control Manual". PRUFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES _ 06192-1 1 E. FABRICATOR'S QUALIFICATIONS: Provide trusses by a firm which has a record of successfully fabricating trusses similar to type indicated and which complies with the following requirements for quality control: I. Fabricator practices a quality control program which complies with, or is comparable to, one published in TPI "Quality Control Manual", and which involves inspection by an independent inspection and testing agency acceptable to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction. F. DESIGN: Trusses shall be designed so that no horizontal reactions are imposed on the supporting structure under vertical loads. 1. Truss members and connections shall be designed for all live, dead, and wind loads, plus any concentrated loads shown on the drawings. Duration Factors: 1.04 SUBMITTALS: Roof DL + LL + WL 1.33 Roof DL + LL 1.25 A. GENERAL: Submit following items as specified in Section (01340). B. PRODUCT DATA: Submit fabricator's technical data covering lumber, metal plates, hardware, fabrication process, treatment (if any), handling and erection. 1. Submit certificate, signed by an officer of fabricating firm, indicating that trusses to be supplied for project comply with 'vindicated requirements. C. SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit shop drawings showing species, sizes and stress grades of lumber to be used; pitch, span, camber, configuration and spacing for each type of truss required; type, size, material, finish, design value, and location of metal connector plates; and bearing and anchorage details. I. Provide shop drawings which have been signed and stamped by a structural engineer licensed to practice in the state the project is located. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. HANDLE AND STORE TRUSSES with care, and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and TPI recommendations to avoid damage from bending, overturning or I other cause for which truss is not designed to resist or endure. B. TIME DELIVERY and erection of trusses to avoid extended on-site storage and to ' avoid delaying work of other trades whose work must follow erection of trusses. PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 06192-2 ' 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. LUMBER: 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with type, grade, mill and grading agency. 2. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as required by PS 20, for dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide seasoned lumber with a maximum moisture content at time of dressed of 15%. 4. Lumber Species: Southern Pine, graded by SPIB. 5. Lumber Grade: For species indicated, provide the following stress-rated grade: "Selected Structural". B. METAL CONNECTOR PLATES, FASTENERS AND ANCHORAGES: 1. Connector Plate Material: Metal complying with following requirements, unless otherwise indicated; not less than "0.036" thick, coated thickness. Provide connector plates from a single manufacturer. 2. Galvanized Sheet Steel: ASTM A 446, Grade A, Coating G60. 3. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide size, type, material and finish indicated, complying with applicable Federal Specifications for nails, screws, bolts, nuts and washers and anchoring devices. 1 2.02 FABRICATION: A. CUT TRUSS MEMBERS to accurate lengths, angles and sizes to produce close fitting joints with wood-to-wood bearing in assembled units. B. FABRICATE METAL CONNECTOR PLATES to size, configuration, thickness and anchorage details required for types of joint designs indicated. C. ASSEMBLE TRUSS MEMBERS in design configuration indicated using jigs or other means to ensure uniform and accuracy of assembly with close fitting joints. Position members to produce design camber indicated. ID. CONNECT TRUSS MEMBERS by means of metal connector plates accurately located and securely fastened to wood members by means indicated or approved. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION: A. GENERAL: Erect and brace trusses to comply with recommendations of manufacturer and the Truss Plate Institute. PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES ' 06192-3 B. ERECT TRUSSES with plane of truss webs vertical (plumb) and parallel to each other, located accurately at design spacings indicated. C. HOIST UNITS in place by means of lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, applied at designated lift points as recommended by fabricator, exercising care not to damage truss members of joints by out-of-plane bending or other causes. D. PROVIDE TEMPORARY BRACING as required to maintain trusses plumb, parallel and in location indicated, until permanent bracing is installed. E. ANCHOR TRUSSES securely at all bearing points to comply with methods and details indicated. F. INSTALL PERMANENT BRACING and related components to enable trusses to maintaindesign spacing, withstand live and dead loads including lateral loads, and to comply with other indicated requirements. G. DO NOT CUT or remove truss members. END OF SECTION PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 06192-4 ' SECTION 06201 FINISH CARPENTRY & MILLWORK PART1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this Section. ' 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. DEFINITION: Finish carpentry and millwork includes work which is exposed to view, ' is non-structural, and which is not specified as part of other sections. Types of work in this section include: 1. Wood trim. 2. Casework and countertops. B. RELATED WORK: ' 1. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100. 2. Builders Hardware and Wood Doors: Division 8. ' 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. FACTORY-MARK EACH PIECE of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill and grading agency identification; except omit marking from surfaces to receive transparent finish, and submit mill certificate that material has been inspected and graded in accordance with requirements if it cannot be marked on a concealed surface. B. AWI QUALITY STANDARD: Comply with applicable requirements of "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" published by the Architectural Woodwork Institute ' (AWI), except as otherwise indicated. 1.04 SUBMITTALS. ' A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned playas and elevations, large scale details, attachment devices and other components. Submit shop drawings for the following: ' 1. Casework. B. SAMPLES: Submit the following samples for each species and cut or pattern of finish carpentry and millwork. 1. Plastic Laminate: 1 piece, 3" x 5". FIMSH CARPENTRY & MILLWORK 06201-1 1 2. Exposed Cabinet Hardware: 1 unit of each type and finish. PART 2 - PRODUCTS ' 2.01 WOOD PRODUCT QUALITY STANDARDS: ' A. SOFTWOOD LUMBER STANDARDS: Comply with PS 20 and with applicable grading rules of the respective grading and inspecting agency for the species and product indicated. B. PLYWOOD STANDARD: Comply with PS-1/ANSI-A199.1 and APA. C. HARDWOOD LUMBER STANDARDS Comply with National Hardware Lumber Association (NHLA) rules. D. HARDWOOD PLYWOOD STANDARD: Comply with PS 51. E. PLASTIC LAMINATE: Comply with NEMA LD-3 for type, thickness, color, pattern and finish indicated for each application, or if not indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard products. F. WOODWORK STANDARD: Comply with Architectural Woodwork Institute (Awl) "Custom Quality Standards" unless otherwise indicated. 1. For following types of woodwork comply with indicated standards as applicable: a. Standing and Running Trim: AWI Section 300. b. Casework and Countertops:AWI Section 400. G. CASEWORK HARDWARE STANDARD: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with ANSI-156.9 "American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware". 1. Quality Level: Type 2 (institutional), unless otherwise indicated. 2. Locks: Where indicated (if any), provide standard pin-type or disc-type (5 pins or discs) tumbler locks, keyed individually except as otherwise indicated. 3. Exposed Hardware Finish: Provide hardware with BHMA Code 626 satin chromium plate finish (US26D). 2.02 MATERIALS GENERAL: A. NOMINAL SIZES are indicated, except as shown by detailed dimensions. Provide dressed or worked and dressed lumber, as applicable, manufactured to the actual sizes as required by PS 20 or to actual sizes and pattern as shown, unless otherwise indicated. B. MOISTURE CONTENT OF LUMBER: Provide kiln-dried (KD) lumber having a moisture content from time of manufacture until time of installation not greater than values required by the applicable grading rules of the respective grading and inspecting agency for the species and product indicated. FINISH CARPENTRY & MILLWORK 06201-2 C. LUMBER FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH: Use pieces made of solid lumber stock. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: A. FASTENERS AND ANCHORAGES: Provide nails, screws and other anchoring devices of the proper type, size, material and finish for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible, and complying with applicable Federal Specifications. 1. Where finish carpentry is exposed on exterior or in areas of high relative humidity, provide fasteners and anchorages with a hot-dipped zinc coating (ASTM A 153). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. DISCARD UNITS of material which are unsound, warped, bowed, twisted, improperly treated, nor adequately seasoned or too small to fabricate work with minimum of joints or optimum jointing arrangements, or which are of defective manufacture with respect to surfaces, sizes or patterns. ' B. INSTALL WORK PLUMB, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8" in 8'-0" for plumb and level countertops; and with 1/16" maximum offset in flush adjoining surfaces. C. SCRIBE AND CUT WORK TO FIT adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. D. TRIM: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to the greatest extent possible. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. Cope at returns, miter at corners, to produce tight fitting ' joints with full surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. 1. Make exterior joints water-resistant by careful fitting. E. CASEWORK: Install without distortion so that doors and drawers will fit openings properly and be accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. F. ANCHOR FINISH CARPENTRY WORK to anchorage devices or blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates. I_FINI?CARPENIRY & MILLWORK 06201-3 3.02 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, FINISHING AND PROTECTION: A. REPAIR DAMAGED AND DEFECTIVE WORK wherever possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually; where not possible to repair properly, replace work. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. , B. CLEAN WORK ON EXPOSED and semi-exposed surfaces. PROTECTION: Installer of work shall advise Contractor of final protection to maintain conditions necessary to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration at time of acceptance. END OF SECTION FINISH CARPENTRY & MILLWORK ' 06201-4 7 SECTION 07100 WATERPROOFING FART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. EXTENT of waterproof coating is indicated on the Drawings and by provisions of this section. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. PRODUCT DATA: Manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS: A. SUBSTRATE: Proceed with work of this section only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been completed. B. WEATHER: Proceed with work of this section only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: PROVIDE waterproof coating equal to Thoroseal with Acryl-60 mixed and applied as recommended by manufacturer for applicable conditions. (White color.) WATERPROOFING 07100-1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. INSTALLER must examine substrate and conditions under which work is to be performed and must notify Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been correct in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE: A. CLEAN SUBSTRATE of projections and substances detrimental to work; comply with recommendations of prime materials manufacturer. 3.03 INSTALLATION: A. APPLICATION: Apply two coats of waterproof coating as recommended by manufacturer. Second coat shall be sponge applied with light textured surface. 3.04 PROTECTION: A. PROTECT OTHER WORK from spillage of waterproofing materials. Replace or restore work which is soiled or otherwise damaged by installation of work of this section. END OF SECTION WATERPROOFING 07100-2 SECTION 07175 WATER REPELLANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. EXTENT of surfaces to receive water repellant (WR) is all exterior brick surfaces. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. INSTALLER: A firm with not less than 2 years of successful experience in application of water repellants. 1.04 SUBMUTTALS: A. PRODUCT DATA: Submit manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and general recommendations. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS: A. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS: 1. Do not proceed with application, if the substrate material contains frozen water. 2. Do not apply water repellent in rainy conditions. 3. Do not apply materials in high or gusty winds. B. PROTECTION: 1. Protect shrubs, metal, glass and other building surfaces during application. 2. Do not permit spray mist or liquid to drift onto surrounding properties. 1.06 SCHEDULING: A. NOTIFY ARCHITECT not less than 24 hours before water repellant application is scheduled. 1.07 WARRANTY: A. FURNISH manufacturer's 5 year warranty. 2.01 WATER REPELLANT: A. PRIME-A-PELL 200 as manufactured by Chemprobe Corporation, 2637 National Circle, Garland, Texas 75041.Telephone: (214) 271-5551. B. MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE/DISTRIBUTOR: Alan George, Conspec Materials, Inc. Telephone (813) 885-4324. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION: A. CLEAN SUBSTRATE of substances which might interfere with penetration/adhesion of water repellants. Test for moisture content, in accordance with repellant manufacturer's instructions, to ensure that surface is sufficiently dry. B. COORDINATION WITH SEALANTS: Delay application of water repellants until installation of sealants has been completed in joints adjoining surfaces to be coated with repellent. C. PROTECT ADJOINING WORK, from spillage or blow-over of water repellent. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass where there is possibility of water repellant being deposited on surfaces. Cover live plant materials with drop cloths. Clean water repellant from adjoining surfaces immediately after spillage. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. APPLY A HEAVY saturation spray coating of water repellant on surfaces indicated for treatment using low pressure, airless type spray equipment. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 3.03 WATER TEST A. PROVIDE WATER TEST made by manufacturer's representative. END OF SECTION SECTION 07193 ELASTIC SHEET VAPOR BARRIERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. EXTENT of elastic sheet vapor barrier work (EIsS-VB) is shown on Drawings. B. APPLICATIONS of elastic sheet vapor barriers include the following: 1. On grade under concrete floor slabs. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS: A. COORDINATION: Proceedwith vapor barrier work only after substrate construction has been completed and vents, piping, drains and other projections have been installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. POLYETHYLENE VAPOR BARRIER: A single polyethylene film, of natural color and 6.0 mils thick, in widest practical width. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. INSTALL VAPOR BARRIERS under interior ground-supported floor slabs. Lap joints a minimum distance of 6" and extend up intersecting walls the slab thickness. Seal watertight around items penetrating membrane. Exercise care to avoid punctures. Extend coverage to extremities of areas to receive barrier. ELASTIC 5HEET VAPOR BARRIERS 07193-1 3.02 PROTECTION OF VAPOR BARRIERS: 11 PROTECT installed vapor barriers, so that continuing construction activities and work of other trades will not result in punctures or other forms of damage and deterioration of vapor barriers. END OF SECTION U A,S IC SHEET VAPOR BARRIERS 07193-2 SECTION 07200 INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: ' A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. EXTENT of insulation work is shown on drawings, by generic name or by abbreviation. B. APPLICATIONS of insulation specified in this section include the following. I . Board-Type insulation, concealed in exterior walls. 2. Board-Type insulation on roof deck. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY: Thicknesses shown are for thermal conductivity (k- value at 75°F. or 24°C.) specified for each material. Provide adjusted thicknesses as ' directed for equivalent use of material having a different thermal conductivity. Where insulation is identified by -W' value, provide appropriate thickness. B. FIRE AND INSURANCE RATINGS: Comply with fire-resistance, flammability and insurance ratings indicated, and comply with governing regulations as interpreted by authorities. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. PRODUCT DATA: I . Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of insulation required. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING: A. GENERAL PROTECTION: Do not allow insulation materials to become wet, or soiled. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and protection during installation. INSULATION 07200-1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. POLYISOCYANURATE BOARD INSULATION: Rigid, cellular thermal insulation with glass-fiber-reinforced polyisocyanurate closed-cell foam core and aluminum foil facing laminated to both sides; complying with FS HH-I-1972/1, Class 2; aged r-values of 7.2 and 8 at 40 and 75 deg. F. respectively, and as follows: 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum values for flame spread and smoke developed of 20 and 150, respectively. B. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: 1. Mechanical Anchors: Type and size shown, or if not shown, as recommended by insulation manufacturer for type of application and condition of substrate. C. TAPER ROOF INSULATION: 1. Provide "Tapered Fesco" as produced by Const. Products Inc. of Bradenton, Florida (where tapered insulation is required) or equal products as approved. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. INSTALLERMUST EXAMINE substrate and conditions under which insulation work is to be performed and must notify Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with insulation work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. , 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. GE NERAL: 1. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for particular conditions of installation in each case. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to project conditions, consult manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with work. 2. Extend insulation full thickness as shown over entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections which interfere with placement. 3. Apply a single layer of insulation of required thickness, unless otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 4. Seal joints between closed-cell (non-breathing) insulation units by applying mastic or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with mastic or sealant- 5. Set vapor barrier faced units with vapor barrier to warm side of construction, except as otherwise shown. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping. WSU.LA,TTON 07200-2 1 6. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor barriers, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure vapor-tight installation. 1 1 1 1 I r 1 END OF SECTION INSULATION 07200-3 1 SECTION 07316 METAL ROOFING TILES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK BY OTHERS: A. METAL SOFFIT/FASCIA/EAVES B. SECTION STRUCTURAL FRAMING C. SECTION METAL DECK D. SECTION STUCCO E. SECTION SEALANTS 1.02 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA: A. PROVIDE a kinetic stone coated metal roofing system that will: 1. Withstand local wind load, snow load and uplift conditions. 2. Accommodate local temperature extremes. 3. Accommodate building movement. 4. Produce weather tight installations. S_ Conform to local building code requirements. B. ROOF SLOPE: Minimum pitch for standard installation methods to be 3/12. For slopes less than the above noted, please contact your local building official for special installation details. 1.03 SAMPLES: A. SUBMIT samples and color charts as selected by Architect/Specifier B. SUBMIT actual full size panel in color selected, for final approval prior to ordering material. 1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS A. SUBMIT shop drawings B. INDICATE PANEL ARRANGEMENTS, fasteners, standard flashing details noting METAL ROOFING TILES 07316-1 special details. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. ALUMINUM-ZINC ALLOY coated steel: ASTM A792 bearing AZ 50 designation or equal, SS Grade 33 2.02 SYSTEM COMPONENTS: A. METAL ROOFING TILES: Tile, Shake, Canyon Shake, NB Tile, Barrel Vault Tile (BVT). B. COLORS: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's current color selection. C. DIMENSIONS: 1. Tile- 45 % " wide x 15 %2" (l 162mm X402mm) exposure 2. Shake- 44 %"wide x 15'/z" (1136mm X 402mm) exposure 3. Canyon Shake- 45"wide x 16 %2"(1125mm X412.5mm) exposure 4. NB Tile-46"wide x 16"(1168mm X 406mm) exposure 5. Barrel Vault Tile (BVT)- 43"wide x 15 Y2" (1092mm X 394mm) exposure D. TRAVIS: Of same material and coating as panels, selected from manufacturers standard details unless noted otherwise. All trim deviations must be approved by manufacturer before installation. 2.03 ACCESSORIES: A.UNDERLAY: Minimum no. 30 lb. approved asphalt felt or 2 layer of 15 lb asphalt felt. B. BATTEN SYSTEM: 2" x 2" (38mm x 38mm) nominal ripped from lumber of a grade standard or better. C. TOUCH UP: acrylic resin basecoat and colored stone granules as supplied by manufacturer. D. PANEL FASTENERS: #10 x 2" (50mm) corrosion resistant, hex head, colored screws as supplied by manufacturer or 8d x 2-3/8" (59mm) corrosion resistant, ring shank nails. Refer to local building code requirements, applicable product evaluation reports and manufacturers installation manual for proper fastener type. E. BATTEN FASTENERS: 16d x 3-1/2" (89mm) long ring shank 0.131" (3.3mm) shank diameter or #8 x 3" (76mm) corrosion resistant wood screw. Refer to local building code requirements, applicable product evaluation reports and manufacturers installation ME.f,AL OOFING TQ.ES 07316-2 1 manual for fastener type. F. COUNTER FLASHINGS: of type recommended by panel manufacturer. G. CAULKING: Non-acidic, urethane, one part sealant as recommended by panel manufacturer. 1 2.04 FABRICATION: A. MACHINE PRESS PANELS from 26 gauge material thickness aluminum-zinc alloy coated sheet steel. B. FORM FLASHING and related items from the same material and thickness as the panels. 2.05 FINISHES: A. FACTORY FINISH metal roofing panels and related flashings using following system. 1. Primer: corrosion inhibiting resin or epoxy primer to both sides. 2. Basecoat: acrylic resin colored coating sufficient to bond granules. 3. Stone Chips: selected colored mineral granules. 4. Over glaze: acrylic resin semi-gloss clear coating to improve binding of chips. 5. Oven cure product to factory specifications to ensure product cure prior to packaging and shipment. B. COLOR as selected by Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION/SUPERVISION: A. THE ROOF STRUCTURE is to be inspected for correct flaming prior to installation of Gerard panels. 1 3.02 PREPARATION: A. BATTEN SYSTEM: 1. See installation manual (page 23) for the correct batten spacing as required per the type of roofing panel to be installed: Canyon Shake, Tile, Barrel Vault and NB Tile. 2. Fix to rafters with approved quantity and type of fastener. 3. Refer to local building code and applicable product approval reports. METAL ROO G TILES 07316-3 11 3.03 INSTALLATIONS: A. INSTALL ROOFING SYSTEM in accordance with all local building code requirements, Manufacturers published product manual standards and requirements described below. B. UNDERLAYMEN'T: 1. When required apply underlay over rafters or solid decking prior to installing battens. 2. Install underlay with minimum of 3" (76 mm) laps 3. Extend underlay up curbs and at sidewalls 6"(152mm). Fasten over curbs and nailing strips. 4. Place an additional layer minimum 36" wide and centered up each valley. NOTE: Additional underlayment requirements may be required by local code for sever weather. Check all local code requirements and product reports. B. BATTENS: 1. Install battens at right angles to rafter at spacing required by each panel type. 2. Stagger butt joints of battens and fix securely in place at each bearing point. 3. Fasten battens with the appropriate type and number of fasteners through into the rafters unless otherwise noted. NOTE: Installations in high wind areas may require specific and additional fasteners. Check all governing code requirements and product approvals. 4. Install valley flashings prior to installation of panels. Ensure that all exposed edges in the valley metal are coated with touch-up to eliminate accelerated drip corrosion. 5. Ensure that items passing through roof panels are fastened securely and flashed so as to allow for building movement. 6. Panels: a. Work from numerous bundles of panels to ensure overall colour batch/ production run blending throughout installation. b. Cut and bend panels at gables/hips/valleys/walls and or ridge to complete the panel installation as per installation manual. c. Install roof ridge and hip caps. 7. Touch up and make good damage to finished surfaces using matching stone granules and acrylic resin basecoat as supplied by the manufacturer. END OF SECTION TAL 00 G S 073164 SECTION 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. EXTENT of each type of flashing and sheet metal work is indicated on the Drawings and by provisions of this section. 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS: i ¦ A. COORDINATE WORK of this section with interfacing and adjoining work for proper sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance and durability of the work and protection of materials and finishes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL MATERIALS: ' A. SHEET METAL FLASHING/TRIM (Mt-Fl): 1. Zinc-Coated Steel: Commercial quality with 0.20% copper, ASTM A 525, G90 hot-dip galvanized, mill phosphatized for paint; 0.239" thick (24 gage) except as otherwise indicated. a. Provide finish as indicated. 2. Aluminum (Alum): ASTM B 209, alloy 3003, temper H14, 0.032" thick (20 gage) except as otherwise indicated. a. Provide finish as indicated. B. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES: 1. Fasteners: Same metal as flashing/sheet metal, or other non-corrosive metal as recommended by sheet manufacturer. 2. Bituminous Coating: FS TT-C-494 or SSPC - Paint 12, solvent type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. 3. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant. FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07600-1 1 4. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices and similar accessory units as required for installation of work, matching or compatible with material being installed, noncorrosive, size and gage required for performance. 5. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 2822, asphaltic. 6. Elastic Expansion Joint: Where indicated provide flexible, closed cell rubber or plastic looped bellows mm. 3/8 thick, 5" to 6" wide and with metal flanges of .032" aluminum, 3" to 4" wideformed to profiles indicated. Provide standard corner and intersection units and splicing materials. Provide mineral fiber insulation in expansion joint below bellows. 2.02 FABRICATED UNITS: A. GENERAL METAL FABRICATION: 1. Shop-fabricate work to greatest extent possible. Comply with details shown, and with applicable requirements of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and other recognized industry practices. Fabricate with waterproof and weather- resistance performance; with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage or deterioration of the work. Form work to fit substrates. Comply with material manufacturer instructions and recommendations. Form exposed sheet metal work without excessive oil-canning, buckling and tool marks, true to line and levels as indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 2. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. For metal other than aluminum, tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. Form aluminum seams with epoxy seam sealer; rivet joints for additional strength where required. 3. Expansion Provisions: Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1" deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). 4. Sealant Joints: Where movable, non-expansion type joints are required for proper performance of work, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant, in compliance with industry standards. 5. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact, with bituminous coating or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer/fabricator. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS: A. GENERAL: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations, and with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual". Anchor units of work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints and seams which will be FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07600-2 permanently watertight and weatherproof. B. UNDERLAYN ENT: Where aluminum is to be installed directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of paper slip sheet and a course of polyethylene underlayment. C. BED FLANGES of work in a thick coat of bituminous roofing cement where required for waterproof performance. 3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION: CLEAN EXPOSED METAL surfaces, removing substances which might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes. PROTECTION: Installer shall advise Contractor of required procedures for surveillance and protection of flashings and sheet metal work during construction to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration, other than natural weathering, at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07600-3 SECTION 07700 ROOF SPECIALTIES & ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Cbnditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. PROVIDE roof accessories as required. B. EACH ITEM MOUNTED ON ROOF shall be supported on a curb unit, unless otherwise indicated. C. PIPE PENETRATIONS thru roof shall be through a pipe seal or pipe curb assembly. D. ROOF CURBS for roof top air conditioning units are to be supplied with the units and are not required by this Section. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. SUBMIT manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS i 2.01 PREFABRICATED CURBS AND PIPE SEALS: A. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: 1. Products by the Pate Company are specified, comparable products by Thybar Corporation, Custom Curb, Inc., or an approved equal will be acceptable. 2. Provide products manufactured from prime steel (except for pipe seals). a. Structural quality: ASTM A 446. b. Zinc coating: ASTM A 525, G90. B. PREFABRICATED CURB UNITS: 1. Construction: Box section design of 14 ga. galvanized steel construction, continuous mitered and welded corner seams, integral base plate, factory installed treated wood nailers, and insulated with 1-1/2" thick, rigid fiberglass board insulation. ROOF SPECIALTIES_ANJl ACCESSORIES - - 07700-1 2. Size: Furnish units with inside dimensions as required for each roof opening. Verify sizes required. 3. Height: 12 inches. 4. Style: PC-la or lb, PC-2a or 2b, PC-5a or 5b (as required by deck construction) as manufactured by The Pate Company or an approved equal C. PIPE SEALS: 1. Construction: Spun aluminum base having a minimum 5 inch roof surface flange, stepped neoprene rubber boot to be secured to base and penetrating pipe with adjustable stainless steel clamps. 2. Size: As required for size of penetrating pipe. 3. Style: Pate Pipe Seal as manufactured by The Pate Company or an approved equal D. PIPE CURB ASSEMBLY UNITS: 1. Construction: 18 gage galvanized steel, unitized construction with ;integral base plate, insulated with 3 pound density insulation, 2 x 2 treated wood nailer, acrylic clad ABS plastic cover, fastening screws, graduated step neoprene boots with stainless steel band clamps. 2. Style: PGA-1, PCA-2, or PCA-5 (as required by deck construction) as manufactured by The Pate Company or an approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. GENERAL: Comply with manufacturers instructions and recommendations. Coordinate with installation of roof deck and other substrates to receive accessory units, and with roof insulation, roofing and flashing; as required to ensure that each element of the work performs properly, and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight. Anchor units securely to supporting structural substrates. B. FLANGE SEALS: Except as otherwise indicated, set flanges of accessory units in a thick bed of roofing cement, to form a seal. END OF SECTION ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES 07700-2 1 r SECTION 07715 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS PART1-PRODUCTS 1.01 MATERIALS A. Metal material used in flashing and sheet metal work shall be 0.050" mm finish nated otherwise on the Drawings ecificall desi aluminum unless s . p y g B. Gauges of metal used in flashing and sheet metal work shall be as specifically designated on the Drawings. When the Drawings omit specifying a particular gauge, such shall be of the gauges set forth in the following descriptions of particular metals. ' C. Aluminum: Sheets or strips of 3003 or 3004 alloy of the producer's standard finish. 0.050" gauge: 1. Aluminum in contact with concrete or masonry shall receive two (2) coats of water-white methacryt lacquer. 2. Isolate aluminum from other materials, including wood, by a protective bituminous coating not less than 15 mils dry mil thickness; or, by SBS modified bituminous sheet felts, rubber or other techniques approve by the Project Architect. D. Provide downspout adapters as supplied by ADS for sizes as indicated on Drawings. E. Fasteners: Hot dipped galvanized conforming to ASTM - 153 latest edition, or cadmium plated, (or stainless steel used in stainless steel construction). Fastenings shall match particular sheet metal materials to which applied. Nat Is and screws shall have sufficient length to penetrate all metal and fabric materials and into wood support by 3/4" minimum and shall be capable of 40 lb. each minimum Initial withdrawal. 1. Flashing nails shall be a minimum of 11 gauge, barbed, with 5/8" diameter heads, by 2" with tin caps. 2. Galvanized tin caps shall be of 1" or 2" diameter and 28-30 gauge flat sheet metal. 3. Integral capped flashing nail (simplex type) with round head, galvanized, 7/8" minimum. F. Gutters shall be fabricated as detailed, in such a manner that: the outer Up (top edge) Is lower than the interior Up: so the interior bottom of the gutter sloping positively, no less than 1/16" per lineal foot towards its discharge drain (such shall be accomplished by a separate interior lining or bottom in a manner whereby the visible appearance of the gutter appears true and level horizontally: shall be supported Otrrrpgs Ama nnUMTQ OM 07715-1 1 frequently and adequately; shall be separately fabricated from any metal work built into the roofing system (such as a gravel stop); shall be of special detailed configuration to match the Drawings and details (i.e. shall not be of standard "Ogee" or molded configuration, but of rectangular design; and shall be fabricated of sufficiently short lengths to avoid problems with expansion and contraction. 1. Gutters shall be formed of 0.050 mill finish aluminum in accordance with SMACNA. Plate 14-A. Gutter brackets shall be formed of 0.125 aluminum. Gutter spacers shall be formed of 0.062 inch by 1 inch aluminum. G. Downspouts shall be fabricated as detailed of rectangular shape and shall not be of "standard off the shelf' configuration with corrugated indentions or ribs, and shall be supported adequately at uniform and frequent vertical spacing. 1. Downspouts, elbows and downspout hangers shall be formed of 0.050 mill finish aluminum. Downspouts shall be 4 inch by 6 inch rectangular and formed in accordance with SMACNA. Plate 32-B. Hangers shall be formed in accordance with SMACNA. Plate 34-G. Fasteners for gutter hangers shall be a non-corrosive, compatible with aluminum, pan head fastener. PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.01 INSPECTION A. The installer shall examine the areas and conditions under which the flashing and sheet metal is to be installed, and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of this phase of the work. Do not proceed with this phase until the unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Commencement of work shall be construed as acceptance of the conditions by this Contractor. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Workmanship shall conform to the best trade standards. Materials shall be the same and tike materials. Do soldering slowly with heavy well heated soldering coppers of blount design, properly tinned before use. Tin edges of each item to be soldered with best grade pure metal. 1-1/2 inch on both sides with rosin as flux. B. Sheet metal counterflashing normally an integral part of fan housings (air conditioning housing and tike items) wi I I be fiunished as part of such work by other Sections of these Specifications. Other counterflashing items shall be as detailed and specified in the Section. Transitions from roof curbs to gravity vents, fans or other work shall be of specified metal, of low profile design with transitions sloped 45 degrees maximum. Extend counter flashing four (4) inches over base flashing. C. Penetration of the roof membrane shall be with techniques other than pitch pocket pans where possible. However, where such must be used form "pitch pocket pans" of GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS 07715-2 size to clear items protruding through roofing membranes by three (3) inches on all sides, of 0.050 aluminum, with four (4) inch horizontal (approximate) deck flange and with a six (6) inch height. D. Strainer units halt be fabricated from minimum 0.062" diameter non-corrosive, Compatible wire or wire mesh, with 1/2" maximum spacing of wires of are movable beehive design. ' E. Welding: Comply with requirements for welding as set forth elsewhere in these Specifications. F. Dissimilar metals shall be protected from galvanitic corrosion where they touch. I PART 4 - INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Installation shall comply with "the SMACNA Manual" recommendations for installation. 2. It shall be required that the flashing and sheet metal work be permanently watertight and shall not deteriorate in excess of published limitations of the manufacturer. B. Thermal expansion shall be provided for in al l exposed sheet metal work exceeding 10-0" in running length, except where otherwise indicated: 1. On flashing, gravel stops, coping caps and trim, expansion capability shall be on ' 10"-0" maximum spacing, and located 2'-0" from corners and intersections. 2. Gutters shall be provided with expansion capability at intervals no greater than 50'-0". C. Fasteners and expansion provisions shall be concealed wherever possible. D. Fill "pitch pocket pans" as follows. Install and tightly pack oakum around pipes or other penetrating materials. Install one (I") inch of quick setting cementatious grout above the oakum, pour hot bitumen to a level 3/4" to 1-1/2" from the pitch pan. F111 ' pitch pan to top with asphalt plastic roofing center. END OF SECTION GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS 07715-3 t SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. THE EXTENT of each type of joint sealer is indicated on the Drawings, sometimes by abbreviations as indicated herein. S. THE REQUIRED APPLICATIONS include, but are not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Exterior wall joints. 2. Isolation joints between structure and other elements. ' 3. Flashing joints. 4. Interior wall joints around frames and between different types of materials. 5. Joints in concrete paving. " " C. ELASTOMERIC SEALANT shall apply to materials and work to seal and make watertight all joints on the exterior of the building and joints on the interior of the building that may be expected to expand and contract or are subject to water or dampness. D. CAULKING COMPOUND shall apply only to materials and work in connection with the filling or closing of interior joints where expansion or contraction are of no consideration and where filling and closing of these interior joints is primarily for appearance. E. GLAZING: Refer to Division 8 sections for sealants and other compounds and gaskets required for installation of glass. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: IA. MANUFACTURER'S DATA: Submit manufacturer's specifications, recommendations and installation instructions for each type of material required. JO SEALERS 07900-1 1.01 JOB CONDITIONS: A. THE INSTALLER MUST EXAMINE the joint surfaces and backing, their anchorage to the structure and the conditions under which the joint sealer work is to be performed, notifying the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work and performance of the sealers. Do not proceed with the joint sealerwork until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. B. WEATHER CONDITIONS: Do not proceed with installation of sealants under adverse weather conditions or when temperatures are below or above manufacturer's recommended limitations for installation. Proceed with the work only when forecasted weather conditions are favorable for proper cure and development of high early bond strength. Wherever joint width is affected by ambient temperature variations, install elastomeric sealants only when temperatures are in the lower third of manufacturer's recommended installation temperature range. 1.05 SEALANT WARRANTY: A. PROVIDE WRITTEN WARRANTY, signed by Manufacturer and Contractor; agreeing to, within warranty period, replace/repair defective materials and workmanship defined to include: instances of significant leakage of water or air: failures in joint adhesion, material cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion-from joint resistance, migration resistance„ strain resistance, or general durability failure to perform as required as clearly specified in manufacturer's published product literature as an inherent characteristic of the sealant material. Warranty includes responsibility for removal and replacement of work (if any) which conceals or obstructs the replacement of sealants. Warranty covers the following types of sealants on this project, for the following periods of time. 1. Elastomeric sealants of every type. 2. Warranty period of 2 years after date of substantial completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL: A. COLORS: For exposed materials, provide standard color which most closely matches adjacent surfaces. For concealed materials, provide the natural color which has the best overall performance characteristics. B. COMPATIBILITY: Before purchase of each required material, confirm its compatibility with each other material it will be exposed to in the joint system. JO SEALERS 07900-2 1 1 1 I 2.02 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS: A. FOR BUILDING EXPANSION JOINTS, provide one of the following: 1. One-Cornponent Polyurethane Sealant: a. Vulkem 116; Mameco International. b. Sikaflex la; Sika Chemical Corp. c. Sonolastic NPI; Sonneborn. d. Dynatrol I; Pecora. 2. Two-Component Polyurethane Sealant (2 Pu-S): a. Vulkem 227; Mameco International. b. Sonolastic NP2; Sonneborn. c. Dynatrol II; Pecora. d. Dymeric; Tremco Mfg. Co. B. ISOLATION JOINTS BETWEEN STRUCTURE provide one of the following: 1. One-Component Polyurethane Sealant (I Pu-S): a. Vulkem 116; Mameco International. b. S-kaflex la; Sika Chemical Corp. c. Sonolastic NPI; Sonneborn. d. Dynatrol I; Pecora. 2.03 FLASHING AND COPING JOINTS: AND OTHER MATERIALS, A. NON-SKINNING MASTIC SEALANTS, provide one of the following: 1. Polybutene Mastic Sealant. a. Trem Tape; Tremco, Inc. 2. Polyisobutylene Mastic Sealant. a. Curtain Wall Sealant; Tremco, Inc. 2.04 INTERIOR WALL JOINTS (CALKING), provide one of the following: A. ACRYLIC-EMULSION SEALANT: 1. AC-30 Acrylic Latex; Pecora Corp. 2. Conolac; Sonneborn. 3. VIP Ter-Polymer; VIP Products. 4. Acrylicalk; Standard Drywall Products. 1 2.05 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS. PAVEMENT EXPANSION JOINTS, provide one of the following: A. TWO-COMPONENT POLYURETHANE SEALANT. 1. Vulkem 245; Mameco International. 2. Sikaflex 12 SL; Sika Chemical Corp. 3. Urexpan NR 200; Pecoa Corp. JOINT SEALERS 07900-3 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: A. JOINT CLEANER: Provide type of joint cleaning compound recommended by sealant or calking compound manufacturer for the joint surfaces to be cleaned. B. JOINT PRIMER/SEALER: Provide the type of joint primer/sealer recommended by the sealant manufacturer for the joint surfaces to be primed or sealed. C. BOND BREAKER TAPE: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by the sealant manufacturer to be applied to sealant-contact surface where bond to the substrate or joint filler must be avoided for proper performance of sealant. Provide self- adhesive tape wherever applicable. D. SEALANT BACKER ROD: Compressible rod stock of extruded, closed cell polyethylene foam polyethylene jacketed polyurethane foam, or other material as recommended by compatibility with sealant by the sealant manufacturer. Provide size and shape of rod which will control joint depth for sealant placement, break bond of sealant at bottom of joint, form optimum shape of sealant bead on back side, and provide a highly compressible backer to minimize possibility of sealant extrusion when joint is compressed. Provide one of the following, or an approved equal. 1. Green Rod; Nomaco, Inc. 2. Dow Ethefoam; Dow Chemical Co. E. JOINT FILLERS, PAVEMENT TYPES: Provide resilient, self expanding and non- extruding type premolded cork units complying with ASTM D 1752, Type III; ES HH-F 341, Type 11, Class C; or AASHTO M153, Type III. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS: A. COMPLY with manufacturer's printed instructions except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where manufacturer's technical representative directs otherwise- 3.02 JOINT SURFACE PREPARATION: A. CLEAN JOINT SURFACES immediately before installation of sealant or calking compound. Remove dirt, insecure coatings, moisture and other substances which would interfere with bond of sealant or calking compound. B. PRIME OR SEAL THE JOINT SURFACES wherever shown or recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Do not allow primer/sealer to spill or migrate onto adjoining surfaces. JOINT SEALER 07900-4 1 1 1 1 1 1 3.03 INSTALLATION: A. INSTALL SEALANT BACKER ROD for liquid elastomeric sealants, except where shown to be omitted or recommended to be omitted by seal ant manufacturer for the application shown. Take precaution not to puncture backer rod during installation. B. INSTALL BOND BREAKER TAPE wherever shown and wherever required by manufacturer's recommendations to ensure that elastomeric sealants will perform property. C. INSTALL PAVEMENT TYPE JOINT FILLERS below sealant and backer rod as recommended by manufacturer of sealant being used. D. APPLY SEALANT MATERIAL PRIOR TO application of paint, sealers or water repellants to adjacent surfaces. E. EMPLOY ONLY PROVEN INSTALLATION TECHNIQUES, which will ensure that sealants will be deposited in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete "Wetting" of the joint bond surfaces equally on opposite sides. Except as otherwise indicated, tool sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces. Where horizontal joints are between a horizontal surface and vertical surface, fill joint to form a slight cove so that joint will not trap moisture and dirt. F. INSTALL SEALANTS TO DEPTHS as shown or, if not shown, as recommended by the sealant manufacturer but within the following general limitations, measured at the center (thin) section of the bead: 1. For sidewalks, pavements and similar joints sealed with elastomeric sealants and subject to traffic and other abrasion and indentation exposures, fill joints to a depth equal to 75% of joint width., and neither more than 5/8" deep nor less than 3/8" deep. 2. For normal moving joints sealed with elastomeric sealants but not subject to traffic, fill joints to a depth equal to 50% of joint width, but neither more than 1/2" deep nor less than 1/4" deep. 3. For joints sealed with non-elastomeric sealants and calking compounds, fill joints to a depth in the range of 75% to 125% of joint width. G. SPILLAG: Do not allow sealants or compounds to overflow or spill onto adjoining surfaces, or to migrate into the voids of adjoining surfaces. Clean adjoining surfaces by whatever means may be necessary to eliminate evidence of spillage. 3.04 CURE AND PROTECTION: A. CURE SEALANTS and calking compounds in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface durability. Advise the Contractor of procedures required for the cure and protection of joint sealers during the construction period so that they will be JOINT SEALERS 07900-5 without deterioration or damage (other than normal wear and weathering at the lime of Project acceptance. I END OF SECTION rI Li 1 1 1 JOINT SEALERS 07900-6 ' SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES ' PART 1 - GENERAL ' 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including general and ' Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. THE EXTENT of steel doors and frames is shown on the drawings and schedules and as specified. ' 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: ' A. PROVIDE DOORS AND FRAMES complying with the Steel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications, Standard Steel Doors and Frames" (SDI 100) unless custom items are required. B. FIRE RATED ASSEMBLY (if any): Provide fire-rated doors investigated and tested as fire door assemblies, complete with type of hardware to be used. Identify each fire door with recognized testing laboratory labels, indicating applicable fire rating of steel doors. Construct and install assemblies to comply with NFPA Standard No. 80, and as herein specified. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit shop drawings for the fabrication and installation of steel ' doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: ' A. GALVANIZED STEEL SHEETS: Zinc-coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with ASTM A 526. with ASTM A 525, G60 zinc coating, mill ' phosphatized. STEEL DOOR A1VD_ FRAMES 08110-1 B. SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS: Fabricate of not less than 18 gage galvanized sheet steel C. INSERTS, BOLTS AND FASTENERS: Manufacturer's standard units, except hot-dip galvanized items to be built into exterior was, complying with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable. D. SHOP APPLIED PAINT: 1. Primer: Rust-inhibitive enamel or paint, either air-drying or baking, suitable as a base for specified finish paints. 2.02 FABRICATION, GENERAL: A. FABRICATE EXTERIOR DOORS, panels, and frames from galvanized sheet steel. B. EXPOSED FASTENERS: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat Phillips heads for exposed screws and bolts. C. AT EXTERIOR LOCATIONS provide doors which have been fabricated as thermal insulating door and frame assemblies and tested in accordance with ASTM C 236. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, apparent U factor for thermal-rated assemblies is 0.24 BTU/hr (ft2) °F. D. FINISH HARDWARE PREPARATION: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware in accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A 115 series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. E. REINFORCE DOORS AND FRAMES to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied finish hardware may be done at project site. F. LOCATE FINISH HARDWARE as shown on final shop drawings or, if not shown, in accordance with "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware", published by Door and Hardware Institute. G. SHOP PAINTS: 1. Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units, including galvanized surfaces. 2. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials before application of paint. 3. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished surface ready to receive finish paint. 2.03 STANDARD STEEL DOORS: STEEL DOOR AND FRAMES , 08110-2 A. PROVIDE METAL DOORS of Grade II, Model 3 and as indicated on the Drawings or ' schedules and complying with S.D.I 100 for minimum materials and construction requirements. Form face of not less than 18 ga. steel sheet, unless otherwise indicated or required. ' 1. Provide doors with vision panels (if any). 2. Provide doors with sightproof louvers (if any louvers). For fire rated openings, use only louvers listed by UL or FM and factory applied to doors. 2.04 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES: A. PROVIDE METAL FRAMES of the types and styles indicated on the drawings or schedules and complying with S.D.I 100 for minimum materials and construction requirements. Form frames of not less than 16 ga. steel. ' B. PROVIDE METAL FRAMES for doors, as shown on the drawings. Conceal all fastenings unless otherwise shown. 1. Fabricate frames with welded joints ground smooth to completely conceal joints ' unless indicated otherwise. C. DOOR SILENCERS Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single-swing frames and 2 silencers on heads of double- swing frames. ' D. PLASTER GUARDS Provide 26 gage steel plaster guards or mortar boxes, welded to frame, at back of finish hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation. ' PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3.01 INSPECTION: A. INSTALLER MUST EXAMINE substrate and conditions under which steel doors and frames are to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 1 3.02 INSTALLATION: ' A. PLACING FRAMES: Comply with the provisions of S.D.I. 105 "Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames" unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install fire-rated frames (if any) in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 80. B. DOOR INSTALLATION: ' STEEL DOOR AND FRAMES 08110-3 1. Fit hollow metal doors accurately in their respective frames, within clearances specified in S.D.I. 100. 2. Finish hardware for steel doors and frames as specified in Division 8 Series sections of the specifications, and shall be installed under the provisions of this section. 3. Place fire-rated doors (if any) with clearances as specified in NFPA Standard No. 80 unless more stringent conditions required by local fire regulations. 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN: A. FINAL ADJUSTMENTS Check and readjust operating finish hardware items in hollow metal work just prior to final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including doors or frames which are warped, bowed or otherwise damaged. B. PRIME COAT TOUCH-UP: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer. END OF SECTION STEEL DOOR AND FRAMES - -- 081104 SECTION 08702 SPECIAL SECURITY DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this Section. ' 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: ' A. EXTENT of Special Security Door Hardware is indicated on the Drawings and in Door Schedules. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. PRODUCT DATA. Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's technical data, detail drawings, and installation instructions for items of this section. Transmit copy of instructions to ' the Installer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EMERGENCY EXIT HARDWARE: ' A. TIME-DELAY SAFETY LOCK: Provide time-delay safety locking emergency exit device "Doorguard" as manufactured by Reliable Security Systems, Inc., Cockeysville, Maryland, on all single leaf or double leaf door emergency exits as indicated. B. IRREVERSIBLE MODE for a (30) second delay timing and an immediate relock on opening and closing of door will be required for all emergency exits unless otherwise noted. C. ELECTROMECHANICAL LOCKING ASSEMBLY shall be surface mounted in tamper resistant housing on the header of the door frame. D. WIRING: Provide concealed voltage transformer and wiring to electric junction box located near door. Keyed disconnect switch will not be required. SPECIAL SECURITY DOOR HARDWARE 08702-] PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. INSTALLER MUST EXAMINE the substrate and conditions under which special hardware is to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the timely and proper completion of the work. Do' not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. COOPERATE with other trades so that work is properly coordinated. B. PROVIDE all necessary trim, hardware, and accessories for a complete installation. C. MANUFACTURER'S installation recommendationsshall be complied with. 3.03 CLEANING: A. UPON COMPLETION leave work in a neat, clean condition. END OF SECTION SPECIAL SECURITY DOOR HARDWARE •--•-•-•-• 08702-2 SECTION 08711- HARDWARE SCHEDULE Item #1 Doors 3; 4, 5, 6, 8, 11, 21, 22 Each to Have: 2 Pr. Butts FBB 191 NRP 1 Lockset Best 30H Series 1 Closer P2820B I Threshold 170A 1 Door Bottom DC-74 1 Set Weather Strip 303AV Item #2 Doors 7, 20, 23, 24 Each to Have: 2 Pr. Butts FBB 191 NRP 1 Closure P2820B 1 Passage Set Best- 1 Kick Plate 8x2LDW I Threshold 170A I Door Bottom DC74 Item #3 Doors 9, 18, 19 Each to Have: 2 Pr. Butts FBB 191 NRP I Lockset Best 30H Series 1 Threshold 170A 1 Door Bottom DC74 Item #4 Doors 12. 13, 14, 15, 17 Each to Have: 2 Pr. Butts FBB 191 1 Privacy Set Best- 1 Threshold 170A 1 Door Bottom DC74 u 1 t s SECTION 0%23 WATER REPELLENTS AND GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This specification covers preparation, materials, services, and equipment required for the application of PROFESSIONALO Water Sealant & Anti-Graffitiant for projects involving either old or new construction. Any substantial deviations shall be referred to the manufacturer or authorized representative. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04-2200 [04220] - Concrete Masonry Units: Concrete Block walls to receive water repellent and/or anti-graffitiant. B. Section 09-2400 [09220] - Portland Cement Plaster. Cement plaster wall finish to receive water repellent and/or anti-graffitiant. 1.03 SUBNHTTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01330 - Submittals. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data sheets for the specified water repellents, graffiti resistant coatings and cleaners. Submit description for protection of surrounding areas and non-masonry surfaces, surface preparation, application, and final cleaning. ' C. Applicator Qualifications: Submit qualifications of applicator; stating applicator has a minimum of 3 years experience using the specified or a similar products. Provide a list of several most recently completed projects, including project name and location, names of owner and architect, and description of products used, substrates, and method of application. 1 D. Environmental Regulations: Submit applicable environmental regulations. E. VOC Certification: Submit certification that water repellent and graffiti resistant coatings furnished comply with regulations controlling content of volatile organic compounds (VOC). 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: WATER REPELLENTS AND GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS 09623-1 I . Experience in the application of the specified or similar products. 2. Employs persons trained in the application of the specified products or similar products. B. Pre-Application Meeting: Convene a pre-application meeting 2 weeks before the start of application of water repellent and graffiti resistant coatings. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section, including the Contractor, Architect, Applicator, and Professional Products of Kansas' representative. Review environmental regulations, test panel procedures, protection of surrounding areas and non-masonry surfaces, surface preparation, application, field quality control, final cleaning, warranty application procedures, and coordination with other work. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATIONS A. Comply with applicable federal, state, and local environmental regulations. 1.06 TEST PANELS A. Before full-scale application, review manufacturer's product data sheets to determine the suitability of each product for the specific surfaces. Apply each water repellent and graffiti resistant coating to test panels to determine appropriate strengths, coverage rates, compatibility, effectiveness, surface preparation, application procedures, and desired results. B. Apply graffiti resistant coatings to test panels in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Allow a minimum of 5 days curing time prior to applying graffiti paint to test panels. Apply graffiti paint to test panels and allow at least 24 hours or longer for paint to cure. Apply cleaner to evaluate ease of graffiti removal. Repeat cycles of cleanings as directed by Architect. Do not begin full-scale application until test panels are inspected and approved by the Architect. C. Submit Sections 1 & 2 of Manufacturer's warranty application using information resulting from test panel application. These sections must be submitted to Manufacturer for approval prior to project commencement. Section 3 to be completed and submitted at project completion. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A_ Delivery: Deliver materials to the job site in original, tightly sealed, unopened containers, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer. Verify that the product matches that of the original sample applied on the test panel. B. Storage and Handling: Store containers upright in a cool, dry place. Keep away from sparks and open flame. Store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. WATER REPELLENTS AND GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS 09623-2 I 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Surface Preparation: Contractor or applicator shall be responsible for providing a clean, dry substrate free from oil, dirt, grease, efflorescence, form release agents or any other coating, which may inhibit penetration and adhesion of water repellent and graffiti resistant coating. This requirement applies to new construction, renovation or remedial projects. Substrate must be completely dry prior to applying product. B. Environmental Requirements: 1. Temperature: Product may be applied at any temperature providing that there is no frozen moisture present in the substrate. When applied at temperatures below 40 degrees Fahrenheit the product may cure at a slower rate. Optimal temperature range for application is between 40° F (5° C) or below 95° F (35° Q. 2. Do not apply material if the substrate is wet or contains frozen moisture. Allow substrate to dry for a minimum of 48 hours after rain or 72 hours after power washing. 3. Do not apply material during inclement weather or if precipitation is expected within 12 hours. 4. Do not commence application under windy conditions. C. Protection: 1. Special precautions should be taken to avoid fumes from entering the building. Heating and air conditioning, ventilation systems, and fresh air intakes should be turned off and covered. and other building hardware from overspray. vehicles glass metal 2 Protect shrubs , , , . , PART 2 PRODUCTS i m 2.01 MANUFACTURER ' Professional Products of Kansas, Inc., 4456 S. Clifton, Wichita, KS 67216, (800) 676- 7346, (316) 522-9300, Fax (316) 522-9346 2.02 WATER REPELLENT AND GRAFFITI: RESISTANT COATINGS A. Professional@ Water Sealant & Anti-Graffitiant, Super Strength: First coat in the two- coat process. Depending on the porosity of the substrate, it may be used for the second coat as well. Penetrating silicone rubber graffiti resistant coating for use on vertical concrete, brick, sandstone, limestone, stucco, split face block, concrete block, and fluted block. Non-sacrificial, will withstand repeated cycles of graffiti tagging and removal with no requirement to reapply the sealant. May enhance or darken some substrates. Will not form a surface film or gloss. Inorganic, it is not affected by W rays, salts, acid rain, etc. Breathable, it allows moisture vapor to escape while preventing liquid penetration. Flexible, it bridges hairline cracks and allows for building movement. Provides a graffiti barrier as well as waterproofing protection. 1. Form: Liquid Color: Clear 2 . WATER REPELLENTS AND GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS 09623-3 3. Active Substance: RTV Silicone Rubber 4_ Percent Active Material: 15% 5. Flash Point: 105° B. Professional® Water Sealant & Anti-Graffitiant, Extra Strength: May be used as the second coat in the two-coat process. Porosity of substrate is the determining factor. THE SECOND COAT SHOULD BE APPLIED TO THE ENTIRE STRUCTURE TO ACHIEVE WATER REPELLENT PROTECTION IN ADDITION TO GRAFFITI PROTECTION. 1. Form: Liquid 2. Color: Clear 3. Active Substance: RTV Silicone Rubber 4. Percent Active Material: 8% 5. Flash Point: 105° C. The graffiti resistant coating product listed above is selected as a standard of quality. Application procedure and coverage rates must be in conformance with results achieved in test panels and manufacturer's application instructions. 1. Proposed alternate products must be equal in terms of chemical composition and performance standards. Products must be penetrating, permanent treatments using a silicone rubber base and not contain any paraffin waxes, urethanes or polysiloxanes. Silane and siloxane based products will not be considered because of their lack of elongation. Products must be non-sacrificial, allowing for repeated cycles of tagging and cleaning without the requirement to reapply the sealant. 2.04 CLEANERS A. CLEANER: Phase II Cleaner (for graffiti removal), manufactured by Professional Products of Kansas, Inc. No other product will be accepted as they may void the warranty. B. Extra. Material: provide one gallon Phase II Cleaner, manufacturer's instructions, MSDS and product data to Owner. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify the following: 1. 1. The required joint sealants have been installed. 2. 2. New masonry and mortar have cured a minimum of 28 days. 3. 3. Surface to be treated is clean, dry, and contains no frozen moisture. 4. 4. Environmental conditions are appropriate for application. 3.02 PROTECTION WATER REPELLENTS AND GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS 0%23-4 11 A. Protect surrounding areas, glass, landscaping, building occupants, pedestrians, vehicles, and non-masonry surfaces during the work from contact with water repellent and graffiti resistant coatings. B. Special precautions should be taken to prohibit fumes from entering the building. Heating and air conditioning ventilation systems and fresh air intakes should be turned off and covered. 3.03 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean all dirt, oil, grease, mold, mildew, efflorescence, form release agents or any other coating or material from surfaces that may interfere with penetration, performance, adhesion, or aesthetics of water repellent and graffiti resistant coatings. Thoroughly ' remove cleaner residues. Allow surfaces to dry completely before application of water repellent and graffiti resistant coatings. B. Repair, patch, and fill all cracks, voids, defects, and damaged areas in surface as approved by the Architect. Allow repair materials to cure completely before application of waster repellent and graffiti resistant coatings. C. Seal all open joints. D. Allow new masonry and concrete construction and repainted surfaces to cure for a i ngs. minimum of 28 days before application of water repellent and graffiti resistant coat 3.04 APPLICATION d i h ance w t A. Apply water repellent and graffiti resistant coatings to substrates in accor manufacturer's written instructions, environmental regulations, and application 1 procedures determined from the test panel results approved by the Architect. Graffiti protection requires a two-coat application. In most cases, the first coat will be Super Strength. The second coat will be either Super or Extra, depending on the porosity of the substrate. B. Apply to clean, dry, cured, and properly prepared surfaces approved by Architect. ' C. Apply material as shipped by the manufacturer. Do not dilute. D. Do not apply to below-grade surfaces. E. Do not apply to painted surfaces. F. Do not apply anti-graffitiant to horizontal surfaces. G. Do not apply to compensate for structural or material defects in substrates. WATER REPELLENTS AND GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS 09623-5 H. Do not apply to substrates such as asphalt or polystyrene, which may be affected by the solvent carrier. I 1. Apply material using a high-volume, low pressure, pump-up sprayer (between 40-60 psi), with solvent resistant fittings. Foam roller, or brush of natural bristle or foam may be used in areas where spray application is not appropriate. 1. Vertical Applications: Apply in a flood coat, from top to bottom, being sure to obtain a 4 to 6 inch rundown of product from the point where the spray makes contact with the surface. Work all the way down the building covering the rundown as you go. Avoid excessive overlapping. Allow first coat to dry to the touch prior to applying second coat. Apply the second coat in the same manner. a. Extremely dense substrates may require back rolling after product is applied to smooth out any rundown lines. b. Brush any excess product that may accumulate on ledges and other areas that may hold excess material. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: Inspect the water repellent and graffiti resistant coating work with the contractor, Architect, applicator, and Professional Products of Kansas representative, and compare with test panel results approved by the Architect. Determine if the substrates are suitably protected. Allow the test panel to cure for 5 days prior to applying graffiti paint for testing purposes. B. Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide the services of a manufacturer's authorized field representative to verify specified products are used; protection, surface preparation, and application of graffiti resistant coatings are in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions; the test panel has been approved by the Architect. C. Provide manufacturer's written warranty covering material performance for a period of five (5) years for graffiti protection and Ten (10) years for Vertical water repellent applications from the date of project completion. 3.06 FINAL CLEANING A. Upon completion of all work covered in the specification, the Contractor shall remove all equipment, material and debris, leaving the area in an undamaged and acceptable condition. Dispose of coating containers according to state and local environmental regulations. WATER REPELLENTS AND GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS 09623-6 B. Repair, restore, or replace to the satisfaction of the Architect, all materials, landscaping, and non-masonry surfaces damaged by exposure to water repellent and graffiti resistant coatings. Professional Products of Kansas, Inc. 4456 S. Clifton Wichita, KS 67216 (800) 676-7346 (316) 522-9300 Fax (316) 522-9346 www.watersealant.com END OF SECTION 11 WATER REPELLENTS AND GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS 09623-7 SECTION 14420 INCLINED WHEELCHAIR PLATFORM LIFT PART I GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES Indoor inclined platform wheelchair lifts. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Anchor placement in concrete. Section 04800 - Masonry Assemblies: Anchor placement in masonry. Section 06100 -Rough Carpentry: Blocking in framed construction for lift attachment. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Stair walls. Section 13650 - Fire Alarm System: Building Fire Alarm Integration system to connect the lift control system with the building fire alarm system. Division 16 - Electrical: Electrical power service and wiring connections. 1.3 REFERENCES ASME A17.5 - Elevator and Escalator Electrical Equipment. ASME A18.1 - Safety Standard for Platform Lifts and Stairway Chairlifts. CSA B44.1 - Elevator and Escalator Electrical Equipment. CSA B355 - Lifts for Persons with Physical Disabilities. ICC/ANSI Al 17.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code. CSA - National Electric Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS Submit under provisions of Section 01300. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions, including preparation, storage and handling requirements. INCLINED LIFT SPECIFICATION 1 2. Include complete description of performance and operating characteristics. 3. Show maximum and average power demands. Shop Drawings: 4. Show typical details of assembly, erection and anchorage. 5. Include wiring diagrams for power, control, and signal systems. 6. Show complete layout and location of equipment, including required clearances. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, representing actual product, color, and patterns. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm with minimum 10 years documented experience in manufacturing of inclined wheelchair platform lifts of installations of type specified. Installer Qualifications: Firm licensed to install equipment of this scope, with evidence of experience with specified equipment. Installer shall maintain an adequate stock of replacement parts and have qualified people available to ensure timely maintenance and callback service at the project site. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Provide platform lifts in compliance with: 1. ASME Al8.1 - Safety Standard for Platform Lifts and Stairway Chaiurlifts. 2. ASME Al 7.5 - Elevator and Escalator Electrical Equipment. 3. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code. 4. 5. Provide platform lifts in compliance with: 6. CSA B355 - Lifts for Persons with Physical Disabilities. 7. CSA B44.1/ASME Al 7.5 - Elevator and Escalator Electrical Equipment. 8. CSA - National Electric Code. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. INCLINED LIFT SPECIFICATION 2 11 Store components off the ground in a dry covered area, protected from adverse weather conditions. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS Do not use wheelchair lift for hoisting materials or personnel during construction period. 1.9 WARRANTY Warranty: Manufacturer shall warrant the wheelchair lift materials and workmanship for two years following completion of installation. Extended Warranty: Provide an extended manufacturer's warranty for the entire warranty period covering the wheelchair lift materials and workmanship for the following additional extended period beyond the initial warranty: 1. Three additional years. ' PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS Acceptable Manufacturer: Gaiaventa Lift; U.S. address: P.O. Box 1769, Blaine, WA 98231-1769. Canadian Address: 7505 134A St., Surrey, BC V3W 7B3 Toll-Free 1-800-663-6556 Tel: (604) 594-0422. Fax: (604) 594-9915 Email: roductinfo araventa.ca. Web: www. araventa.ca Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 STAIR LIFT FOR STRAIGHT OR TURNING STAIRWAYS Inclined Platform Lift: Gamventa Stair-Lift, Model GSL Artim inclined platform lift for straight and turning stairways. Lift consists of a tubular guide rail system, a folding platform that is moved along the guide rails by a rope sprocket drive system, overspeed safety system and call stations at each landing. Conform to the following design requirements: 1. Application: a. Indoor. b. Outdoor. 2. Platform Load Rating: 250 kg (550 lb) with minimum safety factor of 5. 3. Travel Speed: 101.6 mm/s (20 fpm) slowing to 50 percent of rated speed before entering and while rounding comers. 4. Platform Deck: 1.6 mm (16 gauge) sheet metal coated with electrostatically applied and baked anti-skid Sandex black paint. a. Platform Size A (ADA Compliant): 800 min (31-1/2 in) wide by 1220mm (48 in) long. INCLINED LIFT SPECIFICATION 3 b. Platform Size B: 800mm (31-1/2 in) wide by 1050 mm (41-3/8 in) long. c. Platform Size C: 800 mm (31-1/2 in) wide by 900 mm (35-3/8 in)- d. Platform Size D: 700 mm (27-1/2 in) wide by 750mm (29-1/2 in). 5. Platform Operation: a. Automatic Fold: Folded and unfolded electrically from the call station. b. Emergency Manual Fold: When unit is left in the open position, platform may be manually folded and retained in closed position. 6. Under Platform Obstruction Sensing: a. Provide an under platform sensing device to stop the platform from traveling in the downward direction when encountering 1.8 (4 lbs) of pressure. b. Platform is permitted to travel in the opposite direction of obstruction to allow clearing. 7. Passenger Restraining Arms: a. Platform equipped with retractable passenger restraining arms in compliance with ASME Al8.1a - 2001 or more recent edition. b. Arms stop moving when an obstruction causing 20 N (41bf) of pressure is encountered and will immediately retract when the signal is removed. c. Provide with means to manually unlock and open the restraining arms for passenger emergency evacuation. d. Arms are folded and unfolded electrically from the call stations or platform controls. e. Top of arms mounted 948 mm (37-3/8 in.) above the platform deck. When in guarding position the arms are located above the perimeter of the platform. f. The gaps between ends of arms shall not exceed 100 mm (4 in.) 8. Boarding Ramps: a. Provide boarding sides of platform with retractable ramps positioned for travel at a height of 152mm (6 in.) measured vertically above the platform deck. b. Lock ramps in their guarding positions during travel. When the platform is at the landing, only the retractable ramp servicing the landing shall be operable. C. Ramps shall be folded and unfolded electrically. d. Retractable ramps, in the guarded position, shall withstand a force of 556 N (125 lbs.) applied on any 100 mm by 100 mm (4 in. by 4 in.) area. This force shall not cause the height of the ramp, at any point in its length, to be less than 152 mm (6 in.) measured vertically above the platform deck. e. Provide a means to manually unlock the ramps for emergency evacuation when platform is located at a landing. INCLINED LIFT SPECIFICATION 4 1 a P 1 1 t 1 f. Provide with a bi-directional obstruction sensitive device on the travel direction side end of the platform to stop lift when 1.8 kg (4 lbs.) of pressure is encountered. Platform is permitted to travel in the opposite direction of obstruction to allow clearing. g. When platform folds, passenger restraining arms shall fold down and be covered by the folded platform. 9. Platform Side Wall: a. Provide non-boarding and non-guide-rail side of the platform with a sidewall of not less than 152 mm (6 in.) in height, measured vertically from the platform deck. b. When the platform is folded the side-wall shall cover the platform controls providing protection from vandalism. 10. Pedestrian Safety Lights: a. Equip platform with amber pedestrian safety lights located at both ends of the platform to alert pedestrian traffic that the platform is on the stairway. 11. Hand Grips: a. Equip platform with two 174mm (6 7/8 in.) long by 32 mm (1-1/4 in.) diameter aluminum hand grips or grab bars on the front face of the platform with the top being 845 mm (33-1/4 in.) above the platform deck 12. Clearance Dimensions: a. When folded platform shall not protrude more than 321 to 346mm (12-5/8 to 13-5/8 in.) from mounting surface. b. When unfolded and in use platform shall not protrude more than 1015 to 1040 mm (40 to 41 in.) from wall. 13. Controls: a. Platform Controls: 24 V Low Voltage type. b. Platform equipped with emergency stop switch located within reach of the passenger 942 mm (37-1/8 in.) above platform deck. When activated emergency stop button shall cause electric power to be removed from the drive system stopping lift immediately. c. Operating controls shall be two separate 36mm (1-1/2 in.) round constant pressure buttons with directional arrows mounted on the front surface of the platform control panel. d. Directional buttons shall prompt the user with the available travel direction by illuminating the appropriate button. e. When platform arrives at landing and the user releases the directional button, the passenger restraining arms and boarding ramp shall unfold automatically allowing passenger to disembark. f. Platform shall equipped for: 1) Keyed Operation. 2) Keyless operation. 14. Passenger Seat: Fold-down type with safety belt. INCLINED LIFT SPECIFICATION 5 1 15. Side Loading Platform: Provide with automatic folding ramps and kickplate at boarding sides of platform. 16. Platform Deck Light: Integral lamp automatically activated when platform is in unfolded position. 17. Platform Security Lock: Provide to prevent unauthorized unfolding of the platform. 18. Attendant Hand Held Pendant Control: Provide with plug-in socket on platform control panel. 19. Autofold Platform: Provide to automatically fold platform into storage position when left unused in open position at a landing for field adjustable period of 1 to 10 minutes. 20. Pedestrian Audio Alert: Provide chime mounted on platform to indicate platform is folded up and in motion, traveling on stairway. 21. Platform On Board Emergency Alarm: Provide platform with on board alarm that sounds when emergency stop button is pushed. Equip alarm with battery back-up. 22. Remote Platform Boarding: Platform shall travel beyond standard boarding position to remote boarding location away from stairs. Provide with ramp extensions 76 mm (3 in.) extruded aluminum added to the boarding ramps. 23. Under Hanger Sensing: Provide bottom of platform hanger with a sensing plate to stop the platform from traveling in the downward direction when encountered with 1.8Kg (4 lbs.)_of pressure. It shall be possible to drive the platform away from the obstruction. 24. Side of Hanger Obstruction Device: Provide a sensor that detects obstructions in the path of the side of the hanger. Lift shall stop immediately and not travel until the obstruction is removed. It shall be possible to drive the platform away from the obstruction. Drive and Guide Rail System 25. Operation: a. Motor: 2 H.P. electric motor with an integrated brake. b. Required power: 208-240 VAC, single phase, 50/60 Hz. on a dedicated 20 amp circuit. Rated current shall be 7 amps for operation with rated load. C. Locate roped sprocket drive system consisting of a motor, gearbox and PCC controller (Programmable Configuration Controller) at the upper end of the tubes. PCC controller shall be custom programmed to soft start and stop and the slow down platform travel speed for all corners and landings of the lift. Normal operating speed shall be 6 m per minute (20 feet per minute), slowing to 50 percent of this speed before entering and while rounding comers. d. Equip drive with an emergency manual lowering system. 26. Standard Drive Cabinet: INCLINED LIFT SPECIFICATION 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 a. Cabinet: 520 mm (20-1/2 in.) wide by 1053 mm (41-1/2 in.) high by 270 mm (10 5/8 in.) b. Cabinet door is key locked and monitored with an electrical cutout safety switch. c. Provide an integrated lockable main disconnect switch and breaker on the drive cabinet. 27. Compact Drive Cabinet with Separate Control Box: a. Compact drive cabinet will house all mechanical drive system components and shall be located at the end of the tube system. b. Controller box will contain all the electrical components of the drive system and be located up to 6 M (20 feet) away from the compact drive. Control box dimensions are 305 mm (12 in.) wide by 610 mm (24 in.) high by 284 mm (11-1/4 in.) c. Provide an integrated lockable mains disconnect and breaker in the compact drive control box. 28. Guide Rail: a. Construct of two 51 mm (2 in.) diameter steel tubes spaced 600 mm_(23-5/8 in.) apart vertically. Tubes will run parallel to the stairs and horizontal to landings throughout the length of travel. b. When negotiating a horizontal landing a third 51 mm (2 in.) diameter steel tube shall be added to the tube system to guide and stabilize platform. c. Tube system shall not protrude more than 125 to 150 mm (4-7/8 to 5-7/8 in.) from the wall. d. Suspension means contained in the tubes shall be a 8 mm (3/8 in.) diameter galvanized steel core wire rope with a breaking strength of 4300 kg (9460 pound). e. Locate overspeed safety at the bottom of the tube assembly and shall consist of a mechanical overspeed sensor and brake with electrical drive cut-out protection. f. Provide a final limit switch at the upper end of the tubes to stop the platform if it travels past the normal terminal stopping device. 29. Auxiliary Power. Provide battery back-up system for normal up / down lift operation during power failure for a minimum period of 1/2 hour with rated load. 30. Platform Storage Beyond Upper/Lower Landings: a. Platform shall travel in the folded position beyond the upper landing at the top stair nose to a remote parking position away from the stairs. b. Platform shall travel in the folded position beyond the lower landing to a remote parking position. Provide with a ramp extension for this configuration. 31. Final Limit Switch at Lower Landing: Platform will land over a flight of stairs and will have a final lower limit switch. INCLINED LIFT SPECIFICATION 7 1 32. Steel Support Posts for Guide Rail System: Provide 65 by 65 mm (2- 1/2 by 2-1/2 in.) hollow structural steel tubular posts to support the guide rails. 33. In-Fill Safety Panels: Provide a filler panel system to act as a barrier where existing handrails are removed and there is no wall behind the lift. Filler panels between the support posts shall be between 864 mm and 965 nun (34 and 38 in.) above the stair nosing. a. Steel Screen Fill Panels: Supports posts with steel mesh infill. b. Filler Panel Mounting Brackets: Brackets welded to support posts to allow for a barrier panel system supplied by others. 1) Filler Panel provided by others: C. Steel Tube Filler: Provide additional 51mm (2 in.) diameter steel tubes added to the guide rail system for aesthetics or to create a further safety barrier with a maximum 152 mm (6 in.) opening between tubes. Pedestrian Handrail Integrated with Guide Rail: 34_ A third rail acting as a handrail shall be added where existing handrails are either removed or blocked by the lifting equipment. 35. The top of the handrail gripping surface shall be between 864 and 965 Mm (34 and 38 inches) above the stair nosing and have a smooth gripping surface 38 mm (1-1/2 in.) in diameter. 36. Handrail shall be in the same vertical plane as the guide rail system. 37. Handrails shall be mounted to the tube assembly and shall not be interrupted by newel posts, or other construction elements or obstructions. Call Stations: 38. Provide a keyed call station at each serviced landing that will automatically And off if left unattended for over 2 minutes. 39. Call stations, 24 V low voltage with four illuminated 51 by 51 mm (2 by 2 in.) square membrane touch sensitive buttons: one touch platform fold, one touch platform unfold and two directional call and send buttons. 40. Provide call stations with Smart-Lite Technology to prompt the user with the next sequential step of operation. Call station buttons will emit an audible "beep" when pushed to confirm button activation to the user. 41. Provide intermediate stops between the upper and lower landings at the following locations: a. As indicated on the Drawings. b. G. 42. Call stations shall equipped for: a. Keyed Operation. b. Keyless operation. INCLINED LIFT SPECIFICATION 8 43. 44. Provide constant pressure Attendant Call buttons on each call station. Call Station Mounting: a. Lower and intermediate landing call station. 1) Provide surface mounted call station. 2) Provide flush mounting call station painted finish collars to trim all call stations that are recessed into the walls. b. Upper landing call station. 1) Provide surface mounted call station on guide rail. 2) Surface mount on wall. 3) Provide flush mounting call station painted finish collars to trim all call stations that are recessed into the walls. c. Provide free-standing mounting pedestals for call stations located as follows: 1) Lower landing. 2) Intermediate Landing. 3) Upper landing. Additional Safety or Code Requirements 45. Wall Mounted Audio Visual Alerts: Provide with adjustable volume control that sound while the lift is in operation and are visible by pedestrian traffic from all flights and landings. 46. Building Fire Alarm Integration: Coordinate with Section 13650 Building Fire Alarm System to connect the lift control system with the building fire alarm system. If the lift is not in operation when the building fire alarm system is activated power will be cut to the lift preventing use during fine evacuation. If the lift is in use when the building fire alarm system is activated, the lift shall only allow the passenger to travel to the designated landing with the emergency exit. Finish Environment Requirements: 47. Design and fabricate lift to manufacturer's standard design for indoor location. 48. Stainless Steel Components: Design and fabricate lift using the following: a. Guide rails shall be supplied in stainless steel. b. Handrails shall be supplied in stainless steel. C. Support towers shall be supplied in stainless steel. d. Drive box shall be supplied in stainless steel. e. Wall mounted audio visuals shall be supplied in stainless steel. f. Platform sensing plate shall be supplied in stainless steel. g. Fasteners for rail assembly and anchoring shall be supplied in stainless steel. 49. Design and fabricate lift to manufacturer's standard design for outdoor location. INCLINED LIFT SPECIFICATION 9 J a. Lift to include all modifications recommended by manufacturer for reliable performance in outdoor climate of lift installation site. b. Provide an outdoor weatherproofing package including zinc rich primer on steel surfaces, weather-resistant sealant on the electrical components, stainless steel or plated fasteners and a weatherproofed stainless steel or zinc plated drive box. C. Platform control cover shall be fabricated of a Silver Grey injection-molded polymer. 50. Painting: After pretreating paint with electrostatically applied and baked powder coat as follows: a. Fine Textured Satin Grey (RAL 7030). b. Custom color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's RAL color chart, 2.3 EMERGENCY EVACUATION DEVICE Portable evacuation chair, Garaventa "Evacu-Trac" with steel storage enclosure: 1. Capacity: 1 person, 136 kg (300 lbs.) with minimum 1.5 times safety factor. 2. Maximum Stair Angle: 40 degrees. 3. Speed Governor: Piston brake. 4. Brake: By manual mechanical brake, attendant must release for descent. 5. Surface Mount Cabinet: a. Steel cabinet and door panel. Available only in Satin Grey, left hinged only. b. Size: Height (1151mm (45-3/8 in.), width 508 mm (20 in.), depth 279 mm (l l in.) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. Verify electrical rough-in is at correct location. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. INCLINED LIFT SPECIFICATION 10 33 INSTALLATION Install platform lifts in accordance with in compliance with regulatory requirements specified and the manufacturer's instructions. Install system components and connect to building utilities. Accommodate equipment in space indicated. Startup equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Adjust for smooth operation. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Perform tests in compliance with regulatory requirements specified and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. Schedule tests with agencies and Architect, Owner, and Contractor present. 3.5 PROTECTION Protect installed products until completion of project. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION INCLINED LIFT SPECIFICATION 11 SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Table of Contents: SECTION V .................................................................................................................................... i CONTRACT BOND .....................................................................................................................1 CONTRACT ..............................................................................................................•................... 3 CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT ..................................................... 6 PROPOSAL BOND ...................................................................................................................... 7 AFFIDAVIT .................................................................................................................................. 8 NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT ............................................................................................... 9 PROPOSAL .................................................................................................................................10 CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET .................................................................13 BIDDER'S PROPOSAL ...............................................................................................•.............14 SectionV.doc Page i Revised: 7/22/2008 THE PROSURE GROUP INC. I October 18, 2010 t City of Clearwater 100 S. Myrtle Ave. 3rd FL ' Clearwater, FL 33756 Contractor: Khors Construction, Inc. ' Project: 10-0042-PR - Beach Lifeguard Station Remodel Bond #: 0543899 Amount: $ 536,127.52 1 Gentlemen: ' We have executed the captioned band(s) on behalf of Khors Construction, Inc. in favor of City of Clearwater. Please note that we have not dated the bond(s) or the Power of Attorney. The copy of the contract we received was not dated and as the bond(s) guarantee(s) the contract, they should not be dated prior to the ' contract. Please accept this letter as authorization to date the enclosed Performance and/or Payment bond(s), as well as ' the attached Power of Attorney for the captioned project. Please date these items concurrently with the contract date. Please do not hesitate to contact our office should you have any questions in this regard. Thank you. Sincerely, Allegheny Casualty Company r David B. Shick President Attorney-In-Fact for Surety 7217 Benjamin Road, Tampa, FL 33634 813.243.1110 PHONE 1 81 3.243.1 109 FAX I contractbonds@prosuregroup.com EMAIL www.prosuregroup.com THE PROSURLGROUP INC. This is the, front page of the performance/payment bond issued in compliance with Florida Statute Chapter 255.05 Bond Number: 0543899 Surety in which bond's written: Allegheny Casualty Company Local Address: One Network Center, 20` Floor Newark, New Jersey, 07102 Local Phone Number: 262-912-6595 Contractor Name: Khors Construction, Inc. Address: 12222 Anne Kenia Drive Thonotosassa, FL 33592 Phone: 813 728-3689 Owner Name: Cif of Clearwater Address: 100 S. Myrtle Ave. 3rd Floor Clearwater, FL 33756 Phone: Obligee Name: Same as Owner Address: Phone: ( ) Contract Number: __ .- 10-0042-PR Description: Project p Remodel an addition to Lifeguard Station Project Address: 180 Gulfview, Clearwater FL 33767 Legal description of property: This is the front page of the bond. All other pages are subsequent regardless of preprinted numbers. 7217 Benjamin Road, Tampa, FL 33634 813.243.1110 PHONE 1813.243.1109 FAX I contractbonds@prosuregroup.com EMAIL www.prosuregroup.com 1 BOND NUMBER: 0543899 CONTRACT BOND STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF HILLSBOROUGH KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we KHOR'S CONSTRUCTION, INC. Contractor and ALLEGHENY CASUALTY COMPANY (Surety) whose home address is ONE NETWORK CENTER, 20TH FLOOR. NEWARK, NEW JERSEY 07102 HEREINAFTER CALLED THE "Surety", are held and firmly bound into the City of Clearwater, Florida (hereinafter called the "Owner") in the penal sum of: FIVE HUNDRED THIRTY-SIX ' THOUSAND ONE HUNDRED TWENTY-SEVEN DOLLARS AND FIFTY-TWO CENTS ($536,127.52) for the payment of which we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, ' successors, and assigns for the faithful performance of a certain written contract, dated the aSday of W-0wey, , 2010, entered into between the Contractor and the City of Clearwater for: BEACH LIFEGUARD STATION REMODEL 10-0042-PR a copy of which said contract is incorporated herein by reference and is made a part hereof as if fully ' copied herein. NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION ARE SUCH, that if the ' Contractor shall in all respects comply with the terms and conditions of said contract, including the one-year guarantee of material and labor, and his obligations thereunder, including the contract documents (which include the Advertisement for Bids, Form of Proposal, Form of Contract, Form of ' Surety Bond, Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions and Technical Specifications) and the Plans and Specifications therein referred to and made a part thereof, and such alterations as may be made in said Plans and Specifications as therein provided for, and shall indemnify and save harmless the said Owner against and from all costs, expenses, damages, injury or conduct, want of care or skill, negligence or default, including patent infringements on the part of the said Contractor agents or employees, in the execution or performance of said contract, including errors in the plans ' furnished by the Contractor, and further, if such "Contractor" or "Contractors" shall promptly make payments to all persons supplying him, them or it, labor, material, and supplies used directly or indirectly by said Contractor, Contractors, Sub-Contractor, or Sub-Contractors, in the prosecution of the work provided for in said Contract, this obligation shall be void, otherwise, the Contractor and Surety jointly and severally agree to pay to the Owner any difference between the sum to which the said Contractor would be entitled on the completion of the Contract, and that which the Owner may ' be obliged to pay for the completion of said work by contract or otherwise, & any damages, direct or indirect, or consequential, which said Owner may sustain on account of such work, or on account of the failure of the said Contractor to properly and in all things, keep and execute all the provisions of said contract. Page 1 1 CONTRACT BOND (2) And the said Contractor and Surety hereby further bind themselves, their successors, executors, administrators, and assigns, jointly and severally, that they will amply and fully protect the said Owner against, and will pay any and all amounts, damages, costs and judgments which may be recovered against or which the Owner may be called upon to pay to any person or corporation by ' reason of any damages arising from the performance of said work, or of the repair or maintenance thereof, or the manner of doing the same or the neglect of the said Contractor or his agents or servants or the improper performance of the said work by the Contractor or his agents or servants, or ' the infringements of any patent rights by reason of the use of any material furnished or work done; as aforesaid, or otherwise. And the said Contractor and Surety hereby further bind themselves, their successors, heirs, executors, administrators, and assigns, jointly and severally, to repay the owner any sum which the ' Owner may be compelled to pay because of any lien for labor material furnished for the work, embraced by said Contract. ' And the said Surety, for the value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terns of the contract or to the work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligations on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications. ' IN TEST O WHEREOF, witness the hands and seals of the parties hereto this day of bG 2010 ATTEST: ' WITNESS: ' COUNT IGNED: 1) h ? David B. Shick FL Resident Aqent KHOR'S CONSTRUCTION, INC. 11y: Allegheny Casualty Company SURETY,,,,,?•ly- ::._. By: ATTORNEY-IN 1L David B. S P' t4 T ell .9 Page 2 ' KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That ALLEGHENY CASUALTY COMPANY, a corporati on organized and existing pursuant to the laws of the State of Pennsylvania, and having its principal office in the City of Newark, New Jersey, does hereby constitute and appoint 1 Tampa, FL. its true and lawful attorney(s)-in-fact to execute, seal and deliver for and on its behalf as surety, an and all bonds and undertakings, contracts of indemnity and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, which are or may he allowed, required or permitted by law, stature, rule, regulation contract or otherwise, and the execution of such instrument(s) in pursuance of these presents, shall be as binding upon the said ALLEGHENY ;bASUALTY COMPANY, as fully and amply, to all intents and purposes, as if the same had been duly executed and acknowledged by its regularly elected officers at its principal office. This Power of Attorney is executed, and may berevoked,.:pursuantto and by authority of Article 3 Secaon 3, of the By-Laws adopted by the Board of Directors of ALLEGHENY CASUALTY COMPANY at a meeting called and held oil the)-th day of February., 1974. The ewer of attorney is granted under and.by authority of the following resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of ALLEGHENY CASUALTY COMPANY at a meeting duly held on the 15th day of August, 2000. , that (1) ' torevoke RESOLVED appointments ?f, Attorneys-in Fad President, Y agents with power and ALLEGHENY authority as defined or limited in their respective power to appoint, and veers ofatwrney' and to execute on be calf of. the Company and affix the Company's seal thereto, bonds, undertakings :recognizances, contrac:.ts of?indemnity and other written obligations in:the nitrite thereof of. related theretw and (2) any such. Officers of the Company may. appoint and revoke'thC appointments of . joint-control custodians, agent for acceptance of process, and Attorneys-in=fact; with authority to execute waivers and consent .on behalf of the Company, and (3) the signature o f any such Officer of ALI BGHENY CASUALTY COMPANY and: the Company seal inay be;affixed by facsirriile. to. any power of attorney or certificatioti given.for the execution af.any bond, undertaking, recognizance contract of indemnity or tither written obliggahbn in the nature thereof or related thereto, such siggnature and seals when so used whether heretol?ore or hereafter, bein hereby advpfed by the Company as the original signature of such officer andthe original seal of the Corapany,.to be valid and.binding uptm theompany with the same force and, effect as though manually. affixed. iK On this 12th day of November 2009, before me came the individual who executed the Preceding instrument to me personally known, and, being by me duty sworn, said the he is the therein describKi and authorized ofFtcer of the ALLEGEG CASUALTY COMPANY; that the seal affixed to said instrument is the Corporate Seal of said Coittpatty; that: the said .Corporate Seal and his signature were duly affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said Company. OAR IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand affixed my Official Seal, Gat the City of Newark, New Jersey the day and year first above written. O A NOTARY. PUBLIC OF NEW JERSEY _ CERTMICAnON My Commission: Expires Nov. 21, 2010 V dt?:W dersigtied-offia er'of ALLEGHENY CASUALTY COMPANY do hereby certify that I have compared the foregotng copy of the ' PcfCVek of Arte+t te>` tb3 afftt'gyj+ ,attd the copy of the Section of the By-laws of said Company as set forth in said Power of Attorney, with the ORIGINALS ON Ri THE HOME-QZFIQ_F OF SAID COMPANY, and that the same are correct transcripts thereof, and of the whole of the said originals, and that the said Power o€,"o:rney hajnQbeeri_fevuRedand is now in full force and effect ' I1?.T1 S f r1O i7AVryTi1M4;UP, I have hereunto set my hand this day of ' Assistant Secretary 1 CONMCT ' This CONTRACT made and entered into this 41.5thday of jX 2010 by and between the City of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal corporation, hereinafter designated as the "City", and ' KHOR'S CONSTRUCTION INC, of the City of THONOTOSAS§A. County of That the parties to this contract each in consideration of the undertakings, promises and agreements on the part of the other herein contained, do hereby undertake, promise and agree as follows: ' The Contractor, and his or its successors, assigns, executors or administrators, in consideration of the sums of money as herein after set forth to be paid by the City and to the Contractor, shall and will at ' their own cost and expense perform all labor, fimush all materials, tools and equipment for the following: BEACH LIFEGUARD STATION REMODEL 10-M2-PR IN THE AMOUNT OF: FIVE HUNDRED THIRTY-SIX THOUSAND ONE HUNDRED TWENTY-SEVEN DOLLARS AND FIFTY-TWO CENTS ($536,127.52) ' In accordance with such proposal and technical supplemental specifications and such other special provisions and drawings, if any, which will be submitted by the City, together with any ' advertisement, instructions to bidders, general conditions, proposal and bond, which may be hereto attached, and any drawings if any, which may be herein referred to, are hereby made a part of this contract, and all of said work to be performed and completed by the contractor and its successors and assigns shall be fully completed in a good and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the City. If the Contractor should fail to comply with any of the terms, conditions, provisions or stipulations as ' contained herein within the time specified for completion of the work to be performed by the Contractor, then the City, may at its option, avail itself of any or all remedies provided on its behalf and shall have the right to proceed to complete such work as Contractor is obligated to perform in ' accordance with the provisions as contained herein. THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS OR ITS SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS DOES HEREBY AGREE TO ASSUME THE DEFENSE OF ANY LEGAL ACTION WHICH MAY BE BROUGHT AGAINST THE CITY AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES ARISING OUT OF THIS CONTRACT AND FURTHERMORE, IN CONSIDERATION OF THE TERMS, STIPULATIONS AND CONDITIONS AS CONTAINED HEREIN, AGREES TO HOLD THE CITY FREE AND HARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES, COSTS OF SUITS, JUDGMENTS OR DECREES RESULTING FROM ANY ' CLAIMS MADE UNDER THIS CONTRACT AGAINST THE CITY OR THE CONTRACTOR OR THE CONTRACTOR'S SUB-CONTRACTORS, AGENTS, SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES RESULTING FROM ACTIVITIES BY THE AFOREMENTIONED 1 CONTRACTOR, SUB-CONTRACTOR, AGENT SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES. Paget 3 HILLSBOROUGH WITNESSETH: and State of FLORIDA hereinafter designated as the "Contractor". t 1 col,,cT In addition to the foregoing provisions, the Contractor agrees to conform to the following requirements: ' In connection with the performance of work under this contract, the Contractor agrees not to discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, sea, religion, color, or national origin. The aforesaid provision shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer, recruitment or recruitment advertising; lay-off or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employees or applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the provisions of the non-discrimination clause. The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all contracts hereunder, including contracts or agreements with labor unions and/or worker's representatives, except sub-contractors for standard commercial supplies or raw materials. It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence of this contract, and in the ' event that the work to be performed by the Contractor is not completed within the time stipulated herein, it is then further agreed that the City may deduct from such sums or compensation as may be due to the Contractor the sum of 11 -A day for each day that the work to be performed by the Contractor remains incomplete beyond the time limit specified herein, which sum of $1.000.00 oer &y„ shall only and solely represent damages which the City has sustained by reason of the failure of the Contractor to complete the work within the time stipulated, it being further agreed that this sum is ' not to be construed as a penalty but is only to be construed as liquidated damages for failure of the Contractor to complete and perform all work within the time period as specified in this contract. It is further mutually agreed between the City and the contractor that if, any time after the execution of this contract and the surety bond which is attached hereto for the fnithU performance of the terms and conditions as contained herein by the Contractor, that the City shall at any time deem the surety or sureties upon such performance band to be unsatisfactory or if, for any reason, the said bond ceases to be adequate in amount to cover the performance of the work the Contractor shall, at his or its own expense, within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice from the City to do so, firrnish an additional bond or bonds in such tern and amounts and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the City. If such an event occurs, no further payment shall be made to the Contractor under the terms and provisions of this contract until such new or additional security bond guaranteeing the faithful performance of the work under the terms hereof shall be completed and fimushed to the City in a form satisfactory to it. Page 4 r 1 0111 C (3) IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the patties to the eseement have hereunto set their hands and seals and have executed this Agreement, in duplicate, the day and year first above written. CITY OF CLEARWATER IN PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA By: -6, -U William B. Home, H City Manager Countersigned: 1 By. I F Hibbard, Mayor-Councilmetnber 11 1 (Conuactor must indicate whether tpo . Partnership, Company or Indivi(hual.) (The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principals name, his own name, and his tide, where the person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show his authority to bind the Win). pws t?'1a?5 J +f u4T'/o ?t. (Contractor) 11 By ?b r i X10 ?Scndrw? (SEAL Z", ? a ? -1 X- Rosemarie Call Assistant City Attorney 1 1 CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR M AL, PAYMENT TI N FORM) STATE OF ' COUNTY OF On this day personally appeared before me, the undersigned authority, duly authorized to ' administer oaths and take acknowledgments, , who after being duly sworn, deposes and says: ' That he is the Crnl ) of KHOR'S CON _ UCTION. INC. a Florida Corporation, with its principal place of business located at 12222 E KENIA A (herein, the "Contractor"). That the Contractor was the gencraa contractor under a coamact executed on the day of 201 with the CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, a municipal corporation, as ' Owner, and that the Contractor was to perform the construction of BEACH LIFEGUARD S'T'ATION REMODEL 1"W-FR ' That said work has now been completed and the Contractor has paid and discharged all sub-contractors, laborers and material men in eorinection with said work and there are no liens outstanding of any nature nor any debts or obligations that might booorne a lien or ice in connection with said work against the described property. That he is making this affidavit puasusnt to the requirements of Chapter 713, Florida Statutes, and upon consideration of the payment of C in full satisfaction and discbarge of said aoratract. That the Owner is hereby released fivm any claim which might arise out of said Contract. The word "liens" as used in this affidavit shall mean any and all arising under the operation of the Florida Mechanic's Lien Law as set forth in Chapter 713, Florida Statutes. Swam and subscribed to before me IOIOR'S CO $TRUCTION. M. AFF7ANT This day of , , 01 ' BY: NOTARY PUBLIC My Commission Expires: PRESIDENT PW 6 PR?? BCi?iD (Not to die fiWoul Ma cm0ed dw*js s gm*tal) ' ]MOWN ALL NM BY MUM PRVM Than vie, the tut k=Ped, Khors Construction, Inc. mpFkEjpjLatad Allegheny Caeual?L -Company ' aS qty, YAWS add w ^ One Net rk Center 20th FlWr Neaerk NJ 07102 boand ate held 84ad unto the CS y of , Flmid% in tbgsum of Ten Perc nt of Amount sid in Dollams ($ 10W of Did) (bejjMg a Mj0hdDM &10% ofOates tote) bid amaamQ ft ft paymwt . ' of which, we11 and truly to be made, -we bw&y jointly and mvenly band au&ve , our harts, - exeraato m a stvxxwnw a rA assipL ' The-eanditk m of&,-- above obli n is Pwh that ilftbe wed Pwyo& l of Khors Const r'uct i9n.,....Xnc ._ gun!;y,f0rvxASptCiM8r. 10-0042PR, Beach Life Guard Station Remodel Convertin 2 sto ild'n ' alt as stipulated in said PmpowL by daing alt wodc kddeoial tba0oin wmdawe with the > and speafficalions provided here, all wAk Pmdlas Cm*, w wogAW and *e causer awarded to the ' above nmed bidder, arad the said budder shall within ten days air nodose of said awod enter into a coMaM iswritiamg, and finwh ft =Wed PbdW=w= Bond with smety car =Wa to be approved by the City Mama4Pr, 63?= obKgado n Aid be voK otamim the same dwn be in fidl ice and virtue the full aimoamt of this Ptopw d Bann wa be paid to the City as s*alg ed or liquidated dmnWL ' Signed this 16thdayof September 2010 (gr ipe] YtrtsgI indiealevrhadwr Khors Construction, Inc. ?parbxwsbip, compmry or b)dMdmO 1 lbe pezon dpiag shalt, in hk own ha idM ?-fln lElvililtdipillft sy_ fc ) nmana, bis own mm and lb fi ft Title the persosw signing far s oorpoaagoq nnlst,by?afdwwd.sbowNs=&a* Allegheny Casualty Company to bind ft coxpan iorL id 8. Sick Atternoy in Fact/8L Raaident Agent 1 - SecdcaVAne PW7 of 14 >tmrts? 7lyd AM ' y•d tr£L8LB6LZL nuan aaallava sman ni i ndec 1 JZ ?t ?f r; ?e 1[- 1[ 1t IC 1[ ?C. 1L, 1t Cro be filW in and at wabd if to bidder is a am @ood* M7E of ) COU M Of M LO A K6 r i 16 f mftAiab being dnly swam, deposes and up 6d hmi& is a earpowsitian awwod and m&ft nssw and by vhU,e of ft lows of t o State of Skrida, and having its pinta ?WE= • n ,W- ana c Stu & Number a? CO" Sam APliasnt fkzdw up tort , ]w is vhth the rmaos+ds, aiislmtle boobs and by4mm of - "M of CMlfo 26=) ASasnt fiutha that a r Yi o r ' ?, is f c c4 MGM% NIene) (fide ?^ of fat oerpa milak is ia1?rys-?^dbodaed to t hr Kh OV- for se?d aorpv mdm by vista of {Male m rvvieiall of by low at a Raeoldian of the Dowd of Dicaalom Kby Rcaobd of A#llaet Swam to bWbm rare tNs /,(0,7?dwj of ?'4e7r mm of Nolmy Title or mak, and Send No., if ow I9d wvADa POp I d t4 11 " ': 7I1 am 20 lb. NoMKy Public 9TAGO A. HARPER W4 COMMWpW N EE010? ap"a jMV 1a. 2014 ??Y'P?r d+Y r•M ?.rrvwsr,+r:urY>•µ .rtwt1* Y yn..?n kY`t? ro +nW'f'-yrrnur^r. ?.-.rr .awfvt!Wc.»t «.vw?y.ye.yyl w^Y ?w?-in+.? ^_I i ?'xu., r..r it •, R,; , .w. ?,rs. 6 . I ? p . 17 f tc-. . 1 _ f, r . POW i W, ? - r r h } F,'s• ;t,ll •?'vl Ala„ ;' 01 a op u¢ yen a iced. and exrigg pursuant to ft laws of 1! ¢: !h! 1?4: # ij it"d, iA` .?dp hd you*t Irwd'Vpojnt ',T'M:li„+...n.?;..w >:{r• ,, •. .w ,..A.w n•'r rrrJ('I.. r..,a...•r........-a ^ .,.. ...... a . .................... Tanlia, FL to 'xe uoet anti deliv" :, ....... ... ... ..? ?? ? Unt w, its trit®amYt.1¢wfytl tuttrtthavity.gh-fact and tide ngs?, contrac of . inde am > "thaw f, h aft or be its mmry .. t Mall bonds s?untre t and sOParo ?dttcc the". ? r? ptm C?AL1Y othmi CO??tPpiNX mat aq?intentsal? putaiiews or" if . ?' as 6 u the Said A Y, to a the aashe had.bui dal exacu hss !>?. Y nd acknowledged by its regularly elected officers at its Pd? rpitl y ip y eld a?ntilte Articth dale f 3 of F?ehn try. 1974 BY -Laws adopted by the i3oatd.of Direcuh Pow" o AI.LMW CAe A1?4 OO1VipANlata? FWMMMcailed and hp 1 1 On Ens 1 ray of November 2009. swots, 'ow AW be is the.' therein . said.. ' it the Corps n"o 91111 Of tied Co ny. 1 befo me came the indiv' ual who executed instrument t0 Ire rally known, and. being by ttte duly ded and autho= officer of the y CASUALTY T* AW that the seal. aMxed to said Company; that the said Corporate Seal B his shgnature were duly affix by order of the Board of Directors of IN TESTIMONY WHMBOF, I have hereum sat my hand affixed my Official Seal, at the City of Newark, New Jersey tie day and year first above written. { l R. NOTAAY 1 Ia k78't kG' 4 ppwe of attorney is granted under atxl by authority of the following resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of ALLEGHENY CASUALTY C?ANY at a tttaeting dply'held an the 15th day of August, 2000. RHBD!<r1MD. that (1) the President, Vice President, or Secretary of ALLEGHENY CASUALTY COMPANY shall have the power to appoint, and h1 the a?ppolaments of. Auorneys4n-Fatk or sges* with pourer and authority as defined or limited in their respective powers of attorney, and to e>ttioale on belyaIf of the Company and affix dw Company's seal thereto, kings, reeognirxncesl contracts of indemnity and other thh in the nature tlletnof of reed thereto. and (2) auy athah Company may appoint and revoke the appointments of Mkm Mans agents for acceptance of process and Attorneys-irr Ow"Ahafu!drIatority to execute waivers and consents on behalf of the oft pahy; and (3) the signature of any aucb tf"tcer of RLDF3HENY CASUALTY COMPANY and the Company seal may be affixed by facsimile to guy power of attorney or certiflcalion ggiven for the execution of any bond undertaking, recognizance contract of indemnity or other written obli n in the nature thereof or related thereto each ssiiggnnssor and seals ;;Wm zoo used whetter heretofore or hereafter, bei hereby adopted by the ?y as the original sig hthau hre of such ot?icer wxrtbe original seal of the Company, to be valid and binding upon the Company with the same fDroe C act as thou b nha IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, ALLEGHENY CASUALTY COMPANY has caused this instrument to be signed and its corpomle seat to be affixed by its authorized officer, this 12th day of November, A.D. 2009, ALLEGHENY CASUALTY COMPANY STATE OF NEW JERSEY County of Essex Secretary A NOT. Y BLICOI+,.NEWW JERSE My etntlisaP iogY B,x?tita?t NOV- 21.20L I hatre cotnpaar+atl the; copy, of the t?pk iq'tgi? ?o hey.,++?? ' b ORIGINALS ON ?r q? tI1C. {?Iala of t?, i-origipa? %Ailt that the. tald? l?wor Re ^ i'nlti;;f J, NON-COLLUSM e r. STATE OF FLORIDA ) LA)3L4 COUNTY OF 0 ' ??? ? 1??1n c S?•nc lis h berg, flmduly sworn deposesmd says thw he is 1 3 _ CGS+Cknf__ of Kf?Af YI J rlicridh 1C. -- -- the party the or B' • that h such Bid ie ? and no! eoDumve or sham: rz?lnng heesmft Pmpasd ?. 1 i fiber said bidder is not fiaatmk* hemo ed in or othmwise affiliftd in a businm way with mp? ocher bidder on the same confct; tbA said bidder bias not colluded, oonq*ed, co mived, or armed, directly or iudheady, with any bidders or paxon, to put in a Ilbaat bid or the such other person 9ha11 refiaera s from bidding, and has not in eW aoaanaer, din+o* or i Jy, sought by apemnew or coollumm or ' communicatim or con&mwas, wA& w4y prxalort, to dot fibs bid price or affiant at alter odd bidder, or to ' fix mW ove&md, profit or and a> nR of said bad prioq or that of any odw bidder, or to seem say s advoe asst the City of Cam, Florida, or any person or persons iaotereaI d m the pr+nposed contract; vmd the all swb=emb contained iu said proposal or bad ors true; and Andm r, that such bidder 1 has not dizm* or indirectly submitted this bad, or the oaotm t are4 or dimdgad isAmmetion or data relative thmeto to any assoradan or to any mrmbec or agmla duseof. 1 Afflant 6 Sworn to and subaeribed bedfs the this /? der of S 6&w 20 /U. ' STACIR A. HARPER •" MY COMMISSION 0 EE010197 Notary Public EXPOWS July 19. 2014 poi G7 .eon ?i a 1 " ?s 1 E Secaa?V dvc P809014 Revind: 7122fAM 1 1 1 1 1 3 t:1 Cl) To THN MY OF ORARWATHR, nA)MA, fior Demek lei qp d 9buim Am" d - PROJE r : 10-" R and doing mA other vmk mMm W dweio, aH is =mdaim wide the conuw , mtaed Bakh Lifcgmwl Station RcumM Dwah" mnd rwhaic01 SP=ii'icrrd= dowaWr by fowler Amlodates AvdAocK Ins E aty Udder mmt lades 1rtice of the Brae that eves his papa d be awaplod altd the domwmft ? siped by the bidder b.rbon. m sued is mob and by these o awbmrized to do ab an bedWof the O? Of CJalrwater, Fl rW% dm* no mob almd or =rime abH be oor a bWft contract vvi&m a cwdfimk f= the Fh? Dhocom drat >m& we mailable to aaver d a oast of *o ,wank 1D be does, QrwilhM dla eppaovW of ft City Aamay as to the Am mtd 1edly of** aanime- and all the pe bm2 t d 0=m is eeloting drsoft havimg bm mp mmM by maid Clly AtmrrW, sad sash bidder is hweby chwpd witb du wfim The signer of the Proper so bidder, abo deahea drat do a* pumm4 pwwum, oompaay or pubas tc c ?e 1 ?.? ?derv.?ae Pqp 10 K 14 i J 1C 1 f. (2) 1 If dre fmagoing Proposal shall be acc d by the Chy of Clean, Florida, and the iurdet red dWl fa l to aaefe a satisfeodory eoarttaet as owed In dw Mvatnment bamin attached, IM the City,amy, at its option dewmnne &I to mdodpad has sbatmd med the eontact, and the uqm tb% Proposal ' - sW be mull and voK and the cdttified do* or banal aooompoying tires Proposal, mall be ftftted to t become the psapoaty of the City of Ckwsraw, Fleaida, and the fun amount of said chock shall be reel by the Chn or if the Pwpowl Hoard be Own, Se fill amount of such band cell be paid to the 1 city. as sdpuhod or ligtridmd damages; odu wiv% dre bond or certified cbwk aceo?npanying this Proposal, or the autos of said check, doll be tamed to The tmderaigned as s edW herein. ? r. 1 1 I? 1 i] Attached herdo is a bond or ceili$ed clteok on Dank, hr the sum of T ,C % L -A 0 , o?A ? (bcam a winimum? of 10% of Contra mes total bid enoount>. (S The fall mum and residam of all persons and pwma inw meftd in the oang yid are as foiloars: (if emporation, give the nines and addmsses of On President and Secretary. If Sam ar partnership, the names and addmsses of the numabers or pact om Ma Bidder shell hot not only bis Hoare but also to name of aM person with whom bidder has any type of egmexxmnt wb eby such person's enticbm eM en*bymM or puasdrle bena k whAw ?, meftdalma3>, a$CAtt, suppler or empacyer is con6ngmt Won the mard of the contract to the bidder. Srgnwkov of J)Wder: (The bAkw mot ire whc#b or Mvi&Wa L 1C $eaicnVA" Prpm 11 of 14 Revised:7/d9/ Wg MAIMS: AI.JDRMS1S: r?eos?. (3) The pemon saw shall, in his oven hmW*itieg ap tits Priaa:ipatl's name, his own Mme and his title. Where the peom sib, for a aampamd on is adm r *m the P reMwt or Vice-President, he must, by aff l vit, show his the 1 : p By: 6 c v5eAnj u Mde: J rcf JI:t-, B= m Aft= off'HMar City and state: 1)001012?4?51 Zip Code 5 2 AM, 201_ Dated at ?I-_, .. _? this day of -P, le / 1f IC: ?c ?c r: ?e ?r ?c ?r. ?c rc L 1r 1[. MMSEDW PRQMCT: Beach Lifeguard Nation Redd - PROJECT M. 10400-PR Admowle'dgmant is bmrby mom of tise fo&mmg addeodo rwmved since i of Pions algid Spwficationa Addendum No. I Dole. -.? ( 0 Adm.*. No. Dabs: 2 d UlBoer) . Adds W= No. nom: 1713110 N Addendm No. Date: 0 A Addmodum No. S Dabs: Adden&m No. ?P Dater Q Adder No. D@W 6 Addmadum M. DO: Addendum No. Dale: AdamdomNo. Dales: Addmdum M. Daley X?Y? ?f t.?e?joh ? C ?? ( . ? (3ig11atures f Ofiricex) Cc$? i SMSMV.&C Page 13 of 14 ROAM* 7rzvl 08 Biddwf PMPoa F,Adl&rA= No. 7 MW 1f . PI?dalt Beach LffeguoA 8lallon EW th? UNIT FINCE TOTAL CM> hmWn of the Beech Llfeaumd SmSW RWIbde4 p, Na 1049e2-PR eam 2 MM lo 5 spry bWldhq w d as meaiohd Rrwo coI I Par I 119 lodtrlkel gmdkolbrr and el *am gems nd lfwkm d In b8 «qu oMn Nobld bob* 1 LS 361,M-10 5 361,763.10 G1v11 saw Cutl>rp nNnlwal « W,nWele wb m as db Rp 1000 s 2.50 S 4 000.00 Irw1tl1 Y construclbrl brr?q rle wa farwtrq d rl. Blarh L9NMuerd Sm11mn alp = dahll W4 imp, down am 025 LF 4.00 S 3.000.00 WA moo". mbood per the dbaCloo of to owner Im Vle vkb* at Beach WWk and appraravlabry IBM R of aid" NopM Bldg. 1 LS 3,000-00 3,000.00 Cbs ft m p kwk4 sabrdbq b wom bw anal pal mm neoeasaiq "Dow slesWq for a moplaM apmmw Mallon 2"mm at 0» &W of to poem Caordhlab warty wlh M Ownah Ingabn - I -,-en 1 L8 2,500.00 2 500.00 Ao m rid m0 ft ftU"g ealrh main p1oYMb MUM yeobdl haft Mound ankh ba In guib *oft corntruoOoll Period 1 LS $ 1,200.00 $ 1,x00.00 Inspplrasrtranobrmdrain M1dIIdfIIBfMigaa 15 LF S ?. aavemperd" phm LF S 40. S x.000.00 FwAeae:werr.nlle.e?aaeklrlm OAO.TaM7rdunaan« 3 EA 400.00 i 1 x00.00 9 EA S 200.00 1 mo.00 Glade sM as ftmwaq b,haW adalna galoe at camoole 24mmbo OHIO, prg, , 4 bm"A own. Waft ebb. I* mom new oonrele mom mm h Basch WHIN of COW A bffiaa; MWft rprlolen Wft mW all aarltrae0mn pbb iA BeMdI NIW hMlal amnaabwlal snnruNld 63ar rweNf 2509 at i 7.00 17 500.00 1' ebelrl W ON" P =WD call ands and ph= 2 4mch pmlclimn bmu 150 LF 5.00 750.00 1.lr electrical corduk 1 LF S 5.17 S 2• epmriG61 ameldWt LF i §,L A, ehatiheel aon&A 1 LF S 7.00 70.00 Rabwmlaw M el dlalwbed area and mWq smYaal x' rm*Q led Nq down &Idb?dea repah d h% p6- apbmn m W*p Bnhb ON m nbpMaMy t LS 5.000-00 5.000.00 1 2 3 a 5 8 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 _ I?006-0's Aftmom 10 17 10 19 lh t LS 55.000.00 5 65 .00 StaW al Meditw*4 as dhaded by Vw d school a dmor almaioaee 4 S 000. S xi .00 SARAWl dbma 1.17 5 Lg 1096 «9ubTalal Hnne 18 9 11C x .45 TCTAL CONSTRUCTION maTs ppm. 1-1T ph. 1096 .57(v / 7. s1 CONTRACTOR: KHOR6 CONSTRUCTION. M. 122$2 Arms VAMM Dom ThenelplmabA 33582 /O e10DERSTOTAL : S 3u, ?.! 7. sz 91 'B TOT ann Iw.al.d „,?, THE BIDDERS TDTAL ABOVE 16 HIS BID BASED ON HIS UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SW PRICES AND THE WWTED M ANTmEa REQUIRED. THIS FIGURE 19 PM THE INPORMATM ONLY AT THETIEM) OF OPENING BIDS TNF Crrl WILL MAKE THE TAWLATKM FROM THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SW PRICfi BID. IF THERE 19 AN BRROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDOER IT SHALL BE CHANGES AS ONLY 111E UNIT PRICES AND LUMP UN PRUM.9 SHALL G06fEiiN 10% axlbgMM shad be Wame WO upon obw rarwlN M the orroraer fMarYOllwwl aaeps drade nb1 hwMlded h dIa b9 «qurMMba r• We Owner, wrfeln epgroal by me awoM Mfr dm/ addllW W aoepe drWM iw V1e albstlm a 010109M aM6galq. mr ruMa nel drtrad ah4 ee rearnrl b In owner upon d ow wA of the pwahme ardor shorl.